Skip to main content

Full text of "Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences"

See other formats 


satatae Pr rey Wy RIC ee ee pipe hee 
tue eb? ae a OO othe 
arian’ 1 ddd ad tt added hod ‘ 

daediduta Veda Vip dhe aanded de Veae 
hs SAME RTM CRP NR 


PAN LAD Ded ald Le Peet 


" EMR CPM ee Se we Cea a ‘ ' 4 
hwas aa ede Le vA a: ude Wedd dia a hd at Cue * 
bege ha tag bo 04 ' 4 ' ta ye. 
as ‘a Cee aay Wek tae) thVadlaae a4 ” i] ‘bade ere 
werk” sa ie cd om) Vaedehee & bOON OL wae WARK ANN On ARTO MR CN OR OORT RMR NO RH hha + 
au eb vel we ee ee eas | Wap th MoU tod A te ik at AT Db ete TR YM AS Ste Oe Os TR ARN NWA DM eT Wh wf DO) Tae RY 5, che 
Pee ew eer mame er eee Bry eae ene Tr UD sr eH WO Oe Se had Led ht ed ee BAG sales 
Pin ee a ee Te ee ee rt DOOR RAO UCR Od AC Oe 
N ve pee ee aa OE Re Eee eA hae Le ae Bp ee ae a be Bd abe bY a dldedlie bead a a 
ed Peed PA eet alee Peete WANE RR HICH DCM IN TTR tata dH TL ae tea a WB Wed ea ae elie eb ' 
‘ 4 al ADA ANISM ONAL MA 
ae 


ee Ad tt VOOtr er thea ee Paw) PA ae eae Eee ee ELE EE) OW lee ih eae 
aad Q a) ORAL DOE CORR OLR COR Rane OE ea ENN 
x , 


’ ere Ta te ee | Re RAT it ne GRAS RIO 4a 
; y ORS rer Wm a WRN ICN MCR RN rT CNN SUCH R ey 

' ra " La a desvetaea MAS) Ped { Se ea a alee ag bed a ely radeaul DIN Coe Ik 
Nees. . 4 7) PERO ESS MION HRN) WP TA THY A yt td sil a abot ast tg a pacites iy 
wr ed kD ates bol et } VAM gis ye hal ea RCs POOR eo 

) > 2. yew ia ah baad 7 aaa JE Ty a hea New ach d aden aes OU dia dip 

, a awit 2 hw ‘ LAs daeee Aa aa ARLE pen AS BLN VD ty Gy 
, Yad t 


4 phen 4 art dtd aries a - & ; va Re, ‘ 
iar RN te he leg yt wi ea Ae, 7 ' ee er ee ee i ee a Bee rc a UREA COE N 
, ‘anne N vu A idehd 2 24 Dal ey te A NOOO CE ATC HOA Oe AUR NAS ALMA NA A 
" a , Vite eet) ru ‘ 
5 : 
' Anti SRA IR LE Ome 4 84 
bs ANS ATER EAM TR AE Ro hue 


Lie £4 OC ee ee daa ae 
) Dae of ei he 


ed a aioe at eh " wan) YL tee Hasy La tee GP 
Pra wave ey " Pasay ah Ny | Ma ede en ala hae hah 
rv a? A i it Tee 4 EUW ANN raha 

) 


LEA ae hae Le ACU SS AAA eat whith et bo dep eer ® 


Py aed te hed MEL Ad edd PTO eR REY wee hye Db ge Be le Dae tt bu 

NY Nina hay a Ne BE WAR COR COC eee RA 

DA RN CO IC RC Ad dp Uw VL td IY HE Med Poe Ate nat 
wr a 4 : a 


Lae aa att hea baie arnt: WT MAE Ar ytd sa 

A SACRA RR MRR ROL a Kad ee) ate vag 
Stidd ela debs D ped Pe Py Ghee Te WDD Pet idaw Qed dd 
OOO. OCLC Laer sd tae wa 

de Va hoe eal?) PRO ete 


SO CCE, 
MANA a 

y atee tury 
NGS tl 
var ale a 
Phd 


, sien 
eye 2% 


at ‘\ hey Sty 
ry KERR RY PCRS OCH REA RRL iY 
va waar “hha tte ry Ney , Ve aehaeterearkeaa ery 


) 4 
x 
: ; A ae ny aa » why 
a DORR KOO AWN a ae 


ae a'V 
Cae ay SUA 
3p MOND kas 
Resa GR 8 a 
"boi Gh 


PAN 


Lae bey hie rn | ei 
4 


eed a by ey 


. ‘i ‘whee 
eae ‘ 
wre Ma 


har) tas > ee 
we ) ahs he eib at 
S Wee 


i } Yoo gs 4 Ce: 
; ? 1 Gant PEN RRR: 
Ce te a Po deR 4h 1 he ate - 
rey? 4 Va aa ees 


VI de A 
Peed itd peed) 


He eehys 
1} 
. wt tit) 
1 ied 6 
bed Pedederd 
Cr ee 
‘ Mi Row bY 


\ 

“9 

aN 

iat 

ax eddie @ 

x f apy AP ged 

aa A ‘ ; 4 » la at , 

} : sie jae Vo MID eed gd Lk dd i ene 

atl He P d vude tt 48 4 ” * LAA aig chads thar awe lhe ka i ois a . sau eit Ce ety 

Wie-de elated Whey ¥) t. 1 ada. Fe} Cob Ste fee ie toed oh alana yea dla ad dee Sar Matin dons CED Rr?) 
Be Ne | 1d 49 dere? iaw det) of ie ee iad) bdewid ER, ee : 
ws eee “gs bale Tod me Gh Bete) ah hm eee i dd Leeds tad pide rd bad wh al) oe ava 

‘eas sia {isa saeidiad ‘ 44ie ibe Leis a he ee ee oe oe ee Te Bs 

vA i ven {* ia Bt data a HRC ESI A , 4nd VO a ed 1b te de@ de & a aia Sas peta 

aida 2! 4G ‘did i re were tee ‘ vie hig Ne Wat i eee eC Tk ee ee Ne ey DY Bad Meh Ld be panded de hed Sut debe 

Pa? ; } F 4 REMCCOR CLT MY ROOT OI CRA bt Hae ie. 
fa Fs Via dae ya ' 
LB, ! * 7 ‘ : 
ond rr ae | $49 
‘ a4 ed hd we Raed de 
‘ 5 Meta Sy sue aE bg eth ns Ltt bed dl pays Fad 
| P as ie tap LAP iG HUES bed ad aad dhs UR Sie 
Lore dA > ba yr weed Lease hee tid VA We Fad bb &) Emel mite t brat thin kat, 
Pt A . ' ) PE 2 ded Gath had atk Eee a ap 


va, FAA De Dm dee 8,0 Habe fh, d) des 


J Aa oe 
} cH Ma A Rial ae Beh dw 


Opis he 


4 advan SV did ang ihe 
; N The ted 4 
« enineil ’ Mele ag ole 
‘ : ‘ ‘ ‘ 5 / 
ne ahs hed Nat dod aa fa pda ey 
« aw Te eee ; $ tie tLe Baw hake es Fates -, Ay Sc4he 
“ie ; sud Ly be ah UL One mri ee oe Pe ab sae ake Seat 
dkewirh ea oe ee bide dobett Fede et ake ne Tyr g 
+4 Pd ae igs t rie 
4 ch he ore Bee ee etry P 
4444 vid bike eb : aah d @h iW hae Per eae ty Van uf nthe <A 
eth rh et Fe Rn Ma lage de Md ede NL Bae in . Tiss bay ce Y 
wer q DOE eo ems Tv ne ved Sele teat iL UD, Rd dil awe bee deeb a 4 set elt see dh ads Per ys 
der ei ‘ sd ted ' COO Ee maa were ist Pk Cid we bed ce de Ged De O91 ca e. bi ; ae ih. site 
| 0 Pere ro 
Ore ic WiC Ren Mock reir eck Cee ete SOOO MCR Cy Where Citak I it Trp SF TAP OH ANA Her I ape meet cw oh ee ign peek 
y pei al Sad ud fhe did, aay ee ee tt he A Ct bie ake at ert hae “3 rt pap ay bh os 
i oe bd bed bd te oe did We Oe dhe a P a eee oy 
re 


Wit Vd ddd de BEE ae Beet ee is rs 
. ) vei 
r ' aay rar these tcetes 
Lote Pen ee as ar att : 
dad aad ood Va dine bd OF RAD atk Ankara 9 9 bint ire 


iad e RDA Gol hd Ra ae Susie 
MN MAE ah) skied nT WL are Aine EP ar HER CIR a 
: tlaibee RAINE LN at A AL A 
yy iedrd ht D ) eat haa aa dana 
A ee i te J ’ 
laid Cade pied WE! a aaa Aaa aa 
TP ee De oe Oe ar ‘ ¥ ’ J 
i eek ee ee ees ee | 
‘ PlQiddteodis ceva sl ke 
hidew sedidd pi Sadi de be CVE eae ae be hapa ts 
AAR AL ee ee ee ee ee ee ee bet ee DA eed 2 aot ed 
Ha Sb ede MAC eh eke akd eC hde DPE a dome ti Vb de a Pe On Be ie bed oe 


inven’ 


ihe 
« 
+ Fig iM os re My ak 


ue 
ee 


PPL) baa ere bid & 


ise d- wa foleed a edad ORLA! SG bedded Be ROOM ueCtent SATIRE Vs reine 
Rad ot dal Madd Dea 7 POST CN ATU a eed cae f ne 
a Ae) $4 WEL be tied ALAA 2 sore 
bite) tah @ eb an poeta eet ean ee a iy rg cu Oo : rip 
wi tee et) wi dade pak 4 4 
RN AML Tt WW kepada og Y ea hte Her een ae erent 
EEA Aa ed ed de a bry tht URES aR ae ann eae. ree ate Fn at yo 
hema Sk be dea i HOLL a del deeds dean ateeede wv iy NOUT Woke A Ee hid Fe ede fe ee: hy! ne a 
oa pte ac We bt Wee or ok te be Ye | eo 4 ei sb ThA be wea d 4h ed paelh HIS RAH, a wor ee ~ ee 
PA ee ee i) De a pea he ted ot a oe a hea ey SEAR AO Aa Deb Melboe ie yy Be to Oe a Hib Taare pate 
BA VAY A AGeAD. beak eaewet lara a eee dineas CENCE} Ue AA Ae Ball tee 0 Sere istaiek 
Meee ee eH Ini My Wdaded Dy reaeda ea ce ray ree ately 
rd DTW wh Ld eed og do AN ety Cee oy ‘ 7 
LAD OR Dr De) Re ee A EWP er i eh) ae oe ee cen eee + Co 
A ee De ee LL aed Db tod we Gear eas F « ak ‘ 
ee Aa a a atte j B Scie ot a a itias Miae Lira anche fai AGE sete! Aap! Luts 1 
Rd) ASE 2 a9 ‘ 4 + * TA ieee kk poe at Vaid ea Ad in dod ery U a se ee ,, 
Cee en Me Yn tudeb as a ee ee rc oe * se oAN RN Ce ele bi Asin avery 
CSUR CAUCE Ue ato SUR Rare) Gose Moveth de dooh ve 4“ na £' Ce es a 
PM Le aa TY Dd gigs Bad Mb RED ak id dy i F 1 Denon 
dete ed Ew Ot ES sot get PLUM LAA ames Vie ied ddd ib diode 
i TOASTS ROA MCt A fer I gaat ete 
Bbaeehayyt Aiaddd tad we daha eed sae d lo ee ede Dak SU OUCC RA RS Kn EO Wine ae as 
ot bate ed SNES CTO ital ce Mat aoa ie ee ay 
* POC OOR OURO aE OLE e KROL EE cA CRE DRC HIEY 4 j * me ee ft ee se 
‘4 1 Doe A BA AA te) OF eat 4 748 i ‘ f ee . ‘ 
Pea v dd dd CES oD eee aad Me FIND: aie bd ofr Mew bs Ake vad ‘ ore re ( : 
; ‘ PES WARE a Ree Ce A IY ee ey ee ACCT cn ee) : Popa aia ty ea aan en) pee ie cies 
Mh eG Le Re date US AA LAS Ak A SF aS Ua tee Bd lied ee se a Abe) ‘Sf vita ee en behalf let aa sortie se the 
tae ade et Pi dedi a sia bb dl ; Livudae tpi vide ‘ ded ated aed 44 ee ha WeWie sy 4 4 7 
tat « CP dd add EA bd Ee bore ed a eed dod dd De Sra yy Pe aad Tame tata iy ets a 


1B | a ” 
ME rare 
Ue RO OUn TOURER 
‘ 1D ed ed Ca dided wok Adie & ats a 
eed ee bed deh by 
bee 


“ 
i ee 
Mt 
ee Re ’ 


bog 
a 


=< 


wy a 
i AW ede 
ie iy oe ts Seay aft 


‘ 


fe vite: 
hoe Nr hy j 
sce ieee 
iy 


‘ % “ 
aleve ee eo 

“ oe aS Bes bie 

ey ns sale Ora 
* 


‘ 
Pw be Wohnort 
Pm A IRI A 


Dirrichirni ec eR EG 
Bris ded ey 7 


sek ae fat yt : 
in "Ui oii i ne ie h ce - 


© Hed rbd 
ediatek 
faa At i wika ‘ 
asad bie Gaeda had bh Onksh ‘ 
w#itaad ia 414 wt 4 iad 
*. 4 ‘a ae ‘wt ‘ Tepe Ve its ‘a yay uN ah 
| ae ribe Hn au 


Me ieee I A WHEE 
¢ { Vw te 


By 


0 te 


< ‘ = * 
\ ee 
\ ' ‘ Py 
4 ( , 
. 
j 
i 
4 
= / A i 
f " 4 i za s : 
x 
\ 2 
f ‘ / 
a az 
of : Se } 
; opt 
i ; 
i s 
a ae 
‘ 
‘ G © 
5 } - =a ; r 
. - N 2p * 
t eS bran 
i uh ak ; i 7 ~ 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
OF SCIENCES 


VOLUME 17, 1927 COONAN ASF; 


UTE BES 


X 
? 


5» 
J wid: 
BOARD OF EDITORS 
WILuIAM J. PETERS AGNES CHASE JOHN B. REESIDE, JR. 
DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 
ASSOCIATE EDITORS 
L. H. Apams S. A. RoHWER 
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
E. A. GOLDMAN G. W. StTosE 
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
R. F. Griees J. R. SWANTON 
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


Roger C. WELLS 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 
BY THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


ERRATA 


Vol. 17, 1927 


Page 1: add to footnote 2: Leroy F. Patron, The sandstone dikes around Rockwall, 
Texas. Hollands Mag. (Dallas) 44(6): 5, 86. June, 1925. 

Page 185, line 1: for ‘‘moldings and’’ read ‘“‘molding sand.” 

Page 187, line 8: for ‘0.2mr’’ read ‘‘2zar.”’ 

Page 212, line 29: for ‘‘Leon Piérre’’ read “Léon Pierre.”’ 

Page 327, line 7: for ‘“‘components’’ read “‘component S.”’ 

Page 349: move second paragraph to top of page so that it becomes part of proceed- 
ings of 701st meeting. 

Page 442, line 1: delete inferior 4 and read “‘1-Hydroxybenzene-4-diazosodiumsul- 
fonate.”’ 

Page 443, line 24: the graphic formula should read: 


H 


| 
KSO;( > N—N- SO;K - 3H,0 
| 


SO3K 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


ee: J. Maucay > ‘aw Aqnrs CHASE 
_ oramruent or TRRRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY 


paemooiare EDITORS gee , 
\ Re ey ee IO . 
" PRILOSOPHICAL 5 socrerr Nee ie - BNTOMOLOGICAL socTETY ven fog 
Oe A ctaag GWE Srogm <<: *~ 3 
ae ‘ "BIOLOGICAL SOCIRTE.- a GEOLOGICAL BOCIETY 
Bes Re. F. Griecs: ie pie Si 2 ee: i, ee SWANTON 
; ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


EB, Wicuers 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


Doce: ACADEMY OF SCIENCES > 


a » 


Ma. Royan AND. “GuILrorp AVES, “ 2 =. 
_ Baurwone, Maryan 


Mi r, ‘ary 43, 1923, at the ee ae at Battiare Md., ee eee the 
12. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
on 1103, fey of Sead 3, 1917. Authorized on iy 5h 7 


- Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences aoe 


This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sai ms to 
present 2 brief record of current scientific work in Washington. Tothisendi it publi shes: 
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) 
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington ry 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4) 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. TheJournat is issued 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres ond to calendar years. Prompt 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript renenina the editors on the fifth or 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, i in the 
issue of the JoURNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. 


Manuscripis may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should ie Sea 
elearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. ie: 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbere¢ 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. 

Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text eae it 
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be 
partly met by the author. ae 

Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors — 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors _ 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. 

Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices. 


Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover. 
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00 
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50 
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 — 6.50 3.00 
200 2.50 4.80 Beto: 7.00 3.50 
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 00 4.00 x 


‘An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive | pagi- Ci 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. ae 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra. copies or or wees Z 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. 


The rate of Subscription per volume 18........0.00ceereee Be Se See ere $6.00" 
Semi-monthly: numibers. . 2 2.55 bas cle Sew pieces oo Cee a Se oe cones Se pe Wau 
Monthly numiGens: vii c oe ccc. vente eas 30 eee kates aeeees sp etenee rs al inate . 50 


Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences, and 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C, 

European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. 

Exchanges.—The JourNnat does not exchange with other publications. 

Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made 
within thirty days after date of the following issue. 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, te December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rate= i, 
are given to membere of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


Vou. 1/ JANUARY 3, 1927 Newt 


GEOLOGY.—On the origin of the “rock wall” at Rockwall, Texas. 
L. W. SrerHenson, U. 8. Geological Survey. 


There is in Texas, about 20 miles northeast of Dallas, a town by the 
name of Rockwall, the county seat of Rockwall County. The town 
derives its name from a natural feature which is locally called the 
“rock wall.” Mr. Sidney Paige? investigated the “rock wall’ in 
1909, and the following paragraphs are quoted from his account of it: 


For many years reports of a more or less definite nature have been circu- 
Jated describing the wonders of the ancient wall surrounding the town of 
Rockwall, Texas. The writer was able during the past winter to spend a 
few days investigating this supposed historic structure. It proves to be not a 
wall, but a number of disconnected sandstone dikes, strictly speaking, not 
surrounding the town, but trending in many directions. As exposures are 
few, they have been discovered in such scattered localities in the town’s 
environs as to suggest the idea that they were fragments of a ruined wall. 


* % * * 


Though good exposures are infrequent, owing to the depth of the soil, a 
peculiar condition affords ample opportunity to observe the dikes in place. 
These latter are natural courses for underground waters, and wells are often 
located on them. Though these wells are filled with water, the rock forming 
the dike, removed during the sinking of the well, may be examined at leisure. 


I have recently had an opportunity to examine one of the so-called 
rock walls at a locality at the west edge of the town at a point where 
it intersects the Dallas-Greenville road. The town is located at the 
crest of the west-facing slope of the valley of the East Fork of Trinity 
River (sometimes called Bois d’Are Creek), south of the valley of 


1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological’ Survey, Washington, 
D.C. Received November 30, 1926. 

2 PaIGE, SipneEy, The ‘‘rock wall” of Rockwall, Texas. Science n. ser. 18: 690-691. 
1909. 


1 


2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


Squabble Creek. ‘The wall where I saw it intersects the road about a 
quarter of a mile west of the center of the town, at an altitude 45 or 
50 feet lower than the top of the hill. The owner of the land at this 
place has made several excavations along the side of the wall, which 
here trends several degrees west of north, and an appropriate sign at 
the side of the road invites the interested traveller to view the ancient 
archaeological structure, which he is permitted to do after the payment 
of a small entrance fee. 

Paige’s interpretation, that the wall is not an artificial structure but 
is in the nature of a sandstone dike, is doubtless correct, but his ex- 
planation of the cause of its wall-like appearance needs modification. 
He says: 

The dikes are of various sizes, varying from an inch in thickness to eighteen 
inches or two feet. They stand vertically, or nearly so, and have in cases 
been followed downward fifty feet or more, always imbedded in the lime muds. 
They are composed of exceedingly fine-grained quartz sands, cemented by 
calcium carbonate. So far as observed they do not vary appreciably in width | 
through vertical range. Two joint systems, one nearly horizontal, the other 


vertical, have cut these dikes in such a manner as to suggest masonry walls, 
1.e., they are composed of oblong blocks in horizontal layers. 


The ‘wall’ which I saw is not a solid sandstone dike broken by 
horizontal joints, but is composed of a series of alternating, more or 
less lens-like horizontal layers of clay and sandstone. The clay layers 
reach a maximum of an inch or more in thickness, and the sandstone 
layers may attain a thickness of as much as 6 or 8 inches. ‘The sand- 
stone beds are cut by vertical joints perpendicular to the face of the 
wall. Some of the sandstone layers thin down and pinch out in a 
lens-like manner, and some of them divide into two layers separated by 
clay. ‘The combination of horizontal bedding and vertical jointing in 
the sandstone layers, gives to the dike its masonry-like appearance. 
The relatively thin clay layers simulate the mortar of an artificial wall. 
The vertical joints are irregularly distributed and do not occur in the 
form of “‘broken joints,’’ as would be expected in a true masonry wall. 
‘Two views of the dike are shown in plate 1. 

Paige did not reach a definite conclusion as to the origin of the dikes. 
He states that the fissures may have been due to drying or to earth 
movements, and that the material filling them may have come from 
below or from above. ‘The fissures are too deep, I think, to have been 
formed by desiccation from the surface downward. Earth move- 
ments that produced and widened joints into fissures seem adequate to 
account for them. Since the dikes are horizontally stratified the 


. 


JAN. 3, 1927 STEPHENSON: ORIGIN OF “ROCK WALL’? IN TEXAS 5) 


materials must have been washed in from above and were probably 
deposited in standing water in the fissures. The fissures must have 


A. View of one of the sandstone dikes or rock walls in an excavation on the east or 
up-slope side, at the west edge of Rockwall town; the dike has here been disturbed by 


soil creep which has tipped it over, least below, most above, widening the spaces between 
the hard sandstone layers. 


B. 


and sand layers are in undisturbed relation to each other, showing the lenslike character 


of the sandstone layers; the argillaceous chalk or chalky marl which is cut by the dike is 
shown on the left. 


Tiew of the same dike in an excavation on the down-slope side where the clay 


remained open during the time they were being filled with clay and 
sand. If the fissures were opened on a land surface, and were filled by 


¢ 


4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


sediments carried by surface water, one would expect strong cross 
bedding in the dikes with some coarse foreset beds similar to the 
bedding found in delta deposits, and he would expect the sediments to 
be mixed with oxidized substances, leaves, seeds, sticks, bones, and 
other surficial materials. Instead the sediments are clean and uniform 
with the exception of the scattered fragments of gray unoxidized clay, 
and I am therefore inclined to the opinion that the fissures were 
formed under water, probably that of a shallow sea during the latter 
part of Upper Cretaceous time. 

The dike at the west edge of Rockwall cuts the Pecan Gap tongue 
of the Annona chalk, of Upper Cretaceous age, which here consists of 
argillaceous chalk or chalky marl, nearly free from sand. Two or 
3 feet below the surface the chalk is practically fresh, showing only 
slight signs of weathering and oxidation. ‘The chalk forms the upper 
part of the west-facing slope of the hill and the only source of sand 
that seems adequate to furnish the sandy material of the dike is 
the Wolfe City sand member of the Taylor marl, which in the next 
county to the north lies stratigraphically beneath the chalk. I have 
not seen the Wolfe City sand in the immediate vicinity of Rockwall, 
but it probably underlies the chalk there. Paige mentions “thinly 
bedded flaggy sandy limestone” near Rockwall, but does not give the 
exact locality. The beds of the Pecan Gap chalk at this locality dip 
at a low angle toward the east, so that the Wolfe City sand, if present, 
may have come to the surface within a few miles to the west, where it 
was subject to erosion at the time the dikes were formed in late 
Cretaceous time. | 

The sandstone layers consist of medium-grained gray calcareous 
sand cemented with calcite. Scattered through the sand composing 
the sandstone layers are considerable numbers of mechanically in- 
cluded clay fragments, the largest noted being about three-fourths of 
an inch long. 

Mr. C. 8. Ross has examined thin sections made from one of the 
sandstone layers and he describes it as follows: 


The sand grains are predominantly quartz, but there are many grains of 
feldspar and chert, and a very few of muscovite. Most of the grains are 
sharply angular but some are subangular. A few are well rounded or have 
one border that is well rounded and the other angular, as if rounded grains 
had been fractured. The calcite cement has replaced or corroded some of the 
sand grains and especially the feldspar. A veinlet of calcite cuts one of the 
sections. 


JAN. 3, 1927 HAY: SKULL OF EQUUS LAURENTIUS 5 


Mr. Ross also examined a thin section made from a sample of the 
Wolfe City sand from near Wolfe City, about 40 miles northeast 
of Rockwall, and he says of it: 


The mineral grains are predominantly quartz, but smaller amounts of 
feldspar, mica, and other minerals, are present. The grains are sharply 
angular for the most part. The cementing material is finely granular calcite. 
The sand grains average about 0.05 mm. in diameter. 

Compared with the material from the dike this sample of Wolfe City 
sand is quite similar in type and angularity of the sand grains, and the inclos- 
ing calcite is somewhat similar in habit. The sand grains differ greatly in 
size, however, since those in the dike average about 0.2 mm., while those in 
the Wolfe City specimen are only 0.05 mm. in diameter. 


So far as the evidence goes, therefore, the sand composing the dikes 
might well have been derived from the Wolfe City sand, but the 
samples compared are geographically too far apart to warrant basing a 
final conclusion upon them. 


PALEONTOLOGY.—On the type skull of Equus laurentius Hay. 
OLIVER P. Hay, U.S. National Museum. 


In 1913? the writer described as belonging to a new species of Equus 
(EF. laurentius) a nearly complete skull which had been found on a 
sandbar of Kansas River, near Lawrence, Kansas. Prof. J. E. Todd 
told the writer that with this skull were picked up the base of an antler 
of an elk and the femur of a carnivore. ‘The femur was regarded by 
Dr. Roy E. Moodie as belonging probably to a species of Smilodon. 

In an excellent paper published recently* entitled ‘‘The evolution 
of the horse: A record and its interpretation,’ Dr. W. D. Matthew, 
of the American Museum of Natural History, on his page 181, men- 
tioned, with other species, Hquus laurentius and added as follows: 
“The last is based upon a recent skull mistakenly supposed by the 
author to be of Pleistocene age.’”’ No reasons were given for this 
statement. On reading this the writer became anxious to see that 
skull once more and to determine for himself whether or not he had 
fallen into error. The skull is now in the temporary possession of Dr. 
Childs Frick, of the American Museum, New York, and on the writer’s 
request Dr. Frick generously sent the specimen. 

It appears to the writer that two questions are involved. First, 


1 Received Nov. 2, 1926. 
? Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 44: 584-591. PI. 72,73. 1918. 
3 Quart. Rev. Biol. 1: 139-185. 1926. 


6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


is the skull of Recent or of Pleistocene age? Second, is it specifically 
identical with any of the breeds of the domestic horse, Hquus caballus? 

In case the skull is that of a modern horse it must have been buried 
within 300 years or less; also very near the place of discovery, for, 
excepting the loss of the free portions of the nasal bones, it shows no 
abrasions. Furthermore, the lower jaw was found with the skull. 
Without doubt it had been buried in a river deposit, either of sand or 
possibly of sandy muck. Under such conditions one would expect a 
modern skull to be little or not at all mineralized, to be soft and friable, 
and to be of relatively light weight on drying out. Often bones of 
elephants, mastodons, and horses, which have been in such deposits 
since the early Pleistocene are so soft that they must be handled with 
the greatest care to prevent crumbling. 

Now, the skull found at Lawrence is in no such condition. The 
specimen, skull and lower jaw, is heavy, charged and colored with 
iron carbonate, and hard. When an area of the skull has been covered 
many hours with a pad of wet paper the bone does not soften, as it 
might be expected to do. It seems to the writer that the conditions 
for fossilization must have been extraordinarily favorable in order 
that a skull might, within 300 years, reach such a stage of preservation. 

Does the type of HL. lawrentius present characters which distinguish 
it from Hquus caballus? The skull is that of one of the smaller horses, 
the basilar length being 490 mm. (not 481). It has been spoken of as 
an “Indian pony.’ It ought to be compared with the smaller breeds 
of the domestic horse. Unfortunately there is, in the U. 8. National 
Museum, no good specimen of the small horses from the western plains, 
and probably there is none in the American Museum. At hand is a 
skull obtained in Arizona by Dr. Walter Hough, of the U. S. National 
Museum. It is weathered and somewhat damaged. | 

The writer has taken renewed measurements of the skull from 
Lawrence and measurements of the Arizona skull. From these 
measurements have been determined the indices of the important parts 
according to Prof. H. F. Osborn’s method;! and the corresponding 
indices have been compared. They have also been compared with 
indices obtained from the skulls of Hquus lamber from Alaska, Equus 
niobrarensis, and Equus przewalsku. All of these forms show differ- 
ences in the structure of their skulls, but these differences are small and 
apparently might fall within individual variations. The writer be- 
lieves that no one would, without other characters, base a species on 


4Mem. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. new ser. 1: 85. 1912. 


JAN. 3, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA a 


such closely similar indices; nor would one, because of these resem- 
blances, refer all of these horses to one species. We seem still com- 
pelled to depend on the structure of the teeth and on variations in 
size of the animals. 

- The upper cheek teeth are present in the Arizona horse, but they 
are somewhat shattered, and the second premolars are missing from 
their sockets. The teeth of the two horses are in about the same stage 
of wear. The tooth line measures the same in both and the individual 
teeth are of practically the same size in the two. In both horses the 
protocones are short. The postprotoconal valleys appear to differ 
in that those of the Arizona horse are directed more strongly outward 
than in EL. laurentius. The fossettes of the latter are markedly broader 
than those of the Arizona horse, and the enamel which surrounds the 
fossettes is little folded. The hinder one has a very shallow infold in 
the rear and another infront. Except this, the front wall of the hinder 
fossette has no undulations. The front wall of the anterior fossette 
may or may not have a shallow infold; in its inner hinder corner is an 
M-shaped infold. In the case of the fossettes of H. lawrentius the 
confronting lines of enamel are considerably more folded than in the 
Arizona horse and the complication somewhat exceeds that of a large 
domestic horse at hand. 

The writer believes that the type skull of Equus laurentius is a real 
fossil and that it belonged to a horse of probably early Pleistocene age. 
It appears only fair that those who regard it as a part of a modern 
horse shall present evidences therefor. 


BOTANY.—WNew. plants from Central America—VI.1 Pau C. 
STANDLEY, U.S. National Museum. 


The new species of plants, chiefly trees and shrubs, described here 
are all natives of Panama or Costa Rica, and most of them have been 
collected by myself during the past two years. The Panama species 
are probably the only new ones awaiting description from the region 
of the Canal Zone previous to the publication of a flora of that area. 

Most interesting of the new plants described is Parmentiera V alerit, 
a large tree belonging to a group hitherto represented in Central 
America by only two known species, both of which are trees much 
inferior in size to this one. 


‘ Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For the 
last preceding paper of this series see This JourNaL 15: 472. 1925. Received Nov. 2, 
1926. 


8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


Lacistema pedicellatum Standl., sp. nov. 


Shrub or tree 2—7.5 meters high, the branchlets slender, terete, when young 
densely strigillose; stipules lance-triangular, 1.5—2 mm. long; petioles slender, 
3-8 mm. long, strigillose; leaf blades elliptic-oblong or obovate-oblong, 8—11.5 
cm. long, 2.5-4 cm. wide, cuspidate-acuminate, with acute or obtuse tip, . 
cuneate to obtuse at base, membranaceous, remotely and obscurely serrulate, 
green and glabrous above, paler beneath, sparsely and minutely strigillose, 
densely pilose along the costa and in the axils of the lateral nerves; racemes 
solitary in the leaf axils, 3.5-6.5 cm. long, slender, laxly flowered, the rachis 
densely sordid-hispidulous, the bracts puberulous, much shorter than the 
pedicels, the pedicels 1-2 mm. long, glabrous; sepals 3 or 4, broadly rounded, 
glabrous; disk large, 4-lobate; stamen glabrous, the cells divergent; ovary 
very sparsely setose, the style short, the stigmas 3, longer than the stamen; 
fruit subglobose, 4 mm. in diameter, sparsely puberulent; seeds 3. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 679251, collected along the Rio 
Culebra above Santa Isabel, Province of Col6én, Panama, near sea level, 
Aug. 10, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 4152). Collected also on hills north of 
Frijoles, Canal Zone, Dec. 19, 1923, Standley 27426. 


The most closely related species is L. Pittieri Blake, of Venezuela. Both 
are marked by the pedicellate flowers, those of most species being sessile in 
the bracts. L. Putter: differs from the Panama plant in its densely hispid 
ovary and entire leaves. 


Heisteria longipes Standl., sp. nov. 


Glabrous shrub, the branchlets slender, green; petioles slender, 7-12 mm. 
long; leaf blades elliptic to elliptic-oblong, 8-12 cm. long, 3-6 cm. wide, 
abruptly obtuse-acuminate or obtuse, acute at base, thin, the lateral nerves 
7 to 9 on each side, slender; pedicels in fascicles of 2 or 3, slender, 1—-1.5 cm. 
long; fruiting calyx rotate, purplish red, 2 cm. broad, subentire; petals 6, 
ovate-deltoid, acute; stamens 12, slightly longer than the petals; fruit oval, 
8 mm. long. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 679090, collected along the Trini- 
dad River, Canal Zone, Panama, July, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 4006). 


The leaves are much like those of H. macrophylla Oerst., the most widely 
distributed species of Central America, but in that the pedicels are shorter 
than, or rarely equal, the fruiting calyx. 


Heisteria latifolia Standl., sp. nov. 


Small tree, 4 meters high, glabrous, the branchlets obtusely angulate, green; 
petioles thick, stout, about 2 cm. long; leaf blades elliptic or broadly elliptic, 
27-32 cm. long, 12-15 cm. wide, acuminate, rounded or obtuse at base, sub- 
coriaceous, lustrous above, the lateral nerves about 16 pairs, subarcuate, 
anastomosing near the margin; pedicels usually geminate, 1 cm. long; fruiting 
calyx subentire, rotate, red, 2-2.5 cm. broad; fruit oval, 12 mm. long. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 679256, collected along the Rio 
Culebra above Santa Isabel, Province of Col6n, Panama, near sea level, Aug. 
10, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 4156). 


JAN. 3, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 9 


Distinguished from all the other Central American species of the genus by 
the very large, broad leaves, borne on comparatively long petioles. 


Hydrangea inornata Standl., sp. nov. 


Scandent shrub, the branchlets terete, covered with brown, longitudinally 
suleatulate bark, when young tomentulose, the internodes elongate; petioles 
1—2 em. long, glabrous; leaf blades elliptic or oblong-elliptic, 8-23 cm. long, 
3.0-11 cm. wide, acutely acuminate or abruptly contracted into a short 
acumen, acute or subobtuse at base, coriaceous, entire, glabrous on both 
surfaces, the lateral nerves 5 to 8 on each side, arcuate, prominent beneath, 
the ultimate nerves closely reticulate, prominulous beneath; inflorescences 
ample, short-pedunculate, 5-9 cm. broad, the cymes umbellately arranged, 
many-flowered, the rachises stellate-tomentulose, the axes of the first order 
1-3 em. long, equaling or surpassing the rest of the cyme, the pedicels 1-4 
mm. long or the flowers sessile; flowers all fertile, pink; sepals 4, much broader 
than high; petals 4, 2 mm. long; stamens 8, the filaments 1.5 mm. long, the 
anthers small; styles 3 or 4; hypanthium broadly cup-shaped, glabrous, 1.5 
mm. wide. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 577962, collected in forests at 
Tuis, Atlantic slope of Costa Rica, altitude 700 meters, December, 1900, by 
H. Pittier (no. 14068). 


This Costa Rican plant appears to be related to H. ecuadorensis Briq., 
and belongs to the Section Cornzdia, Subsection Monosegia B. Aphananthae, 
as outlined by Briquet.2 

Aside from the Panama species here described, an one other Hydrangea 
is known from Central America, H. Oerstedit Briq., which is frequent in the 
higher mountains of Costa Rica. It is a large woody vine with broad cymes 
which bear numerous bright pink sterile flowers. It is a very handsome plant 
when in full flower, and quite as showy as the cultivated hydrangeas. 

The juvenile plants of H. Oerstedii are very different in general appearance 
from the adult ones. They are very slender, with coarsely toothed leaves 
only 1 to3 cm. long. These juvenile plants are abundant nearly everywhere 
in the mountains of Costa Rica, closely investing tree trunks and even fence 
posts. The writer for several years has been familiar with this form, and had 
often wondered to what family it might belong. It was only during the past 
winter, after close study, that the true relationship of this juvenile form was 
recognized, and even then it was hard to credit the evidence, so different in 
aspect are the two states of the plant. The juvenile plants are many times 
more plentiful than adult ones. 

In 1922 I collected in Salvador on the Volcano of San Salvador juvenile 
plants of this genus, but at that time did not recognize their relationship. 
The Salvador plant may be the immature form of H. Oerstediz, or perhaps it 
belongs to a species not yet described. 


2 Ann. Cons. Jard. Bot. Genéve 20: 396. 1919. 


10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


Hydrangea panamensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Shrub, the branchlets terete, brown, when young appressed-stellate-tomen- 
tose, the internodes short; petioles stout, 1-1.5 cm. long, stellate-tomentose; 
leaf blades oblong, elliptic, or ovate, 8-10.5 cm. long, 3-4.5 cm. wide, obtuse 
at apex or rounded and emarginate, obtuse at base, coriaceous, entire, above 
dark green, furnished with remote microscopic appressed stellate scalelike 
hairs, beneath brownish, sparsely and microscopically stellate-pilose, the 
lateral nerves about 6 on each side, straight, laxly anastomcsing close to the 
margin, prominent beneath, the reticulation of the ultimate nerves incon- 
spicuous; inflorescences dense, pedunculate, 3.5 cm. broad; bracts caducous, 
1.5-2 cm. long, rounded at apex, stellate-tcmentcse on the outer surface: 
axes of the first order umbellately arranged, about 1 cm. long, densely brown- 
tomentose, about as long as the upper part of the cyme; flowers sessile or 
short- pedicellate; sepals 4, broadly triangular, obtuse, broader than long; 
petals 4, rounded, 2 mm. long, glabrous; stamens 8; styles 3 or 4; hypanthium 
campanulate, glabrous, rounded at base, 1.5 mm. wide. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 678998, collected along the Rio 
Fat6, Province of Colén, Panama, near sea level, July, 1911, by H. Pittier 
(no. 3919). 


The collector reports that the plant was epiphytic upon a Sloanea tree. 
The corolla is described as yellow, and the bracts and calyx as purple. 

This Hydrangea is noteworthy in its habitat, since most of the tropical 
American species occur only in the high mountains. The Panama species 
belongs to the same group as H. inornata, and in Briquet’s key to the species 
would run to H. Mathewsi: Briq., a Peruvian plant with rugcse-nerved, obo- 
vate, crenate-denticulate leaves. 

To H. panamensis are to be referred, probably, juvenile specimens collected 
by the writer (no. 27431) near Frijoles, Canal Zone, in 1923. 


Erythrina panamensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Shrub or tree 1-6 meters high, the young branchlets whitish-sericeous; 
branches armed with stout conic prickles; petiole and rachis at first sericeous 
but soon glabrate, the petiole sometimes prickly; leaflets deltoid to ovate- 
deltoid, the terminal leaflet often rounded-deltoid, 11-24 cm. long, 6.5-18.5 
em. wide, abruptly or gradually acuminate or long-acuminate, entire, thin, 
above bright green and glabrous or glabrate, beneath pale, sericeous with 
slender straight whitish hairs; racemes about 12 cm. long, the rachis tomen- 
tulose, the pedicels 2-4 mm. long; calyx 14-17 mm. long, tubular-campanulate, 
5-6 mm. thick, minutely strigillose with whitish hairs or almost wholly glab- 
rous, the margin shallowly bilobate, the lobes subequal, rounded; standard 
red, glabrous, linear-oblong, obtuse, about 6 cm. long, 1 cm. broad, attenu- 
ate at base; keel petals cohering above, 11-12 mm. long; pod long-stipitate, 
11-20 em. long, about 1.5 cm. thick, 4 to 13-seeded, strongly and abruptly 
constricted between the seeds, at first densely whitish-sericeous, later glabrate; 
seeds red, about 9 mm. long, 6 mm. thick. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 677253, collected about the 
Agua Clara Reservoir near Gatun, Canal Zone, Panama, February 5, 1911, 
by H. Pittier (no. 2656). 


JAN. 3, 1927 “STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA RE 


The following Panama collections represent the same species: Rio Indio 
de Gattin, Canal Zone, Mazon 4808. Near Gattin, Goldman 1854. Barro 
Colorado Island, Canal Zone, Standley 31352. Cana, Williams 782. Be- 
tween Gorgona and Gatun, Pzttzer 2287. 


The writer previously’ referred most of this material to EH. costaricensis 
Micheli, but more ample Costa Rican material of that species proves that the 
Panama Erythrina is distinct. E. costaricensis may be distinguished readily 
by the loose matted tomentum of the leaves. 


DYSOPSIS GLECHOMOIDES (Rich.) Muell. Arg. 


It seems worth while to record here the occurrence in Costa Rica of Dysop- 
sis, a monotypic genus of the family Euphorbiaceae, not reported previously 
north of the Andes of Ecuador. Specimens were collected by Prof. Juvenal 
Valerio and the writer (no. 43770), Dec. 31, 1925, on the Cerro de las Vueltas, 
Province of San José, Costa Rica, at an altitude of 3,000 meters. The plant 
is an inconspicuous succulent herb, growing in wet forest. Various writers 
have stated that in general appearance it resembles Hydrocotyle, but when 
growing it scarcely suggests that genus, although it does have a striking re- 
semblance to certain species of Pilea. 


Euphorbia Valerii Standl., sp. nov. 


Slender shrub 3-4.5 meters high, sparsely branched, glabrous throughout 
the branches about 1 cm. thick at apex and bearing there a few leaves, densely 
covered with the scars of the fallen leaves; leaves alternate, the petioles stout 
1.5—-2.5 cm. long; leaf blades narrowly oblanceolate-oblong, 35-40 cm. long 
9-10 em. wide, entire, obtuse, gradually narrowed from near the apex to the 
acute base, abruptly decurrent upon the petiole, the lateral nerves obsolete; 
peduncles arising in the axils of the uppermost leaves, stout, 18-24 cm. long; 
flowers numerous, the pedicels 1—1.5 cm. long, arranged in 3 or 4 times dicho- 
tomous cymes 7 cm. long and 9 cm. broad; bracts of the inflorescence cadu- 
cous, not seen; involucre broadly campanulate, reddish, about 7 mm. long, 10 
mm. wide, the lobes ovate-quadrate, their margins laciniate; styles united 
almost to the apex; immature capsules subglobose, more than 1 cm. in 
diameter. , 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,433, collected in wet for- 
est at Los Ayotes, in the Sierra de Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude 
about 700 meters, Jan. 21, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valeri 
(no. 45338). 


Euphorbia Valeri is referable to Boissier’s group Laurifolia, which has 
been recognized by some botanists as a separate genus, Huphorbiodendron. 
No species of this group has been reported from Central America. Euphorbia 
Sinclairiana Benth., described from Gorgona Island, Colombia, is, to judge 
from its description, closely related to the Costa Rican plant, and it may be 
that the two are conspecific. The involucres in L. Sinclairiana are described 
as smaller, and the leaves as acutely short-acuminate. 


3 Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 20:180. 1919. 


12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


Only two or three plants of H. Valerii were found, growing in very dense 
and wet forest. The branches, when broken, yield a copious flow of white 
latex. The sap of the related species of Mexico is known to cause blistering 
and painful inflammation of the skin. : 


Loasa grandis Standl., sp. nov. 


Coarse herb 1.5-2.5 meters high, branched only above, the branches stout, 
hollow, hispid with slender divaricate stinging hairs, and covered with dense, 
very short hairs hooked at apex; leaves alternate, the petioles 4.5-7 em. 
long, pubescent like the stems; leaf blades in outline elliptic or ovate-elliptic, 
16-30 cm. long, 12-24 cm. wide, the uppermost much reduced, acute or acu- 
minate, at base rounded to shallowly cordate, shallowly lobed, the lobes 4 or 
5 on each side, broadly triangular, obtuse or acute, irregularly dentate; leaves 
thin, above along the nerves short-hispid, scabrous, beneath hispid along the 
costa, furnished along the nerves with slender nail-shaped hairs, elsewhere 
scaberulous; flowers numerous, arranged in a large much-branched panicle 
bearing a few reduced leaves, the pedicels 2-3 cm. long; sepals broadly ovate, 
about 1 cm. long, acute, 5 or 7-nerved, sparsely serrate-dentate, scabrous; 
petals pale green, cucullate, almost orbicular, about 3 cm. long, rounded at 
apex, furnished on both sides with minute nail-shaped hairs; scales oval, 
petaloid, 7 mm. long, 4 mm. wide, broadly rounded at apex, glabrous, bearing 
outside below the apex 3 small conic appendages; staminodia 2 opposite each 
scale, linear-attenuate, about equaling the filaments, ciliate at the middle; 
stamens numerous, the filaments free, glabrous, inserted continuously be- 
tween the staminodia, 1 cm. long; anthers oblong, almost 2 mm. long; ovary 
1-celled, densely hispid, with 5 parietal placentae, the ovules numerous; 
style columnar, about 12 mm. long, the stigma obtuse; immature capsule 
more than half superior, the free portion hispid with very slender, short 
hairs. : 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,425, collected in wet for- 
est near Tilardn, on the road to El Silencio, in the Cordillera de Tilardn, 
Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude about 625 meters, in January, 1926, by 
Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 44558). 


The plant seems to be rare, since it was seen only once in the several 
weeks spent in exploration of the Cordillera of Tilaran. The large flowers 
are rather handsome. 

This has little in common with the two other species of Loasa known from 
Costa Rica. Of the latter, L. speciosa Donn. Smith is known only from the 
volcanoes of Irazti and Turrialba and the adjacent slopes. Its orange-yellow 
bell-shaped flowers are about 6 cm. long, and very showy, but they are well 
protected, since the long hairs, as in other species of the genus, sting quite as 
painfully as any nettle. On Irazti this species is known as “campana’ and 
at Las Nubes it is called ‘‘ortiga veinticuatro.” The latter name is given 
because the pain from the sting is said to last 24 hours. 

The other Central American species has been described as Loasa bipin- 
nata Donn. Smith, but it appears to be only one of the forms of L. triphylla 
Juss., which is widely distributed in South America. Above the Isthmus of 


JAN. 3, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 13 


Panama it is known from Chiriqui in Panama and from Costa Rica and 
Veracruz. In many parts of Costa Rica it is an abundant and pernicious 
weed of the forests. Many are the anguished exclamations I have heard from 
companions on botanical excursions who have brushed against the plant, 
for the stiff hairs penetrate ordinary clothing with the greatest ease. In 
Costa Rica this plant often is called ‘‘ortiga”’ (nettle), but the more usual name 
is “pringamosca,” evidently a corruption of the term “‘pringamoza,”’ which is 
given elsewhere in Mexico and Central America to various stinging plants. 


Ardisia myriodonta Standl., sp. nov. 


Plant woody or suffrutescent, 0.3-1 meter high, the branchlets terete, 
stout, glabrous, toward the apex minutely brown-punctate; petioles slender, 
8-16 mm. long, glabrous; leaf blades oblong-elliptic, 12-25 cm. long, 4.5—9.5 
em. wide, subabruptly short-acuminate, long-attenuate toward the base, 
thinly membranaceous, glabrous, along the margin densely red-punctate, the 
lateral nerves about 18 on each side, subarcuate, prominent beneath, the 
margin pectinate-serrate, the teeth very numerous, close-set, very narrow, 
attenuate, unequal; inflorescence small, sessile, 3.5 cm. long, many-flowered, 
dense, tripinnately paniculate, the flowers subcorymbose, the pedicels 3-5 
mm, long, glandular-lepidote, the bracts deciduous; sepals 5, nearly free, 
lance-oblong, attenuate, 2 mm. long, densely punctate, very minutely cilio- 
late-dentate; fruit globose, black, 6 mm. in diameter, glabrous, sparsely ver- 
ruculose-punctate. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,625, collected on Barro 
Colorado Island in Gattin Lake, Canal Zone, Panama, November, 1925, by 
Paul C. Standley (no. 40848). No. 40841 from the same locality also repre- 
sents the species. 


Related, according to description, to A. pellucida Oerst., of Mexico and 
Guatemala, which has longer petioles and broadly ovate sepals. Flowers of 
the Panama plant are, unfortunately, not available. It is remarkable for its 
low stature, most of the Central American Ardisias being large shrubs or small 
trees. 


Vincetoxicum pinguifolium Standl., sp. nov. 


Large scandent herb, the branchlets terete, densely covered with minute 
divaricate hairs and sparsely divaricate-hirsute with hairs about 2 mm. long; 
petioles slender, 2-4 cm. long; leaf blades rounded-ovate, 5.5-9.5 cm. long, 
3-7 cm. wide, abruptly short-acuminate, deeply cordate at base, the sinus 
narrow, the basal lobes broadly rounded, the blade multiglandular at base, 
green above, paler beneath, on both sides soft-pubescent with very minute, 
dense hairs, the lateral nerves about 5 on each side, prominent beneath; 
inflorescences umbelliform, few-flowered, the peduncle 6-16 mm. long, the 
pedicels 10-25 mm. long, minutely pubescent, the bractlets subulate, 2-3 
mm. long; calyx lobes lance-ovate, acute, 3 mm. long, minutely pubescent out- 
side; corolla reddish brown, minutely puberulent outside, within pilose with 
few long white hairs, deeply lobate, the lobes 6 mm. long, ovate, obtuse: 
corona shorter than the gynostegium, annular, fleshy, black, irregularly 
corrugate; immature follicles long-tuberculate, densely hirsute. 


14 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,722, collected in wet forest 
on Barro Colorado Island in Gattin Lake, Canal Zone, Panama, November, 
1925, by Paul C. Standley (no. 40946). Nos. 40871 and 41116, from the same 
locality, represent the same species. 


In this large genus, whose species are so badly in need of critical revision, 
it is difficult to suggest the relationship of the plant here described. It has 
not been possible to refer it to any of the few species reported previouslae from 
Central America. 

The extremely fine and dense pubescence of the leaves makes them feel soft 
and greasy to the touch. 


Vincetoxicum edule (Hemsl.) Stand. 
Gonolobus edulis Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 2: 331. 1882. 


Vincetoxicum pseudobarbatum (Pittier) Standl. 


Gonolobus pseudobarbatus Pittier, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 13: 105. J. 14. 
1910. 


Vincetoxicum dubium (Pittier) Standl. 
Gonolobus dubius Pittier, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 13: 106. f. 15. 1910. 


Vincetoxicum viridiflorum (Mey.) Standl. 


Cynanchum viridiflorum Mey. Prim. Fl. Esseq. 141. 1818. 
Gonolobus viridiflorus Roem. & Schult. Syst. Veg. 6: 61. 1820. 


Lycianthes Maxonii Standl., sp. nov. 


Slender branched erect shrub 1-3 meters high; branchlets at first minutely 
pilose with incurved lustrous hairs, later subterete, glabrous; leaves solitary, 
subequal, the petioles 4-6 mm. long; leaf blades oblong-obovate to cuneate- 
obovate, 9-13 cm. long, 3-5 cm. wide, abruptly short- or long-acuminate (acu- 
men short and obtuse or 15 mm. long and attenuate), cuneate or obtuse at base, 
thin, at first minutely punctulate, in age glabrous, above deep green, paler 
beneath; inflorescences sessile in the leaf axils, 1 to 3-flowered, the pedicels 
slender, 6-22 mm. long, glabrous, divaricate or recurved; calyx cup-shaped, 
2.5 mm. long, 3 mm. broad, glabrous, whitish, bearing near the truncate 
subscarious margin (about 1 mm. below the margin) 5 very short, wartlike, 
greenish tubercles; corolla violet, stelliform, 5 mm. long, glabrous outside, 
deeply lobed, the lobes linear-oblong, acute; filaments equal, 1.5 mm. long, 
glabrous, the anthers oblong, 3.5 mm. long, connate, obtuse, dehiscent by 
minute apical pores; fruit subglobose, bright red, about 1 cm. in diameter, 
4-seeded. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,180,543, collected in wet forest 
on Barro Colorado Islandin Gattin Lake, Canal Zone, Panama, June 6, 19238, 
by William R. Maxon (no. 6808). 

The following additional collections from Barro Colorado Island belong 
here: Standley 31365, 31326, 40880, 41088, 41145. 


JAN. 3, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 15 


Lycianthes Maxonzi is related, apparently, to the Guatemalan L. cerato- 
calycia (Donn. Smith) Bitter, which has a calyx with usually 10 appendages, 
and a corolla 15 mm. long. 


Lycianthes Maxonii var. appendiculata Standl., var. nov. 


Like the typical form in habit and foliage; pedicels solitary; calyx furnished 
with 5 filiform divaricate teeth about 1.5 mm. long, inserted well below the 
truncate margin. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,217,917, collected in moist 
forest along the Rio Tapia, Province of Panama, Panama, by Paul C. Stand- 
ley (no. 28040). 


In the long spreading calyx appendages this plant is strikingly different 
from the typical form, but since there are no other distinguishing characters, 
it is probably only a variant of the plant found on Barro Colorado Island. 


Lycianthes solitaria (Blake) Standl. 


Solanum solitarium Blake, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 24: 21. 1922. 

Solanum calochromum Blake, published on the same page, is a synonym of 
Lycianthes nitida Bitter, both names being based in part on the same 
collections. 


Solanum hirsutissimum Standl., sp. nov. 


Plant herbaceous or suffrutescent, sparsely branched, about 1 meter high, 
the branchlets stout, densely pilose with soft divaricate several-celled hairs 
4-5 mm. long, densely prickly, the prickles stout, laterally compressed, 
divaricate or recurved, minutely glandular, 5-10 mm. long, at base 2.5-6 mm. 
broad; leaves solitary, the petioles 2.5—5 cm. long, pilose and prickly like the 
stems; leaf blades broadly ovate or rounded-elliptic, 13-19 cm. long, 9-16 
em. wide, acute or obtuse, at base truncate or subcordate, shallowly lobed, 
the lobes about 5 on each side, broadly triangular, acute or obtuse, up to 
2.5 em. long; leaves densely pilose on both surfaces, armed on the nerves with 
long straight prickles, the hairs of the upper surface long, simple, those of the 
lower surface sessile or short-stipitate, multiradiate at apex, the rays elongate, 
several-celled, simple hairs often mixed with the stellate ones; pedicels pseudo- 
lateral, solitary or geminate, slender, 1.5—2 em. long, densely pilose, unarmed, 
recurved in fruit; calyx campanulate, 5-lobed to the middle, outside densely 
pilose with slender simple glandular hairs, 17 mm. long, about 20 mm. broad, 
thin, the lobes broadly ovate, obtuse or. acutish; corolla 2 cm. long, densely 
glandular-pilose outside; stamens equal, the anthers subsessile, connivent, 
11 mm. long, 2 mm. wide, dehiscent by apical pores; ovary densely hirsute; 
fruit globose, orange-colored, about 3 cm. in diameter, smooth, sparsely hir- 
sute, the hairs long, bearing at the base numerous very short rays; seeds 
numerous, compressed, 2.5 mm. wide, scrobiculate. 

Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 715419, collected along the Rio 
Dupi, eastern Chiriqui, Panama, near sea level, Dec. 19, 1911, by H. Pittier 
(no. 5217). The following collections also belong here: 

PanaMA: Rio Tapia, Province of Panama, Standley 30659, 28293, 26157. 


16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


This plant is weedy in habit and ordinary in appearance, and should be 
referable to some earlier described species, but I have been unable to find any 
description or named specimens with which it agrees. 


Solanum allophyllum (Miers) Standl. 


Pionandra allophylla Miers in Seem. Bot. Voy. Herald 174. 1854. 

Cyphomandra allophylla Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 2: 417. 1882. 

Solanum ellipsoideibaccatum Bitter, Repert. Sp. Nov. Fedde 11: 486. 
1913. 


The specific name is too much like S. allotophyllum Dammer, but since 
the two are derived from different Greek words, both may be maintained in 
the genus. 


[Capsicum macrophyllum (H. B. K.) Standl. 


Witheringia macrophylla H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 14. 1818. 
Bassovia macrophylla Coulter, Bot. Gaz. 16: 145. 1891. 


-Parmentiera Valerii Standl., sp. nov. 


Tree about 12 meters high, the trunk 40 cm. in diameter, the crown narrow, 
sparsely branched, the branchlets ochraceous, glabrous, furnished with numer- 
ous pale lenticels; leaves subopposite, often fascicled at the nodes, the petioles 
slender, glabrous, 4-7 mm. long; leaflets 4-7, usually 5, slender-petiolulate, 
elliptic to obovate, 2.5-5 cm. long, acute, at base attenuate or cuneate, 
entire, glabrous, blackish when dried; flowers and fruits borne on the lower 
part of the trunk, fasciculate, the pedicels 2—2.5 cm. long; calyx green, 
spathaceous, cleft on one side to the base, rounded at apex, glabrous, 
3.2—-4 em. long; corolla white, 6—-7.5 cm. long, glabrous, funnelform, the tube 
6-7 mm. thick, 2-3 cm. wide in the throat, the lobes short, undulate; imma- 
ture fruit about 20 cm. long and 4 ecm. thick, green, smooth; seeds oval, 
compressed, about 6 mm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,451, collected in wet 
forest near Naranjos Agrios, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude 700 meters, 
Jan. 29, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 46411). 


Only one tree of this species was seen in the Cordillera of Tilara4n. This 
was 100 large to be climbed, and it was only by throwing sticks at the high 
crown that imperfect specimens of the leaves could be obtained. ‘The leaves 
seemed very immature, and when fully grown they probably exceed consider- 
ably the dimensions indicated in the description. : 

The two other species of Parmentiera known from Central America have 
uniformly three leaflets and winged petioles. 


JAN. 3, 1927 CHRISTIE AND COBB: RHIGONEMA 17 


ZOOLOGY .—Rhigonema (Isacis Serjabin, 1914; ?/sacis Baylis & 
Daubney, 1926; nec Jsacis Lespés, 1856), nemas inhabiting the 
intestine of millipeds1 J. R. Curistrze and N. A. Coss, 
Bureau of Plant Industry. 


The first rhigonema adequately described was Ascaris infecta Leidy, 
1849, from North America,—redescribed and figured in “A Flora and 
Fauna within Living Animals,’ Smithsonian Contributions to Knowl- 
edge, Washington, 1853; a second was Rhabditis acuminata D’ Udekem, 
1859, from Europe; a third, the type species, Rhigonema brevicolle 
Cobb, 1898, from Australia; a fourth, Jsacis multipapillata Serjabin, 
1914, from British East Africa. These rhigonemas constitute a very 
distinct and easily recognized homogeneous generic group. 


ISACIS 


The rhigonemas have been wrongly referred to Jsacis, Lespés, 
1856.2. We consider it impossible, from the literature or in any other 
way, satisfactorily to determine the nema from the investigation of 
which Lespés proposed his insufficiently characterized genus [sacis, 
and therefore think the name Jsacis should be abandoned. ‘The 
various efforts to rehabilitate it have resulted only in additional 
uncertainty and confusion. Of the well founded nemic genera, estab- 
lished, some of them before the date of Lespés’ article, some of them 
later, there are several to which Lespés’ nema might conceivably be 
assigned, but always with so much uncertainty as to make such a 
course wholly impracticable,—e.g. Deplogaster, Rhabditis, Anguillula, 
one or more of the Oxyuridae, and several others. Lespés said his 
specimens closely resembled Leptodera Dujardin; were three-lipped, 
oviparous, and with the vulva near the middle of the body. He 
declared the male sexual armature identical with that of Leptodera, 
except that there was no bursa. Lespés gave no clear indication that 
his specimens possessed a pharynx;—we presume his word ‘‘bouche”’ 
should be translated, ‘mouth,’ and not “pharynx” or ‘throat.’ 
His “three tubercles” we take to be the three lips he later mentioned, 
faintly shown also in his illustrations. The illustrations show the 
presence of two equal spicula, but whether joined distally, as in some 
rhabdites, is left uncertain. He clearly figured the accessory piece,— 


1 Received Nov. 27, 1926. 
2 Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. Zool. 5-6: 335. 1856. 


18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


in fact, of all the characters he listed, the nature of the accessory piece 
was one of the most clear and unmistakable. 

Nevertheless the characters he gave do not adequately define either 
a species or a genus. 


ISACIS AND RHIGONEMA 


While the features described by Lespés are inadequate for the 
characterization of either a species or a genus, they are ample, in 
our opinion, to exclude from Rhigonema any species having them. 
Yet Serjabin carefully described a Rhigonema, his R. multipapillata, 
and referred it to Isacis Lespés; (perhaps following Diesing,—a course 
we are unable to understand, for it is very manifest that Diesing’s 
‘‘Tsacis Lespés’’ designates a practically meaningless collection of either 
unrecognizable or incompatible forms). The same course has been 
followed by Baylis and Daubney, whose text seems to indicate that 
they used Serjabin’s description as a main source for the characteriza- 
tion of their Isacis Lespés. , 


RHIGONEMA, COBB, 1898. 


Cylindroid nemas having the following average size and form :— 


O.8_ 4.0,,B.3 25°54719 92. O.8_ 4.5,, 9.5 95 92. 4g 
23° 3.6, 4. Be Sie er, a ee aes 45°" sae 


with a more or less acute conoid posterior extremity; cuticle colorless, 
exceedingly finely striated, faintly winged if at all, sometimes with 
exceedingly minute retrorse prickles, especially anteriorly; lateral 
chords one-sixth to one-third as wide as the body; musculature 
oxyuroid,—e.g. in R. wnfectum, 16 equivalent fields, 4 in each quadrant; 
anteriorly subtruncate with three very flat, thin, mobile lips overlying 
an exceedingly shallow vestibule, leading to a small but definite 
triquetrous pharynx, this latter armed in front with three broad, in- 
wardly arcuate, lobed and denticulate, more or less retrorse onchia 
joined into a transverse triangle, at the blunt corners of which they are 
so “hinged” together as to be worked by antagonistic muscles: (1) 
very weak ‘‘extensors’”’ passing from the onchia radially outward and 
very slightly forward, the muscles doubtless aided by the elasticity 
of the labial region; (2) powerful retractors passing from the onchia 
backward and outward. Cephalic papillae, four, submedian, small; 


JAN. 3, 1927 CHRISTIE AND COBB: RHIGONEMA 19 


circular depressed amphidial openings small, but larger than the 
papillae, and arranged in practically the same circlet with them near 
the margin of the head. Oesophagus unusually broad and strong, 
with a more or less indistinct pharyngeal swelling but very distinct, 
broad, even napiform, highly muscular cardiac bulb, set off, fore and 
aft, by distinct constrictions and armed with a large triple corrugated 
valve. A circlet of nine (3 double; also 3 single, opposite the onchia 
and alternating with the 3 double) saccate, cephalic, often pigmented 
glands empty into the pharynx. Large cardia flat, three-lipped. The 
faintly tessellated intestine is set off by a distinct constriction. Renette 
bilateral. Anterior lip of the vulva usually more or less papilliform 
and slightly retrorse. ‘ ?’, the details as figured by Leidy, except 
that the pear-shaped swelling between each ovary and uterus should 
be regarded asaspermatheca. In young but mature females elongated 
cephalated sperms may occur in the unpaired enlargement sometimes 
present near the vulva. The numerous ellipsoidal, smooth eggs are 
deposited after segmentation has begun. Males with two equal 
spicula without accessory piece. ‘o. Nobursa. There is a single 
pre-anal ventral papilla in addition to the small pre- and post-anal 
“‘submedian”’ ones. ‘Type species, R. brevicolle. 

Habitat: Parasitic in the intestine of millipeds. 

_Julus and Spirobolus, both hosts of rhigonemas, represent groups of 
millipeds consisting of numerous species found in many different 
parts of the world. This fact, together with the morphology and dis- 
tribution of the known rhigonemas, warrants the prediction that species 
of Rhigonema will prove numerous. Parona’s Isacis modiglianir, 
1896, may perhaps prove to be a rhigonema. 

As the millipeds have come down to us from as long ago as the 
carboniferous era with relatively little morphological, and therefore 
presumably little physiological, change, their parasites are of unusual 
interest. Should the latter also have meanwhile evolved similarly, 
it is not unreasonable to expect from this source hints as to the primi- 
tive form of some nemic structures. 


20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 
940TH MEETING 


The 940th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Cosmos Club on 
Saturday evening, May 15, 1926. The meeting was called to order by Presi- 
dent Bowts at 8:17, with 55 persons in attendance. 

The program for the evening consisted of an address by Dr. Joun C. 
Mbreian on The Meaning of EKvolution in Indiidnal Experience. Discussed 
by Messrs. HawkEeswortn, C. A. BRiaas, CrirTENDEN, WRiGHT, Bowiz, 
TUCKERMAN, MAarMeErR, THONE and:others. 


9041ST MEETING 


The 941st meeting was held jointly with the Washington Academy of Sci- 
ences and the Chemical Society on Saturday evening, May 29, 1926, in the 
Auditorium of the Cosmos Club. The meeting was called to order by Presi- 
dent Burasss of the Academy at 8:16 P.M. with 144 persons in attendance. 

The program for the evening consisted of an address by Professor ERNST 
CouHEN of the University of Utrecht, on the subject: Metamorphosis of matter 
and the alleged constancy of our physico-chemical constants. The address was 
illustrated with lantern slides and with experiments. Discussed by Messrs. 
WasHBuRN, Norris, Hupson, Hey, Sosman, Linp, Wricut, and WHITE. 


942D MEETING 


The 942d meeting, the first meeting following the summer intermission, 
was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening, October 2, 1926. The 
meeting was called to order by President Bowi1k at 8:16 p.m. with 52 persons 
in attendance. 

The program for the evening consisted of an address by Dr. H. U. SverpRuP 
Director of the Geophysical Institute B of Bergen, on The tides on the north 
Siberian shelf; their bearing on the existence of land in the Arctic Sea, and 
their dynamics (Illustrated with lantern slides). 

The address was published in Turis JouRNAt for Dee. 3, 1926. 

The subject was discussed by Messrs. BreIT and Marmer. On behalf of 
the Society President Bowizr thanked the speaker for his interesting address. 

Upon call for informal communications Mr. W. D. Lamserrt called atten- 
tion to the work of Esclangon on the hypothesis of a cosmic tide due to the 
translation of the solar system through space. ‘This was discussed by Messrs. 
Breit and Wootarp. Mr. HawkeswortsH then spoke on a mathematical 
development of the law of disintegration of radium. 


943D MEETING 


The 943d meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening, 
October 16, 1926. The meeting was called to order by Vice-President AuLT 
at 8:17 p.m. with 65 persons in attendance. 

The program for the evening consisted of an address by Dr. C. G. ABBor, 
on A new observatory in Southwest Africa. (Illustrated with lantern slides.) 
The speaker described the present state of the investigation of the Smith- 
sonian Institution on the variation of the sun. For fifteen years, measure- 


JAN. 3, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY Fes 


ments were carried on by the method of Langley at Mount Wilson, Califor- 
nia, from 1905 to 1920. Beginning with July, 1918, daily observations, as 
far as possible, have been continued at Calama, Chile, and at Mount Monte- 
zuma, Chile, up to the present time. Starting with October, 1920, observa- 
tions were continued at Mount Harqua Hala, Arizona, until October, 1925, 
when the station was removed to Table Mountain, California, where the 
daily observations are still going on. 

A comparison of the daily values at Mount Montezuma and Mount Har- 
qua Hala indicates an average daily divergence of about 4 per cent. A 
considerable number of days failed of observations at both stations, and a 
large number failed of record at one station or the other. Hence it appeared 
that the satisfactory study of the variation of the sun requires at least one, 
and preferably two additional stations, to be located in the most cloudless 
and favorable high-altitude regions to be found in the world. 

The National Geographic Society, appreciating this need, and the world- 
wide bearing of the observations of the sun’s radiation, made a grant to Dr. 
ABBOT in the year 1925 to enable him to select the best available station in 
the eastern hemisphere, equip an observatory, and carry it on for approxi- 
mately four years. 

The speaker described the conditions desirable and the evidence which 
pointed to Algeria, Baluchistan and Southwest Africa as the most promising 
countries for the location. He described the investigations which were made 
in these countries, which resulted in the selection of Mount Brukkaros in 
Southwest Africa of which the altitude is 5,202 feet, the longitude, 17° 48’ 
E and the latitude 25° 52’ 8. As this station is situated in the central part of 
the Hottentot Reservation it was necessary to obtain permission of the 
Hottentots to locate there. The road, garage, reservoirs, observing tunnels 
and dwelling house were prepared during the summer of 1926, under the direc- 
tion of Mr. A. Dryden, Inspector of Public Works for the Government of 
Southwest Africa. 

An expedition under Mr. W. H. Hoover, field director, with Mr. F. A. 
Greeley, assistant, provided with sixty cases of apparatus and accessories, 
landed at Cape Town on September 13, 1926, and it was expected that actual 
observations on Mour:t Brukkaros would be undertaken by the end of October. 

The average rainfall in the region is 35 inches. It occurs mainly in the 
months of February and March, so that the months of December and Janu- 
ary which are the least satisfactory at the stations on Table Mountain and 
Montezuma will be very good months at Mount Brukkaros. The speaker 
was at or near Mount Brukkaros for twelve days in early March, which is the 
height of the rainy season, and during his stay eleven days of the twelve would 
have been satisfactory for the solar radiation observations. 

Doubt having been expressed by various critics as to the reality of the 
variation of the sun, and as to the reality of the influence which, according to 
Clayton, solar variation reflects on the weather, the speaker exhibited a 
number of slides confirming these supposed effects. Numerous slides illus- 
trative of the journey of explorations and the stations engaged in solar 
radiation work were shown. (Author’s abstract.) 

The address was discussed by Dr. Brett. 


944TH MEETING 


The 944th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening, 
October 30, 1926. The meeting was called to order by President Bowin 
at 8:17 with 36 persons in attendance. 


22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 1 


The program for the evening consisted of two papers. The first by W. P. 
WHITE was on Improvements in galvanometer stabilizers. Apparatus, particu- 
larly galvanometers, can be shielded from horizontal disturbances by hanging 
with wires or cords. Julius (1895), who used three wires, showed that the 
suspended body is apt to perform vibrations about a horizontal axis through its 
own center of gravity. He tried to avoid these by attaching his wires at the 
same level as the center of gravity and subsequently arranged to place the 
galvanometer so that its head came at the point of least motion, that is, at 
the center of gravity. This produced a relatively complicated and expensive 
apparatus. He put his dampers also at the level of the center of gravity. 
These dampers were crossed vanes of sheet metal attached to the stabilizer 
and immersed in pots of heavy oil. 

In some cases it has been found that these secondary rotational oscilla- 
tions are negligible. When this is the case the construction can be much 
simplified. A suggestion coming from the Reichsanstalt is that the damper 
should be put below. This is both easier and more convenient and tends to 
damp the secondary oscillations, which Julius’ arrangement damps as little 
as possible. 

With swing coil galvanometers exceedingly slight changes of level produce 
large deflections, and it seems probable that an instrument suspended from 
three long, slender wires would be tipped through differential expansion if the 
room temperature is not especially uniform and constant. This difficulty is 
almost entirely avoided if the instrument is suspended from two wires which 
hang from two opposite arms of a horizontal cross whose two other arms are 
supported from above and which is free to shift its position slightly in case the 
wires expand differently. 

Heavy oil is an admirable damper. An instrument floating in the center . 
of a moderately large tank of it—one containing perhaps from twenty to 
forty dollars worth of oil—would probably be stabilized for almost any con- 
ceivable conditions. Damping is almost indispensable with suspended bodies 
(oil damping is generally used), but the damper transmits some motions while 
it quenches others. If the vessel of oil is relatively wide impulses coming 
from its walls, that is, from the building, are largely damped by the oil itself 
before they reach the suspended apparatus. Damping alone, however, will 
not insure complete absence of vibration because the damper has no action 
until some motion is present. 

Since the vibrations of apparatus, especially of suspended apparatus, are 
largely influenced by resonance, general conclusions can not be drawn from 
the performance in a few instances. (Author’s abstract.) 

The paper was discussed by Messrs. Bowin, McKrruan, TuCcKERMAN and 
HUMPHREYS. 

The second paper of the program was by G. R. Wait on The magnetic per- 
meability of iron and magnetite in high-frequency alternating fields. (Illustrated 
with lantern slides). Arkadiew measured the absorption of electric waves by 
two parallel wires, and found that the permeability of iron and nickel wires 
varied with the wave-length. The values for both iron and nickel decreased 
to very small values when the wave-length was decreased to 1.3 cm. He 
explained this decrease in the ferro-magnetic property in iron and nickel on 
the basis of the natural vibrations of the elementary magnets. From these 
results, together with those of other workers, particularly those of Kart- 
schagin and those of Wwedensky and Theodortschik, the conclusion was 
drawn that the elementary magnets had several periods of oscillation. In 


JAN. 3, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 23 


view of the attention this subject has received and must continue to receive 
in the field of magnetism, the author undertook a repetition of the work of 
Wwedensky and Theodortschik. 

Two experimental methods have been followed, the one making use of a 
high-frequency oscillating tube circuit and a resonating circuit, the other 
employing two high-frequency tube circuits and one audio-frequency circuit. 
The former is known as the resonance method and the other as the heterodyne 
beat method. 

Various forms of iron, such as filings, wires, and powder, were used as well 
as magnetite in the form of crystals and powder. The resonance method 
extended from about 50 to 160 meters wave-length, while the heterodyne 
beat method covered the range from about 80 to 1,700 meters. 

Wwedensky and Theodortschik found an abnormal increase in the perme- 
ability of iron wires at about 100 meters which was attributed by them to the 
resonance of the elementary magnets. The present investigation failed to 
confirm this result. Although apparent anomalies at first were found, it was 
discovered that they were all due to resonance between various parts of the 
‘circuit. Upon eliminating this difficulty no abnormal change in permeability 
over the range covered was found. Consequently, the author feels justified 
in concluding that if elementary oscillators exist, hey have failed to resonate 
at the frequencies employed. 

Various errors in the work of Wwedensky and Pheadertchit were pointed 
out. Some of these may have been largely responsible in producing the ap- 
parent anomalies observed by them. (Author’s abstract.) 

The subject was discussed by Messrs. BAuER, McKEEHAN, SOSMAN and 
Breit. The complete paper will be published in an early number of the 
Physical Review. 

Upon invitation of the President, Dr. BAurR explained informally the 
status of the International Research Council and affiliated Unions. 

H. A. Marmer, Recording Secretary. 


GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


406TH MEETING 


The 406th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club May 6, 1925. 

Program: T. A. JAGGER: Engulfment in volcanism. The speaker called 
attention to the published result of measurement of volume of rock engulfed! 
in the explosive eruptions at Kilauea in May, 1924. Engulfment accounted 
for 253 times the amount ejected explosively. This observation was made by 
Mr. R. H. Finch at the Observatory. The engulfed rim rock equalled over 
seven billion cubic feet, equivalent to a cylindrical column reaching down 
3,000 feet below the bottom of the remnant pit, and having the diameter of 
that bottom. This breccia must partially choke the vent to great depths. 
The explosions appeared to be actuated by steam, rising through orifices in 
the jumble of fallen crags, ejecting nothing but old and mostly crystalline 
rocks, ‘and vented by different parts of the bottom area. The explosion phe- 
nomena followed three months of down-faulting and crateral subsidence, and 
accompanied acceleration of engulfment already initiated. Engulfment 
phenomena in great volume have been common in the past without any explo- 
sion. ‘The sequence of phenomena from 1914 to 1924 agrees with the hypoth- 


1 Bull. Haw. Vole. Obs., December, 1924. 


24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 


esis that tension of magma opened fault rifts in the larger edifice, lava in 
the pit shaft lowered hydrostatically, the pit walls collapsed into the rift when 
deprived of the magmatic pressure, ground water entered the shaft between 
hot lava below and a plugged vent above, and a geyser mechanism resulted. 
Thereafter the gas tension in the magma reasserted itself, the lava rose and 
shut off the ground water, and in July the lava reappeared for a fortnight in 
the bottom of the pit. 

Dr. E. 8. SHEPHERD suggests that the enormous amount of weathered rock 
engulfed would feed oxygen in the form of ferric iron oxide to new attack by 
hydrogen, so that a large amount of heat would be liberated, and the ferric 
iron would be reduced to ferrous. The abundant surfaces of the breccia 
would make diffusion possible in a rising magma charged with hydrogen, 
resulting in oxidation of the hydrogen thoroughly but not too rapidly, and in 
oxidized gas at the surface of the lava lakes. This is what we find. An 
excess of ferric over ferrous oxide in the engulfed material of only one percent 
more than in the glass would raise the temperature of one tenth of the breccia 
from 20°C. to 1200°C. yielding heat enough to keep the voleano going for 
years. (Author’s Abstract.) ; 

J. D. Srars, Recording Secretary. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


The Smithsonian Institution has received recently the botanical library 
which was presented to the Institution several years ago by Captain John 
Donnell Smith, of Baltimore. This is one of the finest private botanical 
libraries of the United States, and is especially rich in works relating to the 
flora of tropical America. 


Mr. ExuswortH P. Krurie and Mr. ALBERT C. SmitH, of the National 
Museum, who are engaged in botanical exploration in Colombia, have had 
headquarters for several weeks at Cartagena. This port is of interest be- 
cause it is the type locality of many species described by Jacquin over 150 
years ago. A visit has been made also to Turbaco, where Humboldt collected 
the types of many plant species. 


x 


GS OF THE ACADEMY AND 


ne Antropol Society. 
ee of the affiliated societies wil appear on this page if 
a he thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month. 


Popes, : 


on The Philosophical Society . eee ae pe ae See a ao o 
The Geological Society... isc. es oS eee 


Oe a8 He 0ew 66 te te ae ee es hae erin) o: 


Screntiric NOTES AND News. 


oe of 
% 
Xi Zé t 
~ ge 
~~ 
ms 


Vol. 17 January 18, 1927 No. 2 


pee 
AF egy nia 


ey laa~ 
ge ae 
JOURNAL (x 48291927. %) 


PRY | of 


A 
14 21S 
SIONAL ME 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
OF SCIENCES 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


D. F. Hewerr S. J. MaucuLy AGNES CHASE 
GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY 


ASSOCIATE EDITORS 


L. H. Apams S. A. RoHwer 
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
E, A. GoLtpMAN G. W, STose 
BIOLOGICAL SOCIBIY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
R. F. Griaes J. R. Swanton 
_ BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


E. WicHERS 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


> 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 


EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 
BY THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


’ Mr. Royant AnD GUILFORD AVES. 
BALTIMORE, MaryLanD 


Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at speciai rate of postage provided for 
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 


Ret 
% 


a, 


; This ae the official « organ ee he 
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washingto 
(1) short original papers, written or co 
short notes of current scientifie lite 
(3) proceedings and programs of meeti: 
notes of events connected with the scienti 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of e 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corre 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript rea 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on 
8 isstfe of the Je OURNAL for the cies fourth or nine 


. M anuseripis may. be sent to any mpuiier of th Board of 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing 
editors cannot suderiate to do more Bee ier oO 


ee met. hy the author. . aaa 
Proof.—In order to frethitate. soni pabeatorh no saceat will bat sen 

unless requested. ba is urged that manuscript be submitted in final fo. 

se exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. : 
_ Authors’ eres: Pee Pe will be furnished at i the followin sched le 


Copies 4pp. sé pa. 12 pp. paca tl 
50 | $.85. $1.65 $2.55 rem 
100 P00 BBO. med 
180 Sie 22a ee OA es Oreo 
200: 32 bo A. 80 5. Hoe, 
200 Pa tag ene 45 5 AD aA 6. 25 e.! 


An aditionn! charge of 25 cents will be made for each split p page. : 
Covers bearing the name of the author ‘and title oF the article, t! incl p 
nation and date of i issue, will be furnished when ordered. en 
As-an author will not eRe see proof, his raqnus for extra copies 
should invariably be attached to the first page of ae Epes ay, be a 
The rate of Subscription per ois i 
Semi-monthly sa Osa EMEC 
Monthly MUMIDOER., yi ake ici an es oii wlan as ok a dias win alee sme 


_ Remittances should ‘be made payable to ‘acento. hence of StienmeaY ant 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Waking pe 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. ay . 
Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other publications. 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim i is ‘ma e€ 
within thirty days after date of the eto Ee issue, eS see 


~ *Volume ‘a however, from June 19, 4911, to December 19, 1911, will be neat ne $3. 00. “Spocial rates 
are given to members. of scientific societies affiliated with. the Solver iiens te a ih 


Boek 


tips 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vor. 17 JANUARY 18, 1927 No. 2 


SPECTROSCOPY .—Regularities in the arc spectrum of lanthanum.' 
W. F. Meccers, Bureau of Standards. 


Although regularities among lines of the spark spectrum of lantha- 
num (La II) have been known for some time,” nothing concerning the 
structure of the arc spectrum of this element (La I) has heretofore 
been published. With the aid of new data, the analysis of the La II 
spectrum has recently been extended,? and the first regularities in the 
La I spectrum were detected. The new descriptive material included 
an extensive list of temperature classifications of lanthanum lines by 
Dr. King and Miss Carter,‘ and some unpublished Zeeman-effects ob- 
served by the late Professor B. E. Moore. The temperature clas- 
sification has been especially valuable on account of its division of the 
La lines into two sets, one set (La I) characterizing the neutral atom 
and the other (La II) the ionized atom of lanthanum. The mul- 
tiplets in either spectrum have a large wave length range so that 
estimation of line intensities becomes very difficult and there is further- 
more a possibility that certain deviations from the intensity rules 
might be expected for heavy atoms like La. Nevertheless, the es- 
timates of line intensities by King and Carter have been very useful 
in the construction of multiplets and it appears that the intensity 
rules are usually fulfilled, at least qualitatively. In asimilar manner 
deviations from the Landé g values might be expected to produce 
some strange Zeeman-effects for La I lines since such have already 


1 Published by permission of the Director of the Bureau of Standards. Received 
December 9, 1926. 
2Porpow, Ann. der Physik, 45: 147. 1914. 
Pautson, Ann. der Physik, 45: 1203. 1914. 
Goupsmit, Kon. Akad. Wet. Amsterdam, 33: No. 8. 1924. 
3 Muaeers, J.O.8.A.&R.8.I1. In press. 
4 Kine and Carter, Astrophys. Journ. In press. 


25 


26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 


TABLE 1.—ReEwuativeE TERMS IN THE La I Spectrum 


TERM TERM LEVEL 


SYMBOL VALUE SEPARATION OR TEMES SA TSORES) 
a2D, 00.07 a?P, b?P, a?D, b?D, c?D, d2D, a2F, b?F, c2F, dF, e2F, 
| I, I, II, IV, a‘D, a‘F, béF, atG 
1053 .2 
a’?D3 1053 .24 
a‘F, 2668 .27 a’P, a2D, b’D, c?D, a2F, b2F, c2F, a*b, a‘F, b4F, a4G 
341.8 
a‘F;  3010..0- 
484 .6 
ath, 3494 .6- 
627 .0 
a‘hs 4121 64 
I 14804 .1 a2D, atF 
aD. 15031.77 a2D, a‘F 
1506 .7 
ial 15196 .8 a2D, a‘F 
a2D3  16538.411 
a’F, 16856 .97 a?D, a‘F 
1053 .3 


b2D2? 17699.8 
a’F, 17910.24 


7 a2D, a‘ 


247 3 
b2p; 17947.1 4 
a4G; 18156.97 a2D, atl 
CDs alsin a a2D, a‘F 
447 .0 
N20 
a‘G.  18603.9-|: 
525.4 
a‘Gs  19129.3- 
c2p3; 19379.4]4 
a’?P, 20019.1| 7 a2D, a‘F 
988 .1 
a4F,  20083.0/7 a2D, a‘P 
178.3 
aiGe  20117.44 
eee WOO A= 290.8 
IT OBS 2) = 
425.0 
a4F,  20763.2 - 
620.8 
2B 20972 1 ler a2D, a‘F 
a4F;  21384.0 J 
475.8 
bab ee21447.9 2 
e2F,? 21662.5 a2D, a4 


JAN. 18, 1927 MEGGERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF LANTHANUM 27 


cro, VAECE _ spranatvon Sens 

at,  (22246.67 a2D, a‘P 
192.8 

atD2, 22439 .4- 
364.9 

a‘D3  22804.3- 
498 9 

a4D, 23303 .2.) 

dF; 23875.07 a2D, at 
534.7 

a@F,  24409.74 

b4F, 24507 .83 a2D 
476.5 

b’F;  24984.3- 

e7F,? 25218.1| 7 a2D 
396 .0 

b4F, 25380. 3- 424 9 


e?F3;? 25643.0}. 616.7 
bal. 125997'.04 


III 21022 .7. a2D, a‘F 

b?P1? 27968.77 a2 
953.7 

bP? 28722'.4. 

d?D3? 29502 .37 a2D 
62.7 

d2D.? 29565 .0. 

IV 30788 .5 a2D 

V 30897 .0 a2D 


been noted*® for La II lines. Even though the available Zeeman- 
effect data for La I lines are not very precise, they nevertheless serve 
to identify most of the important levels in the doublet- and quartet- 
systems of spectral terms. 

The relative terms, comprising 48 levels in the La I spectrum are 
presented in Table 1 in which the successive columns contain (1) the 
term symbol for each level, (2) the relative energy value on the basis of 
a?D. = 0.0, (8) the level separations of the complex terms, and (4) 
asummary of the term combinations. Until better criteria are availa- 
ble the spectroscopic symbols suggested for several of the levels must 
remain in doubt; five of the levels are tentatively represented by 
Roman numerals. 


5 Goupsmit, Kon. Akad. Wet. Amsterdam, 33: No. 8. 1924. 


28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 


As in scandium’ and yttrium,’ likewise in lanthanum the lowest 
energy (normal state) of the atom is represented by a doublet-D, 
and the first metastable state by a quartet-F term. According to 
the theory of Heisenberg and Hund? the former results from the ds? 
configuration of 3 electrons, and the latter from d?s; the first triad of 
quartet terms (4D, ‘F, ‘G) arising from the d2p arrangement. 

It is of interest to compare the interval ratios of the metastable 
quartet-F term with the theoretical values, since in yttrium a most 
remarkable agreement was found’ for the analogous term. The 
interval rule is indeed obeyed by this term almost equally well in 
all three spectra (Se I, Yt I, La I), as can be seen from the following: 


Separations Ratios 
Theoretical a aes gos Ag ot — 900 OO mene OO 
21 Se 66.955 42°) $2.5) 4. 380.8 = 9 00) 27 aie OGe ee onus 
39 Yt 264.1 °°: 7199 4 9: 14103 = QL00 Fs 706 onee 
57 La 627-0 9: 4846". :, 341.8) = 900: 2) 6) 9aire ee ao0 


If this is not a coincidence it indicates that small, progressive changes 
in the interval ratios occur for analogous terms in spectra of elements 
In successive periods. 

The combinations of terms in Table 1 are given in detail in Table 2, 
beginning with combinations of doublet with doublet terms. These 
are followed in order by doublet-quartet, quartet-quartet, and 
quartet-doublet combinations. The symbols and term values of 
the low levels are placed at the head of the table, and the data for 
the higher levels at the left margin. The differences of the combining 
term values are represented in the body of the table by the vacuum 
wave numbers of the spectral lines. Wave length data are printed 
immediately above the wave numbers, and are followed by parentheses 
containing intensity estimates and temperature classes as given by 
King and Carter. The wave lengths shorter than 5500A are from 
the measurements of Wolff!® and the longer ones are by Kiess;" 
the former being converted from Rowland’s scale to the International 
Angstrom scale of wave lengths in which the latter were measured. 


6 Mreaarrs, This Journat 14: 419. 1924. 
7Meaaers, This Journan 14: 419. 1924. 
Meraaers and Moors, This Journau 15: 207. 1925. 
Mraaers and Kiuss, J.0O.8. A. & R.8.1., 12: 417. 1926. 
§ HEISENBERG, Zeitschr. f. Phys. 32: 841. 1925. 
Hunp, Zeitschr. f. Phys. 33: 345. 1925. 
9 Mreaaers and Moors, This Journau 15: 207. 1925. 
10 WourFrF, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Phot. 3: 395. 1905. 
11 Kiuss, Sci. Pap. Bur. Stand. 17: 324. 1921. 


yan. 18, 1927 


Vv 
30897 .0 


‘LV 
30788.5 


d2D3? 
29502 .3 


d2Do? 
29565 .0 


b?2P2? 
28722 .4 


b2Pi? 
27968.7 


III 
27022.7 


e2F'3? 
25643 .0 


e2F4? 
25218.1 


d?F4 
24409.7 


d?F'3 
23875.0 


c?F'4? 
21662 .5 


b2F4 
21447.9 


b?F3 
20972.1 


a2P2 
20019.1 


a2Pi 
20197 .4 


e2Ds 
19379 .4 


e2D2 
18172.3 


b?D3 
17947.1 


b?D2? 
17699 .8 


a2F4 
17910.2 


3349 .81(3 IIT A) 
29843 .88 


3362.03(12 IIT A) 
29735 .42 


3514.07 (20 II A) 
28448 .93 


os 2 


28511.8 


3613.10(30 II) 
27669.18 


— 2 


25969 .7 


4065 .58(30 IT) 
24589. 80 


4137.02 (40 I) 
24165.17 


4280 .27(100 1) 
23356 .47 


4380.56(12 II A) 
22821.74 


4850.79(20 1) 
20609 .44 


4901.86 (25 I) 


» 20394.75 


19918.9 


5271.19(150 I) 
18965.78 


5455.11(400 I) 
18326 .36 


5839.78(20 IT A) 
17119.19 


5917.62(15 II A) 
16894 .01 


16646.6 


5930.60(400 I) 
16857 .05 


MEGGERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF LANTHANUM 29 


TABLE 2.—ComBINaTIONS IN THE La I SpectTRUM 


a2De 
00.0 


3235.64(5 IIT A) 
30896 .90 


3247 .03(8 II A) 
30788 .50 


3388.60(12 IL A) 
29502 .27 


3381.42(15 II A) 
29564 .95 


3480.61(8 III A) 
28722 .40 


3574.41(50 IT) 
27968 .68 


3699 .54(12 III A) 
27022 .87 


3898 .60(40 IT) 
25642 .97 


4187 .31(125 I) 
23874 .97 


4766 .90(100 I) 
20972 .15 


4993 .85(20 IT) 
20019 .06 


4949 .76(200 I) 
20197 .36 


5158 .69(80 I) 
19379 .38 


5501.35(300 T) 
18172 .32 


5570.38(5 II A) 
17947 .11 


5648 .26(80 IIT) 
17699 .69 


30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 


TABLE 2—Continued 


a2D3 
1053.2 


a2F3 
16856.9 


a?D3 
16538 .4 


a2D»2 
15031.7 


15196.8 


14804 .1 


atp 
23303 .2 


atDs 
22804 .3 


atDo 
22439 .4 


atD1 
22246 .6 


atk; 
21384 .0 


atl’s 
20763 .2 


atF3 
20338 .2 


atFe 
20083 .0 


b‘F’s 
25997 .0 


btF4 
25380.3 


b1F3 
24984 .3 


btF2 
24507 .8 


atGs 
20117.4 


atGs 


19129.3 


atGu 
18603 .9 


atGs 
18156.9 


6325 .92(150 1) 
15803 .62 


6455 .98(300 I) 
15485 .25 


13978.5 


7068.32 (100 II) 
14143 .73 


7270.08(5 II A) 
13751.24 


4493 .14(25 I) 
22249 .93 


4596 .18(10 I) 
21751. 12 


21386 .2 


5072.12(1 III A) 
19710. 14 


5185 .89(20 IT) 
19285 .18 


5253 .46(100 I) 
19029 .80 


4109.49(15 II A) 
24327 .09 


4177 .47(30 I) 
23931.18 


4262.35(15 IT A) 
23454. 67 


5696.19 (40 I) 
17550.73 


5845 .02(6 IT A) 
17103 .85 


a?2Do 
00.0 


5930 .60(400 TI) 


16857 .05 


6044.85(2 IIT A) 


16538 .44 


6650 .80(100 I A) 


15031.65 


6578 .52 (400 T) 


15196.81 


6753 .04(50 I A) 


14804 .07 


a ? 


22804.3 


4455.24(10 IT A) 


22439 . 12 


4493 .82(10 I A) 


22246 .57 


ae 2 


20338.2 | 


4977 .92(8 IT A) 


20083.11 


24984.3 


4079. 18(40 I) 


24507 .87 


5506.07 (40 II) 
18156.76 


———— Sanna 


JAN. 18, 1927 


aiD. 
23303 .2 


a4D3 
22804 .3 


a‘D> 
22439 .4 


aD; 
22246 .6 


atFs 
21384 .0 


atF, 
20763 .2 


aiF 
20338 .2 


atF2 
20083 .0 


biFs 
25997 .0 


btF4 
25380 .3 


b4F3 
24984 .3 


biF2 
24507 .8 


atGs 
20117.4 


atGs 
19129.3 


atGy 
18603 .9 


atG3 
18156 .9 


II 
27022 .7 


e&F3? 
25643 .0 


e? Fy? 
25218 .1 


d?Fs 
24409 .7 


a‘F; 
4121.6 


5211.87 (300 IT) 
19181.65 


5791.33 (400 I) 
17262 .40 


6007.37(50 III A) 
16641 .63 


4570. 14(250 I) 
21875 .06 


4702 .63(10 I) 
21258 .77 


6249 .92(500 I) 
15995.79 


6661.40(80 I A) 
15007.71 


6903.07(1 ITI A) 
14482 .31 


21096.5 


20288. 1 


MEGGERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF LANTHANUM 


TABLE 2—Continued 


atFy 
3494.6 


5046 .87(60 IIL) 
19808 .76 


5177 .30(300 IT) 
19309. 73 


5588 .35(80 IT) 
17889 .42 


5789 .23(250 I) 
17268 .66 


5935.26(15 IT A) 
16843 . 80 


4442 67(12 IT) 
22502 . 67 


4567 .92(200 I) 
21885. 67 


4652 .12(20 I) 
21489 .61 


6394.24 (600 1) 
15634.76 


6616.59(80 I) 
15109 .37 


14662.3 


22148 .4 


4602 .04(20 IIT) 
21723 .42 


4779 .90(4 IT) 
20915.13 


20293 .2 


5050.56 (80 IT) 
19794 .26 


5145.42 (200 IT) 
19429 .36 


5631.22(100 I) 
17753. 24 


5769.37 (80 I) 
17328 .12 


5855.58(15 IIT A) 
17073 .00 


4468 .98(25 11) 
22370 .22 


4549 .51(50 I) 
21974.24 


4650.35 (15 1) 
21497 .75 


6410.98 (300 I) 
15593 .93 


6600.17(50 IT A) 
15146 .97 


4163.30(8 III A) 
24012 .65 


4417.11(6 III) 
22632 .89 


4501.59(10 IT A) 
22208 .15 


21399 .7 


dl 


a‘F 
2668.2 


4964.81(4 IIT A) 
20136.1€ 


5056 .46(80 IT) 
19771.20 


5106.24 (150 IT) 
19578 .44 


5657 .74(50 IT) 
17670.00 


5740.65 (100 I) 
17414 .82 


4479 .82(15 II A) 
22316 .08 


21839 .6 


6454.51(200 I) 
15488 .77 


4104 .88(60 I) 
24354 .43 


22974.8 


32 JOURNAL OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


TABLE 2—Concluded 


_vou. 17, No. 2 


atk’; atk, atl’; atl. 
4121.6 3494.6 3010.0 2668.2 
dF: ? 4791.38(5 IT) 4714 .13(5 I) 
23875 .0 20380 .4 20864 .98 21206 .92 
cE? 5699 .38(5 IIT) 5502.66(10 ITI) 5359.72(2 III A) 
21662 .5 17540 .91 18168 .01 18652 .52 
b2F4 5769 .99(25 III A) 5568 .48(50 IL) 5422.09(3 III A) 
21447.9 17326.25 17953 .25 18437 .96 
b?F3 5720.03(10 III A) 5565.74 (20 IT) ? 
20972.1 17477 .59 17962 .10 18303 .9 
a?P2 5877 .63(2 IIT A) 5761.84(60 I) 
20019.1 17008 .96 17350.76 
a?Pi 5703 .29(10 TIT) 
20197 .4 17528 .90 
eDs 6293.57(80 II A) 6107 .27(12 II A) 5982 .34(5 III A) 
19379 .4 15884 .85 16369 .43 16711.26 
c2De 6593.46 (60 I) 6448.15(60? II A) 
18172.3 15162 .37 15504 .05 
b?Ds 6917.24(10 III A) 6692 .88(30 I A) 6543 .15(500 I) 
17947 .1 14452 .65 14937.13 15278 .95 
b?De —= % 6650.80(100 I A) 
17699.8 14689 .8 15031.65 
a? === 2 6934.98(50 ITT) 6709 .50(200 I) 
17910.2 13788 .6 14415 .76 14900. 14 
a?F3 iy 7219.88(15 II A) © 7045.93 (300 IT) 
16856.9 13362.3 13846. 83 14188 .67 
a?D3 7664 .33(10? IIT) u a 2 
16538 .4 13043 .87 13528 .4 13870 .2 
a?De 8316.03(2 IV A) 8086 .07(15 IIT) 
15031.7 12021.67 12363 .55 
II 8203.39(1) K 7979.75(3n?) K 
15196.8 12186 .73 12528. 30 
I 8839.67(1) K 8476 .48(2) K 
14804. 1 11309 .54 11794.11 


Comparisons of the 3-electron spectra, Sc I, Yt I, La IJ, can best 
be drawn from energy diagrams, and for this purpose references will 
be made to Figures 1, 2, and 3, in which the various spectral terms 
are plotted as rectangles at distances from the zero axis proportional 
to their energies.. The vertical height of each rectangle represents 
the range of the sub-levels in the term; the increase of these separa- 


JAN. 18, 1927 MEGGERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF LANTHANUM 33 


tions with atomic number is very noticeable. Each line connecting 
two spectral terms represents all the combination possibilities between 
the sub-levels of the combining terms, that is, a mulivplet of spectral 
lines. 


40000 


30000 


20000 


10000 


25 25 2D 2p 20 = Js 20. ve 4g = 25 4p 4p H fe 4¢ 5G 4G 


Fig. 1—Energy diagram for the Sc I spectrum 


Whereas in Yt I the quartet-F is about 11000 em.— above the doub- 
let-D term, in La I it is only about 3000 units high. The value of 
quartet-F relative to doublet-D has not yet been established in 
Se I, although the intersystem combinations have been sought for 
diligently. ‘The reason is probably found in the weakness of these 
connecting lines. In the spark spectra of these three elements a 
remarkable increase of intensity of intersystem combinations was 
observed? as the atomic number increased. A similar state of affairs 
is now strikingly evident in the are spectra; no intersystem connection 
has been detected in Sc I, the strongest one in Yt I has intensity 20, 
while in La I the strongest one is marked 500. In the absence of 
intersystem combinations for Sc I the low quartet-F term in Fig. 1 


JAN. 18,1927 WHERRY: SOIL REACTIONS OF SAPROPHYTIC ORCHIDS oO 


is tentatively placed 10000 cm. above doublet-D. Laporte has pre- 
dicted” that this difference will be about 11000 cm.—. 

My plan is to extend the analysis of the La I spectrum in con- 
nection with investigations of the Zeeman-effects and hyperfine 
structures of the spectral lines. I take this opportunity to thank Dr. 
King and Miss Carter for their kindness in lending me their tables of 
intensities and temperature classes in advance of publication, and I 
wish also to acknowledge the helpfulness of Professor Moore’s ob- 
servations of Zeeman-effects in giving clues for this analysis. 


PLANT ECOLOGY.—The soil reactions of some saprophytic orchids. 
Epe@ar T. Wuerry, Bureau of Chemistry. 


The soil reaction preferences of a number of native orchids have 
been recorded by the writer in three previous papers, the most com- 
plete list of data being in “‘Soil Acidity.”” Subsequent to the prepara- 
tion of that article opportunities have been presented to study many 
of the included species further, as well as to extend the work to others. 
The results to date on the saprophytic species commonly known as 
Coral-roots are here tabulated, and supplementary notes on a color 
form of one of them and the range of another are given. 


TABLE 1.—So1t REeaAcTIONS OF SEVEN SAPROPHYTIC ORCHIDS 


SOIL REACTION-RANGF AND APPARENT 
OPTIMUM (X) 


SPECIES STUDIED STATES IN NUM- : - Sten Ge 
(Cc. = CORALLORRHIZA) WHICH TESTS Ber or | Medi- Sub- | Minim- Minim- 
(H, = HEXALECTRIS) WERE MADE TESTS acid acid acid = alk. 
. — 
oh || seal aren Rosia Pers aaa eee aS f= 
mo Vile he) 2 teal 
Wamactlata (mUIt.)......+0--8- Md.-Me. 25 |—|x{|X}]}x}]x}]—|—|—-|— 
exouonvoOrniza . 2628. . wc ee: Va.-Md. 50 |}—}x{|x|]Xj]x]—}|—|—|]— 
ee rridart@or. ii. phe ee. Si) ANG OY .-Me. QDi ie be ex) | x: (ox) 2p xe 
Pa SLCTIONG 4. occa) k Oa. Va.-Md. 25 |}—}|—|—|x|x|X/]x/]x]— 
(OL SPF 15 er ee Mich.-Ont. 10 | —| —| —| —| x |X] x] x] — 
Wrriicranilia...........0......) Ela: 5 |—}| —| —| —| —| x] X}] x] — 
iaspleata. (aplit-)t. s. $228 220.0 ¢Bla.-Md. 25 |—|—|.—| —| x | x|X]|]x]|x 
p p 


The data presented in Table 1 have been obtained chiefly by stirring 
up the soil from the immediate vicinity of the plant roots with four 
times its volume of distilled water, allowing the mixture to settle for 


22 Laporte, Zeitschr. f. Phys. 39: 123. 1926. 
1 Received Dec. 13, 1926. 
2Smithsonian Report 1920: 264. 1922. 


36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 


several minutes, and determining the active acidity or alkalinity of the 
extract with a double-wedge comparator. The summarized results 
are grouped in reaction-classes designated by names rather than by 
numerical values, in accordance with suggestions recently published 
in ‘‘Soil Reaction in Relation to Horticulture.®”’ 

In the course of these studies a well-marked pale form of the 
Autumn Coral-root, Corallorrhiza odontorhiza Nutt., has been recog- 
nized, and as no such form of this species appears to have been named, 
it is here placed on record as: 


Corallorhiza odontorhiza forma flavida n. f.—Plant in every respect like 
the typical form of the species except in the lack of all traces of purple color, 
the lip being pure white without spots, and the sepals, ovaries, bracts, and 
stem being dull yellow, of varying shades of Ridgway’s no. 23. 

Type locality, ravine west of Pierce Mill, Washington, D. C., just outside 
of Rock Creek Park, in the Piedmont physiographic province; collected by 
Mrs. Nellie C. Knappen, September 15, 1924; type specimen in the U. 8S. 
National Herbarium, no. 1,285,622. 

A large colony was found by the writer a few hundred meters north of Bull 
Run Postoffice, Fairfax County, Virginia, October 13, 1926, also in the Pied- 
mont, and the accompanying illustration is made from a photograph taken 
there. Three stalks from this locality have been deposited in the National 
Herbarium, preserved in a mixture of acetic acid, ethanol, formaldehyde, 
and glycerol, in which their color and texture appear to remain essentially 
unchanged. The habitat at both localities is a thin oak-pine woods on clayey 
soil, of low subacid reaction, active acidity 10-25, (pH 6.0-5.6). 


It is also desired to place on record an extension of range of the 
Crested Coral-root Hezalectris spicata (Walt.) Barnhart. The nor- 
thernmost locality at which this plant appears to have been reported 
in the literature is Williamsburg, in the Coastal Plain of Virginia, 
where it was found by the late E. J. Grimes. There are, however, 
specimens in the U. S. National Herbarium collected by Miss M. J. 
Rathbun at Delaplane, in the Blue Ridge of Virginia, considerably 
further northwest. In mid-August, 1923, a single flowering stalk of 
this species was found by Miss F. W. Layton on an islet in Rhodes 
River, about 12 kilometers southwest of Annapolis, in Anne Arundel 
County, in the Coastal Plain province of Maryland, its range being 
thus extended into a new state, and to a point 150 kilometers north 
of Williamsburg and 125 kilometers east of Delaplane. The plant 
was pressed and deposited in the National Herbarium. In July of 


3 Amer. Hort. Soc. Bull. 4. 1926. 
4 Rhodora 24: 150. 1922. 


JAN. 18, 1927 WHERRY: SOIL REACTIONS OF SAPROPHYTIC ORCHIDS oO” 


the following year another stalk appeared a few meters away; this 
was not disturbed, but did not reappear in 1926, nor could any trace 
of the species be found this year in spite of the most careful search 
of the vicinity. Evidently, as in the case of certain other native 
orchids (e.g., Bastphyllaea corallicola, Isotria verticillata, Trvphora 
trianthophora,) the roots may lie dormant in the ground for two years 
or more without sending up flowering stalks, but in time attain suffi- 
cient vigor to bloom, produce seed, and so keep the species from 
dying out. 


Fig. 1.—Corallorrhiza odontorhiza forma flavida n.f. Bull Run, Va. 


The Crested Coral-root has been studied at a number of localities, 
and proves to be essentially a neutral, calcareous soil plant. In 
Tennessee it has been observed to grow both in the cedar glades, 
rooted in small.accumulations of alkaline soil in crevices of limestone 
rock, and in rich woods in the mountains, where the rocks are not 
calcareous, but local conditions have favored the thorough decomposi- 
tion of plant debris into neutral leaf-mold. The habitat at Delaplane, 


38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 


Va., corresponds to the second of these. Along the Atlantic Coast the 
soils are predominantly acid, but coquina and shell-marl outcrop in 
some places, and masses of oyster-shells accumulated by the Indians 
provide a source of lime for soil-neutralization elsewhere. At the 
localities of this orchid observed in Florida—where, by the way, it 
blooms in May, not July or August, as sometimes stated—the soil is 
sandy, but shell material of one or the other of these origins lies not 
far beneath the surface, so that the reaction is essentially neutral. 
The same relation holds at the town of Bluffton, 8. C., at the south 
edge of which a large colony occurs, blooming in mid-June. At 
Williamsburg, Va., the lime comes from a stratum of large Pecten 
shells. The Rhodes River islet, on which the plant reaches its north- 
easternmost known point, is underlain chiefly by clay giving rise to 
acid soil, but at one end there is a thin deposit of oyster-shells, evi- 
dently marking a temporary Indian settlement, and it is here that 
the plant has obtained a foothold. The seeds which started this 
colony presumably came from as yet undiscovered localities along 
the shores of Chesapeake Bay or adjacent estuaries, where calcareous 
outcrops are occasional, and it would be interesting to search for these, 
although the encroachment of civilization has probably destroyed 
most of them. 


ENTOMOLOGY .—Noies on and descriptions of Syrphid flies of the 
subfamily Cerioidinae.. RaymMonp C. SHANNON, Bureau of En- 
tomology. (Communicated by 8. A. RoHweEr.) 


Considerable additional information on the Cerioidinae which may 
be regarded as supplemental to my previous paper on this group, 
“The Syrphid-flies of the subfamily Cerioidinae in the U.S. National 
Museum Collection,’ was obtained by the writer while examining 
certain European collections during a trip to Europe in the summer 
of 1925. 

I wish especially to thank Professor Hervé-Bazin, Major E. E. 
Austen, and Professor Mario Bezzi for the facilities they afforded me 
in this work. | 

The Cerioidine flies are the most attractive in appearance of the 
Syrphidae and this, together with their comparative rarity, have 
made them highly. prized by collectors. There appears to be a sur- 


1 Received Nov. 16, 1926. 
2Ins. Ins. Mens. 13: 48-65. 1925. 


JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 39 


prisingly large number of species for the unusual type of develop- 
ment which characterizes the subfamily.- More than 120 species are 
known, mostly from the tropics, and, as a rule, the species are very dis- 
tinct in form and color. Comparatively few synonyms (about ten) 
have been made in the group, although thirty writers have proposed 
names for the species. 

The resemblance of the different species of Cerzoidinae in appear- 
ance and behavior to various species of Hymenoptera, combined with 
the coincidental occurrence of the resemblants in the same region, is 
extraordinary and seemingly indicates true mimicry. Most of them 
simulate different species of wasps while a few have the appearance of 
certain saw-flies. The two most striking features of their similarity 
are the greatly extended antennae (long in the Hymenoptera and 
short in most Syrphidae) and the greatly constricted abdomen in the 
majority of the forms of these flies. The species resembling saw- 
flies have the abdomen broad throughout but the anterior corners are 
yellow, giving the flies the offhand appearance of having the abdomen 
petiolate basally. 

One of the latter group, from Australia (Tenthredomyia mellivora), 
has been reared from larvae found feeding on the honey in the nest 
of a species of native bee. Mr. Rohwer has shown me a species of 
saw-fly, Pterygophorus cinctus Klug, from the same region which it 
closely resembles. The larvae of this genus of saw-flies are gre- 
garious and feed on the foliage of the eucalyptus trees. Froggat has 
recorded that cattle are poisoned and killed when they feed upon 
these larvae which are migrating down the tree trunks. It is possible 
that the adult saw-flies retain the poisonous qualities of the larval 
stage and, if this is the case, it may be that they are purposely let 
alone by predaceous enemies. ‘This, if true, would indicate that the 
resemblance which the fly bears to the saw-fly may be of more im- 
portance than mere chance resemblance. 

The pupa of a number of species of Cerioidinae have been found on 
tree trunks but only in one other species, Cerioides conopoides (Lin- 
naeus) is there anything known of the larval habits of these flies. 
Larvae of C. conopoides have been found in the sap of diseased pop- 
lars and other trees and in ulcers on elms. 

Prior to the writer’s paper, noted above, only one generic name, 
Cervoides, was valid in the subfamily. Two others, Certa and Sphizi- 
morpha, have been repeatedly used, sometimes for the purpose of 
indicating generic differences between species, although Ceria is a 


40 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 


preoccupied name and Sphiximorpha, at the time of its erection, 
was given the same genotype which had been previously assigned to 
Ceriordes. 

In the writer’s treatment of the subfamily, four genera, Ceriordes, 
Monoceromyta (originally considered as a subgenus’), Tenthredomyia, 
and Polybiomyva (the last two being newly proposed) were recognized; 
and, insofar as the material (rather limited in exotic forms) at hand 
permitted, the species were located in their respective genera. More- 
over, he called attention to the apparent absence of another generic 
type, as follows: “‘It appears that there should be a fifth group or 
genus which is not represented in the material at hand. It should 
be of a more generalized nature characterized by an unconstricted 
abdomen and a short or absent antennifer.”’ 

A species which fits these requirements was found in the collection 
of M. Hervé-Bazin, namely Cerioides petri Hervé-Bazin, from 
Kumanotaira, Karuizawa, Japan. This species is made the type 
of the new genus Primocerioides. 

The writer has examined seventy-seven species of Cervoidinae 
(27 species recorded in his first publication) and finds that all of them 
may be placed without difficulty in the four genera he defined in his 
previous paper, except C. petri Hervé-Bazin, which, as has just been 
stated, becomes the type of anew genus. The species not seen by the 
writer have been located in their respective genera as well as the pub- 
lished descriptions will permit. A list of the genera with the species 
which they contain is appended at the end together with the dis- 
tribution of each species. 


The geographic distribution of the genera turns out to be remarkably 
consistent. . | 

Primocerioides (1 species)—Palearctic (Japan). 

Tenthredomytia 

Subgenus Tenthredomyia (16 species)—Holarctic, usually northern 
latitudes or high altitudes (such as the Canadian zone). 
Subgenus Pterygophoromyia (3 species)—Australia. 

Monoceromyia (40 species)—Mainly in the tropics of both hemispheres. 
Two species occur in Australia; twelve in Africa, none in Europe or 
temperate America. 

Cerioides (35 species)—In all continents. 

Polybiomyia (15 species)—Tropical America and southwestern United 
a one species from Malaysia (Aru Islands) and one from Natal, 

rica. 


3 Bull. Brook. Entom. Soc. 16: 33. 1922. 


JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 41 


Cerioides is the most widely distributed of the genera and at the 
same time contains the most diverse set of species. 

Polybiomyia is mainly confined to the new world. The occurrence 
of one species of the genus, P. smaragdina (Walker), remarkable for 
its entirely green metallic coloration, in the Aru Islands of Malaysia, 
is of particular interest inasmuch as Crepidomyza ventralis (Walker), 
a genus and species of the Xylotinae, also occurs in the Aru Islands; 
all other species of Crepidomyia are known only from South America. 
Polybiomyia divisa (Wiedemann), recorded from Natal, Africa, is 
peculiar in its venation and could well be considered as a different 
subgenus. 

Pterygophoromyia, a subgenus of Tenthredomyia, differs from 
all other Cerioidinae (except Primocerioides?) in having a plumose 
* filament (the plumula) attached to the thorax just below the squama, 
the absence of which was formerly considered to be one of the char- 
acters of the subfamily. 


KEY TO THE GENERA OF CERIOIDINAE 


A 1. Antennal process (antennifer) very short or absent, rarely equaling 
half the length of first antennal joint. 
B 1. Abdomen not constricted basally; eyes pilose 
Primoceriodes, new genus 
B 2. Abdomen constricted basally; eyes bare. 
C 1. Metasternum membranous behind............ Cerioides Rondani 
C 2. Metasternum completely girdled with chitin 
Polybiomyia Shannon 


A 2. Antennifer very elongate, distinctly longer than first antennal joint 
B1. Abdomen very slightly and progressively narrowed basally, an- 


femoncormensibrieht yellow. s.:...5.:.:5:: Tenthredomyia, Shannon 
See biunala absent...) 5: .. +. oe Tenthredomyia, sensu stricto 
Go2> Plumula. present. -. 2.0.0.0. Pterygophoromyia, new subgenus 


B 2. Abdomen strongly constricted at juncture of the first and second 
segments, usually the main length of the second segment contracted 
iHEOLAlOnehpEhlOley ci sos ele SEL: Monoceromyia, Shannon. 


Primocerioides, new genus 


Genotype Ceriodes (sic!) petri Hervé-Bazin, Ann. Soc. Entom. France 83: 
414. 1914. 

The characters given in the key will serve to distinguish this new genus. 
The absence of the antennifer and the nonconstricted abdomen mark this 
genus as the most generalized one in the sub-family Cerzoidinae. 

The genotype, which is peculiar in several respects, is the only species 
known in this genus. The pubescence is unusually developed, the eyes and 
face being distinctly pilose; the first antennal joint is long, the second short, 
and the third fairly long; the third longitudinal vein is straight and bears an 
appendix projecting into the first posterior cell. 


4Suannon, A reclassification of the subfamilies and genera of North American Syr- 
phidae, Bull. Brook. Entom. Soc. 16: 67. 1921. 


42. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 


Only the type specimen, a male, in the collection of M. Hervé-Bazin, is 
known. 
Type locality, Kumanotaira, Karuizawa, Japan. 


AUSTRALIAN CERIOIDINAE 


Four species of Cerioidinae have been described to date from Aus- 
tralia. Three other species are now at hand and a possible fourth 
has been mentioned in a paper by G. H. Hardy, ‘‘Notes on some 
Australian Syrphidae.”’ ‘This latter species may be the same as the 
one described below as Monoceromyia hardyi, new species. 


KEY TO SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN CERIOIDINAE 


A 1. Antennifer not developed; abdomen constricted basally; third vein 
moderately curved downwards, without appendix on the loop 
Cerioides breviscapa (Saunders) 
A 2. Antennifer very elongate, longer than first antennal joint. ; 
B 1. Abdomen not constricted basally; plumula present 
TENTHREDOMYIA (Subgenus PrERYGOPHOROMYIA) 
C1. First tergite entirely orange red; second almost entirely black 
without callosities; third tergite of male with a prominent tubercle 
T. saundersi Shannon 
C 2. First tergite biackish with yellow anterior corners; second largely 
yellow with a pair of lateral callosities; the third without tubercle. 
D 1. Meso- sterno- and pteropleura with yellow 
T. ornata (Saunders) 
D 2. Mesopleura only with yellow......... T. mellivora, new species 
B 2. Abdomen strongly constricted basally ; plumula absent MONOCEROMYIA 
C1. Thorax without yellow markings except on the humeri, noto- 
pleurae and scutellum; wings entirely infuscated 
M. austeni, new species 
C 2. Thorax with numerous yellow markings; wings infuscated only on 
amMbEnory DORGERM eae ia. ee M. hardyi, new species 


CERIOIDES BREVISCAPA (Saunders) 


Cera breviscapa Saunders, Trans. Entom. Soc. London 4: 65. 1847. | 
Ceriodes breviscapa (Saunders) Hardy, Australian Zoologist 2: 13. 1921. 
This species has some affinities with species of Monoceromyia and Ten- 
thredomyia. 
Originally recorded from Port Philip, South Australia. Hardy reports 
one specimen from South Australia and four from New South Wales. 
Type.—In the British Museum. 


Genus TENTHREDOMYIA Shannon 


Subgenus Pterygophoromyia, new subgenus 


Typre.—Tenthredomyia saundersi Shannon. 

The subgenus Pierygophoromyia is characterized by the presence of a small 
but distinct plumula (a plumose filament attached to the thorax just below 
the squama). The subgenus, so far as known, is confined to Australia. 


JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 43 


TENTHREDOMYIA (PTERYGOPHOROMYIA) ORNATA (Saunders) 


Cerza ornata Saunders, Trans. Entom. Soc. Lond. 4: 64, pl. 4, fig. 3, 3a, 3b. 
1845. 

Ceria australis Macquart (synonym?) Dipt. Exot. Suppl. 4: 128. 1849. 

“Cerioides ornata Saunders,’ Hardy, Australian Zoologist 2: 13. 1921. 

Tenthredomyia australis (Macquart) Shannon, Ins. Ins. Mens. 13: 54. 1925. 

A male specimen at hand (previously recorded by the writer as T. aus- 
tras Macquart) agrees with 7’. ornata except in some particulars found in 
the original description as regards the abdominal coloration. The original 
description and figure indicate that the basal segment is reddish, margined 
behind with yellow, with the anterior corners yellow and equal in length 
to the second segment. The female is figured and shows only four seg- 
ments, the first of which equals the third in length. There should be five 
segments shown for the female, and apparently that which is intended for 
the first is the first and second combined, which together equal the length of 
the third. The specimen at hand differs from the description and figure in 
having the first segment more extensively darkened; but it agrees otherwise 
with the type of C. ornata according to my examination of the type. The 
type of C. ornata has the fourth tergite margined behind with yellow, con- 
trary to the impression given in the description. 

The description of C. australis (Macquart) agrees with 7. ornata except 
that the first antennal joint is stated to be as long as the antennifer, and in 
the figure given for C. australis the first joint is shown to be as long as the 
antennifer and equal in length to the following two combined. The first 
joint in 7’. ornata is scarcely more than half the length of the antennifer and 
the three joints are nearly of equal length. 

Hardy states under ‘‘Cerioides ornata Saunders” that there were two 
species standing in the collection of the Macleay Museum under this name. 
One was characterized by a pair of callosities on the second segment, the 
other not having these callosities. These callosities are present in 7’. ornata 
(Saunders) and J. mellivora (new species, described below) but are absent 
in 7’. saunderst. They are less developed in the female than in the male. 


Tenthredomyia (PTERYGOPHOROMYIA) mellivora, new species. 


Closely related to JT. ornata Saunders. Differs chiefly in having the 
yellow on the pleurae confined to the mesopleura and in having the second 
sternite black with the hind margin yellow and the third tergite entirely black. 
In T. ornata the second tergite is almost entirely yellow and the hind margin 
of the third is yellow. The ocellar triangle of the male is equilateral and the 
callosities on the second tergite are more prominent than in 7. ornata. 
In the female the eyes converge as closely together at the vertex as in the 
male but widen rapidly downwards; the center of the front has a very large 
black spot which includes the ocelli. The fifth tergite is obscurely reddish 
yellow. Length, about 12 mm., not including antennifer which is 1.5 mm.; 
antennifer and antenna combined, 5 mm.; wing 13 mm. 

Described from two males and four females; eight additional specimens are 


- in the British Museum. 


Type.—Male; allotype female, in the British Museum; paratypes in the 
U.S. National Museum. Cat. No. 40105 U.S. N. M. 

Two specimens have been reared and the puparia are mounted with the 
specimens and bear the label ‘‘Larvae live on honey in native: bee’s nest.’’ 
(Note by donor). . a 

Type locality.—Burpengary, South Queensland, (T. L. Bancroft). 


44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 


TENTHREDOMYIA (PTERYGOPHOROMYIA) SAUNDERSI Shannon 


Tenthredomyia saundersi Shannon, Ins. Ins. Mens. 18: 53. 1925. 
Original description based on a single male. ‘The collection of the British 
Museum contains one male and four females. The species is nearest to 
T. ornata Saunders. In addition to the characters given for the male in the 
original description attention may be called to the differences existing be- 
tween the females of the two species. The front is much narrower in 7. 
saundersit and widens rather gradually downwards; the black spot on the 
front is much smaller and below the middle; first tergite reddish yellow, the 
sides yellow, a little darkened at the middle of the hind margin; second 
tergite velvety black with a bright yellow hind margin; abdomen without 
callosities; the yellow spot on the pleurae confined to the mesopleura. 
Type.—In U. 8. National Museum. 
Type locality—New South Wales: Sidney (January, 1900, Mackay). 
Other localities—Queensland: Burnett River (T. L. Bancroft); Mackay 
(G. Turner). 


Genus MonocEeRomyIA Shannon 


Monoceromyia SHANNON, Bull. Brook. Entom. Soc. 17: 32. 1922; Ins. 
Ins. Mens. 18: 50. 1925. 

The only intimation of the occurrence of this genus in Australia was that 
given by Hardy in the Australian Zoologist (vol. 2, p. 13, 1921). He calls 
attention in this publication to a species occurring in Queensland and New 
South Wales which has a greatly constricted abdomen and has the third 
vein of the wing deeply looped into the first posterior cell. No mention is 
made of the length of the antennifer, but a further characteristic noted by 
Hardy, namely, that the wing is infuscated above the third vein except the 
area within the deflected portion of the third vein, indicates a possible rela- 
tionship with the species here described under the name M. hardy. 


Monoceromyia hardyi, new species 


Male.—Rather small species, mostly dark with reddish yellow and yellow 
markings. Ocellar region black, remainder of vertex yellow; frontai triangle 
yellow, very broad and short; antennifer yellowish brown, distinctly longer 
than first antennal joint; antenna reddish brown, relative length of joints 
1:0.75: 0.60; the base of the third joint nearly equal to its length; style two- 
thirds the length of the third joint, dark brown; face bright yellow with a 
black median stripe extending from base of antennae to oral margin and on 
each side of the face a black stripe extending from the oral angle upwards to 
the eye; thorax black, humeri and notopleural regions yellow; a pair of small, 
submedian, prescutellar, yellow spots and another pair of more elongate, 
sublateral spots which spread on to the postalar calli; scutellum yellow with 
median black spot bordering on anterior margins, meso- and sternopleurae 
with yellow spots, the pteropleura partly reddish yellow; legs largely red- 
dish yellow, the femora and tibia partly dark brown; abdomen rather strongly 
constricted at juncture of first and second segments, third and fourth seg- 
ments globose; first and second tergites reddish yellow, third and fourth 
black with reddish yellow hind borders; hypopygium reddish brown; an- 
terior border of wing deeply infuscated; the third vein deeply looped into 
first posterior cell, without appendix on the loop, the portion of the wing 
within the deflection and behind the third vein hyaline. Length 11 mm., 
plus antennifer 12 mm.; wing 8 mm. 


JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 45 


Type.—Male, in British Museum. 
Type locality Queensland: Brisbane (November 12, 1912, H. Hacker). 
Named for G. H. Hardy, student of Australian Syrphidae. 


Monoceromyia austeni, new species 


Male.—A larger species than the above, from which it is easily differen- 
tiated by the separated eyes, which at their greatest approximation are fur- 
ther apart than the width of the first antennal joint; antennifer and antennae 
entirely reddish brown; face slightly concaved, rising below to a moderate, 
keel-like tubercle; thorax black except for humeri and notopleural callosities 
and hind margin of the scutellum; legs reddish brown, all the femora with 
rather broad, subbasal dark bands; abdomen strongly constricted on basal 
half of second segment; first tergite black; second yellow on basal half with 
a dorsal, median dark line; posterior half of second tergite black, third and 
fourth tergites blackish with narrow yellow hind borders; hypopygium 
reddish brown; wings entirely smoky; third vein with loop and a short ap- 
pendix attached to loop. Length 13.5 mm., with antennifer 14.60 mm., 
wing 11 mm. 

Type.—Male, in British Museum. 

Type locality Queensland: Brisbane (November 24, 1912, H. Hacker). 

Named for Major E. E. Austen, the noted dipterologist of the British 
Museum. 


NEW SPECIES OF ASIATIC CERIOIDINAE 
Cerioides meijerei, new species 


Large, nearly black species, very close to C. fruhstorferz de Meijere. 

Female.—Head black, sides of face with a large yellowish spot and a 
smaller one on eye margin opposite antennal base; antennifer very short, its 
length about half its breadth; antenna black; first and second joints very 
elongate, of equal length; the third very small, but little longer than broad, 
style black; mesonotum black with a very obscure yellow spot on humerus 
and notopleura; hind margin of scutellum yellowish; pleurae black with an 
obscure yellowish stripe on mesopleura; legs almost entirely dark reddish 
brown: abdomen blackish; anterior corners faintly yellowish; petiole of 
second segment dark brown; second segment greatly constricted and elongate, 
the two basal segments equal in length to remainder of abdomen; hind 
margin of third tergite narrowly reddish brown; anterior half of wing deeply 
infuscated; posterior half faintly infuscated; third vein deeply looped into 
first posterior cell; the loop without an appendix. Length 18 mm.; wing 
13 mm. One female. 

C. fruhstorferi differs in having the yellow facial markings much smaller 
and in having the third vein but little deflected. 

Type.—In British Museum. 

Type locality—Indo China: Haut Mekong. Tong Lap. (March 30, 
1918, R. V. de Salvaza). 

Named for Professor J. C. H. de Meijere, who has worked extensively on 
the Cerioidinae as well as many other groups of Dzptera. 


Tenthredomyia brunettii, new species 


Rather small species, superficially related to Monoceromyia dimidiatipen- 
nis (Brunetti) of India and resembling the North American species T. 
tridens (Loew) and T. anchoralis (Coquillett). 


46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 


Male and female.—Head yellow with black markings as follows: Male, a 
stripe extending from foremost ocellus to the occipital margin, a spot on Sch 
side between the base of antennifer and eye; a small median stripe which 
fades out half way to the antenna; a black stripe on each side extending be- 
tween oral margin and eye. I[emale, the ocellar markings extend as a stripe 
from the occipital margin to the ocelli, whence a fork extends from each side 
to the eye, and, continuing along the eye margin, come together and in so 
doing inclose a yellow spot which lies before the ocelli. Antennifer yellow 
below, black above, twice the length of first antennal joint which in turn is 
about equal to the length of each of the other two joints; lower portion of 
head, behind the lower facial stripes, bright yellow; the yellow of the humerus 
and notopleura converging into a single spot; a pair of sublateral mesonotal 
stripes behind the suture; scutellum entirely yellow; meso-sterno- and 
pteropleurae with yellow; femora yellow, more or less marked with black 
preapically; tibiae yellow, more or less darkened apically; tarsi more or less 
darkened; first tergite black with yellow sides, the yellow converging basally; 
second, third and fourth tergites black with yellow hind borders; hypopygium 
of male and fifth tergite of female black; anterior border of wing irregularly 
infuscated, hyaline behind. Length 11 mm., plus antennifer 12 mm.; wing 
8 mm. Two males, one female. 

Type male and allotype female.—In British Museum. 

Type locality.—British Baluchistan: Quetta (June 2, 1902, C. G. Nurse). 

Monoceromyia dimidiatipennis (Brunetti) most closely resembles this 
species. Besides the abdominal constriction it differs in being more ex- 
tensively black. The post oral region is black, the humeral and notopleural 
yellow markings are separated; and no yellow occurs on the pteropleura. 

Named for Mr. E. Brunetti, in recognization of his contributions to our 
knowledge of Indian Dizptera. 


Tenthredomyia hungkingi, new species 


Approaches Tenthredomyia tridens (Loew) of North America very closely 
in size, structure, and color. 

Female.—Head largely black; the posterior orbit (space between upper 
occipital margin and hind margin of eye to ocelli to eye) yellow, a yellow spot 
present above each antenna; the face yellow with a median black stripe 
from base of antennifer to oral margin; antennifer reddish yellow; antennae 
black, mesonotum black, humeri, a small spot on notopleura, a pair of sub- 
lateral, postsutural stripes and scutellum yellow; yellow marking on pleurae 
confined to meso- and sterno-pleurae; legs reddish yellow; femora more or 
less darkened around the middle; first tergite black with anterior corners 
yellow; second, third and fourth tergites black with rather narrow yellow 
hind borders; fifth tergites black; wings infuscated on anterior half. Length 
12 mm., plus antennifer 13 mm.; wing 10 mm. Two females. 

T tridens differs in having the yellow on the posterior orbit divided by 
the black extending from the ocellar region, the pteropleura partly yellow 
and the yellow on the hind borders of tergites two, three, and four expanding 
on their outer ends (contracting in JT. hungkingi, particularly on the fourth 
tergite). 

Type.—In British Museum. 

Type localityx—China: Hsikon, near Tieotean: (June 17, 1906, F.. M. 
Thomson) Tientsin, (June 15, 1906, JeeaN ls Thomson). 

Named for Teou Hung-King, (452-536 A.D.) one of the first Chinese 
naturalists to record observations on Syrphidae—namely Lristalis tenax 
(Linnaeus). : 


JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 47 


Monoceromyia salvazai, new species 


A large, nearly black species. 

Male.—F ace yellow, flat, with a median raised line extending from anten- 
nifer to oral margin which is black; a yellow spot on eye margin opposite 
base of antennifer; remainder of head black; antennifer and antennae black; 
antennifer nearly as long as two basal antennal joints; third joint a little 
more than half the length of second; style black basally, white apically; 
thorax black with only hind margin of scutellum obscurely yellow; legs 
largely blackish, the femora apically becoming reddish brown; abdomen 
strongly constricted at second segment which is as long as the third and 
_ fourth eombined and reddish brown on the more constricted portion; abdo- 
men otherwise black: wings infuscated anteriorly; third vein sharply looped 
downwards and with an appendix attached to loop. Length 21 mm., with 
antennifer, 23 mm.; wing 14mm. One male. 

M. obscura (Brunetti) resembles M. salvazaz in general appearance and 
color but is a smaller and more slender species with the mesonotum sub- 
quadrate. In M. salvazaz the mesonotum is much longer than broad. 

Type.—In British Museum. 

Type locality—Luang Prabang: Ban Sen Savouane (March 16, 1920, 
R. V. de Salvaza). 

Named for Mr. R. V. de Salvaza, the collector. 


Monoceromyia wiedemanni, new species. 


Fairly large, nearly black species, very closely allied to M. obscura Brunetti. 

Male.—Head black, a pair of yellow spots, one on eye margin opposite 
base of antennifer, and a large yellow marking on each side of face; an- 
tennae black, the joints of equal length, the basal two equal to length of 
antennifer; style grayish; thorax black with yellow only on the humeri and 
hind scutellar margin; legs brownish black; abdomen strongly constricted 
at second segment, which is as long as the following two segments, the con- 
stricted portion brownish; extreme hind edge of third tergite brown, slightly 
raised; remainder of abdomen shining black; the fourth tergite towards the 
hind margin with a deeply impressed transverse line; wings deeply infuscated 
anteriorly; third vein moderately looped downwards. Length 15mm., with 
antennifer, 16.5 mm.; wing 11 mm. One male. 

M. obscura differs in having the antennifer shorter, less than length of the 
two basal antennal joints; the frons yellow in the male, and no constriction 
before the hind margin of the fourth tergite. 

Type.—In British Museum. 

Type locality—Indo China: Luang Prabang, Ban Nam Mo. (March 3, 
1918, R. V. de Salvaza). 

Named for C. R. W. Wiedemann, the first to describe a species of Ceriodi- 
nae from the Asiatic region (Ceria javana, 1824). 


Monoceromyia wallacei, new species 


A rather large species, predominantly black, with yellow and brownish 
markings. Closely allied to M. tridecimpunctata (Brunetti). 

Female.—Head black, a yellow spot on eye-margin opposite base of an- 
tennifer; face with a broad yellow stripe on each side; antennifer reddish 
yellow; antennae reddish brown, first joint a little longer than second which 
is equal to third; the two basal joints equal to antennifer; thorax with yellow 
on the humeri, a small spot on notopleura, a pair of postsutural stripes, 


48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 


hind margin of scutellum, and part of the meso- and sternopleura; legs 
reddish brown, tarsi darker, basal halves of tibiae yellowish; anterior corners 
of first tergite yellow, sides of constricted portion of second tergite yellow- 
ish brown; hind margins of second, third and fourth tergites narrowly yellow, 
all three of which are slightly rimmed; fifth tergite black; wings dilutely in- 
fuscated on anterior margin; third vein moderately looped, without appendix. 
Length 17 mm., with antennifer 18.5 mm.; wing 14 mm. Described from 
one female. 

Type.—In British Museum. 

Type locality.—Celebes: Macassar (1857, A. R. Wallace). 

Named for the famous naturalist, A. R. Wallace, who collected it. 


Monoceromyia hervebazini, new species 


A large black species with yellow markings. 

Male.—F ace yellow with a median longitudinal black stripe which at the 
base of the antennifer sends out arms to the eye margins; remainder of head 
black; antennifer and antenna blackish, last joint dark brown; style whitish; 
thorax black with humeri yellow, a small yellow spot at outer end of trans- 
verse suture; meso- and sternopleurae partly yellow; legs reddish brown, more 
yellowish on basal half of hind femur; first tergite black; the second con- 
stricted and elongated, one-fourth longer than the third, yellowish on the 
most slender portion, with a dark median stripe; posterior third broadened, 
blackish; third tergite black, hind border yellow, the sides rimmed, the im- 
pressed line crossing the tergite along the anterior margin of the yellow border; 
fourth tergite black, the sides rimmed, the impressed line crossing the tergite 
near its hind border and producing a deep constriction, behind the constric- 
tion the tergite is brownish, with the extreme hind edge yellow; hypopygium 
black; wing rather dilutely infuscated on basal and anterior half, leaving the 
outer posterior quarter, nearly hyaline; length 18 mm., plus antennifer 19.5 
mm.; wing 14 mm. Two males. 

Monoceromyia trinotata de Meijere has the third and fourth tergites 
deeply constricted near the hind margins by means of impressed lines, but 
this species is smaller, more slender, second abdominal segment much more 
elongate and possesses a number of yellow markings which are absent in 
M. hervebazint. 

Type.—In British Museum. 

Type locality —Shanghai, China (1854, Fortune). 

Named for M. Hervé-Bazin, an eminent dipterist of France, who is 
greatly interested in the Chinese fauna, having made a very extensive col- 
lection there. 


KEY TO THE ASIATIC SPECIES OF CERIOIDINAE AT HAND. 
(Measurements do not include antennifer) 


A 1. Antennifer undeveloped; third vein deeply looped; abdomen strongly 
constricted basally; black species with yellow facial markings; 18 mm. 
(indo > Chimg)) Rus RE Se tem ere Cerioides meijerei Shannon 

A 2. Antennifer greatly elongated. 

B 1. Abdomen not, or very slightly, constricted basally, with yellow 
apical corners: TENTHREDOMYIA. 

C 1. Thorax with yellow only on humeri and disk of scutellum. (China) 

T. grahami Shannon 


JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 49 


C 2. Pleurae with yellow and additional yellow markings on mesonotum. 
D 1. Yellow on notopleura confluent with yellow on humeri; ptero- 
pleura partly yellow (Baluchistan)....... T. brunettii, Shannon 
D 2. Yellow on notopleura widely separated from that on humeri; 
pteropleura without yellow (China)....T. hungkingi Shannon 
B 2. Abdomen strongly constricted at second segment; with or without 
yellow basal corners: MONOCEROMYIA 
C 1. Third tergite equal to or longer than the second; pleurae without 
yellow markings; 20 mm. (China)......M. pleuralis (Coquillett) 
C 2. Third tergite much shorter than second. 
D 1. Entire body, including wings, blackish except a pair of narrow, 
yellow facial stripes and white style; 25 mm. (Philippines) 
M. petersi (Speiser) 
D 2. Wings with strong contrast between the infuscation on anterior 
border and the hyalinity of posterior border; head and usually 
the body with more yellow. 
E 1. Pleurae entirely black. ~ 
F 1. Thorax black except hind scutellar margin; male without 
deep impressions on tergites; 20 mm. (Indo China) 
M. salvazai, Shannon 
F 2. Thorax with humeri at least obscurely yellow. 

G 1. Antennifer as long as combined length of first and second 
joints; 15 mm. (Indo China). .M. wiedemanni Shannon 

G 2. Antennifer shorter than the two basal joints 15 mm. 
CTVANG FE ola ee than eee, LS M. obscura (Brunetti) 

E 2. Pleurae marked with yellow. 
F 1. Meso-sterno- and pteropleurae marked with yellow. 

G 1. Post oral region black; mesonotum without post sutural 
markings or prescutellar spot; scutellum yellow with a 
median black spot dividing the yellow; 20 mm. (Malasia) 

M. javana (Wiedemann) 

G 2. Post oral region yellow; mesonotum with a pair of yellow 
post sutural stripes and a prescutellar spot; scutellum 
black, the hind margin yellow; 16 mm. (India) 

M. trinotata (de Meijere) 
F 2. Meso- and sternopleurae only with yellow; mesonotum with 
a pair of post sutural yellow stripes. 
G 1. Post oral region yellow; 16 mm. (India; Malacca?) 
M. ?tridecimpunctata (Brunetti) 
G 2. Post oral region black; 18 mm. (Celebes) 
| M. wallacei Shannon 
I’ 3. Mesopleura only with yellow; post sutural stripes obscure 
browment6 sme (Ching) 2. te 25 00 2.22 oe: M. wui Shannon 


LIST OF THE SPECIES OF CERIOIDINAE 


Arranged according to the present generic concept. Those species marked 
by an * have been examined by the writer. 


PRIMOCERIOIDES Shannon 


“petri (Hervé-Bazin) (Cerioides) Japan 


50 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 


CERIOIDES Rondani 


North and Central America and the West Indies 


cylindrica (Curran) (Ceria) California 
*durani Davidson Arizona 
*loewil (Williston) (Ceria) California 
ontarioensis (Curran) (Ceria) Ontario 
signifera (Loew) (Ceria) U.S. (?) Mexico 
*willistoni (Kahl) (Ceria) = signifera 

(Loew)? Pa., Md., La., Tex. 


South America 


*barbipes (Loew) (Ceria) Brazil 

bigotii (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil, Bolivia 
boliviana (Kertesz) (Ceria) Bolivia 
*braueri (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil 

facialis (Kertesz) (Ceria) Paraguay 
flavosignata (Kertesz) (Ceria) ~ Bolivia, Peru 
*meadei (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil 

*miki (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil 
nigripennis (Williston) (Ceria) Mexico 

picta (Kertesz) (Ceria) Boliva, Peru 
pyrrhocera (Kertesz) (Ceria) Bolivia 
*roederii (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil 
sackeni (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil 
superba (Williston) (Ceria) Mexico 
trichopoda (Kertesz) (Ceria) Bolivia 
variabilis (Kertesz) (Ceria) Bolivia, Peru 
vicina (Kertesz) (Ceria) Peru 

wulpii (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil, Bolivia 


Europe, Western Asia, Northern Africa 


*subsessilis (Illiger) (Ceria) Europe, ete. 


Asia and Malaysia 


*decorata (Brunetti) (Ceria) India 
fruhstorferi (de Meijere) (Ceria) India 
fulvescens Brunetti (Ceria) India 
*meijerei Shannon Indo China 
triangulifera Brunetti (Ceria) India 

Africa 


bezzi Hervé-Bazin 


Australia 


*breviscapa (Saunders) (Ceria) South Australia 


JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES dl 


TENTHREDOMYIA Shannon 


North America 


*abbreviata (Loew) (Ceria) Eastern North America 
*proxima (Curran) ‘Ceria) = abbreviata 

(Loew) Canada, New England 
*anchoralis (Coquillett) (Sphiximorpha) New Mexico 
pictula (Loew) (Ceria) Southern United States 
sartorum (Smirnov) (Cerioides) Turkestan 
*snowl1 (Adams) (Sphiximorpha) New Mexico 
*tridens (Loew) (Ceria) West of the Rocky Mountains 

Europe, Western Asia, Northern Africa 

*conopoides (Linnaeus) (Musca) Mediterranean countries, Persia 
*vespiformis (Latreille) (Ceria) Mediterranean countries. 


Asia, Malaysia 


*annulifera (Walker) (Ceria) New Guinea 
*brevis (Brunetti) (Ceria) India 
*brunettii Shannon Baluchistan 
compacta (Brunetti) (Ceria) India 
*dimidiatipennis (Brunetti) (Ceria) India 
*orahami Shannon China 
*hungkingi Shannon China 
metallica (Van der Wulp) (Ceria) New Guinea 
ornatifrons (Brunetti) (Ceria) India 
relicta (Walker) (Ceria) Aru Islands 
(Saunders)? relictura (Walker) (Ceria) Aru Islands 
Australia 


(Belongs to subgenus Pterygophoromyia) 
australis (Macquart) (Cerra) = ornata 


(Saunders)? Tasmania 
*mellivora Shannon South Queensland 
*ornata (Saunders) (Ceria) New South Wales 
*saundersi Shannon New South Wales 


MonocEROMYIA Shannon 


North America 


*eacica (Walker) (Ceria) Mexico 
*daphnaeus (Walker) (Ceria) Jamaica 
*tricolor (Loew) (Ceria) West Indies, Florida 
*veralli (Williston) (Ceria) | Panama 


South America 
bicolor (Kertesz) (Ceria) Peru, Bolivia 
lynchiu (Williston) (Ceria) Brazile 
Europe 
None 


52 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 


Asia and Malaysia 


anchorata (Bigot) (Sphiximorpha) 
lateralis (Walker)? 

annulata (Kertesz) (Cerioides) 

bakert Shannon = petersi (Speiser) 


(Synonymy based on a comparison of M. petersi in Bezzi’s collection.) 


erux (Brunetti) (Ceria) 
*eumenioides (Saunders) (Ceria) 
*fenestrata (Brunetti) (Ceria) 
flavipennis (de Meijere) (Ceria) 
*hervebazini Shannon 
*himalayensis (de Meijere) (Ceria) 
“Savana (Wiedemann) (Ceria) 
*lateralis (Walker) (Ceria) 
*obscura (Brunetti) (Ceria) 
*patricia (Brunetti) 

*petersi (Speiser) 

*pleuralis (Coquillett) (Sphiximorpha) 
*polistoides (Brunetti) 

*salvazi Shannon 

similis (Kertesz) (Cerioides) 
tibialis (Kertesz) (Cerioides) 
*tridecimpunctata (Brunetti) (Ceria) 
*trinotata (de Meijere) (Cerioides) 
*wallacei Shannon 

*wul Shannon 

*wiedemanni Shannon 


Africa 


afra (Wiedemann) 

ammophilina (Speiser) (Cerioides) 
brunneipennis (Loew) (Ceria) 
*caffra (Loew) (Ceria) 

congolensis Bezzi 

frenata (Loew) (Ceria) 
*vambiana (Saunders) (Ceria) 
*hopei (Saunders) (Ceria) 


maculipennis (Hervé-Bazin) (Cerioides) 


*neavei (Bezzi) (Cerioides) 
*pulchra (Hervé-Bazin) (Cerioides) 
*speiserl (Hervé-Bazin) (Cerioides) 


A ustralia 


*austeni Shannon 
*hardyi Shannon 


Borneo 
Fuhosho; Toyenmongai 


Philippines 


India 
India 
India 
India 
China 
India 
Malaysia 
Malaysia 
India 
India 
Philippines 
Japan 
India 

Indo China 
Formosa 
New Caledonia 
Indo China 
India 
Celebes 
China 

Indo China 


Cape of Good Hope 
Kilimandjaro 

South Africa 

South Africa 
Belgian Congo 
Cape of Good Hope 
Gambia 

Sierra Leone 
Belgian Congo 
Uganda 


Belgian Congo, Rhodesia 


Uganda 


Queensland 
(ueensland 


JAN. 18, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 53 


POLYBIOMYIA Shannon 


North and Central America 


arietis (Loew) (Ceria) Mexico 

*bellardil Shannon Texas 
_*bergrothi (Williston) (Ceria) Mexico 
*captis Curran Mexico 
*engelhardti Shannon Arizona 
*macquarti Shannon Texas, Mexico 
*nigra (Bigot) (Sphiximorpha) Mexico 
*pedicellata (Williston) (Ceria)  . Mexico 
*rufibasis (Bigot) (Sphiximorpha) Mexico 

*sayl Shannon Arizona 
*schnablii (Williston) (Ceria) Mexico 
*schwarzi Shannon Panama 
*townsendi (Snow) (Ceria) Texas, New Mexico, Arizona 

Malaysia 
*smaragdina (Walker) (Ceria) Aru Islands 
Africa 
*divisa (Walker) (Ceria) Natal 


Errata to the “‘Syrphid-flies of the subfamily Ceriodinae,’”’ R. C. Shannon,> 

Ceriodinae, spell Ceriozdinae. 

Ceriodes, spell Cerioides. 

acica Walker, p. 64, spell caczca Walker. 

Quotation marks should be placed about the descriptions of Polybromyza 
captis Curran and Cerioides durant Davidson, given in the keys, in order to 
give these authors full credit for these species. | 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


ARTHUR M. Piper has been appointed Assistant Geologist in the Geo- 
logical Survey and has been assigned to the Water Resources Branch. 


S. SpeNcER Nye, Junior Geologist in the Geological Survey, has been 
transferred from the Geologic Branch to the Water Resources Branch. 


The twenty-fifth anniversary of the establishment of the National Bureau 
of Standards was celebrated on December 4, 1926, by an exhibit of apparatus 
and methods at the Bureau, a reception and luncheon, and a dinner in the 
evening at which Dr. S. W. Srrarton, the first director of the Bureau, 
was a guest. 


5 Ins. Ins. Mens. 13: 48-65. 1925. 


54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 


The annual exhibit representing work of the departments of the Carnegie 
Institution of Washington was held at the Institution on December 11 to 
13, 1926. 


Professor THEODOR VON KarRMAN, dean of the Aerodynamic Institute of 
the University of Aachen, Germany, gave a series of six lectures at the 
National Museum on Modern development of aerodynamic theories, on De- 
cember 3 to 13, under the auspices of the Daniel Guggenheim Fund for the 
Promotion of Aeronautics. 


The Pick and Hammer Club met at the Geological Survey on December 
11. W. T. THom reported on the symposium on the hypothesis of con- 
tinental sliding, held at the New York meeting of the Association of Petro- 
leum Geologists; and A. C. Lawson described his recent trip through Africa. 


The Petrologists’ Club met at the Geophysical Laboratory on December 
14. G. Tuneu described his observations on Oxidation of low-grade por- 
phyry copper ores; H. EK. Merwin and H. 8. WasHinaton discussed The 
relation of the optical properties to the composition of monoclinic pyroxenes; 
and W. T. ScHALLER gave brief notes on Hydrates of the borax group. 


At a joint meeting of The AcapEmy and the Chemical Society on December 
16, 1926, the first part of the program consisted of the presentation of the 
John Scott Medal and an award of one thousand dollars to Dr. Harvry C. 
Hayes of the Navy Department in recognition of his work on sonic sounding. 
The presentation was made by a representative of the Board of Directors of 
City Trusts of Philadelphia, and was acknowledged by Assistant Secretary 
WarRNER of the Navy Department and by Dr. Hayres. The second part of 
the program consisted of a lecture by Professor J. N. BrONsTED, of the 
University of Copenhagen, on The metal-amines and their significance for 
the physical chemistry of solutions. 


The Acapemy held its annual meeting at the Bureau of Standards Tuesday 
evening, January 11. Dr. G. K. Buresss, the retiring president gave an 
illustrated address on the work of the Bureau, after which the laboratories 
were open for inspection, tests of various kinds being shown. 


Initial arrangements are being made for the repair of the CARNEGIE during 
1927 in accordance with the appropriation made by the Board of Trustees 
of the Carnegie Institution of Washington on December 10, 1926, for the 
rehabilitation of that vessel, which must precede the three-years’ cruise to 
begin in 1928. 


Mr. Grsu returned to Washington from his trip in Europe December 23 
and is now preparing his report on the conferences held with various European 
scientists interested in earth-currents and atmospheric electricity. 


Mr. O. Daut, who was aviator and assistant to Dr. SverpRuUpP during the 
Arctic Drift Expedition of 1922 to 1925, was appointed to the staff of the 
Department beginning January 1 and has been assigned to the work being 
done by Drs. Breit and Tuve. 


--=_ 


JAN. 18, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Sy9) 


The time of the Third General Assembly of the International Union of 
Geodesy and Geophysics at Prague has been set, for the general meetings, 
from September 4 to 11, 1927; preliminary meetings of the various sections 
preceding the general meetings are expected to begin August 28. 


Messrs. Ratpo W. G. Wyckorr and STERLING B. HEeNpDRIckKs have re- 
signed from the staff of the Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of 
Washington, to take up X-ray investigation at the Rockefeller Institute for 
Medical Research, in New York. 


Commander N. H. Heck has returned to Washington after completing 
inspection duty in the Hawaiian Islands. 


Professor A. S. HircuHcock has returned from Cuba, where he spent about 
a month collecting grasses. He visited the Jata Hills near Guanabacoa 
accompanied by Brother Léon of the Colegio de La Salle. These barren 
serpentine hills east of Havana support a characteristic vegetation. The 
pine woods of Pinar del Rio were investigated in company with Brother Léon 
and Professor Roig, botanists who have done much to increase our knowledge 
of Cuban plants. Stops were made at two laboratories having facilities for 
visiting scientists. The first called Harvard House, is under the auspices of 
Harvard University, and is located at Soledad, near Cienfuegos, on a sugar 
plantation. In connection with Harvard House is a fine botanical garden. 
The second laboratory is in charge of the Tropical Plant Research Founda- 
tion, which has its Cuba division at Baragué (Province of Camaguey) ona 
large sugar plantation. Through the courtesy of the United Fruit Company 
Professor Hitchcock was able to visit the Company’s plantations at Guaro 
and Preston (Province of Oriente) and to investigate the pine forests of the 
Sierra Nipe. 


* SPS Fe a on ae. ee 
es ete a ify Ni 
ae BE eae ne se ete 
et et Ke eer Sere. : 
‘ x = 
Ly veer et ae wi’ = 
+ ay CNet ; ce - ~ 
a Savy ois at: : Gj 
¥y xed s ~ by a ee rod 


AFFILIATED ‘SOCIETIES — 


| January 20, ‘Tue AcapEmy. . 
anuary | 22s The Philosophical Becty: Wenkae 

Sanronp: The problem of magnetic analysis. (Ilustrated.) 
: Hey: The constant of gravitation. (Illustrated.) 
y, sana 26. The Geological Society. 

y ~ The Biological Society. - 
_ The Botanical Society. 

' The Entomological Society. _ 

. ‘The Se ea Society, Program: 


“ . 


a 


ee Seen et ee 
ate een f ey 


Po Ar re 


ee es -inae. Rayaonp C. Soe eT 


| Sctmwrrere Notes AND Nees ly ee 


Aa conc sep Gee ae. 
Recording Secretary: W. D. Dawes Coast and Geodetic 
Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 


v 


ace ees ei ala) Sea n 7 es ee 


ol. 17 : FEBRUARY 3, 1927 No. 3 


ae % 


we 


; ? en CER SS ee be 2 
bee CWRU MIAT Gre ts co, 
: Shes ~ 
owe F Tey ani Meee 
: 7 fe Pre <4:402/ <<) 
* SOR af dee 
. } | 1 / 
: a 
. : — Ss > & = . R, ns 
- Vn Tin - exn3 3 34 a Ss 
“SIONAL NYS 
> i 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 


OF SCIENCES 


higeid - BOARD OF EDITORS 


~Wiiiiam J. Perers Aenrs CHASE J. B. Rensipg, Jr. 


t DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 


ASSOCIATE EDITORS 


L. H. Apams S. A. RoHWER 
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 

E, A. GotpMan G. W. Stross 
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 

R. F. Grieas J. R. SWANTON 
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


E. WicHERS 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 


EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 
BY THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


Mr. Royau anD GUILFORD AvEs. 
BALTIMORE, MarYLAND 


Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 


This J OURNAL, the official org 
yy present a brief record of currents 
(1) short original papers, written 
short notes of current scientific litera’ 
(3) proceedings and programs of me 
notes of events connected with the scientifi 

semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of n 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres} 
Sie aie is an essential ch will oral a manuser: it reach 


M esac may be sent to any arate of the’ Béard re} 3 
glearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without ess 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious min 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publ 
_ the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that | 
_ gerially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. | 

_ Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be con mn 
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for il us ! 
partly met bytheauthor. _ apse 
Proof.—in order to facilitate prompt publication no proof I be sent to 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in final orm; th 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy isfollowed. _ i 
Authors’ Reprints,—Reprints will be furnished the following. se 


Copies 4 pps ous 8 pp. § 12 pp. 

~—680 $.85 ~—61.65 82. 5 

100 1.90 © 3.80 475 

150, 2.05. 430 e505 2 

200 DON La RO ee Rane On ; 
250 es oe Ze a 6. ae ; 


Cover bearing the name ae aie author and title of the sateen wit inel 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. 


As an author will not pen see proof, his Pome for extra ‘copie or rep i 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his eae es SS et a lle 


The rate of Subscription per volume oe ie 
Seeger : esvese 
Monthly numbers.....-...+.+-+eeceeeeeseeeseeessesecescerseeees 


Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Gownten 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Weslenaie 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. 
Exchanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other publications. — of sae 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, bee that. claim i is 
within thirty days after date of the eee’ issue, 


z "4 : er 4 wes 
aes ek, Fate ie 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, ‘to Hieaiiber 19, 1911, will he ate for $3. 00. ‘Special rates 
are given to members of scientific societies | affliated with ee Academy 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
iY FEBRUARY 3, 1927 No. 3 


PETROLOGY .—An analctte-rich rock from the Deccan traps of India. 
N. L. Bowen. Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of 
Washington. : 


In a study of the thin sections of a large collection of specimens of 
the Deccan traps in the possession of Dr. H. S. Washington a type was 
noted with a large proportion of a clear isotropic groundmass. ‘This 
has a very low refractive index and is therefore quite distinct from the 
glassy groundmass occasionally found in some of the ordinary traps. 
The isotropic substance is, in fact, analcite and in other respects the 
rock is so unusual that its occurrence seems worthy of note. 

The specimen is labelled ‘‘Deccan trap N.W. base of Ketool Hill, 
Cutch, India,” and has the general appearance of an ordinary trap. 
The weathered surface has occasional pits that suggest amygdules 
but are in reality produced by the weathering out of olivine crystals 
which show as clear grains on the fresh break and are the only con- 
stituent of the rock identifiable in the hand specimen. 

Under the microscope the rock is found to consist principally of 
analcite and pyroxene with a fair amount of olivine, as the small 
phenocrysts already noted, some nephelite, a little biotite, and rather 
abundant grains of an opaque ore mineral. 

The pyroxene occurs as clusters and patches of minute felted prisms, 
some of which have the appearance of irregular individual grains in 
ordinary light, the composite character being clearly revealed, how- 
ever, under crossed nicols. They average about 0.1 mm. in length and 
not more than } that amount in width. The high extinction angle 
and high refractive indices (above 1.70) mark it as augite. It probably 
makes up nearly one-half the rock. Analcite acts as a matrix between 
the patches and streaks of augite but another mineral is found to be 


1 Received December 23, 1926. 
7 


58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 


interstitial to the prisms of augite of the felted mass when they are not 
too crowded to permit a determination of its presence. It has low 
refraction but, unlike the analcite, has a definite birefringence. Oc- 
casionally, on the border between augite clusters and analcite, definite 
prismoids of this mineral were observed which had weak birefringence, 
parallel extinction, negative elongation, and higher index than analecite 
but much lower than augite. They are in all probability nephelite. 

In one thin section a rounded area about 2 mm. in diameter was 
noted in which the mineral constituents are somewhat different from 
those in the main mass. The mineral determined as probably nephe- 
lite is the principal constituent and in it are contained prisms of a 
pyroxene which, unlike the augite of the main rock, is decidedly green 
and undoubtedly somewhat acmitic. In addition to this there are 
grains of a strongly pleochroic deep-brown amphibole. ‘This patch is, 
on a minute scale, analogous to the blebs of a pegmatitic character 
often seen in igneous rocks, especially those of an alkaline type. 

Of the constituents of the main mass of the rock, again, analcite is 
perhaps a little less abundant than pyroxene. It occurs as a ground- 
mass to the patches and clusters of augite prisms and its own distribu- 
tion is therefore correspondingly patchy. It is entirely isotropic in 
thin section and the refractive index is between 1.485 and 1.495. 
Acid dissolves the mineral with separation of silica and the solution 
shows alumina and soda. There is no tendency for analcite to occur 
as euhedral individual crystals resembling leucite such as are common 
in analcite basalts. The patches of analcite are, however, granular, 
the border between grains being ordinarily marked by filaments of 
some substance of higher index and the shapes of the individuals 
strongly suggesting the polyhedral outlines appropriate to analcite. 

Olivine is present as crystals that sometimes show an approach to 
euhedral outline but are generally of irregular shape and make up 
perhaps 10 to 15 per cent of the rock. ‘They may be as much as 2 mm. 
in diameter and therefore far exceed in size the grains of any other 
mineral. The refractive index y = 1.70 and 2V is nearly 90° so — 
that the olivine must contain approximately 10 per cent FeO. In 
some grains it is entirely fresh and in others it may be completely 
transformed to serpentine. 

Mica occurs in very subordinate amount and its relations to the 
pyroxene and ore suggest that it has been formed by reaction of the 
alkalic liquid with these minerals. Its strongest absorption is a pale 
brown and is in the normal position for biotite. 


FEB. 3, 1927 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE FROM COSTA RICA 59 


The ore mineral appears as small grains often of approximately 
octahedral shape. 

Feldspar is entirely absent. 

The Deccan traps are a thick series of basaltic lavas of the plateau 
type.2. They are normally of ordinary basaltic composition and are 
made up almost exclusively of augite and plagioclase. ‘The present 
rock is decidedly different. ‘There is no information regarding its 
mode of occurrence and therefore no definite assurance that it is a 
lava, but the extremely fine prisms of augite suggest a rate of cooling 
that is consistent with such a mode of occurrence. 

It is not possible to interpret the rock as an ordinary basalt in which 
analcite has replaced plagioclase for the augite has neither the granular 
character produced by extremely rapid chilling nor the ophitic char- 
acter produced by somewhat less rapid chilling in ordinary basalt. 
The minute prisms are, indeed, such as appear to be characteristic of 
alkaline basalts. The presence of nephelite suggests the possibility 
that the rock was a nephelite basalt now strongly analcitized. 

The evidence that analcite takes the place of other minerals, .princi- 
pally nephelite, is not clearly to be made out and is rather suggested 
than proved by its patchy distribution and the fact that nephelite 
rather than analcite is the matrix of the pyroxene prisms where they 
are most closely crowded. Occasionally, however, a seam of analcite 
is to be seen lying along the imperfect prismatic cleavage of nephelite. 
On the whole it would appear that the rock is a nephelite basalt which 
has suffered analcitization, but the possibility that it is an analcite 
basalt and the analcite dominantly primary can not be excluded. 

In either case it is apparently the first example from the Deccan 
traps of a rock of such strongly alkaline affinities. 

I am much indebted to Doctor Washington for the opportunity of 
examining his collection of these rocks. 


BOTANY.—WNew Asteraceae from Costa Rica. S. F. Buaxe, Bureau 
of Plant Industry.! 


The four new species described in this paper form part of the ex- 
tensive collections of plants made in Costa Rica in 1924 and 1925-6 
by Paul C. Standley of the U. S. National Museum. Notes on cer- 
tain other species are added. 


2H. S. Wasuineton. Deccan Traps and other Plateau Basalts. Bull. Geol. Soe. 


Amer,, 33: 765-803. 1922. 
1 Received December 23, 1926. 


60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 


Archibaccharis irazuensis Blake 


Hemibaccharis trazuensis Blake, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 20: 551. 1924. 

Dr. Johann Mattfeld of Berlin has called my attention to the fact that in 
describing the genus Hemibaccharis? I overlooked Heering’s genus Archi- 
baccharis,* founded on Baccharis hieraciifolia Hemsl. and B. hirtella DC. 
Of the 15 species recognized in my treatment, several have already been 
transferred to Archibaccharis in Standley’s ‘““Trees and Shrubs of Mexico.” 
The six following species (all Mexican or Guatemalan) require transfer. 


Archibaccharis corymbosa (Donn. Smith) Blake 


Diplostephium corymbosum Donn. Smith, Bot. Gaz. 23:8. 1897. 
Hemibaccharis corymbosa Blake, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 20: 553. 1924. 


Archibaccharis flexilis Blake 
Hemibaccharis flexilis Blake, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 20: 549. 1924. 


Archibaccharis glandulosa (Greenm.) Blake 


Baccharis glandulosa Greenm. Proc. Amer. Acad. 40: 36. 1904. 
Hemibaccharis glandulosa Blake, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 20: 546. 1924. 


Archibaccharis hieracioides Blake | 
Baccharis hieraciifoia Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 2: 129. 1881. 
Not B. hieractfolia Lam. 17838. 
Archibaccharis hieraciifolia Heer. Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anst. 21: Beiheft 
3: 40. 1904, as to synonym only. 

Hemibaccharis hieracioides Blake, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 20: 547. 1924. 

Heering’s treatment of this species is far from clear. Although he pub- 
lished the name as ‘‘A. hzeracizfolia Heering n. spec.’”’ and cited Hemsley’s 
synonym with a mark of interrogation, he apparently did not consider the 
plant referred to (Pringle 6257) a new species, for he gave no diagnosis, 
merely remarking that Hemsley’s description called for leaves attenuate at 
both ends and petioled or subsessile, while in his plant they were sessile and 
auriculate. Pringle 6257 is in fact the type number of Baccharis glandulosa 
Greenm. (1904), a species distinct from B. hieracizfolia Hemsl. In the case 
of his second numbered species, Heering was similarly ambiguous, listing it as 
“A. hirtella Heering n. spec.,’ but citne “B. hirtella DO ex 
deser.”’ and “B. hirtella Klatt! Leopoldina X X. (1884), p. 4” among the 
synonyms. On the whole, it seems advisable to treat these two names of 
Heering as representing new combinations rather than new species. A 
third species, Archibaccharis schultzit Heer. (1. c. 41), based on Liebmann 425, 
is mentioned by Heering with a few words of description quite insufficient to 
permit the recognition of the species in the absence of specimens. 

Baccharis hieraciifolia Hemsl. was based on Bourgeau 951 and 1230, both 
from Desierto Viejo, Valley of Mexico. Both numbers, as represented in the 


2 Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 20: 544. 1924. 
3 Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anst. 21: Beiheft 3: 40. 1904. 


FEB. 3, 1927 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE FROM COSTA RICA 61 


Kew Herbarium, belong to the species with naked petioles, Archibaccharis 
hieracioides. ‘The specimen of Bourgeau 1230 in the U. S. National Her- 
barium, however, is A. glandulosa (Greenm.) Blake, with amplexicaul- 
based leaves. 


Archibaccharis salmeoides Blake 


Hemibaccharis salmeoides Blake, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 20: 548. pl. 
50. 1924. 
Archibaccharis simplex Blake 


Hemibaccharis simplex Blake, Contr. U. 8S. Nat. Herb. 20: 547. pl. 49. 
1924. 
Gnaphalium rhodarum Blake, sp. nov. 


Annual, leafy; stem lanate-tomentose and stipitate-glandular; leaves 
lanceolate, acuminate, green and glandular above, arachnoid-tomentose be- 
neath, short-decurrent: heads rosy, medium-sized, in close glomerules crowded 
in a small panicle. 

Single-stemmed, 24-30 cm. high or more, erect, the stem or the few 
branches simple below the inflorescence, lanate-tomentose with whitish wool, 
densely so toward apex, toward base glabrescent, exposing the dense stipitate 
glands; leaves nearly uniform, 2.5—5 cm. long, 4-8 mm. wide, with attenuate 
dark callous tips, broadest toward base and decurrent in rather broad wings 
3-8 mm. long, repand, very narrowly revolute-margined; heads campanulate- 
subglobose, about 4mm. high and thick, glomerate at tips of the usually few 
and short branches of the panicle, the glomerules 1-1.8 em. thick; pistillate 
flowers 37, hermaphrodite 10; involucre 4 mm. high, about 3-seriate, some- 
what graduate, the phyllaries broadly ovate to oblong, obtuse or slightly 
apiculate, somewhat erose, the concealed green base arachnoid, the tips 
bright rosy or becoming light brown in age; corollas whitish; achenes oval- 
oblong, plump, 0.7 mm. long, papillose, otherwise glabrous; pappus bristles 
white, deciduous separately, not thickened above. 

Cosra Rroa: In paramo, Cerro de las Vueltas, Province of San José, alt. 
2700-3000 meters, 29 Dec. 1925-1 Jan. 1926, Standler y & Valerio 43623 
(type no. 1,258,330, U. S. Nat. Herb.); in open forest, same data, Standley 
& Valerio 48961; Cerro de Buena Vista, alt. 3100 meters, 19 Jan. 1891, Put- 
tier 3433. 


Pittier’s plant was determined by Klatt as Gnaphalium roseum H. B. K., 
to which G. rhodarum is related. In G. rosewm, however, the leaves are 
persistently tomentose above and much less conspicuously decurrent. 

The specific name is Latinized from ‘podapés,' rosy, a word given in 
Schrevelius’ Lexicon but not in Liddel! and Scott. 


Gnaphalium subsericeum Blake, sp. nov. 


Low herb; stem simple, white-lanate-tomentose; leaves rather few, linear, 
attenuate, green above, closely subsericeous-tomentose with white hairs 
beneath, not decurrent; heads small, numerous in a small dense cymose 
panicle; phyllaries narrow, blackish green below the obtusish firm white tips; 
corollas reddish-purple above. 

Stems 11-16 cm. high, erect, solitary (or paired?) from an apparently 
perennial slender root, densely and subsericeously lanate-tomentose; leaves 
nearly uniform (the upper only slightly shorter), about 12 above base of 


62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 


stem, 3.5-6 cm. long, 3-5 mm. wide, attenuate to a callous brownish tip, 
sessile, not narrowed at base, entire, firm, above deep green, glabrescent or 
glabrate, very narrowly revolute- margined, the narrow green costa evident 
beneath; heads campanulate, 4 mm. high, 2.8 mm. thick, glomerate on the 
very short branches, forming a very dense rounded panicle 3-3.5 em. thick; 
pistillate flowers 69, hermaphrodite 8; involucre 4 mm. high, about 5- -seriate, 
rather strongly graduate, the outer phyllaries ovate, obtuse, the inner linear, 
obtuse or acutish, all with narrow greenish midline below, bordered by whit- 
ish, then by a narrow line of shining yellow brown, blackish or greenish black 
below the white chartaceous apex, thinly arachnoid below; achenes angled, 
0.6 mm. long, nearly glabrous; pappus bristles apparently deciduous in groups, 
those of the hermaphrodite flowers slightly stouter than the pistillate, but not 
clavate-thickened. 

Costa Rica: Wet meadow, La Palma, Province of San José, alt. 1600 
meters, 3 Feb. 1924, Standley 32941 (type no. 1,226,057, U.S. Nat. Herb. iy 


Evidently related to Gnaphalium salicifolium (Bertol.) Sch. Bip. (G. 
rhodanthum Sch. Bip.), which ranges from Mexico to Guatemala. In 
Gnaphalium salicifoltum the stem is distinctly indurate below or even suffrutes- 
cent, and densely leafy, the leaves are less attenuate, persistently tomentose 
above and not subsericeous beneath, the heads distinctly larger, and the 
phyllaries usually purple-tinged. | 


RENSONIA SALVADORICA Blake, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 13: 145. 
1923. Bie) 1° 
This species, the only representative of its genus, was described from three 

collections made by Mr. Standley in the Department of Ahuachapan, Salva- 

dor, in January 1922. The original material was in mature fruit, and did 

not show the character of the ray corollas. The description of the genus 

can now be completed from further material of the same species collected in 

January 1926 at five different localities in the Cordillera of Tilara4n, Province 

of Guanacaste, Costa Rica, at 500-700 meters altitude, by Paul C. Standley 

and Juvenal Valerio (nos. 44224, 45572, 45828, 46083, and 46455). The 
specimens are described as collected from erect or ascending, usually sub- 
scandent, rarely epiphytic shrubs 1—4.5 m. high, common in moist or dry for- 
est. The following characters should be added to the generic description: 
Corollas all yellow; rays 8, fertile, 1-seriate, spreading, about equaling the 
disk (tube hispidulous above, 1.38 mm. long; lamina oval-oblong, shallowly 

or rather deeply 2-lobed, with one of the lobes sometimes bidentate, 3.8-5 

mm. long, 2.6 mm. wide, hispidulous on back chiefly on the nerves, 8-9- 

nerved, 2 of the nerves much stronger than the others); ray achenes usually 

with a pappus of a single stout hispidulous awn or tooth (0.8 mm. long or 
less) on the inner side; pappus of disk achenes a short, thick, hispidulous- 

ciliolate crown, usually prolonged into 1-3 unequal teeth or short awns 1.2 

mm. long or less. 


Hieracium sphagnicola Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Crepidisperma; phyllopodous; basal leaves oblanceolate, up to 17 
cm. long, thin, sparsely long-pilose; stem rather tall, bearing 0-2 elongate 
leaves below the middle, sparsely long-pilose below, loosely cymose-branched 
above. bearing 5-8 heads on elongate, flexuous, flocculent, finely glandular, 
and apically pilose peduncles; involucre narrowly campanulate, 8-11 mm. 
high, stipitate-glandular and sparsely pilose, chiefly toward base; achenes 


FEB. 3, 1927 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE FROM COSTA RICA 63 


; t ’ cated ' 
AV : g at 
/ ASV GE ‘ f 
A / t ' 
j > “leg c 
Ah Y 
4 i , 
A ae La od 
ef / i & g 
J ) 
/ Le, 
y i 
y 


Fig. 1. Rensonia salvadorica Blake (drawn from Standley & Valerio 45572).—A, 
portion of plant, X1; B, fruiting head, <6; C, disk floret and pale, X5; D, ray floret, X4; 
EH, stamens, X10; F, style and nectary of disk floret, X10; G, style branches of ray floret, 
X10. 


64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 


distinctly tapering above or nearly columnar, 3-4 mm. long; pappus 
brownish, 5 mm. long. 

Plants apparently tufted, 35-85 cm. high, from slender, vertical (?) root- 
stocks; basal leaves oblanceolate or obovate, 7-17 cm. long (including the 
slender petiole, this 1.5-9 cm. long), 8-18 mm. wide, obtuse or rounded, 
bluntly callous-apiculate, tapering at base, remotely denticulate (teeth dark, 
glandular-callous, up to 0.5 mm. long), green on both sides, above sparsely 
pilose, especially toward margin, with brownish hairs (these minutely hispidu- 
lous, about 3 mm. long, with darker brown, somewhat pustulate base), 
beneath similarly pilose chiefly along costa, the petioles more densely pilose; 
stem leaves similar to the basal but narrower, 6—11.5 cm. long, 3-7 mm. wide, 
densely pilose-ciliate at base; stems 1-2 together, very slender, branching 
above or sometimes from near base, below pilose with loosely reflexed hairs 
like those of the leaves, practically glabrous near middle, above sordid- 
flocculent and finely stipitate-glandular with short, several-celled hairs; 
bracts subtending the upper peduncles small and narrow or minute; peduncles 
monocephalous, 1.5-5.5 cm. long, flexuous and often divaricate, the glands 
blackish below, yellowish above, the longer hairs blackish; involucre some- 
what graduate, the phyllaries blackish green, lance-oblong or the outer 
lanceolate, obtuse to subacuminate (the inner 1—-1.3 mm. wide), the glandular 
hairs yellowish-tipped, blackish below; flowers about 23, their corollas yellow, 
14 mm. long (lamina 9 mm.), deeply 5-toothed (teeth 3.5-4.5 mm. long), the 
teeth essentially glabrous; achenes brownish black or purple brown, short- 
tapering at base; styles pale. 

Costa Rica: Common in open sphagnum bog, Laguna de la Chonta, 
northeast of Santa Maria de Dota, Province of San José, alt. 2000-2100 
meters, 18 Dec. 1925, Standley 42139 (type no. 1,252,630, U. S. Nat. Herb.). 
Also collected at same place and date under no. 423438. 


Readily distinguished from H. zrasuense Benth., H. standley: Blake, and 
H. abscissum Less., the only other species known from Costa Rica, by its 
foliage and pubescence. | . 


Hieracium standleyi Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Crepidisperma; phyllopodous, eriopodous; basal leaves small, 
sparsely long-pilose; stem scapose, short, bearing linear bracts at base of 
peduncles, otherwise naked, glabrous below; peduncles 3, long, monocepha- 
lous, above flocculose, finely glandular, and sparsely pilose; involucre rather 
broad, 9-11 mm. high, the phyllaries lanceolate to oblong, obtuse to acutish, 
broad (the inner 1.5-2 mm. wide), pilose at base and along midline, not 
glandular; achenes obscurely tapering above, 2.5-3.8 mm. long; pappus 
brownish, 4.5 mm. long. 

Perennial, 1-stemmed, 17 em. high, from a short praemorse rootstock with 
elongate slender rootlets, pilose-tufted at base with somewhat rusty hairs; 
basal leaves about 6, obovate, 3.5-4 em. long (including the petioliform base, 
this about 1 cm. long), 1 em. wide, rounded, bluntly callous-apiculate, taper- 
ing at base, obscurely and bluntly callous-denticulate, firm, above light green, 
sparsely pilose (hairs 1.5-3 mm. long, whitish, with small dark pustulate 
base, minutely hispidulous but not obviously many-celled), beneath pale 
green, sparsely long-pilose chiefly along costa and the 4-5 pairs of lateral 
veins; scape 3-headed, the unbranched portion 1.8 cm. long, practically 
glabrous, the lowest peduncle 13.5 em. long, 1-headed and with an abortive 
lateral head, subtended by a linear-spatulate bract 2 cm. long and 1 mm. 


FEB. 3, 1927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA 65 


wide, sparsely pilosulous below, above loosely flocculose and densely short- 
glandular with small, blackish-based, many-celled, yellowish glands, toward 
the head also loosely pilose with blackish-based hairs, the 2 other peduncles 
about 7.5 em. long; involucre campanulate, 7-10 mm. thick (as pressed), 
rather strongly graduate, the outermost phyllaries lance-triangular, 2-4 mm. 
long, obtuse, blackish-green, pilose at base and along midline (the hairs 
blackish below, whitish above), the inner phyllaries about 13, narrowly 
oblong, obtuse, or acutish, thinner and paler above, with black, sparsely 
pilose midline; corollas ‘‘bright yellow,” about 10 mm. long (lamina 7 mm. 
long), with 5 glabrous teeth (1.3-1.8 mm. long); achenes deep purple-brown; 
styles blackish-green. 

Costa Rica: Scarce, in paramo, Cerro de las Vueltas, Province of San 
José, alt. 2700-3000 meters, 29 Dec. 1925-1 Jan. 1926, Standley & Valerio 
43624 (type no. 1,253,331, U.S. Nat. Herb.). 


This species, represented by a single specimen, is apparently nearest the 
Mexican Hieracitum junceum Fries, but is abundantly distant in involucral 
characters from that species as described in Zahn’s monograph. 


BOTANY.—Fourteen new species of plants from Hispaniola. E. C. 
Lronarp, U. 8. National Museum. (Communicated by PauL 
C. STANDLEY.) 7 


The fourteen species of flowering plants here described from the 
island of Hispaniola belong to several families, and all but three are 
based upon material collected by the writer in the course of his visit 
to the mountains of northern Haiti during the winter of 1925-26. 
Of the two exceptions, one is a Brunfelsia found by Dr. W. L. Abbott 
- on the Samand Peninsula, Dominican Republic, and the other two 
are new grasses from Furcy, southern Haiti, described by Agnes Chase 
from specimens obtained by the writer on a visit to that region in 
company with Dr. Abbott, in 1920. 


Phthirusa siegeri Leonard, sp. nov. 


Stems branched, erect or ascending, 20 to 50 cm. high, glabrous, the upper 
internodes compressed narrowly winged, broadened at the nodes, the lower 
internodes terete, light gray; leaves firm, leathery, oblong-obovate or oblong- 
elliptic, 4 to 7.5 em. long, 1.5 to3 em. broad, rounded or obtusish and apiculate 
at apex, gradually or somewhat abruptly narrowed to a short (2 to 5 mm. long) 
petiole, glabrous on both surfaces, drying olive-green, the midrib on lower 
surface and the petiole sharply triangular in cross-section, the lateral veins 
3 or 4 pairs, inconspicuous in younger leaves; flowers 2 to 4 in racemes 
1.5 to 3 em. long, in the axils of the upper leaves, the rachis light gray-fur- 
furaceous, flattened, broadened at the insertion of the pedicels; pedicels 1 to 
2 mm. long, gray-furfuraceous; cupule shallow, about 2 mm. long, 4 mm. 
broad, gray-furfuraceous, obscurely lobed, the lobes deltoid, obtuse; calyx 


1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received 
December 29, 1926. 


66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 


minute, entire; petals 6, yellowish without, reddish within, thick, linear- 

oblong, 2 to 5 mm. long, 0.75 mm. broad at base, gradually narrowed from 

middle to an acute tip;,stamens 6, attached to the petals about 1 mm. above 
their base, the 3 sterile ones 1.5 mm. long, excavate on the margins below the 

triangular sterile anther (this 0.75 mm. broad), the 3 fertile stamens 1 mm. 

long, their anthers oval, apiculate, about 0.05 mm. broad; style fusiform, 

scarcely 2 mm. long; berry oval, black, 1 cm. long, 6 mm. broad, minutely 
reticulate. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no 1,149,122, collected from a tree 
on a dry plain east of the Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, Départ- 
ment du Nord, Haiti, altitude 350 meters, November 18, 1925, by H. C. 
' Leonard (no. 7166). 

Additional specimens examined: 

Harti: Mt. La Mine, vicinity of St. Michel, November 19, 1925, Leonard 
7227. Dry bank along the Puilboreau road, north of Ennery, Départ- 
ment de |’Artibonite, altitude 400 meters, January 17, 1926, on Poztea 
multiflora (Sw.) Uro., Leonard 8903; February 13, 1926, Leonard 9715. 
Dry thickets on mountain slope southeast of Ennery, January 19, 1926, 
Leonard 8971. 


Phthirusa siegert is easily distinguished by the short, stout, few-flowered, 
light gray-furfuraceous racemes, large black oval berries, and small yellow- 
ish flowers. The species is named for Mr. E. J. Sieger, manager of the 


United West Indies Corporation, who assisted me greatly in my work at St. 
Michel. 


Coccoloba revoluta Leonard, sp. nov. 


Small tree with numerous spreading branches; bark light gray; young twigs 
puberulent, striate, slightly swollen at the nodes, the internodes 1 to 2.5 cm. 
long; ocreae 5 mm. long, obliquely 2-lobed at tip, the lobes short, obtuse; 
petioles 3 to 4mm. long, 2mm. broad at base, flat, puberulent above, glabrous 
beneath; leaves ovate, 2 to 4.5 cm. long, 1.5 to 3 cm. broad, rounded or obtuse 
at apex, subcordate at base, firm, revolute, drying olive-green, glabrous and 
prominently but minutely reticulate on both surfaces, the principal nerves 4 
to 5 pairs, obscure above, prominent beneath; flowers and fruit not seen. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,149,188, collected in a dry 
thicket several miles north of the Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, 
Départment du Nord, Haiti, altitude 350 meters, December 26, 1925, by 
E. C. Leonard (no. 8499). No. 7244, collected November 20, 1925, at the 
same locality is of this species. 


In shape and texture of leaf blades this species closely resembles C. pilonis 
Urb. and C. krugiz Lindau, but in neither of these species is the upper surface 
of the leaf blades prominently reticulated, and both have longer and more 
slender petioles. 

Coccoloba fulgens Leonard, sp. nov. 

Small tree 3 to 6 meters high; stems, leaves, and inflorescence glabrous; 
twigs reddish brown; ocreae 5 to 8 mm. long, oblique at tip, soon deciduous; 
petioles 2 to 10 mm. long; leaf blades oblong-elliptic to obovate, 2 to 5 em. 
long, 15 to 25 cm. broad, round at apex, narrowed from middle to petiole, 


acutish or obtuse at base, entire, firm, shining, yellowish green when dry, 
both surfaces coarsely and prominently reticulate, the lower surface minutely 


FEB. 3, 1927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA 67 


glandular-punctate, the principal lateral veins 4 or 5 pairs; racemes solitary, 
terminal on small branches, 2 to 3 cm. long, the fruits 20 to 35, somewhat 
crowded; ocreolae 0.75 mm. long; flowers not seen; pedicels 1 mm. long; fruit 
reddish brown, pyriform, 6 mm. long, 4 mm. thick, the accrescent sepals 
closed over fruit, triangular, blunt, about 2.5 mm. long. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,300, 397, collected in a thicket 
on the Puilboreau Pass between Ennery and Plaisance, Départment de 1’ Arti- 
bonite, Haiti, altitude 900 meters, January 23, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 
9145). 


In fruit and shape of leaf blades this plant resembles C. obtuszfolia Jacq. 
but that species has puberulent stems and petioles, a longer and more slender 
rachis, and larger leaves. 


Aeschynomene aurea Leonard, sp. nov. 


Herbaceous, branched at base, the branches slender, erect or ascending, 
leafy to the summit, striate, sparingly and minutely strigose with white hairs, 
or the hairs on the tips of the branches spreading; stipules sessile, ovate or 
lanceolate, rounded at base, acute or acuminate, prominently nerved, sparsely 
strigillose or glabrous; leaves 1.5 to 3 cm. long, hispidulous with white 
hairs, the petioles 3 to 4 mm. long, the petiolules 0.5 mm. long, the leaflets 
6 to 11 pairs, 5 to 6 mm. long, 2 to 2.5 mm. wide, oblique and subcordate at 
base, oblique and obtuse at apex, prominently reticulate-veined beneath; 
flowers few, in axillary or terminal racemes up to 3 cm. long; pedicels 5 to 10 
mm. long, pubescent with white, appressed or spreading hairs; bracts ovate, 
1.5 mm. long, acutish, prominently parallel-veined; calyx 4 mm. long, 
sparsely strigillose, 2-lipped, the 2 lower lobes obtuse, the 3 upper ones 
triangular and acuminate; corolla golden yellow, the standard ovate to 
suborbicular, about 9 mm. long, 8 mm. broad, more or less pubescent with- 
out, the claw cuneate, 2 mm. long, 2 mm. broad above, the wings ob- 
liquely obovate, as long as the standard, the claw slender, the keel curved, 
obliquely truncate, about 5mm. long; stamens diadelphous, the united portion 
of the filaments 4.5 mm. long, the free portion 1.5 to 2 mm. long; ovary 
stipitate, 5 mm. long, minutely pubescent; style about 4 mm. long, abruptly 
bent, glabrous above, pubescent below; pods 2 to 2.5 cm. long, flat, 3 to 5- 
jointed, reticulate, appressed-pubescent, deeply constricted below, the tip 
hair-like, about 5 mm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,300,172, collected on the 
Puilboreau road above Ennery, Départment de l|’Artibonite, Haiti, altitude 
800 meters, January 13, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 8818). 


Aeschynomene aurea is closely related to A. tenuis Griseb., a Cuban species, 
but the two plants differ strikingly in several respects. The stems of A. 
tenuis are glabrous and bear but few leaves which are mostly near the base, 
the leaflets are narrower, the flowers smaller, and the pods glabrous or but 
very sparsely strigillose, very obscurely reticulate, and thick-margined. 
The stems of A. aurea are strigose and leafy to the summit and the pods are 
appressed-puberulent, prominently reticulate, and not thick-margined. 


Galactia retrorsa Leonard, sp. nov. 


Twining vine; stem retrorsely pilose with yellowish hairs about 0.5 mm. 
long; stipules retrorsely pilose, 3 to 4 mm. long; petioles 2 to 6 cm. long, re- 
trorsely pilose; leaflets 3; petiolules pilose with yellowish, appressed or ascend- 


68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 


ing hairs, those of the lateral leaflets 1 to 2 mm. long, those of the terminal 
one 5 to 10 mm. long; leaf blades oblong-elliptic, rounded at both ends, firm, 
entire, the upper surface with a few hairs on the mid-rib, the lower surface 
velvety-appressed-pilose, the hairs on midrib denser and yellowish, the veins 
reticulate but not prominent; flowers numerous, in axillary racemes reaching 
6 cm. in length; peduncles very short or none, the pedicels slender, 2 to 3 mm. 
long, pilose with minute, whitish, spreading, retrorse or appressed hairs; 
calyx slightly 2-lipped, about 5 mm. long, minutely appressed-pilose or a 
few of the hairs ascending, the lobes 1.5 mm. long, triangular, with an awnlike 
tip; corolla bright purple, about 8 mm. long, the standard orbicular, 5 mm. 
broad, emarginate, the claw 3.5 mm. long, 1.5 mm. broad, narrowed to 0.5 
mm. at base, the wings obovate, 5 mm. long, 2 mm. broad, the keel curved, 
rounded, emarginate, about 3 mm. long; stamens diadelphous, the tube and 
single stamen 5.5 mm. long, the free portion of the 9 united stamens 0.5 mm. 
long, the stamen tube narrowed above; stigma 3 mm. long, appressed- 
pubescent. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,149,590, collected on hillside 
near small stream on the north slope of Mt. Platanna, in the vicinity of St. — 
Michel, Haiti, altitude about 350 meters, December 7, 1925, by E. C. Leonard 
(no. 7811). No. 8119, collected in the vicinity of Marmelade, and no. 9228 
from Plaisance, are to be referred to this species. They were taken from fruit- 
ing plants and differ from the type in their relatively shorter leaf blades and 
more sparsely pubescent stems. The pods are 2.5 to 3 cm. long, 5mm. broad, 
slightly curved, abruptly narrowed at the apex to a short curved tip, and 
appressed-pilose with minute yellowish hairs. The seeds are dark greenish 
brown or black, flat, 3.5 mm. long and 2 to 2.5 mm. broad. 


This well-marked species is characterized by the large rounded-elliptic 
leaflets, densely flowered, sessile racemes, and yellowish retrorse pubescence 
of stem and petiole. 


Trichilia truncata Leonard, sp. nov. 


Shrub or small tree 1 to 3 meters high; young twigs puberulent, the older 
twigs glabrous or sparingly puberulent, the lenticels round, about 0.5 mm. in 
diameter, prominent; leaves odd-pinnate; rachis 2 to 6 cm. long, puberulent; 
petiolules thick, 1 to 2 mm. long; leaflets 3 or 5, subopposite, 4 to 11 cm. long, 
2 to 5 cm. broad, firm, leathery, drying bright green, extremely variable, 
cuneate or narrowly obovate, broadest above the middle, gradually narrowed 
from the broadest portion to the base, the margins straight or curved, en- 
tire, truncate and 3-lobed at apex, or, if narrowed, undulate or coarsely 
toothed, the apex and teeth or lobes blunt, the upper surface glabrous, the 
midrib impressed, the lower surface with prominent puberulent midrib and 
veins, the principal lateral veins 5 to 11 pairs, the secondary ones reticulate; 
flowers racemose, terminal, in the axils of the upper leaves, the racemes small, 
about 1 em. long, the branches puberulent; pedicels 1 mm. long, puberulent; 
lobes of the calyx triangular, acute, pubescent; flowers not seen; fruit obovoid, 
7 to 10 mm. long, velvety-pubescent. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, ‘no. 1,300,370, collected along the 
Puilboreau road, vicinity of Ennery, Haiti, altitude 900 meters, January 21, 
1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 9095). Additional specimens were collected 
near Marmelade, altitude 800 meters, December 20, 1925 (Leonard 8275 and 
8288). No. 8288 consists of seedlings about 30 em. high with both juvenile 
and mature leaves. The juvenile leaves are linear, 8 to 18 em. long, 0.3 to 
1 cm. wide, and blunt at apex. 


FEB. 3, 1927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA 69 


This strange plant is found in thickets on the broken lime-capped summits 
of the higher mountain ranges of northern Haiti. It is probably related to 
T. pallida Sw., which it closely resembles in all respects except in the peculiar 
cuneate, truncate or lobed leaves. 7’. cunezfolia Urb., a species found in the 
Dominican Republic, has this type of leaf but the lobes are tipped with 


prominent spines. 
Croton ekmanii Leonard, sp. nov. 


Monoecious aromatic shrub about 1 meter high; branches slender; young 
twigs minutely stellate-pubescent and pilose (each long hair a prolonged ray 
of one of the stellate hairs); older twigs smooth, gray; petioles very slender, 
1 to 3 cm. long, rather sparingly pilose and stellate-pubescent; leaf blades 
ovate, 2 to 5 cm. long, 1.5 to 2.5 em. broad (those of the short axillary branches 
much smaller), obtusish and apiculate at apex, rounded or subcordate at 
base with a very narrow sinus, thin, entire or undulate, the upper surface dull 
green, sparingly stellate-pubescent, becoming papillose and subscabrous on 
loss of the pubescence, the veins obscure, the lower surface grayish green, 
pilose and stellate-pubescent, the long hairs predominating on the younger 
leaves, the 4 to 6 lateral veins and midrib rather prominent; glands 1 or 2 
pairs on the petiole at base of leaf blade, slender, hair-like, 1 to 1.5 mm. long; 
flowers few, in smali axillary racemes up to 1 cm. long; pistillate flower 
solitary, the pedicel 1.5 mm. long, pilose and stellate-pubescent, the sepals 
triangular, 1.5 mm. long, 0.5 mm. broad at base, the styles branched, clawed 
at tip, bearing several white stellate scales; capsule (Immature) densely 
white-stellate-pubescent; staminate flowers 4 to 6, subsessile on a slender 
rachis, sparingly pilose and stellate-pubescent, the sepals ovate-lanceolate, 
slightly faleate, 1.25 mm. long, 0.75 mm. broad, acutish at apex, the petals 
obovate, pilose at base, shorter than the sepals; stamens 16 to 20, the fila- 
ments glabrous, the anthers, oval, about 0.5 mm. long; mature fruit not seen. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,301,545, collected along stream 
on the Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, Départment du Nord, 
Haiti, November 17, 1925, by E. C. Leonard (no. 7030). 


This species is readily distinguished by its thin ovate leaves, slender petioles 
with hairlike glands, and by the two types of pubescence. 


Thouinia milleri Leonard, sp. nov. 


Shrub or small tree reaching 4 meters in height; bark smooth, reddish 
brown, the lenticels prominent; young twigs appressed-puberulent; petioles 
1.5 to 8 mm. long, glabrous; leaflets 3; petiolules 1 mm. long; lateral leaflets 
oblong-ovate or oblong to linear-lanceolate, 2 to 10 cm. long, 1 to 1.5 em. 
broad, the terminal leaflet linear-lanceolate, 10 to 25 em. long, 1.5 to 2.2 
em. broad, all obtuse and apiculate at apex, narrowed at base, firm, serrate, 
the teeth low, tipped by the excurrent latera! veins, glabrous above, puberu- 
lent beneath, the midrib and lateral veins prominent on lower surface, the 
lateral veins numerous, parallel, widespreading, joining the midrib nearly at 
right angles, the veinlets prominently reticulate; flowers numerous, in 
crowded, axillary and terminal racemes 3 to 6 cm. long; pedicels slender, 3 
to 4mm. long, puberulent; sepals 4, obovate, ciliate with minute blunt hairs 
composed of square or oval cells, dissimilar, 2 of the sepals keeled, 1 mm. long, 
the other 2 concave, 1.75 mm. long; petals white, cuneate, 3 mm. long, the 
apex truncate, undulate, bearing a pair of small bearded scales on the claw 
0.75 mm. above its base; stamens 8, the filaments slender, slightly exceeding 


70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 


the petals; anthers white, oval, 0.5 mm. long; ovary 0.5 mm. long, winged; 
ovules 2. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,300,595, collected at the base 
of a cliff along the Gonaives road about 5 miles from Ennery, Départment de 
l’Artibonite, altitude 325 meters, February 3, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 
9472). ‘Two additional specimens from Haiti were examined, one collected 
among rocks at the mouth of the caverns north of St. Michel, December 5, 
1925, by Leonard (no. 7750); the other near l’Arcahaie, March 10, 1925, 
by G.S. Miller (no. 267). Muller 267 is a twig bearing leaves and a raceme of 
mature fruit. ‘The samaras are greenish, spreading, obovate, the dorsal edge 
straight, the ventral curved, 2 cm. long, 7 mm. broad, somewhat striate, and 
puberulent. The seeds are obovate, 3 mm. long, 2 mm. broad and sparingly 
puberulent. 


T. patentinervis Radlk., a Cuban species, is closely related to this plant, 
but has leaf blades not exceeding 7 cm. in length and smaller flowers. 


Tetrazygia brevicollis Leonard, sp. nov. 


Round-topped shrub about 2 meters high; bark light gray, smooth; young 
branches sparingly and minutely stellate-furfuraceous; petioles 3 to 6 mm. 
long, gray-stellate-furfuraceous; leaves often erect, the blades oblong-elliptic, 
3 to 5 em. long, 1 to 2cm. broad, acutish or obtuse at apex and tipped by 
a blunt mucro 0.5 mm. long, rounded at base, firm, entire, revolute, the upper 
surface shining, the midrib channeled, the lateral veins obscure, the lower 
surface light gray, densely and smoothly stellate-furfuraceous, 5-nerved, the 
first pair of nerves slender and near the margin of the leaf blade, joining the 
midrib at base, the midrib and second pair of nerves prominent, the latter 
joining the midrib about 2 mm. above the base, the lateral nerves numerous, 
wide-spreading, slender, impressed; flowers 1 or 2 on each of the pair of ter- 
minal peduncles; peduncles 13 mm. long, slightly flattened, furfuraceous, sub- 
tended by the upper pair of leaf blades; pedicels 1 mm. long; calyx rather 
sparsely white-stellate-furfuraceous, the tube 2 mm. long, the lobes :trian- 
gular, acuminate, 3.5 mm. long, spreading; corolla not seen; fruit (¢mmature 
in specimen examined) oval, 5 mm. long, 4 mm. thick, sparsely stellate- 
furfuraceous, becoming glabrous. 

Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,149,939, collected on a dry 
slope six miles north of the Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, Départ- 
ment du Nord, Haiti, altitude 400 meters, December 26, 1925, by E. C. 
Leonard (no. 8461). 


This species is very close to 7. longicollis Urb. & Cogn., but differs in 
having smaller leaves and inflorescence and a much shorter calyx tube. T. 
longicollis is described as having a calyx tube 7 to 8 mm. long, panicles 3 to 5 
cm. long, and leaves reaching 6 cm. in length. 


Hyptis congesta Leonard, sp. nov. 


Herbaceous, about 50 cm. high; stem erect, or ascending at base, simple or 
sparingly branched, square, the angles rounded, the four sides prominently 
channeled, finely striate, closely puberulent with white curved hairs, also 
sparingly pilose above, 4 mm. thick; petioles 1 to 3 cm. long, white-tomentose 
and pilose; leaf blades oblong-ovate, 2 to 5.5 em. long, 1 to 2.5 em. broad, 
cordate at base, gradually narrowed to an acute or acutish apex, both surfaces 
tomentose, the lower surface whitish and strongly reticulate, coarsely serrate 


FEB. 3, 1927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA 7] 


‘the teeth crenulate, the axils of the leaves with short branches bearing small 
leaves; floral bracts similar to and intergrading with the stem leaves; flowers 
in short cymes, the cymes crowded in a terminal spikelike cluster at the sum- 
mit of the stem; pedicels 1 to 2mm. long, puberulent; calyx 8 to 9 mm. long, 
4mm. broad at throat, 3 mm. at the rounded base, 10-nerved, tomentose, the 
margin ciliate, the teeth abruptly linear, 2 to 2.56 mm. long, involute, pilose; 
corolla light purple or lavender, pubescent at least above, about 5 mm. long, 
the upper lip obcordate, spreading, the lower lip 3-lobed, the lobes rounded, 
reflexed; stamens 4, didynamous, the filaments about 1 mm. long, pilose, the 
anthers oval, 1.5 mm. long; style reaching mouth of corolla, the stigma 2- 
lobed, the lobes spreading; mature nutlets not seen. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,149,437, collected on dry 
calcareous slopes north of Mt. La Cidre, Départment du Nord, Haiti, alti- 
tude 300 meters, November 30, 1925, by E. C. Leonard (no. 7594). 


This species is well marked by the crowded terminal inflorescence and the 
white-tomentose reticulate leaves. It is probably related to H. pectinata 
CE) Port. 

Solanum gonaivense Leonard, sp. nov. 


Shrub about 2 meters high; branches slender, terete, grayish, stellate- 
pubescent; spines in pairs at the base of the leaves and branches, 2 to 5 mm. 
long, slender, recurved, glabrous; leaves 1 to several on minute axillary 
branches, rosulate; petioles 0.5 to 1 mm. long; leaf blades oblong or narrowly 
obovate, 3 to 8 mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. wide, rounded at apex, narrowed or 
rounded at base, both surfaces stellate-tomentose, entire, the midrib and the 
2 or 3 pairs of lateral veins obscure; flowers few, solitary and terminal on the 
leaf-rosettes; pedicels 1 to 4 mm. long, stellate-tomentose; calyx 3 to 4 mm. 
long, stellate-tomentose, the lobes 4, linear-oblong, unequal, 3 to 4 mm. long, 
1 mm. broad, rounded at apex; corolla white, 8 to 9 mm. long, the tube 1 mm. 
long, the lobes 4, narrowly lanceolate, blunt at apex, minutely stellate- 
pubescent without, glabrous within, stamens 4, attached to corolla tube 0.5 
mm. above the base, the anthers linear-lanceolate, 6 to 7 mm. long, blunt at 
apex, subcordate at base, the filaments 0.5 mm. long; style 8 mm. long, 
glabrous, ovary globose, 0.75 mm. in diameter, glabrous; mature fruit not 
seen. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,301,034, collected in an arid 
thicket on the Ennery Road about 8 miles northeast of Gonaives, Départ- 
ment de |’Artibonite, February 19, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 10,007). 


This plant is closely related to S. microphyllum (Lam.) Dun. and may be 
merely a variety or form of that species. It differs chiefly in the much smaller 
leaves and flowers. 


Brunfelsia abbottii Leonard, sp. nov. 


Shrub; older stems gray, minutely reticulate, glabrous, papillose, sometimes 
flaky, the tips pubescent with small curved hairs; petioles about 5 mm. long, 
glabrous or sparingly pubescent with small curved hairs; leaf blades lance- 
elliptic, 6 to 10 cm. long, 2 to 3 em. broad, gradually narrowed to base, 
acuminate at apex, both surfaces sparingly pubescent, minutely reticulate 
above, minutely scurfy (?) beneath, the midrib impressed above, prominent 
beneath; flower terminal; calyx 1 cm. long, glabrous and somewhat scurfy, 
the lobes oblong, 2.5 mm. long, 2mm. broad, obtuse or subtruncate, narrowed 


72 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 


slightly at middle; coro!la white (?), 8.5 to 9 cm. long, the tube slender, about* 
7 mm. broad at throat, gradually narrowed to 3 or 4 mm. at base, glabrous 
without, pubescent within, especially at throat, the limb 3.5 em. broad, spread- 
ing, the lobes rounded; stamens didynamous, the upper pair reaching nearly to 
the throat, the lower pair about 5 mm. shorter; anthers lunate, about 4 mm. 
long, the filaments attached at center of concave side; style exceeding the lower 
pair of stamens; stigma 2.5 mm. broad; ovary 2 mm. long, oval, glabrous. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,147,362, collected on the upper 
slopes of Loma Atravezada, base of Punta Cabrén, Samang Peninsula, 
Dominican Republic, altitude 300 to 600 meters, December 14, 1923, by W. L. 
Abbott (no. 2987). Abbott’s 280 collected on the summit of Pil6n Azticar 
near Saman4, altitude 500 meters, December 18, 1920, belongs to this species. 
This specimen consists of a twig bearing leaves and a single fruit. The 
leaves are thinner and slightly larger than those of the type. ‘The fruit is 
almost globular, glabrous, and about 18 mm. in diameter, the pericarp 
glabrous, shining, and yellow within. The seeds are light brown, 2.5mm. long, 
2mm. broad, round at both ends, oval in cross-section, with a straight and 
a curved side, and deeply but minutely reticulate. 


This is a very distinct species which bears but little resemblance to any 
Brunfelsia hitherto described from the West Indies. 


Calamagrostis leonardi Chase, sp. nov. 


Plant perennial; culms 60 to 100 cm. tall, slender, ascending, solitary or 
few together, compressed, glabrous; nodes dark, glabrous, the lower genicu- 
late; sheaths mostly shorter than the internodes, 
strongly nerved, the lower minutely retrorsely pu- 
bescent, shredded in age, the upper glabrous; ligule 
hyaline, 3 to 4 mm. long, erose; blades lax, flat, 6 to 
20 em. long, 2 to 5 mm. wide, scabrous, mostly min- 
utely ciliate and in some leaves, sparsely pilose on 
the upper surface; panicle finally long-exserted, pale, 
nodding, 12 to 20 em. long, 2 to 4 cm. wide, loosely 
flowered, the slender ascending scabrous branches 2 
to 5 em. long, mostly in small fascicles, evenly dis- 
tributed; spikelets erect on slender scabrous pedicels 
2 to 5mm. long; glumes about 4.5 mm. long, equal or 
the first very slightly shorter, abruptly acute, sca- 
brous on the back and keel, the margins thin, both 
commonly purple-tinged toward the apex; floret 
nearly equaling the glumes, the callus bearing copious 
white hairs about half as long as the floret; lemma 4 
to 4.2 mm. long, scabrous on the back and bearing a slender scabrous awn, 
flexuous and divergent at maturity, a little above the middle, the margins 
and apex of the lemma thin; palea about 3.5 mm. long; rachilla joint about 
+ the length of the floret, or slightly longer, long-pilose with white hairs on 
the outer side and with a few hairs at the summit. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no 1,076,783, collected on red clay, 
open mountain top, in the vicinity of Furcy, Haiti, 1300 meters altitude, May 
26, 1920, by E. C. Leonard (no. 4325). A second collection was made on Mt. 
Tranchant, in the vicinity of Furcy, Leonard 4370. 


This species, the only one known from the West Indies, is most nearly re- 
lated to the South American C. beyrichiana Nees, from which it differs in 


4 

Fig. 1.—Spikelet of 
Calamagrostis leonardt, 
x 5 dia. 


ommB SS, L927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA (3 


the abruptly acute not attenuate glumes scarcely exceeding the sessile 
floret (in C. beyrichiana the floret is raised on a short curved rachilla-joint), 
in the more divergent, more flexuous awn, and in the more copious hairs on 
the prolonged rachilla joint. 


Leptochloa monticola Chase, sp. nov. Plants perennial in dense tough 
clumps; culms 90 to 100 cm. tall, erect, rigid, simple, scabrous below the 
. slightly constricted glabrous nodes; leaves firm, the sheaths mostly over- 
lapping, minutely ciliate at the truncate summit, otherwise 
glabrous, the lower somewhat twisted and shredded in age; 
ligule very minute, almost obsolete; blades 20 to 30 cm. long, 
2 to 6 mm. wide (flattened out) involute, somewhat tortuous 
and with a very thick midrib, glabrous on the outer surface, 
scabrous, strongly nerved and obscurely pilose on the inner, 
pungent-pointed, tapering to a narrow base, the blades 
bending forward past the culm, bringing the outer surface 
upward; panicle short-exserted, purplish, about 30 cm. long, 
and 8 cm. wide, the common axis stiff, ridged and scabrous, 
the numerous racemes approximate, those of the middle as 
much as 10 cm. long, the upper and lower shorter, all rather 
stifiy ascending; spikelets distant about half their own 
length on the slender scabrous rachis, 8 to 10 mm. long, 6 
or 7 flowered, the appressed scabrous pedicels 0.5 to 1.5 
mm. long; glumes lanceolate-ovate, acute, bronze-tinged Fig. 2.—Spike- 
with strong scabrous keels and thin margins, the first 2.5 let and floret of 
to 3 mm. the second 3.5 to 4 mm. long; rachilla joints 0.3  Leptochloa mon- 
to 0.4 mm. long, pilose at the summit; lemmas 4.5 to 5 ttcola, X 5 dia. 
mm. long, lanceolate-ovate, acuminate, the midnerve 
slightly exserted from between two minute teeth, densely long-pilose at the 
base, on the midnerve toward the base, and on the lateral nerves from the 
base to the middle; palea about 1 mm. shorter than the lemma, concave 
between the keels, the margins sparsely pilose. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,077,272, collected on summit 
of Pic de Brouet, in the vicinity of Furcy, Haiti, altitude about 1300 meters, 
June 13, 1920, by E. C. Leonard (no. 4751), “common on the summit.”’ 


This robust species is very different from any known species of Leptochloa 
especially in the forwardly bent involute blades, which are found only in 
species (like Ammophila breviligulata Fern.) of windswept areas. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 


— O457TH MEETING 


The 945th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Cosmos Club on 
November 13, 1926. The meeting was called to order by President Bow1E 
at 8:21 with 43 persons in attendance. 

The program for the evening consisted of two papers, followed by motion 


74 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 


pictures of the total solar eclipse of 1926. The first, by W. P. Warre was 
on A new method of avoiding trouble from lag in mercury contact thermostats. 

The paper deals with a form of the familiar mercury-contact type of ther- 
mostat or temperature-controller. In that type the ‘‘bulb,” which is really 
a gigantic thermometer, contains a mercury contact which turns a heater 
off or on, so as always to bring the temperature to the fixed value for which 
the regulator is set. In all such regulators there is a delay, or lag, in getting 
the heat from the heater to the bulb, so that the heat is always turned on, or 
off, a little too late. The temperature thus keeps running by the true value, 
oscillating around that. The resulting temperature variations can be mini- 
mized by making the oscillations quicker, which makes them also smaller. 

In this form of regulator a very fine heater, inclosed within the bulb, pro- 
vides for very quick oscillations. This heater is connected with the regular 
bath heater. Whenever heat is turned on it znstantly raises the temperature 
of the bulb, which at once shuts the heat off, only to be turned on again 
as quickly. Exceedingly rapid oscillations are possible, though a period of a 
few seconds is preferred. This device is generally more convenient in opera- 
tion than one where the oscillations are produced by mechanical means, 
since it adds no moving parts. It applies the minimum of heat to a very 
small part of the bulb; hence it avoids most of the temperature uncertainty 
which results when the oscillations are quickened by causing the main heater 
to heat the bulb from the outside. (Author’s abstract.) 

The paper was discussed by Mr. STIMson. 

The second paper by Mr. G. F. Taytor, was entitled Description of a new 
type of thermostat. (Illustrated with lantern slides.) A new type of thermo- 
stat is described in which a spherical piston completely submerged in mercury 
takes the place of a bare mercury to metal contact. The piston is made of 
one or more small spheres. Each of the spheres is surrounded by a small air 
space. The surface tension of the mercury as it is forced into the air space 
exerts a pressure on the piston causing its motion. The piston raises or 
lowers a magnetized steel weight which makes and breaks electrical contact. 
The bulb of the thermostat is made of a spiral coil of thin-walled copper tube 
; inch in diameter supported on a frame made of four strips of brass. The 
piston and contacts are supported in the center of the coil. The bulb is filled 
with torulene and the piston with mercury. A special valve is provided to 
keep the mercury and the torulene separate. The torulene will pass freely in 
either direction through the valve but the mercury will not pass. The in- 
strument may, therefore, be turned in any position without mixing the liquids. 
An overflow cup at the top of the piston which furnishes mercury and keeps 
the piston submerged is made in a cellular or honeycomb form so that the 
mercury will not escape even if the cup is inverted. The instrument has 
heavy contacts and may be used without a relay to break a current of about 
four ampheres. 

Experiments were described in which a large number of metals and alloys 
were tried in order to find one which would carry the greatest current with a 
minimum of deterioration. Pure radium showed the least deterioration, but 
electrical contact sometimes failed to accompany mechanical contact. An 
alloy of 80% radium and 20% platinum was found most satisfactory. A 
method was described for making disc contacts of this non-malleable mate- 
rial. The contacts, which are held tightly together by magnetic attraction, 
are separated by a spring which causes a sudden and decided break, this, 
however, at the expense of sensitivity. When very close control is desired, 
the spring and magnet are not used. In this case the interval between make 


FEB. 3, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 79 


and break was between 20 and 40 microns for the thermostat tested. The 
thermostat is set to any desired temperature by raising or lowering the pin 
with its attached piston, using sufficient pressure to force the mercury past the 
piston. A spherical piston, three millimeters in diameter, and about .001 
em. smaller than the tube in which it fits, will support a pressure of 50 grams 
and the weight supported appears to be proportional to the number of 
spheres used. A piston of ten spheres should support 1.5 kg. If more than 
one sphere is used in making the piston, they are strung on a catgut cord. 
A somewhat larger piston made of a larger number of spheres would: do work 
sufficient to operate mechanical devices such as steam valves or even doors. 
A thermo-regulator made on this plan has given very satisfactory service for 
three years in a cold storage plant. ‘The regulator controls the temperature 
of the brine tank by starting and stopping the compressers. It is also pro- 
posed to operate the pen of a thermograph by using a piston to operate the 
tracing pen instead of a bimetal of Bordon type. The piston being more 
sturdy would be less susceptible to vibration and would carry the pen along 
a straight line instead of a curved line. These instruments are covered by 
U. S. Public Service Patent No. 1484802, reissue No. 15890. (Author’s 
abstract.) 

The paper was discussed by Messrs. Wurrr and ApDAMs. 

Following the presentation of the papers, motion pictures of the total solar 
eclipse of 1926 were shown. ‘This was made possible through the courtesy of 
Mr. JAMES STOKLEY of Science Service. 


946TH MEETING 


The 946th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening, 
November 27, 1926. The meeting was called to order by President Bow1r 
at 8:17 with 33 persons in attendance. 

The program for the evening consisted of two papers. The first by F. L. 
MOouLeER was on Spectra excited by atomic hydrogen. (Illustrated with lantern 
slides.) Hydrogen from a Wood discharge tube flowed into a tube containing 
metal vapor and the spectrum emitted by the mixture was photographed, Ob- 
servations of Bonhoeffer (Zeitschr. f. Phys. chem. 116: 391, 1925) with sodium 
and mercury are confirmed. Sodium and cadmium gave strong emission of their 
first resonance lines and no other lines or bands. Potassium showed the first 
resonance line faintly. Mercury gave the complete hydride band spectrum 
and also faint emission of the resonance line at 2537 A. caesium, magnesium 
thallium and zine gave no line or band spectra. The excitation energies of 
the observed lines and bands are, except for 2537 of mercury, less than 3.8 
volts, though many lines of lower energy did not appear. There are two pos- 
sible explanations of the radiation. ‘The metal atom may be excited in a three 
body collision with two hydrogen atoms. In this case the entire energy of 
recombination of hydrogen, 4.38 volts, should be available for excitation. 
The second possibility is that first a hydride is formed and that this reacts 
with H to form H, and an excited metal atom. The available energy of 
excitation is the energy of recombination of H minus the energy of formation 
of the hydride. The second theory seems to offer the best explanation of the 
observations. (Author’s abstract.) 

The subject was discussed by Messrs. BREIT, CurTIS and HAWKESWORTH. 

The second paper, by W. G. BromMBacHER was entitled Discussion of a 
barometric method of measuring aircraft altitudes. (Illustrated with lantern 
slides.) The altitude of aircraft is indicated to the pilot by an aneroid ba- 


76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 


rometer calibrated in altitude according to an altitude-pressure-temperature 
relation. This is, for the United States, up to 35,332 feet, 


7 = 63691.8 T.,, log = 
T = 288 — 0.001982 7 
0.001982 7% 

288 


(233 — 0.001982 Z 


in which Z is the standard altitude in feet; P, the pressure in millimeters of 
mercury; 7’ and T,,, the absolute temperature and absolute mean temperature 
respectively in degrees Centigrade. The variation in the indication from the 
altitude due to seasonal changes in air temperature amounts roughly to 5 per 
cent. E 

The principal objection to this method of determining altitude lies in the 
fact that pressure levels are indicated, not the elevation above the surface of 
the earth. Knowledge of the elevation is important for many purposes, 
especially for landing when the visibility is poor. The indication at the 
ground level usually varies with time due to both the variation in the baro- 
metric pressure and the changing elevation of the ground underneath the air- 
craft. ‘The barometric pressure at the ground has a variation roughly equiva- 
lent to 25 feet per hour change in altitude during the passage of a well defined 
cyclone. Ifa landing is to be made in such circumstances and if the position 
of the pointer at 760 millimeters is suitably marked, the following procedure 
is suggested for obtaining the elevation. ‘The landing field personnel, at 
request, reads the barometer and radios the negative of the corresponding 
standard altitude to the aircraft. The pilot adjusts the altimeter dial so 
that the 760 millimeter mark and the altitude received by ratio correspond. 
The elevation of the landing field is now indicated by the altimeter. 

The performance of altimeters has been greatly improved since 1918, 
especially the elastic properties. The maximum hysteresis (the maximum 
difference in reading) of good instruments ata given altitude, for decreasing 
and increasing pressures, has been reduced to one-half. This difference at 
the ground level, known as the after-effect, has been reduced from approxi- 
mately 200 feet to 50 feet or less. 

An improvement now in progress is that of compensation for the effect of 
the seasonal variation in air temperature. This compensation may be 
achieved either automatically or through manual control. The mechanism 
of an instrument of the automatic type now under construction was shown in 
order to illustrate the method. Essentially, the mechanism is adjusted by a 
bimetallic strip or manually so that the multiplication is modified as required 
by the particular air temperature existing at the time. (Awthor’s abstract.) 

The paper was discussed by Messrs. Jupson, Bowi1n, TUCKERMAN and 
HUMPHREYS. 

President Bow1r then called upon Dr. TucKERMAN who spoke informally on 
the arrangements for the 25th anniversary of the Bureau of Standards, to 
take place on Dec. 4th. Following this, President Bowre spoke briefly on 
the accuracy now attainable in geodetic work. 

H. A. Marmer, Recording Secretary. 


Jia se 
loge 


_ AFFILIATED SOCIETIES 


February 9. The Geological Society. 
February 10. The Chenien Society. 
February 12. The Biological Bieler. 
‘ebruary 15. The Anthropological Scie. 
ruary 17. THe AcapEMY. 
February 19. The Philosophical Society. 


n 


The Philosophical Society...... os 


Corresponding Secretary: a B. ‘TuckE 
Recording bee W. D. ier 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


- A@NES Cuase JoHN B. Ressipe, Jr. 


18 |: BUREAU PLANT. INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM a 
et Oi ooo | x 
ASSOCIATE EDITORS . a ef 
‘S, A. Ronwer 
: | ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY eis : 
es G. W. Srosz ‘am Seat gts oa 
: te, GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Bic GE LE. Me 
z aoaas ae ee ee peat AD Swanton ee 
ss BOTANICAL SOCIETY == ss ANTEROPO 
ie eke.) Ee, RCE ie 15) 
CHEMICAL socteTY 
PUBLISHED @EMI-MONTHLY 
| ae EXCEPT IN v JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER WHEN } MONTHLY | 
Ope ick BY THE 
pret | WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Mr. Roran AnD GUILFORD AVES, | 
| ‘Baurmonz, MaryiaNnD pie e 
xy Ait te Pasta 
nter jas Second Clas Mae January 11, 1923, at the viet ote: at Baltimore, Md., under the — 
i Setor Ao ,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postaze provided for 
in cio 1108, Act of October 3, 1917, Authored: on a 1918 : 
fr j vag i 


‘This J OURNAL, the official organ ot the Washington eee. of Se 
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To thisend 
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Aca 
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Was. 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Soci 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JournaLi 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the su 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendar years. Pr 
publi¢ation is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fif 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, 
issue of the Journat for the f ollowine fourth or nineteenth, respectively, eRe 


Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; ' they ehounn 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The G 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors, References | 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate — 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be. numbered | nt 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. e 
: Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures ah 
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be. lee 
partly met by the author. NG 

Proof.—Iin order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will he sent to en re 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in final form; ‘ the editors, is 
will exercise due care in seeing that copyisfollowed. | 

Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will Me furnished at the following schedule of prices, 


Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12pp. 16 pp. —— Cover __ go hae 
50 —-$.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 Oe OOS 

100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 ey 705, | 

150.) ) 2.25 4.30 6:25. |. 6.50 3.00 | 

200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50 

250 3.00 5.30 6. 25 | aq. 5 4.00 


An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for dash aplie 7 page. 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, wie inclusive pagi- | i 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. _ | a * oo 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra sib or reprints 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. 


The rate of Subscription per role Eye yee $6. oo* 
Semi-monthly mumberes. . i. Jes ook s aoe’ vane des ce 6 lee ewee a Sales als Seinen ee 
Monthly numbergics oho e oie yk Bee swale 5 o's Wie'a'e vs eee pie cite etme aiaiara eal 


Remittances should be made payable to ‘Washington Academy of Sciences,”’ co ea 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington,D.C. 

European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. et, ri 

Exchanges.—The JourNAL does not exchange with other publications. 

Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made | 
within thirty days after date of the following issue. he GRRE 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be dont for $3.00. Bal rates. 
are given to members of scientific societies ‘affiliated with the Academy 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
VoL. 17 FEBRUARY 19, 1927 No. 4 


BOTANY.—Alfaroa, a new genus of trees of the family Juglandaceae 
from Costa Rica. Pau C. Stanpuey, U.S. National Museum.1 


In 1924 the writer found in flower in the mountains southof Cartago, 
Costa Rica, a tree which at the time of collection was supposed to be 
Oreomunnea pterocarpa Oerst., one of the least-known and most 
remarkable trees of Central America. That tree has had a curious 
history, and is of interest because of the fact that it has been referred 
by some botanists to the genus Engelhardtia, a group known other- 
wise from the East Indies. 

Later Mr. C. H. Lankester forwarded specimens of the same tree 
collected at Juan Vifias, in the same general region. Comparison of 
them with authentic material of Oreomunnea proved that they repre- 
sented a different species. These new specimens were just past the 
flowering state, and the bracts very small, but it was supposed that 
they might in age develop into the large hand-shaped bracts that 
distinguish Oreomunnea. The Juan Vifias specimens were given a 
provisional name as a new species of Oreomunnea, but fortunately it 
was decided to delay publication until more material had been col- 
lected. This I was able to do during the present year, when in early 
March a second visit was made, in company with Prof. Rubén Torres 
Rojas, to El Mufieco, perhaps the richest locality botanically that I 
have ever seen. We were fortunate in finding the trees in young 
fruit. ‘The fruits proved to be a great surprise, for they were not at 
all like those of Oreomunnea, but rather miniature walnuts. 

Aside from the superficial aspect of the fruit, the tree did not re- 
semble very closely a walnut tree. Study of the ample series of 
material now at hand indicates that this Costa Rican tree is best 
treated as the type of a new genus, which is described here. 

1 Published with permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- 


ceived Dec. 3, 1926. 
77 


78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


Alfaroa Standl., gen. nov. 


Tree; leaves mostly opposite, estipulate, pinnate, with no truly terminal 
leaflet, the leaflets numerous, mostly alternate but sometimes opposite, 
membranaceous, serrate or entire, glandular-punctate beneath; flowers 
monoecious, spicate, the spikes terminal, the pistillate flowers numerous, 
inserted singly, sessile, the staminate flowers few, solitary and sessile at the 
base of the spike or few and arranged upon two short basal branches; bracts 
of the staminate flowers linear-subulate, shorter than the calyx and free 
from it; calyx irregularly 4—5-lobed, the lobes oblong, obtuse; stamens about 
9, inserted in a single series about the ovoid rudiment of the ovary, the fila- 
ments nearly obsolete, the anthers 2-celled, dehiscent by longitudinal slits; 
pistillate flowers subtended by a minute 3-lobed free bract shorter than the 
ovary; perianth deeply 4-lobed, the lobes oblong-linear, unequal, obtuse, 
erect, persistent upon the apex of the fruit; style shorter than the perianth 
lobes, bifurcate, the stigmas subglobose, verrucose; fruit oval or obovoid, 
small, the pericarp nearly dry, thin, indehiscent, adhering closely to the 
endocarp; nut thin-walled, smooth, falsely 4-celled, the partitions nearly 
complete; seeds 4-lobed to the base. 


The genus is named in honor of Anastasio Alfaro, Director of the National 
Museum of Costa Rica, who is remembered with affectionate regard by all 
scientists who have visited Costa Rica for many years past. His enthusiasm, 
with regard to all matters relating to natural history has done much to 
stimulate in others an interest in these subjects. In botany his chief interests 
have been the ferns and orchids, and in the latter, especially, he has made 
notable discoveries. To the National Herbarium he has contributed an 
extensive series of beautifully prepared specimens of orchids, representing 
many species of this family of plants, in which Costa Rica is supreme among 
American countries. To Don Anastasio the writer is indebted personally for 
many courtesies extended during two visits to Costa Rica. 


Alfaroa costaricensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Tree 5-12 m. high or larger, the small crown composed of few spreading 
branches; bark nearly smooth, pale brownish; branchlets and leaf rachis 
usually densely hirsute with long stiff divaricate hairs, sometimes merely. 
velutinous-pubescent or in juvenile plants glabrate; leaves almost all opposite, 
those of a pair often very unequal, or one of the leaves sometimes suppressed ; 
leaflets usually 10-20, very variable, often almost all opposite, oblong to 
narrowly lance-oblong, usually 10-18 em. long and 1.5-4 em. wide but often 
larger, the lowest leaflets of each leaf usually much reduced, acute to long- 
acuminate at apex, sessile, obtuse to truncate at base and oblique, rarely auri- 
culate on the lower side, densely serrate with apiculate teeth or often entire, 
membranaceous, above glabrous or nearly so except on the costa, beneath 
glaucous or glaucescent, usually hirtellous along the nerves and sometimes 
puberulent between the nerves, but often glabrous or nearly so; flower spikes 
stout, erect, 3-5 em. long, short-pedunculate, the rachis densely hirtellous 
and glandular, the pistillate portion many-flowered (flowers 30-50), dense or 
interrupted; staminate flowers few, solitary near the base of the spike or 2 
to 4 on lateral basal branches less than 1 cm. long; staminate flowers 4 mm. 


FEB. 19, 1927 STANDLEY: ALFAROA ue 


broad, the perianth glandular; pistillate flowers green, 5—6 mm. long, the ovary 
sparsely hirtellous and densely covered with golden glands, the lobes 1 mm. 
wide, glabrate, the outer surface with a few golden glands; stigmas red; fruit- 
ing spikes 12-18 cm. long or longer, many-fruited; fruits oval or obovoid, 
about 2.5 em. long and 2 cm. thick, densely velutinous-hirsute and covered 
with sessile glands; nut smooth, broadly rounded at base and apex, the endo- 
carp less than 1 mm. thick. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium no. 1,226,388, collected in moist 
forest at El Mufieco, south of Navarro, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, 
altitude about 1,400 meters, February 8, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 
33620. ) 

The following additional collections represent the same species: 

Costa Rica: Juan Vifias, alt. 1,260 m., in open pasture, June, 1922, 
C. H. Lankester. La Estrella, Province of Cartago, Standley 39217, 39446. 
Alto de la Estrella, Standley 39122. El Mufieco, Standley 33501, 33504; 
Standley & Torres 50870, 50874, 50969, 50986, 51078, 51204. 


The genus Alfaroa is related to Juglans, but differs in several im- 
portant characters. It is unique in the Juglandaceae in having oppo- 
site leaves. It is difficult to make a definite decision regarding the 
arrangement of the leaves, but it is certain that most of them are 
opposite, and always those on young sterile branches. Occasionally 
on the older, larger branches there is a single leaf at a node. 

In Juglans the leaves have a terminal leaflet. In that genus, of 
course, the nut is rugose, and usually much roughened. I did not 
notice that the foliage of Alfaroa had any odor suggestive of that of 
walnut leaves, but the glands upon the leaves would suggest the possi- 
bility of an aromatic odor. 

It is in the inflorescence that the two genera exhibit the greatest 
divergence. ‘The staminate flowers of Juglans are borne in slender 
drooping catkins; in Alfaroa they are borne singly at the base of the 
erect pistillate spike, or upon two short special lateral branches. 

Trees of Alfaroa are abundant in the wet mountains south of 
Cartago, especially at El] Mufieco, where they are plentiful among other 
trees on the tops of the hills. The plants sometimes flower when they 
are mere shrubs, and the aspect of the mature tree does not suggest a 
walnut tree. The pale under surface of the leaves is striking, and the 
young leaves are usually handsomely colored with red and pink. ‘The 
long spikes of small fruits, recurved by their weight, are borne in great 
profusion. 

For this tree I was given by a guide the name gaulin, but this name 
was disputed by other persons. No use is made of the nuts, appar- 
ently. I have not seen the nuts when mature and fresh, and do not 
know whether they are edible. 


80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


ZOQOLOGY.—Five new Chinese squirrels1 A. Brazier HOWELL, 
U.S. National Museum. 


Among the Chinese mammals in the United States National Museum 
are specimens representing five new races of sciuromorph rodents, 
which may be known as follows: 


Eutamias asiaticus umbrosus subsp. nov. 


Type.—Male adult, skin and skeleton no. 240744, U. S. National Museum, 
from 140 miles south of Lanchowfu, Kansu, China; August 21, 1923. Col- 
lected by F. R. Wulsin, National Geographic Society Central China Expedi- 
tion; original number 1118. 

Diagnosis. —A dark colored chipmunk differing from zntercessor, its nearest 
ally, in the absence of gray hairs throughout the darker areas of the head and 
shoulders. The coloration of the head is darker and duller, and the gray tips 
to the hairs upon the upper side of the tail practically hide any ochraceous 
markings. 

Skin.—As above, with the transition between the color of the sides and the 
buffy whitish of the under parts more abrupt than in intercessor. The whole 
anterior half of the dorsum presents a much more saturate appearance, the 
pelage is longer and there is a more pronounced ochraceous overwash on the 
two medial light stripes of the middle back. The feet are also slightly darker 
and more ochraceous, this being more pronounced upon the fore feet. 

Skull.—As in intercessor but a bit more slender and bullae smaller, although 
this difference may not hold good in series, as but one good adult skull is now 
available. 

Measurements—Collector’s measurements of the type are: head and body, 
155; tail, 115; foot, 38; ear, 17. Total length of the skull is 42 mm. 

Material.—Four specimens: two from 120 and 140 miles south of 
Lanchowfu, and two-from Sungpan, Szechwan. : 

Remarks.—Although the skins are in summer pelage it is obvious from the 
coat that it is a more strictly mountainous form than is zntercessor. ‘The 
Kansu examples are evidently from the north slope of the Minshan Range of 
mountains, which marks the boundary between that province and Szechwan, 
while the Sungpan specimens are from just south of this range. Whether the 
race is confined to this circumscribed region is a matter for conjecture. 


Dremomys rufigenis lentus subsp. nov. 


Type.—Male adult, skin and skull no. 240384, U. 8. National Museum, 
from near Wenchuanshein, Szechwan, China, altitude 6000 feet; August 14, 
1924. Collected by D. C. Graham; original number 14. 

Diagnosis.—A rather large race, with back, flanks and cheeks uniformly 
colored. Rufous of underparts confined to chin and upper lips, anal region, 
and faintly along the inner margin of the hind legs. Postauricular spots 
buffy. 

Shin. —With the exception of the postauricular spots, which are rather well 
defined, the whole upper surface, including feet, flanks, head and cheeks, 
are uniformly colored, the paler annulations of the hairs being more olivaceous 
than brown. The tail as usual is darker because of the greater preponderance 


1 Received January 19, 1927. 


FEB. 19, 1927 HOWELL: NEW CHINESE SQUIRRELS 81 


of black upon the hairs. Below the rufous areas are rather sharply confined 
to a narrow space a couple of millimeters wide along the upper lips and upon 
_the chin, and in the anal region, almost exclusively upon the base of the tail, 
but a narrow border of this color extends along the inner side of the hind leg. 
The throat, chest and belly are overwashed with gray showing a faint sug- 
gestion of buffiness. The under side of the tail is paler than the upper only 
because there is less black distad upon the hairs. 

Skull.—The right zygoma is broken and the occipital and bullae are missing. 
On the whole the skull resembles that of belfield:, but the anterolateral parts 
of the nasals extend farther ventrad, the premaxillae extend a marked distance 
farther caudad beyond the nasals, and the incisors are longer and heavier. 

Specimen.—One, the type. 

Measurements.—Collector’s measurements are as follows: head and body, 
200; tail, 155; foot, 50. The total length of the skull is about 54; interorbital 
width, 14. 3) shortest length of nasals, 16.8; tips of nasals to caudal termina- 
tions of the premaxillaries, 20.7 mm. 

Remarks.—No specimen of the Yunnan race ornatus is s available, but this 
is easily distinguished from lentus by the ferruginous cheeks extending 
nearly to the level of the ears. In the same respect the latter differs from 
the typical race, and from belfieldi which has not only bright cheeks but much 
ferruginous in the tail as well. 


Sciurus caniceps canigenus subsp. nov. 


Type.—Male adult, skin and skull no. 241509, U. 8S. National Museum, 
from Hayenhsien, Hangchow Bay, Chekiang, China; December 10, 1925. 
Collected by Arthur de C. Sowerby; original number 1515. 

Diagnosis —A rather small race. Chin and cheeks very gray and without 
facial markings. No silvery tips to the hairs of the tail, and the terminal 
tuft exhibits a tendency to be black at base. 

Skin.—The dorsal surface is of the normal sciurine annulated pattern, 
perfectly uniform save for a barely appreciable tendency toward darkening 
upon the head, though not upon the shoulders. The dorsal hairs have pale 
tips and the general tone of this surface varies from brownish to paler and 
grayer, this possibly being due to age but not to season. The cheeks, muzzle 
and chin are dark silvery gray with no vestige of brown. The ears are short 
and scantily haired and there is a whitish postauricuar spot entirely hidden 
by the ears in the dried skins. The tail is unicolor with the back save that 
the annulations are coarser. There are no white tips to the caudal hairs but 
the terminal tuft exhibits a tendency—very strongly marked in one in- 
dividual—to be black at base with the usual buffy tips to the hairs. The feet 
are gray, modified by the presence of black hairs. The gray of the chin ex- 
tends upon the throat, but in the grayer specimens especially this is altered 
upon the chest to a creamy tint, and in the browner ones, to a faintly 
ae overwash, which extends over the belly and the inside of the hind 
egs. 

Skull—As with so many sciuromorphs, there is nothing particularly dis- 
tinctive cranially, save that the skull is much smaller than in true caniceps. 

Measurements.—Collector’s measurements of the type are: head and body, 
194; tail, 156; hind foot, 47; and ear, 21mm. Measurements of the skull are: 
total length, 50; zygomatic width, 30.5; interorbital width, 17; and upper 
tooth row, 10 mm. ; 


82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 4 


Material.—Two specimens from Kangpu and three from Haiyenhsien, 
both localities in Chekiang. 
_ Remarks.—The relationship of this race unquestionably lies with caniceps, 
although it may ultimately be advisable to assign it full specific rank. The 
occurrence of a squirrel of this group so far east in China is somewhat of a 
surprise. As the specimens at hand were taken in winter it is evident that 
this form does not assume a brighter coat at this season as do some of the 
other subspecies. Unfortunately, the only skin available of true caniceps 
is in this bright pelage, but it is evident that canigenus is browner about the 
top,of the head, the feet are more silvery (less buffy), and caniceps entirely 
lacks the ochraceous wash of the underparts. 


Petaurista rubicundus, sp. nov. 


Type.—Nursing female, skin only; no. 240857, U. 8S. National Museum, 
from Mapientung, Szechwan, China. Killed by native hunters in the fall of 
1924 and secured by D. C. Graham. 

Diagnosis.—A flying squirrel with underparts light but bright rufous; 
face, chin, sides of neck and feet darker rufous, and hairs of the remainder of 
the body giving the appearance of being broadly tipped with the same color. 
Tip of tail black. 

Skin.—The underparts are palest mediad, being almost apricot color, 
but gradually deepening to intense rufous upon the throat and borders of the 
membranes. ‘The feet are of the same color but a trifle darker. The pelage 
of the dorsal surface is thick and full, plumbeous at base, the shorter hairs 
with brown tips. The very numerous guard hairs are annulated first very 
dark brown, then black for one or two millimeters followed by ochraceous 
rufous for some ten millimeters, and finally, short tips of glossy black, the 
latter hardly distinguishable in general effect. The ears are thin and almost 
hairless, and the postauricular spots are not differentiated. ‘The hairs of the 
face are deep rufous with plumbeous bases and short black tips, resulting in a 
rich effect. The proximal portion of the tail is dull mahogany, with short 
black tips that gradually lengthen caudad until the tail tip is entirely black. 
The skin is unaccompanied by measurements but the hind foot has a length 
of about 72 mm. 

Material.—One specimen, the type. 

Remarks.—The type is a flat skin in beautiful pelage and the animal 
was skinned through the mouth in a truly expert manner, leaving no dis- 
eernible break in the pelt. Unfortunately the skull is missing, but the 
specimen is evidently so different from anything heretofore described that I 
have no choice but to name it. An effort to establish tentative relationship 
with some of the Indian members of the genus was without result. 


Petaurista sulcatus, sp. nov. 


Type.—Female adult, skin and skull no. 219206, U. 8S. National Museum, 
from Hsinlungshan, 65 miles northeast of Peking, Chihli, China, altitude 
3000 feet; August 18, 1917. Collected by Arthur deC. Sowerby; original 
number 1017. 

Diagnosis.—A small Petaurista with dorsal coloration of the general type 
of P. melanopterus, leucogenys, etc. Maxillary incisors, very broad, each with 
a well-defined groove. 


FEB. 19, 1927 HOWELL: NEW CHINESE SQUIRRELS 83 


Skin.—The hairs of the middle back are plumbeous at base and browner 
distad, while numerous longer hairs have buffy tips. The hairs of the sides, 
especially upon the hips, and of the upper parachutes, lack the browner distal 
portion mentioned above and appear almost black, except for the buffy tips. 
There is but the suggestion of an ochraceous spot behind the ear, and ochrace- 
ous areas upon both eye lids. The remainder of the head is distinctly lighter 
than the back and much grayer. The dorsum of the feet is so dark as to be 
practically black, ticked with a few buffy hairs. Upon the under surface of 
the body proper of the type specimen the hairs are palely plumbeous at base 
with white tips upon those over the throat and hinder beily, but with buffy 
tips elsewhere, while the hairs of the ventral surface of the parachute are 
wholly ochraceous. In the skin of the topotype these latter have plumbeous 
bases. There is a sharply-defined sooty spot upon the chin as is usual in 
many species. 

Skull.—In general conformation the skull much resembles that of lewco- 
genys, but the total breadth, as well as the width of the rostral tip, is narrower, 
and the interpterygoid fossa is much deeper. The molariform teeth are of 
the same type as 1n melanopterus, the premolar being a trifle smaller than the 
first molar. The maxillary incisors are broad (3 mm.) with a well defined, 
broad groove laterad to the middle. Close inspection shows that this 
groove exhibits a tendency toward doubleness, with an extremely faint ridge 
between. ‘The mandibular incisors are correspondingly robust. 

Measurements.—Collector’s measurements of the type and topotype are: 
head and body 310-305; tail, 343-330; foot 65-63; and ear, 40 mm. Measure- 
ments of the skulls are: condylobasilar length, 54-52.5; zygomatic width, 
41.5-41; interorbital width, 15-14.6; maxillary tooth row, 13.7-14; and 
greatest width of maxillary incisive alveoli, 8.7-9. 

Materval_—Three specimens: two, including the type, from Hsinlungshan, 
and one skin without skull from Eastern Tombs, Chihli. 

Remarks.—All specimens of the Chinese members of this genus of what 
may be termed the normal sciuropterine type of coloration have heretofore 
been referred to either P. melanopterus, xanthotis, or filchnerinae. The last 
is a large squirrel probably identical with xanthotis. Since Milne-Edward’s 
original description of the last-mentioned, the only published record of its 
capture noted is that by Lyon (1907) of a specimen from Kansu. ‘This is 
before me and seems to be at least subspecifically distinct from melanopterus, 
and differences in the molar pattern renders it not unlikely that the relation- 
ship is not that close. At any rate, these flying squirrels are of large size with 
skulls normal, including narrow, simple, maxillary incisors. 

The reference of chief interest in the present connection is that of Pere 
Huede (Mems. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, IV, 1898). In this there is quite 
lengthy discussion of the molar pattern of several flying squirrels, but none 
of the incisors. His identifications need careful checking, to say the least, 
but his plates seem to be exceptionally good and accurate. Turning to his 
figures illustrating several views of his so- -called Pteromys melanopterus it is at 
once seen that this is a very different animal from that of Milne-Edwards, 
distinguishable instantly by the broad, grooved, maxillary incisors. Compari- 
son shows that these figures are exceptionally fine representations, in every 
respect, of the skull of P. sulcatus. 


84 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


It was at first thought that this character was probably of generic sig- 
nificance, but it was found that the maxillary incisors of P. fuluinus—a very 
different type of squirrel—may vary from the pattern normal for the genus 
in somewhat the same direction. In four skulls from Kashmir two have 
simple incisors, a third is faintly ridged and grooved, and a fourth more 
definitely has four faint ridges and three equally faint grooves of the same 
width between them. ‘To my mind this circumstance at once settles in the 
negative the question of generic, or even subgeneric, separation of the Chinese 
examples. 

The skin from Eastern Tombs, without skull, date, or measurements, is 
almost certainly a winter specimen of this species. Its pelage is denser, it 
largely lacks the ochraceous tone to the underparts of the body proper, and 
the head is considerably darker; but it is similar in other respects. 


ENTOMOLOGY .—WNotes on the Dexwd genera Cordyligaster and 
Eucordyligaster.' J. M. Aupricu, U. S. National Museum. 
(Communicated by 8. A. RoHWER.) 


In some material received from Professor Melander was a specimen — 
of a yellow Cordyligaster from South America; the process of identifica- 
tion led to some results worthy of publication. It would seem that 
no yellow forms have come to light since the description of two species 
about eighty years ago. 

There are two American genera closely allied in all but one character. 
In Cordyligaster the calypters are very small, while in Hucordyligaster 
they are of normal size. ‘The difference is striking. ‘The former genus 
has three known species and the latter two; all five are tropical, but 
one has a wide northern range and is common in the vicinity of the 
District of Columbia. This species, Hucordyligaster minusculus, 
is so unmistakeable and so well represented in collections that the 
generic characters may be omitted here. 


CoRDYLIGASTER Macquart 


Cordyligaster Macquart, Dipt. Exot. 2 (pt. 3): 247 (reprint 90). 1843.— 
Schiner, Novara, 322. 1868.—Van der Wulp, Tijdsch. v. Ent. 28: 191. 
1885; Biologia, Dipt. 2: 252. 1891.—Coquillett, Type-Species N. A. 
Dipt. 527. 1910.—Adams, in Williston’s Manual, 356. 1908.— 
Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 122. 1916. 

Megistogaster Macquart, Dipt. Exot. Suppl. 2 (pt. 2): 185 (reprint 
212) 1851.—Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 7. 1916. 

Cordylidexia Giglio-Tos, Ditt. del Mess. 3: 67. 1894. 

Kucordylidexia Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 3: 41. 1915. 


1 Received January 18, 1927. 


FEB. 19, 1927 _ ALDRICH: NOTES ON DEXIID GENERA 89 


The sole original species of Cordyligaster was Dexia petiolata Wiedemann; 
Megistogaster had two species, of which Townsend designated fusczpennis 
Macquart as type in 1916; Cordylidexia was a new name proposed on account 
of supposed preoccupation, taking Dexza petiolata as type. Coquillett, 1910, 
showed that the name is not preoccupied in the strict sense. Hucordylidexia 
was proposed for a new species, H. ategulata Townsend, which Townsend sub- 
sequently stated was a synonym of petzolata. 


Key To SPECIES OF CORDYLIGASTER 


1. Antennae, palpi, legs and abdomen black...... petiolatus Wiedemann. 
Antennae, palpi, legs and abdomen yellow or mostly so............ 2 
2. Femora with black bands, hind coxae black........ tipuliformis Walker. 
Hemora and hind coxae yellow. 2s02010 elves analis Wiedemann. 


CORDYLIGASTER PETIOLATUS Wiedemann. 


Dexia petiolata Wiedemann, Auss. Zweifl. 374. 1830. 

Cordyligaster petiolatus Macquart, Dipt. Exot. 2 (pt. 3): 247 (reprint 
90) 1843.—Rondani, Esame.....Ditt. Brasil. 76. 1848.—Schiner, No- 
vara 322. 1868.—Van der Wulp, Tijdsch. v. Ent. 28: 191. pl. 6, 
f.1, 2. 1885.—Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 122. 1916. 

Megistogaster fuscipennis Macquart, Dipt. Exot. Suppl. 2 (pt. 2): 186 
(reprint 213), pl..19, f. 7. 1851. 

Eucordylidexia ategulata Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 3: 41. 1915. 


Originally described from Brazil, and reported from Panama, Costa Rica 
and Guatemala by Townsend, in 1915. In addition to the specimens men- 
tioned by Townsend, the National Museum now has two from Rurrenna- 
baque, Rio Beni, Bolivia,collected by Dr. Wm. M. Mann on the Mulford 
Biological Exploration; and one from Belem, Para, Brazil, collected by F. X. 
Willams for the Hawatian Sugar Planters’ Experiment Station. 


CORDYLIGASTER ANALIS Macquart 


Megistopoda analis Macquart, Dipt. Exot. Suppl. 2 (pt. 2) 187 (reprint 
214). 1851. 
Cordyligaster analis Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 122. 1916. 


Described from a single male from the Amazon. The type had the fourth 
abdominal segment black except its anterior border. The specimen from 
Professor Melander, a female which I provisionally place here, is from British 
Guiana (Parish, collector); it has the fourth abdominal segment wholly 
yellow, as well as the legs and coxae. The only black color is on the thoracic 
dorsum, base of scutellum, metanotum, and a spot just above the hind coxa, 
which fades out upward. ‘There is only a single pair of orbital bristles, the 
upper. The dorsum and pleurae are covered with golden pollen, but on the 
former the black remains visible in four large oval spots arranged in a square. 


CORDYLIGASTER TIPULIFORMIS Walker 


Cordyligaster tipuliformis Walker, Trans. Ent. Soc. new ser. 4: 205 
(reprint 17). 1857.—Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 122. 1916. 

Described from a female, from “South America.” I know of no other 

specimens. ‘Townsend thought this and C. analis must have been described 


86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


from immature or bleached specimens, but my new yellow specimen is per- 
fectly normal, rendering this explanation improbable. Walker describes 
the abdomen as ferruginous, the base of the second and third segments 
testaceous. 


EUCORDYLIGASTER Townsend 


Eucordyligaster Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 123. 1916. 


The type was designated as Cordyligaster septentrionalis Townsend. With- 
in recent years the National Museum has received a cotype of Cordyligaster 
minusculus Van der Wulp, which has been compared with the type of sep- 
tentrionalis and proves to be the same species. 


EUCORDYLIGASTER MINUSCULUS Van der Wulp 


Cordyligaster minusculus Van der Wulp, Biologia, Dipt. 2: 252, pl. 6, 
f. 7, 7a. 1891—Banks, Ent. News 18: 450. 1907.—Thompson, 
Psyche 17: 212. 1910.—Johnson, Psyche 19: 103. 1912——Daecke, 
Ent. News 26: 42. 1915. 

Eucordylidexia minusculus Giglio-Tos, Ditt. del Mess. (pt. 3) 67. 1894. 

Cordyligaster septentrionalis ‘Townsend, Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer., 2: 212. 
1909; Ins. Ins. Menst. 3: 41. 1915. 


The species, as already stated, occurs commonly about Washington. 
Daecke notes it at Marietta, Pa., the farthest north of the records. Thompson 
pointed out the synonomy of septentrionalcs. 


EUCORDYLIGASTER NYOMALA Townsend 
Cuidvineas ster nyomala Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 2: 938. 1914. 
Eucordyligaster nyomala Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 128. 1916. 


Known only in the single male type from Nomala, Peru. It is readily 
distinguished from septentrionalis by its yellow palpi; the thoracic dorsum is 
covered with golden pollen with faint dark stripes in front; the antennae are 
dark red. 


ENTOMOLOGY .—Descriptions of new genera and species of Mallo- 
phaga, together with keys to some related genera of Menoponidae 
and Philopteridae! H. EK. Ewinc, U.S. Bureau of Entomology. 
(Communicated by 8. A. ROHWER.) 


In the Chapin collection of ectoparasites, recently donated to the 
United States National Museum, are some rare, and in many instances 
unusual, Mallophagan specimens. These specimens, mounted by 
Dr. E. A. Chapin, are in excellent condition for showing many of those 
minute chitinous structures which are coming to have such an impor- 
tant part in our recent diagnoses of Mallophagan genera and species. 
In this paper six new genera are established. Although no figures are 
given, it is believed that the keys supped will show probably more 


1 Received January 19, 1927. 


FEB. 19,1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 87 


clearly than figures would, the significant taxonomic characters and 
also the relationships of the newly established genera to the pre- 
viously described ones. ‘The generic concept used in establishing these 
genera predicates that all the species of the genus shall possess two 
or more correlated characters of more than specific importance. In ad- 
dition to the six new genera proposed, seven new species are described. 


A New SPECIES OF TRIMENOPONIDAE 
Philandesia foxi, new species 


Forehead provided with only small setae. Antennae four-segmented; 
second segment with very broad, truncate process, bearing two long setae at 
angle; last segment longer than broad. A short seta is situated on expansion 
over antennal fossa just in front of the eye. 

Prothorax about two-thirds as broad as head and with a marginal row of 
about a dozen long setae, as well as a pair of small spine-like setae on the 
angles and another pair behind the first pair of long marginal setae. Ptero- 
thorax slightly broader than the prothorax and with straight, strongly 
divergent sides. 

Each abdominal segment typically with a distinct, posterior, transverse 
row of setae and an indistinct anterior transverse row. Next to last segment 
of male about twice as long as the others. Last segment of female with a 
double comb of short, marginal setae. 

Genital armature of male very peculiar. The structure taken to be the 
basal plate arises from about the middle of the abdomen and is divided into 
four processes; two short outer processes that are broadened and provided 
with a spine-like appendage distally; and two long inner processes. Par- 
ameres free, straight and broadened at their tips; endomeres united, extend- 
ing beyond the tips of parameres. 

Length of female, 2.42 mm.; width, 0.93 mm. Length of male, 2.20 mm. 
width, 0.81 mm. 

Type host and type locality—Marmota flaviventris from Brewster, Wash- 
ington State. 

Type.—Cat. no. £0135. W FS. UN 2 MM. 

Described from one male (holotype) taken from type host collected 1918, 
by F. W. Logan, Brewster, Washington, and from one female collected at 
New York City, from a rat (Rattus norvegicus) and sent in by Dr. Carroll 
Fox. The manuscript name, without description, of this species was pub- 
lished in a list of ectoparasites of the genera Rattus and Mus for the New 
World by Fox in his “Insects and Disease of Man,” page 217. This name, so 
pubtished in 1925, is a nomen nudum, and becomes validated with this de- 
scription. P. fox differs from P. townsend: Kellogg and Nakayama in a 
number of characters. It has eight large setae on the posterior margin of the 
head instead of the four as on townsend?, and at least a dozen large marginal 
setae on the prothorax instead of the half dozen of the other species. This 
species is also related to species of Dennyus in a number of ways. 


88 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


New MENOPONIDAE 
Acolpocephalum, new genus 


Last antennal segment subhemispherical. Eyes degenerate, situated on 
margin Just behind antennal notch. Pterothorax enlarged, broader and much 
longer than prothorax. Abdomen with nine segments, first and second 
similar. Legs very short and stout; femora inflated; first tarsal segment 
extending distally and overlapping second for over half the length of the 
latter. ‘Tarsal claws very small and weak, almost vestigial on second and 
third legs. 

Genotype and its host species.—Acolpocephalum brevipes, new species, 
from Ptiloris victoriae. 


Only a single species is included at present in this new genus. The tarsal 
characters found in this species are different from those of any Mallophagan 
species known to the writer. 


Acolpocephalum brevipes, new species 


Head compact, as broad as long. Free margin of forehead almost but not 
quite, evenly rounded. Mandibles sharply pointed, without crushing sur- 
faces or transverse ridges; left mandible slightly smaller than right and with 
two sharp, tooth-like projections at the end. Temporal lobes subquadran- 
gular. 

Prothorax about three-fifths as broad as the head, with rounded lateral 
margins and a peg-like spine on anterior corner. Pterothorax as broad as 
greatest width of abdomen, sides slightly outwardly curved and strongly 
divergent posteriorly. A few spine-like setae are situated at each posterior 
corner of pterothorax. 

Abdomen about one and a half times as long as broad and with posterior 
end broadly and evenly rounded. A long seta springs from the lateral margin 
of each segment, which typically bears in addition a transverse row of setae. 

Legs almost of the same size, but second pair slightly iarger than the first 
and the third slightly larger than the second. Femora of all the legs about 
two-thirds as broad as long, those of third pair not quite as stout as those of 
the other two pairs. Tuibiae of all legs very short and stout; those of first pair 
about one and a half times as long as broad at their distal ends. Last seg- 
ment of each tarsus very stout, strongly curved on outer margin and ter- 
minated with minute to vestigial claws; claws on tarsus I best developed, the 
outer about twice as large as the inner. 

Length of female, 1.11 mm.; width, 0.41 mm. 

Type host and type locality —Ptiloris victoriae, from Queensland, 
Australia. 

Type.—Cat no. 40136, U. S. N. M. 


Described from a single female (holotype) taken from skin of rifle bird, 
Piiloris victoriae, from Atherton Tableland, Queensland, Australia. 
Chapinia, new genus 


Forehead greatly reduced, broadly rounded in front. Mandibles situated 
almost approximate to anterior, free margin of clypeus. Last segment of 
antenna capitate. Antennal fossa covered above by a transversely notched 


FEB. 19,1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 89 


expansion of the head, the posterior part of which bears the double cornea, of 
the eye onitsfree margin. Prothorax large, with almost straight, posteriorly 
convergent sides. Pterothorax undivided, with almost straight, posteriorly 
divergent sides. Abdomen broad, of nine segments in female and ten in 
male; first and second segments similar. First segment of each tarsus but 
slightly overlapping the second; tarsal claws well developed and subequal 
on each tarsus. Genital plate of male broad and flat, not rod-like. 

Genotype and its host species.—Chapinia robusta, new species, from Cera- 
togymna atrata. 


This genus is established for the single new species, and at the suggestion 
of Dr. Chapin, the collector of the specimens. It is related to Actornitho- 
philus Ferris but differs from Ferris’ genus in the shape of the forehead, 
position of the mandibles and type of genital armature of the male. 


Chapinia robusta, new species 


Head decidedly “hat-like,” the almost straight contour of the sides of the 
forehead is continued far beyond the bases of the antennae and along the side 
of expansions over the antennal fossae. Mandibles small, equal, simple and 
pointed at tips. Antennae of typical Menopon type, but third segment 
revealing traces of its fused condition by breaking off easily near its base at 
suture line; last segment slightly longer than broad. 

Prothorax about two-thirds as broad as head and bearing a conspicuous 
spine at each anterior corner. Pterothorax the mirror of prothorax consider- 
ably enlarged. At each posterior corner of pterothorax there is a lateral 
pecten of five or six spine-like setae, two of which in the female are much 
longer than those of the male. 

Abdomen broad, constricted somewhat in front and bearing a few very 
long lateral setae, those on the seventh and eighth segments being especially 
conspicuous. 

Genital armature of male large and heavily chitinized. Basal plate ex- 
tending backward from fifth abdominal segment, it is broad and strap-like. 
Posteriorly the basal plate divides into two slender lateral arms and a stout, 
distally split central piece; which structures bear the parameres and endo- 
mere respectively: Parameres rather slender, upwardly curved, more or less 
hook-like structures which encompass the endomere laterally. Endomere 
large and curved, plate-like with a pair of lateral horns. Penis absent. 

Legs long, the tibial segments particularly being slender. Patch of setae 
on each posterior femur pronounced. Second tarsal segments of all the legs 
very slender. 

Length of male, 1.59 mm.; width, 0.70 mm. Length of female, 2.00 mm.; 
width, 0.95 mm. 

Type host and type locality—Ceratogymna atrata from Congo, Africa. 

Type.—Cat. no. 40137, U. S. N. M. 


Described from one male (holotype) and one female (paratype) collected by 
EK. A. Chapin from the skin of hornbill, Ceratogymna atrata, taken November 3, 
1917, at Nytonga, Congo, Africa. 


90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


Amyrsidea, new genus 


Forehead reduced and evenly rounded in front. Antennae five-segmented 
(third segment showing suture near base), with last segment .cylindrical. 
Antennal fossa covered above by a transversely sutured expansion of the 
head. Eyes wanting. Pharyngeal sclerite well developed. Prothorax 
large, without sternum, the sternal region being largely covered by the plate- 
like coxae of first pair of legs. Pterothorax broader than long and with 
straight posterior margin. Female with a whorl of conspicuous subequal 
spines on the posterior margin of last abdominal segment. Typically each 
abdominal segment is provided on each side ventrally with a brush of setae, 
smaller than those which clothe the body. Femora of third pair of legs each 
with a ventral patch of setae. First tibiae without spurs at distal ends; 
second and third tibiae provided with tibial spurs. First tarsal segment of 
leg I large and overlapping the second segment; first tarsal segment of legs 
II and III much smaller and not overlapping second segment. Subequal 
tarsal claws well developed on all the legs. Genital armature of male compact 
but complicated. Basal plate, plate-like, but very deeply incised posteriorly 
for the reception of the complicated endomeres and bearing thorn-like pro- 
jections from the inside margins of lobes bounding incised space. Parameres 
free, movable appendages. 

Genotype and its host species.—Menopon ventrale Nitzsch, from Argusianus 
argus. 


This genus is established for the peculiar Menopon of Argusianus species 
The writer has examined three males and three females of this species taken 
from the argus pheasant, Argusianus argus, collected at Trong, Lower Siam, 
and one female from Arguszanus grayz taken in West Borneo. The absence 
of eyes, the presence of tibial spurs on the second and third tibiae, the whorl 
of spines on the last segment of the female and the peculiar and complicated 
genital armature of the male constitute a striking combination of characters 
for the delimitation of the genus. 


Numidicola, new genus 


Forehead reduced and broadly rounded. Antennae long, five-segmented; 
third segment small and forming a pedicel to the fourth; fifth segment long, 
filiform. Antennal fossae roofed over above by an unsutured expansion of 
the head. Eyes vestigial and on the free margin of expansions over antennal 
fossae. Pharyngeal sclerite large, conspicuous. Prothorax very large, about 
as broad as head; prosternum wanting; large, plate-like precoxae meeting on 
median line. Pterothorax not larger than prothorax, very short, sides mark- 
edly divergent posteriorly. Abdomen with very short segments, eight in the 
male and nine in the female, each typically with a single transverse row of 
setae. First tarsal segment of each tarsus but slightly if at all overlapping 
the second. Each tarsus terminated distally with two well-developed, equal 
claws. Genital armature of male with rod-like basal plate, free parameres 
and large distally free endomeres. 

Genotype and its host species — Numidicola longicornis, new species, from 
Numida ansorgit. 


Included with the type species in this genus is the Menopon antennatum 
of Kellogg and Paine. The combination of two characters is enough to dis- 


_ FEB. 19, 1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 91 


tinguish this genus from the others of Menoponidae. These are the presence 
of long, filiform, five-segmented antennae and the position of the eyes on the 
margins of the undivided expansions of the head covering the antennal fossae. 


Numidicola longicornis, new species 


A fragile, very hairy, golden colored species. First segment of antenna 
slightly longer than broad; second segment cylindrical, twice as long as first; 
third segment minute, enlarged toward the tip, about half as long as the fourth; 
fourth about half as long as the fifth and broadest toward its distal end; 
fifth segment filiform, not clubbed, although it is broadest near the tip; it is 
about one and a half times as long as three and four combined. Eyes ves- 
tigial, without pigment, but showing two degenerate corneas. 

Prothorax as broad as the head, broadly rounded posteriorly and bearing 
a marginal row of closely set, long setae. Pterothorax with a few spine-like 
setae on lateral margins and a row of close-set, long setae on posterior margin. 
Abdominal setae in close-set rows, some of them somewhat flattened. Last 
abdominal segment of male studded above with many short spines. 

Genital armature of male: Basal plate long, flat, widening posteriorly; 
parameres long, slender slightly curved and blunt-pointed at tips; endomeres 
similar to parameres but stouter, attached to sac, outwardly curved. The 
endomeres extend posteriorly slightly beyond the parameres. 

Hind legs slightly larger than the middle ones; femur III with ventral patch 
of setae. Tibiae II and III each with about eight spines on inner side, the 
more distal being the stoutest. 

Length of male, 1.35 mm.; width, 0.64 mm. Length of female, 1.26 mm.; 
width, 0.71 mm. 

Type host and type locality— Numida ansorgii from British East Africa. 

Type slide.—Cat. no. 40138, U. S. N. M. 

Description based on five males and one female (two immature specimens 
were obtained) taken from the skin no. 243182 U. 8. N. M., of the guinea, 
Numida ansorgii, collected at Tana River, British East Africa, August 26, 
1912. This species differs from N. antennatum (Kellogg and Paine) in the 
shape of the antennal segments and in the structure of the genital armature of 


the male. 


Key To Some RELATED GENERA OF MENOPONIDAE, INCLUDING THOSE 
DESCRIBED IN THIS PAPER 


1. Antennal fossae open above (ocular emarginations deep) or only slightly 
covered by expansions from head; last segment of antenna usually 
clavate, rarely capitate; temporal lobes large, somewhat subrectangu- 
lame Viese presenta Md NOt WEStIaIAl, 2)... 26's o043 els dccahds) pede Sema 2 

Antennal fossae largely or entirely covered above by lateral expansions 
from the top of head; last segment of antenna variously shaped; tem- 
poral lobes rarely subrectangular; eyes usually present, but frequently 


RICE ETA elie aatee Va otic ciccoths 2 SHAN wis sone Es tae LTRS Emer EE 6 
2. Posterior femora and abdominal sterna without definite ventral patches 
of setae, although combs of spines may be present................ 3 


Posterior femora and certain abdominal sterna with definite ventral 
PAtehesvonsorusmeston sebdes, s..05. 2)... doh Rese ee. 4 


92 JOURNAL OF THE’ WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


3. Pterothorax (meso-metathorax) enlarged, much larger than prothorax; 
first segment of each tarsus overlapping the second for about half the 
length of the latter; tarsal claws minute to vestigial. Small stout 
Lice ON Parrots. str. Go cee ere ee Acolpocephalum, new genus 

Pterothorax normal; first segment of each tarsus slightly or not at all 
overlapping the second; tarsal claws not vestigial 

Colpocephalum Nitzsch 

4. Setae of femoral and sternal patches smaller than those clothing the 


Inodiy: | sects es We Ne oer 0) oe aro ee Heleonomus Ferris 
Setae of femoral and sternal patches as large as those which clothe the 
bod yisnh sea aw OP EO UR Sr 5 


5. HoncHead broad and rounded with large mandibles in normal position; 
genital armature of male weak with long rod-like basal plate 

Actornithophilus Ferris 

Forehead reduced, triangular, with small mandibles situated approximate 

to the front margin of clypeus; genital armature of male large with 


broad: basal splatecae ia iain ae tala Chapinia, new genus 

6. Posterior femora and certain abdominal sterna with definite ventral 
patches or brushes of ‘setae... tcc. eh 7 
Posterior femora and abdominal sterna without definite ventral patches 
or brushesof "setae. 000 oe ie eel Dt, 2 8 

7. Pharyngeal sclerite present; second abdominal sternite sometimes with 
a pair of asters of heavy spines on posterior margin................ 8 
Pharyngeal sclerite wanting; second abdominal sternite never with asters 

Oly, SPUR ee 2 deen eee ior hod u ieee ae Dennyus Neumann 


8. Temporal region of head of usual shape, and much broader than forehead 
and prothorax; posterior margin of last abdominal segment without row 
of spine-like setae; prosternum present; last antennal segment capitate 

Myrsidea Waterston 

Temporal region reduced, but little broader than forehead or prothorax; 
prosternum wanting; procoxae expanded into body sclerites; last 
antennal segment not capitate...) 2.5.0... .:....-. ee 9 

9. Expansion of head skeleton covering top of antennal fossa divided by a 
transverse suture; female with a row of stout spines on the posterior 
margin of last abdominal segment............ Amyrsidea, new genus 

Expansion covering top of antennal fossa entire; female without spines 
on posterior margin of last abdominal segment 
Numidicola, new genus 


New PHILOPTERIDAE 
Echinophilopterus, new genus 


Clypeus separated from head by distinct clypeal suture; appearing deeply 
incised in front because of the lateral chitinizations (clypeal bands) extending 
beyond the signature for about a third of their length. Trabeculae very 
large, long and rounded at their tips. Antennae short. Abdomen short, 
almost circular and bearing many short, stout spines below on first, second 
and possibly third or fourth segments. Other characters similar to those of 
Philopterus Nitzsch. 

Genotype and its host species.—Echinophilopterus chapint, new species, 
from Tanygnathus mueller. 


FEB. 19,1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 93 


This new genus is established for those parrot-infesting Philopteri that have 
the abdomen studded below with short, stout spines. It was suggested to 
the author by Dr. E. A. Chapin, who collected the type species. Besides the 
type species and another new one described in this paper, there are included 
in this genus some of the species in Piaget’s forficulatus group. The writer 
was at first inclined to make forficula Piaget the type of this genus but changed 
his mind when it was observed that Piaget does not mention the group of 
spines on the ventral surface of the abdomen nor give any definite type host 
species for this louse. 


Echinophilopterus chapini, new species 


Head large for the size of body, with long forehead. Signature of clypeus 
much longer than broad, sides very slightly outcurved, and with a short, 
tongue-like anterior median process having a rounded hyaline margin. 
Lateral chitinizations of clypeus pronounced, extending beyond the signature 
by about a third of their length, pointed and hyaline at their tips; each bears 
two prominent, curved setae above. ‘Trabeculae reaching to the middle of 
second antennal segment, slightly recurved and evenly rounded at tips. 

Prothorax about two-thirds as large as pterothorax, sides straight and 
slightly divergent posteriorly. Pterothorax with a long seta on each lateral 
margin, in front of which is a small spine-like seta and behind which are two 
setae, the most posterior of which is the longer. 

Abdomen almost as broad as long and in both sexes bearing below many 
short, stout, sharp spines which are situated chiefly on the first three segments. — 
In three specimens one or more spines are also on the fourth segment. 

Genital armature of male stout, compact and well chitinized. Basal plate 
about twice as long as wide, sides almost straight and subparallel. Parameres 
short, stout, outwardly curved hooks, in length equal to about half the width 
of basal plate. Endomeres wanting. A penis-like structure extends almost 
to the tips of parameres. 

Length of male, 1.66 mm.; width, 0.71 mm. Length of female, 2.06 
mm.; width 0.87 mm. 
Type.—Cat. no. 40139, U. 8S. N. M. 


Described from four specimens, two males and two females, taken from 
skins of a parrot, Tanygnathus muellert, collected in the Celebes. 


Echinophilopterus tanygnathi, new species 


Head large, particularly the temporal region. Signature of clypeus much 
longer than broad, sides almost straight and parallel; a short, tongue-like 
projection extends from the middle of the anterior end of the signature. 
Lateral chitinizations of clypeus very long, with anterior free ends expanded, 
inwardly cupped and hyaline; above slightly in front of the middle each bears 
two long curved setae and near the base a single, straight seta. ‘Trabeculae 
reaching almost to the middle of the second antennal segment, decidedly 
broadened at their bases. 

Prothorax almost as large as pterothorax, sides straight and very slightly 
divergent posteriorly. No lateral marginal setae on prothorax, but there is a 
minute spine and a much larger seta at each angle. Chaetotaxy of lateral 


94 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


margin of pterothorax: First a small spine, next a long more or less flagelli- 
form seta equal to about half the width of the pterothorax, next a similar seta 
half as long, last a very long seta equal to three-fourths the width of the 
pterothorax. 

Abdomen distinctly longer than broad. Ventral spines distributed over 
the central halves of the first three segments. Last segment of abdomen 
broader than long. 

Length of female, 1.79 mm.; width, 0.73 mm. 

Type host and type locality —Tanygnathus burbridger from Sulu Island, 
Philippine Islands. 

Type.—Cat. no. 40140, U. 8S. N. M. 


Described from a single female (holotype) taken from a skin of a parrot, 
Tanygnathus burbridget, collected at Mt. Bud Dajo, Sulu Island, Philippine 
Islands, October 11, 1906. 

Differs from E. chapini in having a longer central process on anterior end 
of signature of clypeus, in having shorter and stouter and differently shaped 
trabeculae and in some minor characters. 


Physconelloides, new genus 


Clypeus broadly and evenly rounded in front; clypeal suture present. 
Forehead with a pair of large, backwardly pointing, lateral horn-like or spine- 
like processes which arise from the chitinous thickening just behind the 
clypeal sutures. A similar but smaller pair of processes arise ventrally 
from the clypeus just in front of the clypeal sutures. Antennae short, 
second segment longest. ‘Temporal lobes large, squarish. Eyes concealed 
from above the lateral expansions of the temporal lobes. Esophageal 
sclerite present and well developed. Prothorax smaller than the ptero- 
thorax, with sides strongly divergent posteriorly. Pterothorax short, but 
very broad with rounded lateral margins. Abdomen eight-segmented in 
both sexes. Genital armature of male very long and slender; basal plate 
composed of two long chitinous rods; parameres free, conspicuous; endomeres 
not united distally. Tarsal claws unequal, the inner being the stouter and 
having a different curve from the outer. 

Genotype and its host species.—Physconelloides ceratoceps, new species, 
from Leptotila ochroptera chloraucheuia. 


This new genus is clearly related to Physconella Paine but differs from 
Paine’s genus in having the large horn-like process on the underside of the 
clypeus in addition to those on the sides of the forehead, and in having the 
angulate temporal lobes instead of rounded ones. The type species is the 
only one included in the genus. 


Physconelloides ceratoceps, new species 


Clypeus heavily chitinized along the front margin; ventral processes 
recurved, equal to the second segment of antennae in length. Lateral 
processes of head about one and a half times as long as ventral processes and 
overlapping most of the first antennal segment. Antennae short; first seg- 
ment as broad as long; second segment about twice as long as broad and equal 
to three and four together; fifth segment distinctly longer than fourth. 


FEB. 19,1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 95 


Temporal lobes squarish, each with a minute spine-like seta on outer corner 
and two very long setae on posterior margin. Pharyngeal sclerite as broad 
as long. 

Prothorax with a pair of setae just in front of posterior angles. Ptero- 
thorax about three times as broad as long, with lateral margins almost evenly 
rounded and each bearing a large seta near its middle. 

Abdomen somewhat pear-shaped in outline with the broadest place behind 
the middle. Tergal and sternal plates apparently wanting. Pleural plates 
heavily chitinized and more or less united with each other. Abdomen 
almost nude except for three long lateral setae on each side of sixth segment 
and two on each side of seventh segment in the female and two large setae on 
each side of seventh segment and a posterior marginal pair on the eighth 
segment of male. 

Genital armature of male very slender and delicate; basal plate arising 
from the chinitized base of first abdominal segment and extending through 
almost the whole length of the abdomen as two slender rods; parameres 
outwardly directed, almost straight processes thickened at their bases; endo- 
meres free and similar to parameres.. 

Coxae of first pair of legs contiguous. Those of second pair of legs sepa- 
rated from each other for a distance about equal to the diameter of one of 
them by the expanded, plate-like epimera behind the first coxae. The inner 
tarsal claw of front leg is about twice as big as the outer and differently curved; 
it is also slightly larger than the outer one on the second and third pairs of 
legs. 

Length of female, 1.65 mm.; width, 0.66 mm. Length of male, 1.11 
mm.; width, 0.52 mm. 

Type host and type locality——Leptotila ochroptera chlorauchewia, from 


Argentina. 
Type slide:—Cat. no. 40141, U.S. N. M. 


Described from a male (holotype) and a female (paratype) taken from type 
host, a pigeon, which was collected at Rio Quia, Las Palmes, Argentina Chaco, 
July 17, 1920, by Dr. A. Wetmore. 


Key To SoME RELATED GENERA OF PHILOPTERIDAE, INCLUDING THE Two 
New GENERA DESCRIBED IN THIS PAPER 


1. Forehead produced laterally into a pair of large, recurved horn-like 
FORGE SCs Spite) tee Se as oe ee sions Wel Sein vas oa) oh», Sha Rehee 2 
Forehead not produced laterally into horn-like processes............-.. 3 
2. Temporal lobes rounded; elypeus without ventral spine-like processes 
Physconella Paine 
Temporal lobes angulate; clypeus provided with a pair of large, spine- 
like processes on ventral side............ Physconelloides, new genus 
3. Forehead with membranous flaps (more conspicuous in the male) pro- 
jecting beyond the lateral margins. (The Giebeliinae of Waterston) . if 
Forehead without laterally projecting membranous slaps. see «eats es! 
4. Antennae the same in the two sexes. On petrels...... Giebelia alles 
Antennae different in the two sexes. On giant fulmars and _ shear- 
sVIRE) CS. Sha ge ch Ae Stan OR Om POY ee Trabeculus Rudow 
5. Antennae alike in the two sexes; trabeculae very large and usually 
TURE NOU UD array yey fab he. up 2). fe gen aid ah a geen eae ol © Sat She a tere 6 
Antennae different in the two sexes. Onowls...... Strigiphilus Mjéberg 


96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


6. Forehead irregularly rounded and without hyaline margin to clypeus; 
trabeculae reduced, immovable, not reaching the distal end of first 
antennal seement-Onbowlsin.t. 9... Eustrigiphilus Ewing 

Without ‘such ‘characters... 0. 000) 4050.08). 2 ee ie 

7. Clypeal region expanded and with hyaline free margin throughout, but 

rounded and not emarginate in front; antennae very short. On 


geese; ducksand’ swans: (0.15 0).20, 0 eee oO Anatoecus Cummings 
Clypeal region not rounded in front with free hyaline margin.......... 8 

8 Signatural plate divided; antennae long, with segment two distinctly 
longer than any of the others. Onibises........ Ibidoecus Cummings 
signatural plate not divided... 10.1022. 22090% ). )8 9 

9. Clypeal margin deeply incised in front; abdomen bearing many short, 
sharp spines below. On parrots........ Echinophilopterus, new genus 
Clypeal margin not deeply incised in front; abdomen without spine on 
ventral surfaces 2 ihn i Leu Le Oe UE er 10 


10. Clypeal region bearing above on each lateral chitinization (clypeal 
band) a tuft of three or more setae. Chiefly on cuckoos 
Cuculoecus Ewing 
Clypeal region not bearing such lateral tufts of setae 
Part of genus Philopterus Nitzsch and its derivatives, Neophilop- 
terus Cummings and Dollabella Cam 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
194th MEETING 


The 194th meeting of the AcapEmy and the twenty-seventh annual meeting 
was held at the Administration Building of the Carnegie Institution on the 
evening of Tuesday, January 18, 1925. The meeting was called to order by 
Vice-President Hazarp, who called upon the retiring President, A. L. Day, 
to give his address entitled, The study of earth movements in California. 
President Day gave a brief account of the events leading to the movement for 
the cooperative study of earthquakes and earth movements and the forma- 
tion of the Advisory Committee of Seismology in order to make the coopera- 
tion effective. He mentioned the various lines of work, astronomical, 
geodetic, hydrographic, and geologic, as well as the strictly seismologic, that 
formed a part of the cooperative scheme, and outlined the parts taken by the 
various agencies doing this kind of work. Among the new instruments used 
in this investigation he mentioned the Anderson-Wood torsion selsmometer 
and the sonic sounding device of the Navy Department. He concluded 
by saying: “Such a number of vigorous agencies, thus brought together, 
cannot fail to accomplish a great deal more than any one could do alone; 
such a representative group of agencies, I believe, cannot fail of success.” 
President Day’s address is published in full in Sczence, 61: 323. March 27, 
1925. 

Following a brief intermission after the address, the annual business 
meeting of the AcapEmy was held. The minutes of the 26th annual meeting 
were read and approved. The Corresponding Secretary, Francis B. SILSBEE 
reported briefly on the activities of the Acapmmy. During the year 35 
persons were elected to regular membership, and Dr. SiauRD ORLA-JENSEN 


FEB. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 97 


of Copenhagen to honorary membership in recognition of his work in bac- 
terlology. Eighteen resignations were accepted during the year, of whom 7 
were resident members, and 5 were dropped for non-payment of dues. The 
Acapemy lost by death the following 9 members: ALFRED H. Brooks, 
Joun T. Heprick, Nep Ho.uister, F. Omori, J. J. StevENsoN, A. W. 
VocprEs, Wooprow WILson, E. V. WINCHELL, and R. 8. Woopwarp. 

During the year the Board of Managers held four meetings. In addition 
to attending to routine business and the election of new members, the Board 
adopted a resolution in support of the project for a National Arboretum, 
and designated respresentatives to the International Mathematical Congress 
at Toronto, to the Centenary Celebration of the Franklin Institute at Phila- 
delphia, and to the Washington meeting of the American Metric Association. 

The report of the Recording Secretary, WALTER D. LAMBERT, was read. 
There were held during the year 9 public meetings, most of them jointly with 
one or more of the affiliated societies, at which addresses were delivered. 
The names of the affiliated societies participating, the names of the speakers, 
the titles of the addresses, and occasional items of interest in connection with 
them were given. 

The report of the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, showed total receipts of $5,579.86, 
and disbursements of $4,227.56, with a balance in bank on Dec. 31, 1924, 
of $3,140.80. The value of the AcApEMyY’s investments was $16,036.37, 
and the estimated net worth including all items was $18,669.14. 

The report of the auditing committee, consisting of WHITMAN Cross, 
G. M. Couns, and O. 8. ApAms, was read, which verified the Treasurer’s 
figures. The reports of the Treasurer and of the auditing committee were 
then accepted. 

The report of the editors of the JouRNAL was presented by the senior editor, 
E. P. Kinurp. Figures were given regarding the number of articles and their 
distribution among the various branches of science. The general form and 
policy of the JouRNAL was substantially as during the previous year. 

The Committee of Tellers reported that the following officers had been 
elected for 1925; President, VERNON KELLOGG; Non-resident Vice-Presidents, 
J. StTiecLiTz, WILLIAM WHEELER; Corresponding Secretary, FRANcis B. 
SILSBEE; Recording Secretary, WALTER D. LAMBERT; Treasurer, R. L. Faris; 
Managers, Class of 1928, E. C. CRITTENDEN, G. W. McCoy. 

The following Vice-Presidents nominated by the affiliated societies were 
then elected: Anthropological Society, TRUMAN MicHEtson; Archaeological 
Society, WALTER Hovuau;, Bacteriological Society, W. M. CuarKx; Biological 
Society, S. A. RonweER; Botanical Society, H. L. SHantz; American Chemical 
Society, Washington Section, Lerason H. Apams; Entomological Society, 
A. G. Bovine; Washington Section, Society of American Foresters, GEORGE 
B. SupwortH; National Geographic Society, FREDERICK V. CoviLLE; Helmin- . 
thological Society, B. H. RANsom. 


195th MEETING 


The 195th meeting of the AcapEMy was held jointly with the Anthro- 
pological Society, the Archaeological Society, and the Biological Society in the 
auditorum of the Carnegie Institution Building the evening of Tuesday, 
January 20, 1925. It was devoted to a symposium on The origin and evolu- 
tion of man. President Joun C. Merriam of the Carnegie Institution spoke 
on the geological aspects of the evidence and the significance of evolution for 
the future. 


98 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 


There is need to increase the knowledge of what we are by learning how we 
came into existence and what are the nature and sources of our characters and 
what is their possible future development. The problem of the evolution of 
man includes three questions: (1) the history and evolution of man from his 
origin to the present time; (2) the problem of the evolution of man from a 
possible ancestral type; (38) the future course of development of the human 
race. Willit represent evolutionary progress? In general the problem of the 
evolution of man is part of the larger question of evolution of the whole 
organic world and can be understood or interpreted mainly through study of 
this question as a whole. We approach the general problem of evolution from 
the point of view of comparative anatomy, of embryology, of experimental 
evolution, and of historical development. The question of historical de- 
velopment is understood only through the approach of geological history, 
which must itself be interpreted through an understanding of the geological 
record. An understanding of the meaning of time involves, first, the inter- 
pretation of local sequences of strata, and second, fitting together those 
fragments of the geological record scattered over the whole world which 
together represent the time sequence as we know it. The paleontological 
record is read from this volume. 1. Change. 2. Not repeat. 3. Definite 
direction. 4. Apparent overlap or connection of members of the sequence. 
One of the most important features in the story of man is that the earlier 
chapters are read from the geological record and not from documents of 
entirely recent or historical origin. 

Does the point of origin indicate derivation of man from an ancestral non- 
human type? Yes. Man appears at the right time and with the physical 
characters that we would expect if he were derived from a non-human type by 
modification. What is creation? Making of something new out of pre- 
existing materials. Does man’s history show changes in physical types? 
Yes. Advancein brain type? Yes. Will the future probably bring new and 
more advanced types of man? Yes, unless the myriad centuries of evolution 
of the organic world have led to halting of evolution only when an organism 
becomes intelligent. Intelligence should lead us to choose the best path of 
evolution and we believe it will. (Author’s abstract.) 

The next speaker, Dr. ApoLF ScHULTz, spoke on The embryological evidence 
of the evolution of man. His address, under that title, is published in full in 
This JouRNAL, vol. 15, June 19, 1925. 

The concluding speaker was Dr. ALES HrpuicKa of the U. S. National 
Museum, who spoke on anthropological explorations in connection with the 
problem of evolution. 

The addresses were illustrated with lantern slides. 


196th MEETING 


The 196th meeting was held jointly with the Geological Society of Wash- 
ington in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club on the evening of Wednesday, 
January 28th. Professor FrrepERIcK J. Pack of the University of Utah 
spoke on Some scenic aspects of Utah geology. 

Dr. Hucu D. Mismr of the U. 8. Geological Survey spoke on Hroszon in 
the San Juan Canyon, Utah. 

The canyon of San Juan River extends west across a high arid region in 
southeastern Utah and joins the Glen Canyon of Colorado River near the 
southern boundary of the state. It reveals a magnificent geologic structure. 
There is section possession of the same dimensions as the canyon, as muchas 


FEB. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 99 


half a mile high and 133 mileslong. The rocks aggregate a thickness of 5,000 
feet and consist of limestone, sandstone, and shale, ranging in age from 
Pennsylvania to Jurassic. Most of the rocks are red beds, and, since soil is 
scanty and rock ledges abound, red is the predominating color in any landscape 
view. The rock strata have been flexed into a broad gentle arch, but neither 
the arch nor the minor structural features, such as anticlines, synclines, 
monoclines, faults, and joints, have influenced the course of the river. The 
present crooked course of the river in the canyon is a striking example of an 
entrenched meandering stream. Such a course may have been developed on 
a former cover of Tertiary sediments-or on a peneplain, fragments of which 
stand near and above the walls. The peneplain is possibly of Pleistocene 
age, and the canyon cutting therefore apparently began in Pleistocene time. 
The cutting was rapid but did not continue uniformly as there were a few 
short pauses when the river was graded and deposited gravel which now floors 
benches of small area on the walls. Rock debris, consisting of sand, gravel, 
and boulders, forms the bed of the river and attains a depth of perhaps 100 
feet or more. But it is presumably absent in a few of the rapids that are 
produced by inclined ledges of hard-rock which cross the channel. Long 
stretches of the canyon, where the debris is deepest, present the peculiar ex- 
ample of an alluvial stream flowing between close walls of solid rock, but 
much of the debris is apparently moved by high floods that take place many 
years apart. 

The San Juan River carries an unusually large quantity of debris for 
streams in the United States and it is one of the chief contributors of mud to 
Colorado River. The water is always muddy, but during flood stages the 
river is actually a river of mud; and according to samples taken by Pierce it 
occasionally carries by volume three times as much silt as water. The heavy 
load of debris carried during floods causes a peculiar kind of waves known as 
sand waves. These waves attain a height of about 7 feet and resemble 
those thrown up by a stern-wheel river steamboat. They travel upstream, 
in marked contrast to other kinds of waves that are stationary and also to 
waves that travel downstream. 

If the proposed storage and power projects on San Juan and Colorado rivers 
are carried to completion the river, on reaching the heads of the reservoirs, 
will change its work from erosion to deposition. An important question 
concerning the reservoirs is, How soon will they be filled with rock debris? 
The answer to this question remains for the future, because the data available 
at present are not sufficient for making an estimate of the total lead of debris 
that is carried each year by the San Juan and discharged into the Colorado. 
(Author’s abstract.) 

Both papers were illustrated with colored lantern slides. 


197th MEETING 


The 197th meeting was held jointly with the affiliated biological societies 
of Washington in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club on the evening of 
February 19, 1925. A group of papers was presented on the general subject 
of Undesirable Immigrants. Dr. J. R. MouLuER treated the subject from the 
standpoint of Animal Diseases, under the title Forezgn Insects a Menace. 

It is to the interest of this country to prevent the introduction of contagious 
diseases, whether of humans, of other animals, or of plants. Within the past 
year there have been two examples of the great economic loss which may result 


100 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 4 


from the inroads of foreign pests and of the danger to some of our greatest 
industries. The outbreak of foot-and-mouth disease among the livestock 
of California and Texas, was the concern of the entire country and Congress 
acted promptly in appropriating money to combat it. This plague of live- 
stock is so contagious that the United States Department of Agriculture 
takes every precaution against introduction, even to prohibiting experimental 
work with the disease in this country. 

In spite of all precautions the virus of a dangerous disease sometimes gets 
by the barriers maintained by the Bureau of Animal Industry. The exact 
method by which the recent foot-and-mouth disease gained entrance is not 
known. ‘The introduction of virus of the European fowl pest, which appeared 
in poultry flocks of this country last December, is of peculiar interest, because 
of the probable method of its introduction. This disease had not been known 
in the United States and precautions were taken against its introduction, but 
it has been found that an investigator working on filterable viruses in a large 
eastern institution obtained the virus of the European fowl pest, in the sum- 
mer of 1923, from the Pasteur Institute of France. Dr. Jonn R. Mouusr, 
Chief of the Bureau of Animal Industry, says there is a possibility that the 
disease was introduced through some other channel, but that this is the only 
known source of this virus, and that the disease was first found in States where 
work with the virus was done. The Department of Agriculture does not 
permit the importation of animals from countries having destructive animal 
diseases not already present here. It is very rarely that a dangerous disease 
gets past the barriers that have been raised to exclude livestock diseases. 
There have been several outbreaks of foot-and-mouth disease in the past 40 
years which have been stamped out by the bureau veterinarians. There have 
been a few outbreaks of other animal diseases foreign to this country, includ- 
ing the present outbreak of the European fowl pest. Only those well ac- 
quainted with disease conditions throughout the world know what we have 
probably escaped by maintaining quarantine walls and by sending inspectors 
into foreign countries. (Abridged from author's abstract.) 

Dr. THomas E. SnNyprErR of the Bureau of Entomology treated the subject 
from the standpoint of plant diseases and insect pests, under the title Forest 
insect pests and their control. 

Col. GrnELEY has referred to the great destruction of forest trees by 
barkbeetles and defoliating insects and emphasized the importance of forest 
management in their control. There are other types of forest insects which 
cause an annual Icss of forest products estimated at $40,000,000. To this 
loss must be added percentages of the cost and upkeep of lumber camps, 
machinery, equipment, logging railroads, wages and keep of men and animals 
in the woods, storage in the mill pond, sawing, drying, finishing and piling at 
the mill. Where the products, such as telephone poles, construction timbers, 
etc., are damaged after being put in place, the cost of replacement involves 
losses of labor and time, as well as the cost of the original and replaced 
products. The control of these insects is an important factor in forest 
conservation. The losses they cause can be greatly lessened by slight read- 
justments in logging operations, mill management, closer utilization and the 
use of wood preservatives. (Author’s abstract.) 

Dr. LAwRENCE Kots of the Hygienic Laboratory treated the subject from 
the standpoint of Hwman diseases. 

The addresses were illustrated by lantern slides and moving pictures. 

Water D. LAMBERT, Recording Secretary. 


ieee j 


: 2 MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND 
APRIL RCRD ROC METIBGEE Sn i! (a 


9. The: Philosophical aise a a | 


ba 
ne BY 


© Geologicl Soriety. — 


The al Society. 


t] em oe of the afilinted ela ‘will appear on this page 
by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh of each month. | 


oar 


CONTENTS 


2 “ache fe : tbe 


pina —Alfaroa, a new genus of the faaity Jagandscee from : a Ri 


with aan to some ae genera iat uM enoponioe and 
RG RRS anh) Meal: 


Treasurer: Reds Panis, Coast and Geodetic Survey. | 


¢ 


Vou. 17 Marcu 4, 1927 No. 6 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
OF SCIENCES 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


Wiuuiams J. PETERS AGNES CHASE JOHN B. REESIDE, Jr, 
DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 


ASSOCIATE EDITORS 


L, H. Apams S. A, RonwEr 
: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
4 E, A. GotpMaNn G. W. Stosz 
fy BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
3 R. F. Griees J. R. SwanTON 
i BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
E. WICHERS 


eee et 


i 
ee 


% 
en 
iD 
¥ 
oy 
: 
x 
Be 
Yu 
ee 
F 


Mr. Roya anp GuILFoRD AVES. 
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND 


ge as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
. of August 24,1912, Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 


This A! OURNAL, the official org 
present a brief record of current sc 
(1) short original papers, written 
- short notes of current scientific literatur. 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetin t. 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washing 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each mont 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. ‘Volumes a 4p toe 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reachi ing the 
He twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request f1 
issue of the JouRNAL for the following fourth 0 ninete 


Manuscripts may be Sent to any member of the 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obv 
‘should appear only as footnotes and should include yea 

the work of both the editors and printers it is sugg 

serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page 
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be co 

_ or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for: 
_ partly met by the author. i 

Proof -—In order to facilitate meaee publication. no proof will e sent t: 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted 1 in final form t 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ; 

_ Authors! s Reprints .—Reprints will be furnished at the following: sc ed e of prices. 


Copies 4 pp. 9 1) Oe i a 4 pp. 

50 $.85 $1.65 ae 55 

100 AGO eo 475. : 
150 25 ee BOG a5 Ob. eae 
200 2.60. 4 80 37 Ps 
eat 00 ae 30 ae Be 25 oe 


An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pa 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. ; 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his eee for in copic 
should invariably be attached to the first page of S See ey 


The rate of Subscription Ber volumes Ween Sea sates mon oe 
Semi-monthly numbers................ Pistia ee Wek cee pee niey cae oy ine 
_ Monthly numbers..........-... Sed as ats ye ahr a vin cia ars RN oe 2 are 


Remitlances should be made payable to “Washington iN oom of ‘Seine 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Mein ee 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. 

Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other ‘publications. ine 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, prea S that bows is Fae 
within thirty days after date of the ihe oak issue. Sealy: 


“Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent. for $3. 00, - Special rates a Z 
are given to members of ieee societies affiliated ve the Academy. — nee 


JOURNAL 


; OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vou. 17 Marcu 4, 1927 No. 5 


GEOPHYSICS.—The part played by tsostasy in geophysics and geology.' 
Wi.iaM Bowls, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. 


It was about a half-century from the time that the idea of isostasy 
was advanced by Airy and Pratt until there was undertaken a quanti- 
tative test of sufficient magnitude to prove or disprove the theory. 
It was very fortunate that we had in the United States a geodetic prob- 
lem which had to be solved in the interests of surveying, charting, and 
mapping. ‘This problem was the placing of the triangulation of the 
United States on a single spheroid and relating it to a single initial 
station. The testing of isostasy proved to be an incident in this work. 

Prior to the time when the late Dr. John F. Hayford assumed charge 
of the geodetic work of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, 27 years 
ago, there were not sufficient connected triangulation and astronomic 
data to make possible the placing of the triangulation system of this 
country, which is the basis for surveys, maps and charts, in its correct 
relation to the meridian through Greenwich and the plane of the equa- 
tor. Shortly after Hayford took charge of the geodetic work, the 
readjustment of the separate arcs of triangulation in a single network 
was begun. The result of this work was the adoption of what is now 
called the North American Datum. This datum may be defined as 
the Clarke spheroid of 1866, a latitude and longitude for the initial 
triangulation station, Meades Ranch, in central Kansas, and an azi- 
muth from that station to the triangulation station Waldo. 

Hayford had available a sufficient number of astronomic stations to 
make the adjustment of the triangulation to the single datum and he 
soon learned, from an inspection of the data, that it would be possible 


1 Presidential address before the Philosophical Society of Washington, January 8, 
1927. Received January 26, 1927. 


101 


102 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


to make a determination of the shape and size of the earth from the 
triangulation of the United States alone. In order that this might be 
done accurately, he had the astronomic latitudes, longitudes and azi- 
muths observed at many more triangulation stations in the country. 
It is well known that the method of determining the shape and size 
of the earth is to compare the values of degrees of latitude and longi- 
tude, as derived from astronomic observations, with those determined 
by triangulation. The difference between the astronomic and geodetic 
values are due partly to erroneous values for the spheroid used in 
the triangulation computations and partly to the errors of observations 
in the triangulation and astronomic work. There is also present in 
the data an outstanding difference due to the deflection of the vertical 
or station error which caused much trouble to those who had previously 
determined the figure of the earth. Hayford, who was familiar with 
the literature on isostasy, realized that there was a possibility of apply- 
ing corrections to the astronomic data which might eliminate to a 
large extent that part of the difference between the astronomic and 
the geodetic latitudes and longitudes and azimuths which is due to the 
irregular configuration of the earth’s surface and also to the irregular 
densities in the outer portion of the earth. He assumed, in his com- 
putations, various depths to which the irregular densities might extend. 
These depths varied from zero to 200 miles. He found, as a result of 
what he called his first investigation, a limiting depth to these irregular 
densities and, therefore, to the crust, of 113.7 kilometers. A second 
investigation, in which considerably more data were used, resulted in 
a derived depth of the crust of 122.2 kilometers. Later an extensive 
test of isostasy was made by the use of gravity data, and this supple- 
mented and greatly strengthened the conclusions reached from the 
deflections of the vertical. From the gravity data the best value for 
the depth of the earth’s crust is 95 kilometers. An inspection of Hay- 
ford’s work indicated that his depth of compensation derived by the 
use of deflection data in mountain areas only was 97 kilometers. It 
was thought that a mean of these two values, 96 kilometers, is the 
best depth and it has been generally adopted by geodesists, although 
seismologists are inclined to favor a depth of approximately 60 kilo- 
meters and many geologists are of the opinion that 60 kilometers 
most nearly agrees with available geological evidence. We do not 
know just why there should be a limiting depth to the outer portion of 
the earth having residual rigidity, but that there is a change in physical 
characteristics near the 60-mile depth is undoubtedly true. 


MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 103 


It was assumed in both the gravity and deflection computations 
that the compensation of the topography, by deficiency of density 
under land areas and excess of density under the water areas, is dis- 
tributed uniformly from the surface to a limiting depth. ‘This, of 
course, is an artificial assumption, for it is rather difficult to see how 
there could be any uniformity, except in a most general way, in the 
distribution of the deficiencies and excesses of density. It is certain 
that the differences from normal could not start right at the surface of 
the solid earth as was assumed, nor that they broke off suddenly at a 
certain depth below sea level. Innumerable assumptions may be made 
in regard to the distribution of deficiencies and excesses with depth, 
but the chances are that no two investigators would agree on an as- 
sumption. We may however regard the uniform distribution as prac- 
tically a mean of all of the possible distributions, and, therefore, as 
probable as any. It has been found, by test computations, that the 
gravity anomalies can be reduced just about as well by assuming that 
all of the isostatic compensation is distributed in a thin layer at a 
depth of about 30 miles below the earth’s surface as by having the com- 
pensation distributed uniformly. This simply means that no matter 
what the distribution, we must have the center of gravity of the com- 
pensation of approximately 30 miles below sea level. It would be 
interesting if we could learn the actual distribution of the deficiencies 
and excesses that balance the topography, for we then might be able 
to interpret the past history of the earth with more success than is now 
possible. 

The testing of isostasy by the U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey 
has been supplemented by that of investigators in other countries. 
India has taken a leading part and a number of tests have shown that 
its area is in equilibrium. This has also been found to be true for 
Spain, Holland, Norway, southern Canada and the Mackenzie Basin. 
The region around certain islands in the southern Pacific has been 
found to be in equilibrium. (This Pacific work was made possible by 
a grant of funds by the Philosophical Society of Washington.) Wher- 
ever land areas have been tested the prisms of the crust below have 
been found to be in isostatic equilibrium. 

During the last few years gravity observations of a rather high degree 
of accuracy have been made at sea on a submarine by the use of a 
special pendulum apparatus. ‘The instruments were designed and the 
method devised by Dr. Vening Meinesz of the Dutch Geodetic Com- 
mission. Itis along step forward in geodetic work to have a means of 


104 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 5 


determining gravity at sea and data of great value can now be col- 
lected over the oceans by the submarines of many countries. Thisis a 
peace-time work for the submarines that should have much value in 
theoretical science and might, eventually, have a profound influence on 
industry. Much of the wealth of a nation depends on what is in the 
earth below its area. We can only discover what is in the earth and 
how to utilize it by means of geological or geophysical investigations 
and. it is certain that isostasy will be a factor in these endeavors. 

It is well known that for the first mile and a half of the earth’s crust 
the temperature increases at the rate of about 50°C. per mile. We do 
not know what is the temperature gradient lower down, but it is safe 
to make the assumption that this rate of increase is maintained for 
some miles below the earth’s surface. Much has been written on the 
heat of the interior of the earth but it is not necessary to do more than 
touch on this problem here. ‘The pressure on the earth’s materials 
increases with depth to enormous proportions. Is it not possible that 
the change in the character of the earth’s materials from one of residual 
rigidity to one of practically no rigidity is due to the increased heat and 
pressure near the depth of compensation, approximately 60 miles 
below the earth’s surface? 

Reductions of a number of Dr. Meinesz’ gravity stations at sea 
have been made by the U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey. ‘There is 
an indication that gravity over the Atlantic and the Pacific is, on an 
average, greater than gravity at sea level over the land. After the 
reduction for topography and compensation has been made for the sea 
stations there is an outstanding average positive anomaly. This posi- 
tive anomaly might be due to each of several causes or a combination 
of two or more of them. First, it might be due to a lack of accurate 
information as to the configuration of the ocean bottoms for a hundred 
miles or more around each of the stations. This, however, does not 
seem to be a very fruitful source for discovering the cause of the anom- 
alies, for a lack of definite information would tend to give both posi- 
tive and negative anomalies about equal in number. The lack of 
definite suboceanic topographic data would be accidental in its effect. 

The second cause for the positive anomalies might be an actual 
departure of crustal prisms beneath the ocean from the perfect iso- 
static condition. This, however, does not seem to be a very probable 
cause. ‘The earth’s crust has been formed for a billion years or more 
and the central portions of the ocean basins have been less disturbed 
by erosion and sedimentation than have the land areas; therefore, the 


MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 105 


crust beneath the central parts of the ocean is likely to be more 
nearly in equilibrium than elsewhere. The prisms of the crust under 
the oceans have had sufficient time to bring about complete isostatic 
adjustment among themselves and with respect to continental areas. 

The third cause for the positive anomalies may be the irregularities 
in the geoid surface. Over the oceans, with isostasy practically per- 
fect everywhere, the geoid surface should be and probably is closer to 
the center of the earth than are points at sea level on land areas in the 
same latitudes. In a given latitude the value of gravity increases 
toward the center of the earth down to a certain distance below sea 
level. On the other hand it decreases with elevation above the sur- 
face of the earth. A change in elevation of ten feet makes the com- 
puted value of gravity one part in a million greater or smaller. Grav- 
ity values are reduced to the geoid because we do not have sufficient 
data to determine the relation at any particular point between geoidal 
and spheroidal surfaces. A computation was recently made at the 
office of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey by C. H. Swick which 
showed that, in the middle Atlantic the geoid is approximately 8 
meters below the spheroid or to put it in another way, using the sphe- 
roid as a datum, the geoid is 25 meters lower than at a certain point in 
the Appalachian mountains in South Carolina to which the computa- 
tion was referred. Such a difference in the elevation of the geoidal 
surface in relation to the spheroid should make a difference in the value 
of gravity of about 8 partsin a million. The effect on gravity of the 
depression of the geoid over the ocean areas would seem to be system- 
atic and the average gravity anomalies over the oceans should, for any 
large area and large number of stations, tend more to be positive than 
the average anomalies over large land areas. 

The factors in the gravity formula by means of which we obtain the 
gravity at sea level at any latitude are based on the values of gravity 
observed over continental areas. Necessarily, since in this area the 
geoid is above the spheroid, the values of gravity are too small. It 
would seem that a gravity formula to be used for both land areas and 
oceans should be based on observed values well distributed over land 
and water. Then, if we knew the deviation of the geoidal from the 
spheroidal surface, we could apply negative corrections to the com- 
puted values over the land areas and positive corrections to the values 
over ocean areas. Then, the resulting mean anomalies with regard to 
sign would be approximately zero for any large group of stations, 
whether on land or water. 


106 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


The question of the reduction of gravity stations to the geoidal 
surface rather than to the spheroidal is a matter that needs to be in- 
vestigated further with a view to learning just what the gravity 
anomalies at stations at sea, which tend to be positive, may mean in 
terms of isostasy. 

There is another cause for outstanding anomalies at sea just as for 
large anomalies on land; that is the presence of material thatis abnor- 
mally heavy or light in density close to the gravity station, both hori- 
zontally and vertically. 

It would seem from the results of gravity observations taken at sea 
that isostasy in the crust under the oceans is approximately as com- 
plete as under the land. After all corrections have been applied to the 
computed values, including the reduction to the spheroidal surface, 
the remaining anomalies would on an average be quite small as com- 
pared with the effect of a deficiency of crustal material equal to the 
difference between the mass of ocean waters and a mass of surface 
rock of equal volume. 

It seems necessary to conclude from the proof of isostasy that the 
isostatic adjustment or transfer of material from the base of a prism of 
the crust that is being depressed by sediments to the base of a prism of 
the crust that is undergoing erosion must take place below the crustal 
material. The material of the crust itself has residual rigidity and 
maintains its form for geological time. It is, therefore, too strong to 
permit of horizontal flow as a result of disturbance of the isostatic 
equilibrium. Besides, this material has apparently maintained 
through a long period of geological time, different densities in columns 
extending approximately 60 miles below sea level. ‘There is a stress 
difference from high areas towards the low areas of the earth’s surface 
until the depth of compensation has been reached where the stress 
difference is practically zero. ‘Therefore there could not be in the 
upper part of the crust any horizontal movement of material from the 
sedimented area towards the area that is being eroded. 

The principle of isostasy is a proof also that the earth’s crust is 
exceedingly weak. No definite dimensions can be given to the mass 
of material that can be held up by the earth’s crust without isostatic 
adjustment but a test has been made which throws some light on this 
subject. Of the more than 300 stations of the United States, 42 
having elevations of 1000 meters or more were selected for the test. 
For each of the stations, corrections were applied for the topography 
of the world and for the compensation of all of this topography except 
for a disk directly under the station extending horizontally to a dis- 


MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 107 


tance of 17.9 miles. The result of ignoring that compensation was to 
make all of the stations have negative anomalies, except 4, and the 
average anomalies with and without regard to sign became —0.037 
and 0.040 dyne. 

This, it seems, is an indication that we cannot ignore in our gravity 
reductions the compensation of even such small amounts of topography 
without having the anomalies bear a definite relation to the elevation 
of the station. A second test was made with these stations by ignor- 
ing the compensation of the disk of topography extending to a dis- 
tance of 36.5 miles in all directions from the station. In this case all 
of the anomalies except one became negative and the mean values, 
with and without regard to sign, became —0.072 and 0.072. It is 
certain that a disk as large as 1000 meters in thickness and 36.5 miles 
in radius is largely compensated and it is probable from the two tests 
that a disk much smaller than 1000 meters in thickness and 17.9 miles 
in radius does not escape compensation entirely. These tests seem to 
give some idea of the masses which the earth’s crust cannot withstand 
as extra loads. 

Since the earth’s crust is so weak as not to withstand the loading and 
unloading caused by sedimentation and erosion, we must conclude 
that some of the geological theories that are based on the idea of avery 
rigid crust, carrying horizontal thrusts for hundreds and even thou- 
sands of miles, must be modified or abandoned. In this particular, it 
would seem that isostasy has its most important bearing. Isostasy 
in itself is not an active agency; it is a condition of rest and its proof 
leads to the logical conclusion of a very weak crust and thus restricts 
the field within which hypotheses and theories may be formulated to 
account for surface changes. 

There are two ideas of isostasy, one advanced by Airy and the other 
by Pratt. The Airy idea postulates a rather uniform density of crustal 
material or at least a density that varies the same along all radu. 
That view requires a greater thickness of crustal material under con- 
tinental and island areas than under water areas. ‘This theory seems 
logical until we inquire into the cause of mountain uplift and of the 
formation of synclinoria. The advocates of the Airy idea claim that 
the thickening of the crust is due to a crushing and distorting of crus- 
tal material beneath areas which have undergone heavy sedimentation. 
They hold that the crust beneath such areas is weaker than in other 
places. The horizontal forces causing that crushing are supposed 
to have their origin either in the collapsing of the non-cooling crust on 


108 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


a cooling interior, or to an expansion of the crust due to radio-activity 
without any change occurring in the volume of the nucleus, or to a 
collapsing and buckling of the crust on a nucleus which is being com- 
pressed by the overloading of the crustal material. Any one of these 
processes may be going on but it is quite certain that, should there be 
great horizontal forces carried through crustal material, the deepest 
parts of the ocean would be the ones to buckle up rather than areas of 
erosion, the surfaces of which are close to sea level. On the Airy 
hypothesis the crustal material under the oceans must be very much 
thinner than under continental areas and therefore the first to yield. 

The Pratt hypothesis calls for a uniform depth of crust with material 
of different densities in the prisms under surfaces of different elevations. 
If we assume normal densities for the crustal material under the coastal 
plains then we must assume a lighter material under the plateaus 
and mountain areas of the continent and a heavier material under the 
oceans. One objection to the Pratt hypothesis is that changes in 
density of crustal material, greater than those caused by ordinary 
thermal expansion, must be taking place when an area once at or 
close to sea level is thrust upward into a plateau or a mountain system. 
If the mountains are three miles high on an average, which is approxi- 
mately that of the Himalayas, the Pratt hypothesis requires a 5% 
increase in volume and decrease in density in the prisms of the crust 
below. This is on the assumption that the crust extends to a depth of 
60 miles below sea level. On the other hand, if a synclinorium is 
formed where previously there was an area of uplift and erosion, we 
must assume on the Pratt idea a greater contraction of the prism of 
the crust beneath, than could be caused by normal thermal contraction, 
and a decrease in volume. ‘The usual thermal expansion or contrac- 
tion is not enough to account for the major uplifts and depressions. 

The Airy hypothesis and also many of the old hypotheses which are 
based on a collapsing crust, must seek some interior cause of the major 
movements of the earth’s surface. With the Pratt hypothesis, on the 
other hand, erosion and sedimentation seem to be all that is needed to 
start the sequence of events which change the surface configuration. 

An enormous quantity of water has fallen to the earth’s surface dur- 
ing the geological period. The average annual rate of rainfall is 
about 30 inches for the land areas of the world. At that rate there 
would be approximately a mile of rain in 2000 years or somewhat more 
than a half million miles during the sedimentary age which is generally 
supposed to be about 13 billion years long. 


MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 109 


The rate of erosion for the United States as determined by the U. 8. 
Geological Survey is equivalent to one foot of material over our 
3,000,000 square miles of area in 9000 years. At that rate, there would 
be a mile of erosion in about 45,000,000 years. The sedimentary age 
is more than 30 times that long. . This indicates what a tremendous 
amount of work has been done on the earth’s surface in transferring 
material from one place to another. ‘The amount of erosion in any one 
area would not of course be as much as 30 miles in thickness, due to 
the fact that an area is base leveled long before any such amount of 
material can be carried away. On an average, however, erosion may 
have aggregated something like 30 miles or more during the sedimen- 
tary age. Of course, some areas might have been above sea level 
undergoing erosion at one part of the age and during another part 
might have been below sea level-receiving sedimentation. For this 
reason the erosion from any one area during the entire sedimentary 
age might have been only a fraction of the total amount of erosion 
which could have taken place in an area continuously exposed to 
approximately the same conditions now found in the United States. 

Nearly all of the sediments derived from a continent go to shoal 
water and are deposited within about 100 miles of the shore. Only a 
small part goes beyond that limit. These sediments are deposited in 
a most irregular way. The mouth of any particular river may wander 
along the shore or change its position as the Yellow River did in 1852, 
shifting from the south to the north side of the Shantung Peninsula. 
The sediments deposited by a river will be deeper in some places than 
in others and the chances are that they will be the deepest not very 
far off the general coast line of the continent. Farther out to sea, 
they will gradually thin out. If the sediments are being deposited 
in an inland sea they will be thickest close to the shores of the sea. 
All mountain ranges seem to have been uplifted in areas which have 
previously been subjected to very heavy sedimentation. ‘There seems 
to be a direct connection between sedimentation and mountain uplift. 

As material is carried from elevated regions and deposited in lower 
ones, the isostatic balance is disturbed. The weight of the sediments 
depresses the crust beneath them, and the prisms undergoing erosion 
become lighter than normal. The result is that the crust in the area of 
sedimentation tends to sink and to force subcrustal material into 
crustal space, finally pushing up the lightened erosion prism. Even- 
tually a balance is restored between the crust beneath the sedimentary 


area and the crust under the erosion area by movement of subcrustal 
material. 


110 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


There is no such thing as a transfer of subcrustal material from 
below the crust where sedimentation is occurring to the space below 
the crust undergoing erosion. There is merely a pushing aside of 
crustal material as the sediments depress prisms and the result is a 
movement of subcrustal material all the way back to the area of ero- 
sion. The motion is similar to that which would occur in a pail of 
water, in which wooden blocks are floating, if one block is increased in 
mass and the other decreased. ‘The water does not flow from one block 
to another but the whole liquid mass is readjusted. How far below 
the crust the distortion of subcrustal material may occur in the res- 
toration of the isostatic balance is not known. It may be 10, 100 or 
even 1000 miles but probably the thickness of subcrustal material 
affected is not excessive. 

If an area undergoing erosion should lose 1000 feet from the surface 
there will not be that much lowering of the area, for there will have 
occurred an influx of subcrustal material below the base of the prism 
to restore the isostatic equilibrium of the prism affected. The amount 
of lowering will depend on the relative densities of subcrustal and 
crustal material. If the difference in density is 10% then the surface 
would be lowered only 100 feet by the erosion of 1000 feet of material. 
It is thus seen that many times as much material can be eroded from 
an uplifted area before base leveling has been accomplished as there 
was in the original uplift. Of course uplift occurs gradually and as 
soon as an area begins to increase its elevation above the surrounding 
regions, erosion commences, so the mass of the original uplift is more or 
less a hypothetical quantity. 

When an elevated area has been base leveled the source of sedimen- | 
- tation has been shut off and there is quiescence in the erosion and sedi- 
mentary areas. In a later geological period the former erosion area 
becomes a basin in which sediments are deposited. On the other hand, 
the former sedimentary area is uplifted and a mountain system ora 
plateau is formed from which erosion begins. ‘There is thus a sort of 
oscillation between the uplifted and downwarped areas. Such areas 
have, no doubt, changed positions several times during the sedimentary 
age and will continue such changes in the future. 

While there is much sedimentation in lakes and valleys, a great 
part of the material washed down from great elevation is carried to 
sea and deposited near the shores. Eventually a belt of sedimentation 
100 miles or more in width is extended along the whole waterfront of a 
continent. Later this material is raised up into a plateau or mountain 


MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY I aT 


system and then erosion from it occurs. Part of the eroded material 
will work inland, possibly to the regions from which the sediments 
came, but much of it—probably at least half—is carried out to sea. 
Thus there is ever a tendency for the continental area to encroach on 
the ocean area. The process might be exceedingly slow and still 
be considerable in amount during a long geological period. Wehave 
no available evidence to show just what were the original limits of the 
continental areas. In the continental areas should probably be in- 
cluded areas along the shores out to the edges of the continental shelves. 
The continental areas are much larger when thus considered. The 
sediments that are carried to sea force subcrustal material back to- 
wards the areas of erosion. As the density of sediments must be 
from 10% to 20% less than that of the subcrustal material the thick- 
ness of the sediments must be that much greater than the thickness of 
the subcrustal matter displaced and a gradual filling up of the ocean 
areas must be taking place. 

It seems certain that the earth’s surface was very irregular before 
the beginning of the sedimentary age. This is indicated by the heavy 
elements found in greater percentages in the igneous rocks on the ocean 
islands than in the igneous rocks on continents. The specific volumes 
of these igneous rocks for land areas are greater than for the lavas under 
the ocean areas. It seems probable that the earth’s crust was in 
equilibrium before the beginning of sedimentation and, if so, then owing 
to the variation in the specific densities of the igneous rocks composing 
the crust, there should have been some areas standing at higher ele- 
vations than others. When water began to fall to the earth, it col- 
lected in the low areas to form oceans and inland seas. The weight 
of the water then disturbed the isostatic equilibrium of the crust and 
caused a readjustment by the movement of subcrustal material from 
below the water areas towards the land areas. 

I am assuming that, prior to the sedimentary age, the earth’s sur- 
face was too hot to permit water to fall on it and remain there. This 
may not have been the real condition of affairs, for water may already 
have been on the earth with the atmospheric conditions such that there 
were no evaporation and precipitation to cause water to run over the 
land areas. In any event there was a time when rain began to fall. 
Without running water over land areas there could have been no ero- 
sion and sedimentation. It would be rather difficult to see how the 
processes which have been going on to cause the irregularities in the 
earth’s surface could begin to operate if the surface were perfectly 


112 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


level at the beginning of the sedimentary age. The earth must have 
become quite cold, if it were ever in a molten state, by the time that 
the sedimentary age began, and any instability, due to internal causes, 
would certainly have been eliminated before the earth had cooled to 
the point where water could remain on its surface. 

Owing to the fact that the earth’s crust is now in isostatic equilib- 
rium, and that it probably has been so for all of the sedimentary 
age and even for a long time prior to the beginning of that age, we 
must conclude that the strength of the crustal material is very low. 
It will yield or break under the gravitational forces resulting from 
the accumulation of sediments or the unloading of an area by erosion. 
A crust so weak as to remain in isostatic equilibrium is not competent 
to carry thrusts through great distances such as are required in the 
collapse hypothesis. Many who held to that hypothesis prior to the 
establishment of isostasy, now believe in what is generally called the 
“roots of mountains” theory which, in effect, is the idea of isostasy as 
first advanced by Airy. 

In order that crustal material may extend into subcrustal space in 
the form of roots to balance the masses above sea level, it would have 
to be extremely weak under the uplifted areas. If the normal thick- 
ness of the crust were 50 miles and if the difference in density between 
the lower crustal and the subcrustal matter is 15 per cent then the 
extension of the crust into subcrustal space under an uplifted area 
having an average elevation of two miles would be of the order of 15 
miles. The crustal material under the elevated region would have 
been tremendously distorted to have a 50-mile thickness increased to 
approximately 70 miles. Even though there were a weak place in 
the crust, under the sediments which had been laid down prior to the 
uplift, this part of the crust would have been thickened materially 
shortly after the uplift began. Then, instead of a thickness less 
than normal, there would be one greater than normal, and the result 
of continued distorting of the crustal material to the sides of the 
area affected would be to buckle up the crust off to the sides of the 
area which had previously been one of sedimentation. Of course, the 
beginning of the movement of uplift and of depression of a root might 
have heated up the prism of the crust and thus made it weaker than 
normal but it seems to me that the mechanics of the “roots of moun- 
tains’ theory are not very sound. 

There is another weakness in the roots theory. The material of 
the roots which was weak enough to be crushed, distorted and pushed 


~ MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 113 


down into subcrustal space against the hydrostatic pressure of the 
subcrustal material, would seem to be too weak to maintain its new 
position for a long geological time against that hydrostatic pressure. 
Material cannot be both strong and weak and, if the roots can be 
formed by the weakness of the crustal material, they cannot be strong 
enough to maintain themselves against the gravitational forces exerted 
against them. | 

The proof of isostasy and the consequent weakness of crustal mate- 
rial force us to the conclusion that the major changes in surface eleva- 
tion must be due to a change in volume of the crustal material directly 
below the affected areas. ‘The isostatic investigations have shown 
that the most probable depth to which the crustal material extends 
is about 60 miles. The temperature gradient found from measure- 
.ments of temperatures in wells and mines is approximately 50°C. per 
mile. ‘The gradient varies greatly from place to place, but this is a 
fair average. We may assume then a temperature gradient of about 
1°C. per 100 feet. If the earth were maintained in isostatic equilib- 
rium to a very high degree of perfection, then as sediments were 
deposited along the coast or in lakes or valleys, the crust would sink 
down under the added weight. It is not known just how thick the 
sedimentary beds must be before there is an isostatic yielding of the 
crust below but if, say, a hundred feet of sediments causes an adjust- 
ment, then each element of the crust below would be pushed down 
nearly one hundred feet into regions which are about 1° hotter than 
the space they formerly occupied. While sedimentation progresses 
at a rather slow rate yet the conduction of heat through rock is sup- 
posed to be even slower. 
_ The normal thermal expansion of a prism of rock 60 miles in length 
per one degree Centigrade is about 10 feet. The coefficient of expan- 
sion on which this calculation is based is that of marble. For a 
thousand feet of sediments the change in temperature due to the 1so- 
static yielding of the crust might result in a subsequent uplift of 100 
feet. It is believed that many of the small vertical oscillations of the 
surface of the earth have been caused by the thermal expansion and 
contraction of the crustal material after it was pushed down under 
sediments to hotter regions or raised to colder regions by isostatic 
adjustment following erosion. | 

The maximum thickness of sedimentary beds for any one period is 
generally believed to be about eight miles, approximately 40,000 feet. 
The expansion of the crustal material depressed eight miles due to 


114 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


thermal change would be about 4000 feet. That is, the surface would 
be raised approximately that amount when the depressed crustal mate- 
rial had taken on the temperature normal to the new position. But 
4000 feet is a small elevation, as compared with what we have in many 
mountain regions. The Himalayas have a maximum elevation of 
about 29,000 feet while the average elevation is close to three miles. 
The Andes have an average elevation of about three miles. We there- 
fore must look for some cause other than thermal contraction and 
expansion of crustal material to cause surface changes. By a process 
of elimination we are forced to conclude that a change of density and 
volume is brought about by chemical or physical processes in addition 
to that caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Just how this 
occurs it is impossible to say, but there are numerous cases of two 
minerals having exactly the same chemical composition but different 
volumes and densities, a notable example being diamonds and graphite. 
Both are pure carbon, but the diamond has a density of 3.52 and the 
graphite only 2.25. The difference is about 36% of the density of the 
diamond. It may be that there is some rearrangement of the elements 
as a result of changes of temperature and pressure which would cause 
a change of density of 3% in the prism of crustal material, and that is 
sufficient to raise the surface as much as two miles. 

We have no proof that expansion and contraction actually take 
place in the earth’s crust but a careful consideration of the mechanics 
of the earth seems to make these the most probable causes of surface 
changes. Opposition to this explanation of surface changes has been 
raised by a number of students of the earth because of their difficulty 
in explaining on this basis the great horizontal movements which have 
occurred in the material near the earth’s surface. Undoubtedly there 
have been extensive horizontal movements but the writer maintains 
that these can be explained more easily on the theory that they are 
incidental to the vertical uplift rather than that they are the major 
movements and that the vertical movements are incidental. In prac- 
tically all cases where a horizontal movement has been detected in 
exposed strata, the thickness of the strata involved was small; probably 
one or two miles is about the maximum thickness of material that 
has been overthrust for any considerable distance. Usually the thick- 
ness of material involved in the overthrust is a half mile or less and in 
some cases only a few hundred feet. It is difficult to see how a thin 
veneer of stratified rock could be moved horizontally for the many 
miles that some have estimated the movement to be. The moving 


“MARCH 4, 1927 BOW1E: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 115 


material must overcome frictional and shearing resistances and if 
the uplift is due to the action of regional forces the overthrust material 
must be pushed uphill for it is in this direction that the movement 
would occur according to the collapse hypothesis. 

On the collapse hypothesis the crust that is weak enough to be dis- 
torted by the action of horizontal forces carried through long distances 
must be strong enough to push up a mountain system and to force 
down into subcrustal space sufficient material to form a root that will 
support the mass which is above sea level. ‘These horizontal forces, 
presumably, would be acting through the whole crust rather than 
merely in the outer layers. IJ cannot conceive of blocks of material 
a mile or two in thickness being pushed overland distances of 10, 20 
or more miles as seems to be required to explain certain cases of over- 
thrusting. Of course, it is difficult to explain an overthrust of 50 
miles on any hypothesis and the isostatist has little or nothing to sug- 
gest, except that the field evidence regarding the overthrusting and the 
extent of horizontal movements in general may have been somewhat 
misinterpreted. One is likely to seein data those things which support 
the views that are considered authentic. It is my belief that as much 
evidence, probably more, could be collected in the field in favor of the 
vertical uplift theory as may be obtained in support of the view that 
the horizontal movement is the predominating one. 

It is probable that the direction of the overthrust and of much of the 
horizontal movement of material is from the center of the uplifted mass 
outward towards its edges. If this should be found to be true then 
the Pratt theory of isostasy would be much strengthened. 

In Daly’s recent book, The Mobile Earth, he mentions a block of 
material resting on the plains of Montana many miles to the eastward 
of the uplifted area from which it came. That is a clear indication 
that the overthrust was from the uplifted regions towards the low areas 
to the sides. When the direction of overthrusts has been discovered, 
we shall be able to make greater progress in the solution of the problem 
as to how the uplift occurs. 

A Pratt isostatist naturally leans towards the idea of a very weak 
crust with expansion and contraction of crustal material as the major 
causes of surface changes in elevation. A belief in the Pratt isostasy 
leads one to think that earthquakes are the result of four major proc- 
esses. Anearthquake is generally accepted as being due to the break- 
ing of rock. This rock must be within the crustal space for the sub- 
crustal material is too plastic to break but instead it yields and 


116 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 5 


conforms to changes without rupture. The crustal material itself must 
vary somewhat in plasticity as its lower limit is approached. The 
lower crustal material is under a tremendous load and movement in 
the lower half of the crust would be somewhat plastic with very little 
breaking of material. Seismologists have not yet determined with 
any degree of definiteness the depths at which the earthquakes occur, 
but the late Prof. Omori of Japan, who was recognized as one of the 
foremost seismologists of all time, claimed that he had not found any 
earthquake focus lower than 27 kilometers. I do not know whether 
his methods of determining the depth were adequate to secure exact- 
ness but his depths are very acceptable to the Pratt isostasists. 

The four major causes of earthquakes would seem to be: 

Ist. The breaking of crustal material caused by the weight of 
sediments. | 

2nd. The breaking of rock as the crustal material is pushed up 
under an area of erosion to restore the isostatic balance. 

rd. The breaking of the rocks as the result of the expansion of the 
crustal material under an area which had previously undergone heavy 
sedimentation. 

Ath. The breaking of rock caused by the contraction of crustal 
material under an area which had previously undergone erosion during 
an extended time. 

With the earth’s crust in isostatic equilibrium, it is difficult to see 
how any material from subcrustal space could work its way through 
the entire crust and be exuded at the surface as a lava overflow. 
The pressure exerted by a column of liquid material extending from — 
the earth’s surface to the bottom of the crust would be enormous, and 
this pressure would be sufficient to fracture rock and make a lava 
overflow at some point whose altitude is much iess than the top of a 
voleano. According to the Pratt theory of isostasy the overflow of 
lava from a fissure or from a volcano is probably caused by an expan- 
sion of the crustal material below. No extra mass has been added to 
the prism of the crust involved. It is merely a case of fluid material 
from some depth within the crust being raised to the surface, increasing 
the volume of the prism and decreasing the density. Whatever proc- 
esses cause the uplift of a mountain system undoubtedly cause the 
voleano and the lava overflow. 

It would seem that the earth is gradually losing heat as a result of 
erosion and sedimentation. As the eroded material is carried away 
the prism of the crust beneath is forced up to restore the equilibrium. 


MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 117 


Erosion may have occurred to the extent of five or ten miles beforean 
uplifted area is base leveled. In such a case every element of the 
crust beneath would have been raised to a position approximately 
equal to that distance and would have been brought to a region having 
a much lower temperature than that of the region from which it came. 
Eventually there would be a loss of heat at the surface and the material 
of the prism would be cooled down by 100° to 300°C., depending on 
how far the crustal material had been pushed up. That heat lost 
would not be compensated by any heat gained in other places. The 
areas of heavy erosion later become syneclinoria into which sediments 
are deposited. The sediments accentuate the synclinoria resulting in 
a pushing down of crustal material into hotter regions. Eventually 
this material takes on the temperature of its new position, expands 
to form mountain systems or plateaus and again loses heat at the sur- 
face. What maintains the heat of the earth no one knows. There 
have been many theories, including the one now advocated by many 
that the disintegration of radioactive materials replaces heat in suffi- 
cient amounts to cause the surface of the earth to remain at a practi- 
cally constant temperature. Be this as it may, we cannot escape the 
conclusion that the raising up of crustal material under areas of erosion 
brings hotter material to the surface with a consequent loss of heat. 

It is rather difficult to see how a volcano could come into being 
out in the middle of an ocean but, in general volcanoes are merely a 
part of a region that is higher than the surrounding bottoms of the 
ocean. The Hawaiian Islands, for instance, occupy a long stretch 
extending for some 1200 kilometers while the average width of the 
pedestal on which the islands rest is of the order of magnitude of 140 
kilometers. There must have been light crustal material where the 
islands now are at the beginning of the sedimentary age and the up- 
lifts and subsidences of the Hawaiian area have been the result of 
erosion, sedimentation and to a certain extent of the accumulation of 
rock from coral growth. It is very difficult to explain a chain of 
islands out in an ocean without assuming under it crustal material 
which has been lighter than normal density from the beginning of the 
sedimentary age. 

This brief sketch of the relation of isostasy to geological and geo- 
physical problems is only the skimming of the surface of atremendous 
problem. It is hoped that much thought and investigation by those 
interested in the subject will supplement the very meager data which 
we now possess. 


118 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


407TH MEETING 


The 407th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, October 28, 1925, Vice- 
president HmweEtTT presiding. 

Program: C.K. WentwortH and HE. T. Apreu: A source-analysis of geologic 
literature on North America, 1921-22. 

N. H. Darton: Pre-Paleozoic surface of Arizona and New Mezico. 

R. S. Bassuer: Mississippian rocks in northern Tennessee. 


408TH MEETING 


The 408th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Interior Building, 
November 11, 1925, President StmrPpHENSON presiding. The Secretary an- 
nounced the election to corresponding membership of W. A. NELSON, State 
Geologist of Virginia. 

Program: A. H. RepFiELp: Petroleum possibilities of Germany. 

H. S. Wasuineton: The 1925 eruption of Santorini. 

H. T. Stearns: The volcanoes of Japan in 1924. In Japan and the islands 
nearby there are 74 active volcanoes which are aligned in narrow curved zones 
forming arcs that follow closely the crests of a series of great folds in the crust 
of the earth. It is generally supposed that the magma supplying the vol- 
canoes exists in rifts or fissures that coincide largely with the axes of the folds. 
The chief voleanic zones are as follows: the Kurile, the Nasu, the Kampu, 
the Fuji, the Hakusan, the Aso, and the Kirishima zones. 

The Kurile zone comprises a line of small volcanic islands which extends 
from Kamchatka to Volcano Bay on the southern side of the island of Hok- 
kaido. Three eruptions on this zone during 1924 were recorded by a steamer. 
On February 15, 1924, a huge cauliflower cloud was seen rising from a volcano 
on Raikokejima, and at the same time two submarine eruptions occurred not 
far from Matau Island. } 

The Nasu zone extends from the islands a few miles north of Hokkaido 
through Volcano Bay to Fujiyama. During 1924 there were gaseous emana- 
tions sometimes accompanied by light ash falls from the crater of Asamayama 
on this zone. Parallel with and west of the Nasu zone is the Kampu zone. 
No volcanoes on this zone were in eruption during 1924. 

The Fuji zone extends south from Fujiyama to the Bonin Islands. A 
small cinder cone in the center of the crater of Mihara, the central cone of 
the voleano Oshima located in the Bay of Tokyo, emitted huge volumes of 
steam during the writer’s visit on December 16, 1924. At the same time 
heavy blue fumes were being discharged with a hissing sound at a high tem- 
perature. No glow from molten lava was visible in the daylight. The 
lava flow on the floor of the crater had not entirely cooled for heat rose from 
many cracks in its surface. 

The Hakusan zone extends from Kyushu along the nortbern side of Hondo, 
the mainland of Japan. On January 23, 1925, Shiranesan (Kusatsu) located 
on this zone, emitted a huge volume of smoke and on the 24th, a heavy 
explosion occurred with loud rumblings, and ash fell over the surrounding 
area. 


MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 119 


Aso-dake, on the Aso zone, which crosses Kyushu from northeast to south- 
west, had one explosion on January 9, 1924. On January 6, 1925, it again 
ejected ashes which caused damage to the farms at its base. 

The Kirishima zone extends from Kirishima southwestward toward 
Formosa. Sakurajima was in repose during the writer’s visit in 1924, 
although it was reported that a fumerole in the summit crater occasionally 
sent up a column of white steam. Kirishima volcano was not active during 
1924, although on December 21, 1924, a hot fumerole inside of a small cone 
existed on the southeast wall of the summit crater. (Auwthor’s abstract.) 


JOINT MEETING 


A joint meeting of the Society and the WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
was held at the Cosmos Club, November 19, 1925, President KrLLoaa of the 
ACADEMY presiding. 

Program: Professor Witut1aAm H. Hopsss, of the University of Michigan: 
The glacial anticyclones—the poles of the atmospheric circulation. 


409TH MEETING 


The 409th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, November 25, 1925, 
President STEPHENSON presiding. The Secretary announced the death of 
J. K. Hinumrs, a founder and active member of the Society, the resignation 
of L. B. Pusry from active membership, and the election to active member- 
ship of E. R. Pout, GeorcrE TunELL, T. B. Notan, H. W. Hoots, and 
P. G. Nurtrina. 

Program: C. KE. Resspr: Human and geographic aspects of the 1925 Smith- 
sonian-Princeton Expedition to Europe. 

E. O. Unricu: Huropean Paleozoic stratigraphy and stratigraphers. 


410TH MEETING 


The 410th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, December 9, 1925, 
President STEPHENSON presiding. Vice-president Hewett took the chair 
during the presentation of the address of the retiring president. This address, 
entitled ‘‘Major features in the geology of the ‘‘Atlantic and Gulf Coastal Plain,” 
was printed in This JouRNAL (vol. 16, pp. 460-480). 


THIRTY-THIRD ANNUAL MEETING 


The thirty-third annual meeting was held at the Cosmos Club after the 
adjournment of the 410th meeting, President STEPHENSON presiding. 

The annual report of the secretaries was read and approved. The Treas- 
urer presented his annual report showing an excess of assets over liabilities 
of $1,137.49 (book value) on December 9, 1925. The auditing committee 
reported that the books of the Treasurer were correct. The Amendment 
to the Standing Rules restoring dues of active members to $2.00 was unani- 
mously carried. The Society accepted, upon recommendation of the Council, 
the anonymous offer, through Kirk Bryan, of three prizes of $10 each for 
excellence of presentation of papers during 1926. 

The results of balloting for officers for the ensuing year was as follows: 
President: N. H. Darton; Vice-Presidents: W. T. Lnn, Cuarues Butts; 
Treasurer: J. B. Reesipe, JR.; Secretaries: J. D. Sears, W. P. Wooprine; 
Members-at-Large-of-the-Council: B. S. Buturr, 8. R. Capps, G. R. MAns- 
FIELD, O. KE. Mernzier, C. N. FENNER; Nominee as Vice-President of Wash- 
ington Academy of Sciences representing the Geological Society: L. W. 
STEPHENSON. 


120 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


411TH MEETING 


The 411th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Interior Building, 
January 13, 1926, President Darton presiding. 

Program: W. W. Rusny: Stream piracy in northeastern Wyoming. Ex- 
treme northeastern Wyoming is drained by the Little Powder, Little Missouri, 
and Belle Fourche rivers. Little Missouri River, the central of the three, has 
the lowest gradient and field evidence indicates it has been and will be robbed 
by both the neighboring streams. The ancient capture of the headwaters of 
the Little Missouri by the Belle Fourche River at Stoneville Flats is well 
known. Old terraces and topographic relations seem to show that a tribu- 
tary of Little Missouri River formerly flowed northwestward along the 
present course of Belle Fourche River between Stoneville Flats and Belle 
Fourche, 8. Dak. This capture is attributed chiefly to foreshortening of the 
Cheyenne River asa result of the advance of Pleistocene glaciation, although 
the diversion of the lower Little Missouri River by an ice sheet had a slight 
additional effect. Field evidence indicates that the resulting rejuvenation 
worked slowly upstream and that the capture may have occurred at about the 
end of the Pleistocene. Tributaries of Belle Fourche River will eventually 
divert the remaining headwaters of Little Missouri River. 

The lithology of old gravels, the present stream gradient, and the land 
forms near the head of Belle Fourche River, and the sharp bend and terraces 
of Powder River suggest that the present Belle Fourche River formerly rose 
in the Big Horn Mountains, but was beheaded near Pumpkin Buttes by 
Powder River. This capture, which possibly occurred at the beginning of 
the Pleistocene, may be the result of greater precipitation in the Powder- 
Yellowstone drainage system than in the ancient Little Missouri system. 

Little Powder River is preparing to behead the Little Missouri and perhaps 
the Belle Fourche River. The latter case of incipient piracy may be a read- 
justment following the capture at Stoneville Flats. (Author’s abstract.) 

Krr« Bryan: The ‘Palouse soil’ problem of the Columbia Plateau, Wash- 
ington. One of the conspicuous features of the Columbia Plateau is the 
mantle of soil which blankets the surface of the underlying rocks. The fine- 
grained unconsolidated material is in places 100 to 150 feet thick, and it is 
intimately dissected into hills by miniature ramifying valleys. Since this 
material is everywhere of about the same thickness and conforms to the gen- 
eral slope of the plateau, it is a natural assumption that it once formed a 
continuous cover and has since been dissected. With the assistance of a 
number of colleagues, somewhat scattered information about this so-called 
soil has been brought together and an analysis of the origin and age of the 
material made. In general the upper 3 to 6 feet of the material is a top skin 
or veneer that throughout the plateau is largely wind-borne. It rests on 
various sorts of material and the underlying mass that forms the inner core 
of the hills is generally unexposed and unknown. At various places there has 
been identified (1) laminated silt; (2) reddish compact silt with limy con- 
cretions, apparently an old loess; (3) yellow clay that microscopic examination 
shows to be an old loess; (4) ancient glacial till. In places in the eastern part 
of the plateau the yellow clay, or old loess rests on thin decomposed basalt 
but in the western part of the plateau the more sandy mass rests on nearly 
fresh basalt. Here below the general level there is a terrace covered by similar 
wind-borne soil in which the bones of an elephant were found. On this 
account, and in view of the association of the material with glacial till it is 
evident that the ‘“‘Palouse soil” is of Pleistocene age. 


MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 121 


A review of the known facts in regard to present dust storms indicates that 
these remarkable meteorological phenomena have been in operation only for 
the past few decades since the grass cover of the plateau was broken by 
ploughing. If the present rate of fall of dust as estimated for Spokane had 
been in operation since Wisconsin time there would be 16 inches of dust on 
the Wisconsin terrace whereas this terrace is free of dust. Similarly the pre- 
Wisconsin till plains and terraces (Spokane glaciation of Bretz) are almost 
free of dust. A still older till has a cover of 16 inches to 3 feet of loess and in 
other places the cover on the ancient tillmay be greater. Therefore, the time 
of formation of main loess (“‘Palouse soil’) seems to be far back in Pleisto- 
cene time. (Author’s abstract.) 

LAURENCE LAForGE: The recognition of peneplains. 


412TH MEETING 


The 412th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, January 27, 1926, Presi- 
dent Darton presiding. The Secretary announced the resignation from 
active membership of Miss Lucy M. Jonzs. 

Program: W. T. ScHALLER: The mineralogy of the Tintic Standard mine, 
Utah. The oxidation of silver-rich galena, silver-rich tetrahedrite, pyrite, 
and other sulphides, has yielded a number of unusual and rare minerals 
chiefly sulphates. Among these may be mentioned kornelite, ferropallidite, 
plumbojarosite, and argentojarosite. The plumbojarosite has formed, in 
part, directly from cerussite, but no evidence was seen that the argento- 
jarosite had formed in any way but by the commingling of sulphate solutions 
of silver and iron. Some galena, partly oxidized to anglesite, forms a 
eutectic-like structure with it. Chains of orthorhombic sulphur crystals 
(similar to artificial ones) suggest paramorphism from earlier higher tempera- 
ture monoclinic crystals. Rectangular casts suggest the one time presence 
ofanhydrite. Most of the minerals mentioned probably formed from rather 
hot solutions. (Author’s abstract.) 

H. G. Fercuson: Regional relations of Nevada ore deposits: The two-fold 
division of Nevada ore deposits into those formed at depth associated with 
granitic intrusive and those formed near the surface in connection with 
Tertiary volcanics has long been recognized. Evidence is accumulating 
- suggesting that each of these groups should be again divided. The great 
Sierra batholith intruded at about the close of the Jurassic carries on its 
western flank satellitic batholiths with which are associated the quartz veins 
which have yielded the great California gold production. On the eastern 
flank the geologic conditions are similar but the veins accompanying the 
satellitic batholiths, though similar in appearance and mineralogy to those of 
California, have yielded no important gold production. Owing to favorable 
climatic conditions, however, these western Nevada veins have under- 
gone secondary enrichment in silver, and it was from these rich secondary 
ores that the great silver production of such camps as Austin and Belmont 
was obtained. These were for the most part exhausted many years ago. 
Replacement and contact deposits are relatively rare. The Sierra region 
yields a very small percentage of the country’s production of base metals, 
chiefly copper. A very different condition prevails in the interior region. 
Here intrusions of Eocene age have associated with them deposits, chiefly 
of the replacement type, valuable chiefly for base metals, and the vein type of 
deposit though present is not predominant. 


122 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 5 


The line of division between the two prevailing types seems to pass through 
the middle of Nevada. To the west the deposits are mostly of the vein type, 
rich in silver near the outcrop but disappointing in depth. In the eastern 
part of the State on the other hand the rich secondary silver ore at the out- 
crop in many places passed in depth to workable lead-silver ore. The in- 
ference is drawn that the Western Nevada veins deposits allied with the 
Sierra batholith were formed at about the close of the Jurassic, whereas 
those in the eastern part of the State, showing strong affinities with the Rocky 
Mountain type, should be tentatively placed in the Eocene. This is not in 
accord with Lindgren’s suggestion that the locus of the Cordilleran intrusions 
moved gradually eastward but implies two distinct and widely separated 
periods of batholithic intrusion. 

The proposed division of the near-surface deposits is based largely on 
work in the region of the Tonopah and Hawthorne degree sheets. Here 
certain deposits such as those of Tonopah and Aurora are associated with 
lavas of pre-Esmeralda age, that is, older than the upper Miocene. Man- 
hattan, Round Mountain, Goldfield, Bodie, and a number of less important 
deposits are definitely post-Esmeralda in age. The deposits of the Tonopah- 
Aurora type are so widespread over Nevada that it is surmised that this was 
the major period of late Tertiary mineralization. The characteristic features 
are strong veins, the presence of primary argentite and commonly other silver 
minerals, free gold heavily alloyed with silver, usually about equal parts by 
weight, and often fairly abundant base metal sulphides. Although many 
of these are properly gold camps if value of output is considered, in all cases the 
weight of silver produced greatly exceeds that of the gold. This type is 
widespread; it is well represented in Mexico, New Zealand, and the East 
Indies and has been called the Pacific type of ore deposit. Of the relatively 
few deposits with predominant gold, Bodie, Goldfield, Manhattan, and Round 
Mountain are known to be of post-Esmeralda age, and it is inferred that 
further work may place the others there also. These deposits do not form 
as distinct a class as the pre-Esmeralda group. In most of the less important 
and also Round Mountain, Bullfrog, Oatman, and part of the Manhattan 
district, free gold is the only important metallic mineral, the amount of 
sulphides being very small and barren. In Goldfield, and part of the Man- 
hattan district, however, complex mineral associations prevail. Commonly, 
the veins are less persistent and less well defined than those of the earlier 
type. Primary bonanzas of great richness may occur, but the productive 
depth is on the average less than in the pre-Esmeralda silver deposits. | 

Although it will be many years before the succession of lavas throughout 
the Great Basin is well enough known to speak with any certainty, the 
available evidence points to a widespread mineralization prior to the Upper 
Miocene. This is allied in type and therefore possibly in age with deposits in 
all regions bordering the Pacific. The post-Miocene deposits are of different 
character and possibly only of local importance. It appears, therefore, 
that there have been four distinct periods of major mineralization in Nevada. 
The first is closely allied to the Sierra gold type, but unfortunately deficient 
in gold, of post-Jurassic age, and prevails in the western part. The second 
which might be called the Rocky Mountain type, prevails in the eastern part 
of the state, and is probably of Eocene age. Mineralization of probable 
Miocene age with predominant silver was widespread, while a later period 
probably early Phocene, has yielded nelabatrely few deposits of importance. 
(A uthor’s abstract.) . 


- MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 123 


W.G. ALDEN: The Gros Ventre landslide of June, 1925. On June 23, 1925, 
there occurred in the valley of Gros Ventre River, about 35 miles south of 
Yellowstone Park and near the east side of Jackson Hole, Wyo., a landslide 
which carried down from the adjacent slope and deposited in the valley many 
million cubic yards of rock debris. This slide, which occurred within a space 
of a few minutes, formed a dam about 225 feet high and half a mile long, 
which completely blocked the river and so impounded the water as to form a 
lake 4 or 5 miles long, with a maximum width of about three-quarters of a 
mile. This lake submerged much of three private ranches and one ranger 
station of the Teton National Forest, and has created a situation more or less 
perilous to ranches and villages all the way down the Gros Ventre and Snake 
River valleys. This appears to have had no connection with the Montana 
earthquake which occurred four days later. The Gros Ventre valley in this 
part is cut several thousand feet into upturned Cretaceous, Jurassic, and 
Triassic rocks. The slide occurred at the heavily wooded north end of the 
long north spur of Sheep Mountain, one of the northern peaks of the Gros 
Ventre Range. It was probably due to the saturation of clay shale inter- 
bedded with the Carboniferous limestones and sandstones as the result of 
heavy rains and melting snows. The strata at this place, on the south side, 
dip into the valley at angles of 18 to 21 degrees, and the movement was 
obliquely down the dip. The upper end of the slide is at the top of the slope 
about 13 miles south of the river and 1700 to 2200 feet above it. The front 
of the great mass of rock debris and forest trees plunged across the half-mile- 
wide valley bottom and piled up 400 feet high against the red sandstone cliff 
on the north, then settled back somewhat. The flooded stream rapidly 
filled the basin thus formed and in about three weeks the water rose 220 feet 
back of the dam. It is estimated that about 150,000 acre feet of water was 
impounded over 2000 acres of land. As the inflow decreased, seepage began 
and increased to 400 or 500 second feet, so that the dam was not overtopped. 
It was reported late in January, 1926, that no particular change in conditions 
had taken place up to that time. The great point of interest is as to what will 
occur next spring, inasmuch as it seems certain that the dam must be over- 
topped if there is any such spring flood as occurred in 1918 when the flow at 
Kelly, four miles below the site of the dam, reached a peak of 6000 second 
feet and averaged 4000 second feet for two weeks. (Author’s abstract.) 


413TH MEETING 


The 413th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 10, 1926, 
Vice-president LEE presiding. 

Program: R. T. Evans: Erosion forms in Zion National Park, Utah. 
W. T. Len: Some scientific aspects of the Mammoth Cave region, Kentucky. 


414TH MEETING 


The 414th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 24, 1926, 
President Darton presiding. The Secretary announced the election to 
active membership of PaRKINSON PoPiINokr and Miss TaisiaA STADNICHENKO. 
W. T. SCHALLER was awarded by ballot the prize of $10 for excellency in 
presentation of papers during the first third of 1926. 

Program: H. W. Hoots: Geologic features of the southern end of the San 
Joaquin Valley, California. The San Emigdio Mountains lie at the southern 
end of the San Joaquin Valley. They trend in an east-west direction and, 


124 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


together with the Tehachapi Mountains farther east, form that elevated area 
which connects the southern end of the Sierra Nevada range with the Coast 
Ranges. The geologic character of the San Emigdio Mountains, broadly 
considered, is intermediate between that of the Sierra Nevada range and that 
of the eastern Coast Ranges of this region in that it has a central mass of 
granodiorite which connects with the Sierra Nevada, and a northern foothill 
belt of highly disturbed Tertiary sediments which broadens progressively 
westward. The San Andreas fault lies south of the San Emigdio Mountains, 
trends 8 80° E, and separates the granodiorite from a much folded and faulted 
mass of Tertiary strata. Approximately 24,000 feet of Tertiary and Quater- 
nary sediments, ranging in age from Eocene to late Pleistocene, lies north 
of the granodiorite. These rocks, consisting of massive sandstone and con- 
glomerate, soft shale, volcanics, and coarse fanglomerate are folded into 
pronounced anticlines and synclines with east-west trend and are broken 
by many faults. All major folds, without exception, have their north-dipping 
limbs the steeper with inclinations of 45°-60° in contrast to south-dipping 
limbs of 20°-380°. The major faults, one of which appears to be an overthrust 
of low angle south dip, also trend east-west, approximately parallel to the 
San Andreas fault farther south, and have stratigraphic displacements as 
great as 5,000 feet; minor faults, apparently with vertical planes, trend either 
northeastward or northwestward. It is considered likely that these struc- 
tural features have resulted from northward thrusts from the south during 
late Tertiary and Quaternary time similar in effect to those which, during the 
earthquake of 1906, produced relatively northward movement of the fault- 
block west of the San Andreas rift. That movement of this western fault- 
block has actually been northward during the past 30-40 years is attested by 
recent resurveys of the Coast Ranges by the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. 
Wheeler Ridge, the topographic expression of one of the most prominent east- 
west trending asymmetrical anticlines, lies at the northern edge of the foothills 
directly in front of the major fault which appears to be of low-angle overthrust | 
type. Study of its structural details and probable origin leads one to believe 
that it has been subjected to thrusts from the south since the anticline, 
developed in late Pliocene and Pleistocene strata, was formed. In conclu- 
sion, the stratigraphy, pronounced development of solifluction and large 
earth-flows, and the physiographic history of a part of the foothill region were 
briefly described. (Author’s abstract.) 

F. L. Hess: The source and use of cesium. Pollucite is the only known 
cesium-bearing mineral and it has been found only on the Island of Elba, . 
where it was discovered and occurs as a mineralogical curiosity. At Buck- 
field, Maine, it has been found in comparatively large quantity and a few 
thousand pounds has been mined. The pegmatite which has been mined 
during the last summer by W. D. Nevel and previously by Perien 8. Dudley, 
is an almost diagrammatic representation of the theory brought out by the 
writer! of the gradual growth of pegmatites from fine grained masses to those 
containing huge individual crystals or masses of single minerals. <A dike of 
coarse granite about 15 feet wide cuts across the gneiss on Hodgeon Hill, 
33 miles southwest of Buckfield. Following a crack in the granite and lying 
close to one side is a mass of pegmatite, following a rather irregular course 
and varying in width from 8 or 4 feet to perhaps 10 feet. In places the 


1 Hess, Frank L. The natural history of pegmatites. Engin. and Min. Journ. 
120: 289-298. 1925. . 


MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 125 


pegmatite is composed of irregular masses of microcline, biotite, muscovite 
and quartz. Within these masses are bodies of rock which are composed of 
crystallized microcline, individual crystals of which may be 5 or 6 inches 
through. With the crystallized microcline, is, in places, clevelandite (platy 
albite) cassiterite, blue and green tourmalines, colorless pink and blue beryl 
of indistinct crystal form, and pollucite. The pollucite is usually without 
form, partly glassy and partly crushed to a powder. The pollucite is found 
only where the microcline is crystallized and with the higher temperature 
minerals just noted. It is usually surrounded by a coat of lepidolite about 
1/32 inch thick, normal to the pollucite, and veinlets of pale lepidolite cut the 
pollucite. At places in the pegmatite radial veinlets not much thicker than 
a hair are filled with arsenopyrite and at the ends of the rays are crystals of 
black tourmaline. Cracks running into the dike show incipient pegmati- 
tization. (Author’s abstract.) 

C. P. Ross: Some features of the Paleozoic stratigraphy of Idaho. A large 
part of Idaho has now been geologically studied in reconnaissance fashion 
and detailed work has been done in a number of localities. Although much 
of the latter is still unpublished it was available in the preparation of the 
present paper. Only in the southwestern part of the State is it likely that 
facts of major stratigraphic importance await discovery, although a multitude 
of details are still unknown in almost all parts of the State. In spite of the 
bewildering rapidity of change in the Paleozoic stratigraphy within short 
distances in many parts of the State, it has been possible to construct more 
or less tentative stratigraphic columns for nearly all parts of Idaho and to 
work out some of the broader features of the Paleozoic stratigraphy. During 
much of the Paleozoic a narrow sea extended north from its connection with 
the Pacific near Lat. 35 N, along the present position of the Rocky Mountain 
Cordillera, covered much of eastern Idaho, and had frequent connection with 
the Arctic Ocean. The Cambrian sea in Idaho extended north as far as the 
45th parallel and west beyond the 115th meridian. A sea also covered part 
of northern Idaho in the Cambrian but probably had no connection within 
the State with that in the south. The other Paleozoic seas did not extend as 
far north or west as did the Cambrian, but deposited many thousands of feet 
of sediments in southeastern and southcentral Idaho. The only known 
Paleozoic beds in western Idaho are of Carboniferous age. In the Permian, 
at least, the sea here had a connection with that in eastern Idaho. This con- 
nection may have been across the central part of the State, where volcanic 
strata of supposed Permian age have recently been found, but more probably 
was across southern Idaho or northern Nevada. The position of the shoreline 
probably shifted almost constantly during the Paleozoic but in general cor- 
responded fairly closely with the eastern boundary of the so-called Idaho 
batholith, a fact which is probably of structural significance. (Author’s 
abstract.) 

Program: M. R. CampsBetu: The meaning of cut-off meanders in tidal 
streams. The presence of stream meanders and of cut-off meanders on the 
tidal streams of Virginia raises the question of the conditions under which 
such features will be developed and consequently their value in interpreting 
the geomorphic history of the region in which they occur. A study of the 
lower Mississippi, the San Jacinto River below Houston, Texas, and the 
James River from City Point to its mouth shows that as soon as a stream 
reaches tide water it loses most, if not all of the features and habits of a normal 
stream and in this condition there is little or no tendency to form meanders 


126 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 5 


or to cut them off. If this conclusion is correct, the presence of meanders or 
meander scars at any particular level indicates that at the time that level or 
terrace was formed the stream was above tide level and behaved as a normal 
stream behaves. The application of this principle should materially assist 
in deciphering the recent geomorphic history of the embayed section of the 
Atlantic Coastal Plain. (Author’s abstract.) 

WiuiiamM Bowie: The importance of geophysical data in geologic research. 


415TH MEETING 


The 415th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, March 10, 1926, President 
Darton presiding. The Secretary announced the transfer of the following 
members from the active list to the corresponding list: ARTHUR HOLLICK, 
Ropert ANDERSON, H. F. Barn, J. P. Buwaupa, Ernest Hows, T. C. 
Hopkins, W. 8. BuRBANK. 

F. E. Marruns: Some examples of the cellular structure of ice. The speakers 
showed several lantern slides of photographs taken by him in Rock Creek 
Park, Washington, D. C., on Jan. 24, 1926, of cakes of ice in which the cell 
structure, as it 1s termed by some authors, had been rendered clearly dis- 
cernible at the surface by a fortuitous train of circumstances. After the ice 
on the ponded stretches of Rock Creek had attained a thickness of about 
5 inches, a change in weather brought about a flood, which broke up the ice 
and cast large cakes of it on the banks of the stream. There, exposed to the 
mild heat of the winter sun, the surfaces of the cakes became etched along the 
lines of contact between the cells, the interstitial films, or cell walls being more 
sensitive to radiant heat than the crystalline ice, as has recently been shown 
experimentally by E. K. Plyler. A brief snow flurry then supervened and the 
etched grooves were filled with fine powdery snow, the result being that each 
individual ice cell stood clearly outlined by a white boundary. The photo- 
graphs revealed great variety in the horizontal dimensions of the cells. As a 
rule the cells measured only a quarter to half an inch across, but some of them 
measured an inch or more across. A few cakes contained cells measuring 3 
to 7 inches to the side. The commonly accepted theory is that each cell 
envelops a single crystal, and this is probably true of the small and medium- 
sized cells, which largely preponderate; but it scarcely seems probable that 
the very large cells mentioned contain each but a single crystal. Asa matter 
of fact, when the ice composed of these large cells was broken, there were 
revealed vertical flutings along the cell walls as well as a dim structure here 
and there within the cells themselves, suggesting the presence of a multitude 
of thin, almost fibrous, crystals closely intergrown. It may well be, therefore, 
that ice cells and ice crystals are not always coterminous, but that under 
certain conditions aggregates of crystals may be enveloped by one cell. The 
observation made, though lacking verification by microscopic analysis, may 
have a bearing on the probable composition of the interstitial films. There 
are in the main two views: (1) that these films consist of water holding salt 
or other mineral matter in solution and therefore having a low freezing point; 
(2) that they are made up of loose molecules of ice not definitely attached to 
the lattice work of the crystals. It seems entirely possible that both kinds of 
interstitial films are present in ice; the latter normally separating crystal from 
crystal, the former being present wherever there are appreciable quantities 
of dissolved mineral matter in the water, and being segregated as freezing 
goes on, in the form of so-called cell walls that may enclose one or more 
crystals of pure ice. (Author’s abstract.) 


MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 127 


416TH MEETING 


The 416th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, March 24, 1926, President 
Darton presiding. The Secretary announced the resignation of C. D. 
Davis, a founder and active member, and the transfer of the following 
members from the active list to the corresponding hist: MCW. Bann. WC: 
PHALEN, C. M. KEELER. 

Program: FRANK ReEeEvEs: The landslide origin of the thrust faults around 
the Bearpaw Mountains. The thrust faulting in the plains on the north and 
south sides of the Bearpaw Mountains is apparently confined to the weak 
upper Cretaceous and early Tertiary formations. The trend and extent of 
the faults indicate that they were produced by a thrust force acting outward 
from the mountains. The slight plainsward inclination of the strata toward 
the faulted area suggests the possibility that during the mid-Tertiary period 
of voleanic activity in the mountains, these formations, being buried under 
an enormous load of extrusive material and subjected to violent and frequent 
earthquake shocks, slipped plainsward on wet bentonite beds in the upper 
part of the Colorado shale, resulting in the compression and thrust faulting 
of these formations in the plains. (Author’s abstract.) 

B. S. Buruer: Some features of the native copper deposits of Michigan. 

N. H. Hecx: Some unusual submarine features in the north Pacific Ocean. 
The area referred to in the paper includes the rim of the North Pacific ocean 
from the Panama Canal to the Philippine Islands. A deep ocean trough 
developed by the Coast and Geodetic Survey Steamer GUIDE in 1923 is 
found to be associated with a large number of earthquake epicenters along 
its extent from Panama to the Gulf of Lower California. Another series of 
epicenters further off shore are in line with a series of oceanic islands and 
reefs. From Lower California to Alaska submarine activity appears limited. 
There are a number of cases of submarine earthquakes along the extension 
of the San Andreas fault off the coast of Northern California. Attention was 
called to the existence of a submarine crater off the coast of southeastern 
Alaska, and there was brief discussion of the pinnacle rocks found in the 
waters of southeastern Alaska. Special attention was called to the small base 
and consequent very steep slopes of the sides of these pinnacles. The 
Yakutat Bay earthquake of 1899 was accompanied by a vertical change 
reaching nearly 50 feet, the greatest heretofore recorded in a single earthquake 
on land during the historic period. Besboro Island in Bristol Bay north of 
the Aleutian Islands rises to a height of 1600 feet in a generally flat region. 
It is probably the remains of voleanic cone. Volcanic activity in this region 
resulted in the formation in a comparative recent period of Bogoslof Island 
north of the Aleutian chain. Paralleling the Aleutian chain to the south there 
is a great deep extending from the mainland of the Aleutian Islands to 
Kamchatka apparently without break, though the soundings are few. It 
was pointed out that the extension of the axis of this deep follows a submarine 
valley to the Alaska coast, reaching it at Yakutat Bay. Many earthquake 
epicenters are associated with this deep and there is evidence of considerable 
activity to the south of it. A series of deeps from Kamchatka along the 
Japanese Islands to the Philippines are well known to be the most active 
seismic region of the earth. A number of epicenters plotted within the 
outlines of the deep bring this out very clearly. It is here that the greatest 
known ocean depths are found. Another branch extends from Japan through 
the Marianna Islands, a very active region with earthquakes of both volcanic 
and tectonic character. 


128 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


The need for complete surveys of the North Pacific in order to understand 
these features better was stressed. A case of sudden change in depth over a 
limited area greater than that recorded at the time of the Yakutat earthquake 
was described. In the Cuyo Islands in Zulu Sea, Philippine Islands, an area 
of about half a square mile dropped an average amount of 100 feet between 
two surveys eighteen months apart. An earthquake occurred during the 
period. This case has been published in detail in the Geographical Review 
for April, 1926, by Lieut. Com. F. H. Hardy of the Coast and Geodetic 
Survey. (Author’s abstract.) 


417TH MEETING 


The 417th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, April 14, 1926, President 
Darton presiding. The Secretary announced the transfer of the following 
members from the active list to the corresponding list: J. M. Hii, C. K. 
WENTWORTH, O. B. Hopxins, R. W. Stons, F. L. Ransome, T. W. VAUGHAN, 
Ee OACK ETT, 

Program: W. P. Wooprine: Geologic history and paleobiologic significance 
of the genus Clementia. Clementia is a clam-like bivalve mollusk that has a 
characteristic Inoceramus-like sculpture. A review of all the known fossils 
indicates that this genus first appeared in the eastern tropical Pacific or in the 
Caribbean region during middle Eocene time. It may represent an invading 
type in both these regions, for a divergent phylum appeared at virtually the 
same time in the Paris Basin. It is assumed that the genus migrated into the 
Orient by way of the north border of the Pacific during early or middle 
Tertiary time and that the isolated Miocene finds in the Mediterranean 
region represent a temporary invasion from the Orient. After Miocene time 
the main phylum completely disappeared in American and European waters 
and all the living species are found in the western Pacific and Indian Oceans. 
During Miocene time another divergent phylum, known as the subgenus 
Egesta, arose in American waters. It also migrated around the north border 
of the Pacific. After Miocene time this subgenus also disappeared in Ameri- 
can Atlantic waters, but one species still lives in the Gulf of California. 
The only other living species is found in the waters off Japan and Chosen. 
Clementia is a mud-burrower and its shell, like that of other mud-burrowers, 
is very thin. Living species are found either in very shallow protected 
water or in deeper exposed water at a maximum depth of 85fathoms. The 
fossils are found in mud beds almost invariably with both valves in attached 
position, showing that they died and were buried at the place where they - 
lived. Fossil species of Egesta are found in both mud and sand beds and their 
shell generally is thicker than that of Clementia. Hgesta tolerated a lower 
range of temperature than Clementia. All the fossil species from the United 
States and Mexico represent Hgesta, whereas all the species from the Carib- 
bean region and the Pacific coast of Central America and northern South 
America represent Clementia. (Author’s abstract.) 

CuHarLEs Butts: The Devonian of Alabama and the unconformity at its 
base. Omitting the Chattanooga shale, the age of which is in dispute, the 
Devonian system is not well represented in Alabama. There is a very small 
area of limestone of Helderberg, probably New Scotland, age in the north- 
western corner of the State which extends into the State from the Tennessee 
Valley area in Tennessee on the north. The Jemison chert with Meristella 
lata of Oriskany age, and the Yellow Leaf quartz schist overlying the Jemison 
chert, crop out in a narrow belt in Chilton County in the vicinity of Jemison. 


MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 129 


The Jemison is known only by its chert which resembles the chert of the older 
Copper Ridge dolomite and was mapped on the 1894 edition of the geologic 
map of Alabama as Knox dolomite. Both the Jemison chert and the Yellow- 
leaf quartz schist are members of the Talladega slate as it has been delimited 
in Alabama. In a broad belt extending northwest to Georgia from the 
Coastal Plain between Tuscaloosa and Talladega counties, are beds of sand- 
stone and shale of Devonian age. In Red Mountain southwest of Bessemer 
characteristic Oriskany fossils were obtained from a quartzite and chert 8 
inches thick underlain by 5 feet of sandstone, which may also be Oriskany. 
Oriskany fossils were also obtained from chert 1 mile southwest of Vance, 
Tuscaloosa County. Northeastward in Cahaba and Coosa Valleys the 
Devonian is represented mainly by shale and sandstone from 2 to 50 feet 
thick overlying limestone of Beekmantown or Little Oak (Chazy) age or, in 
Shelby and Bibb counties, the Athens shale, also of Chazy age, which under- 
lies the Little Oak limestone. The Devonian in this belt is entirely of 
Onondaga and Hamilton ages. It includes the sandstone of Frog Mountain 
in Cherokee County, which was named by Hayes the Frog Mountain sand- 
stone and which was considered as of Oriskany age. The name Frog Moun- 
tain has been also applied to the beds of Devonian age throughout all of this 
belt, that is, all the Devonian in Alabama except the Helderberg in the 
northwest, the Jemison chert, and the Yellowleaf quartz schist has been 
designated Frog Mountain sandstone. . Among the most notable exposures 
and fossil localities of the Devonian in this belt are those at Watkins Cut 1 
mile east of Odenville and in an abandoned quarry 13 miles south-southwest 
of Ragland, 25 miles northeast of Birmingham. At the Ragland locality 
the Devonian is fully exposed in the quarry face and is composed of a thin 
limestone below and of shale and sandstone with cherty nodules above, the 
whole being 54 feet thick. Here the lower 4 feet is profusely fossiliferous, the 
coral fauna being most conspicuous, and recalling the rich coral fauna of the 
“Falls of the Ohio’ at Louisville, Ky. The entire fauna contains both 
Onondaga and Hamilton forms, the latter predominating. The lower 
limestone of the Devonian, eight inches thick, is here cemented to the under- 
lying Little Oak limestone along a very even contact, notwithstanding a 
hiatus due to the absence of several thousand feet of rocks, including all the 
Black River, Trenton, Utica and Loraine of the Ordovician, the Richmond, 
the entire Silurian, and the Lower Devonian. A full description of the 
Devonian is contained in the Geology of Alabama, pp. 141-158, 1926, pub- 
lished by the Geological Survey of Alabama. (Author’s abstract.) 
J. B. Murtig, Jr.: Stratigraphy of the Upper Yukon Valley. 


418TH MEETING 


The 418th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, April 28, 1926, President 
Darton presiding. The Secretary announced the transfer of D. F. Mac- 
Dona.pD from the active list to the corresponding list: 

Program: Kirk Bryan: Solution-facetied limestone pebbles. 

G. R. MANsFIELD: Summary of the geology of southeastern Idaho with 
notes on recent work. ‘The strata of southeastern Idaho include about 46,000 
feet of sedimentary rocks, which are grouped in 41 formations, embracing 
lower middle Cambrian to Quaternary rocks and representing every period 
within that interval. There are many varieties of igneous rocks, but only 
three principal types—hornblende andesite porphyry, rhyolite, and olivine 
basalt. Five to eight epochs of volcanic activity have been recognized. The 


130 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


structural features include many folds, some as long as 75 miles, the Bannock 
overthrust, the Blackfoot fault, which is a transverse thrust, and the Meadow 
Creek graben, besides other faults both normal and reverse. Thirteen physio- 
graphic stages have been identified and described. These features have been 
discussed in earlier brief papers and in a professional paper now in press. The 
more recent field studies have been in the Portneuf, Paradise Valley, and 
Ammon quadrangles, where additional folds and faults have been mapped. 
A window in the Bannock overthrust appears in the Portneuf quadrangle, 
and the Bannock overthrust itself is exposed in several branches in the two 
other quadrangles named. It passes beneath cover of Tertiary beds and 
lavas in the southern part of the Ammon quadrangle. (Author’s abstract.) 

B. C. Renicx: Stratigraphy of the eastern part of the San Juan Basin, 
New Mexico. 


419TH MEETING 


The 419th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, May 12, 1926, President 
Darton presiding. The Secretary announced the transfer of the following 
members from the active to the corresponding list: EUGENE STEBINGER, 
Luoyp Gipson, THEODORE CHAPIN. W. P. WoopRING was awarded by 
ballot the prize of $10 for excellency in presentation of papers during the 
second third of 1926. 

Program: W. T. ScHALLER: What is a gem stone? 

C. E. Resser: The Cambrian in the Rocky Mountains. Until a few years 
ago all work on the Cambrian belonged to the first or ‘‘accumulative”’ stage 
and but few attempts had been made to weld the gathered facts into a har- 
monious whole in accord with modern stratigraphic methods. More recently 
attempts have been made to assemble our information into some sort of order 
so that the data in hand may be more useful and future field work directed 
more intelligently. At present the Cambrian beds of Wisconsin, studied by 
Dr. E. O. Ulrich during the past 12 years, constitute the “standard” with 
which all other Upper Cambrian strata are being correlated. No “‘standard”’ 
sections exist for the Middle and Lower Cambrian and consequently efforts 
must be made to find suitable ones. It is estimated that not more than 30 
per cent of the Cambrian fossils now in hand have been described. (Author’s 
abstract.) 

A. J. CouuiER: The unconformity between the Madison limestone and Ellis 
formation in northern Montana: An important unconformity occurs between 
the Madison (Mississippian) limestone and the Ellis (Jurassic) formation 
in northern Montana. Knowledge of this unconformity has been obtained 
from the many wells that have penetrated these formations on the Sweetgrass 
Arch north of Great Falls and from its exposure near Stocket twenty miles 
south of Great Falls, in the Sweetgrass Hills near the international boundary 
and in the Little Rocky and Bearpaw Mountains. The outcrop near Stocket 
shows a discordance in the dip of the two formations, the surface between 
them being irregular and occupied by a few feet of gravel sand and soil ce- 
mented by secondary silica and iron rust. This deposit comprises the basal 
“‘sand”’ of the Ellis or the ‘‘Ellis sand”’ of the drillers in the Kevin-Sunburst 
oil field. A few miles south of Stocket a small thickness of the Quadrant 
formation, (Mississippian or early Pennsylvanian in age) underlies the un- 
conformity and near the Wyoming line Triassic rocks underly it. In the 
Sweetgrass hills and in the Bearpaw and Little Rocky Mountains the charac- 
ter of the unconformity is about the same as at Stocket though no discordance 


MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 131 


in the dip of the associated formations has been observed. In the front range 
of the Rockies west of the Sweetgrass Arch the unconformity is not exposed 
owing to the great overthrust fault which extends north and south in Glacier 
National Park. Near Banff west of this overthrust, however, there is a great 
thickness of limestone the upper members of which are thought to be younger 
than Madison and wells drilled about a hundred miles southeast of Banff 
in the Turner valley of Okotoks oil field have evidently penetrated this lime- 
stone below the Jurassic. In the Athabaska region 500 miles north of the 
Sweetgrass Arch the youngest Paleozoic rocks are Devonian and immediately 
above them occur the Athabaska tar sands believed to be of lower Cretaceous 
age. The unconformity here is probably a northern extension of the un- 
conformity underlying Sweetgrass Arch and if so erosion progressed far 
enough to remove the whole of the Madison formation. This unconformity 
therefore represents a great peneplain eroded in late Triassic or early Jurassic 
time which extended about 800 miles north and south and 200 or more miles 
east and west. It was eroded on Triassic rocks at its south end; on Quadrant 
and Madison rocks in its middle part and on Madison and Devonian rocks at 
its north end. | 

The Ellis-Madison unconformity is of considerable economic importance 
in northern Montana for the deposits associated with it contain valuable pools 
of oil in the Kevin-Sunburst field. It may be of equal importance in Canada 
for the Athabaska tar sands and the oil in Turner Valley apparently are 
associated with it. (Author’s abstract.) 


420TH MEETING 


The 420th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, November 10, 1926, 
Vice-president Butts presiding. The Secretary announced with regret the 
death of Dr. W. T. Len, an active member and First Vice-president for 1926. 

Program: E. O. Uuricy and R. 8S. Basster: Some experiences of European 
geology and the International Geological Congress. 


421sT MEETING 


The 42Ist meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, November 24, 1926, 
Vice-president Burts presiding. The Secretary announced with regret the 
death of Dr. F. H. KNowiton, a founder and former President of the 
Society. The resignation of T. K. HARNSBERGER from active membership 
also was announced. 

Program: W. T. SCHALLER: Origin of polyhalite. 

LAURENCE LAForGEe:. New evidence on the Pleistocene swamps of 
Washington. 


422D MEETING 


The 422d meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, December 8, 1926, Vice- 
president Butts presiding. The Secretary announced the election to active 
membership of R. C. Moors, E. T. McKnicut, and C. KE. ErpMan. An- 
nouncement was also made of the election to corresponding membership 
of Dr. H. 8. Lapp, of the University of Virginia, and of the resignation of 
R. W. Pack from active membership as of January 1, 1926. On recom- 
mendation of the Council it was announced that during the ensuing year the 
Proceedings of the Society would be offered at least once a month to the 
editors of the JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES for 


132 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 


publication. Members were urged to present to the Secretary abstracts of 
papers at the time when they are given. Otherwise the papers will be pub- 
lished by title only, for the Secretaries will no longer consider it their duty to 
beg for abstracts. 

Program: Professor CHARLES P. Brerxkey, of Columbia University, ad- 
dressed the Society on An outline of the geology of Mongolia. 


THIRTY-FOURTH: ANNUAL MEETING 


The thirty-fourth annual meeting was held at the Cosmos Club after the 
adjournment of the 422d meeting, President Burrs presiding. The annual 
report of the secretaries was read and approved. ‘The Treasurer presented 
his annual report showing an excess of assets over liabilities of $1,276.89 
on December 8, 1926. The auditing committee reported that the books of 
the Treasurer were correct. 

The results of balloting for officers for the ensuing year were as follows: 
President: CHarutes Butts. Vice-presidenis: 8. R. Capps, D. F. Hewntt; 
Treasurer: J. B. Rersrp4, Jr.; Secretaries: W. P. Wooprinc, W. W. RuBEY; 
Members-at-large-of-the-Council: O. KE. Mutnzmr, H. E. Merwin, C.8. Ross, 
JAMES GILLULY, W. H. Brapiey; Nominee as Vice-president of Washington 
Academy of Sciences representing the Geological Society: N. H. Darron. 

J. D. Szars, W. P. Wooprine, Secretaries. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


The Pick and Hammer Club met at the Geological Survey on January 8. 
The program consisted of reports on the Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress in 
Japan by W. C. MENDENHALL; on the meetings of Section E of the American 
Association for the Advancement of Science, at Philadelphia, by G. R. 
MANSFIELD; and on the annual meeting of the Geological Society of America 
at Madison, by R. S. Basstur, M. R. Campsenyi, W. T. ScHALLER, and 
ArtHurR Keitu. The Club met at the Geological Survey February 5 to hear 
a series of short contributions on The stratigraphy and conditions of sedimenta- 
tion of the Permian rocks of the Colorado Plateau. R. C. Moorz, H. D. 
Miszpr, C. R. Lonaweui, J. B. Reeusipe, Jr., JAMES GILLULY, C. W. 
GiLMorE, and Davip WuitE contributed to the program. 


Professor JOHANNES WALTHER of the University of Halle, Speyer Visiting 
Professor at Johns Hopkins University for the current year, on March 19 
will talk to the Pick and Hammer Club on some of his observations on laterite 
and red sediments in the deserts of Western Australia. The talk will be 
illustrated with lantern slides. 


The Petrologists’ Club met at the Geophysical Laboratory on January 18. 
W. T. Scuauusr, C. 8. Ross, N. L. Bownn, H. G. Fereuson, and M. I. 
GOLDMAN led a discussion on The criteria of replacement. 


Dr. Wiiu14Mm T. Tuo, Jr., chief of the fuel section of the U. S. Geological 
Survey, has been appointed associate professor of geology at Princeton 
University, in effect at the fall term of 1927, and will give lecture and research 
courses on structural geology and petroleum and coal. He will continue 
geologic work for the Geological Survey during summer periods. 


CEME MEN 8 OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND 


Z 


‘The Philosophical Sines. 
The Geological Society. — 
‘The Chemica eae 


The ieopakeieal Satay. 
The Philosophical Society. | neh 


This JC OURNAL, the official organ be. the ‘Wasilington Aas 0 
-present.a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. Tot 
_ (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members o 
_. short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating f 
_ (8) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affil 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. Th 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except dur 
- when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calen 
publication is an essential feature; 'a manuscript reaching the editors o ‘he fif th 0} 
the twentieth of the month will Aelinacite appear, on request from t thor, in sie 
issue of the JouRNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectivel: Bure 


Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essentia 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor er: 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publicatio 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that foo te 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. _ is 

Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will ‘We confin d to text gurl 
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts fori il lu ations ¢ 
partly met by the author. ; aes 
: Proof-—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be dont to 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in final form; the 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. — Fee ats 

Authors's Reprinis.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of 'P ice: 


Copies “4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. ‘ ‘Ciee. pu ese 
* 50 $.85 $1.65 (62.55) |). ($3.25) SEO ae 
100, 190 BBO) ATE 600 ee 
150 2.250 SABO eB 2b.) 680 ee 
200 2.50 £80 SBIR TOO) OS 
250 S100 B80 Gres a Rae a 


An additional charge of 25 cents will he made for each split page. 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, bis inclubive t Pag 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. Beat 


As an author will not ordinarily see edie ee renuest for orien. copies or. reprints 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. 


The rate of Subscription per bhp $6.00" 
Semi-nionthly numbers... 60 hc c4e dice Moab dive eviews gewwitcc en ali ly lenient em 


Monthiyciambers a) cu-tc. 0d. .csts cy ese tty see 50 


Remittances should be made payable to ‘Washington Academy of Sciences, o ean 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, D. C. 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, Lone on. | 
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other ‘publications. RGN ae ot 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is cae 
within thirty days after date of the following 1 issue. ea ote heey 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special rates 
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy, 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Wen.) 1,7 Marcu 19, 1927 No. 6 


GEOPHYSICS.—The variation of latitude and the fluctuations in the 
motion of the moon.. WautTnR D. Lampert, U. 8. Coast and 
Geodetic Survey. 


E. W. Brown’s? explanation of the apparently irregular fluctuations 
in the motion of the moon involves an expansion or contraction of 
the earth over irregular periods of years, decades or perhaps even 
centuries so as to change its principal moment of inertia with respect 
to the axis of rotation, the moment of angular momentum remaining 
constant. This involves a change in the going of our time-keeper, 
the earth, and hence a seeming change in the moon’s place at any 
given time as shown by our clocks, not a real change in the motion 
of the moonitself. Brown’s explanation does not require an expansion 
or contraction uniform along all radii but merely a contraction or 
expansion having an adequate average value. The surface of the 
earth is so diversified that 1t seems natural to assume an expansion 
different along different radii, at least in the outer portions. ‘The 
principal axis would then shift its position, that is, products of inertia 
different from zero would be introduced. 

Such a non-uniform expansion and contraction of the earth would 
be very convenient for explaining irregularities in the variation of 
latitude. J am considering variation of latitude only so far as it 
concerns shifting of the earth’s axis of rotation, and shall treat variation 
of latitude and motion of the pole as practically synonymous. The 


1 Presented at a meeting of the American Astronomical Society, Philadelphia, 
December 29, 1926. Received February 2, 1927. 

* The Evidence for Changes in the Rate of Rotation of the Earth and their Geophysical 
Consequences, with a Summary and Discussion of the Deviations of the Moon and Sun 
from their Gravitational Orbits. Transactions of the Astronomical Observatory of 
Yale University, 3: part 6. 


133 


134 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 


annual portion of the polar motion has seemed to vary about as 
regularly as one might be led to expect from the variations in the 
annual phenomena—meteorological phenomena in the broad sense 
of the term—to which the annual part of the variation is commonly 
and convincingly attributed. But the variations in the “free” 
period of 14 months are much more puzzling. Friction would in- 
evitably damp out the free motion unless there were something to 
sustain or regenerate it. Although there is reason, to believe that 
the internal friction is small,* we can hardly suppose that the present 
free motion is the still undestroyed part of a motion that has gone on 
with decreasing amplitude since some early geologic era. Moreover, 
there have been frequent and puzzling changes in the amplitude and 
phase of the free motion. 

Earthquakes have been correlated with the variation of latitude, 
but the masses moved in known earthquakes appear on calculation 
to be inadequate to account for the observed peculiarities in the 
variation of latitude. On the other hand, the stresses due to the 
variation of latitude, assumed to exist, are very small, even when 
considered as mere ‘‘trigger” phenomena, that is, as stresses that do 
not of themselves cause earthquakes, but are merely the final incre- 
ment of stress that pushes the accumulated and pre-existing stresses 
beyond the limits of crustal strength and so releases at some particular 
time an earthquake that would have occurred about that time any- 
way. Considered as a trigger phenomenon the variation of latitude 
gives stresses of precisely the same character as those due to the 
diurnal earth tides, but the stresses due to the average maximum 
diurnal earth tide, which occurs about once a fortnight, are about 
twelve times as large as those due to the largest usual maximum 
displacement of the pole. The trigger effect of the variation of 
latitude may therefore be disregarded. If, however, earthquakes 
and the irregularities in variation of latitude are both due to one 
common cause, the shrinking and swelling of the earth, the suspected 
correlation is easier to explain. 

What seems to be needed is some deformation of the earth contain- 
ing a spherical harmonic component of the second degree and first 
order, that is, a change in the products of inertia x; and yz, where 
the z-axis is the axis of rotation, a deformation by no means large, 
but from its very definition widely distributed. 

3See Haroup Jerrreys: The Earth, Its Origin, History and Physical Conshitution, 


Chapter XIV. This contains a convenient summary of recent work, much of it done 
by Jeffreys himself, 


_ MARCH 19, 1927 LAMBERT: VARIATION OF LATITUDE AND MOTION OF MOON 135 


What has been said with regard to the ‘free’ motion applies also 
to the irregular motion, which seems to defy all analysis into periods, 
or at any rate a rational explanation of those periods into which the 
motion may have been forced by some Procrustean mathematical 
process. For instance, for some years prior to 1918, the mean north 
pole appears to have moved progressively towards North America, 
and then to have turned aside without apparent reason and moved in 
the general direction of Europe.‘ 

All these phenomena find a natural explanation if only we can 
assume that the expansions and contractions of the earth suggested 
by Brown take place, but not with absolute uniformity in all parts 
of the earth. Indeed the diversity of the surface suggests diversity 
of behavior, especially as the expansions and contractions, in both 
Brown’s opinion and mine, are probably confined to the outer por- 
tions of the earth. A departure from uniformity amounting to only 
a fraction of the average expansion or contraction necessary to explain 
the anomalies of the moon’s motion would be of the right order of 
magnitude to explain the irregularities in the variation of latitude. 

Of course this expansion and contraction, uniform or otherwise, 
is for the present a deus ex machina, a makeshift hypothesis, the 
geophysical implications of which we cannot well consider in detail 
just now. 

The interesting thing is of course to see whether the irregularities 
in the variation of latitude do in fact correspond to fluctuations in 
the lunar motions. The investigation is not easy, for trustworthy 
observations of the variation of latitude do not extend nearly so far 
back as do reliable observations of the moon. In both cases we are 
dealing with quantities small and none too well determined. Hence 
one is peculiarly liable to be led astray by a seductive theory and to 
attribute a deep significance to mere chance coincidences. 


4 LAMBERT: An Investigation of the Latitude of Ukiah, Calif., and of the Molion of the 
Pole. U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Special Publication No. 80 p. 42 and 108. 

Kimura: Provisional Results of the Work of the International Latitude Service— 
September 6, 1922, March 6, 1924. Japanese Journal of Astronomy and Geophysics, 
2: No. 3. 1924. 

5 For effects of shifts of matter in displacing the pole see LArmMor and Hiuus: The 
Irregular Movement of the Earth’s Axis of Rotation, etc. Monthly Notices Royal Astro- 
nomical Society, 67: 22. 1906. 

Larmor: On irregularities in the Earth’s Rotation, ete. Monthly Notices Royal 
Astronomical Society, 75: 211. 1915. 

LAMBERT: Op. cit., pp. 37-42. 

See also addendum to this paper. 


136 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 


I profess no real familiarity with the difficult technical questions 
involved in a study of the lunar motions. Nevertheless, I have 
come to suspect, as a result of examining the records, that there may 
be a close connection between irregularities in the motion of the moon 
and irregularities in the variation of latitude. The corrections to 
the moon’s tabular place, as determined by observation, seem to vary 
most rapidly, at just about those times when there is a sudden change 
in amplitude or phase of the free motion of the pole, or a marked pro- 
gressive shifting of the mean pole. 

In Brown’s Fig. 1 (op. cit.) there is a sudden upturn about 1918 
of the curve showing the correction to the moon’s longitude, just 
about the time when the mean pole suddenly changed its direction of 
motion, as previously noted. There is a smaller irregularity in 
correction to the moon’s longitude about 1907, about the time of a 
considerable increase in amplitude of the free motion of the pole, and 
about the time when the progressive displacement of the pole appears 
to have slowed down for a time. Changes per saltuwm in the earth’s 
moment of inertia would tend to give the curve of corrections to the 
moon’s longitude sudden changes from one uniform slope to another 
slope likewise uniform and if accompanied by a change per saltum in the 
product of inertia would in general change the amplitude and phase 
of the free motion, and also the position of the mean pole but would 
not impart to it a progressive displacement. 

This study has been more than a mere casual inspection but should 
not be dignified with the name of an exhaustive investigation. My 
chief purpose in putting the matter before you is to ask advice and 
suggestions from those who are familiar with either latitude problems 
or with lunar problems, or with both, so that it may be easier to 
detect real connections, if such exist, and to rule out apparent coin- 
cidences due to change and to prepossession in favor of a preconceived 
theory.’ 


6 LAMBERT: (Op. cit.) p. 60 and figures 4a to 9b, pp. 21-28. This change is so small 
both for the moon and the pole that its reality is not beyond doubt. 

7 Since the above paper was presented discussion of the uniformity of the earth’s 
rate of rotation at the meeting of the Royal Astronomical Society on November 12, 
1926, as reported in The Observatory for December, 1926, has come to my attention. 
The participants in the discussion agreed that the evidence for irregularity of rotation 
is strong, but some attributed the changes to changes in the earth’s angular velocity 
alone with the moment of inertia left unchanged. For the mathematical theory of this 
assumption see addendum to Larmor’s article previously cited, Monthly Notices Royal 
Astronomical Society, 75: 218. 1915, and Glauert’s article in same volume p. 492. 
The paper by H. S. Jones, which was read at this meeting, appears in the Monthly 
Notices, 87: 4. November, 1926. 


MARCH 19, 1927 LAMBERT: VARIATION OF LATITUDE AND MOTION OF MOON 137 


ADDENDUM TO THE PRECEDING PAPER 


(Jan. 28, 1927) 


Suppose the surface of the earth to rise in some places and to sink 
in others. This change in the radius may be expressed by a series 
of spherical harmonic terms. It can readily be shown that most of 
the harmonic terms give zero effects in displacing the polar axis of 
figure. The only exceptions are the harmonic terms of degree two 
and order one; these may be represented by h, sin 2¢ cos \ and 
h. sin 2¢ sin 2. (¢ = latitude, \ = longitude). By a proper choice 
of the initial meridian these two terms may be reduced to one, 
h sin 2¢ cos. This is the only term in the expression for change of 
radius that needs to be considered in treating the displacement of the 
axis of figure. For slow displacements the pole of rotation tends to 
follow the axis of figure, and in this note no distinction is made be- 
tween the two. 

If this term represents a layer of matter of density c added or 
removed up to a maximum height or depth of h, the corresponding 
displacement of the pole expressed in radians is 


Siro hat 
15. (6 5A)», 
where a = radius of earth, and C and A are its principal moments of 
inertia about the polar axis and about an equatorial axis respectively. 
By introducing the values of Cand A in terms of the earth’s dimensions 
and density and of a we get for A¢g in seconds of are 


Ae = 7". 54 X 107 x 2 spe 

p a 
where p is the mean density of the earth. Suppose now that change 
in radius is due not to addition and removal of a layer of matter, but 
by the swelling and shrinking up of matter down to a depth d below 
the surface. The change in elevation is thus compensated isostati- 
cally in the Pratt manner down to depth d. The corresponding dis- 
placement of the pole is much smaller, being in fact the expression 


Ae = 


> 


eeecemnlplied by that is 
a 


o h d 
Nom ed OOo: OG 
p a a 

As a numerical example take: 


° = 0.6, = 1 meter and va = or d = 106 kilometers approximately; 
p ae 5,.6 


C 


138 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 


we get 

No Us 
This displacement is of the right order of magnitude to explain the 
irregularities in the variation of latitude, though in most cases several 
times larger than would be needed. 

The average shrinking or swelling postulated by Brown to explain 
the motion of the moon varies from a few inches, when the expansion 
and contraction extends to the center of the earth, up to 12 feet 
when it goes down only to the depth of isostatic compensation, as 
in the example above.® In view of the diversity of the earth’s sur- 
face there is no difficulty in imagining an irregularity of less than a 
meter in an average shrinking or swelling of twelve feet. 

The difficulty with the hypothesis—other than the primal one of 
finding a cause for the shrinking and swelling—lies in the matter of 
sea level.? A uniform expansion or contraction would cause merely 
a very slight lowering or raising of sea level due to the increased or 
decreased area of the ocean basins, but an irregular expansion or 
contraction of an amount necessary to account for irregularities in 
the variation of latitude would cause oscillations of sea level that 
would be well within the limits of observation, that would in fact 
almost force themselves on one’s attention. 

A change in level due to the addition or removal of a layer of matter 
would be largely masked by the rise or fall in sea level due to the 
attraction of the layer and the change in level produced by the dis- 
placement of the pole, but this is not true of the change in radius 
produced by mere shrinking and swelling down to a moderate depth. 
Such changes in radius may be considered as isostatically compensated 
and as having therefore very little effect on sea level. ) 

The suggestion!* has been made that a not unreasonable change in 
the volume of the circumpolar ice sheets" might effect a change in 


8 Correspondence with Prof. Brown develops the fact that he had in mind a dif- 
ferent mode of expansion, namely, expansion in a thin layer just below the outer crust 
so as to push un the latter without altering its density. For a given elevation or de- 
pression of the surface an expansion of the type intended by Brown would be twice as 
effective in altering the moments and products of inertia as the type here treated. 

9 Dr. William Bowie called my attention to this. 

10 This suggestion was communicated ina personal letter from Dr. Harold Jeffreys 
of St. John’s College, Cambridge, who attributes it to Prof. J. W. Evans. Jeffreys is 
to discuss it briefly in an early issue of The Observatory. 

11 There are known to be gradual increases and decreases in these due toslight climatic 
fluctuations of obscure origin. It would be very interesting to make a quantitative 
study if all the material were available. 


- MARCH 19, 1927 LAMBERT: VARIATION OF LATITUDE AND MOTION OF MOON 139 


— 


[j- 


the moment of inertia of the earth sufficient to cause the irregularities 
in its rotation that are reflected in the apparent errors in the lunar 
tables. The effect of an increase in the ice sheets would probably 
be to decrease the moment of inertia by lowering the level all over 
the ocean surface, which lies mostly in latitudes where the lowering 
would affect the moment of inertia more than in the high latitudes 
of the ice sheets. 

On account of the lack of symmetry of the configuration of the 
continents and oceans a withdrawal of water from the ocean or an 
addition of water to it would produce an effect on the position of the 
earth’s axis of figure. The quadratures made by Darwin and Turner” 
for a different purpose may be used for evaluating the effect. If 
enough circumpolar ice were melted to raise the ocean level one 
meter, the pole would be shifted by 0”. 22, which is several times as 
much as is needed to explain most of the irregular variation of lati- 
tude. The direction of displacement is such that the north pole 


| would move southward along the meridian of 59° East of Greenwich. 


The moment of inertia with regard to the axis of rotation would 
be increased by about one part in ten million. This again is a quantity 
several times as large as the largest change needed by Brown to 
explain the irregularities of the moon. These figures are on the 
supposition that there is no yielding of the solid portion of the earth 
under the load of water. On account of elastic yielding they are 
subject to a slight diminution, especially those for the variation of 
latitude, which would be reduced to perhaps four-fifths of the amount 
given, the direction of the polar displacement being unchanged. 


Y Prof. Evans’ explanation of the lunar puzzle thus fits the latitude 


laa 


puzzle also in regard to the order of magnitude of the quantities 
involved. The amount of water required to be added or withdrawn, 
that is, say 10 to 30 centimeters, does not seem wildly unreasonable, 
though larger than can be readily granted. The explanation is 
probably therefore only a partial one. 

The apparent tendency, previously noted for the irregularities in 
the motion of the moon and in the displacement of the pole to occur 
simultaneously is an indication at least that the phenomena are 
related and that the cause of the lunar irregularities is chiefly terres- 
trial. The alternate release and storage of water in the polar ice 
caps occurring in the slow oscillations of irregular climatic cycles 
may be an important element of both phenomena. 


* On the Correction to the Equilibrium Theory of Tides for the Continents. Pro- 
ceedings Royal Society of London, 40: 303. 1886, or Darwin’s Scientific Papers, 1: 328. 


140 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 


BOTAN Y.—Two new grasses, Psammochloa mongolica from Mongolia 
and Orthachne breviseta from Chile. A. 8S. HrrcHcocx, Bureau 
of Plant Industry. 


Recently a package of grasses was received from Dr. E. D. Merrill, 
comprising the grass part of the collections of Mr. R. W. Chaney on 
the Third Asiatic Expedition of the American Museum of Natural 
History. Several interesting species were found, one of which appears 
to be new and to constitute a new genus. 


Psammochloa Hitche., gen. nov. 


Spikelets 1-flowered, the rachilla articulating above the glumes, not pro- 
longed behind the palea; glumes about equal; lemma narrow, about as long 
as the glumes, membranaceous, villous, awned from between 2 minute blunt 
lobes, the awn deciduous; palea narrow, villous, as long as the lemma and not 
inclosed in it; anthers large, minutely pointed, bearing a few short stiff hairs.— 
A stout perennial rhizomatous grass with long narrow compound panicles. 
The genus differs from Stipa in the membranaceous lemma without a strong 
callus, in the weak deciduous awn and in the equal palea not inclosed. The 
pilose-tipped anthers show a relationship to 
: Stipa through the section Lasiagrostis. In as- 

| pect it resembles Calamovilfa but the callus is 
| 


aN je 


\ 


not bearded. 


Psammochloa mongolica Hitchc., sp. nov. 


Culms 1 to 1.5 meters tall, erect, glabrous, 
from strong rhizomes; sheaths glabrous; ligule 
thin, about 1 cm. long; blades firm, glabrous, 
flat or soon involute, elongate, strongly nerved 
on the upper surface, 5 to 10 mm. wide, ex- 


a ass 
<== 


row, erect, pale and shining, the branches 
ascending or appressed, only slightly scabrous; 


\\RY/ 
\ tending into a long fine involute point; panicle 
‘i 1 one-third to half the height of the plant, nar- 


LEZ 
LEE 


A 


scaberulous pedicels; glumes equal, narrow, 
acute, weakly nerved, puberulent; lemma about 
as long as the glumes, narrow, villous, the awn 
weak, straight or somewhat flexuous, 8 to 10 
mm. long, early deciduous; palea narrow, as 
long as the lemma, villous, not inclosed at 
Fig. 1.—Spikelet and floret maturity. k 
of Psammochloa mongolica, Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 
5 dia.: anther tip X10 dia, 1,296,544, collected at Tsagan Nor, Outer 
Mongolia, on dunes at 1000 meters altitude, 
in 1925, by R. W. Chaney (no. 502) on the Third Asiatic Expedition of the 
American Museum of Natural History. A second specimen was collected 
at Gatun Bologai, on dunes, Chaney 443. 


1 Received January 18, 1927. 


spikelets about 1 cm. long, longer than the 


MARCH 19, 1927 HITCHCOCK: NEW GRASSES 141 


In 1847 Hooker published a new species of Muhlenbergia (M. 
rariflora Hook. f.2 from Cape Tres Montes, southern Chile, where it 
was collected by Darwin. Later this species was independently 
described by Steudel under a new genus, Orthachne (O. retorta. Nees 
in Steud.)? and based on the same collection cited above. Miss D. 
K. Hughes (now Mrs. Wilson Popenoe) established the identity of 
the two species and took up the earlier specific name as Orthachne 
rariflora (Hook f.) Hughes.‘ 

In a recent collection of Chile plants made by Dr. E. Werdermann, 
received from the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, there was 
a new species which appears to be congeneric with the one mentioned 
above. Orthachne differs from Stipa in the membranous texture of 
the lemma which does not inclose the palea. As 
Miss Hughes points out* Orthachne differs from the 
allied Streptachne R. Br. of Australia in having the 
palea equal to the lemma instead of much smaller 
and in having a joint at the base of the awn. ‘The 
new species described below has the faintly 1-nerved 
ovate-lanceolate glumes, the equal palea, and the 
habit of Orthachne (the glumes are narrow and the 
first is 3-nerved in Streptachne), but the awn is con- 
tinuous with the lemma (not jointed). It differs 
from both Streptachne and the original species of 
Orthachne in the pilose midnerve and margins of 
the lemma. It seems to be more closely allied to Fig. 2.—Glumes, 
Orthachne than to the Australian Streptachne, hence Bae es 
is included in the former. Orthachne breviseta »x 5 dia. 
differs from O. rariflora in the short curved awn 
(instead of 2 to 3 cm. long and very flexuous), the continuous (not 
jointed) awn, and the pilose lemma. 

Certain one-awned species of Aristida have been erroneously 
referred to Orthachne and Streptachne. 


Orthachne breviseta Hitchc., sp. nov. 


Perennial in dense tufts; culms erect or ascending, slender, glabrous, 15 to. 
30 em. tall, having a single node near the base; leaves in a dense basal cluster; 
sheaths glabrous; ligules firm, obtuse, 1 to 2 mm. long; blades closely involute, 
glabrous, 0.3 to 0.4 mm. in diameter, sharp-pointed, somewhat curved or 
tlexuous, 3 to 5 cm. long, the single culm blade below the middle, 1 to 1.5 cm. 


2 Bot. Antarct. Voy. 371. pl. 131. 1847. 
SSymne Pl hme OT 854 
* Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. 1923: 301. 1923. 


142 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 


long; panicles rather loose, 3 to 5 cm. long, somewhat nodding, the branches 
slender, glabrous, ascending, rather lax, 1 or 2 at a place, the lower as much as 
2 cm. long; spikelets few, longer or shorter than the ultimate pedicels; glumes 
nearly equal, ovate-lanceolate, acute, 3 to 4 mm. long, glabrous, nerveless, 
the lower half purple, the upper half hyaline; lemma nearly terete, purple, 
about 4 mm. long, five-nerved, the intermediate pair of nerves very obscure, 
hairy between the lateral nerves and the margin, the midnerve densely short- 
pilose on the lower three-fourths, the callus short, acutish, densely short- 
pilose, the apex of the lemma gradually narrowed into a stout, scaberulous, 
curved, untwisted awn, 3 to 4 mm. long, the sides of the lemma extending 
upward as two short slender teeth at the base of the awn; palea acute, as long 
as the lemma and not inclosed in it, pilose between the 2 faint adjacent 
nerves. 

Type in the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, collected on Volean 
Yates, Province of Llanquihue, Chile, alt. 1300 meters, March, 1925, by E. 
Werdermann (no. 669). The type is the only specimen seen. 


BOTANY.—WNew grasses from Panama.1 AGNES CHASE, Bureau of 
Plant Industry. 


In preparing manuscript on the grasses for the forthcoming Flora 
of the Panama Canal Zone, it is necessary to use names of new species 
that have been in manuscript for some time awaiting the completion 
of revisions of genera. ‘The proposed Flora will not contain descrip- 
tions, for which reason the new species from the Canal Zone and 
immediate vicinity are described here. Two new combinations are 
also made. 


Thrasya Hitchcockii Chase, sp. nov. 


A tufted perennial; culms rather slender, about 70 cm. tall, ascending, 
simple except for axillary leafless long-peduncled racemes, very flat, sparsely 
pilose; nodes constricted, the lower short-pubescent; sheaths keeled, pilose, 
especially at the summit and along the margin, or the uppermost nearly 
glabrous; ligule firm-membranaceous, about 1 mm. long; blades 15 to 30 cm. 
long, 5 to 6 mm. wide in the middle (the uppermost reduced or obsolete) © 
tapering to both ends, rather firm, finely pubescent on both surfaces and 
coarsely pilose, at least at the base and along the margins, as well, the pale 
midnerve prominent beneath; inflorescence terminal and axillary, the solitary 
arcuate racemes 10 to 20 em. long, on long very slender angled pilose pe- 
duncles, 2 or 3 peduncles from the uppermost sheath; rachis 2 mm. wide, the 
narrow membranaceous margins upturned, glabrous, or with a very few long 
hairs on the edge; spikelets subsessile, spreading about 45°, somewhat crowded, 
oblong-elliptic, turgid, 3.5 mm. long, 1.8 mm. wide; first glume minute or 
obsolete; second glume slightly shorter than the sterile lemma, faintly 5- 
nerved, pilose on the upper third and along the margins; sterile lemma sub- 
acute, deeply sulcate, shghtly indurate, but thinner down the center and prob- 


1 Received January 25, 1927. 


- MARCH 19, 1927 CHASE: NEW GRASSES 143 


ably splitting at maturity, faintly 5-nerved, the first lateral pair of nerves: 
minutely crested at the apex, pilose along the margin near the summit, the. 
sterile palea as long as its lemma, thin with firm nerves, subtending a rudi-. 
mentary staminate flower; fruit elliptic, subacute, 3 mm. long, 1.5 mm. wide, 
the lemma and palea indurate, papillose-roughened, the lemma with a few 
stiff erect hairs at the apex. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium no. 1,269,446, collected at the edge 
of a copse, on a hill, Chorrera, Province of Panama, September 16, 1911, by 
A. 8. Hitchcock (no. 8140). 


This species is intermediate between the two groups of Thrasya, the ex- 
tremely specialized T. petrosa (Trin.) Chase and its allies and 7. cultrata 
(Trin.) Chase and 7’. campylostachya (Hack.) Chase, which resemble Pas- 
palum pilosum Lam. 


Axonopus centralis Chase, sp. nov. 


Perennial in large bunches; culms erect to stiffly spreading, simple except 
for the axillary inflorescence, 40 to 90 cm. tall, leafy throughout, compressed, 
glabrous; nodes glabrous; sheaths keeled, striate, hyaline-margined, usually 
pubescent on the overlapping edge, at least toward the summit, appressed- 
pubescent on the sides of the collar; hgule minute, firm, fimbriate; blades 
folded and keeled at base, flat above, rather lax, 15 to 50 cm. long, 8 to 10 
mm. wide, rather strongly nerved, very sparsely pubescent on the upper 
surface, glabrous beneath, ciliate on the margin toward the base; inflorescence 
terminal and axillary, finally long-exserted on very slender striate peduncles, 
the terminal of 3 to 6 racemes, the axillary of 2 or 3, the upper 2 or 3 approxi- 
mate, the lower remote, the common axis 1 to 6 em. long; racemes 8 to 15 
em. long, lax, ascending or spreading, the slender rachis glabrous, minutely 
scaberulous on the angles; spikelets subsessile, mostly rather distant, oblong, 
3 mm. long, 0.7 mm. wide, the glume and sterile lemma equal, extending one- 
third their length beyond the fruit, 3 nerved (rarely a faint outer pair in 
addition) or the midnerve commonly suppressed in the sterile lemma or in 
both, the lateral nerves of the glume extending into minute scabrous teeth at 
the apex, the internerves bearing a band of silky pubescence; fruit 2 mm. long, 
0.7 mm. wide, oblong-elliptic, pale-stramineous. 

This species is related to Azonopus leptostachys (Humb. & Bonpl.) Hitchce., 
from which it differs in its smaller size, fewer and much shorter racemes, and 
in the minutely dentate apex of the spikelet. This character has not been 
observed in any other species of the genus. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 928831, collected in open grass- 
land between Culebra and Pedro Miguel, Canal Zone, August 28, 1911, by 
A. 8. Hitchcock (no. 7928). ) 

Other specimens of this species..are: Panama: Between Culebra and 
Pedro Miguel, Hitchcock 7928. Ancon, Hitchcock 19891. ‘Taboga Island, 
Hitchcock 8077. NicesRAGuA: Jinotepe, Hitchcock 8716. 


Axonop us ater Chase, Sp. Nov. 


A densely tufted perennial; culms ascending, simple except for the axillary 
inflorescence, 40 to 50 cm, tall, leafy at the base, compressed, glabrous; nodes 
appressed-pubescent ; sheaths much shorter than the internodes, keeled, the 
margins stiffly ciliate; ligule minute, fimbriate; blades folded throughout, 


144 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 


keeled, rather stiff, 4 to 15 cm. long, 4 to 5 mm. wide (opened out), obtuse and 
scabrous at the apex, sparsely papillose-ciliate on the margin; inflorescence 
dark purplish brown throughout, terminal and axillary, long-exserted on 
very slender peduncles, the terminal of 2 to 5, the axillary of 2 racemes, 
2 or 3 digitate, the others 5 to 12 mm. below; racemes 4 to 6 em. long, widely 
spreading, the center angle of the slender rachis sharply raised; spikelets 
subsessile, not crowded, oblong-elliptic, 1.7 to 1.8 mm. long, 0.7 mm. wide, 
the glume and sterile lemma equal, covering the fruit but not exceeding it, 
strongly 2-nerved, the midnerves suppressed, blotched with blackish purple, 
glabrous or the glume very obscurely pubescent at base; fruit about the size 
and shape of the spikelet, pale stramineous, minutely papillose-striate, the 
lemma with a very minute tuft of hairs at the apex. — 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,259,877 collected on moist clay 
on side of cut along railroad, Gatun, Canal 
Zone, September 2, 1911 by A. 8. Hitchcock 
(no. 7976). 

This species belongs in the group that 
includes Axonopus Purpusii (Mez) Chase 
(Paspalum Purpusit Mez?) differing from 
the North American forms in the smaller, 
glabrous blackish spikelets, and from the 
few South American species of this group 
having glabrous spikelets in the smaller 
blackish spikelets with two-nerved glume 
and sterile lemma. 


Paspalum subciliatum Chase, sp. nov. 


A tufted perennial; culms erect and 
crowded from a short horizontal rhizome, 


eae nif the innovations short and subglobose, re- 
ji My a sembling bulblets at the base of flowering 
EN 4 culms; culms simple, 15 to 45 em. tall, 


slender, compressed, striate, glabrous, leafy 
: below; sheaths striate, glabrous or with a 
Fig. 1.—Paspalum subciliatum, few hairs on the margins at the summit, 
inflorescence, natural size; spike- the lower mostly short and crowded, the 
let and fruit, X 10. upper one elongate and bladeless; ligule cili- 
ate, about 0.5mm. long; blades erect, folded 

at base and slightly wider than the sheath, flat above, drying more or less 
involute, with attenuate tip, 10 to 20 cm. long, 2 to 3 mm. wide (or occasional 
lower ones 5 to 8 em. long and 5 mm. wide), jong-pilose on the upper surface 
toward the base, otherwise glabrous; inflorescence long-exserted, with a dense 
tuft of short white hairs at base; racemes 2, conjugate (rarely a third below), 
narrowly ascending to spreading, 3 to 6.5 cm. long, one usually a little longer 
and naked at the very base; rachis slender, flexuous, glabrous, purplish; 
spikelets grayish green, solitary, subsessile, scarcely or not at all imbricate, 
elliptic, subacute 2.2 to 2.4 mm. long, 1.2 to 1.5 mm. wide; glume and sterile 
Jemma equal, covering the fruit, 3-nerved, the glume minutely pubescent, 


* Bot. Jahrb. Engler 56: Beibl. 125: 10. 1921. 


MARCH 19, 1927 CHASE: NEW GRASSES 145 


the hairs longer around the margin, the sterile lemma ciliate toward the 
summit, otherwise glabrous; fruit pale, very minutely papillose striate. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 734821, collected in a savanna, 
in the vicinity of Balboa, Canal Zone, September 6, 1911, by A. 8. Hitchcock 
(no. 8017). Putter 4500, collected in Sabana de Juan Corso, near Chepo, 
Province of Panama, also belongs to this species. 


This species belongs to the Notata group, and somewhat resembles P. 
minus Fourn., from which it differs in the more slender culms, subglobose 
innovations, narrower blades and especially in the grayish spikelets, pubescent 
on the glume with a delicate fringe of hairs showing from the flat (sterile- 
lemma) side. 


Paspalum centrale Chase, sp. nov. 


Plants perennial, in small to rather dense and spreading tufts; culms often 
branching from the lower nodes, sometimes from the middle ones, ascending 
to spreading, occasionally geniculate and rooting at 
the lower nodes, 15 to 60 cm. tall. (usually 30 to 45 
em.), compressed, ridged, glabrous; nodes glabrous; 
sheaths rather loose, mostly exceeding the internodes, 
from sparsely to conspicuously pilose, sometimes 
glabrous except near the margins, rarely throughout; 
ligule brown, membranaceous, 2 to 3 mm. long; 
blades flat, ascending, 5 to 25 em. long, 3 to 10 mm. 
wide (commonly 10 to 20 em. long and 5 to 7 mm. 
wide, the uppermost reduced), long-acuminate, 
about as wide at the base as the summit of the 
sheath, pilose throughout, often sparsely so or 
rarely subglabrous on the under surface; racemes 2 
to 6, distant about + to 2 their length, or the upper 
closer, 2 to 7 cm. long, mostly widely spreading, often 
arcuate, the common axis slender, narrowly winged, 
rather stiff, sometimes bearing scattered long hairs 
toward the summits of the internodes, the rachises 
1 to 1.8 mm. wide, long-pilose at the base, the hairs 
sometimes as much as 10 mm. long, hispidulous and 
sometimes with a few scattered long hairs on the 
margins and on the midnerve above; spikelets 
mostly solitary (the secondary one of the pair rudi- 
mentary, or a few developed in some racemes) 
slightly or scarcely imbricate, 2 to 2.3 mm. long, 1.7 to 1.8 mm. wide, elliptic 
obovate, olivaceous to brownish, glabrous; glume and sterile lemma barely 
or scarcely covering the fruit, rather fragile, 5-nerved, the outer one of the 
lateral pair sometimes obscure; fertile lemma and palea shining, very min- 
utely papillose-striate, at first pale turning dark brown. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 950876, collected in open flat 
meadow near the coast, La Union, El Salvador, November 13, 1911, by A. S. 
Hitcheock -(no. 8789). 

Along ditches and in moist open ground near the coast Salvador to Panama. 
The following specimens are from the Canal Zone: Panama: Culebra, 
Hitchcock 7985, 8059. Balboa, Hitchcock 8004, 8005, 8008, Chivi Chivi, 
Killip 4077. Las Sabanas, Pittier 6817. 


oS 6 or ~ 
Z vate 
\ / Oe 
i] c ,, 
lene oS 
q| I : rh se 
¢ eae | | 
[ | : 
. | | c 
\oeeaie (acs HY 
y ‘ / 
| j 
/ 
\ ] 
CY H/ 
i) \ 7, 
NY 


Fig. 2.—Paspalum 
centrale, inflorescence, 
natural size; spikelet 
and fruit, < 10. 


146 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 


This species is closely related to Paspalum Boscianum Fligge from which 
it differs in being perennial, not so coarse and less branching in habit, in the 
pilose foliage, in the relatively slender racemes, with’ narrower rachises and 
mostly solitary, rather less turgid spikelets. The panicles of depauperate 
plants of Paspalum Boscianum with solitary spikelets resemble shorter- 
racemed panicles of P. centrale, but such plants are readily distinguished by 
the difference in foliage. The spikelets of P. centrale never assume the rust- 
brown color characteristically (but not constantly) found in those of P. 
Boscianum. 


Paspalum Standleyi Chase, sp. nov. 


A slender tufted perennial, forming leafy mats, the culms spreading, some 
of them rooting at the lower nodes or creeping: culms 20 to 27 cm. long, 
slender, compressed, simple or branching at the base, glabrous or sparsely 
pilose below the nodes; nodes bearded with ascending hairs, the upper 
sparsely so: leaves aggregate at base, the sheaths keeled, the lower rather 
broad, papillose-pilose, especially along the midnerve and margin and on the 
collar, the upper glabrous except on the margin 
and collar; ligule minute; blades flat, spreading, 
3 to 6 cm. long, 3 to 6 mm. wide, rounded at 
base, sparsely papillose-pilose on the lower sur- 
face, papillose (or with a few hairs) to glabrous 
on the upper, the upper blades mostly suppressed; 
racemes 3 or 4, spreading, 2.2 to 4 cm. long, on 
a slender glabrous common axis 1 to 1.5 em. long, 
the axils glabrous or nearly so, the slender rachis 
dark purplish, glabrous; spikelets solitary on short 
flat pedicels, scarcely imbricate, narrowly ovate, 
somewhat unsymmetrical, subacute, depressed- 
plano-convex, 1.6 mm. long, 0.9 mm. wide, glab- 
rous, pale or purple-tinged; glume and sterile 
lemma equal, barely exceeding the fruit, the 
midnerve suppressed, the marginal nerves strong, 
the sterile lemma obscurely longitudinally wrinkled in the middle; fruit 1.5 
mm. long, 0.7 mm. wide, pale. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,269,445, collected in marshy 
thicket, Juan Didz, Province of Panama, January 11, 1924, by Paul C. 
Standley, no. 30548. 


This species is allied to Paspalum hyalinum Nees of Brazil, from which it 
differs in its spreading habit, softer foliage, the blades much shorter and 
broader, and slightly larger spikelets, the thin glume and sterile lemma not 
hyaline and tearing in the middle as in P. hyalinum. 


y/ 


Fig. 3.—Paspalum Stand- 
leyi, inflorescence, natural 
size; spikelet and fruit, X 
10. 


Paspalum acutum Chase, sp. nov. 


A robust perennial, probably 2 meters or more tall; culms simple, glabrous, 
leafy to the summit; sheaths overlapping, compressed, striate, pilose on the 
margin at the summit, otherwise glabrous, the junction with the blade 
slightly constricted, dark colored; ligule membranaceous, 1.5 to 2 mm. long; 
blades about as wide as the sheath, slightly rounded and folded at base, 


MARCH 19, 1927 CHASE: NEW GRASSES 147 


flat above, 30 to 75 cm. long, 14 to 18 mm. wide, long-acuminate, glabrous 
beneath, sparsely pubescent on the upper surface and with long hairs back of 
the ligule, the margins sharply serrulate, the uppermost blade greatly reduced; 
inflorescence scarcely exserted (in specimens seen), the main axis rather 
slender, 10 to 15 em. long, plano-convex, scabrous on the margins; racemes 
6 to 10, thick, heavy, nodding, 9 to 12 cm. long, with a tuft of long hair at the 
base, the rachis 1 to 1.5 mm. wide, slightly flexuous, scabrous-serrulate on the - 
margin, otherwise glabrous; spikelets in pairs on minute slender pedicels, 
imbricate, olive-green, elliptic, 3.5 to 3.9 mm. long, 2 mm. wide, abruptly 
acute; glume and sterile lemma equal, abruptly pointed beyond the fruit, 
5-nerved, the lateral nerves close together near the margins, the glume silky- 
ciliate on the margin near the summit or nearly glabrous (spikelets varying in 
a single raceme), the lemma glabrous; fruit elliptic, 3 mm. long, 1.8 mm. wide, 
pale-stramineous, the lemma and palea minutely papillose-striate under a 
lens. 


Fig. 4.—Paspalum acutum, inflorescence, natural size; spikelet and fruit, x 10 


Type in the U. S. National Herbarium no. 1,037,448, collected in dry 
fields, Ancon, Canal Zone, September 18, 1917, by E. P. Killip (no. 4003). 


The two specimens seen lack the base, but the species belongs to the 
Virgata group and is undoubtedly perennial. It differs from Paspalum 
virgatum L. in the more leafy culms and in the pointed elliptic spikelets, 
glabrous except the margin of the glume toward the summit, and_in the pale 
fruit. 


Sorghum vulgare sudanense (Piper) Hitchcock. 
Andropogon sorghum sudanensis Piper, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 28: 33. 
1915 


Holcus sorghum sudanensis Hitche. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 29: 128. 
1916. 


148 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 


PLANT ECOLOGY.—The sotl-reaction preferences of certain plant 
orders... Epgar T. WuHeErry, Bureau of Chemistry. 


The data thus far published on the soil-reaction preferences of 
plants have referred chiefly to individual species or to ecological 
associations. It seems of interest to consider the matter from a 
different standpoint, namely, that of the orders into which plants 
naturally fall. The present study has been undertaken to ascertain 
whether any significant differences could be recognized in the soil- 
reaction preferences of the orders of higher plants represented in the 
northeastern United States. 

The plan adopted was as follows. In a copy of the Check List of 
the Plants of Gray’s Manual, 7th edition, 1908, the names of the 
orders, taken from that manual itself, were first inserted in their 
proper places between the families. Columns representing the several 
degrees of acidity or alkalinity to be recognized were then ruled in 
the margins, and a mark was placed opposite each species upon which 
any observations had been made, in the column corresponding to 
what appeared to be the optimum reaction-value for that species. 
The data were, finally, summarized and are presented herewith. 7 

In a treatment so general as is here attempted, it is impracticable 
to recognize a large number of different degrees of acidity or alkalinity, 
and the number has been reduced to three, mediacid, subacid, and 
circumneutral. Although these terms have been repeatedly defined 
by the writer,? it seems desirable to state here their equivalence in 
terms frequently used by others. Medzacid signifies the highest de- 
gree of acidity commonly met in normal soils; in the “‘specific acidity” 
plan of statement it signifies an active acidity in the hundreds; in the 
logarithmic plan, it represents pH 4.1 to 5.0. Swubacid represents, 
correspondingly, an active acidity in tens, or pH 5.1 to 6.0. Active. 
acidity 10 or pH 6.0 appears to be the lowest degree of acidity at 
which oxylophytes or acid-place plants thrive. The plants which 
favor values of acidity lower than this seem, for the most part, to 
grow about equally well a similar distance on the alkaline side of the 
neutral point. The term circumneutral, which is accordingly applied 
to them, covers the range from an active acidity of 8 to an active 
alkalinity of 8, or from pH 6.1 to 7.9, inclusive. 


1 Received January 24. 
2 Soil acidity, etc. Ecology, 1: 160. 1920; Smithsonian Annual Report, 1920: 247. 
1922. Soil reaction in relation to horticulture, Bull. Amer. Hort. Soc. 4: 1. 1926. 


MARCH 19, 1927 WHERRY: SOIL-REACTION PREFERENCES OF PLANTS 149 


In Table 1 a dash (—) is placed in a column opposite the order name 
when no significant number of species belonging in that order appear 
to thrive best at the reaction indicated, a lower-case x when a moderate 
number of species do so, and a capital X when the majority of the 
species show that reaction-preference. ‘The summary indicates that 
very few orders prefer mediacid soils, and that approximately two- 
thirds of those covered fall in the circumneutral group. It is hoped 


TABLE 1.—THE ORDERS OF HIGHER PLANTS IN THE NORTHEASTERN UNITED STATES 
AND THEIR APPARENT SOIL-REACTION PREFERENCES 


< 2 
es a 
p 5 
PLANT ORDER = a . PLANT ORDER a a z 
oP lee = felicia iets 
ee lwecle see ollee 
= 7) oO = D S) 
HOMITGENES sas doe ees — x xX ATMA OS a Wee ieee osc fi pe x xX 
Bomusetales...5....... — x x Papaverales.. 725... ..: — Xx xX 
ycopodiales.......... x x x Parmacenialess i742). alge x _ 
Conmiterales 5: ...... X Ȣ x ROSALES ae haces kare x x x 
Pame@anales.. 00... 6. - — x x Geraniales gic. s uae % x x 
WWayagales:-..........:| — x x Sapindalesw.n.c3.. 7: x xX x 
Cwamimales kl. x x xX Rhamnaleseie.2. 8. a x x 
Ae SN Se x % aX. Mialivalese 2s 5 .jscunh.. — x xX 
DONATES 2.02 lant | . X x xX WitOlaleSwrvce dirs eee: x x x 
Lil CC ae % x xX Opuntialess yee x x x 
Scitamainales.......... — — xX WWinvaGaleSte cals, coast x xX X 
Oretrames. is. i 6... x x x Wimbellslest. 5... ax x x 
merales.o..0.:.......) = — x BGIGALCS inreseiss Carsak: x > x 
SH] (Ss re - K x Rrimmlales: face tal ba x xX 
Whynte@sles so. 6... kk. x xX ‘x Bibendlesmc cat. .: x xX x 
Juelandales.:.......... — xX x Gentianaless.-) x x x 
Leitneriales...........]| — — xX Polemoniales......... x x x 
Ramalesi an, ot hh x xX x Plantaginalesss. 2. 72. _ K xX 
HOMbIEALES =. koa. ol S x xX Riubiales pesca: tc xX x x 
Bainialales sh ac och Jal =X xX x Campanulales....... x Xx x 
Aristolochiales........ xx x SS) SS aS 
olveonales ..c.. <<. x Bs xX Number with each 
Chenopodiales........ _ x x OP UMMUTME 5.2 eee 3 11 30 
Caryophyllales........ x x xX 


that these data may be of use in considering the geological history of 
the plant orders, the reasons for their present distribution, and similar 
problems. Perhaps some day discussions of “reaction and range” 
may take the place of the current one on “age and area.”’ The present 
preliminary note may serve to indicate to what extent differences 


between the soil-reaction preferences of plant orders may be looked 
for. 


150 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 


ENTOMOLOGY.—Some_ scoliid wasps from tropical America.! 
S. A. Ronwer, Bureau of Entomology, United States Depart- 
ment of Agriculture. 


Recently I have received from Mr. Harold E. Box certain specimens 
of scoliids for identification. Among these was one species which 
was being introduced into Porto Rico to help in the control of white 
grubs. This species is new, and its description, along with some 
related forms and a species of Hlis, is presented at this time to make 
the names available to authors who may be dealing with the economy 
and habits of these species. 1.) te * 


Genus CAMPSOMERIS Guérin 


GROUP TRICINCTAE 


Some of the species here grouped around tricincta (Fabricius) were assigned 
by Saussure and Sichel? to their species group plumipedis. ‘The other pre- 
viously described species was characterized subsequent to Saussure’s and 
Sichel’s work. The species of the group tricinctae can be distinguished from 
plumipes and allies by the presence of dense red or reddish hair on the apical 
segments of the abdomen and the presence of a patch of hair on the wing 
membrane adjacent to the stigma. The following characters are common 
to all females of the group éricinctae: 

Length 12-20 mm. Black; basal three or four tergites marked with 
yellow; head and thorax clothed with fulvous hair; thorax in some species 
marked with yellow; terminal abdominal segments clothed with fulvous or 
rufous hairs; wings infumate or subhyaline, costa usually darker and usually 
a dusky spot at end of radial cell (indistinct in lémosa); area adjacent to 
stigma densely clothed with hair (less so in limosa). 

Males of only two (tricincta and fulvohirta) of the species are in the National 
Collection. They may be assigned to this group by the dense red hair at the 
end of the abdomen. 


KEY TO THE FEMALES OF GROUP TRICINCTAE 


1. Posterior aspect of propodeum sloping, not sharply separated from the 
dorsal aspect which is closely covered with distinct, large punctures; 
stermites alll lack: < oct ie a ea ee 2. 

Posterior aspect of propodeum perpendicular, sharply separated from 
dorsal aspect which is without close uniform punctures; sternites marked 
with yellow; area inclosed by first cubital and at least most of radial 
cells clothed with long hair; a dark spot beyond apex of radial cell... .3. 

2. Dorsal part of posterior aspect of propodeum closely and coarsely sculp- 
tured; yellow markings on tergites interrupted into spots; only anterior 
part of area inclosed by first cubital cell clothed with hair; no distinct 
dark spot beyond radtalicelleeyy ve seein Bees limosa (Burmeister). 


' Received January 28, 1927. 
2 Cat. Species Gen. Scolia, 243. 1864. 


MARCH 19, 1927 ROHWER: SCOLIID WASPS FROM TROPICAL AMERICA 151 


Dorsal part of posterior aspect of propodeum smooth, almost without 
punctures; first three tergites with yellow bands; area inclosed by first 
cubital and radial cells clothed with brown hair; wing beyond radial 
Gomedarki rowel suey POLES Se completa, new species. 

3. Disk of propodeum separated from the posterior aspect by a transverse 
ridge which is higher medianly; legs rufous; yellow markings of tergites 
forming continuous bands; pronotum without yellow spots 

tricincta (Fabricius). 

No transverse ridge separating disk of propodeum from the posterior 
aspect; femora, at least, black; yellow markings of tergites usually 
forming lateral spots ae Pee) enn cer! AMR bey Na EN er SOLAS ener st NOs 4. 

4, Metanotum with a yellow spot and about two-thirds as long as dorsal 
aspect of propodeum; disk of propodeum with a lot of long bristle-like 
hairs; fourth tergite with a small yellow spot on each side 

hesterae, new species. 

Metanotum black and about three-fourths as long as dorsal aspect of 
propodeum; disk of propodeum with dense appressed pile and without 
a bunch of bristle-like hairs; fourth tergite black... .fulvohirta (Cresson). 


CAMPSOMERIS (CAMPSOMERIS) LIMOSA (Burmeister) 


Scolia limosa Burmeister, Abh. Naturf. Gesel. Halle, 1: (pt. 4) 28. 1853. 
Female and male. 

Elis limosa (Burmeister) Saussure, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, ser. 3, 6: 246. 
1858. 

Elis (Dielis) limosa (Burmeister) Saussure and Sichel, Catal. Species Gen. 
Scolia, 250. 1864. (Judging from variation allowed these authors had 
more than one species included under this name). 


All the specimens of this species before me are from Mexico and the follow- 
ing definite localities are included: Huipulco (August 29, 1922, E. G. Smyth); 
Coapa, D. F. (August 18, 1922, E. G. Smyth); Oaxaca (September, 1923, 
E. G. Smyth, Chittenden no. 13670); District Federal (L. Conradt). These 
specimens show but little variation in structure or color, and agree well with 
the original description. The absence of a distinct, infuscate spot beyond the 
apex of the radial cell helps to distinguish this species. 

Turner? synonymizes (mexicana Cameron) = rokztanskyi Dalla Torre with 
lhmosa. Judging from the original description by Cameron this cannot be 
correct. Cameron very definitely states that the apical segments of the 
abdomen have black hairs, while in /zmosa the apical segments of the abdomen 
are clothed with red hair. 


Campsomeris (CAMPSOMERIS) completa, new species 


This species comes nearest to limosa (Burmeister) but the differences given 
in the above key should make it easy to distinguish the two forms. The 
complete yellow bands on the tergites and general habitus suggests relation- 
ship with certain of the species which have the pubescence of the head and 
thorax pale and of the apical tergites black. The color of the pubescence is 


3 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 8, 8: 624. 1911. 


152 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 


distinctive and until the species of the other group have been carefully studied 
it is impossible to point out the relationships in this direction. 

Female.—Length 16 mm. Clypeus gently convex, covered with coarse 
longitudinal wrinkles; frons, vertex and occiput smooth with only a few widely 
scattered punctures; basal joints of the flagellum spinose at apex beneath; 
pronotum with close, distinct punctures; mesoscutum with large, distinct, 
rather close punctures except over a small median area; scutellum smooth, 
with a median longitudinal impressed line and a few large ‘punctures laterally ; 
metanotum with large distinct punctures on basal portion, its median length 
about two-thirds the median length of dorsal aspect of propodeum; posterior 
face of propodeum sloping, not distinctly separated from the dorsal aspect, 
the median part smooth and with only a few scattered punctures, the lateral 
parts with small punctures dorsally; dorsal aspect of propodeum with uni- 
form, distinct, close punctures; tergites dull, with a few scattered setigerous 
punctures; sternites polished, with scattered setigerous punctures which are 
arranged in two rows on the third and are more numerous and closer on the 
base of second and apex of fourth; apical margin of radial cell oblique above, 
arched outwardly below and exceeding the second cubital cell. Black; 
first three tergites with transverse apical yellow bands, that on the first 
slightly indentate medianly, that on the second with two broad forward 
projections laterally, that on the third broadly produced forward medianly; 
tegulae, tarsi and spines on tibiae rufo-piceous; head, dorsum of thorax and 
apical two abdominal segments with long ferruginous hair; sides of thorax, 
femora and basal abdominal segments with long gray hair; appressed pile 
gray, not abundant, occurring only on sides of thorax and posterior aspect of 
propodeum. Wings dusky hyaline, costal margin of fore wings ferruginous 
basally and followed by an elongate brown area beyond the radial cell; area 
inclosed by first cubital, radial and part of second cubital and median cells 
covered with brown hair. | 

One paratype shows a narrow yellow band on the fourth tergite and another 
is only 14mm.long. Otherwise there is very little variation in the specimens 
in the type series. 

Type locality.— Victoria, Mexico. e 

Other localities —Cerro, Mexico, and Guanajuato, Mexico. 

Described from three (one type) females from the type locality collected 
March 16, 1922, by T. C. Barber and T. E. Holloway; from one female from 
Cerro, collected October 28, 1922, by E. G. Smyth; and one female from 
Guanajuato. 

Type and four paratypes.— Cat. no. 40167 U. S. N. M. 


CAMPSOMERIS (CAMPSOMERIS) TRICINCTA (Fabricius) 


Tiphia tricincta Fabricius, Systema Entom., 354. 1775; Spec. Insect. 1: 
451. 1781; Mant. Insect. 1: 280. 1787; Entom. Systema, 2: 227. 1793; 
Systema Piez. 235. 1804. 

Elis (Campsomeris) tricincta (Fabricius) Saussure, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 
ser. 3, 6: 246 and 248. 1858. Female. 

Blis (Dielis) tricincta (Fabricius) Saussure and Sichel, Cat. Species gen. 
Scolia, 248. 1864. Female and male. (Probably only for those speci- 
mens from the West Indies). 

Campsomeris (Campsomeris) pyrura Rohwer, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 49: 
(no. 2105), 235. 1915. Female and male. 


- MARCH 19,1927  ROHWER: SCOLIID WASPS FROM TROPICAL AMERICA 153 


There seems to be nothing in the original Fabrician description of this 
species, or any of the subsequent descriptions by the same author, to justify 
the assumption of Saussure that it was described in the male. While the 
original description applies fairly well to the male, the male has more yellow 
markings on the thorax than is called for. The description does apply very 
exactly to the female and the original mention that the first joint of the 
antenna is ferruginous makes the identity nearly certain. In fact the mention 
Of this character convinced me that the specimens to which I gave the name 
pyrura were really triconcta. There seems no reason to doubt the above 
synonymy. 

The original description gives the locality as, ‘“Habitat in America Dom. 
v. Rohr.” and Saussure and others have considered that the species occurred 
in a number of the islands of the West Indies as well asin Mexico. It may be 
that the species does occur in many islands of the West Indies and in Mexico, 
but it seems more probable that in recording this distribution authors have 
confused other forms with tricincta. I have seen this species from the follow- 
ing localities:—Porto Rico: Mayaguez (types of pyrura), Mamayes 
Santa Rita, San Juan, Maricao, Arecibo, Adjuntas, Manati, Aibonito, 
Naguabo, Cayey, and Barros. Harti: Port au Prince. 


Campsomeris (CAMPSOMERIS) hesterae, new species 


It seems probable that this species will be found in some collections under 
the name lzmosa (Burmeister) as the variation permitted for limosa by Saus- 
sure indicates they had more than one species under that name. Besides 
differing from limosa by the characters mentioned in the above key, the 
species may be separated from lzmosa by the distinct black mark which occurs 
in the fore wing beyond the end of the radial cell. This new species is more 
closely allied to the West Indian fulvohirta (Cresson) and may be found to 
vary so as to be distinguished from Cresson’s species with difficulty. The 
material before me can be easily distinguished by the characters given in the 
foregoing key. | 

Female.—Length 18 mm. Head smooth with only a few scattered punc- 
tures, these closer on the vertex; clypeus convex, smooth, with punctures only 
basally; apical joint of antenna shorter than the two preceding, truncate 
apically; pronotum with close, distinct punctures; mesoscutum smooth 
medianly, laterally with close, distinct punctures; scutellum smooth, with a 
few large, distinct punctures laterally and basally; metanotum with distinct 
punctures along basal margin, two-thirds as long medianly as the median 
dorsal aspect of the propodeum; propodeum truncate posteriorly, the posterior 
aspect smooth, perpendicular and distinctly differentiated from the dorsal 
aspect; dorsal aspect of propodeum with close, uniform, rather large punc- 
tures, not produced medianly or separated from the posterior aspect by a 
carina or ridge; tergites dull, with a few scattered setigerous punctures; 
sternites shining, smooth, the second with many rather close punctures 
basally, remaining sternites with scattered setigerous punctures; radial cell 
oblique apically and exceeding the second cubital cell. Black; median spot 
on metanotum, lateral spots on first four tergites (those on second and third 


154 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 


narrower laterally), apices of anterior femora beneath and bases of anterior 
tibiae exteriorly yellow; tegulae, tibiae and tarsi rufo-ferruginous; head, 
dorsum of thorax, apical margins of tergites, all of fifth and sixth tergites, the 
three apical sternites and tibiae and tarsi clothed with long ferruginous hair; 
sides, venter of thorax and dorsal aspect of propodeum with fine appressed, 
pale golden pile; hairs of sides of thorax, femora, base of first tergite and basal 
sternites pale yellow. Wings dusky hyaline, costal margin ferruginous 
basally, beyond the radial cell with an elongate subviolaceous spot; area 
inclosed by the first cubital and radial cells clothed with long dark brown 
hair. 

The paratype from Guatemala is 20 mm. long. One paratype from 
Venezuela is 17 mm. long. Another paratype from Venezuela is 14 mm. 
long, has two small yellow spots on the scutellum and two yellow spots on the 
pronotum. A paratype from ‘‘Ecua”’ is 22 mm. long and has the spots on the 
first three tergites connected forming complete bands, those on tergites two 
and three being deeply emarginate medianly. 

Type locality—Tucuche, Trinidad, British West Indies. 

Other localities.— Cayuga, Guatemala; Las Adjuntas, Venezuela; ‘‘Eeua”’ 
(Eeuador).. 

Described from two females (one type) from the type locality collected May 
31, 1925, by Hester M. Rohwer; one female from Guatemala collected June, 
1915, by W. Schaus; three females from Venezuela collected June 29 and 30, 
1926, and July 12, 1926, by H. E. Box; and one female from ‘‘Ecua’”’ from 
C. F. Baker collection. 

Type and five paratypes.— Cat. no. 40168 U.S. N. M. 

One paratype returned to H. E. Box. 

The material collected by Mr. Box was sent under his number ‘E”’ and 
accompanied by a note stating that the species had been collected at Guatire 
(300 meters), Venezuela; that 1t frequented flowers of Clibadiuwm, Melochia 
and (?) Wedelza; that it had been introduced into Porto Rico and had arrived 
there alive and oviposited regularly on grubs of Lachnosterna portoricensis. 


CAMPSOMERIS (CAMPSOMERIS) FULVHIRTA (Cresson) 


Scolia (Elis) fulvohirta Cresson, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phila., 4: 119. 1865. Female 
and male. 

In two of the females from Santiago, Cuba, before me the pronotum is 
entirely black. Three females from Santiago, Cuba; one female and one male 
from Taco Taco, Cuba, April 1-6, 1922. The last two mentioned specimens 
agree almost exactly with the original description. Also one male from 
Portland, Jamaica, determined by W. J. Fox. 

Two females collected at Miami, Florida, May, 1917, by W. M. Mann are 
assigned here. They differ from the Cuba specimens in having the yellow 
spots on the tergites somewhat smaller and in having the third sternite blaek. 


Genus Ets Fabricius 


Elis caracasana, new species 


The species is probably more closely allied to the species toluca (Cameron), 
centralis (Cameron) and parvimaculata (Cameron), but it differs from these 
species in having the abdomen black except for a yellow band on the first 
tergite. It also resembles montivaga (Cameron), but besides the difference in 
color of the abdomen, it may be distinguished from Cameron’s description 1n 


MARCH 19, 1927  ROHWER? SCOLIID WASPS FROM TROPICAL AMERICA 155 


having the basal median area of the propodeum not roughened. The large 
spines on the legs are whitish instead of being rufous. ‘The species is rather 
characteristic and may readily be recognized by its dark color, the infuscated 
costal margin of the wing and the coarse sculpture of the frons. 

Female—Length 17.5 mm. Clypeus with large, irregular, sometimes 
confluent punctures, anterior margin almost without sculpture and nearly 
truncate; frons with coarse, irregular, sometimes confluent punctures and with 
distinct, deep, impressed line from between bases of antennae to almost the 
anterior ocellus; area surrounding the ocelli and vertex shining, with large, 
scattered punctures; distinct transverse groove behind posterior ocelli; 
posterior orbits smooth but with a few punctures along the hind margin; 
dorsal aspect of the pronotum opaque, granular and in addition with large, 
irregular, sometimes confluent punctures; mesoscutum bipunctate, the large 
punctures widely distributed and in the posterior part of the median area they 
are elongate; scutellum unipunctate with large, scattered punctures; dorsal 
aspect of the propodeum opaque, finely granular, with no distinct area set off 
by large punctures; posteriorly the dorsal aspect is irregularly wrinkled and 
this irregular wrinkling extends onto the sides of the posterior aspect ; posterior 
aspect with the median area with dorsad-ventrad aciculations; mesepisternum 
with large, close, distinct punctures; sides of the propodeum with oblique 
rugae and with the areas between the rugae aciculate; first tergite with small, 
separate punctures; the second, third and fourth tergites with the punctures 
slightly larger and closely crowded together; the fifth tergite bipunctate but 
the small punctures rather inconspicuous and the larger punctures not much 
larger than those on the posterior margin of the fourth tergite; pygidium 
longitudinally striate for its entire length; sternites with large, scattered 
punctures near their apical margins; inner calcarium of the posterior tibia ~ 
strongly curved basally and with a prominent tooth at the end of the curved 
portion; fourth abscissa of the cubitus subequal in length with the second 
intercubitus and shorter than the third abscissa of the radius, but slightly 
longer than the fifth abscissa of the cubitus. Black; head, thorax and legs 
and ventral part of abdomen with scattered, glistening white hairs; the ventral 
part of the anterior face of the first tergite with a patch of long white hair; 
first and second tergites with a faint violaceous reflection; median posterior 
spot on the scutellum, metanotum medianly, a median longitudinal line on 
dorsal aspect of propodeum, lateral posterior angles of propodeum, oblique 
spot on side of propodeum, a transverse band on the first tergite medianly 
(dilated at the sides) yellow; wings subhyaline, the costal margin deeply 
infuscated and with a violaceous tinge; venation black. 

Paratypes show the species may vary in size from 18 to 12 mm., that the 
oblique yellow spot on the sides of the propodeum may be wanting, and that 
there may be elongate yellow spots on the sides of the third tergite basally. 

Described from eight females (one type) collected by Harold E. Box in 
July, 1926, at Las Adjuntas, near Caracas, Venezuela, 960 meters above sea 
level, on flowers of Clibadium surinamense and Melochia caracasana. 

Type and paratypes.—Cat. no. 40239 U.S. N. M. 

One paratype returned to sender. 


156 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


The American Geophysical Union will hold its eighth annual meeting 
April 28 and 29, 1927, at the National Academy of Sciences, 21st and B 
Streets, Northwest, Washington, ID. Gs, with, the following schedule of 
meetings. 

Thursday, April 28.—9:30 a.m. to 12:30 p.m., Sections of Geodesy and 

Terrestrial Magnetism and Electricity.—2:30 p. m. to 5:30 p.m., Sections of 
* Voleanology and Oceanography. 

Friday, April 29.—9:30 a.m. to 12:30 p.m., Sections of Meteorology and 
Seismology.—2:30 p.m. to 5:30 p.m., General Meeting of the Union. 


New York University is now arranging for the installation, in its new Daniel 
Guggenheim School of Aeronautics, of a wind tunnel which will represent 
the most up-to-date equipment in this country for testing airplane models. 
It is estimated that air velocities in the tunnel will exceed 100 miles per hour. 


The Petrologists’ Club met at the Geophysical Laboratory on February 
15. JAMES GILLULY reviewed Twenhofel’s Treatise on sedimentation, and J. B. 
MeRrtIzE reviewed Tarr’s Origin of chert and flint, adding new observations of 
his own on chert formations in Alaska. LL. LaForen, in an informal com- 
munication, showed a fragment of vein quartz containing unusual casts of a 
pyroxene, some of which completely penetrated the block. 


Dr. Ropert H. LomBarp resigned from the Geophysical Laboratory on 
March 1, to join the research laboratory of the Norton Company, manu- 
facturers of grinding wheels and refractory products, at Worcester, 
Massachusetts. 


Mr. O. W. Torreson sailed from New York for Peru on February 17 to 
relieve Mr. R. H. Goddard who has been in charge of the Huancayo 
Magnetic Observatory two years. 


a 


: 
; : 
. 


AFFILIATED ‘SOCIETIES 


adn os y Ake a The Geological Society. 
: Apri aot ~The Biological Society. | 
arch 19. The Philosophical Society. Program in cieiep aimee tain | 


March 26. The Biological Society. _ 


Gi 2 00th sr pyiarintys of the Annecy of Sir one Newton: 


Pact R. Hen: The contributions of Newton to mechanics and to astronomy. 


RNAL oo APR. 4 1927 ee 


wig tts Var, c Sh * 
WV MUS S— 
OF THE 7 “SONAL MUS" 


= “ a < ’ 


TON ACADEMY — 
IENCES 


"BOARD OF EDITORS : 
- Aqnes CHASE : Joan B. Reesrpe, Jr. 
oTISM ‘BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 
ASSOCIATE EDITORS : 
ie ea S. A. RonwEr of. 
EE eee ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 3 
| _G. W. Stosz 
<a, _ GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
Pye : J. R. Swanton 
"BOTANICAL SocTETY | ae os EA 5 ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
Leeper ts ok ie E. Wickers 
po CHEMICAL SOCIETY 
at Lee "PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 7 Sy 


Be BY THE 

ke -wasmmnero ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Mr. RoyaL anp Guizrorp AVEs. 
‘Barrtwons, MarYLAND 


x += ‘ > 


E peuaes it: 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., codes the 
Accep tance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
ty Act of October 3, 1917, Authorized on July as 1918 


This JOURNAL, =o official o organ of thi shington ademy 
_ present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To 
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members 
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanati 

(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy 

notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, exe 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calenda 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the edi 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request. frc 

issue of the J OURNAL for the following f ourth or samy AEE ctivel: 


Manuscripts may be sent to any member 
-elearly typewritten and in suitable form for prir Ww : 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obv es — err 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of pub 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggeste 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. oe oo A 
Tilustrations will be used only when necessary and will be ed to tex’ 
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing ¢ cu for llust: ations must b 
_ partly met by the.author. So ace: 

Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. 

Authors’ Reprints -—Reprints will be furnished at the follo 


Copies 4 pp. cee. Ppa = 12 pp. c 

50° $.85 $1.65 $2.55 

100. 490% et GOO ees Re Das” O.. 
150 205 © A380 = 2b eB: 
200 2352008 Ee a a 
250 3. 00 5.30: 1: 6.25, 


An additional charge of 25 cents will ine made for ch split page. 


Covers bearing the name of the author i title of the eartiale, with inclusiv 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. 3 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his. peas foe extra copies 
ahead invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. pce: 


‘The rate of Subscription per pe 
Semi-monthly tumbere. 3 oe a ae ee 
Monthly numbers........-.+.sseeeeeeeeeeereneereescesteees 


Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sei neces, 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washingt 
European Agent: Weldon | & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. __ 
Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other "publications. | 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, wee bie 2 cla 
within thirty days after date of the following issue. . . 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3. 00. Special rate 
are given to members of scientific societies a iated with the eect Bi : 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vor, 17 | AprRIL 4, 1927 | No. 7 


OCEANOGRAPHY .—The tide at Tahiti! H. A. Marner, Coast , 
and Geodetic Survey. } 


Particular interest attaches to the tide at Tahiti since this island 
furnishes a striking exception to the general rule that ‘‘the tide follows 
the moon.’ Instead of coming later each day by about 50 minutes, 
high water here generally comes about noon and midnight and low 
water about six o’clock in the morning and six o’clock in the evening. 

Precise data with regard to the tide at Tahiti have been wanting. 
Only short series of observations appear to have been made, and 
these, for the greater part, a number of yearsago. Recently, however, 
at the instance of the U. 8. Hydrographic Office an excellent series of 
automatic tide records covering several years has been secured by 
Mr. Harrison W. Smith of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 
who was sojourning in Tahiti. The tide gauge was installed in 
Papeari Harbor on the southern coast of Tahiti, in latitude 17°45’S., 
longitude 149°22’W. 

A harmonic analysis of a year of these observations has been made 
at the Coast and Geodetic Survey, a series of hourly heights 369 
days in length beginning Feb. 1, 1924, being used. The results derived 
from the direct analysis were cleared for the effects of other com- 
ponents, the analysis and clearance being made in accordance with the 
procedure given in Harris’ Manual of Tides and in Schureman’s 
Harmonic Analysis and Prediction of Tides. The results derived are 
given in Table 1. 

Several of the lesser components were derived, not from analysis, 
but by inference from other components. Such inferred values are 
enclosed in parentheses. The formulae used for inferring the ampli- 
tudes and epochs of these components are as follows: 
2N. = 0.133N2, 2N° = 2N2° = I se Re = 0.00882, Ren = S2°; 
Te = 0.05982, T2° = 82°; 2 = 0.007Mo, 2° = 82° — 0.536 (S2° — M.°) ; 

' Received February 10, 1927. 

157 


158 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


po = 0.024M,, jigs = 2M.° _ 82°; y= 0.194Nz,, Yo = M.° — 0.866 
(M,.° — N,°). 

From the harmonic constants above, it is seen that the tide at 
Tahiti is of the semidaily type, the ratio of K; + O, to M, being 0.29. 
The peculiar behavior of the tide here is evidenced in the relatively 
large value of 8, as compared with Mz, the ratio being 0.88. The ages 
derived from these constants are: phase age 29 hours, parallax age 
—4 hours, and diurnal age —14 hours. The spring range, from the 
harmonic constants, is 1.1 feet, and the neap range 0.1 foot. 


TABLE 1.—Harmonic Constants, TAHITI 


COMPONENT H K COMPONENT H K 

feet ° feet ° 

Ki 0.036 278 O1 0.048 293 
Ke 0.075 20 Pi 0.013 253 
Le 0.010 1 Qi 0.014 290 
Mi 0.003 115 Re (0.002) (20) 
Ma. 0.291 351 Si 0.005 88 
M3; 0.008 195 Se 0.255 20 
M, 0.012 136 S, 0.002 149 
Me 0.006 122 Te (0.015) (20) 
Ms 0.002 148 Ae (0.002) (4) 
No 0.061 353 be (0.007) (822) 
QIN (0.008) 355 v2 (0.012) (352) 


A nonharmonic analysis from the tabulation of the high and low — 
waters, gives a mean range of 0.78 foot, a spring range of 0.97 foot, 
and a neap range of 0.58 foot. It will be noted that the mean and the 
spring ranges, from the high and low waters, do not differ much from 
the corresponding ranges derived from the harmonic constants. The 
neap range, however, from the high and low waters is considerably 
greater. Undoubtedly this is to be ascribed to the relatively large 
effects of disturbances due to meteorological conditions on a tide of 
such small range. From the high and low waters the lunitidal inter- 
vals derived are 12509™ for the high water, and 5*53™ for the low 
water. 

Since 8. is somewhat smaller than M, it is obvious that the oft- 
repeated statement that the tide at Tahiti comes at the same time 
every day, is only a rough approximation. The tabulations show 
that there is some progression in the time of tide from day to day. 
This progression is considerably less than 50 minutes about the time 
of spring tides and considerably more about the time of neap tides. 


APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 159 


At spring tides high water comes about noon and midnight, and low 
water about six o’clock both morning and afternoon. At spring tides 
the tide has its greatest range and is therefore most noticeable while at 
neap tides the times of high and low water are difficult to determine. 
Apparently, therefore, the characteristics of the SpE tides here have 
been taken as the average characteristics. 


BOTANY .+~New plants from Central America.—VII.. Pau C. 
STANDLEY, U.S. National Museum. 


The new species described on the following pages are mostly plants 
collected by myself in Costa Rica during the past two years. They 
include representatives of four South American genera now reported 
for the first time from North America: Puya and Greigia of the 
Bromeliaceae; Ophiomeris, a curious member of that small family, 
Burmanniaceae, related to the orchids; and Panopsis, of the Pro- 


teaceae. One of the new species described, a Brunellia, is a Mexican 
tree. 


Several of the descriptions have been contributed by other writers— 
that of a Salvadorean Agave by Dr. William Trelease; those of three 
Panamanian Caesalpiniaceae by Dr. J. N. Rose; and those of a new 
Scutellaria and a Mendoncia by Mr. Emery C. Leonard. 


| Puya dasylirioides Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants large, terrestrial, 1-2.5 m. high; leaves mostly in a large dense basal 
cluster, stiff, 30-60 cm. long and larger, at base (above the sheaths) about 
5 em. wide, evenly tapering to the long-attenuate subulate apex, thick, finely 
striate, yellow-green, glabrous on the upper surface, beneath finely and closely 
whitish-lepidote; leaf-margins armed with sharp-pointed ascending blackish 
broad-based spinose teeth 4-5 mm. long and 1-4 cm. apart, the tip of the 
blade often unarmed; leaf-sheaths somewhat inflated but hard, dark brown, 
7-8 cm. wide, the upper part of the sheath armed with minute close-set 
teeth; leaves of the stem similar to the basal ones but shorter, decreasing in 
size upward, the uppermost unarmed or nearly so and with thin brown 
papery sheaths; uppermost bracts of the stem 7-8 cm. long, much exceeding 
the internodes, loosely imbricate, abruptly acuminate into an ensiform blade 
1.5-2 em. long, sparsely arachnoid-villous with short whitish hairs; inflo- 
rescence spikelike, 30 cm. long or longer, 5-7 cm. thick, very dense and many- 
flowered; floral bracts similar to those of the stem but shorter, slightly ex- 
ceeding the flowers, thin, dark brown, subulate-acuminate, . short-villous; 
partial inflorescences few-flowered, about 3 cm. long, dense, the pedicels very 
thick, 1 em. long, thinly brownish-tomentose; sepals 12 mm. long, ovate- 


1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For the 
last preceding number of this series of papers see This JoURNAL 17; 7-16. 1927. Re- 
ceived January 26, 1927. 


160 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


oblong, narrowed to the obtuse apex, striate, thinly tomentose; capsule sub- 
globose, 3-sulcate, about 12 mm. long and broad, rounded at base and apex, 
glabrous; seeds very numerous, the body blackish brown, 2 mm. long, longi- 
tudinally striate and pitted between the striae, the wing whitish. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,252,726—1,252,727, col- 
lected in the Laguna de la Chonta, northeast of Santa Maria de Dota, 
Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude 2,100 meters, Dec. 18, 1925, by 
Paul C. Standley (no. 42334). Juvenile plants (no. 43653) collected in the 
paramos of the Cerro de las Vueltas, at 3,000 meters, probably are referable 
to the same species. I did not see any adult plants in the latter region. 


Puya dasylirioides is the most conspicuous plant of the Laguna de la 
Chonta, which is a sphagnum bog of several acres, occupying probably an 
old crater, and inclosed on all sides by dense wet forest. The plants grow 
in great numbers everywhere except in the deep water, their tall stiff stems 
(all in fruit in December) suggesting mullein stalks. This lake is one of the 
most remarkable localities from a botanical standpoint that I have ever seen. 
It yielded a substantial number of curious plants that I have not found 
elsewhere in Costa Rica. 

The genus Puya, represented in the high mountains of South America by 
over 40 species, has not been reported from North America. The Costa 
Rican plant, according to Mez’s monograph, is related to the imperfectly 
known P. Goudotiana Mez, of Bogota. The leaves, with their hard broad 
bases and narrow spine-margined blades, strongly suggest those of some 
species of Dasylirion. They show upon their faces the impressions of the 
spiny margins of the adjacent leaves, produced by mutual pressure in the 
dense rosette which they form, a feature characteristic of the genus Dasylirion. 


Greigia sylvicola Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants large, terrestrial, arising from elongate rootstocks, the stems 
stout, 1-1.5 m. high, densely leafy; leaves linear, 130 cm. long or shorter, 
12-18 mm. wide, long-attenuate to the apex, somewhat dilated at base into 
a short, slightly inflated sheath 3-4 cm. wide; sheaths densely dotted with 
large, closely appressed, brown scales, the blades with a few minute brown 
scales but appearing glabrous, finely striate, thin, when fresh bright green; 
margins of the sheath unarmed, those of the blade just above the sheath 
(for 15-18 cm.) armed with numerous antrorse, dark brown, spinose teeth 
1.5-3 mm. long and 8-22 mm. apart, the margins along the middle of the 
blade for the greater part of its length unarmed or with minute teeth, the 
apex of the blade for 20-25 cm. finely and densely spinose-serrate; in- 
florescence terminal, nearly hidden among the leaves, headlike, many- 
flowered, about 5 cm. long and broad, borne on a stout bracted stalk 4 em. 
long; bracts equaling the sepals, green, linear-lanceolate to (outer ones) 
ovate, thin, long-acuminate, sparsely brown-lepidote, entire below, toward 
the apex densely serrate with coarse brown broad-based incurved teeth; 
flowers sessile; ovary turbinate, 3-angled, 10-15 mm. long, 5 mm. broad: 
sepals free, green, lanceolate, about 2 cm. long, long-acuminate, entire, 
spinose at apex, sparsely brown-lepidote; immature fruit about 1.5 em. long 
and 1 cm. thick, many-seeded. 


APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 161 


Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,252,555, collected in forest 
near Laguna de la Escuadra, northeast of El Copey, Province of San José, 
Costa Rica, altitude about 2,200 meters, Dec. 16, 1925, by Paul C. Standley 
(no. 41975). 

This bromeliad is frequent in the high mountains of the Cantén de Dota, 
but although locally abundant, fertile plants were found only once. The 
plants grow in the densest and wettest forest of oak and bamboo, usually in 
the darkest swamps or in running water, associated with begonias and 
Lobeliaceae. The following sterile specimens, all from the same region, are 
referred to this species: 

Costa Rica: Near Finca La Cima, above Los Lotes, alt. 2,400 m., 
Standley 42797. Laguna de la Chonta, northeast of Santa Maria de Dota, 
alt. 2,100 m., Standley 42357. Cerro de las Vueltas, alt. 3,000 m., Stand- 
ley 44009. 


The genus Grezgia (Bromeliaceae) has not been reported north of Colombia. 
It consists of half a dozen species which range southward into Chile. The 
Costa Rican plant is related, according to description, to G. albo-rosea 
(Griseb.) Mez, of Venezuela, which has broader leaves and larger flowers 


Vriesia disticha (L.) Stand. 


Renealmia disticha L. Syst. Nat. ed. 10. 974. 1759. 
Tillandsia heliconioides H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 1: 234. 1815. 


Pogomesia leiocalyx (Clarke) Standl. 


Pogomesia Raf. (1836) is the oldest name for the genus of Commelinaceae 
to which the name T7inantia Scheidw. (1839) has been more generally applied. 
Tinantia leiocalyx Clarke, Bot. Gaz. 18: 211. 18983. 


Pogomesia erecta (Jacq.) Standl. 


Tradescantia erecta Jacq. Coll. Bot. 4: 113. 1790. 
Tinantia erecta Schlecht. Linnaea 25: 185. 1852. 


Agave compacta Trelease, sp. nov. 


Section Guatemalenses. Acaulescent, not cespitose. Leaves gray-green, 
not transversely banded, fleshy, oblanceolate-obovate, upcurved above the 
thick contracted base, acuminate, plicate upwards, smooth, about 100 cm. 
long and 25 em. wide; spine light brown, dull, smooth, straight, acicular, 
involutely grooved from above the middle with acute edges, decurrent for 
more than its own length, about 50 by 5mm.; teeth brown, 10-20 mm. apart, 
scarcely 3 mm. long in the middle and reduced upwards and downwards, 
triangular from lenticular bases, nearly straight, the margin straight between 
them. Inflorescence densely paniculate, ovoid, 2.5 m. tall and half as 
broad, the scape about equaling the leaves, the horizontal branches few- 
parted at the end, their divisions very compactly flowered; pedicels scarcely 
10 mm. long; flowers yellow, about 40 mm. long; ovary 20 mm. long, equaling 
the perianth, oblong; tube openly conical, about 5 mm. deep; segments 15 
mm. long, shorter than the ovary; filaments inserted toward the throat, 35 
mm. long, more than twice as long as the segments. Fruit unknown; freely 
bulbiferous. | 


162 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,208,021—1,208,024, taken 
from a plant cultivated in the Patio de Ensayos, San Salvador, Salvador, by 
Salvador Calderén (no. 2251). 

Unique in its short compact panicle, commencing at the height of the 
leaf tips. 


Heliconia Lankesteri Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants of medium size for the genus, 1.5-2.5 m. high; petioles long and 
slender, glabrous, the sheaths glabrous, tinged with red; leaf-blades oblong- 
elliptic, about 75 cm. long and 25 cm. wide, abruptly short-acuminate, 
rounded at base, thin, glabrous, green on both surfaces; inflorescence erect, 
pedunculate, deltoid, about 30 cm. long and wide, glabrous throughout or 
nearly so, the rachis thick and stout, conspicuously zigzag, the internodes 
1-3 em. long; bracts about 16, slightly upcurved from near the base, cherry- 
red or dark yellow, long-attenuate to an obtuse tip, closely set, the upper 
basal margin of one bract nearly reaching the base of the next higher bract; 
lowest bract as much as 32 cm. long, the middle ones about 12 em. long, 
strongly concave, the bases 1.5-2.5 cm. high; flowers numerous, dark yellow 
or red, 4.5 cm. long, glabrous; fruits pedicellate, partly exserted from the 
bracts, subglobose, about 1 cm. in diameter. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,228,683-—1,228,684, col- 
lected in wet forest at La Estrella, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, March 
26, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 39494). To this species may be referred 
the following additional collections: 

Costa Rica: Vicinity of Orosi, Prov. of Cartago, Standley 39927. Forests 
of El Copey, Prov. of San José, alt. 1,800 m., Tonduz 11821. 


This plant is related to H. adflexa (Griggs) Standl. (Bihar adflexa Griggs)? 
a Guatemalan species which differs in its pubescent rachis and narrower, 
much more distantly spaced bracts. 

The species is named for Mr. C. H. Lankester, in whose company I made 
the excursion to La Estrella, where the type was collected. 


Heliconia tortuosa (Griggs) Standl. 
Bihaz tortuosa Griggs, Bull. Torrey Club 30: 650. 1903. 


Heliconia straminea (Griggs) Stand. 
Bihai straminea Griggs, Bull. Torrey Club 42: 327. 1915. 


Ischnosiphon elegans Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants erect, 1-1.5 m. high, much branched, the branches slender; leaf 
sheaths 4-14 em. long, conspicuously nerved, puberulent or glabrate; petioles 
2.5 cm. long or less, the lower portion puberulent or scaberulous, the callus 
terete, glabrous; leaf-blades oblong-ovate, 6-17 cm. long, 3-6.5 cm. wide, 
abruptly acuminate, obtuse or rounded at base and usually abruptly con- 
tracted, thin, green, glabrous; spikes solitary, short-pedunculate, 20-25 
em. long, 6-8 mm. thick, the internodes about 2 cm. long, thinly pilose with 


2 Bull. Torrey Club 42: 325. 1915. 


APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 163 


short white hairs; bracts usually 10, lanceolate, 3.5-4 em. long, acute, green, 
appressed or ascending, coriaceous, thinly pubescent, especially near the 
margins, finely nerved; flower 1 in each bract, sessile; ovary glabrous; bract- 
lets oblong-linear, 2.3 cm. long, hyaline, rounded at apex and densely white- 
pilose; sepals narrowly linear, 2 cm. long, pilose; corolla white, the tube 
filiform, over 3 cm. long, white-pilose, the lobes 1 cm. long; capsule cylindric, 
1.5 em. long, pilose at apex; seed and aril together 12 mm. long, 3 mm. thick, 
smooth, mottled with light and dark brown, the aril 3 mm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,253,581, collected in moist 
forest near Tilarfn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude 600 meters, January, 
1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 44251). The following 
additional collections, all from Guanacaste, illustrate the same species: 

Costa Rica: Tilardn, Standley & Valerio 46623. Naranjos Agrios, alt. 
600 m., Standley & Valerio 46487, 46460. El Silencio, Valerio 64. 


The only other Central American species, which grows in Panama, I. 
leucophaeus (Poepp. & Endl.) Koern., has large broad leaves, whitish beneath, 
and clustered spikes. The Costa Rican plant is related to I. gracilis (Rudge) 
Koern., of Brazil and the Guianas, a species with narrower leaves, more 
slender spikes, and seeds twice as large. 


Ophiomeris panamensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Plant hyaline, white, glabrous, the stem about 6 cm. long, 1.3 mm. thick, 
naked, subflexuous; flower solitary, terminal, 2 or 3-bracteate at base, the 
bracts lance-oblong to ovate, 1.5-3 mm. long, appressed; perianth cam- 
panulate, gibbous, 15 mm. long in its greatest length, about 10 mm. wide, 
at base abruptly narrowed, the orifice oblique, 8 mm. broad; corolla limb 
6-parted, the 3 outer lobes short, ovate, and 3 inner ones about 3 cm. long, 
flexuous, filiform, dilated at base, spirally included in bud; stamens 6, equal, 
free, opposite the perianth lobes, the filaments deflexed, expanded into 
petaloid blades, these emarginate at apex; anthers small, 2-celled, the cells 
collateral, almost parallel, longitudinally dehiscent; ovary adnate to the 
perianth, free at apex and rounded, 1-celled. many-ovulate; style 1.5-2 
mm. long, the 3 stigmas short, erect. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,269,478, collected along the 
Pearson Trail on Barro Colorado Island in Gattin Lake, Canal Zone, Panama, 
July 11, 1925, by C. W. Dodge (no. 3484). Collected also along the Shan- 
non Trail on the same island, July 17, 1925, Dodge 3460. 


This is the first representative of the family Burmanniaceae, subfamily 
Thismieae, to be reported from tropical North America. One other member 
of the group, Sarcosiphon americanus (Pfeiffer) Schlechter, was found a few 
years ago near Chicago, a truly remarkable record, inasmuch as the other 
plants of the family are tropical in distribution. 

The available material of the Panama plant is very scant, and the plant is 
so delicate that in the dried state it is difficult to determine its characters 
satisfactorily. According to the most recent treatment of the group, by 
Schlechter, it seems to agree best with the genus Ophiomeris, of which two 
species, both Brazilian, are known. In O. macahensis Miers the orifice of 
the perianth is small and lateral, while in O. panamensis it is merely oblique, 


164 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


and much larger. In the latter, also, the anther cells are much less divergent 
than in the Brazilian species. 

It is strange that this plant has not been found in Panama by other col- 
lectors, especially since Prof. Dodge states that it was plentiful on Barro 
Colorado in the summer of 1925. It may well be that it is an ephemeral 
plant, found only when conditions are exceptionally favorable, and having a 
growth period of very few weeks. 


Myrica phanerodonta Standl., sp. nov. 


Shrub 2.5-3.5 m. high, the older branches subterete, blackish, the young 
ones stout, sparsely or densely pubescent or glabrate, gland-dotted, densely 
leafy, the internodes about 1 cm. long; petioles stout, 2-6 mm. long, puberu- 
lent; leaf-blades obovate or oblong-obovate, 3-6 em. long, 1.38-2.8 em. wide, 
obtuse to rounded at apex, acuminate to broadly cuneate at base, coriaceous, 
serrate, the teeth about 10 on each side, salient, scarcely 1 mm. long, the 
blades deep green above, puberulent along the costa, slightly paler beneath, 
rather sparsely gland-dotted, puberulent on the prominent costa or glabrate, 
the lateral nerves very slender, plane or slightly elevated, straight or sub- 
arcuate, extending to the margin; staminate aments axillary, solitary, sessile, 
10-18 mm. long, 4 mm. thick; anthers 1 mm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 799175, collected on the sum- 
mit of the Voledn de Poas, Costa Rica, altitude 2,644 meters, November, 
1896, by A. Tonduz (no. 10785). The following collections represent the 
same species: 

Costa Rica: Upper slopes of Voledn de Pods, Standley 34884. Cerro de 
Zurqui, Prov. Heredia, alt. 2,200 m., Standley & Valerio 50423. 


Related to M. parvifolia Benth., of Colombia, which lacks the numerous 
salient teeth that mark the leaves of MM. phanerodonta. 


Myrica PUBESCENS Willd. Sp. Pl. 4: 746. 1805. 


Heretofore only a single species of Myrica, M. mexicana Willd. (M. xala- 
pensis H. B. K.), has been known from Central America. ‘This is a common 
and widely distributed plant, frequent in Costa Rica. It is strange that there 
has not been collected in Costa Rica long ago the Colombian Myrica pubescens 
Willd., a well-marked species, common in central Costa Rica, and occurring 
in the vicinity of both Cartago and San José, which are not exactly unex- 
plored regions. The name “‘encinillo’”’ is applied to the tree. The following 
collections of M. pubescens are in the National Herbarium: 

Costa Rica: Vara Blanca to La Concordia, Maxon & Harvey 8477. 
Rio Reventado, Cartago, Standley & Valerio 49386. Between Aserri and 
Tarbaca, Standley 34058, 41356. Quebradillas, Standley 43018. Santa 
Maria de Dota, Standley 41574. Cerro de Piedra Blanca, above Escast, 
Standley 32457, 32586. 


Panopsis costaricensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Large shrub or tree, 5-10 m. high, the branchlets glabrate, densely leafy, 
brownish, bearing numerous pale elevated lenticels; leaf buds densely fer- 
ruginous-sericeous; petioles stout, 4-10 mm. long, glabrous; leaf-blades 
oblanceolate-oblong or obovate-oblong, 6-20 em. long, 2-6 cm. wide, obtuse 


APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 165 


or rounded at apex, cuneately narrowed at base, subcoriaceous, lustrous, 
entire, concolorous or when dry sometimes brownish beneath, the venation 
conspicuous on both surfaces, coarsely reticulate, the principal lateral nerves 
about 6 oneach side, very irregular; flowers yellowish white, racemose, the ra- 
cemes few, forming aterminal panicle, the rachises8—13 cm. long, many-flowered, 
floriferous nearly to the base, thinly pilose with minute, mostly appressed, 
brownish hairs; bracts linear-subulate, about 6 mm. long; pedicels divaricate, 
slender, 3-4 mm. long, pubescent like the rachis; perianth lobes linear, 
5-6 mm. long, pilose outside with sparse minute appressed hairs; hypo- 
gynous scales united to form a membranaceous 4-denticulate cup about 
0.6 mm. high; ovary densely brown-hirsute; style 4 mm. long, glabrous, 
clavate at apex; fruit broadly ovoid, only slightly asymmetric, subsessile, 
about 4.5 em. long and 3 cm. in diameter, obtuse at base, abruptly con- 
tracted to the large mammiliform apex, smooth, glabrous. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 861785, collected on hills of 
Santiago, near San Ramon, Costa Rica, in flower, May 1, 1901, by A. M. 
Brenes (no. 14303). The following additional collections are referred here: 

Costa Rica: Fraijanes, Prov. Alajuela, alt. 1,600 m., Standley &. Torres 
47440. La Ventolera, on the southern slope of Voledn de Pods, alt. 1,700 m., 
Standley 34567. | 

The other species of Panopsis are South American, this being the first 
one reported for North America. The Costa Rican tree resembles in foliage 
characters Bolivian specimens collected by Bang and distributed as P. 
Sprucei Meisn., but the Bolivian species has a much shorter style and copious 


pubescence on branches and leaves. 


Brunellia costaricensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Medium-sized tree with rounded crown, the branchlets stout, glabrous or 
at first very sparsely pilose; leaves opposite, pinnate, the leaflets 7 to 10 
(terminal leaflet often absent), the petiole and rachis together 8-28 cm. 
long, stout, subterete, glabrous; petiolules stout, 8-14 mm. long, shallowly 
suleate above, glabrous; leaflets oblong, 7.5-13.5 em. long, 2.5-5.5 cm. 
wide, rounded or obtuse at apex and abruptly short-cuspidate (cusp 5-6 
mm. long, obtuse), at base broadly rounded to obtuse, somewhat unequal, 
remotely and very shallowly appressed-crenate, coriaceous, deep green 
above, glabrous, beneath pale, when very young rather densely sericeous 
with minute, closely appressed hairs, but soon glabrate, the costa impressed 
above, salient beneath, the lateral nerves very prominent beneath, 15-18 
pairs, ascending, nearly straight, extending to the margin; panicles axillary, 
rather dense, many-flowered, about 16 cm. broad, much branched, peduncu- 
late, the branchlets densely pilose with minute, ascending or subappressed 
hairs, the pedicles stout, 4-6 mm. long, jointed below the middle; calyx 
lobes 5, ovate to elliptic-oblong, 2-2.5 mm. long, acute or acutish, minutely 
sericeous on both surfaces; carpels of the fruit 4 or 5, when fully mature 
3 mm. high, sessile, densely and minutely sericeous, the stout style lateral; 
seeds dark red-brown, very lustrous, smooth, 2.5 mm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,306,244, collected in wet 
forest at Yerba Buena, northeast of San Isidro, Province of Heredia, Costa 
Rica, altitude about 2,000 meters, February, 1926, by Paul C. Standley 


166 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


and Juvenal Valerio (no. 49900). The species is represented by the following 
additional collections: | 

Costa Rica: Yerba Buena, Standley & Valerio 49951. La Palma, alt. 
1,460 m., Tonduz 12605 (J. D. Smith 7412). 


This Costa Rican Brunellia, the only representative of the genus known 
from Central America, has been determined as B. comocladifolia Humb. & 
Bonpl., a species of Colombia and the Greater Antilles. The Colombian 
tree is strikingly different in its nearly sessile leaflets which are softly pubes- 
cent beneath with dense spreading fulvous hairs. Its carpels, also, are 
hispidulous. 


Brunellia mexicana Standl., sp. nov. 


Tree, the young branches stout, terete, glabrous, with short internodes; 
leaves opposite, pinnate, the leaflets 11 to 17, the petiole and rachis together 
11-50 cm. long, slender, terete, glabrous or puberulent; petiolules 2-4 mm. 
long, puberulent or glabrous; leaflets oblong or lance-oblong, 6-14 cm. long, 
24.5 em. wide, acuminate or long-acuminate, at base somewhat oblique, 
rounded to obtuse, appressed-serrulate, subcoriaceous, deep green on the 
upper surface, short-pilose with appressed hairs along the nerves or glabrous, 
the costa impressed, beneath glaucous, when young velvety-pubescent, the 
pubescence in age mostly deciduous except along the nerves, the costa and 
lateral nerves prominent beneath, the latter about 19 pairs, arcuate, extend- 
ing to the margin; panicles solitary in the leaf axils, about 15 cm. broad, 
densely many-flowered, the peduncles elongate, compressed, the branches 
densely tomentose; pedicels 4-7 mm. long, jointed near the base; calyx lobes 
5, oblong-ovate, 2.5 mm. long, acutish, tomentulose on both surfaces, spread- 
ing in fruit; carpels of the fruit 4 or 5, at maturity 5 mm. long, compressed, 
the short stout style nearly basal, the carpels densely tomentose and hispid 
with short stiff hairs: seeds 2 mm. long, dark brown, scarcely lustrous. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,265,699, collected at Teco- 
matla, Veracruz, Mexico, October, 1925, by C. A. Purpus (no. 10454). 

The same species was collected in Oaxaca by Galeotti (no. 7247). 


Brunellia mexicana is much closer to B. comocladifolia than to B. costaricen- 
sis. The Colombian species differs in the broader-based leaflets, green beneath 
and with prominent-reticulate secondary venation, and in the much smaller 
carpels. The pale under surface of the leaflets of B. mexicana is caused, 
perhaps, by a microscopic tomentum, or possibly by a waxy exudate. 


Bauhinia Standleyi Rose, sp. nov. 


Large woody vine, the stem often flattened and then 5 cm. or more broad; 
young branches with dense brown pubescence; tendrils slender, hairy; 
stipules small, broadly ovate to orbicular, 2 mm. long, hairy below, glabrous 
above, caducous; petiole 2-3 em. long; leaf-blades broader than long, 3-5 
em. long, 2-lobed, sometimes cleft below the middle, the lobes rounded, 7 
to 9-nerved, dull green, softly pubescent on both sides; inflorescence ter- 
minal, 4-5 cm. long, many-flowered, pubescent; bracts linear; pedicels 
slender, 10 mm. long or less, bearing 1 or 2 linear bractlets; calyx cup-shaped, 
4-5 mm. long, the lobes 1-3 mm. long, linear; petals 5, very hairy below, 10— 


APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 167 


12 mm. long, erect, greenish white, one of them with small purple spots; 
perfect stamens 10, glabrous; pods broadly spatulate, 6-7 cm. long, 2 cm. 
broad near the top, in age glabrate. 

Type in U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,152,798, collected by Paul C. 
Standley, near Punta Paitilla, Province of Panama, Panama, December 7, 
1923 (no. 26247). The following collections represent the same species: 

PanaMA: Taboga Island, Macbride 2800; Standley 27908. Ancon, 
Piper 6031. Along the Corozal Road near Panama, Standley 23776. Around 
El Paraiso, Canal Zone, Pittter 2577. Vicinity of Penonomé, Williams 134. 


Cassia Killipii Rose, sp. nov. 


Procumbent herb with long slender branches, often 1 meter long, the 
short pubescence interspersed with spreading hairs and more or less viscid; 
stipules minute; leaflets 2 pairs, orbicular to short-oblong, 5-10 mm. long, 
rounded at apex, glabrous above or nearly so, pubescent beneath, strongly 
veined; flowers axillary and solitary or somewhat paniculate above; flower 
bud obtuse, densely long-setose; sepals 8-9 mm. long, obtuse; petals 11-13 
mm. long, brick-red: ovary densely setose; fruit setose, 2.5 cm. long, 5 mm. 
broad. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,266,850, collected by E. P. 
Killip near the Tapia River, Province of Panama, Panama, December 9, 
1917 (no. 3281). The following specimens are referable to this species: 

PANAMA: Vicinity of Penonomé, Willzams 104. Between Paso del Arado 
and Ola, Prov. Coclé, Pitter 5014. Along the Rio Tapia, Prov. Panama, 
in savanna or on grassy slopes, Standley 28186, 30656. 


Cassia pallidior Rose, sp. nov. 


Low shrub, glabrous or nearly so; leaflets 12 pairs or fewer, narrowly 
oblong to orbicular, 1.5-3.5 cm. long, a little hairy when young but soon 
glabrate, very pale beneath, apiculate; stipules linear, caducous; gland be- 
tween the lowest pair of leaflets large, clavate; inflorescence 2-flowered; 
peduncles and pedicels slender; flowers large; sepals thin, orbicular; petals 
orbicular to short-oblong, sometimes 3 cm. long; 3 of the anthers with long 
slender beaks; pod 12-15 cm. long, 5-6 mm. broad. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 676,583, collected by H. 
Pittier near Alhajuela, Panama, January, 1914 (no. 2343). The following 
collections also belong to this species: 

PANAMA: Sabana de Alhajuela, Pitter 3465. 

Costa Rica: Rio, Virilla, Prov. San José, Tonduz 9824 (J. D. Smith 
7007), 12714 (J. D. Smith 7437). 


Tephrosia Heydeana (Rydb.) Stand. 
Cracca Heydeana Rydb. N. Amer. FI. 24: 166. 1923. 


Pavonia fruticosa (Mill.) Standl. 


Sida fruticosa Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 8. Sida no. 18. 1768. 
Pavonia typhalaea Cav. Diss. Monad. 3: 134. 1787. 


168 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


Pavonia Preslii Standl., nom. nov. 


Malachra ovata Presl, Rel. Haenk. 2: 125. 1835. Not Pavonia ovata 
Spreng. 1826. 


Pavonia panamensis Stand. 
Malache panamensis Standl. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 18: 116. 1916. 


Hybanthus guanacastensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Shrub 1.5-4.5 m. high, the branches densely leafy, the older ones slender, 
terete, grayish, the young ones sparsely or densely puberulent; stipules 2.5— 
3 mm. long, broadly ovate, glabrous, the costa and basal portion indurate, 
the costa excurrent as a subulate mucro, the margins scarious, whitish, 
ciliolate; petioles 2-5 mm. long, glabrous; leaf-blades oblong to oblong- 
elliptic, 4-10 cm. long, 1.54.5 cm. wide, acute to long-acuminate, at base 
rounded to acutish and conspicuously oblique, thin, glabrous, rather re- 
motely and irregularly serrate-dentate, the teeth callous-tipped, the vena- 
tion prominent on both surfaces; flowers axillary, solitary, the pedicels 
6-10 mm. long, slender, glabrous, jointed above the middle; sepals ovate, 2 
mm. long, acute or obtuse, thin, greenish, glabrous but ciliolate; lower petal _ 
6 mm. long, panduriform, broad and inflated at base, constricted above, then 
expanded into a short broad truncate blade, glabrous, the upper petals 4 
mm. long; filaments broad, about equaling the villous anthers, the connective 
expanded into a large thin quadrate appendage; immature capsule 6 mm. 
long, orbicular, glabrous, rounded at apex, the persistent style 2 mm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,104, collected in wet 
mountain forest at Los Ayotes, near Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, 
altitude about 700 meters, January 21, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and 
Juvenal Valerio (no. 45423). To the same species are referred the following 
collections from Guanacaste: | ! 

Costa Rica: Quebrada Serena, Standley & Valerio 46161, 46197. Los 
Ayotes, Standley & Valerio 45346. 


Related to H. mexicanus Ging., which has flowers only half as large on 
much shorter pedicels. 


Hybanthus tenuifolius (Dowell) Standl. 
Calceolaria tenuifolia Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 550. pl. 18. 1906. 


Hybanthus longipes (Dowell) Standl. 
Calceolaria longipes Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 551. pl. 19. 1906. 


Hybanthus glaber (Dowell) Standl. 
Calceolaria glabra Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 552. pl. 20. 1906. 


Hybanthus brevis (Dowell) Stand. 
Calceolaria brevis Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 552. pl. 21. 1906. 


Hybanthus angustifolius (H. B. K.) Stand. | 
Tonidium angustifolium H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 5: 377. 1821. 


APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 169 


Hybanthus riparius (H. B. K.) Stand. 
Tonidium riparium H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 5: 378. 1821. 


Hybanthus nigricans (Dowell) Standl. 
Calceolaria nigricans Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 554. 1906. 


Hybanthus humilis (Rose & Dowell) Standl. 


Calceolaria humilis Rose & Dowell, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 10: 125. pl. 
42. 1906. 7 


Hybanthus Rosei (Dowell) Standl. 
Calceolaria Roset Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 338: 555. pl. 22. 1906. 


Xylosma Hemsleyana Stand. 


Hisingera elliptica Clos, Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 8: 226. 1857. 
Xylosma elliptica Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 1: 57. 1879. Not X. el- 
liptica Tul. 1868. 


Symplocos Johnsonii Standl., sp. nov. 


Tree 18 m. high, the branchlets subterete, glabrous, bearing few large 
elevated lenticels; petioles stout, 12-18 mm. long, broadly channeled above, 
glabrous; leaf-blades oblong or elliptic-oblong, 11.5-22 cm. long, 4.5-8 cm. 
wide, abruptly acute, with obtuse tip, acute or acuminate at base, subcoriace- 
ous, entire or essentially so, glabrous, lustrous above, the costa impressed 
above, prominent beneath, the lateral nerves very slender, about 14 on each 
side, arcuate- ascending, laxly anastomosing near the margin; inflorescence 
few-flowered, dense and congested, the flowers sessile; calyx-tube 2 mm. 
long, glabrous, the lobes broadly rounded, 2 mm. long, minutely ciliolate, 
otherwise glabrous; corolla 16 mm. long, the tube 8-9 mm. long, 2.5 mm. 
thick, the 5 lobes obovate or oblong, rounded at apex, glabrous; stamens 
very numerous, free above, equaling the corolla lobes, the filaments connate 
into a tube, very unequal, finely and densely papillose, not collected in 
recognizable fascicles, stout, abruptly contracted near the apex into a very 
slender tip; style 16 mm. long, densely hirsute below. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,081,463, collected at Samac, 
Alta Verapaz, Guatemala, altitude 1,350 meters, October 20, 1920, by Harry 
Johnson (no. 874). 


This species belongs to Brand’s section Symplocastrum, subsection Pseudo- 
alstonia, and in his key to the group, in the Pflanzenreich, runs at once to 
S. quindiuensis, of Colombia. That species has much smaller leaves and a 
smaller corolla. Among the Central American species, S. Johnsonii is con- 
spicuous because of its large leaves. 

The collector reports that the flowers are rose-pink and very fragrant. 
It is a pleasure to be able to name this fine species for Mr. Johnson, who ob- 
tained in Alta Verapaz in 1920 one of the most interesting and most carefully 
prepared collections of plants ever made in Guatemala. 


Chelonanthus alatus (Aubl.) Stand. 
Iusianthus alatus Aubl. Pl. Guian. 204. 1775. 


170 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


Scutellaria argentata Leonard, sp. nov. 


Tall slender herb (only the upper portion of plant available for study); 
stem dark purplish, glandular-pubescent; petioles 1-1.5 em. long, densely 
glandular-puberulent; leaf-blades oblong-elliptic or oblong-obovate, obscurely 
panduriform, acuminate at apex, narrowly cordate at base, rather coarsely 
serrate with flat teeth, both surfaces bearing shiny silver dots, glabrous 
except the glandular-puberulent midrib and veins of the lower surface, the 
veinlets inconspicuously reticulate; flowers numerous, crowded in a terminal 
raceme about 8 cm. long; rachis strongly glandular-puberulent; bracts linear, 
2-3 cm. long, about 0.5 mm. broad, obtuse, deciduous; pedicels 2-2.5 mm. 
long, glandular-puberulent; calyx 4 mm. long, the lobes reddish purple, 
glandular-pubescent, the crest small; corolla bright crimson, sparingly 
pubescent, 4-5 cm. long, the tube slender, 4 mm. broad at throat, gradually 
narrowed to 2 mm. at base, the upper lip much larger than the lower, the 
middle lobe rounded, deeply emarginate, curving over the stamens, the 
lateral lobes short, oblong, 25 mm. long, 8-9 mm. broad, the lower lip tri- 
angular, rounded, shallowly notched at apex; stamens didynamous, curved 
at tip, glabrous, the upper pair 2 mm. longer than the lower, the anthers of 
the upper pair 1-celled, oval, 1.25 mm. long, 0.75 mm. broad, those of the 
lower pair 2-celled, broadly ovate, 1.25 mm. long and broad, cordate at base, 
slightly emarginate at apex; style equaling the upper pair of stamens, curved 
at tip, glabrous, the stigma unequally 2-lobed, the lobes spreading; ovary 
glabrous, on a conical gynobase 1 mm. long and 1.5 mm. broad at base; 
nutlets not seen. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,266,817, collected at La 
Florida, Costa Rica, in 1925, by C. H. Lankester. 


This attractive plant is well marked by its long slender crimson dower! 
glandular pubescence, and silvery-punctate leaves. The slightly paniduri- 
form leaf-blades suggest a relationship with S. costaricana, but that species 
can be separated easily by its smaller corolla and eglandular pubescence. 


Gonzalagunia rudis Stand. 


Duggena rudis Standl. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 18: 125. 1916. 


Since there is some doubt as to the identity of the plant described as the 
type of the genus Duggena, it is preferable to use for this group of Rubiaceae 
the next older name, Gonzalagunia. 


Pentagonia pubescens Stand. 


Watsonamra pubescens Standl. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 17: 441. 1914. 


The generic name Pentagonia Benth. has been rejected because of Penta- 
gonia Vent. (1841), but the latter does not seem to be effectively published. 


Pentagonia Donnell-Smithii Standl. 
Watsonamra Donnell-Smithii Standl. Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 17: 442. 1914. 
Pentagonia Pittieri Stand. 
Watsonamra Pittieri Standl. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 17: 448. 1914. 


APRIL 4, 1927 PROCHEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 171 


Pentagonia brachyotis Stand. 
Watsonamra brachyotis Standl. Contr.U. 8. Nat. Herb. 17: 443. 1914. 


Pentagonia gymnopoda Standl. 
Wuatsonamra gymnopoda Standl. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 17: 444. 1914. 


Pentagonia alfarcana Standl. 
Watsonamra alfaroana Standl. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 15: 287, 1925. 


Cephaelis nana Standl. 
Evea nana Standl. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 15: 105. 1925. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 
947TH MEETING 


The 947th meeting, constituting the 56th annual meeting, was heid in the 
Cosmos Club auditorium on December 11, 1926. It was called to order by 
President Bowie at 8:19, with 46 persons present. 

The report of the Treasurer showed total receipts, $1753.08; disburse- 
ments, $1207.73, leaving a balance of $545.35. The report of the secretaries 
showed that 19 meetings were held during the year, several in conjunction with 
other societies. 

The following officers were elected for the year 1927: President, J. P. 
Avuut; Vice-Presidents, L. H. Apams and P. R. Hryu; Treasurer, W. D. 
LAMBERT; Recording Secretary, H. E. Merwin; Member-at-Large, General 
Committee, O. S. ADAMS. 

At the conclusion of the business meeting, Mr. L. H. Apams presented an 
address entitled What we know about the interior of the earth (Illustrated by 
lantern slides). The outer parts of the earth have been thoroughly explored, 
at the surface and to a depth of a mile or so, but the sum total of our knowl- 
edge of the deeper parts of the earth is not very large. And yet the mysteries 
are slowly being solved. From varied sources information has been gathered 
and pieced together to form a picture of earth’s interior—a picture as yet 
crude and imperfect but one which is gradually being made clearer and more 
complete. 

Volcanoes bring up material from considerable depths and show us that 
beneath the cooler surface is a hot and active interior; the amount of radioac- 
tive substance found in ordinary rocks indicates that unless the earth is,- 
and always has been, growing hotter, the interior must be of a very different 
composition from that of the surface layers; geological studies have given us a 
store of information concerning the structure and composition of the rocks 
found at the surface and allow us to make certain deductions as to the way 
in which the character of the rocks should vary with depth; laboratory meas- 
urements on gravitational attraction tell us the density of the earth as a 
whole and indicate the presence of very dense material at the center; astro- 
nomical data on the motion of the earth give us the moment of inertia of the 


172 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. VOL. 17, No. 7 


earth, from which the distribution of density in the interior can be inferred; 
and finally, the most important of all, the transmission of earthquake waves 
through the earth, taken in conjunction with laboratory measurements on the 
elasticity of rocks, yield very definite and conclusive evidence concerning the 
nature of the earth’s material at various depths. 

The present state of the earth is closely connected with the manner of its 
formation. It is generally agreed that the earth, as well as the other planets, 
were formed from the sun during the close approach of another star, which by 
tidal action pulled out large masses of glowing gas from the surface of the 
sun. One of these detached masses first liquefied and then solidified to form 
the earth. In the two billion years that have elapsed since its solidification, 
the temperature except in the outer few dozen miles has not changed appreci- 
ably. In the center of the earth is a core of iron, about 6000 km. in diameter, 
which settled out during the liquefaction. From the surface of the iron core 
upwards to the lower surface of the ‘‘crust’’ there is mainly ultrabasic rock 
(iron magnesium silicates) while the crust itself, 60 km. in thickness, consists 
of the ordinary granitic and gabbroic rock with a very small amount of 
sedimentary material at the surface. The rigidity of the earth, except near 
the center and near the surface, is everywhere greater than steel. ‘The pres- 
sure increases steadily with depth and is about three million atmospheres at 
the center. The temperature in the very interior is unknown but is probably 
several thousand degrees. Further advances in our knowledge of the earth’s © 
interior will come mainly (1) from a higher precision in seismic data and (2) 
from a complete understanding of the physics of the atom so that the be- 
havior of substances at all temperatures and pressures can be predicted. 
(Author’s abstract.) 

H. A. Marner, Recording Secretary. 


ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
379TH MEETING 


The 379th regular meeting was held Thursday, December 3, 1925, in 
Room 43, National Museum, with President R. A. CusHMAN in the chair and 
25 members and 5 visitors present. 

C. T. GREENE reported the death of Mr. H. W. WEenzEux, Coleopterist, of 
Philadelphia. He was born in Philadelphia, May 16, 1858, and died there 
November 5, 1925, aged 67 years. A committee was appointed to draw up 
suitable resolutions. 

Election of officers followed: President, J. M. ALpRicH; 1st Vice-president, 
J. A. Hysuop; 2nd Vice-president, J. E. GRar; Editor, Cart HErnricH; Corre- 
sponding Secretary-Treasurer, S. A. RonwmrR; Recording Secretary, C. T. 
GREENE; Executive Committee, W. R. Watton, A. N. CaupE.Lu, T. E. 
SNYDER; Representative of the Society to the Washington Academy of 
Sciences, Dr. A. G. B6vina. 

Program: Dr. N. E. McInpoo: 1. Senses of the boll weevil. (Illustrated.) 
2. An vinsect alfactometer. This apparatus was on exhibition and its mecha- 
nism was explained to the society. 

Mr. R. A. CusuMan told of rearing a species of Sympzesis as an external 
parasite of the eggs of Cimbex americana (Leach). The species of Sympzesis 
are normally parasitic on leaf-mining Lepidoptera and the speaker was of the 


APRIL 4, .1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 173 


opinion that the location of the host in this case was the determining factor 
leading to its parasitization by the Sympiesis. 

Dr. ALpRIcH spoke of an interesting chapter in the history of Dipterology, 
giving an account of Meigen’s visit to Kiel, Copenhagen, and Lund in 1824, 
at the expense and in the company of Wiedemann. ‘This trip is described in 
Forster’s biographical sketch of Meigen in Stettiner Ent. Zeitung for 1846. 

Mr. J. L. WEBB made some remarks on the Thurbaria weevil, stating that 
it was considered a variety of the boll weevil. 

Mr. K. W. Bascock spoke briefly, mentioning some of his experiences 
during a recent trip to Europe. 


380TH MEETING 


The 380th regular meeting was held Thursday, January 7, 1926, in the 
National Museum, with President J. M. ALpRricH in the chair and 25 members 
and 11 visitors present. 

Report of the Corresponding Secretary-Treasurer for 1925 was read and 
accepted. 

Dr. H. E. Ewine, Chairman of the Committee which examined the 
Treasurer’s books, reported the books correct. Mr. C. T. GREENE read his 
report as Recording Secretary for 1925. The reports were accepted. 

Dr. O. A. JOHANNSEN of Cornell University was elected to membership. 

Program: W. H. Wuite: Plant resistance to insect injury. Discussion by 
Back, RowHER, and BAKER. 

AustTIN H. Cuarx: Odors of male butterflies. Discussion by BAKER, EWING 
ROHWER and SNODGRASS. 

Mr. Rouwer exhibited a photograph of Dr. Walther Horn, of Germany, 
and his assistant, Miss Christel Doering. 

Mr. J. A. Hystop spoke briefly to the Society on Mr. Chapman’s book on 
insect equilibrium. Discussed by ALpRicH, BAKER, and SNODGRASS. 

Mr. R. C. SHannon exhibited several species of ‘Syrphidae showing good 
examples of mimicry. This material was from the British Museum. ° He also 
spoke briefly about his forthcoming trip to Argentina. 

E. A. Bacx: A Note on Anthrenus seminiveus Casey. This Dermestid 
closely resembles the furniture beetle, Anthrenus fasciatus. The only refer- 
ence to seminiveus is by Casey when he described the type, found in the build- 
ing where he lived. After about 10 years two instances of destruction caused 
by this insect have been brought to the attention of the Department of 
Agriculture within a short time of each other during late 1925. In one case 
the brushes of a shoe-polishing outfit, in a hotel about half a mile from the 
building in which Colonel Casey lived, were ruined. In the other building in 
which Colonel Casey lived, a divan upholstered in curled hair, Spanish moss 
and tow, was found, on removing the cover, to harbor several thousand 
beetles and larvae. This is to be published shortly in the Proceedings of the 
Entomological Society of Washington by E. A. Back and R. T. Corton. 

Mr. Rouwer recorded the occurrence of the European sawfly, Acantholyda 
erythrocephala (Linnaeus), in Pennsylvania. This European sawfly is a well 
known pest to European coniferous trees and two specimens were taken in a 
nursery at Chestnut Hill, Pa., May 7, 1925, by F. F. Smith and A. B. Wells. 
Both of these specimens were males. 

Mr. RouweEr also recorded a second specimen of Zadiprion townsendi 
(Cockerell). This specimen was collected by W. J. Chamberlin, Santa Rita 
Mts., Arizona, July, 1924, and is the second specimen known. Zadiprion 


174 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 7 


townsendi (Cockerell) was described in 1898 from asingle female collected under 
a pine tree in the White Mountains of New Mexico. It is closely allied to 
Zadiprion grandis (Rohwer), an enemy to rock pine in Nebraska. Discussion 
by Baker and Ewine. 

Dr. J. M. AupRricH mentioned a case in nomenclature, where the name of a 
variety proved to be antedated by a name which also antedated the species. 
He asked whether in this case the variety becomes the species, or whether this 
relation is to be determined on taxonomic grounds without reference to 
priority. 


381ST MEETING 


The 381st meeting was held Thursday, February 4, 1926, in the National 
Museum with President J. M. Aupricu in the chair and 29 members and 6 
visitors present. 

Program: R. A. CusHMAN, retiring President: Some types of parasitism 
among the Ichneumonidae. (Illustrated by numerous lantern slides.) Dis- 
cussion by Messrs. Howarp, ALDRICH, BAKER, and GAHAN. 

F. C. CraigHEap: Forest insects. (Illustrated by numerous lantern slides 
showing the effect of the insect damage on the trees.) 


382D MEETING 


The 382d meeting was held at 8 p.m., March 4, 1926, in the National 
Museum, with President J. M. ALDRICH 1 in the chair and 30 members and 15 
visitors present. 

Program: VerNoN L. Kewttoee: Memories of a veteran entomologist, 
Dr. F. H. Snow. Dr. Snow was born at Fitchburg, Mass., June 29, 1840, and 
died Sept. 20, 1908. Hestudied to be a Congregational minister. He was at 
the University of Kansas 42 years and was very much interested in zoology, 
botany and entomology. A great deal of teaching was done in the field and 
26 or 28 major collections were made. Dr. Kn.iuoae told interesting stories 
and incidents of some of these trips. He talked of the formation of the insect 
collection, and mentioned several of Dr. Snow’s famous students. 

Discussed by Dr. Howarp, who spoke of W. A. Snow, son of Dr. F. H. 
Snow. 

Dr. Wm. Scuaus exhibited some books from the Dognin Library. These 
books were given to Dr. Scuaus personally for raising the money to buy the 
Dognin collection of Lepidoptera. These books were of the 17th and 18th 
centuries. Dr.ScuHaus spoke briefly of his impressions of the British Museum 
after an absence of 13 years. 

Dr. ALDRICH said that Dr. Williston sold his collection of Diptera to the 
University of Kansas in order to buy the H. H. Smith Collection of Diptera 
from the West Indies and Brazil. This latter collection was afterward sold 
to the American Museum of Natural History in New York City. 

There was a general discussion on parasitism. 

Mr. Jack BELLER of the Southern Museum of Los Angeles, California, 
spoke briefly to the Society. 

Mr. J. KE. Grar exhibited specimens of the Mexican bean beetle showing 


some variations. 
Cuas. T. GREENE, Recording Secretary. 


APRIL 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 175 


383D MEETING 


The 383d meeting was called to order at 8:10 p.m., Thursday, April 1, 1926, 
in the National Museum with first Vice-president Hystop in the chair, and 
18 members and 10 visitors present. 

The Corresponding Secretary, Mr. RoHwemr, read a circular letter from 
the International Institute for Intellectual Cooperation connected with the 
League of Nations requesting information on methods of distribution of 
technical publications in foreign countries. This matter was referred by the 
Society to the Corresponding Secretary, with power to act. 

Dr. A. L. Meuanper, of the College of the City of New York, and Miss 
GRACE SANDHOUSE of the Federal Horticultural Board, were elected to 
membership. 

Program: W. A. Horrman, of Johns Hopkins University: Biological notes 
on Haitian Anophelines. (Illustrated by lantern slides.) The two species of 
Anopheles known from Haiti, A. grabhami and A. albimanus, were discussed, 
emphasis being placed upon the relations between the larvae of these species 
and their environment. <A. albimanus in the main chose still water exposed to 
the sun, A. grabhamii, shaded streams. In some localities springs were of 
little importance as breeding areas of A. albimanus, while in other localities 
larvae abounded in them. The difference was ascribed to the different 
plant constituents present in the springs of these regions. Rice fields were 
carefully studied owing to the high incidence of malaria in coastal areas 
where this crop was grown. A. grabhamii seldom occurred in such situations. 
The two species reach their greatest abundance at different times, A. albz- 
manus reaching its peak during the last third or quarter of the year, A. 
grabhami as a rule in the period from January through March. Where 
favorable conditions obtain at all times great numbers of A. albimanus can 
be taken throughout the year. <A. albimanusis believed to be the form chiefly 
responsible for the transmission of malaria. (Author’s abstract.) 

Asked in regard to food material Mr. Horrman stated it to be blue green 
algae, Spirogyra, diatoms and plankton. Mr. Rouwer asked in regard to 
control, which was stated to be primarily cleaning out vegetation. HysLop 
and Baker asked further questions in regard to control and Dr. 8. F. BuaKkE 
asked in regard to the deleterious effect of Chara. 

Miss B. M. BroapBent: Notes on the habits and development of the Azalea 
leaf miner, Gracilaria Azaleella Brants. (Illustrated by lantern slides.) 
This species appears to be a native of Japan and first reached the United 
States prior to 1912 on azaleas imported from Holland.. It has since become 
established in New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Florida and the District 
of Columbia. An infestation of the azalea leaf miner at the U. S. War 
Department greenhouses in 1923 was brought to our attention and afforded 
an opportunity to study its habits and development. The moth deposits 
minute eggs singly close to the midrib on the ventral leaf surface which hatch 
about a week later. The larva immediately enters the leaf and feeds as a 
leaf miner for from ten to sixteen days, molting twice before cutting its way 
out and becoming a leaf roller. At first only the extreme tip is folded down- 
ward and attached to the midrib, but after each molt the larva cuts its way 
out and moves to a fresh leaf where it infolds and skeletonizes a greater area. 
The process of webmaking gives evidence of its remarkable industry. One 
larva while attaching leaf margins with webbing was observed to balance on 
its prolegs and sway to and fro 2367 timesinone hour. For a period of 25 con- 


176 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 7 


secutive minutes it averaged 55 oscillations per minute or nearly one per sec- 
ond. As many as thirty strands may be attached between two points before 
changing position. By working from either side of the midrib the webbing is 
cross hatched, and shorter strands bring the surfaces in contact. The ends 
are filled with fan shaped webbing which is iater snipped out to bring opposing 
edges in contact. Folded leaves are often cone-shaped. The larval period 
varied from 20 to 34 days during April, whereas the previous generation had 
required about 55 days. 

When ready to pupate the larva attaches strands of webbing across each 
end of the slightly rolled edge of the ventral leaf surface, filling in the central 
area last. Before emergence it forces itself half way out of its cocoon so that 
the moth leaves the exuvia projecting from it. The pupal period varied from 
7 to 16 days. The sexes appeared in about equal numbers. One female 
deposited 40 eggs. Longevity varied from 1 to 9 days. (Author’s abstract.) 

Messrs. SIMMONS and ScHaus discussed the emergence of the pupa from the 
eocoon. Dr. Exy stated that a native species of Gracilaria in Connecticut on 
swamp azalea is badly parasitized. Mr. RoHwnr and Dr. WeiczEt stated 
that in the introduced species there were no parasites. The out-door dis- 
tribution of the species was given as New York, Pennsylvania, Connecticut 
and Florida. Dr. Cory of Maryland found similar work on azalea in breeding 
beds. 

Under notes and exhibition of specimens Dr. Bovine showed a plate with 
habitus figures and anatomical details of the larva of the flea beetle 
Oedionychis gibbitarsa (Say). He described a few of the characteristic struc- 
tures of the larva, especially the maxillary mala. The latter is apparently 
single, but consists (as a comparison with other Chrysomelid larvae proves) 
in reality of a well developed galea and a large lacinia that is situated behind 
galea and completely fused with it. The galea carries a two-jointed peg and 
irregularly distributed setae; the lacinia is armed with a longitudinal series 
of long stiff setae. The remarkable bilobed mala in the Donacinae, strongly 
adapted for sapsucking purposes, is a further development of the morpho- 
logically simpler structures in the Halticinae and other Chrysomelid larvae, 
combined with the presence of a long stylus from the end of lacinia as it 
occurs in several Coleopterous larvae, for instance, in many Ptinoid larvae 
but not in the Halticinae. 

Dr. HorrMan inquired in regard to the food habit of Blephridae. Mr. 
BARBER Stated that it was sumac. 


SPECIAL MEETING 


On April 20 a special meeting of the Entomological Society was held at 
which Vice-president, J. E. Grar, called the meeting to order and requested 
Dr. Howarp to preside. Dr. Howarp in introducing the speaker, Dr. R. J. 
TitLyarp of Cawthron Institute, Nelson, New Zealand, stated that this was 
only the third time a special meeting had been called to honor distinguished 
foreign visitors. Dr. Timuyarp talked on the fossil insects in the more 1m- 
portant and larger orders and showed some excellent pictures of the fossils, 
which were of great interest to systematists of the Bureau of Entomology. 
Some of the prototypes of present families and groups were of particular 
interest, especially in the case of the roaches and beetles, there being some 
slight indication of a common ancestor of these two groups as well as a com-. 
mon ancestor between the roaches and termites. 


APRIL 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 167 7 


384TH MEETING 


The 384th meeting was held on May 6, 1926, in the National Museum. 
It was called to order by the Corresponding Secretary, Mr. S. A. RoHweEr, 
who in the absence of other officers, requested Mr. A. B. GAHAN, a past 
president, to preside. There were present 13 members and 12 visitors. 

Program: Dr. W. J. Nouan: Sex forms of honeybees. (Illustrated.) Although 
some knowledge of parthenogenesis in the honeybee is credited to Aristotle, a 
scientific basis as to the sexes found in the honeybee was not forthcoming 
until Swammerdam in the latter part of the seventeenth century established 
the sex of the queen. Before that time many curious ideas existed as to the 
three castes, and the method of reproduction in a colony. Some even held 
that the honeybee arose by spontaneous generation from decaying flesh. In 
the latter part of the eighteenth century, over one hundred years after 
Swammerdam’s discovery, Huber, the blind Swiss investigator, made known 
the fact that the queen mates on the wing outside the hive. In Germany 
shortly before this time, Riemer had established, or re-established if Aristotle 
is kept in mind, the fact that in a queenless colony certain of the workers may 
begin to lay, but that their eggs will develop only into drones. Not long after 
this, Schirach had found that a colony deprived of its queen, but possessing 
worker larvae not too old, can rear another queen from one of the worker lar- 
vae. It remained for Dzierzon, in 1842, after empirical evidence from mating 
experiments on two differently colored races, the Italian and German brown, to 
set forth the theory that workers and queens arise from fertilized, and drones 
from unfertilized eggs. Neither the findings of Dzierzon, nor any of the 
other men mentioned, remained unchallenged. It was not until the 20th 
century, following a series of cytological investigations culminating in the 
work of Nachtsheim, that Dzierzon’s opponents were routed. One in par- 
ticular, Dickel, had maintained that all eggs are fertilized, but that the 
workers by use of a salivary secretion determine which are to develop as 
males and which as females. Nachtsheim in his paper of 19138 found no 
evidence of fertilization in eggs from drone cells, but abundant evidence in 
eggs from worker cells. Furthermore he confirmed the reports of earlier 
investigators that the germ cells of the drone at all times contain only the 
haploid number (16) of chromosomes, while the fertilized eggs, from which 
only females develop, have the diploid number (32). Onions in South 
Africa in 1909, and again in 1912, announced to a rather skeptical world, 
that the worker of the South African honeybee, as contrasted with that of the 
European honeybee, could rear workers and queens parthenogenetically. 
This work was confirmed in 1916 by Jack, Entomologist for South Rhodesia. 
Further work on this subject is now reported in progress, especially on the 
cytological side. It should be noted that the African races of honeybees, 
as a group, have sufficient distinct characteristics from the European 
races, as a group, to have led Von Buttel-Reepen to classify them as distinct 
subspecies. 

That a queen can be reared from any worker larva, given the proper food 
and attention, although the basic principle in the extensive queen-rearing 
business of the present time, has never been adequately explained. Doctors 
Becker and Zander in Germany last year gave the results of their endeav- 
ors to get intermediate forms between worker and queen by taking un- 
sealed worker larvae of all ages and transferring them to queen-cells by the 
method commonly employed in queen-rearing. They found that only larvae 


178 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


not more than three and one-half to four days old would develop into queen- 
bees. After this narrow time boundary physical modifications typical of 
workerbees are too far advanced, whereas the development of the reproductive 
organs is so arrested that larvae in worker cells are no longer capable of be- 
coming queenbees. ‘The first introduction of pollen in the food of the worker 
larva seems to mark the end of the time when it can develop into a queenbee. 
The exact factors involved in this arrested development of the reproductive 
system, however, remain to be cleared up. (Author’s abstract.) 

Mr. RoHWER in commenting on Dr. Nouan’s talk stated that a new species 
of Apis has been discovered in Australia. He also stated that students in 
Europe had discovered a parthenogenetic and fertile stage in the sweat-bee, 
Halyctus, and probably this would have some effect on the deduction in the 
theories in regard to the life of the social bees. Mr. RoHwenr further inquired 
concerning subspecies and Dr. Nouan stated that they are usually referred 
to as races or varieties, but Von Buttel-Reepen referred to them as subspecies. 
Dr. SNypER asked in regard to the progeny of the egg-laying workers and Dr. 
No.uan stated that they were all drones but that the spermatheca is slightly 
larger. Dr. SNYDER also referred to Miss C. B. Thompson’s work begun 
with Dr. Gates of Massachusetts Agricultural College on morphological, 
cytological and experimental work on the worker and queen in the honeybee 
to determine whether there were marked differences in the brain, sex organs, 
etc., in these two castes and whether the “royal jelly”’ fed to the three day 
old worker really changed it to a queen or whether there was not some in- 
herent cause, such as there is in termites and ants in the origin of caste. 

Dr. T. E. SnypprR: Insects change building code. Illustrated.) Owing to 
lack of information on the destructiveness of our 42 species of native termites, 
buildings are often erected improperly. In consequence termites greatly 
damage the woodwork of the buildings. It is a great hardship for small 
householders to make expensive repairs before the building has been paid for. 
Such damage is serious in the Southern States, the Central West and Pacific 
Coast. The only effective permanent preventive is proper construction of 
buildings and insulation of all untreated woodwork from contact with the 
ground. Slight changes in city building codes have been suggested to city 
engineers throughout the United States and with the help of the National 
Utilization Commission it is believed that ant-proofing buildings by modifica- 
tion of building codes will be possible. Many large government buildings in 
Washington have been damaged by termites, but active cooperation has been 
affected with the Superintendent of Buildings and Grounds to prevent such 
damage in the future. As object lessons, model demonstration termite-proof 
buildings are being erected in the Canal Zone, Panama, and at New Orleans, 
La. In addition to complete insulation of all untreated wood from the ground 
by the use of concrete foundations or timbers treated with coal tar creosote 
against subterranean termites, not more than 10 per cent of lime mortar 
should be used for making cement or brick foundations, since termites pene- 
trate lime mortar. Together with these precautions in regions where non- 
subterranean termites are a serious menace all interior wood-work and furni- 
ture must be impregnated with zinc chloride or sodium fluoride. (Author’s 
abstract.) 

Mr. Rouwer asked if there would not have to be different building code 
changes for the subterranean and non-subterranean termites. Dr. SNYDER 
stated that this was the case. Mr. Woop discussed damage to nursery stock, 
potatoes and the woodwork of buildings in Kansas. Mr. GAHAN asked in 


APRIL 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 179 


regard to termite damage to structure in rural regions and Dr. SNYDER stated 
that very often farmers use tin termite guards between the foundations and 
upper woodwork. Mr. Srmmons asked in regard to the method of impregnat- 
ing wood with sodium fluoride. Dr. SNypmR stated it to be by the “open 
tank’”’ method and gave details. 

The Corresponding Secretary, Mr. Rouwenr, called upon Mr. O. Mor- 
LAND, of England, to say something about honeybees. He stated that Isle 
of Wight disease due to an Acarine parasite was believed to be absent from the 
United States and that this was probably true since the method of dissection 
was the same in the United States as in England. He had reached these 
conclusions after a conference with Dr. Sturtevant. Mr. Moruanp further 
stated that exclusion of bees from countries where this disease occurred was 
wise. Mr. GAHAN thanked Mr. Moruanp for his kind words about the 
federal quarantine laws in the United States which are so generally being 
criticized at present. 

Mr. Morrison discussed a recent paper on hermaphrodism in scale insects 
and stated that if this work proved true it would have wide application and 
it might be found to apply in other groups of insects. 


385TH MEETING 


The 385th meeting was called to order at 8 p.m., on June 3, 1926, in the 
National Museum by Vice-president J. Hysiop. 

Percy Viosca, Jr., of New Orleans, La., who was to have been the first 
speaker was unable to appear. 

Program: J. A. Hystop: The Bureau of Entomology’s exhibit at the Sesqui- 
centennial exhibition at Philadelphia. (Illustrated.) In addition to exhibit- 
ing the lantern slides prepared by various branches of the Bureau, maps 
aie shown of the exposition grounds showing where the exhibits would be 

oused. 

Mr. P. Stumons gave a talk on the history of carbon bisulphide as a fumi- 
gant and the discovery of its fumigating properties. Credit for the dis- 
covery of the insecticidal property of carbon disulphide has generally been 
accorded to Louis-Michel-Francois Doyére. However, the evidence shows 
that, although Doyére made the discovery independently, his work was 
anticipated by Dr. Lazare Garreau, who published his results in 1854. 
Doyére’s account of his discovery appeared in 1857, following experiments 
carried on at Algiers. Both investigators first used the method for the 
control of insects infesting stored grain. For this purpose, and for the control 
of certain insects living in the soil, carbon disulphide still remains our chief 
reliance after a lapse of about 70 years. Doyére (1811-1863) was a teacher 
of zoology and natural history. He was much interested in the conservation 
of grain, and published on milk, ensilage, and economic entomology. Gar- 
reau (1812-1892) started as a military pharmacist, in which capacity he 
served several years in Algiers. From 1844 until his retirement in 1886, he 
was a teacher of medical chemistry, toxicology, and related subjects in various 
institutions in the city of Lille. Among his publications:-on a number of 
subjects, some of the most important dealt with the respiration of plants. 

Mr. A. B. GAwAN recorded the death of Dr. H. 8. SkinnER, who had long 
been connected with the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, and was 
for many years editor of Entomological News. It was moved by the Society 
that an obituary committee be appointed and Vice-president Hyslop an- 
nounced that this committee would be named later. 


180 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


Mr. GawAn exhibited a drawing of a Chalcid egg parasite in Cicada eggs 
from Meyers of New Zealand. The peculiar arrangement of the ovipositor 
in a sac folded under the body was illustrated in this peculiar new genus. 

Mr. C. L. Lankan exhibited specimens of insects found in flower pots. 
Mr. BarBer determined them as small Collembola. 

Mr. Woop stated that in a shipment of passenger’s baggage were hampers 
full of sparta grass used in making paper, and that 9 species of insects includ- 
ing Chrysomelid beetles and jointworms were found hibernating in the grass. 

Dr. SNYDER gave a short note on the amoebae and spirochaetes recently 
found living in the intestines of termites by various workers and stated that 
since the aborigines or natives of some tropical countries ate termites alive 
possibly there was a relation between these forms of life in the termites and 
pathogenic forms in man. It was stated that very little was known of these 
spirochaetes but that in the history of human disease caused by these organ- 
isms there may have been a relationship in the past. 

Mr. GAHAN stated that he had received a letter from Mr. James Waterston 
of the British Museum containing the statement that what purported to be 
the Motschulsky Collection of Hymenoptera had been discovered in an attic 
room of Moscow University at Moscow. If true, this would make it possible 
to fix the identity of a number of genera and species which are now in doubt. 
Much interest was evidenced in this reported location of the Motschulsky 
collection, Mr. BarBer discussing his collection of Coleoptera and other 
members his work in other orders. 

TuHos. E. SNypER, Recording Secretary pro tem. 


386TH MEETING 


The 386th meeting was called to order at 8 p.m., October 7, 1926, in the 
National Museum, with President ALDRICH, in the chair and 24 members and 
12 visitors present. ) 

Attention was called to the fact that the committee on the obituary notice 
of Dr. Henry SkInNER had taken no action so far. 

Mr. RouweEr stated that it seemed likely that there would be a vacancy 
in some of the offices of the Society, especially that of the editor, before the 
next regular election, and moved that the executive committee be empowered 
to fill any vacancies that may occur before the next annual election. The 
motion was carried. 

Program: J. M. Aupricu: Collecting Diptera in Guatemala. The speaker 
spent April and May in Guatemala, paying especial attention to the collection 
of muscoid flies. While there he traversed the railroads from Puerto Barrios 
to the Mexican border at Ayutla and also visited the Pacific Coast at San 
José. April being in the end of the dry season the collecting was not very 
good. In May, at the special request of the Minister of Agriculture at Guate- 
mala he accompanied a government party to Coban for the purpose of assist- 
ing in investigations of the migratory locust and its parasities. Coban 
being considerably off the railroad it was necessary to ride a mule about 100 
miles to reach it. The return trip was made by a different route coming out 
by the Polochic River, Lake Isabel and Livingston. The amount of material 
collected was considerably less than expected, but some progress was made 
in the study of the parasites of the locust, and other interesting results were 
obtained. 

C. T. Greene: Collecting fruit fies in Panama, A brief outline of the 
localities collected in while in Panama from March 14 to May 27, 1926 was 


APRIL 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 181 


given, and an idea of the breeding methods used. The speaker reported the 
capture of a rare Tachinid fly Bibtcomima Handlurschii B. B. at Ancon, C. Z., 
April 7, 1926. This is the first North American record and the second speci- 
men known. 

Dr. Stepan SOuDEK told how much he appreciated the help given him by 
various people while in America. He said he had gained much valuable 
knowledge regarding the insects. 

Mr. A. F. Burcess of Melrose Highlands, Mass., mentioned some points 
in the work being done by Brown, Meusebeck, and Webber on parasites of the 
gipsy moth. 

Dr. J. B. Parker: Vespula (Dolichovespula) diabolica (Saussure). On 
August 1 of this year the superintendent of the grounds at the Catholic 
University of America, Brookland, D. C., reported that he had found a nest 
_ of ‘yellow hornets,” which were later identified by Mr. Ronwer as Vespula 
(Dolichovespula) diabolica (Saussure). Twice before a nest of “yellow 
hornets,’’ presumably this same species, had been found on the University 
grounds and been burned before the speaker was aware of what was going 
forward, and it was at his request that this one was reported to him instead of 
being destroyed at once. In every case the nest had been placed on an 
evergreen tree and no nest had been over six feet from the ground. In order 
that the identity of the species might be determined, a single specimen was 
captured on August 7 as it was leaving the nest. This specimen proved to be 
a young queen. On the next day the nest was damaged in a storm by being 
dashed against a broken branch on aneighboring limb of the tree on which the 
nest was built. The wasps repaired this damage to the side of the nest and in 
order to guard against any further damage from this source the speaker 
removed the broken limb. The nest was secure until August 21, but when 
next visited, on the 24th, it was found to be completely destroyed. A small 
part of the nest and some of the comb still remained attached to the branch 
on which the nest was built and the rest was scattered about on the ground. 
Everything indicated that the destruction had been the work of mischievous 
boys. Ina piece of the comb were found two fully developed males just 
ready to emerge when the nest was destroyed. These were mounted so 
that in the collection of the Museum are two males and one female of this 
species taken from the same nest. Aside from these two males, the combs 
were empty, neither larvae nor pupae being present. The nest had been 
destroyed a day or two before the speaker discovered the fact, so that what 
evidence was obtained indicates that this species rears its males and young 
queens in early August. The nest, so far as can be judged from its appear- 
ance while on the tree, does not differ from that of the whitefaced bornet 
(Vespa maculata). What differences, if any, might be found by taking the 
nests of the two species apart and comparing their structure are not known. 
It is to be hoped that another nest of these yellow wasps w.ll be found and 
that observations may be carried on under less discouraging conditions. 

Dr. M. C. Hatt gave a brief outline of his recent trip to Central America. 
He was especially interested in animal parasites. 


387TH MEETING 


The 387th meeting was called to order at 8 p.m., November 4, 1926, in the 
National Museum, with President Aupricu in the chair. 

Messrs. HysLtop, CUSHMAN and ScHAUS were appointed as a committee to 
draw up resolutions on the death of Doctor HENRY SKINNER. 


182 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


At the suggestion of Mr. Rouwer the Corresponding Secretary was in- 
structed to send appropriate greetings to the Entomological Society of 
Hungary to be read at the commemorative meeting held to celebrate the 80th 
birthday of Dr. Geza Horvath to be held on November 23, 1926. 

Program: H. E. Ewi1ne: Recent developments in regard to the control of 
chiggers. All the states in the life history of the chigger have been obtained 
but the egg stage. We are not sure that an egg stage exists, but in all other 
species of the family to which the chiggers belong, as far as life histories are 
known, eggs are laid. At the Summer Boy Scout Camp, located on Chesa- 
peake Bay, the following control measures proved effective: sulphuring of the 
badly infested spots, including several of the paths, the cleaning up of all 
dead leaves and other litter near the tents, the protection against chiggers 
by applying sulphur to the skin and clothing. The common box turtle 
proved to be the most important natural host. Turtles of this species are 
being removed and in their place the camp ground is being stocked with the 
painted turtle, mud turtle, spotted turtle, and musk turtle, none of which 
carry chiggers. 

Discussion by Messrs. GAHAN, ALDRICH, SNODGRASS, and RoHWER. 

Dr. W. H. Larrmer spoke briefly on the practical nature of the corn-borer 
problem. Discussion by Messrs. Hystop, RoHwErR, CusHMAN. 

The Society congratulated Dr. and Mrs. W. M. Mann on their marriage. 

Dr. A. G. B6vING gave a general characterization of the larvae of the 
Kumolpinae, discussed their relationship to the larvae of the other 
Chrysomelid subfamilies, mentioned that the genera and especially the species 
of the Humolpinae are very insufficiently represented in the National Museum 
by their immature stages, and concluded with the following comments on the 
characters by which some of the species could be recognized: The larvae of 
Chrysochus auratus (Fab.) has projecting parasternal lobes on the abdomen, 
suggesting hairy prolegs, each anal lobe carries a single chitinous plate, the 
mandible terminates with three teeth, and there is one ocellus on each side 
of the head. An unknown species from Tennessee, feeding on the roots of 
broom-sedge and weeds, is very similar to Chrysochus auratus, but has two 
circular plates on each anal lobe, the mandible terminates with two teeth and 
there are three minute ocelli on each side. The larva of Paria canella (Fab.) 
has distinct and hairy, but not projecting, parasternal lobes, the anal lobes are 
without any chitinization, the ninth abdominal tergite is posteriorly equipped 
with four chitinous, rounded tubercles and the mandible has two terminal 
teeth close together plus one lateral tooth. In the larva of Typophorus 
viridicyaneus (Cr.), from the roots of sweet potatoes, the mandible carries two 
terminal teeth plus one lateral tooth as in Paria canella, and it is also similar 
to this species in all other structural characters except in that the ninth ab- 
dominal tergite has no chitinous posterior tubercles. Graphops pubescens 
(Melsh), Fidis viticida Walsh, Colaspis costipennis Cr. and Colaspis flavida 
Say are very close to Typophorus viridicyaneus, but they can be distinguished 
from this species by the single character that they all possess, a mandible in 
which two terminal teeth are more or less united and a lateral tooth is lacking. 
From each other they can not be separated by any structural difference. 

Mr. J. A. Hysuop read a letter and a portion of a manuscript from Dr. 
G. N. Woucort of Porto Rico on the flight of the butterflies at Port-au- 
Prince, Haiti. 

Dr. J. M. Aupricu spoke briefly on the gatherings of the entomologists at 
Pingree Park, Colorado. He exhibited a copy of the ‘‘Report of the 4th 
Rocky Mountain Conference of Entomologists at Pingree Park, Colorado, 


APRIL 4, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 183 


August 16-21, 1926.” Containing a list of those present, notes on the 
meeting, and a list of officers for 1927. 

Mr. Rouwer exhibited ‘‘Insects of Western North America,” by Prof. 
E. O. Essig and commented on the book as containing much new biological 
information concerning the species, a fairly satisfactory classification, an 
extensive bibliography, and many original illustrations. Mr. RoHwsEr 
believed that this was one of the best books on insects which has been issued 
recently, and contained more names of insects than any other book of its 
size. 

Dr. T. E. SnyprR spoke briefly on the parasites of termites. 

Mr. C. T. GREENE reported the finding of larvae of Rhagoletis pomanella 
Walsh in prunes from North Chatham, New York, October 5, 1926. The 
material was received from Dr. E. P. Fret. 

Cuas. T. GREENE, Recording Secretary 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


The National Academy of Sciences will meet in Washington April 25, 26, 
and 27, in the National Research Council building. On Monday night, April 
25 there will be a popular science lecture for the public. 


The American Geophysical Union will meet April 28 and 29 in the national 
Research Council building. On the evening of the 28th there will be a lecture 
for the public on climatic factors. 


The remainder of the botanical collections of Captain Joun DoNNELL 
SMITH, presented to the Smithsonian Institution in 1905, were recently re- 
ceived by the National Herbarium. ‘The total number of the John Donnell 
Smith Herbarium is well above 100,000. It is especially rich in Central 
American plants and contains the types of the numerous species described 
by Captain DonNELL SmitH. The collection was mounted and in excellent 
condition. It is now accessible for study at the Nationa! Herbarium. 


The Botanical Society of Washington held a special meeting March 15 in 
room 43 of the New National Museum. Dr. C. C. Puirt, of the School of 
Pharmacy, University of Maryland, gave an illustrated talk on the distribu- 
tion and succession of lichens. Dr. E. W. Berry, of Johns Hopkins Univer- 
sity, discussed early forms of vascular plants, especially those of the Devonian 
formation, with lantern slides showing restorations. Dr. Burton E. Liv- 
INGSTON, of Johns Hopkins University, showed a device for measuring avail- 
able water-supply in surface soil. It consists of a small subcylindrical cone 
of porcelain, the tip and upper part impervious to water, and with a porous 
zone about 1 cm. wide. Investigations were carried on in a lawn of the 
University by means of these mechanical root-tips. Dr. Duncan 8. JoHNson, 
of Johns Hopkins University, gave an illustrated talk on the revegetation of 
a valley in Jamaica which had been denuded by a landslide following un- 
usually heavy rains seventeen years ago. 


The Elk Commission, called by the Secretary of War as chairman of the 
President’s Conference on Outdoor Recreation, held a meeting in Washington 
from February 28 to March 3, to consider the problem of preventing the 
starvation of the southern Yellowstone herd of elk in bad winters in the region 
of Jackson Hole, Wyoming. The history of this herd shows that hard winters 
following a period of favorable years reduces the herd so seriously as to 
threaten their extermination. A plan of administration was decided upon for 
the preservation of this, the largest herd of elk in existence. Not more than 


184 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 


20,000 elk are to be maintained. The present winter range will not support 
this number in unusually hard winters, soit was recommended that the Fed- 
eral Government acquire certain private lands, which, being added to the 
existing Federal game refuge and the adjacent property of the Izaak Walton 
League, would provide feed to carry the elk through the bad winters. An 
immediate count of the elk was recommended, the plans to be developed by 
the supervisor of the Teton National Forest, the game warden of the Biologi- 
cal Survey at Jackson Hole, and a representative of the Wyoming State 
Game and Fish Commission. It was proposed that the Biological Survey 
make a study of the life history of the elk and of conditions bearing upon 
their maintenance in suitable numbers. It was recommended that the Wy- 
oming Game and Fish Commission be given wide latitude in handling such 
problems as length of hunting seasons, bag limits, and the establishment of 
hunting areas, and also authority to remove by official killing and disposal for 
economic use any surplus that might remain after hunting. E. A. GOLDMAN 
and T. 8. Patmer, of the Biological Survey, Witt C. Barnss, of the Forest 
Service, are members of the Commission.| 


J. E. Spurr, Editor of the Engineering and Mining Journal, and formerly 
a member of the United States Geological Survey, addressed the Petrologists’ 
Club in the Director’s room at the Geological Survey March 14, on Ore 
magmas and vein dikes. 


Professor JOHANNES WALTHER of the Univers:ty of Halle, Speyer Visiting 
Professor at Johns Hopkins University, spoke to the Pick and Hammer Club 
on March 19 on The formation of red beds in the deserts of Western Australia. 


E. O. Uuricu, G. R. MansFieup, H. D. Misir, L. W. StepHEenson, C. H. 
DANE, PaRKINSON PopENOE, W. T. THom, JR., and C. E. Doxpsin of the 
United States Geological Survey attended the meeting of the American Asso- 
ciation of Petroleum Geologists at Tulsa, Oklahoma, March 24-26. Mr. 
Uxricu and Mr. Dossin read papers. 


45 


x Pa ee 


meno 


“The ie Eno Sit. 


ae 
Py 


‘re 


The: new ° gunn mechener: 


pete | 


¥ 


ie 


Philosophical Society.........0..0005 


Oceanography.—The tide at Tahiti. i. AD [a 
Botany.—New plants from Central America. ren 


TH u 
eee ecweneece ee 


Entomological Society... Eve Ae cee beeeeeees 


Scimntiric Norss anp News... 


te ae gal THe Baton. 


% 


a tie 1 js i 
LS . Clit 


BOARD OF EDITORS . a a 

- Aqnes Case —: Joun B. Reesrng, Jr. ae 
| BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY ss NATIONAL MUSEUM se 

ASSOCIATE EDITORS cn a 


. s. A. RoHwER | E 
ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
sa ‘G. W. Stosx 
oe te gees GEOLOGICAL soctetr ’ 
a J.B. Swanton aM peer 
; . a4 ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
__E, Wicuers. 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 
"PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
IN ‘JULY UGUST, a SEPTEMBER, WHEN ‘ho ahra te 


Journal of the W 


“This J OURNAL, the official organ of the Wa 
present a brief record of current scientific a 
(1) short original papers, written o unicated by membe 
short notes of current scientific literature pu C 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the ademy an 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washingt 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, exce 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volur correspond toc 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript aching th ; 
the twentieth of the month will or inarily appe 
issue of the J OURNAL for the following fourth or 


Manuscripis may be sent to any “member of. 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for pri 
editors cannot undertake to do more than co 
should appear only as footnotes and should incl year. of publicat a 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that oe tes b num 

serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. ; 
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be rr 
or diagrams of simple character. : 

Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof es 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in fi 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. © 

_ Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of 


Copies 4 pp. - 5 Dp 12 pp. : Ss 16 pp. a a eS Goer : 
50 $85.30 $l G5. $2.55. 93 Be ae 
OQ os LOO oe ie — 4,75 6 BO! os = eae 
ASO Pea SO ae cE NR BO he er 
200 2 00 8 E Sues oe RE 2 ON oak AO GE ee a reece 
250 3.00 6.80. O28 ew oak me 


Anadditicnal charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. 3 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the artic! 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his peanuts for extra et pies. if 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his uEre g 
The rate of Subscription per volume is...... Oe ee ee : “eee 
Semi-monthly NGMmbers:-... 8. oi eel Se Se 
Monthly numbers. . ieee ADORE Ie Be i 


Remittances should be made payable i ‘égfadhineton eee: of ‘Sciences, 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington a: 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. uy 
Ezchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other. publications. ee 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, previa that Ne ‘ 
within thirty days after date of the nhc ae issue. 4 


*Volume I, fees fan June ! 19, 1911, to Dicenber: 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Sposa rates 
ate given to members of scientific sosistios affiliated with the Academy. a 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vor. 17 Aprit 19, 1927 No. 8 


PHYSICS.—Some mechanical properties of moist granular solids. 
P. G. Nuttine, U.S. Geological Survey. 


The striking mechanical properties of moldings and and of certain 
silts, clays and soils containing various amounts of water are well 
known and have long been a source of utility and interest. Compacted 
molding sand retains its form and dimensions under rather severe 
mechanical and heat treatment. Wet silts and clays dry out leaving a 
rather hard cake but coarser sands do not unless they contain at least a 
small fraction of the finer material. The finer clays not only cake on 
drying but with considerable shrinkage, reversible with the moisture 
content. The problem under consideration is the underlying cause 
of these peculiar properties of granular solids. 

Such properties have been attributed to a colloidal fraction possess- 
ing unique properties and composition. When separated from the 
mass, however, usually by churning and settling in water, these 
“colloids” were found not to differ greatly in composition from the 
coarser particles with which they were associated.2 In other words, 
the “colloids” are nothing but extremely fine particles of the same 
material—silica and silicates in the case of silt and clay. The question 
might easily be settled by direct observation but for the fact that 
colloidal properties begin to be shown by particles just too fine to be 
observable (in detail) with a microscope, namely at diameters just 
less than the length of a light wave (4 micron). Particles about 
5 xX 10-* centimeters in diameter exhibit the most striking colloidal 
properties. This is about 100 molecular diameters and roughly ;4,5 
the limit of the microscope. 

1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received 
March 1, 1927. 


2U.S. Bureau of Soils, Bull. 1198, 1811, and 1452. A.V. BLEININGER, 2nd Colloid 
Symposium Monograph: 90. 


185 


186 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No.8 


The physical problem is that of finding the mechanical effect of a 
varying moisture content on an aggregate of solid mineral particles of 
a given size and size range and of a given shape. Surface tension, 
vapor tension, atmospheric pressure and internal (adsorption) pressure 
are the forces involved in causing the observed cohesion and resistance 
to deformation. 

It is well known that silica, alumina, most silicates and many metals 
absorb a film of water from 50 to 100 or more molecules deep under 
ordinary atmospheric conditions and part with it with great reluctance 
when desiccated or heated. This film represents 20 to 25 per cent by 
weight in finely divided or porous materials such as bentonite or silica 


gel and about 1 ae even in ordinary sand. 100 molecules of 


ram 
centimeter 

molecule ’ 
ness. The adsorptive force between the silica and the water in contact 
with it is about 17000 atmospheres and decreases almost linearly with 
the depth of the film. The depth of the adsorbed film represents 
equilibrium between external fluid or vapor pressure and internal ad- 
sorption pressure. 

When the quartz grains are in contact, their adsorbed water films 
would be expected to merge out to where the separation is at least twice 
the depth of film, or say 8 X 10-* centimeters. If contact is over 
an area A having a mean diameter 27, then the edge of the film would 
be pulled outward with a (negative) pressure of about 18 atmospheres. 
The two grains in contact would therefore be drawn together with a 
pressure of that magnitude or a force of 18A x 10° dynes. If the 
contact averaged say 0.01 mm. across, then the force would be 18 
dynes or about 0.018 gram weight. 

Thus, in an aggregate of particles, the cohesive pressure may mount 
to a respectable figure, depending largely upon the size and shape of 
the grains. The so-called adsorption of solids by solids may be in 
many cases merely the result of intervening films of adsorbed water. 
Any one who has sought to free coarse sand grains from others below 
300 mesh, knows how difficult it is without resort to water immersion. 
This destroys the tension and restores the adsorbed film to its maxi- 
mum thickness. A more detailed theoretical treatment of the practi- 
cal problem dealing with irregular grains would lead at once to complex 
probability functions. It may be noted however that the cohesional 
force increases with the amount of water present up to a maximum 
and then falls off to zero with complete wetting. Footprints are not 


water, at 4 x 10-8 is 4 X 10~* centimeters in film thick- 


~ aprit 19, 1927 NUTTING: GRANULAR SOLIDS 187 


made in sand or silt either dry or under water but in material partly 
dry. 

The simple problem of wetted solid spheres in contact is easily 
treated and throws light on some mechanical effects. Let spheres of 
radius R be in contact and let the contact region be filled with water 
to a distance r from the axis of contact. Let 

r 
Sing = R 
The radial tension on the water film is 27Cosé x 0.27r where ris surface 
tension. The area over which this acts is 477(R — R Cosé), hence 
the radial tension (force per unit area) is 
a F iierhy Cosé (1) 
A Rk 1-— Cosé 
The force pulling the spheres together is pressure x area or arp 
plus the direct tension 2zr7 at the edge of the film or 
F = rr?P + 2Qarr . 
= rR7[Cose(1 + Cosé) + 2S8in6] (2) 
The maximum value of the parenthesis is 2.60 for - — Sing — ego 
ong = about 49°. For both @ = 0 and 6 = 90°, F = 2xR; which is 
about 2 of its maximum value. When the voids in a mass of grains 
are entirely empty or filled with water cohesional forces drop to zero 
and a lump of material ‘“‘melts.”’ 

According to (2), the force acting between individual particles 

varies directly as their radius FR if the proportional amount of wetting 


(=) remains constant. But the number of particles per unit area 


R 
a. 1 
varies inversely as their cross section or as RY hence the cohesional 


force per unit area varies inversely as the diameter of the particles. 
Further, the number of layers in a unit cube varies also inversely as 
FR, hence the aggregate cohesional force in a unit cube (pressure gra- 
dient) varies inversely as the square of the linear dimensions of the 
component particles. 
Some numerical examples may be of interest. Taking the angular 
fill @ = 49° and the surface tension of water + = 72 ayes ,f= 
centimeter 
590 & dynes. In Table 1 are given calculated values of F for R = 
0.01, 0.0001 and 10-* centimeters or R = 100, 1 and 0.01 microns, 
the range between fine sand and clay. One atmosphere = 1033200 
dynes 
centimeter? 


A drying silt or clay is subjected to internal cohesive 


188 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No.8 


pressure of these orders of magnitude and thereby acquires consider- 
able rigidity of form. ‘The above theory indicates further that this 
internal pressure is nearly independent of the water content over a 
wide range. ‘The finer clays are known to retain several per cent of 
water when heated even to 600-800°C, hence bonding by sintering 
and incipient fusion is likely to occur before a clay is released from 
internal pressure due to water. 

The cohesive pressures and pressure gradients deduced above are 
evidenced by many known facts and direct tests. Molding sand must 
be fairly fine and will not function when too dry or too moist nor when 
greasy. Experiments by the writer on powdered quartz 0.05 to 50 
microns in diameter and on glacial silt (rom granite) 5 to 50 microns 
in diameter, show the phenomena of cohesion very nicely. The 
finer sizes alone show shrinkage on drying and swelling on wetting 


TABLE 1.—VALUES oF F 


GRAIN RADIUS See te oes COHESIVE PRESSURE PRESSURE GRADIENT 
100 microns |} 5.90 dynes 0.015 atmospheres 0.75 atmospheres 
centimeter 
le as 0.059 ‘ 150 oe 7500 é 
0.01 i 0.00059 “‘ 15000 es | Theta <a (9 se 


with water. In turpentine or other liquid which is but feebly ad- 
sorbed, the finer material behaves like coarse sand in water. In 
determining the densities of fine grains with a pycnometer, turpentine 
is used to avoid errors due adsorption of water. Powdered quartz 
under 0.2 micron in diameter, when suspended in water, exhibits the 
peculiar stratification so familiar in the case of bentonite in suspension. 
The finest quartz particles never settle but in a week or two hydrate 
to silicic acid and go into dialyzable solution. 

The volume of water in a film of radius r contained between two 
spheres of radius Ff is twice the integral from 0 tor of 27rR7(1 — Cosé)dr, 
or 


(3) Water volume = 277°R — 2 aR3(1 — Cos?6) 


from which the percentage of water may be readily computed for any 
particular case, the total volume (relative) being that of the circum- 
scribed cylinder or 2rr?R. 

An aggregate of fine and coarse particles together, when moist 
takes on the properties of the finer particles alone since each large 


- APRIL 19, 1927 NUTTING: GRANULAR SOLIDS 189 


particle has high cohesion and rigidity within itself. The fine par- 
ticles act simply as cementing material. The proportion of fines 
need be only very small since their cementing function is limited to 
the very small volume in the immediate neighborhood of points of 
contact between larger particles. 

In a pile of sand or spheres in loosest packing (6 contacts), roughly 
half the volume is void. In closest packing (12 contacts) about ¢ 
is void. Other things being equal therefore, with a given size of 
particle and given moisture content, packing will considerably increase 
the cohesion in a mass of particles by increasing the number of con- 
tacts. The effect of packing on molding sand may be due largely to 
such a cause. 

The relation between pressure (external and internal) and the specific 
volume or density of a granular solid or mass of solid grains is of 
considerable practical and geologic interest. A granular mass differs 
from a solid in being capable of indefinite shear and from a fluid in 
possessing a finite shear hmit. The internal pressures deduced above 
for very fine particles moistened, are of the same order of magnitude 
as those derived by T. W. Richards? for numerous elements in the solid 
and liquid states. A formula similar in form to van der Waals’ 
equation of state might be expected to serve, the v — b of his equation 


being translated into pore space and the term - into internal cohesive 


pressures since we are dealing with grains instead of molecules. Data 
for determining constants for granular masses under load are very 
meager but some relations between porosity and depth in deep well 
cores give a rough check with this formula or a still simpler one. The 
various relations between specific volume and related quantities are 
given below. 


Eee eee See OuaEme Bite L 

: total volume V 

oe Dero ey oe uO aa eee 

solid volume iS 

- 7: , _ solid volume es 

2 aa total volume Mes V 
_mass 1 


Densi De me speci 
ensity volume specific volume 


mass of grains 
volume of grains 


D, = grain density = 


3 Journ. Am. Chem. Soc. 48: 3063-3080. 1926. Also previous papers. 


190 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES .VOL. 17, NO. 8 


20UaL ona defining equations it follows that 


ave —Cihe Sian oe 
D R 
A cietiace aia rteameell) mm IN are 
1 1 
Beane 
Ie 
ara ES 
(l1-P)(1 +R) =1 
V ih 
NE MS ir 
WV as 2 


Dig Min Vo. Mes ale ee 
The term v — 6 of van der Waals’ equation becomes V — S = L 
in the above notation, hence since S is constant, the modified equation 
is 

(p + p.)R = constant. 
For practical work on sedimentation as a function of time ¢ and load, 
the writer has found useful the simple dynamic formula 
log(Vo — Vo) — log((V— Va) = Cit + Co(p + pe) 

in which V, and V. are initial and minimum specific volumes and 
C’, and C, are constants. 

When an aggregate of particles is completely immersed in water, 
surface tension effects are absent but the adsorbed layer of water 
remains intact. In this layer the maximum pressure is known to be at 
least 15000 atmospheres, which according to Bridgman is sufficient to 
compress water about 4%. Hence the densities of fine particles, de- 
termined by the pyecnometer method, are apparently higher when 
water is used than when a much less strongly adsorbed liquid such as 
benzol or turpentine is used. Both absorption pressure and heat of 
wetting are much lower for liquids of high molecular weight and large 
molecular diameter than for liquids having the opposite properties. 

The condensed adsorbed films on fine siliceous particles immersed 
in water should show a slight surface tension toward the adjacent 
uncondensed water tending to draw the particles together. Such a 
tendency is a matter of common observations. An old bentonite 
jelly has a perfectly definite surface and prints made in it remain for 
some time. Fine clay particles, immersed in water in a thin layer 
between glass plates, under a microscope, may be seen gathering 
together in clumps. These clumps finally gather together in threads 


~ APRIL 19, 1927 WHERRY: METHYL SALICYLATE IN POLYGALA 194 


and ropes. This behavior affords a plausable explanation of the. 
curved worm-like structure frequently observed in fine clays. Longi- 
tudinal shrinkage would cause such ropes to develop the transverse 
lamellar structure commonly associated with them. Cakes of fine 
dry silt, when “‘melted’’ in water, frequently break up into flakes or 
grains of quite uniform diameter and thickness, much harder than the 
lump and not yielding to water without mechanical assistance. Forms 
varying all the way from mere formless lumps to decidedly crystalline 
structures are met with in various fine grained materials. 
La Place in 1807 gave the expression 
1 1 
P+S(h +p) 
for the internal pressure at the surface of a liquid. Sis surface tension 
(about 72 es 
centimeter 
R, are the two principal radii of curvature of the surface and P the 
value of the pressure for a plane surface (R, and R» both infinite). 
Since for a thin layer of water on silica P is of the order of 17000 xX 
dynes 
centimeter? | 
or 0.01 micron in order that the S term may not be negligible. It is 
this size of particle that exhibits the most marked colloidal properties. 
100 times larger are the visible particles; 100 times smaller individual 
molecules. 
In later papers it is planned to deal with the hydration, solution 
and dehydration of such small particles and the molecular forces 
involved. 


for water at ordinary temperatures). R, and 


: , at least one R must be of the order of 10-* centimeter 


PLANT CHEMISTRY.—The presence of free methyl salicylate in 
some American species of Polygala. Epaar T. WHERRY, 
Bureau of Chemistry.! 


In many works on plant chemistry? it is noted that certain members 
of the genus Polygala contain gaultherin, the glucoside which on being 
split by the appropriate enzyme liberates methyl salicylate. Except, 
however, for P. Senega and its variety latifolia,* (the latter sometimes 


1Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- 
ceived January 29. 

2See GILDEMEISTER and Horrmann, Volatile Oils, 1: 505. 1899; Kremers and. 
JAMES, Pharm. Rey., 16: 100. 1898. : 

3’ The nomenclature of Buaxn, North American Flora, 25: 305. 1924, is followed in 
this article. 


192 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 8 


erroneously assigned other names) no American species have been 
recorded as containing this glucoside, nor is it commonly recognized 
that by merely pulling the plant out of the ground sufficient methyl 
salicylate can be set free to cause the roots to exhale its characteristic 
odor, although the name “flowering wintergreen”’ sometimes applied 
to one of the more northern species, P. paucifolia, evidently refers to 
this feature. The following observations on a number of the species 
native to the eastern United States accordingly seem worth placing 
on record. 3 

My attention was first called to the matter in the course of searching 
for a suitable common name for this genus. The writers of botanical 
text-books, manuals, and flower-guides have manufactured names 
for it, which as might have been expected from the methods used, 
have never come into common use. ‘The plan preferred by some name- 
makers is to change a letter or two in a technical name, it being 
apparently assumed that laymen like a name which is not identical 
with the technical one, be the change ever so slight. The application 
of this plan to the genus Polygala gives ‘‘Polygale,”’ but why this 
should be considered easier to use, remember, or pronounce than the 
correctly spelled technical name is not clear. Another favored plan 
is to translate part or all of the technical name, and add a more or less 
familiar suffix to it. In the present case, the usual result of this pro- 
cedure is ‘“‘“Milkwort.’’ Here the suffix is objectionable, at least for 
America, in that it has never attained the usage in this country that 
it has in England; and the root word is both non-significant, in that 
the syllable gal in the technical name was based on a misunderstanding, 
-and incomplete, the first part of the technical name being as important 
as the second, so that the only correct designation on this basis is 
““Muchmilkwort.”’ 

Fortunately, it is not necessary to use either of these awkward 
words, for a real common name, i.e., one devised by laymen, has been 
discovered. In the course of trips in the southern states, local people 
‘were found to be using for conspicuous members of this genus, besides 
the form-names ‘‘Thimbles,’’ ‘‘Buttons,”’ etc., the terms “‘Candy- 
weed,’ ‘““Candy-root,”’ ‘““Wintergreen,”’ and even, quite mistakenly, 
“Peppermint.”’ Inquiry as to the origin of this sort of designation 
led to the information that it referred to the presence of a flavoring 
substance evident by its odor when the roots were pulled up, and by 
‘tasting, when chewed, like ‘‘wafer-candy”’ (hard disks made of com- 
‘pressed fine sugar, flavored with various essential oils, such as those 
.of peppermint, wintergreen, etc.). The most appropriate of these 


APRIL 19, 1927 WHERRY: METHYL SALICYLATE IN POLYGALA 193 


names for the genus as a whole would seem to be Candy-root, which 
may be suggested for adoption in the second edition of Standardized 
Plant Names (the unmodified technical name having been used in the 
first edition). 

That the flavoring substance concerned is methyl salicylate was 


TABLE 1.—MeETHYL SALICYLATE IN POLYGALAS AS DETECTED BY THE ODOR AND TASTE 
OF THEIR Roorgs. 


SPECIES AND AUTHOR | WHERE STUDIED ; SOIL PREFERENCE AMOUNT 
alba Nutt. Tex.-Okla. minimalkaline, dry | large 
Baldwini Nutt. Fla. mediacid, damp large 
Boykini Nutt. Fla.-La. minimalkaline, dry | small 
brevifolia Nutt. Ne: mediacid, damp large 
cruciata L. Fla-La.-N. J. mediacid, wet large 
cumulicola Small? Fla. neutral, dry large 
Curtissii Gray Va.-Md. subacid, dry large 
cymosa Walt. Fla.-Miss.-Del. mediacid, wet none 
grandiflora Walt. Fla.-Miss.-Ga. subacid, damp large 
grandiflora angustifolia Torr. & | Ala. neutral, dry large 

Gray 
incarnata L. Fla.-Pa. subacid, dry | large 
Lewtonii Small Fla. mediacid, dry large 
Lindheimeri Gray exes neutral, dry small 
lutea L. Fla.-Miss.-N. J. | mediacid, wet large 
mariana Mill. Fla.-Md. subacid, damp large 
nana (Michx.) DC. Fla.-Ga. subacid, dry large 
Nuttallii Torr. & Gray Va.-N. J. subacid, damp large 
paucifolia Willd. N. C.-Mich.-Me.| minimacid, dry large 
polygama Walt. Fla.-Ala.-N. J. subacid, dry large 
ramosa Ell. Fla.-N. J. mediacid, damp large 
Rugelii Shuttl. Fla. mediacid, damp large 
viridescens L. Fla.-La.-Md. subacid, damp large 
viridescens sanguinea (L.) Farwell | Va.-Pa. subacid, damp large 
Senega L. Va.-Pa. minimacid, dry large 
Senega latifolia Torr. & Gray | Ark. minimacid, dry large 
verticillata L. Fla.-Ark.-Me. subacid, dry large 
verticillata ambigua (Nutt.) Wood | Va.-Pa. subacid, dry large 


readily recognized. ‘The question then arose as to whether any con- 
siderable number of members of the genus exhibited this feature and 
accordingly those encountered on field trips during the past few years, 
amounting to about three-fourths of the known species of the eastern 
United States, have been repeatedly examined as to the odor and taste 
of their roots. The results are presented in the accompanying table, 

* Described since the publication of Blake’s article cited in footnote 3; according to 


the plan of treatment followed in that article, it would probably be a variety of 
P. grandiflora Walt. 


194 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 8 


and, as will be seen, all but one of the 27 native species and subspecies 
which have been studied contain. some substance from which methyl 
salicylate is readily set free. No laboratory studies have been made 
upon these, although there seems no reason to doubt that the glucoside 
gaultherin is the primary source. The one exceptional species, 
P. cymosa, has seeds rather dissimilar from those of the others in its 
section, and is probably not very closely related to them. 

There are three plants of other families, in which the same phe- 
nomenon can be observed, growing more or less commonly in the 
region covered, namely Sweet Birch (Setula lenta), Wintergreen 
(Gaultheria procumbens), and American Field-Violet, (Viola ra- 
finesquii). The presence of methyl salicylate in the last does not 
seem to have been hitherto recorded, but it is interesting to note that 
some European violets are known to contain gaultherin, and possibly 
other American species may be found to do so. 


BOTANY.—The Central American species of Hydrocotyle: J. N. 
Ross and Pauu C. Stanpuiey, U.S. National Museum. 


The genus Hydrocotyle is a small group of the family Apiaceae or 
Umbelliferae, widely distributed in both hemispheres, and in both 
North and South America. Although some species grow in the 
tropical lowlands, most of them are natives of the temperate regions, 
and in the countries lying near the equator the Hydrocotyles are best 
represented in the cool mountains. The Central American species 
have not been revised recently, and, indeed, a satisfactory treatment of 
them would have been impossible for lack of adequate material. 
Recent explorations in Central America, particularly in Costa Rica, 
have resulted in assembling a large number of specimens, so that it is 
now possible to understand the various forms represented in the region. 
Of the eight species which we have recognized from the Central 
American area no less than four appear to be new, and they are here 
described. It is altogether possible that further exploration may 
‘reveal the occurrence of still other localized species, like H. ribifolia 
-and H. Torresiana, each of which, although represented by several 
collections, is known from only a single limited locality. 

KEY TO SPECIES 


Leaves peltate. 
Wrarbels Compound 0.2 ca see... eee eaten eae 1. H. bonariensis. 


‘tL Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received 
January 29. 


APRIL 19, 1927 ROSE AND STANDLEY: SPECIES OF HYDROCOTYLE 195 


Umbels simple. 
Petioles glabrous; pedicels usually much longer than the fruit; lateral 


Pps o1 tne tribe wdentunn) 2) asia). 2. spell S 2. H. umbellata. 
Petioles villous; pedicels shorter than the fruit; lateral ribs nearly 
GSO h eee eee oe eee a Ft A ea eo 3. H. costaricensis. 


Leaves not peltate. 
Petioles glabrous; leaves deeply lobed, the lobes very obtuse. 
4. H. ranunculoides. 
Petioles villous or puberulent; leaves not lobed or, if lobed, the lobes acute. 
Leaves angulate-lobed, the lobes elongate, acute or acutish. 
5. H. ribifolia. 
Leaves orbicular, not lobed or with very shallow, broadly rounded 
lobes. 
ELUM PRGIE SSDS SILIG a Soph es ae a aN A Gor nal ial 6. H. Torresiana. 
Flowers on evident pedicels. 
Peduncles densely puberulent; pedicels usually longer than the 


fruit, often several times as long............. 7. H. mexicana. 
Peduncles thinly villous; pedicels equaling or shorter than the 
ft tie. ae tas Taree Meas Bs Selene tse ica 8. H. Maxonii. | 


1. Hydrocotyle bonariensis Lam. Encycel. 3: 153. 1789. 

GUATEMALA: Lake Amatitlin, J. D. Smith 2200. Without definite 
locality, Watson 36a. 

PaNaMA: Chagres, Fendler 132. 


2. Hydrocotyle umbellata L. Sp. Pl. 234. 1753. 

GUATEMALA: Laguna de Caldera, Voledn de Pacaya, Tonduz 476. Near 
Guatemala, Tonduz 813. Puerto Barrios, Deam 6013. Amatitlin, J. D. 
Smith 2668. San Lucas Toliman, Holway 190. Finca Sepacuité, Cook & 
Griggs 187. Santa Rosa, Heyde & Lux 3349. 

SALVADOR: Ixtepeque, Standley 21458. Ateos, Standley 23366. 

Honpuras: Amapala, Standley 20747. 

NicarRaGua: Granada, Baker 621. 

Costa Rica: San José, Holway 259; Standley 32166. Rio Reventado, 
near Cartago, Standley & Valerio 49550. Las Céncavas, Prov. Cartago, 
Standley 35984. 

Panama: Valley of Rio Panduro, Killip 3577. Matachin to Las Cascadas, 
Cowell 356. 

In Costa Rica the plant is called “‘sombrerito,’ 


3. Hydrocotyle costaricensis Rose, sp. nov. 

Stems very slender, creeping, elongate, sparsely villous with long whitish 
hairs or glabrate, the nodes 1-3 cm. long; petioles slender, 1-3 cm. long, 
densely retrorse-villous, at least above, with long white hairs; leaf-blades 
peltate, orbicular, 1-2 cm. broad, very shallowly crenate-lobate, the lobes 
crenate, the crenations few, broadly rounded, the blades glabrous on both 
surfaces; peduncles filiform, 5-10 mm. long, glabrous; flowers few, sessile or 
on pedicels less than 1 mm. long; petals pink; fruit didymous, nearly 1.5mm. 
broad, emarginate at base and apex, turgid, nearly twice as broad as high, 
glabrous, obscurely tuberculate, the lateral ribs obsolete. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,180,225, collected on road- 
side bank near La Palma, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude 1,500 to 
1,700 meters, July 17, 1923, by Wiliam R. Maxon (no. 7902). The following 
additional collections may be cited: : 

Costa Rica: Las Nubes, Standley 38402. Without definite locality, 


’ in Salvador “‘lechuga.”’ 


196 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17,NO.8 


Pittier 10353. Santa Maria de Dota, Standley 41572; Standley & Valerio 
43341. Between San Pedro and Curridabat, Standley 32810. San Sebastian, 
Standley 32747. Alto dela Estrella, Standley 39291. 

PanaMA: Balboa, a weed in garden, doubtless introduced, probably from 
the mountains of Panama, Standley 28563. 


Hydrocotyle costaricensis is closely related to H. pusilla A. Rich., a species 
of the West Indies and South America. The latter is distinguished by the 
villous upper surface of the leaves. 


4. Hydrocotyle ranunculoides L.f. Suppl. Pl.177. 1781. 

Nicaracua: Without definite locality, C. Wright. 

Costa Rica: La Verbena, Standley 32220. Santa Maria de Dota, 
Standley & Valerio 44136. Rio Reventado, near Cartago, Standley & Valerio 
496206. 

PanaMA: Changuinola Valley, Dunlap 226. 


5. Hydrocotyle ribifolia Rose & Standl., sp. nov. 

Plants large and coarse, prostrate or widely creeping, the stems 30-100 
cm. long or more, with elongate internodes, copiously villous with long 
spreading hairs; stipules 4-5 mm. long, oval or broadly ovate, scarious, 
glabrous, the margins lacerate; petioles 4-13 cm. long, villous with long 
slender spreading yellowish hairs; leaf blades pentagonal, 5-9.5 cm. broad, 
deeply cordate at base, with a deep narrow sinus, 5-lobate to about the middle, 
the lobes broadly ovate, acute or acutish, shallowly lobate, the lobes irregu- 
larly crenate or crenate-serrate, rather densely villous on both surfaces with 
spreading yellowish hairs; peduncles very slender, 2.5—4.5 em. long, glabrous; 
flowers numerous, greenish, the pedicels filiform, 2.5-4 mm. long, glabrous; 
fruit 1.5 mm. long (one of the carpels usually abortive), shallowly emarginate 
at base and apex, glabrous, the lateral ribs slender but distinct. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,253,273, collected in moist 
forest on Cerro de las Vueltas, Province of San J osé, Costa Rica, altitude 
3,000 meters, December 31, 1925, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio 
(no. 43506). The following collections also represent the species: 

Costa Rica: Cerro de las Vueltas, Standley & Valerio 43749, 43799. 


This plant is very unlike anything known heretofore from North America, 
and it does not approach closely any South American species of which material 
is available. 


6. Hydrocotyle Torresiana Rose & Standl., sp. nov. 

Plants slender, creeping, the stems 10-30 cm. long, rooting at the nodes, 
with elongate internodes, sparsely villous with slender spreading hairs; 
stipules 2 mm. long, rounded or broadly ovate, scarious, whitish, glabrous, 
the margin irregularly dentate or lacerate; petioles 2—4 cm. long, slender, 
thinly villous with long slender spreading hairs; leaf-bladesreniform-orbicular, 
12.5 em. broad, deeply cordate at base, with a V-shaped sinus, very shallowly 
5-lobate, the lobes broad, dentate with short ovate obtuse irregular teeth, 
short-villous on both surfaces with white hairs; peduncles slender, 1-2.5 
cm. long, sparsely villous; flowers sessile or very nearly so, purplish, numerous; 
fruit heads globose, very dense, 4 mm. in diameter; fruit 1 mm. long, much 
broader than long, glabrous, the lateral nerves obsolete. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,226,942, collected in potrero 
on the southern slope of Volcano of Turrialba, near the Finca del Volcén de 
Turrialba, Costa Rica, altitude about 2,400 meters, February 22, 1924, by 
Paul C: Standley (no. 34950). Nos. 35232 and 35105, from the same locality, 
represent this plant. 


APRIL 19,1927 ROSE AND STANDLEY: SPECIES OF HYDROCOTYLE 197 


The species is named for Prof. Rubén Torres Rojas, in whose company the 
specimens were collected. 

7. Hydrocotyle mexicana Cham. & Schlecht. Linnaea 5: 208. 1830. 

GUATEMALA: Rio Negro, Depart. Quiché, Heyde & Lux 3350. Volcan 
Acatenango, Kellerman 5244, 4801. Volcdn Atitlin, Kellerman 5771; Hol- 
way 189. Coban, Tuerckherm 8688, 685. Between San Martin and Todos 
Santos, Nelson 3623. VolcanSanta Maria, Nelson 3702. Near Secanquim, 
Goll 156. 

SaLtvapor: Volcan de San Vicente, Standley 21488. 

NicaraGua: San Rafael del Norte, Miller & Griscom 4, 53, 104. 

Costa Rica: La Palma, Maxon & Harvey 8063. Las Nubes, Standley 
38501, 38617, 38828, 38525. La Hondura, Standley 36175; Standley & 
Valerio 51902. Tuis, Tonduz 11414. Cerro dela Carpintera, Standley 34312. 
Between Aserri and Tarbaca, Standley 34165, 41387. Los Ayotes, Standley & 
Valerio 45387. El Mufieco, Standley 33506; Standley & Torres 51255. La 
Estrella, Standley 39317, 39177. El Silencio, Valerio 56; Standley & Valerio 
44566. Laguna de la Chonta, Standley 42278. Santa Maria de Dota, 
Standley 42510, 41807, 42110. Pejivalle, Standley & Valerio 46740. Yerba 
Buena, Standley & Valerio 49968, 49797. Cerro de las Caricias, Standley & 
Valerio 52064. Quebradillas, Standley 42930. 

Panama: Above El Boquete, Maxon 5644. Cana, Williams 783. 

8. Hydrocotyle Maxonii Rose, sp. nov. 

Plants slender, creeping, with elongate internodes, the stems rooting at 
the nodes, glabrous; petioles slender, 3-15 cm. long, sparsely villous with 
long slender spreading white hairs; leaf-blades orbicular, 1-4 cm. broad, 
deeply cordate at base, with a narrow V-shaped sinus, sparsely villous on the 
larger nerves, sometimes glabrous on the upper surface, very shallowly 5- 
lobate, the lobes broadly rounded, distantly crenate; peduncles slender, 
5-16 cm. long, often exceeding the leaves, villous with long spreading white 
hairs; flowers numerous, greenish, the pedicels 1-1.5 mm. long, glabrous; 
fruit heads very dense, globose, about 7 mm. in diameter; fruit 1.5 mm. wide, 
broader than long, somewhat obcompressed, broadly rounded or truncate at 
base and apex, glabrous, the lateral nerves slender but distinct. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,180,226, collected on stony 
wet roadside near La Palma, Costa Rica, altitude 1,500 to 1,700 meters, 
July 17, 1923, by Wiliam R. Maxon and Alfred D. Harvey (no. 8047). 
The following additional collections have been examined: 

Mexico: Choapam, Oaxaca, Nelson 864. 

GUATEMALA: Finca Mocca, Alta Verapaz, Johnson 54. 

Costa Rica: El Mufieco, Standley 33478; Standley & Torres 50906. La 
Palma, Standley 33160, 38218, 38112, 32891. La Estrella, Standley 39382, 
39169. La Colombiana, Standley 37302, 36694. Gudpiles, Standley 37024. 
Pejivalle, Standley & Valerio 46838, 46782. La Hondura, Standley 37584, 
36147; Standley & Valerio 51904. Naranjos Agrios, Standley & Valerio 
46414. Hamburg Finca, Standley & Valerio 48834. Tuis, Tonduz 114138. 
San Pedro, Tonduz 17838. Quebrada Gata, Brenes 14450. Mountains of 
Candelaria, Feb., 1847, Oersted. Rio Reventado near Cartago, Standley & 
Valerio 49562. 


Although closely related to H. mexicana, this plant is easily distinguished 
by the characters given in the key. The numerous specimens examined are at 
once referable to one or the other of the two species, and there are no inter- 
mediate forms. | 


198 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 8 


PALEONTOLOGY .—The Occurrence of Lituonella and Coskinolina 
in America. JosEPH A. CUSHMAN, Sharon, Massachusetts.! 


In an earlier volume of this Journal, Woodring? noted the occurrence 
of the conical foraminifer Dictyoconus in Haiti and later described two 
new species and a new variety. These occur in the Middle Eocene, 
as does the genus in the Mediterranean region. Some years ago, 
in studying well-samples from Florida, I found both conical and more 
flattened foraminifera which seemed to belong to the Cretaceous genus 
Orhitolina and to certain other arenaceous ‘‘Buliminas”’ similar to 
species characteristic of the Lower Cretaceous. Since that time a 
more careful study of species of Orbitolina and of sections of the Florida 
specimens has convinced me that the determination of the latter as 
Orbitolina was incorrect and that the beds containing them are of 
Middle Eocene age. <A year or more ago, in studying the essential 
characters of Lituonella and Coskinolina, I came to the conclusion that 
specimens from the Florida wells could be referred to both these 
genera. In addition the “‘Buliminas” are now known to belong either 
to Valvulina or to a newly erected genus Arenobulimina,? which have 
affinities with Cretaceous species and, superficially at least, resemble 
them in many ways. Silvestri has erected a new genus Cushmania 
- based on my Conulites americana from the Eocene of the Leeward 
Islands. ‘This genus also appears to occur in the Florida well-samples. 
The relationships of these different genera are very interesting, as the 
following paragraphs indicate. 

Valvulina is triserial with a large aperture and a flattened tooth. 
The species in the material under discussion, which occurs below the 
Ocala limestone, is in the young flattened on the three sides and appears 
to be an ancestral form of Valvulina ocalana Cushman. 

In Arenobulimina the early stages are triserial; in the adult several 
more elongate chambers make up each whorl and the test broadens. 
Species of this genus also occur in the well-samples. 

Iituonella has the early stages like those in Arenobulimina but by 
acceleration these are passed through quickly in the development of 
the test. In the adult the chambers become discoid and the test is 
made up of a series of these disc-like chambers gradually increasing 
in size as each is added. The aperture is multiple, on the basal face. 
The later discoid chambers are labyrinthic but there seems to be no 


1 Received February 15, 1927. 
2'This JOURNAL 12: 244-247. 1922. 
3 CUSHMAN, Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Research 2(4): 80. 1927. 


~ AprRiIL 19, 1927 CUSHMAN: LITUONELLA AND COSKINOLINA 199 


distinct division into a cortical and an interior set of chambers. At 
_ the apex of each specimen there is a miniature Arenobulimina. Speci- 
mens such as are figured by Schubert? occur in several of the Florida 
wells and do not seem to differ specifically from Lituonella liburnica 
(Stache), described from the Middle Eocene of the Istrian-Dalmatian 
coast. 

Specimens in the well-samples also seem to be identical with Cos- 
kinolina liburnica Schubert, from the Middle Eocene of the Istrian- 
Dalmatian coast. The early eccentric young stages are very well 
preserved in some of the specimens, and the general form and size is 
so close to Schubert’s species that there seems nothing to separate 
them. Sections show the same simple irregular arrangement of the 
interior chamberlets and, although the exterior when worn shows the 
radial division of the subsurface of the discoid chambers, there are no 
such definite divisions as occur in Dictyoconus or Chapmania and the 
walls are simple. 

Occurring with Coskinolina is a large species as much as 3 milli- 
meters in diameter, with the apex a sharp cone, the sides thence 
concave, and flaring at the base with the basal face convex. The 
peripheral portions of the chambers end in fine tubuli. The species is 
apparently the same as that from the Leeward Islands described by 
me as Conulites americana but to which Silvestri has given the generic 
name Cushmania and which should be known as Cushmania americana 
(Cushman). The early stages appear to have the chambers arranged 
as in Coskinolina and it is probable that it came from that genus, in 
which case the developmental series would be: Valvulina—Areno- 
bulimina—Cribrobulimina—Lituonella—Coskinolina—Cushmania. 

In some of the wells at somewhat lower levels a species occurs which 
is much flattened and has a concave base. I take it to be Dictyoconus 
codon Woodring, already described from the Middle Eocene of Haiti. 
In this species the outer chambers are divided so that there are two 
layers of chamberlets in each chamber, a structural feature much more 
like that of Orbitolina than of the other genera already considered. 

Altogether this makes four genera of the conical foraminifera repre- 
sented in these Middle Eocene strata of Florida, two of which, 
Lituonella and Coskinolina, have previously been unknown in the 
Western hemisphere. 3 


4 Jahrb. geol. Reichsanstalt 62: pl.10,f.10,11. 1912. 


200 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 8 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
423D MEETING 


The 423d meeting was held at the Cosmos Club January 12, 1927, Presi- 
dent Burts presiding. The Secretary announced the election to active 
membership of W. N. Wuitr and A. M. Pirrr both of the U. 8. Geological 
Survey, and also the resignation of FRANK TwrrEpy and 8. W. Bryer. 

Program: ProFrressor J. HARLAN BReETz, University of Chicago: Chan- 
neled scabland and the Spokane flood. That part of the Columbia Plateau 
which lies north of Snake River in Washington bears a remarkable system of 
erosional and depositional land forms. They are extraordinary in their 
magnitude, in their extent and distribution, and unique in their relationships. 
Running water is generally conceded to have caused them but the unparalleled 
_ results indicate unparalleled conditions under which it acted. 

The channeled scablands constitute the erosional part of the record. They 
cover almost 2000 square miles, about 4 of the area of this part of the plateau. 
They are elongate tracts, oriented with the gentle dip slope of the under- 
lying basalt flows, mostly bare rock or with a thin cover of coarse basaltic 
rubble, commonly with canyons in them, and are bounded by steep slopes of 
the deep loessial soil of the plateau. They constitute a curious anastomosing 
pattern, the down-dip convergences inherited from an earlier normal drainage 
pattern and the divergencies, equally numerous, produced by crossing of 
divides of this older pattern. There are hundreds of tracts of the higher 
loess-covered areas in the scablands, from a fraction of a square mile to many 
townships in area, all discontinuous and bounded by the scabland areas. 
The steep marginal slopes in loess are in striking contrast to the gentle slopes 
of the older drainage pattern surviving within each isolated loessial tract. 
Canyons in the scablands are multiple and anastomosing, amazingly so in 
some tracts; deep canyons and shallow ones uniting and dividing in a labyrin- 
thine fashion about bare rock knobs and buttes unlike any other land surfaces 
on the earth. Certainly but few of these canyons are inherited from the 
older pattern. 

The scabland drainage was discharged from the northern glaciated portion 
of the plateau through ten openings into the loess-covered area and led thence 
by nearly one hundred different routes of varying lengths to nine discharge- 
ways into Snake and Columbia rivers on the south and west. The canyon 
plexus is the most striking feature of the scablands and probably is most sig- 
nificant of conditions of origin. These canyons are interpreted as channels, 
not valleys, hence the term ‘‘channeled scabland.”’ 

The depositional land forms associated with channeled scabland are chiefly 
great mounded masses of little worn basaltic gravel. They occur on the 
down-gradient side of eminences and in other protected places in the scab- — 
lands, and in the Snake and Columbia valleys below the entrance of the 
scabland drainage routes. They are not eroded forms, they possess aggra- 
dational slopes and they inclose depressions or by their position aid in inclosing 
depressions between themselves and adjacent rock walls. All attempts to 
interpret them as dissected remnants of terraces or originally continuous 
gravel deposits have failed. They are gravel bars of huge size. 


APRIL 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 201 


A brief summary concerning the more significant features and relationships 
follows. 

CANYONS OF THE SCABLANDS. Largely channels of huge rivers, eroded 
during the Spokane epoch. 

A—Rock basins in the canyons. Thousands of them. Commonly elon- 
gate with the canyons, generally constituting the canyon floor. Lengths 
as great as eight miles, depths as great as 200 feet. Some canyon floors 
essentially aseries of rock basins. Formed by large vigorous streams plucking 
the columnar basalt. Inno other way can most of these basins be explained. 
Some are potholes at the foot of extinct waterfalls. 

B—Plexus grouping of canyons. Occur on crossings of divides of the older 
drainage pattern, the four largest groups ranging from 6 to 10 miles wide. 
Developed subfiuvially like the high-water anastomosing channels of the 
present Columbia at the Dalles. Alternative explanation demands a remark- 
ably braided pattern of an eroding stream, with narrower strands in many 
cases cutting deeper than broader ones. 

C—Cataracts. Hundreds of extinct waterfalls, many of which during 
recession became wider, several two to three miles wide. Unless the record 
of very large streams, they should show the ‘‘horseshoe’”’ concentration 
from any initially great width. 

AREAS SURROUNDED BY THE CHANNELED SCABLAND TRACTS. Residuals 
of a once continuous loessial cover, with maturely eroded drainage ways. 
100 to 200 feet of loess removed over large areas. 

A—Aligned scarps of loess facing the scablands. Slopes 30° to 35°. 
The bluffs left by undercutting of streams whose width was that of the adja- 
cent scabland, from half a mile to 15 miles. They truncate minor valleys 
of the older drainage pattern. 

B—Small isolated loessial hills on the scabland. Slopes as above indicated, 
with “‘prows”’ pointing up the scabland gradient. Some are miles from any 
other loess. Others, in groups, record abrupt introduction of a large volume 
of water which simultaneously entered several of the pre-Spokane drainage 
ye and eroded them to bedrock, leaving these remnants of the former 

ivides. 

TRENCHED DIVIDES. Several remarkable cases where a canyon plexus has 
three or four closely spaced rock-basined gashes 200 to 400 feet deep across 
a divide, yet only one case where one of them cut deeply enough to divert 
subsequent drainage. Water must have been 100 to 300 feet deep above 
preglacial valley bottoms on the north to have crossed. No piracy nor 
headward erosion nor local drainage has been responsible. Good evidence 
that no post-Spokane uplift has occurred in these places. 

DEPOSITS ON THE SCABLAND AND IN SNAKE AND COLUMBIA VALLEYS. 
Discontinuous originally. Their features clearly record actual building of 
each individual deposit. Any explanation must start with this. 

A—Gravel chiefly. Pebbles little worn, 90 to 99 per cent basalt, un- 
weathered. 

B—High deposits, above brink of canyons 400 feet deep and at foot of 
loessial scarps, yet identical with other deposits down in the canyons. 

C—Bar forms, undissected, foreset bedding conforming to slopes where 
required by this hypothesis. Associated depressions as much as 50 feet deep 
where vigorous eddies existed. Some bars, 20 to 100 feet high, blocked 
subsequent drainage. 

D—Deltaic bar, 5 miles long and 200 feet thick in Snake and Tucannon 
valleys, with foresets dipping up these valleys from point of entrance of 


202 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 8 


scabland stream. In striking contrast with Snake River gravels imme- 
diately upstream, which are in 60-foot terraces, dissected and with large 
alluvial fans built out on them, and are composed of 90 to 95 per cent non- 
basalt, well-rounded gravel. 

EK—Quincy structural basin. More than 15 townships covered with 
basaltic gravel in terrace-like and mesa-like forms. Channeled canyons 
tributary to and distributary from this settling basin. The forms, however, 
are bars, as field study has amply demonstrated. No interpretation as 
terraces will account for many significant relationships. 

ANASTOMOSIS OF ENTIRE SCABLAND TRACT ON THE PLATEAU. Contem- 
poraneous occupation of all scabland routes seems indicated. No evidence 
on glaciated tract of marginal drainage to supply, in turn, any one or two of 
ten entrances to the scabland during any conceivable shifting of ice edge. 
All channels seem to have headed on margin of the glaciated tract. Anasto- 
mosis due to the huge volume of glacial water and the abrupt introduction, 
thus flooding a multitude of minor drainage ways of the plateau and crossing 
a multitude of minor divides. Insufficient time for eroson of a few ade- 
quately capacious spillways. Debouchure into Snake and Columbia valleys 
at very different levels, indicating varying depth of different channelways 
and a lowering water-level in these valleys during the discharge. 

WALLULA GATEWAY HIGH-LEVEL SCABLAND. A short narrow canyon 
south of junction of Snake and Columbia Rivers, 20 miles from nearest 
plateau scabland. Yet with same features of subparallel lateral canyons, 
rock basins, knobs and buttes as high on canyon walls as in the Snake and 
Columbia upstream. All scabland drainage passed through this canyon and 
the flood reached 900 feet above present river bottom, perhaps 650 feet above 
canyon bottom at beginning of Spokane episode. Constriction here caused 
the ponding recorded in lower scabland tracts on plateau and made possible 
the plexus crossings of divides. Erosion of Gateway canyon was rapid 
enough to lower the ponded waters while the scabland rivers were still 
running. No other conceivable cause of ponding is indicated elsewhere in the 
Columbia valley below the plateau. ; 

CoLUMBIA VALLEY BELOW WALLULA GATEWAY. For 150 miles a descend- 
ing series of scabland tracts and gravel deposits in Columbia valley. 

A—Bars in mouths of tributaries. Basalt gravel, ranging in height up to 
600 feet above the Columbia. Delta foresets which prevailingly dip back 
into tributary mouths. 

B—Portland delta, area 200 square miles, foreset-bedded throughout, 
basalt, gravel channels and great bars, remarkable eddy depression on up- 
stream side of a rock island in the delta. 

There are many apparently possible alternative explanations for the 
remarkable features of the preceding list. Virtually every one of these, 
when applied, involves exceptional combinations of factors and no one of them 
will explain’ more than one or two of the fifteen listed phenomena. Most of 
them have been tested in the field and rejected. These extraordinary fea- 
tures must be treated as a genetic system. Their assemblage on, and limita- 
tion to, this little corner of the globe cannot be coincidence, as required by 
alternative hypotheses. The only genetic interpretation yet proposed which 
is inherently harmonious and which fits all known facts is that of a great 
flood of water abruptly issuing from the Spokane icesheet. The unfilled rock 
basins with gravel bars perched on their walls indicate abrupt cessation of 
this flood. 


APRIL 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 203 


The cause of this Spokane flood is unknown. It may have been a 
“Jokullaup”’ or glacier flood produced by subglacial vulecanism but this 
hypothesis must stand or fall on field data not yet secured. (Author’s 
Abstract.) 

Discussion: W. C. AupEN: Professor Bretz frankly points out the difficul- 
ties met in applying his explanation of the origin of the remarkable features 
of the Columbia plateau. It is not easy for one, like myself, who has never 
examined this plateau to supply offhand an alternative explanation of the 
phenomena. I have read Professor Bretz’s papers on the subject with 
great interest but I am left with the feeling that some things essential to 
the true explanation of the phenonena have not yet been found. The 
‘““channels’’ appear to be due to streamerosion. The main difficulties seem to 
be: (1) The idea that all the channels must have been developed simultane- 
ously in a very short time; and (2) The tremendous amount of water that he 
postulates as coming from the melting of the ice sheet in so short a time to do 
the work. It seems to me impossible that such part of the great ice fields as 
would have drained across the Columbia plateau could, under any probable 
conditions, have yielded so much water as is called forin so shortatime. It 
also seems as though the estimated capacity of the Wallula Gateway, when 
fully opened, is too great for this gorge to have served as a bottle neck to 
hold above it a flood of such dimension to the level called for in the explana- 
tion offered. It appears that ice sheets of three distinct stages of glaciation 
invaded the borders of this region and may have afforded conditions of 
repeated floodings of much smaller volume. It would seem that a more 
extended study of the glacial phenonena is required about the heads of the 
scabland ‘‘channels’”’ to determine, if possible, more exactly just what sort of 
glacio-fluvial discharge actually occurred. Perhaps the explanation of the 
phenomena does not actually necessitate contemporaneous development of 
all the ‘‘channels,”’ nor in so short a time. The problem would be easier if 
less water was required and if longer time and repeated floods could be 
allotted to do the work. The conditions of repeated glaciation in the basins 
of Clarks Fork and the Columbia are not yet well enough understood to 
afford very sure bases for postulations as to stream flow therefrom. It is 
important and highly desirable that means may be provided for a more 
extended study of the Pleistocene phenomena of these basins and of the 
adjacent mountains. 

JAMES GILLULY: The question of the existence of a Spokane flood rests on 
the interpretation of many highly abnormal field facts. The evidence 
presented by Professor Bretz is assuredly convincing as to (1) the anomalous, 
indeed unique, drainage features of the Columbia Plateau, (2) their direct 
dependence upon glacial waters, and (3) the necessarily large volume of many 
of these streams. However, certain criteria used to determine the actual 
quantities of water involved appear somewhat questionable. Both Russell 
and Jenkins have recognized a ponded condition of the Snake River at Wallula 
Gateway, but Russell has attributed it to monoclinal deformation rather than 
to a flood, and, while Jenkin’s views are not clear, he presumably agrees with 
Russell. Presumably then, without definite evidence to negative this theory, 
scoured basalt at high levels here is not conclusive of a sudden deluge of 
Spokane waters. The overflow may well be much older than Spokane glacia- 
tion. The evidence presented by Professor Bretz to fix the Wallula cutting 
as Spokane and not earlier is the height of talus. In an article published in 
1925 he pointed out that ‘“‘most of the talus (at Wallula Gateway) is higher 


204 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 8 


than three-quarters though some is typical.’’ Thus the date of the overflow 
is not fixed accurately as the date of the Spokane glaciation, even if we grant 
that the three-quarter talus criterion of age elsewhere applied by him is 
valid. 

This talus criterion, however, is very doubtful as an accurate time gauge 
on several counts: (1) The range in rainfall from point to point on the plateau 
is from 5 to 20 inches. If three-quarters talus is found at both places it 
appears then that the height is probably a relatively stable stage in topo- 
graphic development, rather than a measure of total elapsed time since the 
cliffs were formed. (2) The validity of the criterion depends on the assump- 
tion that all fragments falling from the cliffs remain in the talus heaps. This 
assumption is assuredly unwarranted, for in the formation of talus rock is 
disrupted into finer fragments, which waste by weathering and are subject to 
removal by wind and by even the most ephemeral streams. The Colorado 
Plateau offers numerous examples of cliffs which have retreated scores of 
miles yet still have vertical faces. Similar tendencies must prevail here, 
although basalt is decidedly more resistant than those sandstones. (3) 
The well known differences in rate of weathering of canyon walls dependent 
on their directional trends also give one pause in accepting uniform talus 
heights as more than a very rough measure of the age of cliffs. If the talus 
is of uniform height in both east-west and north-south canyons it strengthens 
still farther the suggestion that the three-quarters stage of talus is relatively 
stable, rather than a good time measure. (4) Even disregarding these three 
points which appear to me of great cumulative importance as tending to 
throw doubt on the validity of the talus age criterion and accepting Professor 
Bretz’s analysis, elapsed time since a cliff was formed varies as the square 
of the proportional talus heights. Seven-eights talus then means 49/36 
as great age (or 134 per cent) as three-fourths talus. Wallula Gateway, 
a narrow gorge for a great river, is likely to have had its talus sapped from 
time to time in its history, so that even granting that three-quarters talus is 
ordinarily valid as a time measure (which for the reasons stated above is very 
doubtful), the flooding of the top walls of the Gateway is probably pre- 
Spokane, and the deepening of the canyon a much longer process than granted 
by Bretz. This idea is strengthened by considering the quantitative factor. 
According to Bretz’s old measurements the discharge at Wallula Gateway 
was 38.9 cubic miles per day, or over 50 times the present flood volumes of 
the Columbia and, proportionally to drainage basin, over 200 times as large 
as the greatest recorded floods of the Mississippi. Now he believes the water 
reached even greater height and hence must have produced a still greater 
flood. To explain this great flood without retreat of the ice front, he has 
suggested—(1) a very sudden climatic amelioration (only to rule it out as 
very improbable) and (2) that subglacial volcanism resulted in sudden 
melting of large quantities of ice which formed the flood. This mechanism 
is wholly inadequate as, even allowing most generous thermal properties for 
basalt and perfect efficiency of transfer of this heat for melting the ice, even a 
10-day flood would require 17 cubic miles of basalt or a layer about 9 feet thick 
over 10,000 square miles. Further computations show that the rate of 
cooling of basalt is so slow that if we assume the subglacial surface replaced 
by molten basalt it would require over 9,700 square miles of basalt exposure 
beneath the ice to produce only 350 cubic miles of water which would only 
maintain the flood postulated by Bretz for ten days. But the areal geology 
of the Columbia basin is sufficiently well known to completely eliminate any 
possibility of late Pleistocene volcanism of such magnitude. Even this 


APRIL 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 205 


preposterously low estimate of flood duration is eliminated by the physical 
factors (such as resistance of basalt, depth of channels above Wallula re- 
ferred to that constriction and others) involved. How much less competent 
then, must we admit is the jokullaup hypothesis to furnish the tremendous 
flood volume postulated by Bretz. The incompetence of the postulated 
mechanism to furnish the flood volume required by Bretz’s interpretations 
of the field evidence seems to call for a reinterpretation of that evidence. 
That, as suggested by G. O. Smith, Meinzer, and Ferguson, such a reinter- 
pretation is apt to be considerably more complex than the suggested flood 
hypothesis, seems exceedingly probable. That the actual floods involved 
at any given time were of the order of magnitude of the present Columbia’s, 
or at most a few times as large, seems by no means excluded by any evidence 
as yet presented. 

K. T. McKnicut: Three dry coulees cut southwestward from the ‘‘Othello 
channels” at the east end of the Saddle Mountains in central Washington 
across the aggraded surface of the Ringold formation and debouche at varying 
elevations as hanging valleys along the White Bluffs of the Columbia. All are 
markedly U-shaped in cross section. The master channel of the three is 
Koontz Coulee which debouches at Ringold at an elevation of 150 feet above 
the river. It is 14 miles wide in its lower and better defined portion and its 
bed lies from 200 to 300 feet below the flat undissected Ringold plain which 
borders it abruptly on the northwest. Inits upper half it has cut through the 
soft Ringold sediments and has exposed the underlying basalt in the form of 
scablands. The two remaining dry coulees are of comparable size, averaging 
less than half a mile in width and from 75 to 150 feet in depth, much smaller 
than Koontz Coulee. They head at essentially the same point in the west 
rim of Koontz Coulee, 10 miles above its mouth, at an elevation of 250 feet 
above its bed, and after following divergent courses reach the bluff of the 
Columbia at points 2 and 15 miles, respectively, above the mouth of Koontz 
Coulee and at elevations of 425 and 300 feet, respectively, above the Colum- 
bia. Both in turn show remnants of still shallower braided channels at 
higher levels, appearing as short shunts off of the primary channels. The 
southernmost dry coulee maintains its U-shape practically up to the point 
where its profile breaks off abruptly to the level of the Columbia; the enclosing 
walls of the northern coulee, on the contrary, begin to recede diagonally and 
to flatten at a point 5 miles back from the river so that the incised character 
of the coulee is soon lost, though the old drainage line can still be traced 
through to the bluff overlooking the town of White Bluffs. 

That all three of the dry coulees above described were produced under 
climatic conditions widely different from those prevailing at the present time 
is amply proved by the sage-covered depressions in the two smaller coulees, 
and by the scattered depressions in the upper regions of Koontz Coulee. Mr. 
Bretz has interpreted these dry coulees as the product of huge glacial torrents 
that emptied into the Columbia when its flood waters stood at or slightly 
above the levels of the present debouchures of the coulees. That these are 
at different levels is believed to be due to the different stages in which they 
were abandoned during the lowering of the flood of the Columbia, Koontz 
Coulee being the last one abandoned. The bed of the river at the time of 
this flood is believed to have been at essentially its present level. The 
writer believes that the three dry coulees were formed by glacial waters at a 
time when the Columbia lay several miles west of its present channel and 
have been converted into hanging valleys by the lateral shift of the river to 
the east against the soft sediments of the White Bluffs. That this lateral 


206 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 8 


shift is a reality is proved by the vigorous manner in which the river is at 
present undercutting the bluff, producing numerous land slides, and by the 
fact that the Ringold formation of pre-glacial Pleistocene age, has been 
largely removed by lateral planation from the region west of the river although 
it formerly filled the basin as far west and southwest as the Yakima and 
Rattlesnake ranges, 15 to 20 miles southwest of the White Bluffs. The shift 
of the river is down the slope of the pre-Ringold basalt floor. Restoration 
of the profile of Koontz Coulee indicates that the Columbia lay 3 miles west 
of its present position when the coulee was formed. The two smaller coulees 
at the higher level are interpreted as distributaries formed when Koontz. 
Coulee lay at that level and abandoned after it had gained the mastery. 

It is believed that the explanation of Mr. Bretz is inadequate to explain 
(1) the fact that the two smaller dry coulees previously described, although 
heading at the same place, reach the White Bluffs above the Columbia at 
different elevations; (2) the fact that a V-shaped valley along the southern 
base of the Saddle Mountains, which was produced entirely by drainage off 
of the southern slope of the mountains, also forms a hanging valley 275 feet 
above the Columbia, although in this case, as with the northernmost glacial 
coulee, the south slope of the valley breaks back several miles from the river 
so that the lower course of the old drainage is almost obliterated. Mr. Bretz 
interprets the coarse stream gravels and cobbles that cover extensive areas 
west of the river at White Bluffs and Hanford as the debris of the Spokane 
flood. The writer believes them to be the normal channel deposits of the 
Columbia during its eastward shift over the area in pre-glacial, glacial, and 
post-glacial times. The features described in this summary appear on the 
Scootenay Lake, Hanford and Coyote Rapids quadrangles. 

G. R. MANsFIELD: Mr. Bretz cites the occurrence of numerous anastomos- 
ing channels, with associated rock basins, some of which are 8 miles or more 
long, carved in basalt to depths of 200 feet or more, and locally on some divides 
as deep as 400 feet; he notes the occurrence of hundreds of abandoned water- 
falls with ‘‘potholes’’ at their bases, also in basalt, and speaks of the recession 
of some of these falls; and yet he ascribes all these phenomena to a single flood 
of relatively brief duration. Basalt is a hard rock and very resistant to 
corrasion, but it possesses a well known columnar jointing, which supposedly 
renders it susceptible to undermining and to plucking, and Mr. Bretz relies 
on this property to account for the unprecedented rapidity of erosion of the 
basalt which his hypothesis requires. I am not convinced that so much work 
could be done on basalt in so short a time, even by such a flood as is postu- 
lated. The Dalles of the Columbia, which Mr. Bretz says are typical scab- 
land channels, and the various falls in Snake River, can furnish pertinent and 
definite evidence with regard to rapidity of erosion and of the recession of 
falls in basalt if systematic observations are carried on for afew years. It 
does not seem to me necessary to assume that all the scabland channels, or 
even that all parts of the same channels were occupied by water at the same 
time. Mr. Bretz notes that deep and shallow canyons unite and divide in 
labyrinthine fashion. Possibly some of the shallower channels were formed 
earlier than some of the others and now hang on the sides of more favorably 
located channels. Mr. Bretz based much of his argument for contem- 
poraniety of all the channel phenomena upon the relative heights of talus 
piles beneath basaltic cliffs along the canyon sides. Probably few, if any, 
direct observations are available regarding the rate at which talus piles in 
basalt may form. From such observations as I have made in basaltic country 
in the past fifteen years I should say that the rate is so slow that considerable 


APRIL 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 207 


time intervals would fail to register significant differences. Such a measuring 
stick should not be applied too rigidly. Again contemporaneity of erosion 
can not well be assumed from the identity of materials composing high level 
and low level gravel bars. Since all the material, high or low, may be pre- 
sumed to have come from much the same general sources, identity is to be 
expected. Some differences in state of weathering might be looked for if the 
time interval between high level and low level deposits was great, but even 
here other factors such as texture and mineral composition of the rock frag- 
ments would enter in and mere differences in weathering would not be con- 
clusive. The general nature of the phenomena suggests conditions similar 
to those attending the ice front in New York State, where temporary channels 
and falls now abandoned were developed. Although these were temporary, 
geologically speaking, some of them appear to have persisted for long periods 
of years. The scablands seem to me better explained as the effects of per- 
sistent ponding and overflow of marginal glacial waters, which changed their 
position or their places of outlet from time to time through a somewhat pro- 
tracted period. Not enough is known in detail of the glacial geology and 
physiography of the region to furnish an adequate basis for any connected 
story ofeventshere. The hypothesis of a single tremendous flood should not 
be accepted without further detailed regional study. 

O. E. Metnzer: I have seen only the part of the region under discussion, 
that including Quincy Valley, Grand Coulee, and Moses Coulee. As Doctor 
Bretz has stated, the erosion features of the region are so large and bizarre 
that they defy description. However, the Columbia River is a very large 
stream, especially in its flood stages, and it was doubtless still larger in the 
Pleistocene epoch. Its erosive work in the Grand Coulee and Quincy Valley, 
impressive though it is, appears to me about what would be expected from a 
stream of such size when diverted from its valley and poured for a long time 
over a surface of considerable relief that was wholly unadjusted to it. The 
dry falls in the Grand Coulee resemble Niagara Falls and are evidently the 
product of normal stream work. The deep gorge of the coulee below the dry 
falls was apparently excavated by the same orderly and long-continued proc- 
ess of head-end erosion as the gorge below Niagara Falls, and it could hardly 
have been produced in a short time by a flood of whatever magnitude. 
Quincy Valley, into which the waters of the Grand Coulee discharged, evi- 
dently became the scene of a lake in which sediments were deposited and which 
at first discharged westward into the valley of Columbia River, forming 
several cataracts that retreated some distance in normal fashion before they 
were abandoned. Later all the water was discharged through the present 
outlet, the lake was drained, and the stream cut into the sedimentary deposits 
in Quincy Valley to a depth of about 150 feet, forming a broad stream valley 
with a series of extensive terraces. All these were orderly and long-continued 
processes of erosion and sedimentation. The features of erosion and deposi- 
tion are indeed very impressive, but they are, I believe, of a kind and size that 
would be expected from so large a river as the Columbia must have been in 
the Pleistocene epoch. The rock-cut terraces of the Columbia River Valley 
also indicate a succession of long periods of stream erosion. The short 
gorges below the cataracts that discharged the overflow of the lake in Quincy 
Valley open upon a stream terrace that stands 900 to 1,000 feet above sea 
level and 400 to 500 feet above the present river level. The floor of Moses 
Coulee is continuous with a terrace 800 to 900 feet above sea level and about 
300 feet above the river. Though the evidence is perhaps not conclusive, it 
seems to me that the upper of these two terraces represents the floor of the 


208 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 8 


Columbia River Valley before the river was diverted to form the Grand 
Coulee and the lake in Quincy Valley, the lower terrace represents the floor of 
the Columbia River Valley at a later time when the Moses Coulee was cut, 
and the gorge below the lower terrace represents the later erosion work of 
the Columbia. 

Having seen only this part of the region, in which IJ believe the existing 
features can be explained by assuming normal stream work of the ancient 
Columbia River, I am naturally loath to accept a theory of an abnormal flood 
for the scablands farther east. Before a theory that requires a seemingly 
impossible quantity of water is fully accepted, every effort should be made to 
account for the existing features without employing so violent an assumption. 
I suggest that full weight be given to the following considerations, all of 
which have, of course, already received careful study by Dr. Bretz: 1. The 
Pleistocene Columbia was necessarily a very large stream, especially in times 
of flood. 2. Its waters were diverted over country of considerable relief 
that was wholly unadjusted toit. 3. It is probably not necessary to assume 
that all of the region was channelled simultaneously. Isit not more probable 
that the water flowed successively over different tracts as the ice front 
changed? 4. Unless there is conclusive proof, it should not be assumed 
that along any drainage line the erosion work at high and low levels was done 
simultaneously. It would seem more probable that the work of erosion 
proceeded during a long time and that the high-level channels were abandoned 
as the stream cut down to lower levels. 5. Tilting and folding of the rocks 
have in this region occurred in recent geologic time, probably during and 
since the cutting of the Pleistocene channels. For example, there seems to 
be evidence that the upper terrace of the Columbia River Valley has been 
deformed. ‘Thisrecent deformation may account to some extent for channels 
cut through ridges that can not otherwise be well explained except by as- 
suming excessive depths of flood water. 

J. T. Parprs: Other things being equal, the amount of talus beneath a 
cliff would vary considerably according to whether the exposure faced toward 
or away from the sun. Disruption of the rock due to temperature changes 
and alternate freezing and thawing of water would be most effective on 
southern exposures. 

Dr. Bretz: Reply to Mr. Gilluly: There are old weathered gravels down 
in Snake River canyon both above and below the entrance of the scabland 
rivers, and much lower than the upper limit reached by the glacial waters in 
thiscanyon. The canyon therefore is older than the Spokane episode or any 
gravel deposits in the scablands, and a canyon at Wallula Gateway must have 
been there in pre-scabland time. I believe that the field evidence for this 
conclusion would convince any of my critics. Scabland and gravel up on the 
walls of the Gateway do not date back to the initiation of the canyon, and 
some sort of ponding must be provided. Without a ponding episode, the 
upper scabland must be older than the tributary canyons at the Gateway. 
But even the map shows how the glacial waters cut up the shoulders between 
the small tributary canyons already in existence. A pre-scabland floor of 
the Gateway about 200 feet above present river level is suggested by the 
hanging condition of Spring Gulch. Russell’s speculations on ponding in 
the Columbia Valley dealt with the berg-carried erratics, not with scabland, 
and called for a valley glacier down in the gorge at or near The Dalles, or for 
a subsidence of the entire region. I have believed that this second suggestion 
is correct. There is a possibility that final solution of the scabland problem 
will tie this berg-drift into the scabland story. Jenkins did not suggest any 


APRIL 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 209 


disagreement with my bottle-neck hypothesis, though his article was avowedly 
a discussion of the ponding. There are certain to be differences in talus 
height because of local variations such as I have indicated in one of my 
papers. But where these differences are definitely traceable to local factors, 
such as variations in basaltic structures or spill of local runoff over the cliff 
or an active stream in the valley below or other conditions, it seems per- 
missible to so treat them and yet to draw generalizations. The blocky 
material on the surface of talus in the scablands indicates a rate of growth in 
excess of the rate of disintegration into fine material. Bryan has indicated 
this in one of his papers on Pedestal Rocks. Comparison with sandstone 
cliffs is hardly trustworthy. Itis much more likely that talus accumulations 
in the scablands have been added to, rather than diminished, by wind action. 
And in the empty channels I do not believe that removal of talus material 
by any process has occurred in appreciable amount in post-scabland times. 
Furthermore, the unfilled basins of the channeled scablands, existing even 
close to the upper limits of glacial waters in Wallula Gateway, have lingered 
overlong for a region whose talus has reached a profile of equilibrium. Ihave 
not considered ‘‘equilibrium”’ attained until the talus covers the whole face 
of a cliff. A soil from disintegration of the basalt should cover a stable 
talus, and this is essentially lacking in the scablands or at the Gateway. 
The ‘‘j6kullaup”’ sub-hypothesis I never have defended and never shall, 
until adequate field evidence from the required volcanic tract is forthcoming. 
But must it be dismissed because of Mr. Gilluly’s computations? Are they 
conclusive? After indicating the untrustworthiness of figures, because of 
possible overlooked factors not represented in the computations, Gilluly 
moves into the very position I am scolded for taking. And the accounts of 
Icelandic j6kullaup—are they merely early experiments in sensational 
journalism? Granting, however, that we must never again look toward 
subglacial vulcanism for a Spokane flood, must this close our minds to the 
flood hypothesis? I believe that my interpretation of channeled scabland 
should stand or fall on the scabland phenomena themselves. Perhaps, how- 
ever, my attitude of dogmatic finality is proving contagious. I am glad to 
have convinced Mr. Gilluly that the scabland high up on the Gateway walls 
is stream work. I anticipated a skeptical attitude on even this point, for it 
is an extraordinary place for scabland, by any hypothesis for the great system 
on the plateau north of Snake River. The only known records for pre- 
Spokane ice on the plateau are about Spokane and Cheney where there is a 
weathered till beneath the Palouse loess. The whole record of glacial waters 
across the plateau and through the Gateway is post-loess! I do not yet share 
Gilluly’s belief that pre-Spokane glacial waters are recorded in the Gateway, 
nor his confidence that the history can be diagnosed readily at long distance. 
Even a bed-side practitioner may err, I understand. 

Reply to Mr. McKnight: Undoubtedly the Columbia has undercut White 
Bluffs and thus shortened Koontz Coulee. But its eastward shift is not down 
the slope of a pre-Ringold basalt floor. The basalt is at least 100 feet below 
the river surface at Ringold, at the foot of White Bluffs. And Gable Moun- 
tain, a rugged eminence five miles long and at least 700 feet above the river, 
stands in the eastern half of the tract which the river, by this conception, has 
made by lateral planation. Jenkins thinks that the Ringold silt underlies 
the gravel of this wide part of the Columbia Valley. The 200-foot range in 
altitude of the gravel deposits about Gable Butte and Gable Mountain 
appears to be wholly in material of the same age. If the gravels of this part 
of Columbia Valley are normal affairs of valley or channel deepening, the 


210 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SC1ENCES VOL. 17, NO. 8 


older and higher portions should lie successively farther west from White 
Bluffs. But no suocession of terraces of different ages has been found; 
instead, the relief appears to be a matter of great bars and abandoned chan- 
nels with ‘‘holes”’ in them as low as present river level, all disposed with 
reference to the two basaltic interruptions as they should be if the entire 
valley at one time were a river bottom. While the main floor of Koontz 
Coulee hangs only 150 feet above the Columbia, three other glacial spillways, 
all within a mile and a half of the mouth of Koontz Coulee, hang 250 to 400 
feet above, and all have approximately the same gradient. If their profiles 
are projected, they will reach at least twice as far out into Columbia Valley. 
By Mr. McKnight’s explanation, there must have been as much lateral 
planation by the Columbia while the glacial waters were using Othello 
Channels as in all subsequent time. This projection of profiles assumes a 
Columbia River bottom, at about 500 feet A. T. at that time. How Othello 
Channels and its distributaries (Koontz, etc.) could have discharged across 
the Ringold flat at an upper limit of 1150+ while the Crab Creek syncline 
was undoubtedly an open route (for it also carried the glacial waters) to the 
capacious Columbia Valley is a puzzle for which I have found no answer 
save great volume and ponding at Wallula Gateway. Ifmy information were 
limited to this district alone, I probably would not have arrived at present 
interpretations. It is in the remarkable interrelationships of the channeled 
scabland ensemble that the conception of a Spokane flood finds support. 

Reply to Mr. Mansfield: I have had no success in fitting the field evidence 
to the idea of shifting dischargeways across the scablands. I cannot get the 
glacial streams to cross at Palouse Canyon, Devils Canyon, etec., without a 
ponding farther down the Columbia, nor to cut the canyons or canyon 
groups at these separated places without maintaining all dischargeways while 
the ponded condition is being removed. A labyrinthine group admittedly 
records a succession of events in that the glacial river was drawn down from 
original wide spreading as the canyons were eroded. But such cutting 
apparently must be done while the Wallula ponding was being lowered, or 
else that ponding must be repeated for each successive epoch of occupation. 
Only the Moses Coulee and Grand Coulee-Drumheller Channels plexus groups 
would have developed without the backing up postulated. Mr. Mansfield’s 
idea of obtaining the rate of erosion of the basalt at The Dalles is excellent, 
but probably can be applied only to the features exposed at low water, and 
altered only during high water. The deeper and inaccessible parts of such a 
channel group should be the most rapidly changed. I hope that Mr. Mans- 
field and others of the United States Geological Survey will be able some time 
to study the channeled scablands in detail. These features should take their 
place in the literature as a group of land forms without parallel, and a genesis 
that can be agreed upon should be established. 

Reply to Mr. Meinzer: The erosion of Grand Coulee could not have taken 
a longer time than the sum of whatever glacial stream occupation it has had. 
The margin of the ice sheet must have remained within 35 miles of its maxi- 
mum advance in order to produce the Grand Coulee diversion. We may 
multiply whatever time interval this represents by different glaciations to get 
a longer period but it does not seem possible to consider this canyon a normal 
product of long-continued stream erosion. The scabland plexus east of 
Grand Coulee, from Coulee City south to the Quincy basin, is certainly not a 
normal affair, for three pre-existing valleys were entered and much eroded by 
glacial waters from the north before deepening of the lower coulee occurred 
sufficiently to contain the discharge. The lake sediments of Quincy Valley 


APRIL 19, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 211 


lie beneath thick basaltic gravel deposits which are disposed, as in so many 
other places in the channeled scablands, in great mounds, several miles long, 
with gentle back slopes and side slopes that are constructional profiles. These 
are separated by three wide channels of contemporaneous origin, leading 
from Crab Creek and Grand Coulee across the basin to Drumheller Channels. 
My earlier interpretations were that these channels (Moses Lake lies in one 
of them) were dissected out of a once-continuous gravel fill, but many features 
could not be harmonized with this, and I have been trying theSpokane Flood 
idea since. Several years ago Mr. Meinzer suggested to me that tilting or 
some other adequate cause had diverted discharge from The Potholes and 
Frenchman Springs cataract to Drumheller Channels, and I have tried since 
to apply this in the field. But I cannot find any evidence to support it. 
The rock terraces of Columbia Valley to which Mr. Meinzer refers were there 
in present development when the Flood occurred. The prominent one at the 
Potholes alcove rises northward along the Columbia about 300 feet in four 
miles. The surface of the southern part of it, below about 1250 A. T., is 
typical scabland and has a sharply defined cliff back of it. The northern 
part, above the level of the flood as indicated by upper limits in all three 
spillways out of Quincy basin, carries no such record and has no bare rock in 
the cliff back of it. Slope of the cliff and talus, which is soil covered to the 
very top, indicate a much older feature. As Professor Davis would say, the 
cliff in its southern part has been “‘refresht.’? This northward rise of the rock 
terrace is due to the warping in Babcock Ridge, a low anticlinal into which 
the Columbia has cut its valley. That rock terrace was here, in its present 
warped condition, I think, before the glacial discharge occurred. The close 
approximation of upper flood limit on this terrace, in the two cataracts 
named and in Drumheller Channels seems to indicate that no warping com- 
parable to what the terrace shows has occurred since the glacial flood. This 
is also the upper limit of scabland in Wallula Gateway. The upper limits in 
such widely spaced features as Othello Channels, Devils Canyon and Snake 
River Canyon do not vary more than 100 feet from 1250. There is, of course, 
no precise marker in the topography for upper limits, for most of these features 
are river-bottom forms, but I do not think my figures miss it by more than 
100 feet. Such coincidence of altitudes as I have indicated is remarkable if 
different episodes are involved or if the region has been warped since Spokane 
time. Moses Coulee below Three Devils abandoned cataract has 200 feet 
or more of debris, mostly gravel, on the rock floor which therefore is as low as 
in Columbia Valley at the junction of the two valleys. 

W. P. Wooprine, W. W. Rusey, Secretaries. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


The Washington section of the American Institute of Mining and Metal- 
lurgical Engineers met at the Geological Survey on March 25. D. F. 
HEWETT gave an illustrated talk on Some impressions of European metal 
mines; and a paper on Mining practices in central Europe, by M. VAN SICLEN, 
was read in the absence of the author. The work of American Engineering 
Council was discussed, and resolutions were passed recommending that 
ag the Institute rejoin the council or authorize its constituent sections 
to do so. 


212 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 8 


In connection with the annual meeting of the American Geophysical Union 
there will be an exhibition of geophysical instruments, research problems, 
methods, and results at the. National Academy and Research Building, from 
Friday, April 22 to Friday, April 29 inclusive, (except Sunday) between the 
hours 9 a.m. and 5 p.m. 


Erratum.—On page 183 of the preceding number the sentence regarding 
a lecture for the public on climatic factors should be replaced by the following. 
In the program for general assembly on the afternoon of April 29, there will 
be a symposium and discussion on Some factors of climatic control. 


The annual meeting of the American section of the International Union 
of scientific radiotelegraphy is to be held on April 21 at 10:30 a.m. in the 
building of the National Research Council. A number of papers on scientific 
radio subjects will be presented. The principal feature of the meeting will 
be the presentation of reports of the following technical committees: 
Methods of measurement and standards, J. H. DELLINGER; Radio wave trans- 
mission phenomena, L. W. Austin; Variations of radio wave direction, G. 
BrREIT; Wave phenomena above 3000 kilocycles, A. H. Tayuor; Atmospheric 
disturbances, HE Friis. 


Dr. F. C. Brown has resigned as assistant director of the Bureau of Stand- 
ards, to take charge of the organization of the recently established Museums 
of the Peaceful Arts, in New York City. 


Dr. N. L. Bowrn of the Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of 
Washington, has been delivering a series of lectures on petrology at Princeton 
University. The topics treated include fractional crystallization, the reac- 
tion principle, variation diagrams, liquid immiscibility in silicates, ultra- 
basic rocks, olioine basalts, and glassy rocks. | 


RESOLUTIONS 


The following resolutions on the death of Professor LEON PisRRE 
MANOUVRIER were adopted by the AcADEmy. 


Whereas: On January 18 death overcame Professor LEON PIkRRE 
MANovuvRIER, for several decades the Secretary and Professor of the Paris 
Ecole d’Anthropologie, Director of the Laboratoire d’Anthropologie de 
VEcole des Hautes Etudes, Sub-Director of the Physiological Laboratory of 
the Collége de France, and unquestionably the dean of Physical Anthro- 
pology in France. 

And whereas: In MANovuverter French science and anthropology in acral 
lose one of their foremost representatives, a man of great talent and one of 
unselfishness, with sterling honesty and character. Men of such qualities 
are born but rarely. 

Resolved: The Washington Academy of Sciences expresses regret at the 
passing of its distinguished colleague and joins with his co-workers in France 
In paying tribute to his scientific achievements. The Academy also con- 
doles with the members of Professor Manouvrier’s family in their personal 
loss. 

Resolved: That a copy of the resolution be sent to the Ecole d’Anthro- 
pologie de Paris and to Madame MANovuvRIER. 


*SrrLATED SOCIETIES 


int t meeting of the “Acapeny or the Anthropo-- 


7. Honor: I Life at Zuni yeh (illustrated be en pictures). 


Ap ril 23. The Biological Society. 
pril 27. 3 The Geological Society. 

: _ The Philosophical Society. 
The Botanical Society. 


% PL: SH 


1 eee Society. 


ee —Some magenied ones of aoe: Pei solide ‘ 
Chemistry.—The presence of free methyl! salicylate in ‘some 

Polygala, Epaar T. WHEREBY.) ocr A et 
Botany.—The Central American ose of ee Sante ee . 
STANDLRY; «+. +-sseeecerenesssectneeseeseeca renee e: 


AS Cusaman Sc eae 


Procenpinas: | ‘ ee 


Geological Society ..... ee ane are atau ge 


ScrenriFic NotTEs AND News. seose cece esnveeevece Wel ee es oon 


RESOLUTIONS eeeeeeb eer tcteoeeensecene en aeae as . Sceeens ey ; 


beecieg bho ah W. D. Tauoaer Gane pee Geodetic Su 
Treasurer: R. L. Paris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. see 


Sage ae 


“OF THE 


BOARD oF EDITORS. Sie ti : 
- Aqnus Cuase 3 Joun B. Reesine, Jr. , 
meee 3 (‘BUREAU E PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM . 
~ ASSO CIATE EDITORS | 
8. A. Ronwsr : ; 
ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY M 
G. W. Stosz 
- GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
J. R. Swanton : 
ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
bie CRANES 11, 1923, at the cet at Baltiness, Ma., under the : 
Acceptance for mailing at special rate a ‘provided for 
1103 Act of October ted 1917, Authorized on J ili 1918 
ve a Pe 


"Journal « ok the ih 


ae 


(1) short at papers, wales or joceeulneent = mone ers of é 
short notes of current scientific literature published in or eman 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affi 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. T. 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calen 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the 
the twentieth of the month will ericarity: appear, on request fro 
issue of the JOURNAL for the pels fourth or nineteenth, Tespec 
Manuscripts may be sent to any mermber of the Board of Editors he} should b 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without e 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious min 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of pub. 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that (7) 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. 
Tllustrations will be used only when necessary and will 
or diagrams of simple character. eer: 
Proof. —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof ill 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in fi a 
will exercise due care in seeing that tb is followed. 
Authors’ Reprinis <7 eprints wil be furnished at the following schedule of 


Copies 4 pp. PB pp. (ate pp. 16 pp. 
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 
100;.:. :-4:80 - 3.80 4.75 6.00 
150 2 286 ASO O20 Oi ae 
200 200. 5 EO ee Oty a CU Cee ee 
250 3.00 os 30 6. 28 Dany 7.50 4 


An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive Bee 
nation and date of issue, willbefurnished whenordered. = © \ 


~ As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his ee for extra copies or “reprints 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his ee oh 


The rate of Subscription per -volume ts. ee ee 
Gel qonthly number.recreesvesssssicccreeicneeneea ae 
Monthly numbers. rede eee teen ee eect eene escent eeeeeeeeereesaeees 


Remittances should be made ayable to ‘Washington Aualas Re 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washingto 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. pee Ca ie 
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other ‘publications. — eee ays 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, pes that cisim is made 
within thirty days after date of the following t issue. ' 


R hier te 
’ aS 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, ts December 19, 1911, will be sent toes $3. 00. Special rates 
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. Rae x 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vor 17 May 4, 1927 No. 9 


BOTAN Y.—Revtsion of the genus Myrrhidendron.! Joun M. Cout- 
TER, Boyce Thompson Institute, and J. N. Ross, National 
Museum. 


In 1894 we published, in the Botanical Gazette, the description of a 
very remarkable genus of Umbelliferae, from the high mountains of 
Costa Rica. This plant had been obtained by Capt. John Donnell 
Smith as one of the results of his energetic pioneer field work in Central 
America. Through his generosity we were able to accompany this 
description with a beautiful lithographic plate, made from a drawing 
by the late C. E. Faxon. Nothing more was learned of this genus 
until 1911, when Dr. William R. Maxon and Mr. Henry Pittier col- 
lected a similar plant high on the slopes of the volcano Chiriquf, 
in Panama. Again, in 1917, Dr. F. W. Pennell collected on the 
paramos of western Colombia a third species, which we have named in 
his honor. While studying this new plant from Colombia, we had 
occasion to re-examine Bentham’s Arracacia glaucescens, and have 
reached the conclusion that this also should be referred to M yrrhiden- 
dron, thus raising the number of species to four. 


Kery TO SPECIES 


Leaflets more or less irregularly cleft or lobed........... 1. M. glaucescens 
Leaflets not lobed, or rarely some of them with 2 or 3 lobes. 


Rachis with a dense ring of short hairs at the base of the pinnae and leaflets 


2. M. Pennellii 

Rachis without a dense ring of short hairs at base of leaflets. 
ay oa SpediGels. PIADOUS - 5. 4...) 6s Bates ae See 3. M. Maxonii 
Rays and pedicels pubescent................ 4. M. Donnell-Smithii 


1 Received March 12, 1927. 
213 


214 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


1. Myrrhidendron glaucescens (Bentham) Coulter & Rose 


Arracacia glaucescens Bentham, Pl. Hartw. 187. 1845. 

Herb, 1 meter high or more, stout, glabrous; basal and lower stems long 
petioled, with large vaginate stipular bases; blade ternate, then pinnate; 
ultimate segments strongly veined beneath, cleft, the lobes sharply serrate; 
umbel strongy petioled; involucel bracts several, more or less elongated, 
toothed; involucels narrow, entire or 3-toothed at apex; fruiting rays 15 to 
20, about equal, 6 to 8 cm. long, somewhat hispid on the angles; pedicels 6 
to 10 cm. long; fruit oblong, 8 to 10 mm. long, glabrous. 

Type locality: ‘‘Hacienda de Iravi, prope pagum Perucho,’’ Colombia. 

We have not seen Hartweg’s type of this species, but we have Purdie’s 
specimen from Colombia collected in 1849 and F. W. Pennell’s plant from the 
forests near the edge of the Pdramo de Ruiz, in the Quindfio, altitude 3,200 to 
3,500 meters (no. 2997), and the plant of J. Triana from the forest of Quindio, 
altitude 2,600 meters, collected 1851 to 1857 (in the Columbia College 
Herbarium). 


2. Myrrhidendron Pennellii Coulter & Rose, sp. nov. 


Herb, caulescent, perhaps a meter high or more, glaucous, glabrous except 
the top of the stem and inflorescence; basal and lower leaves unknown; petioles 
of upper leaves broadly stipular: rachis glabrous except at the base of the pin- 
nae and leaflets, here bearing a conspicuous ring of hairs; blade ternate, then 
pinnate; leaflets lanceolate, acuminate, 2 to 5 em. long, sharply serrate, gla- 
brous on both sides; peduncle 1 to 2 cm. long, more or less mealy-pubescent, 
tending to become glabrate below; involucre none; involucel bractlets con- 
spicuous, sometimes entire but usually strongly lacerate at the apex; rays 
numerous, nearly equal, 4 to 6 cm. long, pubescent; pedicels 8 to 10 mm. long; 
_ fruit oblong. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no 1,042,584, collected near the 
P4ramo de Ruiz in the Quindio, Colombia, altitude 2,600 to 2,800 meters, 
December 15 to 17, 1917 by F. W. Pennell (no. 2993). Also collected near 
Quindio Pass, August 2, 1922, by Killip and Hazen (nos. 9166 and 9452) at 
altitudes of 3,200 to 3,500 meters. 


3. Myrrhidendron Maxonii Coulter & Rose, sp. nov. 


A slender shrub, 3 to 4 m. high, crowned by a rosette of leaves, 3 to 4 dm. 
long, 3 to 4 times ternately compound; stipular sheaths of the petiole not 
greatly enlarged, about half the length of the petiole itself; leaflets lanceolate, 
acuminate, sharply serrate, the teeth bristle-tipped; umbel many-rayed; rays 
5 to 10 em. long; pedicels 1 to 1.5 cm. long; involucre usually a single large 
bract; involucel bractlets several, laciniately cleft toward the apex; fruit 
narrow, 2 cm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 675,668, collected on Cuesta 
Grande, eastern slope of Chiriqui Volcano, Panama, altitude 2,000 to 2,990 
meters, March 11 to 13, 1911, by William R. Maxon (no. 5311). Collected 
also at the same place and time by H. Pittier (no. 3099). 


may 4, 1927 HITCHCOCK: NEW GRASSES FROM SOUTH AMERICA 215 


4. MyRRHIDENDRON DONNELL-SMITHII Coulter & Rose, Bot. Gaz. 19: 466. 


A small tree, 3.6 to 4.8m. high; trunk 7.5 cm. in diameter; leaves large, 30 
em. or more long, ternately compound; leaflets ovate to lanceolate, 2.5 to 
5 em. long, acute, sharply and often irregularly serrate, the teeth more or less 
mucronate-tipped, glabrous, shining and impressed-veiny above, dull and paler 
beneath and conspicuously reticulate; petiolules with a prominent stipular 
ring which is more or less glandular-tufted; petioles large, inflated; peduncles 
short; involucre few-leaved; involucels numerous, 3 or 4-toothed or cleft 
near the apex, scarious-margined and strongly purplish-veined; inflorescence 
more or less glandular-puberulent; rays numerous, rarely equal; pedicels 8 
to 10 mm. long; fruit linear, 10 to 12 mm. long, glabrous. 

Type locality: Lava beds at the summit of the Volcano Irazti, Costa Rica. 

Besides the type specimen this plant has been collected in Costa Rica on 
the Volcdn de Turrialba, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 35056), and in 1899 
by H. Pittier (no. 13214); on the Volcd4n Pods, 1924, by Paul C. Standley 
(no. 348681), and, 1890, by H. Pittier (no. 2012); and on Cerro de las Vueltas, 
1925-26, by Paul C. Standley (no. 43970). 


BOTANY.—Two new grasses from South America.! A.S. HitcHcock, 
Bureau of Plant Industry. 


Recently a package of grasses was received from the Museu Nacional 
do Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, which included many interesting specimens. 
Among them was an undescribed species of Olyra which I take pleas- 
ure in naming for the Director of the Museum, Dr. Alberto José de 
Sampaio, who sent me the specimens and who collected most of them, 
though this interesting species of Olyra was collected by José Vidal. 

The new species, described below, differs conspicuously from all 
other species of Olyra in the condensed inflorescence and the villous- 
ciliate spikelets. 


Olyra Sampaiana Hitche., sp. nov. 


Plant perennial; culm erect, retrorsely scaberulous, pubescent below the 
panicle, about 35 cm. tall, naked below, the sheaths bladeless, bearing two 
foliage leaves above, the nodes appressed-pubescent; sheaths slightly re- 
trorsely scaberulous, ciliate on the overlapping margin, 6 to 7 cm. long; 
ligule 1 to 2 mm. long, truncate; blades thin, oblong-lanceolate, abruptly 
rounded below into a short puberulent petiole about 2 mm. long, gradually 
narrowed to an acuminate apex, glabrous on the upper surface, antrorsely 
scabrous beneath, 13 to 15 em. long, 4.5 to 5 em. wide, the principal nerves 
about 5 pairs; panicle condensed, oblong, 6 cm. long, 1 cm. wide, staminate 


1 Received March 15, 1927. 


216 


JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


KA 


“ ae. \\ i 
il WZ. 7 oe 
WZ ve WW 


SS 2 
SS 


oe 


- - 
= © : 
mood a 
= Se 
SSS 
——— 


‘\ 
ce 


—— 
S_ 


er 


i 


° 
pee oe 


Fig. 1—Olyra Sampaiana, 2 views of pistillate spikelet, fruit, and staminate spikelet, : 
X 10 dia.: panicle, nat. size. 


Fig. 2.—Trisetum bulbosum, spikelet, floret, and palea, X 5 dia. 


may 4, 1927 HITCHCOCK: NEW GRASSES FROM SOUTH AMERICA 217 


below, pistillate above, interrupted between, the staminate portion about 1 
em. long; staminate spikelets narrow, about 4 mm. long, acuminate; pistillate 
spikelets about 2.5 mm. wide, the glume and sterile lemma about equal, 7 mm. 
long, tawny, rather thick and firm, 5-nerved, the outer nerves forming a 
thickened margin, the glume minutely pubescent, with a conspicuous fringe 
of hairs near the margin and somewhat short-villous on the back below, the 
sterile lemma similar but less villous and with scant marginal hairs; fruit 
narrow, 6 mm. long, 1.7 mm. wide, acuminate, with a blunt tip, laterally com- 
pressed at base, glabrous, dull white or tawny, under a lens very obscurely 
pitted, the margins nearly meeting over the palea along the upper part. 

Type in the United States National Herbarium, no. 1,297,351, collected at 
Reeve, State of Espirito Santo, Brazil, December 6, 1924, by José Vidal 
(no. 44). J have seen no other specimen. 


The Grass Herbarium recently received a package of Chilean grasses 
from Brother Claude Joseph who has sent many plants from Chile to 
the United States National Herbarium. In this package was the 
specimen of T’risetum which is described below as a new species. 


Trisetum bulbosum Hitchc., sp. nov. 


Perennial; culms erect, glabrous, 30 to 50 cm. tall, the base thickened to a 
bulb 3 to 6 mm. thick; sheaths glabrous; ligule thin, rounded and lacerate, 
1 to 2 mm. long, decurrent; blades glabrous, scaberulous, flat, becoming some- 
what involute or folded, mostly not more than 5 em. long, the 4 to 6 cauline 
ones gradually shorter, 0.5 to 1.5 mm. wide; panicle narrow, almost spikelike, 
8 to 10 cm. long, pale, the branches appressed, the axis and branches scabrous; 
spikelets narrow, about 1 cm. long, mostly 3-flowered, the rachilla prolonged 
as a small bristle, the third floret smaller than the others; glumes narrow, the 
first 6 to 7 mm. long, 1 to 3-nerved, the second a little wider and a little longer 
(about 1 mm.) than the first, 3 to 5-nerved; first lemma narrow, about 1 cm. 
long, rather obscurely 3-nerved, minutely scaberulous below, the callus 
antrorsely pubescent, 0.5 mm. long (being the first rachilla-joint disarticulat- 
ing at the base), the upper half scarious, the apex divided into two delicate 
pointed teeth 1 mm. long, the awn emitted from about the middle of the back, 
12 to 15 mm. long, geniculate, flexuous; palea small and narrow, about half as 
long as the lemma, finely ciliate on the nerves; second lemma similar to the 
first but a little smaller, the callus slender, sharp-pointed, about 2 mm. 
long, antrorsely pilose (consisting of the second joint of the rachilla disarticu- 
lating near the base), the short pilose base of the next rachilla joint remaining 
behind the palea; anthers 2 mm. long. 

Type in the United States National Herbarium, no. 1,297,352, collected 
at Concepcidn (San Pedro), Chile, October 30, 1926, by Brother Claude Joseph 
(no. 4607). I have seen no other specimen. 


This species is easily distinguished by the small bulbs at the base of the 
culm. It differs from other species of Trisetum in the disarticulation of the 
rachilla. Usually, in this and allied genera, the rachilla disarticulates at the 
summit of the joint or internode thus leaving only a short callus at the base 
of the floret, the rachilla-joint above being persistent along the back of the 
palea. In Trisetum bulbosum the disarticulation takes place at the base of 
the joint, leaving the joint above as a long sharp callus projecting below the 
floret. 


218 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


BOTANY.—New genera and species of Ivory Palms from Colombia, 
Ecuador and Peru.! O. F. Coox, Bureau of Plant Industry. 


The ‘‘vegetable ivory” palms of South America are a neglected and 
little known group, peculiar in many floral characters as well as in the 
large size and solid texture of the endosperm. Eminent botanical 
authorities of the last century did not recognize Phytelephas as a true 
palm, but associated it with Cyclanthus, Pandanus or Nipa, or set it 
apart as an ‘“‘anomalous genus.”’ The relations with other American 
palms were not appreciated.? 

The ivory palms are notably tolerant of shade and are adapted to 
undergrowth conditions of the darkest and dampest forests, but can 
live in the open if provided with sufficient moisture. Although the 
nuts are exported in large quantities from Ecuador, Colombia, and 
Panama, the palms are confined to the virgin forests which generally 
are remote from inhabited places and difficult of access, so that little 
botanical material has been collected and knowledge of the plant 
characters has remained fragmentary. Hundreds of sheets of other 
palms accumulated in the U.S. National Herbarium, but Phytelephas 
was represented only by a few fruits and nuts until leaves and inflo- 
rescences were collected in Panama by H. Pittier, a few years ago. - 

Thus far only the genus Phytelephas has been recognized in the ivory 
palm group, extending from Panama to Bolivia and including several 
species. A new genus from the west coast of Colombia has charac- 
ters very different from Phytelephas, and is not less divergent from 
other palms. ‘Two other genera need to be separated from Phytele- 
phas, one in Peru and another in Ecuador. 

Outstanding features of the new type from Colombia are a ramose 
male inflorescence and an expansion of the receptacles of the male 
flowers into large bodies, capitate and variously deformed by pressure, 
instead of the simple inflorescence and flat patelliform receptacles of 
Phytelephas. The stamens are minute and have the appearance of 
small grains of sand scattered over the surface of the receptacles, thus 
suggesting the generic name Ammandra. ‘The filaments and anthers 
are very short, in contrast with the very long filaments and anthers of 
Phytelephas. The male inflorescence as a whole, forming a relatively 


1 Received March 16, 1927. 

2Coox, O. F., Relationships of the Ivory Palms, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 138: 133. 
1910. Ivory Palms in Panama, This JouRNAL 3: 138. 1913. Relationships of the False 
Date Palm of the Florida Keys, with a Synoptical Key to the American Families of Palms. 
Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 16: 243. 1913. 


MAY 4, 1927 COOK: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES IVORY PALM 219 


short, closely ramified cluster of receptacles, suggests a sponge, a 
coral or a fungus, rather than a floral structure. 

The plant has no trunk, but forms a circle of leaves on long slender 
leaf-sheaths and petioles, like a tall, graceful fern. Thesheaths and 
petioles are nearly erect and the leaf-blades ascending, though the 
outer leaves become more divergent, with the pinnae horizontal or 
eventually somewhat drooping. ‘The reduction of the terminal pinnae 
is carried further than usual, the last pinnae being only a few centime- 
ters long. The lower pinnae are widely spaced and very narrow, but 
not shorter than those above. ‘The total length of the leaf, from the 
base of the sheath to the tip of the blade, is more than 6 meters. The 
leaf-sheath bundle holds a mass of fibers and fallen leaves that conceal 
the inflorescences, so that the general appearance of the plants is not 
altered at the fruiting stage. 

The leaves are very different from those of Phytelephas in having 
very long sheaths and petioles, the margins of the sheaths resolved 
into long simple fibers. ‘The prolonged upper portion of the sheath is 
shaped like the petiole, nearly round in cross-section. In Phytelephas 
the leaf-sheaths are relatively short and the petiole lacking or very 

short, that is, with no interval of naked stalk between the sheath and 

the lowest pinnae. An elongate petiole has been reported by Spruce 
in a species of Phytelephas from eastern Peru, but with trunk and 
fruit characters which show that it is different from Ammandra as 
well as from Phytelephas. Contrasting characters of the four genera 
now recognized are stated in the following analytical key. 


ANALYTICAL Ky TO GENERA OF PHYTELEPHANTACEAE 


Palms with slender trunks and few leaves; fruits with a fleshy rind and a 
soft edible pulp: Genus Yarina, type species Yarina microcarpa (Ruiz and 
Pavon), from eastern Peru. 

Palms with stout trunks or rootstocks and numerous large leaves 6 to 8 
meters long; fruits with a hard shell armed with large woody spines and lined 
TEEIELD: SAUIGE Voll OLAS ene eee ae ey A A ate RTO ee Re Pee eC 37 ee 


Male flowers represented by large capitate-angular receptacles rather 
sparingly beset with minute stamens, the anthers and filaments both very 
short; leaves with long slender sheaths and petioles: Genus Ammandra, 
type species Ammandra decasperma Cook, from Colombia. 

Male flowers with flat patelliform receptacles closely crowded with the 
filaments of the large stamens, the anthers and filaments both very long; 
leaves with short sheaths; petioles very short or wanting.................. 


Male flowers sessile or on very short pedicels, forming a continuous cover- 
ing of the spadix; stamens 36 to about 200, in a close tuft or tassel; leaves with 
pinnae regularly spaced along the rachis: Genus Phytelephas, type species 
Phytelephas macrocarpa Ruiz and Pavon, from eastern Peru. 


220 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 9 


Male flowers on slender tapering pedicels 4 to 6 cm. long; stamens more 
than 1,000 forming large spherical heads 2 to 3 cm. in diameter; leaves with 
pinnae aggregated in groups: Genus Palandra, type species Palandra aequa- 
forialis (Spruce), from Ecuador. 


Ammandra Cook, new genus 


Palms related to Phytelephas, with large spiny fruits in dense heads, but the 
male inflorescence short and ramose, and the male flowers represented by 
angular woody receptacles with very small, short stamens scattered over the 
surface. Plants trunkless, with slender pinnate leaves on long cylindrical 
petioles, the leaf-sheaths resolved, except on the petiole side, into a loose 
network of long slender straight fibers like horse-hairs; pinnae less than 50, 
mostly opposite, regularly spaced, the terminal and subterminal much re- 
duced; texture thin and papery, smooth on both surfaces, below with promi- 
nent submarginal veins. Male inflorescence with two spathes, the outer 
short, ensiform, the inner complete, fusiform or ovate, of rather thin texture, 
with narrow lateral carinae. Peduncle rather slender, somewhat compressed. 
with several large bracts below the flowering portion; axis strongly flattened 
with numerous short branches forming clusters of oblong, cylindrical or 
irregularly compressed woody receptacles representing the male flowers; 
stamens very small with short oblong anthers borne on very short filaments 
so that the anthers appear sessile on the surface of the receptacles. Female 
inflorescence and fruits similar to those of Phytelephas, rough with pyramidal 
spines, but with fewer fruits in a cluster, larger numbers of seeds in the fruits, 
the seeds strongly compressed, the hilum at the base of the seed, instead of on 
the inner or mesial face as in Phytelephas, the endocarp and testa thinner, the 
endosperm grooved by the branches of the raphe, the embryo short and broad, 
subdorsal, remote from the hilum. 


Ammandra decasperma Cook, new species 


A trunkless palm with an extremely short.axis, the insertions of the leaves 
not separated by any lengthening of the internodes, also the leaf-bases ex- 
tremely thin and closely compressed at the ring of attachment. Leaves 
about 10 or 12, attaining a length of 6 meters, with long slender sheaths and 
petioles, a relatively short rachis, and less than 50 pairs of pinnae, usually 
opposite, with remarkably exact placement. 

Leaf-sheaths attaining 120 cem., measured to the ends of the vertical grooves 
marking the attachment of the fibers; the sheath-tissues remaining alive only 
on the petiole side, not persisting in the form of plates or sheets of dry mater- 
ial, but soon resolved into slender straight fibers, with very slight connection 
into a network; base of sheath of indurated texture, only 2 or 3 mm. thick at 
the attachment to the axis, the surface a peculiar gray-drab color, becoming 
greenish about 60 cm. above the base; living portion of sheath at 20 em. from 
the base 4 em. wide and about 2.5 em. thick, retaining this thickness upward; 
inner face of sheath concave or flat for about 90 cm. from base, then becom- 
ing convex; upper part of the sheath like the petiole in color, texture and shape, 
becoming nearly round and merging gradually into the petiole, marked on 
the inner face by the narrow lines of attachment of the fibers, about 1 cm. 
apart; cut surfaces of sheath and petiole showing scattered dark brown or 
black fibers. Petioles erect, attaining 3 meters, about 2 cm. wide at base, 
nearly cylindrical, slightly thicker than wide. Rachis 259 to 264 em. long, 
blade 269 cm. long; rachis sharply angled above, flat underneath, triangular 


may 4, 1927 COOK: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES IVORY PALM 221 


in section. Pinnae 45 to 47 on each side, the lowest very narrow, the middle 
lanceolate; the terminal very short; texture rather thin, smooth and naked on 
both sides, somewhat paler beneath, with strong submarginal veins 2 to 4 
mm. from the margin, prominent below and forming a sharp ridge firmer 
than the margin; two other large veins between the submarginal and the mid- 
rib, but not prominent; lowest pinna on one side of leaf 40 cm. by 3 mm., on 
other side 49.5 by 8 mm.; second and third pinnae respectively 63 em. by 2 cm. 
and 64 cm. by 3.5 em.; pinna from middle of leaf 60 cm. by 5.3 cm.; tenth 
pinna from the end 37 cm. by 2.6 cm.; subterminal pinna 16 cm. by 1.5 em.; 
terminal 11 cm. by 1 cm.; or the narrowly margined percurrent rachis may be 
considered as a terminal pinna, 9 cm. long by 3 mm. wide. 

Male inflorescence: outer spathe, incomplete, 4.5 em. wide at 10 cm. from 
the end, the terminal portion ensiform, flattened, carinate, splitting about 6 
em. from the end on each side; texture very firm and tough, the surface gray- 
drab like the base of the leaf-sheaths; inner spathe 37 cm. long, 3 em. wide at 
base, widened gradually to 4 em. and then more abruptly, about 6 em. wide 
at 10 em. from the end, splitting for about 20 cm.; a distinct narrow carina on 
each side, the texture thin, rather stiff and papery when dry, the surface 
even, not plicate or fissured as in Attalea. Peduncle with 5 large bracts or 
rudimentary spathes below the first flowers; length of peduncle to first bract 
35 em., to first flower 49 cm., the first bract 5 cm. long, the others shorter; 
peduncle 2.5 cm. wide at base, 1.8 em. thick. Flowering axis about 30 cm. 
long strongly compressed, 3 cm. wide, 1 cm. or less in thickness, with the 
heads of flowers forming a dense mass 8 to 10 cm. wide, gradually tapering to 
the end; some of the lower flower clusters 2 to 3 cm. apart, the others more 
compact; the heads of flowers with pedicels 1 to 2 em. long, the heads 3 em. 
long including the pedicels, and 3 cm. broad, each head composed of 6 to 9 
broadly angular or variously compressed individual receptacles 1 to 1.5 emi. 
long and wide, often with distinct stalks 5 mm. long and wide; the heads 
rusty brown in color with pale yellowish stamens sprinkled rather sparsely 
over the surface, the individual stamens usually well separated, seldom in 
contact. 

Female inflorescence seen only in fruiting stage, about 20 cm. long, with the 
fruits 30 cm., at base 2.5 cm. wide; basal joint 1.5 em. long, to insertion of first 
spathe, notched at the sides; spathe 18 cm. long, 3 cm. wide, ensiform with a 
rather broad tip, open on one side for about half the length; lateral carinae 
thin, about 5mm. wide; second joint of spadix about 8 em. long; second spathe 
15 em. long, about 4 cm. wide, the lateral carinae reduced to fine ridges; 
peduncle between upper spathe and fruit head 6 to 8 em. long, 2.5 em. wide at 
base, 4 cm. at end, 2 em. thick in upper part, the surface smooth, not marked 
with bract-scars, but close to the end showing two complete rings of united 
bases of bracts or small spathes; fruits subtended by a bract about 2 em. wide 
and by a persistent perianth; sepals 4, petals 5 or 6, the petals somewhat nar- 
rower than the sepals, 6 to 7 mm. wide, probably about 5 cm. long. Fruit- 
cluster smaller than in Phytelephas, the 3 to 5 fruits 9 cm. to 13 cm. in diame- 
ter, armed with coarse woody spines and persistent woody styles 1 to 3 em. 
long; exocarp fibers short and close; mesocarp fibers fine and rather sparse; 
with a thin tight-fitting, fibrous sac of tough flexible texture inclosing each 
seed; such sacs not present or only slightly indicated in Phytelephas. Seeds 
7 to 10, strongly compressed and flat-sided, 4.5 to 5 em. long, 3 to 4 em. broad, 
2.2 to 3 em. thick, often narrowly wedge-shaped or flattened, the inner margin 
nearly straight, with a sharp or somewhat prominent lower corner, at the 
adhilum; surface of seeds smooth and even, black, without the layer of closely 


222 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


adherent whitish material surrounding the seeds of Phytelephas; hilum basal, 
rather large and prominent, attaining 2 cm. by nearly 1.5 em., coarsely pitted, 
but with outer coat of hard, brittle, dark brown tissue. : 

The type specimens, with male and female inflorescences, were collected 
at Buenaventura Colombia by O. F. Cook and F. C. Baker (no. 153) May 26, 
1926, and have been deposited in the U. S. National Herbarium, under 
numbers 1,282,066, 1,282,067, 1,282,068, 1,282,069, 1,282,070, 1,282,071. 

Buenaventura is noted for its heavy and nearly continuous rainfall. The 
surrounding country is a network of tidal inlets, swamps, and small hilly 
islands, often with steep or precipitous shores, scoured by strong tidal cur- 
rents. Ammandra grows in abundance on the wooded islets across the river 
from the town. Like other ivory palms, it is an undergrowth plant of the 
deep forests. 

A port has been constructed at Buenaventura and a railroad to the interior, 
but in many places the forests have not been cut, and the palm flora is still 
intact. Of 13 groups of American palms that have been recognized as fami- 
lies, at least 9 are represented at Buenaventura, only the Ceroxylaceae, 
Pseudophoenicaceae, Malortieaceae, and Chamaedoreaceae being absent. 
Among the genera represented are Bactris, Attalea, Scheelea, Guilielma, 
Manicaria, Geonoma, Welfia, Oenocarpus, Catostigma, Synechanthus, Mauri- 
tia, and Acanthorhiza. Several genera, such as Astrocaryum, Acrocomia, 
Pyrenoglyphis, Elaeis, and Raphia, which occur on the Isthmus of Panama 
were not seen at Buenaventura. 

Two other trunkless palms, an Attalea and a Scheelea, grow in the same for- 
ests, but Ammandra has smaller and more slender leaves, with no tendency 
to grouping of the pinnae or to adherence of the upper pinnae to form a solid 
terminal section of the leaf, which are features of the cocoid genera. Special 
leaf characters of Ammandra are the strong submarginal veins of the pinnae 
and the great reduction of the terminal pinnae. Most of the pinnae are 
arranged in opposite pairs, especially in the middle and upper part of the leaf, 
but the narrow lower pinnae may be alternate or somewhat irregular. 

The flowering season of Ammandra probably occurs in December. At 
the end of May it appeared that no flowers or fruits were obtainable, though 
hundreds of individuals were examined in the hope of identifying the strange 
palm. Finally, at the close of our last visit to the forest, two fruiting indi- 
viduals were found and a single male inflorescence was brought in by our 
native guide. Further search was forbidden by the danger of being stranded 
above the tangled passages of a narrow tidal creek. 

While the inflorescence was drying on board the steamer, many beetles 
emerged. ‘Specimens have been deposited in the U. 8S. National Museum, 
including two species of weevils, a Scarabeid, a Hydrophilid, and six species of 
Staphylinidae. 

The native name of the Ammandra palm at Buenaventura is “‘cabecita,”’ 
meaning “‘little head,’’ doubtless with reference to the smaller size of the fruit 
clusters, In comparison with Phytelephas. The nuts are not collected or 


may 4, 1927 COOK: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES IVORY PALM 223 


exported, being smaller in size and the endosperm possibly not so hard as in 
Phytelephas, which apparently does not occur in the immediate vicinity of 
Buenaventura. According to local information the nearest locality for the 
true ‘“‘tagua’”’ is onthe Dagua River several hours by canoe from Buenaventura. 


Yarina Cook, new genus 


Ivory palms from eastern Peru with petiolate leaves as in Ammandra, but 
borne on a slender ascending trunk marked with deep areolate leaf-scars 
arranged in spirals. The leaves are few and the petioles shorter than in 
Ammandra, the pinnae more numerous and shorter, and the lower pinnae 
much reduced. The fruits are fleshy and edible, including the outer rind, 
which in Ammandra and Phytelephas forms a hard shell armed with large 
woody spines and with an inner lining of stiff fibers. 

The only ivory palm previously described with petiolate leaves is a species 
that grows in the eastern Andes of Peru, named by Ruiz and Pavon in 1798, 
though still but little known. The presence of a petiole suggests an asso- 
ciation with Ammandra, but an assignment to that genus is not warranted in 
view of several differences recorded by Spruce and shown in the photograph 
ponte’ by Wallace in Spruce’s “‘Notes of a Botanist on the Amazon and 
Andes.”’ 


Yarina microcarpa (Ruiz and Pavon) Cook 


Phytelephas microcarpa Ruiz and Pavon, Syst. Veg. Peruv. 1: 302. 1798. 
SPRUCE, Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Bot. 11: 176. 1871. Notes of a Botanist on 
the Amazon and Andes, 2: 133, f. 6. 1908. 

The photograph is said to have been taken on the river Ucayali in eastern 
Peru and shows a small slender palm with only 6 or 7 leaves, the pinnae widely 
spaced and spreading, horizontal in the middle of the leaf, retrorse in the 
lower part, and apparently with much shorter petioles and sheaths than in 
Ammandra. ‘The lower pinnae are much shorter, and go down nearly to the 
point of divergence of the leaf bases, so that the petioles may not be more than 
one or two feet long, instead of 7 or 8 feet as in Ammandra. The number of 
pinnae probably is between 60 and 70. The characters of the inflorescences 
and flowers are still entirely unknown, and should receive the attention of 
botanists who visit the eastern Andes. 


Spruce saw the palm in many places along the Huallaga River, and the 
original localities mentioned by Ruiz and Pavon were between the Ucayali and 
the Huallaga. The type species of Phytelephas, P. macrocarpa, also grows in 
the same region and is described by Spruce as having “‘no proper petiole at all,” 
in comparison with a “long petiole” in P. microcarpa. The trunk and fruit 
characters are also definitely contrasted, P. macrocarpa with “either no trunk 
at all, or a very short and stout one, which is nearly always inclined or 
crooked,” while in P. microcarpa ‘“‘well-grown plants have a slender inclined 
stem no thicker than the arm, reaching 10 feet high, and spirally areolate 
with the deep leaf-scars. The fruits are about the size of a child’s head, and 
so much resemble externally the fruits of some anonas, that the Peruvians 
call them ‘Anon de Palma,’ but the palm itself it called ‘Yarina.’”’ The 


224 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 9 


fruits of P. macrocarpa “‘are 9 to 12 inches in diameter, nearly spherical, and 
consist of from 12 to 20 closely packed capitula. . . . .” 

The native name yarina affords a convenient generic designation. As a 
word of the Quichua language yarina, or yaurina, is supposed to mean fish- 
hook or fish-bait, and may allude to a use of the hard nuts to make fish- 
hooks. Also the edible fruit pulp might be used as bait, or in catching fish 
with poison. 


Genus PHyTELEPHAS Ruiz and Pavon 


Ivory palms with stout trunks, usually short and decumbent, but in some 
species ascending or erect, with very short internodes. Leaves numerous 
~ and large, pinnae 80 to 100 pairs equally spaced on the rachis, with little or 
no petiole; male inflorescence emerging from the two spathes as a long simple 
spike or catkin densely crowded with sessile or subsessile male flowers, each 
flower a compact tassel-like cluster of large stamens, both filaments and an- 
thers long and slender; female inflorescence very short, the cluster of large 
female flowers surrounded by an involucre of large bracts; fruits very large 
and woody, with 4 to 7 large triangular wedge-shaped nuts; and hilum near 
the middle of the inner angle of the nut, the embryo basal, narrower and 
longer than in Ammandra. 

The type species is Phytelephas macrocarpa Ruiz and Pavon, from eastern 
Peru. Characters of this species as reported by Spruce are noted under 
Yarina microcarpa, Phytelephas Seemanni, and P. karstenz. 


Phytelephas tumacana Cook, new species 


Trunk erect attaining 6 meters or more, 20 cm. in diameter, with very short 
internodes, the angles of the leaf-bases persistent, forming close spirals; 
similar to the trunk of Manicaria, but the internodes still shorter. Leaves 
attaining 6 to 7 meters on young palms, on mature individuals about 5 meters; 
petioles short, 2 to 10 cm. long, 4.5 cm. wide, 2.5 em. thick; rachis 5 meters; 
long, triangular in cross section with a broad, low, gradually sloping median 
ridge, the under surface deep green, mottled with grayish-brown scale mater- 
ial, very closely appressed. Pinnae about 100 on each side, 102 counted; 
first pinna 12 em. by 1 cm., sometimes only 4 or 5 em. long; second and third 
pinnae scarcely larger than first, fifth pinna 19 cm. by 1.5 cm., tenth pinna 
28 em. by 2 em. with rachis 2.5 wide; middle pinnae attaining 94 em. by 
5.5 em.; tenth pinna from the end 54 em. by 3.5 cm.; fifth from end 43.5 cm. 
by 3 cm., subterminal pinnae 44 cm. by 1.5 cm.; terminal pinnae 20 by 1.5, 
sometimes symmetrical, with the percurrent rachis as midrib, but other 
leaves with a terminal split; midrib of pinnae prominent above and below; 
other veins prominent below but not above. 

Male inflorescence: Outer spathe exposed 23 cm. above ground, 5.5 em. 
wide, including thin lateral carinae 6 to 7 mm. wide; inner spathe 37 cm. 
long, probably about 5 cm. wide, in dry state 4 cm. between the carinae, 
which are much smaller than those of the outer spathe; peduncle from spathe 
to first flower 1] to 12 em., the spathe decurrent on the sides, higher in the 
middle; flowering axis 50 em. long, but probably not fully extended, the ter- 
minal portion with the flowers still very crowded; width of axis in the lower 
part 2.5 cm., with the flower masses 4 em.; axis near the middle 2 cm. wide and 
1 em. thick, distinctly compressed; lowest bract 2 em. long, subtending 3 


May 4, 1927 COOK: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES IVORY PALM 225 


flowers in a group; other bracts gradually reduced, V-shaped, with a short 
narrow rim running up on each side of the cluster; the lower groups of flowers 
with separate pedicels 3 to 4mm. long, 2 mm. wide; pedicels farther up irregu- 
lar, united and reduced in length, the number irregular and difficult to deter- 
mine, but many of the groups with four flowers and some with five; upper 
pedicels reduced to about 1 mm., in some cases all the flowers of a cluster 
seem to be completely fused, forming larger heads with dense masses of sta- 
mens 1.5 cm. long, or nearly 2 cm. long on some of the lower and more mature 
flowers. Stamens with brown filaments, becoming rather tough and elastic 
while drying; the anthers light yellow when fresh. Sepals and vetals appar- 
ently represented by several small scale-like organs along the upper margins 
of the pedicels. 

Female inflorescence seen only in fruiting stage; peduncle between the 
upper spathe scar and the fruit head 14 cm. long, 3.5 cm. wide, 2 em. thick, 
marked in the upper half by numerous transverse or oblique bract-scars, 
2 to 4 cm. wide, becoming closer and broader above, forming 2 or 3 complete 
collars at the end. Fruit cluster round, about 25 cm. in diameter, of 11 to 
12 fruits, fitted compactly together, the fruits 10 cm. long, 14 cm. broad, 
with 4 to 6 nuts in each fruit, the normal number apparently 6, the fruits with 
4 and 5 nuts appearing abnormal and unsymmetrical. Attachment of fruits 
2.5 to 3 em. long, 1.5 cm. wide, leaving a prominent rounded receptacle beset 
with short fibers; persistent styles and stigmas of fruits 13 em. long, united 
for about half the length, then with branches separating rather irregularly, 
usually six, probably indicating the number of carpels, the tube of the style 
usually open on one side showing 12 longitudinal ridges or fibers, each pair 
of fibers probably representing a division of the stigma; texture of the persist- 
ent styles, stigmas and petals tough and horny, becoming brittle with age. 

Specimens and photographs were obtained from palms growing at Tumaco, 
Colombia, some in a park and others in door-yards, said to be grown from 
seeds or plants brought from the adjacent mainland. ‘The ‘specimens and 
measurements of the leaves were from a large female palm with a trunk about 
3 meters high bearing many large clusters of fruits. Type material is de- 
posited in the U.S. National Herbarium under numbers 1,282,072, 1,282,073, 
1,282,074, 1,282,075, 1,282,076, 1,282,077, collected at Tumaco, Colombia, May 
10, 1926, by O. F. Cook and F. C. Baker (no. 103). 

The leaves of Phytelephas are used extensively at Tumaco for thatching 
houses. The thatch material is called cade, while the nuts are called tagua. 
Spruce gives cad: as the name of Phytelephas aequatorialis in Ecuador. No 
doubt cade or cadi are equivalents of kata, which is a word for roof in the 
Quichua language of Peru, with katanz and katakuni as verbs meaning to 
thatch. The wide distribution of Quichua plant names and place names in 
South America is remarkable. The word tagua or tahua in Quichua is the 
numeral four and may allude to the four nuts in each fruit, in the Peruvian 
species of Phytelephas. The name polo ponto or pulu puntu, recorded by 
Spruce for Phytelephas macrocarpa in the Eastern Andes, may be equivalent 
to puillu puitu, (Middendorff 665), meaning in Quichua a square of four- 
parted knot, that would aptly describe the fruit. The word anta, recorded 
by Seemann as the native name of Phytelephas in the Cupica district in the 
northwestern part of Colombia, means métal or copper in Quichua, and might 


226 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


refer to the hardness of the seeds. Also the word chili is given (Holguin 83) 
as the name of the “tree that produces the vegetable ivory (corozo).” 

The young male inflorescences are eaten at Tumaco, as soon as they begin 
to emerge from the spathe, when a rapid growth or expansion is taking place 
and the tissues are still soft. During the process of drying the surfaces of the 
peduncle and axis have a moist appearance like cured vanilla beans, as though 
an oily substance were being formed by fermentation. There is a strong and 
rather pungent odor, not unpleasant, suggesting bitter almonds. 


PHYTELEPHAS SEEMANNI Cook 


Phytelephas macrocarpa Seemann, Botany of the Herald, 205, pl. 45-47. 
1852-57. Not Phytelephas macrocarpa Ruiz and Pavon Syst. Veg. Peruv. 
1: 301. 1798. Phytelephas seemanni Cook, U. 8. Dept. Agric. Bur. PI. 
Ind. Bull. 242: 68. 1912. 

“As already recognized by Spruce as far back as 1869, the name Phytele- 
phas macrocarpa does not belong to the vegetable-ivory palm described by 
Seemann from Panama (Botany of the Herald, 1852-1857, pls. 45-47, p. 205). 
Two species, macrocarpa and microcarpa, both from the eastern slopes of the 
Andes of Peru, were named by Ruiz and Pavon in connection with the original 
description of the genus Phytelephas, but without distinctive characters other 
than the size of the fruits. Seemann did not know the Peruvian species, 
but was aware that the Panama palm was different from another Phytelephas 
found by Purdie in the upper valley of the Magdalena River in Colombia, 
supposed by Karsten to represent Phytelephas microcarpa. Spruce’s account 
of the true P. macrocarpa of Peru leaves.no doubt that the Panama species 
is entirely distinct. It has the trunk decumbent and creeping instead of 
upright, the leaves with fewer, larger pinnae, the spathes two instead of three 
or four, the male flowers with 36 stamens instead of 150 to 280. The fruits 
also are larger and contain more numerous nuts, but with fewer fruits in a 
head.’’$ 


The preceding note was published in relation to a shipment of seeds from 
Panama, but is somewhat misleading. The original locality of Seemann’s 
palm at Cupica is not in Panama territory, but it was supposed that ivory 
palms from Panama would represent the same species. Later it was found 
that palms from several districts in Panama were different and five of the 
local types were named as new species.* 

The palm described and illustrated by Seemann differs from the Panama 
species in having the surface of the fruits divided into larger areas, with coarser 
spines and a stronger development of fibers in the cortex and mesocarp. A 
fruit specimen in the collection of the Department of Agriculture agrees 
closely with Seemann’s description and drawings. 

Spruce’s description of Phytelephas macrocarpa states that the trunk is 
very short and inclined or decumbent, while the trunk of P. seemannz grows 


3U.8. Dept. Agr., Bur. Pl. Ind. Bull. 242. Seeds and Plants Imported During the 
Period from April 1 to June 30, 1911, p. 68, No. 31115. Issued May 31, 1912. 
4Ivory Palms in Panama. This JourNAL 8: 138-148. 1913. 


_ MAY 4, 1927 COOK: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES IVORY PALM 227 


to 20 feet long, though rising not more than 6 feet from the ground. The 
leaves of P. macrocarpa have about 100 pairs of pinnae, attaining 32 inches 
13 inches, while P. seemannz is credited with about 80 pinnae, 3 feet long 
and 2 inches broad. ‘The fruits of P. macrocarpa usually ripen only 4 seeds, 
those of P. seemanni 6 to 9 seeds, “‘but generally 7.’’ The smaller number of 
stamens, 36, and the larger number of spathes, 4 or 5, are characters of P. 
seemanni. The so-called spathes may represent large bracts at the base of 
the female inflorescence, but in that case the large size and small number of 
the bracts would be distinctive of the species. 


Phytelephas karsteni Cook new species 


Phytelephas microcarpa Karsten, Florae Columbiae Sp. Sel. 1: 165 t. 82. 
1861. Spruce, Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Bot.11: 178. 1871. Not Phytelephas 
microcarpa Ruiz & Pavon, Syst. Veg. Peruv. 1: 302. 1798 

Another ivory palm was described by Karsten from the valley of the Mag- 
dalena River, Colombia, with no trunk and the fruits usually with only 4 
seeds. As recognized by Spruce, this species is distinct from Yarina micro- 
carpa in the absence of a distinct petiole as well as in the characters of the 
fruit. Karsten’s palm evidently is more closely related to the other Peruvian 
species, P. macrocarpa, which likewise has a 4-seeded fruit with a fleshy pulp 
and female flowers of nearly the same size. Spruce says that there are 4 or 
6 stigmas in P. macrocarpa, though only about 4 of the carpels are fertile, 
while Karsten’s figures show only 4 stigmas. The entire female flowers of 
P. karstent are 9 cm. long, according to the natural-size figures, while the 
flowers of P. tumacana must have been about 13 cm. long. The styles and 
stigmas together are about 10 cm. long in P. macrocarpa, while in P. kar- 
stena they are 8 cm. long. The stamens of P. macrocarpa are about 1.2 cm. 
long, those of P: karstent 1.5 em. Karsten’s figures of the female inflores- 
“cence show an involucre of many ovate-acuminate broadly overlapping bracts, 
about 9em. by 4cem. The insertions of such bracts are indicated as promi- 
nent transverse ridges on the axis of the adult inflorescence. Spruce describes 
P. macrocarpa as having an involucre of many small subtriangular scales 
around the base. of the fruit-heads, with the tips of the scales separating into 
fibers when the fruit is mature. 


Phytelephas longiflora Cook, new species 


Female inflorescence with an involucre of many large bracts arranged in 
several longitudinal rows, probably in 8 rows, with 7 bracts in each row, the 
lower bracts larger and very broad, the middle smaller, the upper, subtending 
the flowers, much larger, triangular, about 8 cm. long and 3 cm. broad; female 
flowers attaining nearly 20 cm.; sepals narrowly triangular, 7 to 9 cm. long 
by 1 to 1.3 cm. broad; petals narrowly lanceolate, light colored, 15 to 16 cm. 
long by 1.5 cm. broad; staminodes numerous, slender, 3 cm. long; pistil 
about 18 cm. long, the ovary 1 cm. long by 1.2 em. broad, the style nearly 11 
pene by 2 mm. thick, the stigmas 5, about 6 cm. long, about 1 mm. 
thick. 

Specimens and photographs of the inflorescence were obtained in February, 
1913, by H. Pittier (no. 5867) from a palm in a public park at Caracas, Vene- 
zuela, of unknown origin, but probably from the western part of Venezuela. 


228 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


The description and measurements are taken from photographs of a female 
inflorescence and of dissected female flowers in fresh conditions, the flower 
photographs in natural size. The specimens are not now accessible, but copies 
of the photographs have been deposited in the National Herbarium as repre- 
senting the type material. 

The very large flowers and the involucre of numerous bracts arranged in 
longitudinal rows are striking features. There is no indication of such an 
involucre in any of the descriptions of other species, or in the specimens that 
have been compared. The bracts of P. karsteni are much larger, and broader 
above the base, instead of being triangular. The bract scars of P. tumacana 
are fewer and broader, and are scattered over the upper half of the last: joint 
of the spadix, instead of being arranged in close series. 


Palandra Cook, new genus 


Ivory palms related to Phytelephas, with an erect columnar trunk, attain- 
ing a height of 5 to 10 meters, roughened with prominent broadly triangular 
leaf-scars, covering the longer side of the short, oblique internodes. Leaves 
numerous and large, with more than 100 pinnae on a side, inserted in groups 
of 3 to 5. Male inflorescences forming a broad loose spike, the very large 
male flowers borne on long slender pedicels inserted on the axis in groups. 
Stamens long and slender as in Phytelephas, but more numerous, exceeding 
1,000, forming a large spherical head, in striking contrast with the sessile, 
crowded, tassel-like male flower of Phytelephas. Female inflorescence similar 
to that of Phytelephas, the fruits armed with very large conical spines, the 
nuts rather narrow and oblong, the hilum sub-basal, rather small and very 
prominent, or raised on a projecting rim of the shell and with the adhilum 
forming a distinct point or projecting spine. Seedling with a long burrowing 
cotyledon and two bladeless sheaths, the second very long, the first leaf com- 
pound with numerous pinnae, as in Phytelephas. 

The type species is Palandra aequatorialis (Spruce), described originally 
from the plain of Guayaquil but supposed to extend northward into Colombia. 
It is the largest of the ivory palms, with a tall trunk and grouped pinnae that 
give it a distinct habit. 

The Tumaco ivory palm, on account of its erect trunk, was supposed at 
first to represent the species that Spruce had discovered in Ecuador, but it 
was clear from Spruce’s description that the male inflorescence was unlike that 
of Phytelephas, and different also from Ammandra. Spruce’s account of the 
floral characters is confirmed by a series of specimens and photographs obtained 
near Huigra, Ecuador, October 23, 1918, by Dr. J. N. Rose, no. 22585. 
Several characters not given by Spruce are supplied from these specimens. 
The U. 8. National Herbarium also has a specimen from Balao, Ecuador, 
Eggers no. 14701, from the herbarium of Captain John Donnell Smith. The 
specimens of Palandra from Huigra are accompanied by two fruit heads which 
have small external spines and broad nuts with a very large mesial hilum. 
The occurrence of a species of Phytelephas in the same locality as Palandra 
is suggested. 


The specimens of Palandra show sections of the male inflorescence with 
the very large male flowers borne on straight, slight tapering pedicels, 4 to 6 
em. long, and 2 to 3 mm. wide in the dry condition. The stamens are long 
and slender, as in Phytelephas, not the short minute stamens of Ammandra, 


MAY 4, 1927 COOK: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES IVORY PALM 229 


but forming very large heads, 2 to 3 cm. in diameter, consisting of more than 
a thousand stamens, according to Spruce. The receptacle is not a thickened 
solid body as in Ammandra, but a flat expansion of the end of the pedicel 
with the margin showing minute rudiments of the floral envelopes, as in 
Phytelephas. The pedicels of the flowers are inserted on the axis in groups 
which may represent obsolete branches. It is remarkable that the branches 
have been suppressed while the pedicels have been elongated. Since no 
other palm has such flowers or such pedicels, Palandra forms a strikingly 
distinct genus. The interrupted or fastigiate pinnae are another unique 
character among the ivory palms, though a similar specialization appears in 
several genera of Cocaceae. The grouping of the pinnae on the rachis 
may have a genetic relation to the grouping of the flowers on the axis of the 
inflorescence. 

Pedicellate flowers evidently were a primitive feature of the Phytelephan- 
taceae, as in the Sabalaceae and Pseudophoenicaceae. Even in the Cocaceae 
pedicellate flowers are indicated as an ancestral character. Flowers of Jubaea, 
from palms growing at Santa Barbara, California, have pedicels from 2 to 8 
mm. long. Although shortened or suppressed in Phytelephas, pedicels have 
been retained in Ammandra and greatly enlarged in Palandra. In contrast 
with such retention or increase of the pedicels and receptacles is the elimina- 
tion of the floral envelopes of the male flowers, which has gone much farther 
the Phytelephantaceae than in other families of palms. The opposite tend- 
encies are shown in the specializations of the female flowers of the ivory palms, 
which are not pedicellate and have larger floral envelopes than in any other 
family. 


Palandra aequatorialis (Spruce) Cook 


Phytelephas aequatorialis Spruce, Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Bot. 11: 180. 
1871. 

The palm is described by Spruce as having a stout, usually erect trunk 
15 to 20 feet high; leaves 30 feet long with very short petioles; pinnae nearly 
2 feet long inserted on the rachis in groups of 3 or 4; male inflorescences 
exceeding 4 feet in length, emerging from two large spathes; peduncle flattened, 
18 inches long, 2 inches wide; male flowers numbering about 170, containing 
more than 1,000 stamens half an inch long, the filaments longer than the 
anthers. The male flowers are noted as white on the label of the specimen 
collected by Eggers. A photograph of ‘“‘a male tagua palm” with grouped 
pinnae standing at different angles to the rachis, was published in the Bulletin 
of the Pan-American Union, August 1913, from Esmeraldas, Ecuador. 
Another photograph, also from Esmeraldas, shows a female palm with evenly 
spaced pinnae. 

From the specimens and photographs obtained by Dr. Rose it appears 
that the palms near Huigra attained a height of 12 meters or more with the 
trunk about 50 cm. in diameter at the base, tapering slightly and gradually 
upward. The grouping of the pinnae is irregular, sometimes with 5 or 6 
pinnae together, and the lower pinnae wider apart than the upper. The 
number of pinnae appears to be about 120 on a side, on an adult palm with 


230 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 9 


leaves 5 or 6 meters long. The burrowing cotyledon of the seedling is about 
15 em. long, the first sheath 8 cm., the second sheath 24 to 28 em. and the 
first leaf about 70 cm. long, with the sheaths soon resolved into fine simple 
fibers as in Ammandra. 


ZOOLOGY.—The occurrence of Naobranchia occidentalis on the 
Pacific Coast of the United States... Droaractas V. VILLADOLID, 
Stanford University, California (Communicated by Davip STARR 
JORDAN). 


In April, 1925, I collected specimens of parasitic copepods from the 
gills of Parophrys vetulus (Girard), taken from off Point Reyes, 
California in water about 50 fathoms deep. The flounder was 
taken in a “paranzella”’ net, operated by the trawlers, ‘“‘Henrietta”’ 
and ‘‘Three sisters’? of the Paladini Fish Company, San Francisco. 

In the following June and July I made a trip to Puget Sound in the 
interest of my flat-fish studies. On July 6, 7,and 8, I was with Captain 
Fred Weisse of Snohomish, Washington, in his trawler, ‘‘Bonita,”’ 
fishing in Tulalip Harbor, Fort Susan Harbor, and Saratoga Passage, 
off Whidby Island, San Juan County. During this trip, I collected 
a number of the same parasites from the gills of Parophrys vetulus 
and Hippoglossoides elassodon, both of which are common flounders 
of Puget Sound. ‘They were all taken by an otter trawl at a depth of 
about 40 to 60 fathoms. On June 28, 1925, I collected a few of these 
parasites from the gills of Platichthys stellatus, the common flounder 
of the Pacific Coast of the United States. These flounders were 
taken from fish traps in Mutiny and Admiralty Bays in water of about 
10 fathoms. 

The specimens were sent to Professor Charles B. Wilson, of West- 
field, Massachusetts, a specialist on the group. ‘To quote Professor 
Wilson, ‘‘The parasites you sent me from the gills of the small flounder, 
Parophrys vetulus, prove to be Naobranchia occidentalis, one of the 
Lernaeopodidae. The only other specimens of this parasite known 
were five females and one male taken from the gills of the Pacific 
cod, Gadus macrocephalus, at Chignik Bay, Alaska, by the “‘Albatross.”’ 
You have thus added a new host and have brought the parasite within 
the limits of the United States. I will keep the specimens and add 
them to the collection in the National Museum.’’ 

It is of interest to note that Naobranchia occidentalis is more common 


1 Received February 12, 1927. 


— MAY 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 231 


in the northern waters of the Pacific as it approaches its type locality, 
Chignik Bay, Alaska than in the southern part of its range. 

At the present writing, Naobranchia occidentalis is known to occur 
from Point Reyes, California to Chignik Bay, Alaska, in water from 
10 to about 50 fathoms deep, from the gills of the Pacific cod (Gadus 
macrocephalus) and three flounders, namely: Parophrys vetulus 
(Girard), the common California ‘‘sole’”’ or the sharp-nosed ‘‘sole’’ of 
Puget Sound; Platichthys stellatus (Pallas), the starry flounder; and 
Ea ep nalossoides elassodon Jordan & Gilbert, the ponehe back ‘ alee 
or the mud “‘sole” of the Puget Sound. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


424TH MEETING 


The 424th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, January 26, 1927, 
President Butts presiding. The Secretary announced the election to active 
membership of P. D. TRask and Marin STADNICHENKO. 

Informal communications: O. E. Mrrnzer called attention to the Seventh 
Biennial Report of the State Engineer of New Mexico, recently published, 
which is likely to escape the notice of geologists but which contains five brief 
papers on ground-water hydrology prepared by members of the Division of 
Ground Water of the U. 8. Geological Survey. These papers are based on 
investigations that were made possible by appropriations of the State Legis- 
lature two years ago. They are as follows: 

1. The Roswell Artesian Basin, by A. G. Fiedler. This is 4 preliminary 
report on one of the most productive artesian basins in the United States, 
and is based on one of the most thorough and intensive studies of artesian 
conditions that has ever been made. 

2. The geology and artesian water prospects in the San Jose-Rio Puerco 
Valley, in Sandoval County, by B. Coleman Renick. The geologic sec- 
tion includes rocks of pre-Cambrian, Pennsylvania, Permian, Triassic, Ju- 
rassic (?), Cretaceous, Tertiary, Pleistocene, and Recent age. Most of the 
strata are turned up along the western slope of the Nacimiento and San 
Pedro mountains, forming an artesian structure. Artesian conditions were 
predicted by Doctor Renick, and have since been demonstrated by test 
drilling. Thus, this investigation furnishes an example of an artesian basin 
that was discovered in the course of regular field work by the Geological Survey. 

3. Reconnaissance in Socorro County, by Kirk Bryan. This brief paper 
reports the results of a reconnaissance preliminary to a geologic and ground- 
water survey that is still to be carried out. Shore features of an ancient lake, 
doubtless of Pleistocene age, were discovered in the San Augustin Plains, in 
Socorro and Catron counties. At its high stage, this lake reached above the 
present 6,900-foot contour, was at least 120 feet in maximum depth, and was 
about 25 miles long and 7 miles wide. 


232 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 9 


4, Reconnaissance in DeBaca County, by Kirk Bryan. This is likewise a 
brief report on a reconnaissance preliminary to a more thorough investigation. 

5. Geology and ground-water resources of the drainage basin of the Rio 
Penasco above Hope, by B. Coleman Renick. The area described lies high 
up on the east slope of the Sacramento Mountains and is underlain by cavern- 
ous limestone of the Chupadera formation (Permian), where the main water 
table is 500 to 1,000 feet below the surface. The region affords a striking 
example of perched bodies of ground water. This water is supported by shale 
strata interbedded with the limestone and gives rise to large springs that 
furnish irrigation supplies and to one strong flowing well. Attention is 
called to the possibility of developing additional irrigation supplies from 
wells and of pumping the wells with water power developed by the pumped 
water on its way down to the irrigation district. 

W. C. ALDEN reported on the condition of the Gros Ventre landslide of 
June, 1925. 

Program: FRANK RexEveEs: Thrust faulting adjacent to the Highwood 
Mountains, Montana. The Highwood Mountains are one of several isolated 
mountain groups that rise out of the plains in central Montana. According 
to Weed and Pirsson, this mountain group consists of an erosional remnant 
of basaltic and trachyandesitic breccias, tuffs, and lava flows resting on an 
eroded surface underlain by Upper Cretaceous strata. Both the volcanic 
debris and underlying Cretaceous strata are cross cut by several stocks and 
numerous dikes. 

Field work by the author in the region during 1926 showed the presence of 
thrust faults in the upper Cretaceous strata that are exposed on the plains 
to the north, northeast, and east of the mountains. These thrust faults in 
general are concentric to the mountain area and in other respects are similar to 
the thrust faults adjacent to the Bearpaw Mountains. Considerable evidence 
was obtained during the field work which corroborated the author’s earlier 
expressed belief that the thrust faulting of the region is confined to the upper 
part of the Colorado shale and overlying formations and that the underlying 
rocks are neither folded or thrust-faulted. This shallow faulting, together 
with the fact that the faults are found only in that part of the plains toward 
which there is a plainsward dip from the mountains, makes it possible to offer 
the same explanation for these thrust faults as that previously offered for the 
Bearpaw Mountain faulting—namely, that they are the result of the 
plainsward slipping, probably on bentonite beds, of the weak upper Creta- 
ceous strata, this slipping being brought about by the load of volcanic material 
and the earthquake shocks that accompanied the explosive phases of the 
volcanic eruptions. (Author’s abstract.) 

W. H. Brapusry: Tertiary and Recent fresh water algae reefs. Algae 
reefs are common in certain parts of the Green River formation of Colorado, 
Utah, and Wyoming, and assist in interpreting the geologic history of the 
formation. In order better to interpret these reefs, the recent algal deposits 
of Green and Canandaigua Lakes, N. Y., have also been studied. Micro- 
scopic blue-green and green algae by their photosynthesis precipitate calcium 
carbonate from the lake waters. If the deposit is formed by one species it 
usually preserves the form of that plant, but if it is formed by a complex 
assemblage or felt of algae belonging to several species the deposit has instead 
a characteristic spongy or arborescent structure. The algal deposits have the 
form of isolated nodules, hemispherical or turbinate heads, and mammillary 
beds. Such forms are associated in reefs which may be narrow and fringing, 
broad, and bed-like, or intermediate between these two depending upon the 


MAY 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 233 


shore and bottom profile of the lake in which they formed. Narrow fringing 
reefs form along steep shores because there the maximum depth at which 
fresh water algal deposits form rapidly is not far from the strand. Broad 
bed-like reefs on the other hand form in shallow flat-bottomed bays and the 
intermediate type on more or less gently sloping bottoms. Most of the algae 
reefs of the Green River formation are bed-like and range in area from a 
fraction of an acre to several square miles. They range in thickness from a 
few inches to about 18 feet. About half of them consist of microcrystalline 
calcite which has a distinctive spongy or arborescent microstructure and 
probably were formed by an assemblage of several species of algae most of 
which were filamentous. Reefs with this microstructure have a variety of 
megascopic forms none of which is of unusual interest. The remainder of the 
reefs in the Green River formation were built chiefly by a single alga, Chlo- 
rellopsis coloniata Reis. This alga also forms reefs in the Miocene lake beds 
of the Rhine Valley but so far as the writer can determine is elsewhere un- 
known. Most Chlorellopsis reefs are laminated. This lamination is prob- 
ably annual and in a few reefs is well enough defined to estimate the rate of 
growth of the deposits. The annual deposit consists of alayer of Chlorellopsis 
colonies formed during the summer and a thin dense layer without algal 
structure which was formed in the winter. These supposed annual layers 
average about 6 millimeters thick and therefore the reef which is about 7 feet 
thick must have required at least 355 years to form. The bed-likealgae 
reefs of the Green River formation indicate that the ancient lake bottom was 
nearly flat over large areas and was probably covered by only a thin sheet 
of water—perhaps between 3 and 15 feet deep. Furthermore the reefs seem 
to indicate stability of the lake level for periods of time measured in hundreds 
of years for they grew continuously. Such periods of stability suggest that 
at those times the lake maintained an outlet, for lakes in closed basins are 
extremely sensitive to climatic variations and as a consequence fluctuate 
greatly in volume. (Author’s abstract.) 

F. E. Martrues: Influence of secondary faults on the development of the 
Grand Canyon topography. The plateau region through which the Grand 
Canyon is cut 1s commonly supposed to be made up of several great, massive 
blocks delimited by north-south trending master faults. As a matter of 
fact, these plateau blocks, and more especially the Kaibab, are traversed by 
numerous secondary faults of small throw and diverse trends. Being as a 
rule loci of relatively rapid erosion, these secondary faults have exerted a 
profound influence on the topographic development of the chasm. The 
positions and trends of many branch canyons, gulches, and minor recesses 
are determined by such faults, and in general the intricate, almost labyrinthine 
arrangement of the sculputural features of the Kaibab section is expressive 
of the fracture system as a whole. In the vast panorama that unfolds itself 
from any prominent point on the rim of the Grand Canyon the presence of 
the secondary faults is not readily detected by the unaided eye. Sosmall, asa 
rule, is the throw of these faults that the offsets in the strata are hardly 
noticeable. However, instrumental determinations of altitude on the sharply 
defined cliff tiers leave no doubt as to their reality. It was, in fact, in the 
course of the detailed topographic survey of the Grand Canyon, which was 
begun by the speaker in 1902, and has been completed recently by Richard 
T. Evans, that the existence of the secondary faults was first revealed. The 
elevations required for the contouring of the cliff tiers (several thousand were 
determined by accurate trigonometric methods from planetable stations on 
both rims of the chasm) soon developed the fact that there is a sensible break 


234 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


in the continuity of the strata along the axis of each major side canyon or 
important cross gulch, hkewise at each accentuated constriction, gap, or 
recess, in the spurs that advance from the walls. Each outlying butte, each 
“temple,” was found to be carved from a separate block having an attitude 
or tilt of its own. The marked asymmetry of the Kaibab section of the 
Grand Canyon (the course of the river is on an average more than twice as 
far from the rim of the Kaibab Plateau as it is from the rim of the Coconino 
Plateau) is explained not merely by the greater height of the Kaibab Plateau, 
nor by the fact that the surface of that plateau drains southward, into the 
Grand Canyon, whereas the surface of the Coconino Plateau drains away 
from it, but in large measure also by the greater prevalence of secondary 
faults on the Kaibab side as compared with the Coconino side. Toward 
the western margin of the Kaibab Plateau the secondary faults become 
progressively sparser; toward the eastern margin they become increasingly 
frequent and more closely spaced. The climax of fracturing is reached in the 
belt immediately west of the east Kaibab fault, where the Algonkian rocks 
are broadly exposed. To the east of this master fault, on the other hand, the 
fracturing, as well as the flexing, rapidly die out in the flatlying strata of the 
Painted Desert. And there, significantly, side gulches are correspondingly 
rare. That the prevailing scarcity of side gulches in the Painted Desert is 
not due simply to lack of water is shown by the fact that wherever a fault 
does extend east of the monocline, there also is a gulch or at least a deep 
recess. 

The extreme head of the Grand Canyon illustrates in a more telling way 
than any other part of the chasm the important rdle played by secondary 
fractures in the development of its topography. The chasm begins,—that 
is, it abruptly flares out from a width of a mile and a half in Marble Gorge 
to a width of eight miles (on the Kaibab side wholly) at the point where the 
Colorado reaches the base of the east Kaibab monocline, but this circumstance 
alone does not account for the remarkable and abrupt increase in width. At 
this point also begins the system of secondary faults. As this system does not 
appear to extend northward along the Kaibab monocline (which in conse- 
quence presents the appearance of a simple, gullied dip slope), 1t seems prob- 
able that the multiplicity of fractures in the upper part of the Grand Canyon— 
particularly in the region drained by Nankoweap, Kwagunt, and Chuar 
creeks—is closely associated with the presence of the Algonkian strata, which 
form a lens of weak materials intercalated between the Archean rocks and the 
Palaeozoic strata,—a lens that readily suffered deformation, thereby causing a. 
local intensification of the fracturing of the overlying brittle strata. (Author’s 
abstract.) 


425TH MEETING 


The 425th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 9, 1927, 
President Burts presiding. The Secretary announced with regret the death 
of Dr. C. D. Watucort, Secretary of the. Smithsonian Institution, former 
Director of the U. 8. Geological Survey, and a Founder and former President 
of this Society. 

Informal Communications: A. C. SPENCER called attention to an interesting 
course in geophysics, which some members of the U. 8. Geological Survey are 
taking, offered at the Colorado School of Mines. 

C. E. Ressir exhibited an algal ‘‘water biscuit” collected by Sir Douglas 
Mawson from a temporary lake in southern Australia. 


MAY 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 235 | 


Program: Witu1amM W. Rusey: The origin of the Mowry shale. The 
Mowry shale, a relatively thin member of hard platy shale in the lower part . 
of the Upper Cretaceous series, is widespread throughout the northern 
Rocky Mountain States. Its peculiar lithologic characteristics are due 
chiefly to its hardness which in turn is caused by the presence of a large 
amount of silica. The problem of the origin of this silica is thus a funda- 
mental problem in the origin of the Mowry shale. 

Field, microscopic, and chemical evidence from the Mowry shale of the 
Black Hills region and analogy with similar siliceous shales elsewhere indicate 
almost certainly that the silica in the Mowry shale was in some way derived 
from the alteration of volcanic ash. Asa probable method of this derivation, 
it is suggested that the original ash was unusually siliceous, that it was de- 
composed by long exposure to sea water, and that silica dissolved from it was 
precipitated by the abundant decaying organic matter. A minor amount of 
secondary silicification may have occurred during consolidation and weather- 
ing. The few tests of siliceous organisms found in the shale are considered 
merely incidental fossils. The small amounts of clay, silt, and sand in the 
Mowry shale may be in part more or less altered volcanic products and in 
part normal clastic sediments. (Author's abstract.) 

GrorGE W. Srose: Possible post-Cretaceous faulting in the Appalachians. 
The peneplain developed on the tops of South Mountain and the Valley 
ridges in Pennsylvania, called the Kittatinny peneplain, has no counterpart in 
the Piedmont. It is supposed to have been entirely removed by erosion. 
The peneplain that caps the highest ridges of the Piedmont, called the 
Schooley peneplain and regarded of later age, is 350 to 500 feet lower. May 
it not be that the Schooley peneplain is the Kittatinny faulted down? 

The Triassic basin is bounded on the northwest by a normal fault of over 
6,000 feet vertical throw in the vicinity of Gettysburg. Part of thismovement 
took place near the close of Triassic sedimentation, preceding the formation 
of fanglomerates at the foot of South Mountain. The larger part of the 
movement took place after the deposition of the fanglomerate, the latest 
recorded Triassic sediment. It is suggested that at least part of this later 
movement occurred after peneplanation and evidence was produced in 
support of this view. 

Profiles at various places across the Appalachians in Pennsylvania were 
exhibited to show the effect of the application of this theory. The Kittatinny 
peneplain on South Mountain and the Valley ridges, 1600’—2000’ elevation, 
becomes the Schooley peneplain in the Piedmont, 1240’—-1500’ elevation, 
with 350 to 500’ displacement; the Weverton peneplain on South Mountain 
and the Valley ridges, 1140’ to 1600’ elevation, becomes the Honeybrook 
peneplain in the Piedmont, 750’-1100’ elevation, with 400 to 500’ displace- 
ment. 

The Harrisburg peneplain is not affected by the faulting. The hypothetical 
faulting therefore occurred between Weverton peneplanation and Harrisburg 
peneplanation, probably at the close of the Cretaceous. (Author’s abstract.) 

A. H. Reprietp: The Petroliferous Provinces of the United States. As the 
major physiographic divisions of the United States formulated in 1916 by a 
committee of the Association of American Geographers, headed by Prof. 
N. M. Fenneman, are based primarily on regional structure, they constitute 
both a logical and a practical scheme of classifying the producing and potential 
oil fields ‘of the United States. 

Petroleum and natural gas have been produced commercially in eight of 
these major divisions: the Coastal Plain; the Appalachian Plateau; the — 


JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


236 


LLG’ F098 1830.1 


kes wh ke “9udI0T 
LIV 666 pue suss0ry Apotyo ‘Aretys90 7, 
‘snovoeyjorg rod 
¢E1‘06Z‘T |-dq owos fousoo01;g pus aud90I1;, 
GIP 
‘snosovyjorg 1addqQq 
E2e"G *sno1ejIuogied-our 
-I9q 9ulos ‘snovovjer1y raddQ 
“UBIULIOg 
SPE OLZ ‘(oIssvane (Z) pus snosojtu 
-OQI8) 9UIOS) ‘snosd¥JeI,) “Q 
‘uvluvA[Asuueg 
“UBIUBA 
-|Asuueg ‘UBTUIOg ‘UBIDIAOPIO 
“UBIUI 
“Ia pue uerddtsstsstpy WIOL; 
_._,, | Suos ‘usruvAjAsuueg ApoTyO 
€99 G0G & 
‘uvluBA][ASUUO 0} UBIOTAOPIO 
€60°869°T 
“uvluBAASUUOg 04 UBIDIAOPIQ, 
“QUIDOTIY PUB DUDIOSIIGQ AYoryy) 
“gud00Nf 
“snovdeyJoIQ “MOT puv “dQ 
E8E ‘LEST “snosoejed,) “MoT pus “dy 
RRL STOTT, 
261-6581 


*"N dowd ‘LST Sdaa SNOUAAITOULNd AO AOV 


“Sp]O} Av[Nso1I1 


CTBD “AM) SouTpOTyUB pozNey 
pues poepjoy Ajeyerepour of Ajdivysg 


“C [BO “4u99) souTj»oUuOW 
po[ves ‘sourpotjue pepore pues peydumig 


‘CXOW ON “MON ‘90 
‘AS “OTOD “M) SPO} [PUOIse1 pvoig 


“COfOD “OD ¥eQoW “OAM “M) PO 
-j[Nvy pu passeiduroo suos ‘seuIpOIyUYy 


‘CNOA ON“ XOL “MA “XAT, Jo oypuey 
-UBq) I1OZO9[Vq UI SpjOj potang ‘suoT “q 
"(OOD iG | “OAM 
“A “PUOT) °9F9 ‘STITH YORI Pus “Sd 11] 
Ayooy JO SyURy Suole Splo} soul; *v 
“(XO “U2 
"N) SOpP[ULLM LOUTU YIM “Yore peorg “p 
‘(*XOL, “N Pur 'B[IO “9 Jo AoTTeA 
IOATY Poy) SoulpoIyue MOdIvU “SUO'T *9 
"CSTIAL BFIYOT AA 
pue opyonqiy JON “BAO “suey “) 
Ayisorod = sutAivA jo spoq suid 
-dip Apysrs ‘pepjoy Apqiydooseduay “4 
“CANT AM 
“TH “PUl “Org *M) SP1OJ TER Re Ore 2 
we acl 
“SMH BAM “OTUO “A “8d “A “ND 
snonur}Uuoosip “T[eug 
“CeyT “9 “xoOL "Q) 
dAISNI}UI oq 09 pasoddns ‘sourop y[VgG “p 
‘CXOL M 8) SCIRUS STINE ae Y 
‘COT N MV 'S “®8P10 “H “S) pe 
-}[ NB SSo] ‘Soovi10} PUB SOUIOp pwoIg “q 
‘(xXaJ, QUID “W) SPlOJ puv syne -v 


GHUNLONULS SNOUAMITOULAd AO AdAL 


‘988 AIVIZ10 J, 
pue ‘OLOZO8OTA] ‘OIOZORTVq JO Spoq popnajut 
pus ‘pezney ‘popio} Ajxo,dur00 04 Ajo, eI1apoyy 


"SYOOI LOp[O PUB OTOZOSE, POP]O} ATys1y 
UO SUIYSeI ‘Spaq AIvIZIOT, JO SouTpIUAS vary 


ON 
-epunoj uvliquie)-o1d uo Ssulysed ‘Spoq o10Z 
-OS9J] PUB DTOZO9[Rg ‘pepnajuUI pue poz[NV] 
qyeyMowos ‘pepjoy Ay;pBvoiq jo puryjo[qry, 


*SYIO1 LOP[O JO Spo} YINOS-yy10U 
suljeeouod Apyaed ‘spoq Aietj1ay, pue snovo 
-8}01) poeploy Ajoye1epow jo uISsey perorgd 

*SYOOI Japlo ul sqjijdn pue spjo} 
peling surjeoou0s A7Za1ed AIVT}10,L, [ej u0uU 
~1U00 Aq persoueda ‘(‘oj30 “Sq Medivag 

‘STITH Yoe[q) ‘syoor dapjo jo szjijdn oy] 
-auop Aq pojydniseyut spoq d10zOsey, pus 
dIOZOITV_ pep]oj Ale}eV1epow jo uiseq pvoig 


“spoq d10ZzO9T¥q popylos A[peoig 


‘Spoq o10ze["¥q pequny 
-SIp Aja}VIOpOW JO UISeq podeys-uoOods 4vaI4y 


‘preMmvos Ajjues sutddip 
‘spoq Arvi}lay, pus snovdeyary Jo ouT[IOUO]J 


HUNLONAULs TVNOIDGY 


SHLVLGQ GQHLIN() HL FO SHONIAOUG SNOUAAITOULAG AHL dO AUVWWOG— 


T ATaAVL 


SosUBY 
4SBOD 
OB 1Oedi 


SATB A 
EMITS | 


| 


Nvoyeid 
opel 
-O]09 
used 
sul 
-WIOA \A 


suIv]d 
4BO1") 


pue| 
-MO'T 
[B1}U2 


NBIYVI 
u jeddy 


oe al 
[B}8B0,) 


WBONTAOQUd 


MAY 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 237 


Central Lowland; the Great Plains; the Wyoming Basin; the Colorado 
Plateau; the Pacific Valleys and the Pacific Coast Ranges (as well as some gas 
in the Arkansas Valley). In each of these major divisions of regional struc- 
ture oil and gas occur under characteristic and distinctive conditions of 
structure and stratigraphy. (Authors’ abstract.) 


426TH MEETING 


The 426th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 23, 1927, 
President Butts presiding. 

Informal Communications: C. E. RrEsser read letters of greetings from 
Secretary Watcott:and Dr. A. F. Forrste to Dr. E. O. ULRIcH on the 
occasion of his 70th birthday. 

Program: ARTHUR M. PirER: Metalliferous resources of Silver City, Idaho. 
The Silver City region of southwestern Idaho, one of the old precious metals 
mining camps of the Northwest, has produced about 900,000 ounces of gold 
and 27,000,000 ounces of silver during the 60-year period from 1863 to 1923. 
Its decline as a generous producer has been a serious blow to the mining 
industry of the State, but geologic conditions suggest that its history is not 
yet closed. . 

The sequence of events in the legible geologic history has been: (1) in- 
trusion of fine-grained argillite of possible Carboniferous age by late Mesozoic 
(?) granite, the magma being sodic, highly siliceous, and low in iron and 
magnesia; (2) regional fracturing; (3) deposition of silver ores in the southern 
part of the region at Flint, accompanied by intrusion of differentiates from 
the granite magma; (4) development of a mature erosion surface; (5) ex- 
plosive extrusion of 1,500 feet of coarse basaltic tuff in early Tertiary time, 
followed by quiet outwelling of 500 feet of basalt flows; (6) outpouring of 
2,000 feet of rhyolite flows, the succession being broken by an erosion interval 
of unknown age and duration; (7) regional block faulting; (8) deposition of 
silver-gold ore deposits at DeLamar and in War Eagle and Florida mountains; 
(9) regional faulting; (10) planation by sub-aerial agents; (11) deep dissection 
by glaciation and stream erosion. 

The geologic structure involves complex block faulting, not recognized 
heretofore, during three epochs of deformation. The dominant direction of 
shear for the first epoch is represented by the northward-trending veins of the 
Flint district. The secondary fractures cause an ever-present polygonal 
blocking and sheeting of the granite. Maximum crustal shortening was in a 
northeast-southwest direction, and the stresses were probably rotational. 
The second epoch involved high-angle block faulting of the granite and ex- 
trusives, the fractures being controlled in position by those of the preceding 
epoch. Certain of the fractures in the acute angles of major crustal blocks, 
were loci of subsequent deposition of the silver-gold ores. The vertical 
component of displacement along the major block faults is at least several 
hundred feet in some localities, and the shove along the fault planes is con- 
siderable. The third epoch of deformation is represented by prominent low- 
angle slicing, chiefly in the DeLamar district. These low-angle fractures 
have been thought to be older than the vein system but the present investi- 
gation has reversed that conclusion. They are normal faults, and the down- 
throw amounts to several hundred feet, although the shove is probably 
as much as 1,000 to 1,200 feet. 

The ore deposits of the Flint district are found only in the granite. The 
veins are filled fissures and the dominant gangue mineral is quartz, of which 


238 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


the greater part is massive. The primary metallic minerals are the sulph- 
antimonides of silver, almost every possible species being present, from silver- 
free stibnite on the one hand to argentite on the other. Pyrargyrite is the 
most abundant species. Small amounts of the arsenical silver minerals 
are also present. These argentiferous minerals are diluted by stibnite, 
tetrahedrite, and jamesonite, together with small amounts of chalcopyrite, 
galena, sphalerite, arsenopyrite, and pyrite. Unusual species are miargyrite 
(Ag:S-Sb2Ss), xanthoconite (3Ag:5-As,S;), and stromeyerite (AgeS-Cuzs). 

Miaragyrite is quite widespread and rather plentiful in the Flint and 
Florida Mountain ore deposits. The ratio of gold to silver in the ores is about 
1 to 700 by weight. 

The ore deposits of War Eagle and Florida mountains and of DeLamar 
extend upward into the extrusives. The veins are filled fissures, vein breccias, 
and silicified shear zones, the last two types occurring more frequently in the 
extrusives. Quartz is again the most abundant gangue mineral. A great 
deal of lamellar quartz, possibly pseudomorphous after calcite, is found at 
DeLamar, together with beidellite. The Florida Mountain veins are charac- 
terized by the presence of cellular calcite, composed of thin plates each 
extended parallel to the basal plane and intersecting one another at random 
angles; of the potassic feldspar valencianite; and of beidellite, which in many 
places constitutes the greater part of the vein filling. The younger deposits 
are differentiated from those of the Flint district by the presence of a con- 
siderable though variable portion of gold and by an abundance of selenides. 
Gold occurs as the native metal, chiefly in the gold-silver alloy electrum. 
The comparatively rare silver selenide naumannite (Ag»Se) equals or exceeds 
the abundance of argentite. Special mention should be made of owyheeite 
(essentially a silver-bearing jamesonite), and of the rare lead selenide, 
clausthalite (PbSe). The non-argentiferous diluents are chalcopyrite, pyrite, 
galena, and sphalerite, although the ores contain but one or two per cent of 
these species. Stibnite, tetrahedrite, and jamesonite are also present. ‘The 
ratio of gold to silver varies from approximately 1 to 1 by weight in the 
primary zone of the Oro Fino vein of War Eagle Mountain to 1 to 139 at 
Florida Mountain. 

Enrichment of the ore deposits of Florida Mountain by selenide minerals of 
probable supergene origin has been discovered by Dr. F. B. Laney, formerly 
of the United States Geological Survey. 

The ores are medium- or low-temperature deposits which show no change 
in mineralogy within the vertical range of mining development, some 1,700 
feet, except for the effects of supergene agents. Neither do they differ as 
they pass from one type of wall rock to another. It is to be expected there- 
fore, that the ore deposits will extend without significant change to depths 
greater than any yet attained by mining. (Author’s abstract.) 

Water N. WHITE: Recent work on the discharge method of estimating ground 
water supplies. This paper describes an investigation begun in 1925 in the 
Escalante Valley, Utah, to develop the method, devised by G. E. P. Smith 
and described to the Geological Society of Washington on November 22, 1922, 
for determining the quantities of water discharged from the zone of saturation 
by plants that habitually use ground water, such as alfalfa, greasewood. and 
salt grass. This method is based on daily fluctuations of the water table. 
Its purpose is to use the discharge of the ground-water plants as a basis for 
estimating the available supplies of ground water. Automatic water-stage 
recorders used on 33 wells in localities of ground-water plants showed that 
during the growing season there is a marked daily fluctuation of the water 


MAY 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 239 


table. The water table generally goes down during the day time, when 
transpiration by the plants is rapid, and rises during the night, when there is 
little or no transpiration. The daily fluctuations begin in the spring with the 
appearance of foliage, and cease in the fall after killing frosts. They are 
absent in plowed fields, cleared lands, and tracts of sage brush. In a field of 
_ alfalfa the fluctuations were nearly absent for several days after the alfalfa 
was cut. The maximum daily drawdown in wells observed during the investi- 
gation amounted to about 17 inches in a tract of greasewood and shadscale, 
2+ inches in a field of alfalfa, 32 inches in a salt-grass meadow, and 42 inches 
in a meadow of sedges and associated marsh grasses. 

The quantities of water discharged each day were computed, in depth of 
water over the area, by the formula y=24 r+s. The quantity y is the 
specific yield, or quantity of water that drains out of the soil when the water 
table declines, expressed as a percentage of the volume of soil drained. The 
quantity ris the hourly rate of rise of the water table when the water table is 
at a mean elevation for the 24-hour period and there is no discharge from the 
zone of saturation. These conditions are found approximately during the 
middle of the night. The quantity s, expressed by either the plus or the minus 
sign, is the net fall or rise of the water table during the 24-hour period. The 
specific yield was determined by experiments with 16-gage steel cylinders, 
13 feet in diameter and 3 feet high, which were driven into the soil directly 
above the water table so as to inclose undisturbed columns of soil of the 
types in which the recorded daily fluctuations took place. After a cylinder 
had been driven it was converted into a water-tight vessel by soldering to it 
a bottom of sheet steel, and the top was made proof against evaporation by 
means of a cover. <A well was then sunk into the column of soil, through 
which measured quantities of water were added or withdrawn and in which 
the resultant water levels were measured. The specific yield computed from 
data obtained from the undisturbed soil columns ranged between 2.4 and 
9 per cent. 

It was demonstrated by two independent sets of experiments that the 
results obtained by application of the formula to the data derived from the 
recorders on the field wells are substantially correct, but more refined experi- 
ments of the same kind are to be made in 1927. (1) Three soil tanks were 
used in which alfalfa, greasewood, and salt grass were grown. Each tank was 
provided with a recharge well, that fed water to the bottom of the soil column, 
and a shallow well that extended only slightly below the water table. The 
head in the recharge well was kept constant by means of an automatic device 
and the quantity of water fed into it during any interval of time could be read 
froma gage. The shallow well showed the fluctuations of the water table and 
gave a daily curve similar to those obtained in the field wells. Inventories 
were made at frequent intervals during the day and night of the water added 
to the zone of saturation, the net increase or decrease of storage in this zone, 
and consequently the quantity of water discharged from this zone. (2) By 
means of a tank experiment, the quantity of water required to produce one 
pound of dry alfalfa was determined. A measurement was then made of the 
quantity of dry alfalfa that was raised in a field under observation in which 
virtually the entire water supply came from the zone of saturation, and the 
quantity of water consumed in the production of this alfalfa was computed. 
This quantity agreed closely with that computed, by means of the formula, 
from the data obtained from an automatic recorder over a well in the same 
field. 


240 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 9 


Fstimates were made of the rate of ground-water discharge from tracts 
having different kinds of vegetation and from the entire discharge area 
under investigation, but these are to be checked by more intensive work during 
the summer of 1927. 

This investigation was conducted under the direction of EK. O. Meinzer, 
geologist in charge of the division of ground water in the United States 
Geological Survey, who gave valuable advice at various stages in its progress 
both as to the methods to be applied and as to the interpretation of the 
results. (Author’s abstract.) 

GrorGE W. StosE and Anna I. Jonas: Ordovician shale and associated lava 
in southeastern Pennsylvania. The Ordovician shale, generally called Martins- 
burg but locally named Cocalico in the area north of Lancaster, occurs in a 
broad belt northwest of the Appalachian Valley and in several smaller areas 
south of the main belt. This shale, which overlies conformably Chambers- 
burg limestone of Black River age west of the Susquehanna, unconformably 
overlaps on older rocks to the eastward, chiefly Beekmantown limestone of 
Canadian age but also Allentown limestone of Ozarkian age and Elbrook 
limestone of Middle Cambrian age. 

In the vicinity of Jonestown, north of Lebanon, amygdaloidal basalt. 
occurs at the base of the shale, resting on a floor of Beekmantown limestone. 
Certain purple and green shales occur at about the same horizon in the shale 
of the main belt and in most of the smaller areas to the south, and these 
shales are of volcanic origin according to the belief of the writers. 

It is concluded that in this part of Pennsylvania uplift and erosion occurred 
in late Black River time, preceding Martinsburg shale deposition, and that 
during the same time basic lava was extruded from a vent near Jonestown. 
This period of volcanic activity is synchronous with that which produced the 
purple and green shale of probable volcanic origin in this part of the state and 
volcanic ash now preserved in the form of bentonite in central Pennsylvania, 
in Virginia, Tennessee, Kentucky, and Alabama and hence it is suggested 
that some of these ash eruptions may have come from the same vent as that 
from which the Jonestown lava came or from some near-by vent. (Authors’ 
abstract.) : | 

W. P. Wooprine, W. W. Rusey, Secretaries. 


BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


695TH MEETING 


The 695th meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club 
October 23, 1926 at 8:10 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair and 
180 persons present. 

ALEXANDER WETMORE gave an account of the 44th meeting of the American 
Ornithologists’ Union, recently held at Ottawa. He also gave a short account 
of Dr. Witt1am Mann’s African trip. 

C. W. Strives discussed the typification of the genus Sarcoptes. 

Davip FaIRcHILD gave an account of his recent trip through the tropics 
of the Old World. 

H. C. OBERHOLSER reported, on the authority of another person, a curious 
case of the behavior of an English sparrow. The sparrow perched near a nest 
containing young robins. Fach time that the parent bird fed the young and 
flew away, the sparrow flew to the nest. When he lit on the nest, the young 
robins at once opened their mouths, whereupon he immediately robbed the 
one that had just been fed of the food that had been given it. 


MAY 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 241 


Owing to the nonarrival of the films intended for the evening’s program, it 
was necessary to postpone the announced program until the next meeting. 
A very acceptable substitute was provided by Dr. B. W. EverMann, who 
showed moving pictures of the elephant seal taken on Guadalupe Island, 
Mexico, and of the Steller sea lion taken at Afio Nuevo Island near San 
Francisco. 


696TH MEETING 


The 696th meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club 
November 6, 1926 at 8:05 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair and 
227 persons present. New members elected: J. C. Buorksr, Jr., Mrs. 
E. 8. Cops,.H. H. Kniaut, Mary E. McCuLe.uan, Haroxp St. Jonn. The 
program was as follows: 

C. R. AscHEMEIER, National Museum: A talk on gorillas——In 1916 the 
speaker accompanied Prof. R. L. Garner to the French Congo to obtain 
specimens of gorilla and chimpanzee for the U. S. National Museum. Land- 
ing at Cap Lopez, they passed up the Ogolelli River to Lake N’kami. Near 
there the first gorilla was seen, a young one captured by natives. A gorilla 
footprint seen here was fully 12 inches long. At Lake Ngovi fully 25 were 
seen together, making a raid on a plantain plantation, and a fine male was 
taken. From Ogouma a trip was made to Eschira along a trail followed by 
PauL pu CuHaittu. At Kruso an old native was seen who claimed to have 
gone hunting with pu CHarittu. Between Kruso and Ogouma, on the return 
trip, a fine gorilla was collected which is now mounted in the National 
Museum. It was 5 feet 3 inches high, weighed about 350 lbs., and had an 
expanse of 8 ft. Altogether about 75 gorillas were seen, of which 3 were 
collected. In general, the fierceness of the gorilla has been exaggerated. The 
animal usually retreats when possible, but if cornered or wounded fights 
fiercely. In the French Congo they occur in nearly every kind of country. 
Some natives do not eat the flesh, while others are very fond of it. In the 
opinion of the speaker there are not over 1,000 living gorillas, and strict 
enforcement of the game laws is required to prevent their extermination. 

The paper was discussed by T. S. Patmsr, C. W. Stites, G. B. SupDworTH, 
and others. 

The talk was followed by a five-reel picture, ‘“The Gorilla Hunt,’* taken 
by Ben BurBripGE in the Lake Kivu region, and shown through the courtesy 
of the ‘‘Film Booking Offices of America.” 


697TH MEETING 


The 697th meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club 
November 20, 1926, at 8:10 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair 
and 84 persons present. New member elected: H. S. BERNTON. 

T.S. PALMER gave an account of the game preserve in the Lake Kivu region 
in Africa, established in 1925 under the name ‘‘Pare Nacional Albert.” In 
this preserve, covering about 1,000 square miles, the Lake Kivu gorilla is 
given absolute protection. The area can be well policed except on the south, 
where it touches a mandate zone which may at first create some difficulties 
in administration. 

L. -O. Howarp stated that there is now hope of controlling the Opuntia 
pest in Australia by means of several species of mealybug which have been 
thoroughly established. Through their attacks the plants become brittle 
and dry. Unfortunately, one of the worst enemies of mealybugs in the 


242 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 9 


world, Cryptolaemus montrouziert, is a native insect in Queensland. The 
outcome of the struggle that is bound to arise will be watched with interest. 

B. W. Evermann, California Academy of Sciences: The conservation of the 
fisheries of the Pacific (illustrated).—In natural resources of food or other 
commercial value, the Pacific is the richest of all the oceans. Of marine 
mammals, including fur seals, sea otters, whales and other cetaceans, sea 
lions, and the like, there are propably nearly 50 species, most of them at one 
time exceedingly abundant but now seriously depleted, some of them already 
commercially extinct. The fisheries proper, especially the Pacific salmon, the 
most important fishery in the world, are all greatly depleted as a result of 
inadequate protection. The whale fishery is faring as badly. Of 7 or 8 
species found on the California coast only one (the humpback) is now abundant 
enough to justify whaling operations. Of about 2,000 whales taken on the 
California coast since 1918, over 90 per cent were of this one species; all the 
others are already commercially exterminated. The Alaska fur seal herd 
which, through the killing of females in the sea, was reduced from two to three 
millions in 1870 to only 127,000 in 1911, has increased since 1912 to 760,000 
in 1926, as a result of the protection afforded by the International Treaty of 
1912. There are remnants of more than a dozen other fur seal herds which, 
if given international protection, can be rehabilitated correspondingly. When 
international protection has been given to all the natural resources that fre- 
quent the high seas of the Pacific, they can easily be made to yield annually 
more than one billion dollars. (Awthor’s abstract.) 

GrorGE F.. MitTcHELL, Bureau of Chemistry: The story of tea (allustrated).— 
The speaker described the propagation and cultivation of the tea plant, 
Thea sinensis, and the manufacture of commercial tea. He used this as a 
background against whick to show the possibilities of cassina (Ilex vomitoria), 
an indigenous plant growing along the coast from the James River in Virginia 
to the Rio Grande in Texas. Man in his natural state, that is, unaided by 
scientific research, discovered and utilized all of those beverage-producing 
plants which yield the alkaloidal principle, caffeine, as the tea, coffee, Para- 
guay tea, guarana, and cassina plants. Experiments have shown that cassina 
can be produced in this country for very much less than the cost of importing 
commercial tea, owing to the advantages that the cassina offers over tea, in 
both the growing and curing of the leaves. Tea leaves must be collected by 
hand, as only the young leaves contain the desired qualities. The cassina 
plant, however, can be harvested by machinery and the leaves removed by 
live steam, as all of the leaves can be used in the manufacture of cassina tea. 
The branches are then cut up by machinery and furnish at least 90 per cent of 
the fuel for operating the factory. Power and Chesnut have found as much 
as 1.67 per cent of caffeine in the leaves of cassina, the tannin content of which 
is much less than that of commercial tea. Experiments with cassina and 
experience in the growing and manufacture of tea in this country have con- 
vinced the speaker that cured cassina can be produced on a scale comparable 
with the tea gardens of the East Indies for about four cents per pound. 
Cassina can be made into green and black cassina, which are comparable with 
the average green and black tea, and also into maté products similar to the 
Yerba Mate used extensively in South America. Cured cassina is not only 
being used as a beverage similar to tea and coffee, but also in producing flavor- 
ing sirups and flavoring extracts. At the end of the address, carbonated 
cassina was served to the gathering to demonstrate its use as a flavoring 
sirup. (Auwthor’s abstract.) 


MAY 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 243 


698TH MEETING 


The 698th meeting was held in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club 
December 4, 1926, at 8:10 p.m., with Vice-president CHAMBLIss in the chair 
and 109 persons present. New member elected: D. D. STREETER. 

H. D. Fisu, University of Pittsburg: A canoe trip through British Guiana 
(illustrated).—The speaker described the botanic garden at Georgetown and 
Beebe’s laboratory at Cartabo, which he occupied with 20 students in 1925. 
Colored slides of many of the characteristic animals of the region were shown. 
The method of hunting of the natives, who build platforms over small clear 
spaces in the forest and watch for game, was described. The speaker then 
gave an account of a canoe trip to Kaieteur Falls, 750 feet high, on the 
Potaro River, with splendid photographs of the Falls. He hopes to establish 
a biological station at this point. 

G. C. Leacu, Bureau of Fisheries: Trout propagation by the Bureau of 
Fisheries (illustrated).—The Bureau of Fisheries, which has developed from 
the U. S. Fish Commission established in 1871, is divided into the Scientific 
Division, having charge of fisheries investigations; the Division of Fisheries 
Industries, having as its object the collection of statistics’and the rendering 
of aid to the commercial fisheries in marketing their products; the Alaska 
Division, having charge of the enforcement of regulations covering the pro- 
tection of the Alaska salmon, and also of the seals on the Pribilof Islands; 
and the Division of Fish Culture, having charge of the propagation and dis- 
tribution of fishes throughout the United States and Alaska. There are 35 
regular hatcheries and 65 sub-hatcheries. The Division of Fish Culture 
employs approximately 450 persons. The output of fish during the fiscal 
year 1926 was 5,232,000,000. Approximately 35 species of fish are propa- 
gated by the Bureau of Fisheries. Methods of propagation vary widely. 
Brook trout and rainbow trout yield to artificial propagation better than any 
other species. The brood stock at the hatcheries is held in ponds and the 
eggs are taken at certain seasons of the year and placed in hatching troughs 
where they are incubated in water having a temperature of 40° to 56°F. 
Brook trout eggs are collected during October, November, and December. 
They require approximately 30 to 35 days to hatch in a temperature of 50°F. 
Rainbow trout spawn during April and May, their incubation period being 
approximately the same as brook trout. The young fish are supplied with a 
yolk sae which contains enough food to last for 30 days. After absorption of 
the food sac the fish are fed on such artificial food as beef heart or beef liver 
ground toa pulp. They are distributed or placed in streams when about two 
to four inches in length. Those held at the hatcheries for future brood stock 
reach the spawning age at from 2 to 3 years. An average 3-year-old brook 
trout will yield approximately 800 eggs. The eggs average from 350 to 500 
per fluid ounce. The trout hatcheries are located in the mountain States in 
the East and West. Brook trout and rainbow trout are not propagated 
farther South than North Carolina and Tennessee. They prefer swift cool 
streams with gravelly bottoms. (Author’s abstract.) S. F. BuaKe, Recording 
Secretary. 


244 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 9 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


The Petrologists’ Club met at the Geophysical Laboratory on April 19. 
Program: R. W. Goranson, Density of subcrustal material from gravity 
measurements; G. W. Morey, The system, SiO. — H.0; E. G. Zins, The 
concentration of metallic constituents by fumarolic actiwity. Hxample, the 
Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes. Officers for the next season were elected, 
as follows: Secretary, GEORGE TUNELL; Steering Commitiee, L. H. ADAms, 
W. F. Fosuac, J. Gituuty. A field trip in the vicinity of Baltimore, under 
the guidance of J. T. Sincewap, was decided upon for May 7. 


@Obituary 


Dr. WILLIAM Hearty Dawu, a member of the AcapEmy, died in Washington 
March 27, 1927, at the age of 81 years. Dr. Dau was born in Boston, Mass., 
and was educated in New England schools. His interest in natural history 
led him to become a pupil in natural sciences under Louis Agassiz, and his 
most important work was in that branch of knowledge, though his interests 
were very wide and his early contributions to anthropology, geology, and 
geography of Alaska rank high. In his later years Dr. DALL was one of the 
world’s foremost students of recent and fossil Mollusca, his studies ceasing 
only with the inception of ill health two months before his death. He was 
for more than forty years Paleontologist in the U. S. Geological Survey and 
Honorary Curator of Mollusks in the National Museum. 


SR 


editors b 


CONTENTS 


* a | anes ae 


Rope oc Ae 


Botany.—Two new grasses from South America. — a A. 5S. Hires : 


Pa QO. i ee Coon he ee 8 
Zoology.—The occurrence of Naobranchia occidentalis on the: ac: 


> 


the United States. DEOGRACIAS Vi. VEUADOLIDG (3 5 ons aes 


PROCEEDINGS eee 
Geolopical Soviety $02.00 nean hae fevers pees teste cee nee 
Biological Society... ss. 05.5. Gi-wbe seeks we ee 


“OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY > 


President: ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian insti = 
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckERMAN, Bureau of Stand 
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lambert, Coast and Geodetic § : 
Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 


Sacre 
* 


Vou. 17 May 19, 1927 No. 10 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
OF SCIENCES 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


Wiis J, Peters Aanss CHASE Joun B, ReeEsipe, Jr. 
DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 


ge SS 
7 


ASSOCIATE EDITORS 


‘¥ L. H. Apams S. A. Ronwer 

4 PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
al 

= E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Srosz 

a BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 

s 

its R. F. Griees J. R. Swanton 

“5 5 BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
of E. WicHERS 

ron CHEMICAL SOCIETY 

» 


re > 2S 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY weayh ia 
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN. MONTHLY 


BY THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCESM/ AY 


\ 

Mr. Royau anp GuiLrorD AVES. \_ x : 

2 TON i an. ty $3 ee 
Ba.tImore, MARYLAND pet hn ts re 


>, 
‘ 


VF O18 
H i - Sez 


2 


eg 


= % 


Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of Postage provided for 
24 


in Section 1103, Act of October 3, i917. Authorized on 


PRE aU ree 


(1) short original papers, writte: 


semi-monthly, on the fourth and ninetee 
when it appears on the nineteenth only 


acilitate 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that fo tnotes be. cusses 


This he oe the official organ f th 
present a brief record of current scientifi 


short notes of current scientific li 


(3) proceedings and programs of meetings 
notes of events connected with the scientifi 


publication is an essential feature; ‘a manuscrip reaching 


_ the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from 
issue of the JOURNAL for the sellonae: fourt 0 nineteenth, Fespe t 


Manuscripts may be sent to any pone: of the Board of E 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious m rs. 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To 


serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. — 
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be 
or diagrams of simple character. __ 
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof ill be 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in final 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. . ) 
Authors’ fe ee will be furnished at the following sch dule : 


Copies 4 pps 88 pp. ey ee we 16 
50 Seo Sine $2.55 
100 1.90 SOO SATO 
160 eR aan 5.05 : 
2200 250° PRA Rb ee ae 
250 3.00. 630,00 Gag) 7am 


An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each hsplit page. 


Covers bearing the name of the aiekee aoe title of the ¢ article, wit 
nation and date of issue; will be furnished when ordered. Pea RS 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies : 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. se 


Havas of Subecphen or whee 1 
Spier rueaine i ul Sala eae cei RRC (op : 
Monthly nomibers i... nos 0 oot on os ae ae ee pen ee 


Remittances should be made payable to wechinuis Mee of. Seikboe 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Waele 

European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. 

Eachanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other ’ publications. 228 

Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, pee that esas is mad 
within thirty nes" after date of phe following i issue. ae "4 


*Volume I, however, from Juns 19, 1911, te : Docsubne 19, 1911, ial be sent for $3, 00. Special rates 
are given to members of aalea societies affiliated with the Academy, 


EP ae a RL ee Oe COE ad FLEE, De EOE ERE RL OS I TORE ee ee ee eeu 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


Vou. 17 May 19, 1927 No. 10 


BOTANY.—WNew plants from Central America. —VIII. Pauin GC. 
STANDLEY, U. 8. National Museum.! 


The eighteen plants here described as new are chiefly Costa Rican, 
and the greater part of them are based upon material collected by 
the writer. Many of these new species belong to the Araceae and 
Bromeliaceae, families in which the Costa Rican flora is exceptionally 
rich. Worthy of special note is the new Gynandropsis described from 
Costa Rica. This plant is strikingly beautiful because of its red 
flowers, and is well worthy of cultivation for ornamental purposes. 


Anthurium tilaranense Standl., sp. nov. 


Plant epiphytic, the caudex very short or elongate, the internodes abbre- 
viated, the cataphylls weathering into coarse persistent fibers; petioles 15-20 
em. long, slender, shallowly sulcate on the upper side, geniculate 1.5-2 cm. 
below the base of the blade; leaf blades firm-coriaceous, green, glabrous, 
deeply 3-lobed to within 3.5 cm. of the base, 16-22 cm. long and of equal or 
greater breadth, the basal lobes 11-14 em. long, oblong, 2.5-4 em. wide, 
rounded at apex, convex on the lower margin, concave on the inner, the 
terminal lobe narrowly oblong, 16-22 cm. long, 3-5.5 cm. wide, abruptly 
narrowed to the cuspidate-acuminate apex, the 2 basal nerves divergent at 
an angle of about 80 degrees, margined to the base, the secondary nerves 
of the terminal lobe about 17 on each side, ascending at an acute angle, 
anastomosing remote from the margin to form a conspicuous collective nerve, 
all the nerves slender but prominent beneath; peduncles 7-15 cm. long; 
spathe oblong or ovate-oblong, 3-7 cm. long, 1.2—2.5 cm. wide, green, rounded 
and cuspidate at apex, united for about 1.5 cm. with the peduncle; spadix 
sessile, cylindric, rounded at apex, very densely many-flowered, 4-7 cm. 
long, 6-12 mm. thick, green or reddish. 


1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For the 


last preceding paper of this series see page 159 of this volume of The JourNau. Received 
March 23, 1927. 


245 


246 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 17, No. 10 


Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,577, collected on tree 
in moist forest at Quebrada Serena, southeast of Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa 
Rica, altitude about 700 meters, January 27, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and 
Juvenal Valerio (no. 46310). Collected also at Los Ayotes, near Tilardn, 
Standley & Valerio 45586. 


In general appearance as well as in technical characters this plant resembles 
Engler’s illustration? of A. denudatum Engler, a Colombian species. In 
that, however, the leaves are essentially different, the lateral lobes being 
reflexed rather than directed forward, as in the Costa Rican plant. <An- 
thurium tilaranense is strikingly different in foliage characters from any 
other species known from Central America. 


Anthurium hypoleucum Standl., sp. nov. 


Petioles about 18 cm. long and nearly 1 em. thick, shallowly sulcate above, 
geniculate at apex; leaf blades narrowly lance-oblong, 47-55 em. long, 11-13 
cm. wide, narrowed from below the middle to the obtuse apex, rounded at 
base, thick-coriaceous, green above, glaucous beneath, the costa very stout 
and prominent, the main lateral nerves slender but prominent, about 22 on 
each side, anastomosing to form a conspicuous collective nerve about 1 cm. 
from the margin; peduncle 30—50 cm. long, stout; spathe green, ovate-oblong, 
2.5-4 em. long, 1.5-2 cm. wide, cuspidate-acuminate; spadix in anthesis 
cylindric, sessile, slightly narrowed upward, 5.5 cm. long, 9 mm. thick, very 
densely many-flowered. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 932125, collected on rocks at 
Santa Rosa, Guatemala, altitude 1,600 meters, April, 1908, by H. von Tuerck- 
heim (no. I1.2214). Collected also at Mazatenango, Guatemala, November, 
1914, R. Tejada 306. 


The strongly glaucous lower surface of the leaves is a charderer not found 
in any other Central American Anthurtwm with which I am familiar. 


Pitcairnia Valerii Standl., sp. nov. 


Leaves unknown, only the inflorescence at hand; inflorescence paniculate, 
long-stalked, the panicle about 60 cm. long, twice branched, glabrous through- 
out, the branches few, the lowest about 17 cm. long; rachises slender, smooth, 
terete, many-flowered, the internodes 4-10 mm. long; primary bracts withered 
and fallen: bractlets lanceolate, greenish, scarious-margined, much shorter 
than the pedicels, their margins free but often involute about the pedicel; 
pedicels 5-7 mm. long, the flowers deflexed; inferior portion of ovary tur- 
binate, 4-5 mm. long, usually bluntly verruculose ; sepals lanceolate, about 
9 mm. long and 3 mm. wide, long-acuminate, green, glumaceous, with scarious 
margins; petals eligulate, linear, 2 cm. long, red, obtuse or acutish; stamens 
slightly shorter than the petals; stigmas exceeding the petals; free portion 
of the capsule lanceolate, 1.5 cm. long, subulate-attenuate; seeds very numer- 
ous, brownish, filiform, about 6 mm. long. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,306,886, collected on steep 
bank at La Hondura, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,500 
meters, March 9, 1926, by Juvenal Valerio (Standley 51879). 


2 Pflanzenreich IV. 23B: 263. 1905. 


MAY 19, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 247 


The plant grew in such a difficult situation that the leaves could not be 
reached, and it was only with considerable risk that the inflorescence was 
secured. The species belongs to Mez’s section Eligulatae, and is perhaps 
related to Pitcairnia nuda Baker, of British Guiana. 


Pitcairnia flaviflora Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants terrestrial or epiphytic; petioles about 25 cm. long, slender, the 
margins densely armed below with slender, divaricate, dark brown spines 
2-3 mm. long, the upper part of the petiole with few distant minute teeth; 
leaf blades oblanceolate, about 65 cm. long and 9.5 cm. wide, acute, long- 
attenuate to the base and decurrent upon the petiole, thin, glabrous or nearly 
so; inflorescence about a meter high, simple, the flowers secund, sessile or on 
very short, thick pedicels, forming a dense spike 30 em. long, the rachis 
obscurely tomentose; bracts large, soon withering, membranaceous, slightly 
tomentulose, covering the buds; sepals distinct, symmetric, equal, lanceolate, 
3 cm. long, thick, long-attenuate to a subulate tip, dark red, slightly tomentu- 
lose above; petals orange, glabrous, narrowly spatulate, 4.5 cm. long, 8-11 
mm. wide, near the base 4 mm. wide, obtuse or rounded at apex, eligulate; 
filaments 3.3 cm. long, the anthers | cm. long. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,226,103, collected at La Palma, 
Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,600 meters, February 38, 
1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 33091). 


The orange color of the petals distinguishes this species from most of those 
known from Central America. 


Tillandsia guanacastensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants epiphytic, solitary, 15-17 em. high, the scape 7-9 cm. long; leaves 
very numerous, densely rosulate, the inner ones 7-18 cm. long, the outer 
shorter, erect or recurved, somewhat inflated at base, the sheaths 2-3 cm. 
wide, abruptly or gradually narrowed into the long-attenuate blades, subulate 
at apex, grayish, densely covered with closely appressed scales; inflorescence 
equaling or slightly surpassing the leaves, flabellate, composed of 2 or 3 
clustered spikes; spikes 3-5 cm. long, 12 to 19-flowered, dense, distichous, 
the bracts and flowers inserted obliquely; bracts coriaceous, about 4 mm. 
long, green, rounded on the back, sparsely whitish-lepidote, obtuse or rounded 
at apex, shorter than the sepals; flowers sessile; sepals broadly elliptic, asym- 
metric, 5 mm. long, rounded at apex, glabrate but very sparsely and obscurely 
lepidote; capsules cylindric, 18 mm. long and 2.5 mm. thick, apiculate; seeds 
pale brown, 2 mm. long, the hairs white, 1 cm. long. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,424, collected in moist 
forest at La Tejona, north of Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude about 
650 meters, January 25, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio 
(no. 46045). Collected also in the same general region, at Naranjos Agrios, 
Standley & Valerio 46391. 


Closely related to T. Tonduziana Mez, also Costa Rican, but in that species 
the inflorescence is pinnate and much elongate, and the sepals and bracts 
coarsely brown-furfuraceous. 


248 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


Tillandsia orthiantha Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants epiphytic, solitary, about 30 cm. high, acaulescent; leaves numer- 
ous, densely rosulate, mostly 20-28 cm. long, erect or ascending, conspicuously 
inflated at base; sheaths about 7 cm. long and 5.5 cm. wide, brown, thin, 
abruptly contracted into the blades, these 1.5-2 cm. wide just above the 
sheath, long-attenuate to a slender involute-subulate tip, grayish, densely 
covered with minute, whitish, closely appressed scales; inflorescence exceed- 
ing the leaves, the cauline bracts loosely inflated, much exceeding the inter- 
nodes, erect; inflorescence twice pinnate, 7-8 cm. long, dense, the primary 
bracts ovate, 2-3 cm. long, equaling or exceeding the spikes, acuminate, thin, 
brown, densely and coarsely brown-furfuraceous; spikes approximate, 6-10, 
distichous, about 12 mm. wide and 2 em. long or shorter, 3 to 8-flowered, the 
flowers and bracts obliquely inserted, the spikes erect or strongly ascending; 
bracts 5-7 mm. long, shorter than the sepals, obtuse, rigid, brown-furfur- 
aceous; sepals asymmetric, oval, 5 mm. long, rounded at apex, rigid, brown- 
furfuraceous, the inner one keeled dorsally; capsule terete, 2 cm. long, subu- 
late-acuminate, glabrous, the valves 5 mm. wide; seeds brown, 1.5-2 mm. 
long, the white hairs 1.5 cm. long. 

Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,252,715, collected in wet 
forest at Laguna de la Chonta, northeast of Santa Maria de Dota, Province 
of San José, Costa Rica, altitude 2,100 meters, December 18, 1925, by Paul 
C. Standley (no. 42312). No. 42348, from the same locality, represents the 
same species. 


This Tillandsia, also, is close to T. Tonduziana Mez, but in that the pin- 
nate inflorescence is elongate and open, its rachis flexuous (not thick and 
straight, asin 7’. orthiantha), and the branches usually reflexed. 


Renealmia erythrocarpa Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants small, 60-120 em. high, slender, leafy, the stems solitary or clus- 
tered, arising from slender rootstocks; lowest sheaths without blades, some- 
what puberulent; upper sheaths glabrous or nearly so, nerved, the auricles 
extended about 2 mm. beyond the sheath; naked portion of the petiole about 
1 cm. long; leaf blades small, lance-oblong, 11-16 cm. long, 2-4 cm. wide, 
long-acuminate, acute at base, thin, green on both surfaces, glabrous; panicles 
several, rising from the rootstock, ascending, the slender peduncle 5.5 cm. 
long, the bracts suberect, 1.5 em. long, the inflorescence 2-3 cm. long, densely 
few-flowered, the rachis slightly flexuous, hirtellous, the bracts lanceolate, 
1-1.5 em. long, green, hirtellous, attenuate; flower clusters 2 or 3-flowered, 
the pedicels 2-3 mm. long; calyx in fruit about 7 mm. long, puberulent; fruit 
scarlet, lanceolate in outline, glabrous, about 18 mm. long and 6 mm. thick 
near the base, attenuate to the apex, finely costate; seeds about 12, truncate 
at one or both ends, grayish, about 3 mm. long. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,613, collected in moist 
forest at Naranjos Agrios, near Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude 
about 700 meters, January 29, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio 
(no. 46378). 


Related to R. humilis (A. Rich.) Peters., which has been found in Panama, 
but in that species the leaves are much narrower, and the globose fruit scarcely 
half as long and few-seeded. 


_ may 19, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 249 


Renealmia concinna Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants 1.5 m. high or smaller; leaf sheaths scaberulous-puberulent, many- 
nerved, the petioles usually obsolete; leaf blades oblanceolate, 30-50 cm. 
long, 5.5-7.5 em. wide, acute or acuminate, long-attenuate to base, thin, 
green and glabrous above, beneath slightly paler, sparsely and minutely 
pilose with slender spreading hairs; panicles erect, arising from the base of 
the plant, the peduncle slender, 9 cm. long or more, pubescent, the bracts 
erect, scarious, much shorter than the internodes; inflorescence 13 cm. long 
and 2-3 em. broad, interrupted, the rachis puberulent, the bracts oblong- 
ovate to lanceolate, 1-1.5 em. long, thin, puberulent, deciduous, inconspicu- 
ous; flower clusters dense, 4 or 5-flowered, the peduncle 2-3 mm. long, the 
bractlets ovate, acute, about 8 mm. long, the pedicels puberulent, in fruit 
up to 5 mm long; calyx green, 5 mm. long, puberulent, the 3 lobes rounded; 
fruit globose, 7 mm. long, red, costate, thinly puberulent; seeds about 4, 
3-4 mm. long, very irregular, brown. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,227,906, ‘collected in wet 
forest at Guapiles, Province of Limén, Costa Rica, altitude about 300 meters, 
March 12, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 37355). No. 37511 from the same 
locality belongs to the same species. 


Renealmia mexicana Klotzsch is closely related, but differs in its more lax 
inflorescence, glabrous ovary, and more numerous seeds. 


Renealmia densiflora Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants large, 1.5-2.5 m. high; leaf sheaths brownish, thin, many-nerved, 
minutely puberulent or glabrate; petioles obsolete; leaf blades oblong-obovate, 
25-60 cm. long, 9-17 cm. wide, rounded and caudate-cuspidate at apex, acute 
at base, thin, green and glabrous above, slightly paler beneath and minutely 
pilose; inflorescence arising from the base of the plant, erect, 35-90 cm. high, 
the peduncle finely pubescent, stout, striate, the sheaths broad, inflated, 
rounded at apex, puberulent, erect, shorter than the internodes, often less 
than half as long; panicles cylindric and very dense, 7-14 cm. long, 3—4.5 cm. 
thick, the bracts reniform or rounded-ovate, about 1.5 em. long and usually 
broader, rounded or apiculate at apex, green, firm, puberulent or glabrate, 
persistent; flower. clusters sessile, few-flowered, very dense, the flowers sessile 
or nearly so; bractlets lance-oblong; ovary densely puberulent; calyx red, 
6 mm. long, deeply 3-lobed, the lobes ovate, obtuse, puberulent or glabrate; 
fruit subglobose, glabrate, 5-6 mm. long, finely costate; seeds 6, subglobose, 
brown, 2.5 mm. long. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,227,705, collected in wet 
forest at La Colombiana Farm, Province of Limén, Costa Rica, altitude 
about 70 meters, March 7, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 36944). The 
following additional collections are referred here: 

Panama: Around Dos Bocas, Rio Faté Valley, Province of Coloén, alt. 
40-80 m., Putter 4213. Forests around Puerto Obaldia, San Blas coast, 
at sea level, Pittier 4327. 


Renealmia exaltata L.f. is distinguished from the present plant by its 
larger size, ampler inflorescence, and the very large bracts of the scape. 
R. mexicana Klotzsch is similar in habit, but has an open inflorescence, 
glabrous ovary, and more numerous seeds. 

Pittier reports the vernacular name “mata Andrea” from Puerto Obaldia. 


250 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


Calathea cleistantha Standl., sp. nov. 


Leaves all arising from a short thick rootstock; sheaths 18 cm. long, narrow, 
green, glabrous, attenuate to apex; petioles about 4.5 cm. long, slender, 
glabrous; leaf blades elliptic-oblong, asymmetric, about 25 em. long and 9.5 
em. wide, abruptly, obliquely, and shortly cuspidate-acuminate, acute at 
base and abruptly decurrent upon the petiole, thin, green on both surfaces, 
glabrous; spikes ascending, about 3 cm. long and 1.5 cm. broad, arising directly 
from the rootstock on a peduncle 1.5 cm. long, this covered by the large thin 
bracts borne at its base; bracts of the spike about 5, erect, crowded, ovate 
or lance-ovate, acuminate, about 3 cm. long, whitish, glabrous or nearly so, 
somewhat distichous; flowers 4 in each bract, sessile, the bractlets linear, 2.5 
em. long; ovary glabrous; sepals linear, glabrous, 2.5 cm. long; corolla dark 
red-purple, 3 cm. long. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,229,179, collected in wet 
forest near Gudpiles, Province of Limoén, Costa Rica, altitude about 400 
meters, March 12, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 37114). 


I have seen no material of C. Pittiert Schum., described from the same 
general region but, judging from the description, it is closely related to the 
present plant. C. Pittieri is described as being much larger, more than a 
meter high, with decumbent spikes having internodes as much as 5 em. long. 


Calathea marantifolia Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants small, about 60 cm. high, very slender, leafy, the leaves about 6; 
sheaths green, thin, slightly puberulent or glabrate, attenuate to apex; petioles 
slender, 7 cm. long or less, glabrous, the callous 1.5 cm. long; leaf blades 
lance-oblong, about 19 cm. long and 4.5 cm. wide, acuminate, at base acute, 
thin, green on both sides, very minutely puberulent beneath, especially on 
the costa; leaf at base of the inflorescence sessile except for the callous, the 
blade 12 em. long; spike ellipsoid, 2.3 cm. long, 1.5 cm. wide, the peduncle 9 
em. long, puberulent above; bracts about 5, spirally arranged, yellowish green, 
appressed-pilose, about 18 mm. long, rounded at apex, finely nerved. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,038, collected in wet 
forest at El Arenal, Province of Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude 485 meters, 
January 18, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 45310). 


This may be only a reduced form of C. macrosepala Schum., but that is 
normally much larger in all its parts, with proportionately broader leaves 
and more numerous bracts. 


Stellaria nubigena Standl., sp. nov. 


Prostrate or procumbent perennial, forming loose clumps or mats, the 
stems numerous, slender, 4-15 cm. long, glabrous, often densely leafy, the 
internodes 5-15 mm. long; leaves narrowly lance-oblong to oblanceolate-ob- 
long, 6-12 mm. long, 2-4 mm. wide, acute, with a somewhat callous tip, 
sessile or often narrowed to a short petiole-like base, thick and firm, 1-nerved, 
the costa stout, salient beneath, glabrous, but the petioliform base frequently 
villous-ciliate, sometimes densely so; flowers mostly axillary and solitary, 
sometimes in 2 or 3-flowered cymes, the pedicels erect or ascending, 7-10 mm. 
long, glabrous; sepals 5, narrowly lance-oblong, 2 mm. long (in fruit nearly 
3 mm. long), attenuate-acuminate, glabrous, stiff, erect, green, the margins 


MAY 19, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA Zo 


scarious and whitish; petals white, shorter than the sepals; styles 3; capsule 
ovoid, obtuse, equaling the sepals, 6-valvate, the margins of the valves re- 
curved; seeds about 10, reniform-globose, slightly compressed, brown, 
granular. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,229,094, collected on wet bank 
on the southern slope of Turrialba Volcano, near the Finca del Volcan de 
Turrialba, Costa Rica, altitude about 2,300 meters, February 22, 1924, by 
Paul C. Standley (no. 35344). The following collections also are referable 
to this species: 

Costa Rica: Las Nubes, Province of San José, alt. 1,500—1,900 m., Stand- 
ley 38736, 38829, 38784. 


Only four other species of Stellaria are known from Central America. All 
of them differ from the plant here described in having ovate to deltoid leaves 
and villous or glandular pedicels. 


Sisymbrium costaricense Standl., sp. nov. 


Coarse erect annual, about a-meter high, glabrous throughout (so far as 
specimens show; base of plant not seen), much branched, the branches green, 
terete, smooth; leaves sessile and clasping by a deeply cordate base, the 
auricles rounded; stem leaves lance-oblong, the largest 16 cm. long and 3 cm. 
wide, the upper much reduced, long-attenuate to the obtuse or acutish apex, 
finely, inconspicuously, and irregularly denticulate, deep green above, glauces- 
cent beneath; racemes very long, laxly flowered; pedicels in anthesis 2-3 
mm. long, in fruit up to 6 mm. long, stout, spreading or obliquely ascending, 
only the lowest subtended by leaflike bracts, the others naked; sepals oval- 
oblong, obtuse, 2.5 mm. long, green, with thin purplish margins; petals ob- 
long, whitish, scarcely equaling the sepals; stamens shorter than the petals; 
pods sessile, 2.5-3 cm. long, over 1 mm. thick, straight, standing at almost a 
right angle to the rachis, the beak 2 mm. long; seeds compressed, pale brown. 

Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,252,847, collected in moist 
thicket near El Copey, Province of San José, Costa Riea, altitude about 2,090 
meters, December 22, 1925, by Paul C. Standley (no. 42548). The follow- 
ing collections also may be cited: 

Costa Rica: Cornfields near El Copey, alt. 1,800 m., Tonduz 12190. 

Panama: In coffee plantation near El Boquete, alt. 1,200-1,300 m., 
Piitier 3058. 

At one time I referred this plant to S. twrritoides Loes., a Mexican species, 
but better material shows that it is clearly distinct. S. turritoides has longer, 


nearly erect pods and larger flowers. 


Sisymbrium guatemalense Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants glabrous (lower part of plant not seen), the branches terete, smooth, 
tinged with purple; cauline leaves longer than the internodes, sessile and 
clasping by a deeply cordate base, the auricles rounded, the blades thin, 
oblong, about 6 cm. long and 1.2 cm. wide, the uppermost smaller, acute or 
short-acuminate, remotely and minutely repand-denticulate, green above, 
glaucescent beneath; racemes naked, elongate, rather densely flowered; 
pedicels 4-6 mm. long, slender, divaricate or shghtly ascending; sepals oval, 
obtuse, 2 mm. long, purplish; petals shorter than the sepals; stamens equal- 
ing the sepals; pods strongly ascending, straight or slightly incurved, terete, 


252 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


8-15 mm. long, slightly over 1 mm. thick, narrowed at apex toa beak 1 mm. 
long, attenuate at base to a stipe 1 mm. long. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 354938, collected at San Miguel 
Uspantan, Department of Quiché, Guatemala, altitude 2 ,000 meters, April, 
1892, by Heyde and Lux (no. 3079). 


Although related to S. turritoides and S. costaricense, this differs conspicu- 
ously in the very short pods, which are contracted into a stipelike base. 


Cleome panamensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Slender erect annual herb, about 30 cm. high, sparsely branched, the stems 
glabrate below, sparsely glandular-pilose above, the hairs short and incon- 
spicuous; infra-axillary prickles 2 below each petiole base, yellowish, divari- 
cate or recurved, scarcely 1 mm. long; leaves 3-foliolate, the petioles very 
slender, 2.5-6 cm. long, sparsely and minutely glandular-pilose; leaflets sub- 
equal, sessile or short-petiolulate (petiolule of terminal leaflet sometimes 3.5 
mm. long), elliptic or obovate, 3-6 cm. long, 1.5—2.7 em. wide, short-acuminate 
at apex or rounded and apiculate, the terminal leaflet acute at base, the 
lateral ones oblique, rounded on the outer side, very acute on the inner, 
thin, sparsely pilose along the nerves with short stiff spreading hairs, glabrate 
above, beneath paler, often with 1 or 2 minute weak prickles on the costa; 
racemes short-pedunculate, few-flowered, lax, in age as much as 5 cm. long, 
the bracts large and leaflike, the lowest 3-foliolate, the others simple, petio- 
late, the rachis sparsely glandular-pilose; pedicels in fruit 1.5 em. long or 
less, very slender; flowers greenish, the sepals 2.5 mm. long, obtuse or acute, 
glabrous; petals 5 mm. long, short-clawed; gynophore glabrous, 3-4 mm. 
long; capsule terete, torulose, 4.5 cm. long, 2.5-3 mm. thick, glabrous, acute 
at base, long-beaked at apex; seeds globose-reniform, 2 mm. in diameter, 
pale brownish, smooth. , 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 678347, collected at Mar- 
raganti, Panama, April 5, 1908, by R. S. Williams (no. 993). An imperfect 
specimen from Quiriguaé, Guatemala (Standley 24290), probably is referable 
to the same species. 


The most closely related species is C. aculeata L:, which dient in having 
coarsely tuberculate and transverse-ridged seeds. 


Gynandropsis chiriquensis Standl., sp. nov. 


A large coarse herb or shrub, the branches thick, succulent, green, at first 
densely viscid-villous with short hairs and coarsely viscid-puberulent, finally 
glabrate; petioles slender, 9-16 mm. long, at first pubescent like the branches 
but soon glabrate; leaflets usually 7, unequal, oblong-lanceolate, mostly 6-19, 
em. long and 1.2-3.8 cm. wide, long-attenuate to the acuminate apex, acute 
or attenuate at base, petiolulate, the petiolules 1 cm. long or shorter, dilated 
at base and united to form a disk, deep green above and sparsely viscid- 
puberulent, paler beneath, viscid-puberulent on the nerves; racemes short- 
pedunculate, naked, very dense, many-flowered, the rachis about 4 cm. 
long, puberulent, the pedicels slender, 9-14 mm. long, sparsely and minutely 
puberulent or glabrous; flowers nearly all sterile, no fertile ones seen; sepals 
unequal, lanceolate or lance-oblong, the larger ones 6-7 mm. long, narrowed 
to an obtuse apex, glabrous, green, with reddish margins; petals red, about 13 
mm. long, glabrous, the blade obovate, rounded at apex, narrowed at base 


MAY 19, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 2593 


to a long claw; stamens 6, 2.5 em. long, glabrous, the anthers linear-oblong, 
3 mm. long; androphore 2.5 mm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,269,418, collected along the 
Caldera River below Quiel, Chiriqui, Panama, March 16, 1911, by H. Pittier 
(no. 3145). 


According to description, this plant is closely related to the Colombian 
G. coccinea Benth., of which no material is available for comparison. That 
species is described as glabrous, a term certainly not applicable to the present 
plant. The sepals also are described as smaller, and the androphore as longer: 


Gynandropsis pulcherrima Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants herbaceous or somewhat woody, 1-3 m. high, simple or sparsely 
branched, the young branches green, somewhat villosulous above, especially 
at the bases of the petioles, but soon glabrate; leaves 3-foliolate, the petioles 
slender, mostly 9-18 cm. long, sordid-puberulent or glabrate, usually rough- 
ened with minute whitish verruculose elevations; leaflets sessile or nearly 
so, lance-oblong to oblong-elliptic, 10-20 cm. long, 4-9 cm. wide, acuminate, 
acute or cuneately narrowed at base, the lateral leaflets oblique, green above, 
slightly paler beneath, usually puberulent beneath on the veins, elsewhere 
glabrous; racemes terminal or opposite the leaves, short-pedunculate, the 
rachis stout, 6 cm. long or shorter, covered with the large dense elevated 
scars left bythe fallen pedicels, only a few flowers open at one time; flowers 
mostly sterile, only a few of the lower ones fertile (very often none of the 
flowers of a raceme fertile); pedicels slender, mostly 1.2—2 cm. long, glabrate; 
sepals very unequal, 5-10 mm. long, narrowly oblong to ovate, obtuse or 
acute, glabrate, green, sometimes red-margined; petals obovate, long-clawed, 
rounded at apex, glabrous, mostly 1.5—2 cm. long, varying from bright red 
to salmon or pinkish; torus 3-6 mm. long; stamens 6, about 3 cm. long, the 
anthers 3-3.5 mm. long; fruit terete, 7-13 cm. long, 6-12 mm. thick, fleshy, 
usually red, glabrous, obtusely contracted at apex, the stout style 2-3 mm. 
long, the stipe about 2 cm. long. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,253,694, collected in wet 
forest near Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude about 650 meters, 
January, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 44560). The 
following collections are referred here: 

Costa Rica: El Arenal, Guanacaste, alt. 500 m., Standley & Valerio 
45103. Quebrada Serena, Guanacaste, alt. 700 m., Standley & Valerio 
46159, 46222. La Hondura, Province of San José, alt. 1,500 m., Standley 
37605. Las Nubes, Province of San José, Standley 38576. Near Finca La 
Cima, north of El Copey, Province of San José, Standley 42563, 42621. 
Santa Marfa, Province of San José, alt. 1,600 m., Standley & Valerio 43129, 
44101. Orosi, Province of Cartago, Standley 39741, 39827. La Estrella, 
Province of Cartago, Standley 39209. 


This plant is frequent in the mountain forests of Costa Rica, although 
seldom abundant. It is one of the most handsome and showy plants of 
the region. 


Capparis Pittieri Standl., sp. nov. 


Branchlets green, subterete, when young finely stellate-pubescent but soon 
glabrate; petioles thick and stout, 3-4 mm. long, glabrate; leaf blades oblong, 


254 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 17, No. 10 


7.5-17 em. long, 3-7.5 em. wide, abruply short-acute, obtuse or rounded at 
base, subcoriaceous, when young closely stellate-tomentose on the upper 
surface but soon glabrous, the venation prominent, beneath paler, thinly 
stellate-pubescent with minute inconspicuous hairs; peduncles terminal, 
slender, 1.5-3 cm. long, finely stellate-pubescent, usually 3-flowered, the 
pedicels slender, erect, 1.7-2.5 cm. long, minutely stellate-tomentose with 
pale brownish hairs; sepals elliptic-oblong, 4-5 mm. long, obtuse, open in 
bud, stellate-tomentose; petals elliptic-oblong, 7-8 mm. long, obtuse or 
acutish, acute at base, sessile, thinly stellate-pubescent outside with whitish 
hairs; stamens numerous, the filaments very long and slender, glabrous, the 
anthers 1.5 mm. long; ovary ellipsoid, 2.6 mm. long, glabrous, the slender 
gynophore about 4 cm. long, glabrous. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 578070, collected at Rio Hondo, 
Costa Rica, altitude 50 meters, February 15, 1903, by H. Pittier (no. 16648). 

This well-marked species is not closely related to any known from Central 
America. The specimens have been determined as C. filipes Donn. Smith, but 
that species, with its narrow, long-acuminate leaves, silvery-tomentose be- 


neath, and its pendent inflorescence, has little in common with C. Pittiert. 


BOTANY.—Some Mimosaceae from Hispaniola! J. N. Rose and 
E. C. Lronarp, U.8. National Museum. 


Study of recent collections of Mimosa from Higpaniale| resulted in 
the discovery of several little-known species and led us to revise this 
genus as represented in Hispaniola. There are now 7 recognized 
mimosas on the island, and one additional species still referred here 
which doubtless belongs elsewhere. ‘This species, VM. angusttfolra 
Lam., was described rather fully in 1783, but so far as we can learn 
has not again been collected. 

A new species of Prthecolobium has also been discovered among Dr. 
Abbott’s collections. 

In this connection we should lke to cal attention to the fact that 
there are ascribed to Hispaniola a number of Mimosaceae procured 
by the older collectors, which have not been found in recent times. 
One of these is Inga filupes Vent., described in 1803. 


A NEW SPECIES OF PITHECOLOBIUM 
Pithecolobium Abbottii Rose & Leonard, sp. nov. 


Large tree, the younger branches densely brown-tomentose, unarmed; - 
petioles 2 mm. long, brown-tomentose, glandular, the rachis 2 to 7 cm. long, 
brown-tomentose, glabrescent; pinnae 4 to 6 pairs, 1.5 to 4 cm. long, the leaflets 
6 to 8 pairs, obovate or elliptic, 3 to 8 mm. long, 2 to 5 mm. broad, rounded 
and often shallowly emarginate at apex, narrowed or rounded at base, sub- 
sessile, chartaceous, convex, glabrous except for a small tuft of brownish 


1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- 
ceived March 19, 1927. 


MAY 19, 1927 ROSE AND LEONARD: SOME MIMOSAE 255 


hairs at base on the under surface, drying greenish-brown above, pale be- 
neath, the venation obscure; inflorescence capitate, the heads globose, the 
pedicels 2 .5 to 4 em. long, glabrous or nearly so; calyx campanulate, 1.5 mm. 
long, glabrous; corolla 5.5 mm. long, the lobes narrowly elliptic, acutish, 
puberulent at apex, about half as long as the tube; stamens numerous, long- 
exserted, the tube about half as long as the corolla: fruit up to 10 cm. long, 
strongly curved, contorted after dehiscence, the valves 5 to 8 mm. wide, 
firm; seeds not seen. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,079,252, collected near San 
Lorenzo Bay, on the south coast of Samana Bay, Dominican Republic, 
April 29, 1922, by W. L. Abbott (no. 2258). 


This species is nearest to P. oppositifolia Urban, differing chiefly in its 
fewer, glabrous leaflets and shorter pinnae. 


REVISION OF THE GENUS MIMOSA IN HISPANIOLA 


KEY TO THE SPECIES 


Valves of the pod not jointed; leaflets large, obliquely obovate. 
1. M. ceratonia. 
Valves of the pod several-jointed; leaflets small, oblong, linear or nearly 
orbicular. 
Erect or scandent shrubs; pods unarmed. 
Petioles flat. 
lamnae Zor o pairs: > to. 12\ mm long... 6200 .?.. 2. M. Leonardii. 
Pinnae a single pair, vestigial, often lacking; phyllodia leaf-like. 
3. M. extranea. 
Petioles terete or channeled. 
Leaflets linear, 0.5 to 1 mm. broad; pods 4 to 5 mm. broad. 
4. M. domingensis. 
Leaflets oblong, 2 to 3 mm. broad; pods 8 to 10 mm. broad. 
5. M. mornicola. 
Prostrate herbs or clambering vines (sometimes woody at base); pods armed 
with slender setae. 
Branches not prickly; valves of pod naked............ 6. M. pudica. 
Branches prickly; valves of pod setose................ 7. M. invisa. 


1. Mimosa ceratonta L. Sp. Pl. 5238. 1753 


Acacia ceratonia Willd. Sp. Pl. 4: 1091. 1805. 

Lomophis ceratonia Raf. Sylv. Tellur. 118. 1838. 

Slender, trailing or climbing vine, up to 6 meters long (sometimes shrubby) ; 
stems glabrous, angular, armed with flat prickles about 1.5 mm. long; stipules 
subulate, 2 to 3 mm. long; petioles and rachises together 8 to 12 cm. long, 
armed with sharp curved prickles 1 mm. long, glabrous; pinnae 1 to 5 pairs, 
the rachilla slender and armed with small curved prickles; petiolules about 
1 mm. long; leaflets 3 to 5 pairs, obliquely obovate, 1 to 1.5 em. long, 5 to 13 
mm. broad, rounded at both ends, thin, glabrous, paler beneath, 3-nerved; 
heads numerous, in terminal racemes or narrow panicles, or few and in the 
axils of the upper leaves, globular, 10 to 12 mm. in diameter, white or pinkish; 
peduncles | to 2 cm. long, prickly; calyx 0.75 mm. long, the lobes triangular, 
unequal; corolla 2 mm. long, the lobes usually 3, elliptic, obtusish, 1 mm. 
long; stamens usually 6, 5 to 6 mm. long; pod oblong, straight or slightly 
curved, 3 to 5 cm. long, 12 to 15 mm. broad, flat, thin, glabrous, shining, not 


256 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


jointed, the margins armed with flat hooked prickles 2 to 2.5 mm. long; seeds 
dull, flat, oval, 5 mm. long, 3 mm. broad, glabrous, 7 or 8 in each pod. 

Type locality’: Tropical America, perhaps the West Indies. 

Distribution: Hispaniola to St. Vincent. 

Specimens examined: 

Dominican Repustic: In clearing, vicinity of Laguna, Samand4 Peninsula, 
Abbott 399. Common creeper in secondary growth, Laguna, Abbott 430. 
Vicinity of Samana, Abbott 476. Without locality, Wright, Parry & 
Brummel 66. 


A well marked species, easily distinguished by its large leaves and broad, 
not jointed pods. 


2. Mimosa Leonardii Britt. & Rose, sp. nov. 


Low shrub; twigs slender, gray, terete, glabrous or the younger minutely 
puberulent; prickles paired, infrastipular, reflexed, 3 to 4 mm. long, very 
sharp; petiole, rachis, and rachilla strongly flattened, channeled above, 
glabrous, armed with ‘small, single or paired, sharp, recurved prickles, the 
petiole with rachis 3 to 6 em. long; pinnae 2 or 3 pairs, widely separated; 
leaflets 1 to 3 pairs, oblong, 4 to 8 mm. long, 2 to 4 mm. broad, rounded at 
apex, round and oblique at base, thick, entire, glabrous; veins and midrib 
obscure, the pair of lateral veins joining the midrib at base; peduncles axillary, 
single or in clusters, 8 mm. long or less, puberulent; flowers sessile, in heads 
6 to 7 mm. broad, pinkish; calyx 0.5 mm. long, 4-lobed, the lobes low, blunt, 
minutely ciliolate; corolla 1.75 mm. long, the tube narrowly campanulate, 
the lobes 4, erect, oval, acutish at apex; stamens 5 to 8, the filaments glabrous, 
2.5 to 4 mm. long, the anthers oval, 0.5 mm. long; ovary 1.25 mm. long, 
pubescent; pod 4 to 5 cm. long, 6 to 8 mm. broad, flat, curved, the margins 
thickened, 8 to 10-jointed, the joints square, glabrous, purplish; seeds orbicu- 
lar, flat, 2.5 mm. in diameter. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,300,376, collected on a dry 
bank of the Puilboreau Road near Ennery, Haiti, altitude 350 meters, 
January 22, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 9105). 


This species is a very distinct one, easily recognized among the other West 
. Indian mimosas by the armed, flattened petioles and rachises. 


3. MIMOSA EXTRANEA Benth. Trans. Linn. Soe. Bot. 30: 433. 1875 


Slender unarmed shrub up to 3 meters high; branches erect or ascending, © 
reddish brown, glabrous, the younger ridged, the ridges extending in 3’s from 
the bases of the phyllodia; stipules not seen; phyllodia linear, 3 to 6 cm. 
long, 2 to 5 mm. broad, obtuse at apex, narrowed at base, firm, dark green, 
prominently 3-nerved, often without leaflets; pinnae minute, 1 pair at the 
tip of the phyllodium, each with a single pair of leaflets; leaflets nearly orbic- 
ular, 1 mm. in diameter; inflorescence a terminal panicle, the flowers capi- 
tate, numerous; peduncles | to 2 cm. long, puberulent; heads globose, about 
8 mm. in diameter at flowering; calyx 0.75 mm. long, the lobes 4, triangular; 
corolla 3 mm. long, funnelform, the lobes 4, elliptic, 1 mm. long, obtusish, 
pink at tip; stamens usually 6, 4 to 5 mm. long; ovary pubescent; style equal- 
ing the stamens; pods 3 to 4 em. long, 5 to 6 mm. broad, 5 to 8-jointed, shghtly 
constricted at the joints, flat, reddish brown, seeds flat, 3.5 mm. long, 3 rim. 
broad. 

Type locality: Santo Domingo. 


MAY 19, 1927 ROSE AND LEONARD: SOME MIMOSAE 257 


Specimens examined: 


Haiti: Puilboreau Road in vicinity of Ennery, Départment de |’Artibonite, 
Leonard 8815, 8828, 8882. Between Gonaives and La Hotte Rochés, 
Nash & Taylor 1548. 


This is the only species of Mimosa with well developed phyllodia. 


4. Mimosa DOMINGENSIS (Bertero) Benth. Journ. Bot. Hook. 4: 409. 1842 


Acacia domingensis Bertero; A. DC. Prodr. 2: 464. 1825. 

Mimosa diplacantha Benth. Trans. Linn. Soc. Bot. 30: 424. 1875. 

Shrub; twigs branching, the older terete, gray, the younger obscurely 
angled, reddish, glabrous, sparingly armed with small curved prickles; stipules 
linear, spinelike, 1 to 2 mm. long; petioles with rachis 2 to 5 cm. long, pulvinate 
at base, armed at the insertion of the pinnae with a pair of curved prickles; 
pinnae 1 or 2 pairs, pulvinate, channeled above, 1 to 1.5 em. long, unarmed 
or bearing an occasional curved prickle; leaflets 7 to 10 pairs, the lower pair 
reduced to minute scales, the remainder sessile on a minute pulvinus, linear- 
oblong, 3 to 5 mm. long, 0.5 to 1 mm. broad, rounded at both ends, oblique 
at base, firm, glabrous, obscurely 3-nerved; flowers capitate, borne in the 
axils of the upper leaves; peduncles elongating to 3 em., puberulent and 
glandular, reddish; heads ovoid, about 10 mm. long and 18 mm. broad at 
flowering, pink; calyx 1 mm. long, the lobes minute, triangular; corolla 2.5 
em. long, the lobes 4, triangular-ovate, 0.75 mm. long, acutish; stamens 8, 
4 to 5 mm. long, the filaments tapering at tips, the style slightly exceeding 
the stamens, the stigma minute; pods 2.5 to 3 cm. long, 4 to 5 mm. broad, 
5 to 7-jointed, slightly constricted at the joints, flat, glabrous, reddish, 
acuminate at tip, narrowed at base; seeds blackish, flat, nearly orbicular, 
2.5 mm. in diameter, glabrous. 

Type locality: Santo Domingo, the type collected by Bertero. 

Specimen examined: 

Dominican REepusuic: Azua, Rose, Fitch & Russell 4018. 


Mimosa domingensis is a well marked species, distinguished by its linear 
leaflets. The well developed pulvini indicate that the plant is sensitive. 


5. Mimosa MORNICOLA Urb. Symb. Ant. 7: 228. 1912 


Scandent shrub; twigs armed with curved spines 2 mm. long, the young 
branches minutely white-puberulent, often unarmed, the petioles decurrent 
in 3 parallel blackish costae, the intercostal areas brown; stipules filiform, 
3 to 9 mm. long, subulate, more or less curved; leaves 4 to 7 em. long, with 4 
to 9 pairs of pinnae, the rachis and rachillae grooved and minutely pubescent 
above, armed (in the older leaves) with 2 or 3 infrastipular curved prickles, 
the pinnae 1.5 to 2.5 em. long, rather strongly curved, terminated by a pair 
of curved prickles 1.5 mm. long, the younger leaves unarmed or with a 
few prickles; leaflets 6 to 9 pairs, becoming black or brown when dry, the first 
pair reduced to minute subulate scales, the remainder oblong, 4 to 6 mm. 
long, 2 to 3 mm. broad, rounded or broadly obtuse at apex, obliquely truncate 
or subcordate at base, entire, glabrous on both surfaces, the midrib obscure 
above, prominent beneath; inflorescence paniculate, 10 em. long, minutely 
puberulent; flowers numerous, in ovoid-globose heads 4 to 6 mm. long; calyx 
1 mm. long, 4-lobed, the lobes triangular; corolla funnelform, 1.5 to 1.8 mm. 
long, the lobes triangular-ovate; stamens 4 to 9, the filaments about 3 mm. 
long; ovary elliptic, villous; pods 5 to 6 cm. long, 8 to 10 mm. broad, 5 to 7- 
jointed, minutely puberulent, the margins undulate; seeds flat, nearly orbic- 
ular, 4 mm. in diameter. 


258 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


Type locality: Morne Bonpére, Haiti. Type collected by Buch (no. 685). — 
Specimens examined: 

Haiti: Morne Bonpére, Buch 685 (photograph and fragment of leaf). Bank 
of stream, l’Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, Leonard 7014. 
DoMINicaN Repusiic: Azua, Rose, Fitch & Russell 3994. Nigua, Faris 

447. 


A good deal of variation is shown by the specimens cited. Faris’s no. 
447 from Nigua is a flowering twig with the facies of the type, but differing 
in its armed leaves and greater number of pinnae (8 to 10 pairs), and also in 
its more numerous leaflets (8 or 9 pairs on each pinna) and stamens (6 to 9). 
The type of M. mornicola is described as an unarmed shrub with not more 
than 8 pairs of pinnae, each with 7 or fewer pairs of leaflets, and flowers with 
but 4 or 5 stamens. Mature twigs with fruit, represented by Rose, Fitch 
and Russell’s no. 3994 and Leonard’s 7014, have both stem and leaves armed 
with sharp prickles. These differences are probably due to the age of the 
twig and variable environmental factors. The Azua specimen differs further 
in the slightly larger leaflets, which are broader in proportion than those of 
the other plants examined. 


6. Mimosa pupica L. Sp. Pl. 518. 1753 


Mimosa pudica glabrata A. DC. Prodr. 2: 426. 1825. 

Herbaceous, or woody at base, branched, usually prostrate, up to 5 dm. 
long, the stems armed with flat, straight or slightly curved prickles 1 to 4 
mm. long, hispid, hirsute, or glabrate; stipules lanceolate, acuminate, 3 to 6 
mm. long, striate, hirsute, glabrate, sometimes ciliate; petioles slender, 1 
to 6 cm. long, pulvinate at base, deflexing when touched, hirsute or glab- 
rate, often more or less finely puberulent above; pinnae 1 or 2 pairs (when 
2, the pairs approximate), 1 to 6 cm. long, hirsute or glabrate, pulvinate at 
base, the pulvinus and channeled upper surface finely pubescent; first pair of 
leaflets borne at the summit of the pulvinus, reduced to small linear spreading 
bracts about 1 mm. long; normai leaflets 15 to 25 pairs, narrowly oblong, 3 
to 10 mm. long, 1.5 to 2 mm. broad, acutish or obtuse at apex, oblique and 
rounded at base, thin, glabrous above, sparingly strigose beneath, meeting 
above in pairs when touched; heads ovoid, 8 to 10 mm. long, pink or pur- 
plish, axillary; peduncles 1 to 3 cm. long, glabrous or sparingly hirsute; bracts 
obovate or oblong, 0.5 to 0.75 mm. long, acutish, the lowermost ciliate; calyx 
minute, the lobes unequal, awnlike; corolla funnelform, about 2 mm. long, 
the lobes 4, nearly 1.5 mm. long, obtusish; stamens 4, long-exerted, pink or 
white; pods numerous, crowded in a head, linear-oblong, 1 to 1.5 cm. long, 
3 to 4 mm. broad, 2 to 5-jointed, constricted at the joints, the sides glabrous, 
the margins prickly-hispid; seeds brown, flat, nearly orbicular, 2.56 mm. in 
diameter. 

Type locality: Brazil. 

Distribution: West Indies and continental tropical America. 

Specimens examined: 

Harti: Open mountain slope, Furey, Leonard 4290. Along small stream, 
Mt. La Cidre, Leonard 7536. Meadow, Dondon, Leonard 8589, 
8657. Roadside, Plaisance, Leonard 9179. Meadow, Pilate, Leonard 
9588. River bank, Gros Morne, Leonard 9894. 

Dominican Repusiic: Wet meadow along railroad, Sdnchez, Samand 


MAY 19, 1927 COLLINS: POTSHERDS 2909 


Peninsula, Abbott 14. Haina, Faris 39, 159. Sdnchez, Rose, Fitch & 
Russell 4352. Without locality, Wright, Parry & Brummel. 

This is the common sensitive plant of tropical America, so called because 
it responds to irritation by a rapid drooping of the petioles and folding to- 
gether of opposed leaflets. The plants are often found in this “sleeping” 
condition in the early morning, but gradually expand as warmed by the rising 
sun. Under cultivation the plant often becomes robust and assumes an erect 
position. Its common name in the Dominican Republic is morir-vivir; in 
northern Haiti it is called ronté. 


7. Mimosa InvisA Mart. Herb. Fl. Bras. 121. 1837 


Schrankia brachycarpa Benth. Journ. Bot. Hook. 2: 130.°1840. 

Mimosa diplotricha Wright in Sauv. Pl. Cub. 34. 1873. 

A herbaceous clambering vine 1 to 2 m. long, the branches angled with 
numerous reflexed prickles, pilose when young; pinnae 4 to 8 pairs; leaflets 
many pairs, oblong-linear, 3 to 4 mm. long, glabrous on both sides, ciliate; 
flowers in dense heads; calyx and corolla glabrous; stamens twice as many as 
the petals, purplish; pods linear-oblong, 1 to 2 cm. long, setose on the valves 
and margin, more or less pubescent. 

Type locality: Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. 

Distribution: Brazil, north to Mexico and the West Indies. 

Specimen examined: 

Haiti: In meadow at sea-level, near Port Margot, Nash 303. 

The type of M. znvisa from Brazil has not been examined. It is possible 
that the common North American plant which has long passed under this 
name is specifically distinct. 


EXCLUDED SPECIES 

Mimosa ANGUSTIFOLIA Lam. Encycl. 1: 12. 1783 
Erect tree; bark brown or grayish; wood white and very strong; leaves 
with 4 or 5 pairs of pinnae each bearing from 30 to 50 pairs of narrow leaflets, 
these green above and pale beneath; flowers racemose; pods 10 to 13 cm. 
long, 6to8 mm. broad, appressed, yellowish; seeds small, orbicular, usually 12 


in each pod. 
Type locality: Santo Domingo. 


Plant not seen. The racemose inflorescence and long, nonjointed pods are 
characteristic of the genus Acacia, to which this species, probably, should be 
referred. 


ARCHEOLOGY .—Potsherds from Choctaw village sites in Mississippt.} 
Henry B. Couuins, Jr., U. 8. National Museum. (Communi- 
cated by D. I. BUSHNELL, JR.) | 


Archeological research in the southeastern states can probably never 
reach the point of exactness that it has in the Southwest. There are 


1 Published by permission of the Bureau of American Ethnology, Smithsonian In- 
stitution. Received April 12, 1927. 


260 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


no stone ruins, and barring a few exceptional kitchen-middens along 
the coasts, no extensive refuse heaps showing successive culture layers. 

The climate, furthermore, is not such as to preserve textiles, basketry, 
wood-work or other perishable objects so that about all that is now 
left of the once high material culture of the Southern tribes is the 
pottery and the ornaments and implements of stone, shell, and bone. 
It is very desirable, therefore, to seize upon every available source of 
tribal identification of the cultures represented, and to accomplish this 
end there is probably no safer beginning than to locate the historic 
Indian village sites and to study their type of cultural remains for 
comparison with other sites of unknown age. This method was 
followed during the past two summers when for several months the 
writer carried on preliminary archeological work in Mississippi for 
the Bureau of American Ethnology in coéperation with the Mississippi 
Department of Archives and History, represented by Mr. H. H. 
Knoblock.? 

The region chosen for investigation was the east central section of 
the state, the former home of the Choctaw. A brief reconncissance 
of this area was first made and a number of mounds and Choctaw 
village sites were located and later explored. Wherever possible, 
surface collections of potsherds, flint artifacts, etc., weremade. Itis 
to such collections of potsherds that attention is here called, for these 
seem to indicate that there was a definite type of historic Choctaw 
pottery, entirely distinct from that of any other region. 

In the accompanying plate are shown examples of this type of 
pottery from the sites of two old Choctaw villages, Chickachae in the 
northeastern part of Clarke County, and Ponta (Coosa) in northern 
Lauderdale County. According to Prof. H. 8. Halbert, who worked 
for many years among the Choctaw in Mississippi, Ponta was occu- 
pied as late as 1846.3 The time of the abandonment of Chickachae 
is not definitely known but it probably took place between 1810 and 
1834, during which period the greater part of the Choctaw lands were 
signed away and their former owners forced to migrate west of the 
Mississippi River. The first reference to Ponta and Chickachae is 
found in the manuscript journal of Régis du Roullet, the French army 
officer, who in 1729 made the first official exploration of the Choctaw 
country. The two villages again appear on the map and in the 

2 Archeological and anthropometrical work in Mississippi. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 
78 (1). 1926. 

3 Bernard Romans’ map of 1772. Publ. Miss. Hist. Soc. 6: 415-439. 


4In Mississippi Department of Archives and History and in Manuscript Division of 
the Library of Congress. 


MAY 19, 1927 COLLINS: POTSHERDS 261 


Figs. 1-7. Potsherds from site of Chickachae, old Choctaw village in northeastern 


Clarke Co., Miss. Figs. 8-16. Potsherds from site of Ponta, Northern Lauderdale Co., 
Miss. 


262 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 17, No. 10 


accompanying report of Capt. Bernard Romans, dated 1772, based 
on his exploration of the Choctaw country for the English colonial 
government during the preceding year. It was principally by means 
of the Romans map that Prof. Halbert, with his intimate knowledge 
of the geography and early history of the region, was able to locate 
the sites of many of the old Choctaw villages. 

The pottery from these two sites, of which typical decorated pieces 
are shown in the plate, is of a hard uniform texture and is usually 
tempered with sand so fine that it can hardly be detected by the 
unaided eye. Both inner and outer surfaces are smooth and some- 
times rather highly polished. In color the sherds range from light 
red and buff through gray into black, the largest proportion being 
buff or hght gray. The color was usually produced by polishing the 
surface, merely intensifying the shade to which the firing had brought 
the clay. A few sherds, however, most of them from Chickachae, 
have received a slip of light brick red on both surfaces. 

Little can be learned from the sherds as to the original form of the 
vessels except that most of them appear to have been bowls of medium. 
depth. 

The preponderance of decorated rims and the corresponding scarcity 
of rims among the many plain pieces suggests that the decoration was 
largely confined to the upper part of the vessel. As may be seen from 
the plate, this decoration, which is the most important and character- 
istic feature of the pottery, consists of straight or curved bands made 
of finely incised parallel lines. ‘These bands, formed usually by five or 
six lines, range in width from about 5 to 10 millimeters. The uniform 
distance between the lines, as well as their uniform depth, shows that 
they were made by trailing a fine, comb-like implement across the 
surface of the vessel while it was still soft. Among the 118 decorated 
sherds of this type from Ponta, there are fewer than half a dozen in - 
which the lines seem to have been drawn free hand. ‘The lot of 67 
similar sherds from Chickachae shows a slightly larger proportion on 
which the lines are somewhat irregular. The bands on the majority 
of sherds from Chickachae are also a little broader than those from 
Ponta, the average width being between 8 and 9 millimeters as com- 
pared with about 6 millimeters for the Ponta pieces, and the lines 
composing them are likewise somewhat deeper. With these slight 
variations, however, the ware from the two sites is identical. | | 

No other well defined ceramic type is represented in the potsherds 
from Ponta and Chickachae. Less than 20 sherds from these two 


MAY 19, 1927 COLLINS: POTSHERDS 263 


sites bear decorations other than of the type described: these few are 
of cruder ware and are meagerly ornamented with irregular incised 
lines. There is, in addition, comparatively little undecorated ware 
of a cruder type; the greater part of the plain sherds, of which there 
are many, are of the same smooth compact ware as the decorated 
pieces. 

The potsherds from Chickachae and Ponta represent the only ade- 
quate samples that were obtained. Very scanty collections of sherds 
were picked up on the sites of Yowanne in Wayne County, Okhata 
talaya in Newton County, and Halunlawasha in Neshoba County, 
and yet among the handful of sherds thus obtained one or more of 
the banded type was found at each of the three places. 

The presence of this single type of decorated ware from such widely 
separated Choctaw settlements, covering the entire area known to 
have been occupied by that tribe, suggests very strongly that it was 
the prevailing type of pottery in use at some period of their history. 
It may safely be regarded as historic, in the sense that it is found thus 
far only at Choctaw sites known to have been occupied as late as the 
19th century, but further than this its age cannot at present be 
determined. 

In texture and color this Choctaw pott:cry is similar to a widespread 
type from the mounds in western and central Mississippi and in parts 
of Arkansas and Louisiana. It is strikingly different, however, from 
the prevailing type of mound pottery from eastern Mississippi. ‘The 
pottery from the mounds of this section is usually rough and crumbly 
and contains rather coarse tempering material. The decorations most 
often found are produced either by ‘‘brushing”’ or by impressing cords 
or coarse fabrics on the soft surface. Sometimes there is an ornamenta- 
tion consisting of carelessly incised lines or punctations, and, infre- 
quently, of the stamped curvilinear designs so common in Georgia 
and Florida. 

It is too early to speculate, on the basis of this ceramic distribution, 
as to whether this Choctaw pottery developed locally or whether it 
had its origin to the west. Consideration of this question, as well as 
that of a possible earlier occupancy of the Choctaw territory by some 
other tribe, must be deferred until more complete information is 
available. It would be very desirable, for this purpose, to have 
additional collections of potsherds from other known Choctaw village 
sites and from the little known mounds and unidentified sites of 
central and western Mississippi. 


264 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1J 


RADIOTELEGRAPHY.—Ezperimental confirmation of the influence 
af a low-resistivity layer subsoil on the forward inclination of radio 
waves. J. HE. I. Carrns, Watheroo Magnetic Observatory, 
Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie Institution of 
Washington. (Communicated by Louis A. BauEr.) 


On the conclusion of the resistivity-survey of the region about the 
Watheroo Magnetic Observatory, at the end of June 1926, it was seen 
that the characteristics of the terrain were such as to afford means of 
experimental confirmation, or otherwise, of the suggestion, first put 
forward by Hack,! that ground-water (or a low-resistivity layer), at 
a depth of a fraction of a wave-length below the ground-surface, would 
almost entirely annul the ‘“‘forward”’ inclination experienced by radio 
waves when travelling over ground of considerable resistivity. The 
survey at Watheroo showed the surface layer, down to depths varying 
from 5 to 10 meters, of the sand-plain which comprises the greater 
part of the surrounding country, to be of very high mean resistivity, 
falling off rapidly below this surface layer to value less than one-tenth 
per cent of that at the surface at depths of 60 meters in most cases. 
At one place, about 2 miles east of the Observatory, the low-resistivity 
layer breaks through to the surface, the resistivity down to 100 meters 
being less than 400 chms per centimeter cube. 

Thus the conditions were admirably suitable. Although Hack had 
shown previously that the inclination would be annulled, measure- 
ments of resistivity of undisturbed soil were not at that time available. 
These measurements, at Watheroo were made at low frequency (ap- 
proximately 60 cycles), and the results are accurate to within one 
per cent.’ 

Two sites only were selected for the measurements, namely, at the 
places of highest and lowest resistivities, respectively, upon the con- 
clusion of the survey. ‘The highest was at the mid-point of the “sur-— 
vey line P” about three-quarters mile due north of the Observatory, 
and had a mean value down to 5 meters depth of approximately, 
1,500,000 ohms per centimeter cube. The point of lowest resistivity 
was selected principally to test the accuracy of the apparatus, since 
it was of such low value down to a depth of 100 meters, that the in- 
clination must have been negligible. The variations of resistivity 
with depth at the point P and for mid-point of section e, line 2 (the 
low-resistivity spot) are given in Table 1. At P the ground sloped 


1 J. ZenNNECK, Wireless Telegraphy (English Translation), pp. 260-262, 1915. 
2L. H. Gisu and W. J. Roonry, Terr. Mag., 30, 161-188, 1925. 


MAY 19, 1927 CAIRNS: INCLINATION OF RADIO WAVES 265 


backwards towards the transmitter at an angle of about one-quarter 
degree (measured roughly with a theodolite), while at section e, line 
2, the surface sloped away from the transmitter at an angle of 1.3 
degree. Observations were made on one station only, 6WF (wave 


TABLE 1.—VaRisATIONS OF MEAN RESISTIVITY WITH DEPTHS AT WATHEROO 
MAGNETIC OBSERVATORY 


MEAN RESISTIVITY FOR POINT 
DEPTH 


12 Mid-point section e, line 2 

m ohms per cm. cube ohms per cm. cube 
2.5 1,016,000 301 
») 1,417,000 236 
10 954,500 205 
20 214,000 223 
30 - 39,000 224 
60 1,480 256 
TOKO. 8 TA cS oit thes ies oa SRP oe 310 


length 1,250 meters), since the times of transmission from this station 
were definitely known. ‘The Observatory is almost exactly due north 
of the transmitter, and 132 miles from it. 


APPARATUS 


The apparatus consisted of a portable Hertzian rod oscillator, 
mounted on the telescope of a theodolite, and connected to a screened 
five-valve receiver by leads passing through a thick iron tube. The 
rod was 7 feet above ground when set up for measurements. The rod 
consisted of two five-foot lengths of thin wood joined by ebonite 
strips and stayed at the ends by strings passing to a king-post at the 
center. Upon the rod, the wire forming the aerial was strained, and 
~ tied at intervals with thread to prevent movement relative to the 
rod itself. The straining of the rod introduced a slight bend, thus 
inserting a small component of the oscillator normal to its length; the 
means for eliminating the effect of this are described below. The 
screening was effective enough to reduce the stray pick-up to zero, 
and the effects due to the unsymmetrical capacities of the individual 
halves of the rod were reduced considerably by means of a partial 
ground to the mid-point of the oscillator-system, as described by 
Greenleaf W. Pickard.? The oscillator was mounted on the top of 


3GREENLEAF W. Picxarp, The Polarization of Radio Waves, Inst. Radio Kn- 
gineers, 1925. ; 


266 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


the screening box containing the receiver, and the observer stood on 
another box at the center, immediately opposite to the lead-in tube. 
The ground was cleared for a distance of at least 15 feet all round the 
point where observations were being made. The receiver was caused 
to oscillate, thus giving a heterodyne note with the carrier of the 
received wave. ‘The circuit employed is shown in Figure 1. 


TO AMPLIFIER 


PARTIAL GROUND 
TO [RON SCREEN, 
THEODOLITE, AND 
FILAMENT BATTERY 


Fig. 1.—Diagrammatic sketch of set-up 


METHOD OF OBSERVATION 


The two halves of the oscillator were not in the same straight line, 
so that the procedure for observation had to be devised to eliminate 
the effect due to the fixed component of the rod normal to its length. 
A short length of the leads also, about 3 inches, was unscreened, so 
that the procedure had to include means for eliminating the pick-up 
which these introduced. One side of the rod was marked Up, the 
other Down, one lead was marked N, and when N was connected to 
the north terminal of the rod, the arrangement was termed Posztion A ; 
when NV was connected to the south terminal, the arrangement was 
called Posttion B. The schedule for a single observation then was: 


(I) Rod Up—(1) position A, vertical circle east; (2) position B, 
vertical circle east; (3) position B, vertical circle west; 
(4) position A, vertical circle west. 

(II) Rod Down—(1) position A, vertical circle west; (2) position 
B, vertical circle west; (3) position 6, vertical circle east; 
(4) position A, vertical circle east. 


MAY 19, 1927 CAIRNS: INCLINATION OF RADIO WAVES 267 


By this method of complete reversal, the results should be free from 
the spurious effects due to imperfections in the oscillator and lack of 
symmetry, stray pick-up, and incorrect setting of the horizontal circle 
on the bearing of the transmitter. In the case of the observations 
at P, 20 readings were made for each combination, to obtain a fairly 
reliable mean, then 20 on the next, and so forth. A slightly variable 
factor was introduced by the wind, which during both sets of readings 
was blowing from the west, and causing the rod to vibrate consider- 
ably. This caused, on occasions, a noticeable blurring of the minima. 


TABLE 2.—ReESuLTS OF OBSERVATIONS AT WATHEROO MAGNETIC OBSERVATORY ON 
Station 6WF TRANSMITTING AT WavE-LENGTH 1,250 METERS 


INCL’N INCL’N 


Mae ae y |S) | EES fc ceo SRR ae 
Res.-survey Up, A, E 20 +7.6 
line P Up, B, E 20 —7.2 
Up. 3B We 20 —9.6 
Uip;..AGeW. 20 a0: Oh i |(—'- ‘ 
Doe AW 20 186 0.6 | Night | +0.2 | —0.4 
Down, B, W 20 —7.6 
Down, B, E 20 —9.5 
Down, A, E 20 +6.6 
Middle section | Up, A, EF 10 +6.8 |) 
é, res.-Sur- Up, B, E 10 —8.1 || 
vey line 2 Up, B, W 10 —8.2 || 
Up, A, W 10 +10.1 
Det AW, ty | fs ee ee ae ety) 
Down, B, W 10 —5.6 
Down, B, E 10 —9.4 
Down, A, E 10 +7.7 


It is shown‘ that the ratio of the horizontal to the vertical-electric 
force, on Zenneck’s theory, is given by the formula 
NS tang (1) 
= ee ———— 9 — tan 
x eatin 
where m = nk p/2 X 10", m = nk; p/2 X 10", and n = frequency, 
k = dielectric constant of air, k!' = dielectric constant of the soil, 
p = resistivity in ohms per centimeter cube, and 8 = the angle of 
the forward inclination of the wave-front to the normal. When the 


4J. A. Furemine, The Principles of Electric Wave Telegraphy and Telephony, 4th edi- 
tion, 1919. 


268 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


rod makes the same angle with the horizontal as the wave-front does 
with the normal to the ground, no sound is heard in the telephones. 
The rod was rotated, therefore, about its horizontal axis, with its 
long axis normal to the wave-front, until a minimum was heard. 


RESULTS OF OBSERVATIONS 


The results of the observations are shown in Table 2. The maxi- 
mum departure from the mean of the readings in any one set was 4°, 
and that on one occasion only. In general, the departures were 2° or 
less, and the mean may be taken as accurate to 1°. 


_ DISCUSSION OF RESULTS 


In each case, the resultant inclination to the ground normal is seen 
to be negative, and this, if real, is most probably due to two causes: 
(1) The vibration of the rod caused by the wind; and (2) the fact that 
the minima in the positions giving negative inclination were sharper 


Fig. 2.—Plot of wave-front angle of forward inclination in degrees for wave- 
length = 1250 meters against resistivity in ohms per centimeter cube. 


than in the positive positions. In any case, the resultant inclination 
is less than the accuracy of the mean readings, and it may be taken, 
therefore, that it is either zero or negligible. From an inspection of 
Figure 2, which is plotted from values computed according to formula 
(1), assuming a value for the dielectric constant of the soil as 2 (the 
value of k, has little effect on the value for tan 8), it will be seen that 
if the surface layer alone were concerned in the conduction of the 
wave, an inclination of the order of 20° should have been observed 
at P and none at all at section e, line 2. From the circumstance that 


MAY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 269 


no inclination was observed in either instance, it is evident that the 
low-resistivity layer below the surface is sufficient to entirely annul 
the forward inclination of radio waves, at least those of wave-length 
1,250 meters. Moreover, from Table 1, it may be deduced that the 
mean depth to which waves of this wave-length penetrate, is at least 
45 meters, for at that depth, the mean resistivity at P is such as to give 
a forward inclination of 1°. 


SUMMARY 


Over soil, the mean resistivity of which had been measured in situ 
down to depths of 60 to 100 meters, and which consisted of a layer of 
sand of an exceptionally high resistivity over a layer at no consider- 
able depth of very low resistivity, radio waves of wave-length 1,250 
meters were found to experience no forward inclination. This is 
regarded as being more definite proof than has hitherto been given of 
the effect of ground-water or a low-resistivity layer a short distance 
below the surface, owing to the greater precision of the resistivity 
measurements of the undisturbed soil. 

I wish to express appreciation of the interest shown and the facilities 
given by Mr. H. F. Johnston, Observer-in-Charge at the Watheroo 
Magnetic Observatory; also thanks to Observer Mr. F. W. Wood for 
material assistance in transporting apparatus and recording, and to 
Mr. W. J. Rooney, who made the resistivity-survey of the region for 
the resistivity-values at the two points of observation in advance 
of publication. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 


948TH MEETING 


The 948th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, January 8, 1927. The 
address of the evening was given by the retiring president, WILLIAM Bowtn, 
on The part played by isostasy in geophysics and geology. (Published in the 
JOURNAL, 17: 101-117, March 4, 1927). 


949TH MEETING 


949th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, January 22, 1927. 

Program: R. L. Sanrorp, The problem of magnetic analysis. The idea 
that the magnetic properties of iron and steel can be used as criteria of their 
mechanical properties has been the subject of speculation and experiment 
for more than forty years. In view of the fact that the application of this 


270 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 17, No. 10 


idea, which has been termed magnetic analysis, is still in the experimental 
stage, it seems desirable to consider what progress has been made, to ask 
ourselves whether further effort is justified, and, if so, along what line investi- 
gation should be directed. 

New testing methods have been developed, making possible much investi- 
gational work that otherwise could not have been done. The large mass of 
data which has been obtained indicates a close connection between the mag- 
netic and mechanical properties of steel. 

No positive evidence has yet been obtained to controvert the idea that 
there is a definite relaticn between magnetic and mechanical properties, and 
in view of the great need for a practical method for the nondestructive test- 
ing of iron and steel and their products further effort in this field appears to 
be amply justified. 

Main attention should be given to fundamental investigation because it 
is necessary to know the underlying principles in order to realize to the fullest 
extent the possibilities of magnetic analysis. The greatest obstacle at present 
is the effect of mechanical strain. Mechanical and magnetic properties are 
both modified by strain, but not necessarily to a corresponding degree and 
this factor must be eliminated or evaluated before the fundamental rela- 
tionships can be discovered. If this can be done the practical application 
should be a relatively simple matter. (Author’s abstract). 

The paper was discussed by Messrs. Wu1rTE AND HUMPHREYS. 

P. R. Hey, The constant of gravitation. The Bureau of Standards has 
had under way for the past three years a redetermination of the Newtonian 
constant of gravitation, the quantity k in the formula for the force of attrac- 
tion between two bodies 

Force = eae 

The method used was that of the Cavendish torsion balance, set up in a 
vacuum. The large attracting masses were placed in two positions, at right 
angles, and the difference in the time of swing noted. This amounted to 
about five and a half minutes. The last experimenter who used this method 
(Karl Braun, 1896) obtained a difference of only about three quarters of a 
minute. 

The programme of observations has been finished, but the calculations are 
not yet completed. It is expected that the results will be ready to announce 
in a couple of months. (Author’s abstract). 

The paper was discussed by Messrs. Breit, WHITE, Curtis, DRYDEN, 
PRIEST, WADLEIGH AND CROOK. 


H. E. Merwin, Recording Secretary. 


THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


427TH MEETING 


The 427th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, March 9, 1927, President 
Butts presiding. 

Informal communication: HucH D. Misrr: Shapes of dren pebbles in 
San Juan County, Utah. The question, ‘‘Do stream pebbles have any 
characteristic shape?,”’ has been asked by many geologists. On this question 


MAY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 271 


I here record briefly my observations in the canyon of San Juan River, Utah, 
in 1921. 

Pebbles of many kinds of rocks, including sedimentary and crystalline 
rocks, and vein materials, constitute the gravel deposits on widely scattered 
benches in the canyon. The deposits occur at several different levels up to 
600 feet above the river, and consist largely of pebbles that have been derived 
from pre-Cambrian and later rocks in the San Juan Mountains of south- 
western Colorado. ‘The pebbles from these mountains have been transported 
by streams for distances that range from 200 to more than 300 miles. Their 
shapes, as well as the shapes of the pebbles that are derived from the rocks 
along or near the Canyon, are the result of stream wear. Such wear is of 
course influenced by the nature and structure of the pebbles, and the shape 
of the original rock fragments. 

The pebbles are mostly 1 to 3 inches in diameter and most of them are well 
rounded. The well rounded pebbles consist of quartzite, limestone, gneiss, 
schist, sandstone, conglomerate, vein quartz, porphyritic igneous rocks, and 
granitoid igneous rocks. Also the well rounded pebbles contain a consider- 
able proportion of flattened ellipsoids rather than spheres or flattened 
spheroids. Many platy rocks such as schist and laminated sandstone natu- 
rally break into flat fragments and readily yield flattened pebbles when the 
corners are rounded off. Homogeneous rocks such as granite, andesite and 
vein quartz might be expected to yield some spherical pebbles, but not a 
single sphere was observed by me. All pebbles of these and other kinds of 
homogeneous rocks are flattened. The flattened ellipsoidal form of the 
pebbles may be due to the original shape of the rock fragments, none of 
which would likely have equal dimensions as does a cube. 

Pebbles that are not well rounded include flint, agate, and chalcedony. I 
believe their brittleness and also their great hardness are factors that in- 
fluence their shapes. I believe they may break into large and small frag- 
ments at times during their life history. 

Many subangular pebbles are bounded by facets which were formed by 
the breaking of the rock along laminae or other weak planes. Wuind-faceted 
pebbles were not noted by me but some pebbles, especially those of limestone, 
were furrowed with minute grooves that were produced by sand blasts in 
the few small areas of dune sand. (Awthor’s abstract.) 

Program: W. P. Wooprine and P. V. Rounpy: Geology and orl develop- 
ment of the Elk Hills, California. The Elk Hills le along the southwest edge 
of the San Joaquin Valley in the outer belt of foothills of the Temblor Range. 
The only outcropping beds are late Pliocene nonmarine deposits called the 
Tulare formation. ‘They consist of alternating beds of sand and clay. The 
sand is clean and arkosic, cross-bedded, and has a complex pattern of gravel 
courses. ‘The clay is silty and massively bedded, and carries calcareous 
layers ranging even in the same layer from calcareous clay to limestone. The 
sands are alluvial fan deposits and the clays seem to be mud-flat and playa 
deposits. ‘The alternation of these beds at any one place is so perfect and on 
so large a scale that it demands some kind of periodic control and probably 
the simplest kind of periodic control is periodic subsidence of the San Joaquin 
Valley. The oil-bearing beds lie in the upper part of the Etchegoin forma- 
tion, which underlies the Tulare formation. Immediately above the main 
oil zone and lying in nonmarine beds is a thin layer carrying some curious 
fossils, known as Scalez petrolia. ‘These fossils are calcareous opercula of 
freshwater snails similar to living pond snails of the genus Viviparus, which, 


272 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


however, have horny opercula. The Scales-bearing bed is a very reliable 
datum plane and is used to great advantage by the oil operators. 

Structurally the Elk Hills consist of two main gently folded anticlines. 
Narrow steeply folded anticlines lie along or near the south edge of the hills 
and also at the northwest edge. ‘These little anticlines probable are very 
shallow and in some way are the offspring of the main folds, but their origin 
is not clear. 

The main oil zone of the eastern part of the field hes immediately below 
the Scalez-bearing bed. The gas produced in the central part of the field 
is obtained from beds above this zone. Contours drawn on the Scalez-bear- 
ing bed show that the dip of the oil-bearing beds is twice as great as the dip 
of the surface beds. Faults that have a maximum stratigraphic displace- 
ment of about 250 feet at the horizon of the oil-bearing beds have not been 
recognized at the surface. During the last 64 years the field has produced 
more than 76,000,000 barrels of oil. (Authors’ abstract.) , 

CHARLES W. GILMORE: Fossil footprints in the Grand Canyon. ‘Two trips 
to the Grand Canyon, Arizona, were undertaken for the dual purpose of 
securing collections of fossil tracks for the U. S. National Museum and pre- 
paring an exhibit in sztu for the National Park Service. 

The tracks occur in the Coconino, Hermit, and Supai formations at levels 
of 1,000, 1,300 and 1760 feet, respectively, below the present rim of the 
Canyon wall. Both of the projects were successfully carried out, a collec- 
tion of slabs of footprints some 4,400 pounds in weight were secured for the 
National collections and a track-covered surface several hundred square feet in 
area was uncovered by the side of the Hermit Trail in the Coconino sandstone 
to form a permanent exhibit of the tracks as they occur in nature. 

All of the tracks in the Coconino occur on the inclined surfaces of the 
strong cross-bedding of the sandstone, and all but three of the hundreds of 
tracks and trails observed were headed up the slope. No satisfactory ex- 
planation of this fact has yet been obtained. 

Adequate ichnite faunas have now been established for the Coconino and 
Hermit, and a beginning made on a fauna for the older Supai. In all, 24 
genera and 33 species of fossil tracks have now been recognized, distributed 
as follows: Coconino, 15 genera and 22 species; Hermit, 6 genera and 8 species; 
Supai, 3 genera and 3 species. Comparison of these faunas shows them to 
be absolutely distinct from one another as not a single genus is common to 
any two of the faunas. Both vertebrate and invertebrate animals are 
represented by these tracks. No skeletal remains have yet been found in the 
Grand Canyon and consequently no direct evidence can be offered as to the 
makers of any of these tracks. (Auwthor’s abstract.) 

RaymMonpn C. Moors: Problems in the History of the Grand Canyon Region. 

The unparalleled vertical and horizontal extent of rock exposures in the 
Grand Canyon region and the clearness with which phenomena relating to 
almost all branches of geology are represented, have made this territory a 
classic ground for studies in geologic science. Yet, because of inaccessibility, 
observations have been essentially confined to a small part of the district. 
Indeed, excepting John Wesley Powell, the writer is the first geologist who 
has had opportunity to visit parts of the upper and lower sections of the 
canyon. 

Notwithstanding excellent exposures and the more or less detailed obser- 
vations of various workers, it is expectable that there are many unsolved 
problems in the geologic history of the Grand Canyon region. ‘These may be 


MAY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 273 


arranged conveniently in groups: (a) those of the stratified rocks, their age, 
origin, relations to associated formations, regional relations, and the signifi- 
cance of various minor characters; (b) those of the igneous rocks, intrusive 
and extrusive; (c) those of the metamorphic rocks, their classification and 
origin; (d) those bearing on the structure of the rocks, its origin, geologic 
age and effects; and (e) those in the field of physiography. Only a few of 
these problems can be indicated here. 

(a) The stratified rocks include about 4,000 feet of sub-horizontal limestone, 
sandstone and shale of Paleozoic age, resting unconformably on 12,000 feet 
of somewhat evenly inclined Proterozoic strata and on Archeozoic rocks. 
The regional relationships of the Kaibab limestone and Coconino sandstone 
at the top of the column, the nature and significance of the contact between 
these formations, and the origin of the Coconino are important problems. 
The complementary variations in thickness of the Coconino and subjacent 
Hermit shale, the time represented by the unconformity at the base of the 
Hermit, the position of the Pennsylvanian-Permian boundary, and the 
stratigraphic relationships of the Devonian and of the Cambrian formations 
are largely unsolved problems. The remarkably smooth surface of the pre- 
Paleozoic rocks beneath the Cambrian, and of Archeozoic rocks beneath 
the Unkar series, suggests marine planation, possibly supplementing sub- 
aerial peneplanation. 

(b) The zgneous rocks include great and small intrusive masses of acid, 
intermediate, and basic rocks in the Archeozoic, mainly basic intrusive and 
eruptive rocks in the Proterozoic, and basic eruptives of Tertiary and Recent 
age. The many miles of continuous exposures of Archeozoic igneous rocks 
afford splendid opportunity for study that is almost untouched. The occur- 
rence in each of the Proterozoic areas of thick diabase sills near the base of 
the Unkar series recalls the widespread similar rocks in the Proterozoic of 
other areas and in the Triassic Newark series. The wide geographic distri- 
bution and persistence in stratigraphic position of the Grand Canyon diabase 
call for notice. In comparatively recent time basaltic lava invaded the 
canyon near Lava Falls, below the mouth of Havasu Creek, and flowed 
downstream at least seventy miles. Numerous remnants of the narrow 
canyon-bottom lava flow are found, with even upper surface a little over 100 
feet above present river level. The results of temporary damming of the 
river and the length of the attenuated basaltic flow are interesting subjects 
of investigation. 

(c) The metamorphic rocks of the Archeozoic have been classed together 
under the term Vishnu schist. Very much of the schist is undoubtedly of 
sedimentary origin; in parts of the canyon there are great thicknesses of little 
altered quartzite and slate. Several types of meta-igneous rocks are found. 
The differentiation of the Archeozoic complex offers several important 
problems. 

(d) The structure of the rocks in the Grand Canyon region affords many 
subjects for study. The structure of the Archeozoic and Proterozoic rocks 
and its regional relations; the sharp monoclinal folds of post-Cretaceous-pre- 
Eocene age; the large normal faults of post-Wasatch (Eocene) age; the 
movements at certain places at different geologic times, in some cases in 
opposite directions; and the nature, time and causes of regional warping are 
some of these problems. 

(e) The physiography of the canyon country has long been an alluring field 
for research, and observations in this region have helped to clarify various 


274 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


physiographic concepts. ‘The relation of land forms to rock hardness and 
structure is evident, though the development of some of the characteristic 
features, such as the amphitheaters, the long narrow spurs and the general 
pattern of sculpture in parts of the Grand Canyon, have not been obvious. 
The writer accords with the conclusion of Noble and Matthes that small 
faults and comparatively unnoticed fractures have played an important role 
in the shaping of the canyon. However, the origin of the canyon as a whole, 
the location of the course of the river, and the physiographic history of the 
region offer problems that are largely unsolved. Remnants of peneplains, 
intrenched meanders and other features bear testimony to a long and probably 
complex history. ‘The writer’s study leads to the conclusion that much 
erosion in the Grand Canyon area, involving removal of most of the Mesozoic 
rocks that were once present here, was probably accon:plished in pre-Wasatch 
time; that the river was established in its present course mainly by super- 
position, following a course that was consequent on Tertiary beds; and that 
the main stream is influenced by structure near the south end of the Kaibab 
Plateau, between Diamond Creek and the mouth of the canyon, and perhaps 
at other places, but seems to be unrelated to the great Tertiary faults which 
cross the region. Study of Glen Canyon, Marble Gorge, and adjacent parts 
of the plateau country suggests the existence of a well advanced erosion 
cycle which was interrupted at a stage when the river had already begun the 
excavation of the Grand Canyon and had cut downward more than 2,000 feet 
below the Kaibab rim. Perhaps this earlier erosion cycle corresponds to the 
“Great Denudation’’ of Dutton that preceded the stage of active canyon 
cutting. While the sudden widening of the canyon in the Kaibab division 
may result from the beginning of erosion here in the earlier erosion cycle, 
the writer knows of no identifiable remnant of the suggested pre-canyon 
cycle within the Grand Canyon. Such platforms as the Tonto bench and 
the Esplanade are structural in origin. It is doubtful whether any remnants 
of an older valley could be preserved where subsequent downward erosion 
has been so active. 

The distribution of rapids, in almost every case at the mouth of a tributary 
stream, and the relation of river gradient to rock hardness and other factors of 
stream erosion are interesting subjects of study. One may conclude that 
despite numerous rapids, a certain more or less stable relationship has been 
attained on Colorado River between the rate of erosion and the ability of the 
river to erode. (Author’s abstract.) 


428TH MEETING 


The 428th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club March 23, 1927, President 
Burts presiding. Program: T. B. Nouan: Potash brines underlying Great 
Salt Lake Desert, Utah. During the summer of 1925, the Geological Survey, 
in codperation with the Bureau of Mines and the General Land Office, pros- 
pected the potash-bearing brines in the Great Salt Lake Desert region. 
Two types of brine were found: (1) brine contained in. the interstices of 
crystalline salt deposits, and (2) brine found at a definite horizon in clays 
belonging to the Lake Bonneville beds. ‘The first type of brine is the more 
concentrated of the two and is believed to represent a residual mother liquor, 
more or less modified by rain water, that has existed since the final withdrawal 
of the waters of Lake Bonneville. The horizon at which the second type of 
brine occurs is thought to be a salt-impregnated zone deposited during the 
final stage of the earlier desiccation of Lake Bonneville, and would thus be 


MAY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 275 


equivalent to the unconformity found by Gilbert between the Yellow Clay 
and the White Marl. ‘The brine found is considered as being the result of 
the introduction of surface drainage waters along this soluble layer. This 
hypothesis is based upon the following observations: The depth to the brine 
horizon is a minimum at the center of the Desert and increases to 9 feet at 
the edge of the prospected area. ‘This compares with a thickness of 10 feet 
for the White Marl in the type section at the Old River Bed. - The clays 
above and below the brine horizon are sufficiently impermeable that towards 
the center of the area, where the brines are under a hydrostatic head, a rise 
of as much as a foot results when the horizon is tapped by a bore hole. 
Obviously, the brine horizon has some property not possessed by the remainder 
of the clay. The concentration of sodium chloride in the brine increases 
towards the center of the area, and the rate of increase was found to vary 
inversely with the amount of surface drainage waters available. Thus, 
where large drainage channels enter the prospected region, the chlorine 
content is notably depressed. Further, the relative amounts of potassium 
and magnesium in the brine show a striking dependence upon the character 
of the country rock in the adjacent highlands—potash, for example, being 
high in the brines where rhyolite flows from the highlands nearby; and 
magnesium tending to dominate near areas of dolomitic rocks. The calcium 
sulphate and carbonate, which presumably formed a large part of the mineral 
content of the indraining surface waters, have been almost entirely precipi- 
tated and are represented by a “‘caliche” or hardpan immediately above the 
brine horizon. 

Deep bore holes put down by one of the operating companies showed the 
presence of several deeper brine horizons. If these may be interpreted in 
the same manner as the one prospected, it would seem that the history of 
the Bonneville Basin is considerably more extensive than has been so. far 
recognized. (Author’s abstract.) 

C. K. WeEntTWortTH, J. E. HOFFMEISTER, AND H. S. Lapp: Unusual types 
of sediments from Pacific Islands. Four types of islands are represented in 
this study: (1) oceanic islands of volcanic origin such as the Hawaiian groups; 
(2) oceanic islands without known igneous base such as the coral islands of 
the Line and Tonga groups; (8) islands like Eua, Tonga, which have a vol- 
canic ash base nearly entirely covered with limestone; and (4) islands like 
Vitilevu, Fiji, which are partly volcanic but have some continental types of 
rocks. 

(1) In Hawaii the sediments are derived mainly by chemical weathering 
from basalt and consist of highly ferruginous mantlerock and soil; gravel 
and ferruginous clays with very little sand; coral reef rock; detrital calcareous 
sand composed of coral, shell and foraminiferal debris; and pyroclastic rocks 
and their crystal sand derivatives. 

(2) The sediments of the Line Islands, which are wholly of organic origin, 
are chiefly coral and Tridacna gravels and conglomerates; beach sands of 
coral and molluscan shell debris and foraminifera; and coral muds and silts. 
Reef formations are the fundamental rocks of the group and the source of 
the detrital derivatives. 

(3) The island of Eua is a representative of the Tongan group. ‘The core 
of the island is voleanic tuff. This is overlain by younger sediments of 
various sorts, including a reworked tuff to which much organic material has 
been added. Foraminiferal and coralline limestones form an extensive 
series of terraces, and in one locality andesite boulders in a matrix of calcare- 
ous sand form a thick deposit of conglomerate. 


276 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 


(4) The dominant sediments of Vitilevu, Fiji, are those belonging to the 
agglomerate-tuff-marl series, most of which are marine in origin. The marls 
are usually reworked tuffs to which variable amounts of clay and shelly 
material have been added. Subordinate rock types include conglomerates, 
sandstones, and limestones of several sorts, often more or less tuffaceous. 
Both foraminiferal and coralline limestones occur. Ordinarily these are 
found as small lenticular bodies in the main series, but two limestone masses, 
each several hundred feet in thickness, are known. (Authors’ abstract.) 

W.C. ALDEN: Certain Pliocene and Pleistocene features of Yellowstone Park 
and its environs. | 

W. P. Wooprinc, W. W. RuBey, Secretaries. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


Members of the United States Geological Survey on May 2 tendered Dr. 
GEORGE OTIS SMITH a testimonial Juncheon in honor of his completion of 20 
years as Director. Dr. Smitu became a member of the Survey in 1896 and 
was appointed Director in 1907. 


TED SOCIETIES — 


ological So 


THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND 


Society. 


~ 


Tk 


c 


i 


B 


a 


ry 
a 
a 


ophi 


nth. 


his page 


mo 


ll appear on t 


. 


ies wi 
nty-seventh of each 


ted societ 


ia 


the thirteenth and the twe 


Yef-the-atili 


= 


ings 


mt 


» 


pote 
Lt TS 


ha 
i) 


‘of the meet 


co) 
ms 


se ; f aioe 


“CONTENTS ne 


¥ meee ‘OnIGINAL Paras 


* 


tivity fayer. eS on the forward liaanien ote wade 
CAIRNS Pago cieh'e Vee be We Pay w by Gly aco gs eta ite are ae ee 


OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY — 


President: AumxANDER Rellghels es! Smithsonian Institution. fe 


Treasurer: R. L. ae Coast: 


a ee a i ah le aed = Sit PP IES OE NIT IE Dit Ok ee ie me Sd 


bt ht ES ae! EIS be 
Loe : 


* 


site foes 
fe 


Vou. 17 JUNE 4, 1927 No. 11 


eine: 


* y 
ees, 
nies 
a 


SS ag 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


“WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
r OF SCIENCES 


ne eee 7 Pood. Wane gale: Pini 
7 ¢ . t< aoe 


Lae re ie 


. 
i, 
3 
“i 
“ BOARD OF EDITORS 
S Wi.uiaM J. Peters Aagnes CHase Joun B. Ruesipz, Jr. 
‘ DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 
vs ASSOCIATE EDITORS 
‘<i 
L. H. Apams S. A. RonwrEr 
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
E. A. GOLDMAN G. W. Stross 
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
R. F. Griaags J. R. Swanton 
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOcINTY 


‘ PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 
e BY THE 
i WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
ie Mr. Roya anp GuILrorp AvEs. 
’ _Battimore, Maryianp 
is 
b 
a Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
a Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of ee provided for 
ae in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 


This eee ae offi ia 
present a brief record of curre 
(1) short original papers, wr C 
short notes of current scienti rat 

(3) proceedings and programs of n eetings 
notes of events connected with the scientific 


infinwsorente may be sent to any tenia of the ea of ‘Edi t rs; the 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential ¢ cha 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor error: 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publicatio 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. © ay 
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be sonfin 
or diagrams of simple character. ee aN) 
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i 
will exercise due care in seeing that co Peet is followed. | rie 
Authors’ Reprints. —Reprints wil - furnished at the followi cee edu 


Copies 4pp. Spp.. 418 pps ‘1 pp. Covel 
50 $3.85 52 $l. 65 rk $2.55 . $3.95 $2.0 
100 | BS 8 Bees 3.80 © 4.75 e ~6.00 
1502.25 4.80 ae "600s 

200 «362.50 4.80 “ cep i Saakars ge M' a1  or i 

250 3.00 5.30 3 6.25 < 7.60 | 


| Covers bearing the name of the ee and title of the article, with 
nation and date of; issue, will bef urnished when ordered. : 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copi 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. 
The rate of Subscription per umes 
Semi-nionthly nambers, 04000000. ee a 
Monthly numbers........ 2.0.0 6e- ces eesee eect ee eters eee tener ees : 


Remittances should be made ayable to “Washington Academy of Sciences 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Mdaasars ice = 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. 

Ezchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other ‘publications, _ eas 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, tigaray that ciaim is 
within thirty days after date of the eRe issue. eee) 


*Volume I, iopene from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special rates 
are given to members of scientific societies: affiliated with the Academy. ie 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vou. 17 JUNE 4, 1927 No. 11 


GEOLOGY.—A Review of recent reports on investigations made in 
Florida on Pleistocene geology and paleontology.: OLiveR P. Hay, 
Washington, D.C. 


Recently the writer presented a paper? which dealt with the geo- 
logical age of the vertebrate fossils reported as found by Professor 
F. B. Loomis and Dr. J. W. Gidley, mostly at Melbourne, Florida. 
Since the presentation of that article other reports on investigations at 
Melbourne, Vero, and one or two other localities have been pub- 
lished. One is a joint report? by Gidley and Loomis on their work 
done in 1925. Another is an individual statement made‘ by Prof. 
Loomis. A third report is that made*® by Dr. Wythe Cooke, who was 
assigned by the U. 8. Geological Survey as associate with Dr. Gidley 
in the investigation made in 1926. Dr. Gidley’s report for work done 
in 1926 has not yet appeared. Inthestatements published the writers 
describe the geological features of the various localities, note in a 
general way the fossils found, and announce the conclusions reached 
concerning the age of the deposits and fossil animals and that of the 
human remains encountered. 

It is not wholly a pleasant task to take up this subject again and to 
employ the necessary repetitions. In various respects the reports are 
disappointing. On the geological side, one might expect to find a 
sketch map showing the topography of the region examined at Mel- 
bourne and the locations of the excavations made. From the pale- 
ontologists the public might have expected a more satisfactory state- 
ment of the species of vertebrate fossils found. As it is, only a few 


1 Received February 3, 1927. 

2 This JOURNAL, 16: 387-392. 1926. 

3 Amer. Journ. Sci. (5), 12: 254-264. 1926. 
4 Nat. Hist., 26: 260-262. 1926. 

5 Amer. Journ. Sci. (5), 12: 441-452. 1926. 


207 


278 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


are mentioned and these only incidentally. Since the close of the 
work of 1926 nearly a year has passed and in this interval the fossils 
then collected might have been studied and their meaning deter- 
mined. Dr. Cooke mentioned some fossils under names based on 
identifications made in the field by Dr. Gidley and often followed 
by marks of query. At present one can not be certain just what 
species were collected by the various expeditions nor in exactly what 
horizons they occurred. 

The writer will deal first with Dr. Cooke’s report. With the details 
of this, little fault is found. Dr. Cooke was bound within narrow 
limits by his acceptance of the theory of marine origin of the terraces 
of the coastal plain and of the times of their formation. When he 
argues that, if those terraces were formed at long intervals during the 
Pleistocene, the lowest one is of rather recent date, heisright. If this 
were granted, it would follow that any deposits and fossils laid down 
on this terrace are young. 

In one of his papers the writer, in discussing the coastal plain 
terraces, showed® that if they were of marine origin there must have 
been buried in each of them abundant remains of marine organisms, 
especially of mollusks. So far as known, such remains are wholly 
lacking, except in the lowest levels of the lowest terrace. When I 
inquire what agency has been effective in removing the vertebrate 
bones and teeth and the molluscan shells I am told that it has been 
done by carbonated rain water. This theory appears reasonable until 
it has been tested. Over large areas of Florida the shell bed of the 
Anastasia marl has been exposed long ages at or near the surface and 
it remains there. Rain water has not dissolved out the shells of 
mollusks and the bones of whales buried in the Pleistocene clays around 
Lake Champlain and along St. Lawrence and Ottawa rivers. Along 
Mississippi and Missouri rivers are thick deposits of loess, a formation 
permitting the easy passage of meteoric water. In many localities 
numerous species of delicate land snails remaining unchanged have 
been collected from it. 

If we carry our investigations into Europe, where the Pleistocene 
has been more thoroughly studied than in America, we soon learn that 
around nearly all the countries bordered by seas there are marine 
deposits of Pleistocene age, often in the form of terraces. In the 
interior, beyond the reach of marine waters, along the rivers and lakes, 
both in glaciated and unglaciated regions, are terraces, sometimes as 


6 This JOURNAL, 14: 255. 1924. 


JUNE 4, 1927 HAY: RECENT REPORTS ON PLEISTOCENE 279 


many as four or more, and belonging some to early and some to late 
Pleistocene times. These terraces show not only by their physio- 
graphic form but more convincingly by the inclusion of fossils that 
they were laid down under waters, marine or fresh, during times of 
subsidence. Believers in the marine origin of our coastal plain 
terraces ought to procure Haug’s T’raité de Géologte and read his re- 
marks on the Quaternary. They might then wonder what has been 
the matter with the rain water which has fallen on European soils for 
the last half million years that the abundant fossils have not been 
dissolved out. An entire page could be filled by only the record of 
localities where fossils, especially mollusks, marine, freshwater, and 
terrestrial, are found. 

The writer believes that he is justified in saying that the reason why 
no marine fossils are found on our coastal plain terraces is that marine 
waters have had nothing to do with those terraces. Probably not 
since the Pliocene has our coast, south of New Jersey, been sub- 
merged more than a very few feet. North of New Jersey there was, 
during at least the last glacial stage, considerable subsidence; and this 
is Shown by an abundance of marine fossils. 

There appears to be sufficient evidence that during the latter part 
of the Pliocene and during the earlier part of the Pleistocene the whole 
of this continent stood at a much higher level than it now does. It 
seems not improbable that the eastern border of the continental shelf 
was near sea-level. It was probably during this time of high elevation 
that the swift and swollen streams excavated the gorges and canyons 
which are known to exist, but which are often in one way or another 
partially hidden. Examples of these are the wide and deep basins 
which contain most of the Great Lakes, the trough of St. Lawrence 
River, the extensive submarine trench which extends many miles out 
from the mouth of the Hudson, the broad and deep valley in which 
reposes Chesapeake Bay, the deep excavation, refilled apparently 
to as much as 1,200 feet,’ in which the lower Mississippi flows. Appar- 
ently before the end of the first glacial stage our eastern coast had 
settled down to about its present level; and there is little evidence and 
little probability that since that early time the elevation has been 
much greater than at present. During the greater part of the Pleisto- 
cene, therefore, our coastal plain, from New Jersey to the Rio Grande, 
has been practically stable. In whatever way the terraces were pro- 
duced, they came into existence during the time of that elevation; and 


7 Louisiana Geol. Survey Bull., 1: 43. 1905. 


280 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


at the time of the first interglacial stage the low Atlantic shore was 
ready to receive deposits containing the remains of the animals we 
now find there. 

Consistent with his belief in the theory of the marine origin of the 
terraces, Dr. Cooke, of course, accepts the interpretation that the 
deposits and their fossil contents are relatively young. In their joint 
report Dr. Gidley and Professor Loomis take a similar view of the 
rather late age of the deposits and of the fossils. The present writer 
is unable, however, to determine what is the fundamental idea on which 
their conclusions are based—whether on the theory of marine terraces, 
the modern aspect of the fauna, or the presence of human remains. 
The language employed by them appears often rather indefinite, so 
that each reader can interpret it to suit himself. On page 263 of the 
joint report a number of geological changes are indicated, but whether 
these involved any considerable amount of movement or of time is left 
uncertain. Very few vertebrate fossils are recorded. ‘Two or three 
species of elephants, varying in structure, habits, geological age, and 
regional distribution, are included under the vague name mammoth. 
In short, there is a contrast between the laxity of the argumentation 
and the assertiveness of the conclusion. 

The authors, as shown in their report, are not clear as to the exact 
age of the bed no. 2 and its fossils, but state that it was “‘probably 
pre-Wisconsin.’’ Nor are they certain that the human skull was not 
originally imbedded in no. 2. If it was, man may have been there in 
pre-Wisconsin times. Or, as they suggest, the skull may have been 
crushed and pressed into bed no. 2 by some heavy animal in the inter- 
val between bed no. 2 and bed no. 3—therefore, in “possibly early 
post-Pleistocene,’’ which is, of course, the Recent. The effort is 
made to bring up the age of the deposit as near the present time as 
possible, but nowhere is there a reason offered why bed no. 2 may not 
be as old as the first interglacial, the Aftonian. 

In the endeavor to advance bed no. 2 to a late time in the Pleisto- 
cene the writers must account for the large extinct fauna found in it. 
They think it possible “‘that at this time there was still living in 
Florida at least a remnant of the Pleistocene fauna, including the 
mammoth and the mastodon.’’ The suggestion that some of the 
Pleistocene animals lived longer than others appears to be an attrac- 
tive one, inasmuch as it is accepted by Dr. Cooke and by Gidley and 
Loomis. Now, this remnant must have been a pretty substantial one. 
The writer has estimated that 70 per cent of the species of bed no. 2 
is extinct and 30 per cent is yet living, but the 70 per cent includes 


JUNE 4, 1927 HAY: RECENT REPORTS ON PLEISTOCENE 281 


many species which became extinct after bed no. 2 was laid down. 
It is, therefore, not unlikely that the remnant living at the close of 
deposition of bed no. 2 amounted to half of the fossil species known 
from Florida. It is hard to understand what advantages the authors 
of the report gain by exploitation of this remnant. It is the other 
remnant, the one which appears no more after the deposition of bed 
no. 2, that is to be considered. We must determine when the saber- 
tooth tigers (Smilodon), the capabaras of bear-like size, Hlephas 
imperator, the camels, the horses of two or three species, the giant 
armadillo (Chlamytherium), Megatherium, the glyptodonts, the gigantic 
tortoises, and various species of smaller chelonians ceased to exist. 
We must not conclude that camels lived on to a late stage of the 
Pleistocene simply because some of the bisons did; nor that ee 
umperator continued on to the early Recent het Ho es ‘mam- 
moth’ may have done so. 

In addition to the genera and species mentioned above there have 
been discovered at Peace Creek, Vero, Melbourne, and various 
other localities in Florida, mylodons, megalonyx, tapirs, peccaries, 
long-horned bisons, mastodons, the giant beaver (Castoroides), huge 
dogs, and tigers, besides the great bulk of the species, big and little, 
which inhabited Florida when Ponce de Leon arrived in search of the 
fountain of youth. Doubtless all of these had ex’sted somewhere 
during, we will say, the first interglacial stage. From that time this 
host had marched abreast some hundreds of thousands of years, down, 
as we are told, to the “‘pre-Wisconsin”’ or even to the ‘‘post-Pleisto- 
cene.”’ Few or none had fallen exhausted by the wayside; few or none 
had been destroyed by any hovering enemy; apparently there had 
occurred no internecine conflicts; and none of the beasts had suffered 
from the rigors of four glacial stages. Then, as if to announce the 
tardy arrival of man on the continent and to prepare his environment, 
nearly three-fourths of that multitude was destroyed suddenly and in 
as mysterious a way as was the army of Sennacharib. 

I am told by Dr. Cooke that some vertebrate paleontologists think 
that there are more specific differences than I admit between the 
Pleistocene animals of Florida and those of the glaciated regions. 
This may be true, but in the present discussion, not very important. 
A certain elephant, regarded by myself as Elephas imperator, may be 
something else, but it lived with the other genera and species of bed 
no. 2 and disappeared with them. It is open to anybody to describe 
from the bones and teeth found in Florida as many new species as he 
may desire. ‘These new species will ke found mostly in bed no. 2 and, 


282 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


as I view the case, will add to the high percentage of extinct species 
found in it and confirm its antiquity. As Cooke, Gidley and Loomis 
interpret the case, all the new species will simply magnify the slaughter 
that occurred just preceding the alleged late advent of man. 

Various persons attach importance to the idea that the Pleistocene 
animals survived longer in Florida than in the northern States because 
of its genial climate. These persons must assume that the environ- 
ment of Florida is even now more favorable for mammalian animals 
than more northern countries. Apparently the climate preferred by 
musk-oxen and polar bears is that of the arctic regions; by existing 
sloths and anteaters, that of the hot tropics; by a great variety of other 
animals, that of the intervening spaces. ‘These persons must assume 
further that, even if the climate remained genial during the glacial 
stages, the animals living there all continued to exist from the early 
Pleistocene to its close. Mammalian genera and species, quite unlike 
mollusks, are relatively short-lived. Climate is not the only condition 
that effects the existence of vertebrates. If for any reason vertebrates 
from other parts of the continent had invaded Florida in great numbers 
their intrusion would have led to competition for place and food, and 
some of the less hardy forms would have succumbed. 

The climate of the southern States, however, was probably during 
each glacial stage less genial than during the interglacial stages. 
During one stage, probably the Kansan, walruses flourished on the 
present site of Charleston, South Carolina. In the collection of Mr. 
C. C. Pinckney, of Charleston, the writer found a milk-tooth of a 
species of moose closely related to the one now living. Leidy recog- 
nized the presence of a musk-ox at Natchez, Mississippi. In his 
report Dr. Cooke included among the animals exhumed from the bed 
no. 2, at Melbourne, a possible reindeer. Although the teeth were 
later identified as those of a young elk, the earlier identification did not 
appear incongruous either to the geologist or the paleontologist. The 
climate which was favorable for walruses, moose, musk-oxen and the 
elk, would not have appeared genial to all of the ground-sloths, the 
armadillos, glyptodonts, the saber-tooth tigers, the camels, and the 
huge tortoises, all of which had been accustomed to a semitropical 
environment. 

If those who insist that during glacial stages the climate of Florida 
was little different from that of the present really understand Pleisto- 
cene meteorology, will they not tell us what happened about the time 
of the introduction of human beings that so many of the animals were 
swept away? 


JUNE 4, 1927 HAY: RECENT REPORTS ON PLEISTOCENE 283 


Naturally the age of bed no. 3 came up for decision by the investiga- 
tors at Melbourne, and they appear to have found the problem easy of 
solution. It is assigned to the Recent; but the present writer finds no 
adequate reason presented. Dr. Cooke states that the freshness of 
the vegetable remains and of the mussel shells indicates that no very 
long time elapsed during this accumulation—a conclusion which will 
not stand investigation. According to Gidley and Loomis, the de- 
posit is somewhat more recent than the appearance of man, which 
itself was possibly early post-Pleistocene, that is, Recent. No reason 
is offered why bed no. 3 may not be as old as the IIlinoian glacial stage 
or the Kansan. Much is made of the erosion of bed no. 2, but it 
might, without any uplift, have been effected by increased rainfall 
during one glacial stage. ‘The considerable changes of level postulated 
are assumptions. Apparently few fossils were found in bed no. 3 at 
Melbourne, probably because of local conditions. At Vero, fifty-two 
species of vertebrates were collected, of which nineteen were regarded 
as extinct. ‘The writer is inclined to believe that any of the species 
that survived the extinction following the deposition of bed no. 2 
may yet be discovered in no. 3. In an effort to prove the late date of 
the bed no. 2, Prof. R. T. Chamberlin contended* some years ago that 
it passed apparently without interruption into bed no. 3. His argu- 
ments may fairly be used to show that this upper bed is older than he 
suspected. The stratum of muck must have accumulated with 
extreme slowness. The upper portions may really belong to the 
Recent epoch; the lower portion to late and middle Pleistocene. 

The present writer has little to say about Professor Loomis’s 
personal article mentioned above. It appears to be a repudiation of 
portions of the joint report. On some matters I believe he is right; 
on others, in error. To the writer it appears that the evidence pre- 
sented by the three investigators shows that the human skull and 
some of the artifacts belonged originally in bed no. 2. If further 
digging from Melbourne to Vero should, as it has done so far, reveal 
human relics imbedded in this stratum, one would have to conclude 
either that it was their original resting place or that the proboscideans 
were animated by an intense dislike at seeing such objects lying around 
loose on the surface. 


8 Journ. Geol., 25: 666-683. 1917. 


284 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


BOTANY.—Six new Convolvulaceae from Venezuela.1 H. Pirrizr, 
Caracas, Venezuela. 


Breweria mollis Pittier, sp. nov. 


Scandens, caulibus virgatis, verruculosis, dense pubescentibus; foliis 
nervosis, modice petiolatis, petiolo tereti, tomentoso, laminis submembrana- 
ceils, ovalibus, basi rotundatis apicem versus sensim angustatis, obtusis, 
mucronatis, supra parce adpresse villosis costa venisque impressis, subtus 
molliter pubescentibus costa venisque prominentibus; racemis axillaribus, 
subcymosis; pedunculis primariis, secundariis, pedicellisque bracteolis 2 
deciduis suffultis fulvescenti-pubescentibus; floribus 3-7, albis (?); sepalis 
aequalibus, ovatis, apice subrotundatis, 2 exterioribus utrinque, interiorum 
partibus expositis fulvescenti-pubescentibus; corolla calyce multo longiora, 
tubo brevi, ventricoso, basi intus villoso, limbo late infundibuliformi, plicato, 
costulis exterioribus extus dense fulvo-pilosis demum glaberrimo, in aetate 
utrinque 5-fisso; staminibus corollae basi insertis, filamentis glabris apice 
incurvis; antheris oblongis basi emarginatis, apicem versus angustatis, dorsi- 
fixis; ovario ovoideo, fulvo-pubescenti, disco annulari glabro cincto; stylis 
2, brevissimis, basi vix connatis, glabris; stigmatibus globosis; capsula ovoideo- 
oblonga, calyce persistente glabrescente suffulta; seminibus ovoideis, plano- 

compressis, margine pilis fulvescentibus longissimis dense coronatis, demum 
parce pubescentibus. | 

Petiolus 1.5—-2 cm. longus; laminae 7-10 cm. longae, 4-5 cm. latae. Racemi 
6-6.5 cm. longi. Pedunculi primari 2-3 cm. longi; secundari 0.6—-1 cm.; 
pedicelli circa 1.2 ecm. longi. Sepala 6 mm. longa, 4 mm. lata. Corolla 
1.3 cm. longa, tubo circa 3 mm. longo. Filamenta circiter 3 mm. longa; 
antherae 3mm. longae. Ovarium plus minusve 3.5 mm. longum; stylus 2-2.5 
mm. longus; stigmata 0.6 mm. diametientia. Capsula 1.6 mm. longa; semina 
6 mm. longa, 5 mm. lata, pilis 1-1.2 cm. longis marginata. 

PortuGuEsa: Calvario de Guanare, 200 m., on arid, bushy slopes; flowers 
and fruits December 28, 1925 (Pittier 12046, TYPE). 


Breweria longepaniculata Pittier, sp. nov. 


Volubilis, ramis sarmentosis subfistulosis; foliis petiolatis, coriaceis; petio- 
lis brevibus, canaliculatis, minute adpresse pubescentibus; laminis ovalibus 
oblongisve, basi rotundatis, apice obtusis retusisve mucronulatis, supra 
plaberrimis minute reticulatis subnitidis, subtus sordide cinereo- -tomentellis, 
nervo supra impresso subtus prominente, venis adscendentibus supra tenuiter 
impressis subtus utrinque prominulis; paniculis axillaribus, apice aphyllo 
excepto foliosis; cymis pedunculatis bis trifidis ferrugineo-pubescentibus; 
pedunculo petiolum subaequante vel breviori; pedicellis calyx longioribus; 
bracteis apiculatis brevibus; sepalis ovatis, obtusis, coriaceis, duobus exter- 
ioribus extus dense ferrugineo-pubescentibus, demum plus minusve parce 
pubescentibus glabrescentibusve; corolla tubuloso-campanulata, basi coarc- 
tata, extus dense fulvo-villosa; staminibus basi villoso-lanatis, antheris ovatis, 
cordatis; disco crasso, cupulato: ovarlo apice villoso; stylis duobus basi 
breviter connatis demum liberis filiformibus; stigmatibus capitatis subbilo- 

ulatis 

Petiolus 0.5-2.5 cm. longus; laminae 3-10 cm. longae, 2-6 cm. latae. 
Paniculae circa 25 cm. longae; cymarum pedunculi 0.5-1.2 cm. longi; pedi- 


1 Received February 23, 1927. 


JUNE 4, 1927 PITTIER: CONVOLVULACEAE 285 


celli 5-8 mm. longi. Sepala 6-7 mm. longa, 4-4.5 mm. lata. Corolla circa 
1.8 cm. longa. Genitalia inclusa. 

TrusitLo: Moron Hill near Valera 600, m., in bushes; fl. Nov. 18, 1922. 
( Pittier 10733, TYPE). 

No South American species of Brewerza seem to have been described in 
recent years, and it had not been expected that the genus reached so far 
north. I feel no hesitation, however, in placing the above described plants in 
this apparently not well known group, of which they represent two distinct 
types, the one with axillary, cymose, the other with terminal, paniculate, 
inflorescences. The affinities of the first species are with Breweria Langs- 
dorffii, except that the flowers are not solitary and the general aspect of the 
plant resembles more that of Prevostea ferruginea. The remarkable seeds, 
with their dense fulvous crown of very long hairs, and the details of the flowers 
leave no doubt as to the generic identity of that plant; while certain structural 
analogies show that B. longepaniculata is really congeneric with B. mollis. 
A manuscript note on the sheet of the former plant states that ‘this plant 
seems to be the same as H. H. Smith’s n. 876 from Santa Marta (Colombia) 
but it is distinct from Juan de la Cruz nn. 1372 or 1358 in the U. 8. National 
Herbarium.” 

Aniseia trichantha Pittier, sp. nov. 


Volubilis, caule subcrasso primum densissime cano-villoso, in aetate plus 
minusve adpresse villosulo, foliis ovatis oblongisve, basi acutis subacutisve 
apice late obtusis interdum subacutis utrinque mucronatis supra glabris 
glabrescentibusve, subtus primum creberrime sericeo-pubescentibus demum 
parce pilosulis; petiolo modice crasso, canaliculato, villoso; stipulis linearibus, 
brevibus, cito deciduis; pedunculis axillaribus, validis, tomentoso-villosis, 
2-3-floribus, folia subaequantibus longioribusve; pedicellis brevibus dense 
villosis basi bracteis linearibus pubescentibus deciduis suffultis, apice bi- 
bracteolatis, bracteolis ovato-lanceolatis deciduis; sepalis subcoriaceis ovatis 
ovato-oblongisve, ciliatis, extus in partibus expositis cano-villosis, in sicco 
nigrescentibus, interioribus brevioribus; corolla alba infundibuliformi, in sicco 
nigrescenti, extus dense fulvo-pilosa; staminibus glabris; disco annulari, 
glabro; ovario apice dense fulvo-piloso, stylo gracili glabro, stigmatibus 2, 
ovalibus, muricatis. Capsula (juv.) ovoidea, dense fulvo-villosa. 

Petioli 0.7-1 em. longi; laminae adultae 2.5-5 cm. longae, 1-2.5 cm. latae; 
mucro usque ad 2 mm. longus. Pedunculus 3.5-6 em. longus; pedicelli 
2-7 mm. longi. Sepala 6-8 mm. longa, 5-7 mm. lata. Corolla plus minusve 
2cm. longa. Filamenta circa 4mm. longa. Pistillum 1.5 cm. longum. 

CoseDES: Between El Tinaco and San Carlos, in low, damp places along 
river, flowers and young fruits December 25, 1925 ( Prttzer 12004, Typx). 


On account of its relatively large flowers, Anzseza trichantha would hold an 
intermediary position between Meissner’s Grandiflorae and Parviflorae.? 
It is distinguished from all other representatives of the genus reported from 
Venezuela by its villous corolla. The following is a key to the species which 
have been collected in the Venezuela. 


2 Flora brasiliensis, 7: 318. 1869. 


236 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


Corolla white, glabrous, over 2 cm. long; leaves oblong-lanceate 
1. A. martinicensis Choisy 
Corolla 2 em. long or less. 
Corolla white, densely pilose without, 2. cm. long; leaves ovate or oblong, 
the base more or less acute. 2. A. trichantha Pittier 
Corolla blue, glabrous, 1.2-1.7 cm. long; leaves more or less cordate or at 
least broadly rounded at the base. 
Sepals glabrous, inflorescences many-flowered. 3. A. velloziana Choisy 
Sepals tomentose; inflorescences 1-3-flowered. 4. A. heterantha Choisy 


Merremia asterotricha Pittier, sp. nov. 


Scandens volubilisve, caulibus, petiolis pedunculisque dense stellato-tomen- 
tosis canescentibusque; foliis distincte trifoliolatis; petiolo laminis breviore, 
anguste canaliculato; foliolis petiolulatis, membranaceis, petiolulis brevibus, 
canaliculatis, laminis ovali-oblongis, lateralibus basi inaequalibus semi-ro- 
tundatis, apice obtusis subacutisve mucronatis, supra stellato-pubescentibus, 
costa venisque impressis, subtus dense stellato-tomentellis cinerascentibus 
costa venisque prominentibus; stipulis ovatis, obtusis, deciduis; inflorescentiis 
axillaribus, cymosis, saepe foliosis; pedunculis primariis folia aequantibus 
longioribusve, plerumque ebracteatis, pedunculis secundarus tertiarlisque 
bracteis foliaceis, petiolulatis lanceolatis suffultis; pedicellis elongatis, gracil- 
limis; bracteolis lineari-lanceolatis; sepalis membranaceis, oblongo-ovatis, 
apice obtusis, mucronulatis, exterioribus 2 tomentello-cinerescentibus, inter- 
ioribus gradatim angustioribus glaberrimis subpellucidis; corolla (alba?) calyce 
duplo longiora; genitalibus inclusis; filamentis basi pilosiusculis; pollinis 
granulis laevibus, trisulcatis; ovario ovoideo, dense canescenti-villoso; 
stylo tenuissimo staminibus duplo superante; capsula desiderata. 

Petioli 4.5-5 em. longi; petioluli 2-8 mm. longi; foliolorum laminae 6-13.5 
cm. longae, 2.5-5 cm. latae. Stipulae 3-5 mm. longae. Pedunculi primari 
9.5-11 em., secundarii 3-5.5 cm., tertiarii 1.2-2 cm. longi; pedicelli 0.6—1.7 
em. longi. Bracteae 1.5-2 cm., bracteolae 0.8-1.2 cm. longae. Sepala 
circa 10 mm. longa, 2.5-3.5 mm. lata. Corolla 2. cm. longa. 

Lara: Along the Turbio River near Barquisimeto; flowers June 1, 1925 
(J. Saer d’ Héguert 248, TYPE). 


Merremia nervosa Pittier, sp. nov. 


Volubilis, caulibus subtenuibus, striatis, cinereo-tomentellis; folis parvis, — 
petiolatis, trifoliolatis, petiolis sulcatis, pedunculis pedicellisque cinereo- 
tomentosis; petiolulis brevissimis, laminis (terminalibus majoribus) ovalibus 
basi in petiolulum attenuatis apice obtusis subacutisve mucronulatis, supra 
minute velutinis, nervo venisque impressis, subtus cinereo-velutinis, nervo 
venisque valde prominentibus; pedunculis axillaribus, paucifloris, bracteis 
linearibus brevibus deeiduis suffultis; pedicellis subumbellatis, quam pedun- 
culus multo brevioribus; bracteolis lineari-lanceolatis persistentibus; sepalis 
membranaceis, ovato-oblongis, apice indistincte emarginulatis vel interdum 
mucronulatis, 2. exterioribus stellato-furfurascentibus, interioribus glabris 
vel partim pubescentibus; corolla alba, glaberrima; genitalibus inclusis; 
filamentis basi parce villosulis; antheris oblongis, basi cordatis; pollinis 
granulis laevibus; ovario dense cano-villoso; stylo filiformi, glabro, staminibus 
subaequilong1. 

Petioli 0.5-1 em. longi; petioluli subnulli; lamina terminalis 3-4 cm. longa, 
1.6—2 cm. lata, laterales 2 cm. longae, 1.3-1.6 cm. latae. Pedunculi 3-4 cm., 


JUNE 4, 1927 PITTIER: CONVOLVULACEAE 287 


pedicelli circa 1 cm. longi. Bracteolae 0.7-1 cm. longae. Sepala 9-13 mm. 
longa, 6-7 mm. lata. Corolla 2.5 cm. longa. 

Lara: Cerro Gordo near Barquisimeto, in arid places; flowers October 
1926 (J. Saer d’ Héguert 294, TYPE). 


On account of their trifoliolate leaves and stellate indument, these two 
species constitute a natural group among the Venezuelan Merremzae. 


KEY TO THE SPECIES OF MERREMIA KNOWN FROM VENEZUBLA 


Herbs, erect or hardly voluble 
Leaves wanting and replaced with oblong or subolese scales: corolla white 
M. aturensis Hallier 
Leaves present, short petiolate, lineal-ovate; ih at the base; corolla 
yellowish 29M; maypurensis Hallier 
Scandent or voluble vines 
Leaves simple, distinctly and broadly cordiform; corolla yellow, 2.5 cm. 
long 3. M. umbellata Hallier 
Leaves 3 foliolate; indument stellate; corolla white 
Leaflets oval-oblong, distinctly petiololate, the blade 6—13.5 cm. long 
4. M. asterotricha Pittier 
Leaflets oval, almost sessile, the blades 3-4 cm. long 
5. M. nervosa Pittier 
Leaves digitate, with 5 segments; corolla white 
Sepals 6-13 mm. long; plant glabrous; leaflets lanceolate, often toothed 
6. M. quinquefolia Hallier 
Sepals 17-25 mm. long; corolla about 4 cm. long; leaflets entire 
Leaves appressed-pilose; sepals hirsute at the base, the exterior ones 


acute and longest; corolla 3 cm. long 7. M. aegyptia Urban 
Leaves glabrous; sepals glabrous, obtuse, the exterior ones shortest; 
corolla 4 cm. long 8. M. glabra Hallier 


Ipomoea pseudo-Linum Pittier sp. nov. 


(Sect. Orthipomoea, subsect. Lobatae.)—Glabra, erecta, caulibus solitariis 
virgatis simplicibus, foliosis, foliis sessiliibus usque ad basin palmatim pluri- 
partitis, segmentis filiformibus, subteretibus, exterioribus plerumque 2-4- 
fidis; floribus longe spicatis, axillaribus, pedunculatis; pedunculis solitariis, 
quam fola brevioribus, basi bracteis 2 minimis lanceolatis suffultis; sepalis 
membranaceis, lanceolatis ovato-lanceolatisve, apiculatis, exterioribus extus 
squamoso-papillosis, brevioribus angustioribusque; corolla infundibuliformi, 
rosea, glabra; staminibus glaberrimis, antheris ovato-lanceolatis basi emar- 
ginatis; pollinis granulis muricato-spinulosis; disco annulari, angusto; pistillo 
glabro, ovario biloculari, loculis biovulatis; stylo incluso, stigmate capitato, 
bilobulato, papilloso; capsula parva, glabra, laevia; seminibus 4, laevibus. 

Caulis 40-50 em. altus, teres. Foliorum segmenta plus minusve fasciculata 
1.5-2 ecm. longa. Internodia 1-1.5 em. longa. Pedunculi 7 mm. longi. 
Calyx 6 mm. longus, lobis exterioribus brevioribus. Corolla 2.5 em. longa. 

Savannas on the slopes above Caracas, 950—13C0 m., in small colonies; fl. 
spine 1927 (Pitter 7279, TYPE); same locality, fl. June 17, 1917 (Puttier 
7218). 


This pretty species, which looks like certain Linum species, seems to be 
rather scarce. It is evidently very closely related to Ipomoea ericoides 


288 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


Meissn. described from the state of Goyaz in southern Brazil, but differs 
in the absence of indument, the comparatively long pedunculate flowers with 
short calyx and pink corolla and the distinct division of the leaves. Another 
species somewhat like it and probably closely related is Ipomoea capillacea 
Don, of Mexico, but in our plant the peduncles are shorter, the calyx longer, 
and the corolla not short, tubulous and red, but four times longer than the 
calyx, funnel-shaped and pink. 


BOTAN Y.—WNew South American species of Liabum.! S. F. BuaKg, 
Bureau of Plant Industry. 


The strictly American genus Liabum is, taken in its broad sense, the 
largest American genus of the Senecioneae aside from Senecio itself. 
About 23 species occur in Mexico and Central America, 1 in the West 
Indies, and the remainder, some 89 species (including those here de- 
scribed), in the Andes from Venezuela to Peru, Bolivia, and Argentina. 
The number in the different countries is approximately as follows: 
Venezuela, 2; Colombia, 19; Ecuador, 32; Peru, 38; Bolivia, 13; 
Argentina, 4. The new species here described have been distinguished 
in the course of identification of the large amount of material of the 
genus accumulated at the United States National Herbarium in recent 
years, principally from the collections of Dr. F. W. Pennell and Mr. 
E. P. Killip in Colombia, Prof. A. S. Hitchcock and Dr. J. N. Rose in 
Ecuador, Mr. J. Francis Macbride in Peru, and Dr. Otto Buchtien in 
Bolivia. The preparation of a working key to the South American 
species has been greatly aided by the acquisition of photographs, 
fragments, and notes of typical specimens at the herbaria at Geneva, 
Paris, and Kew by the writer in 1925, through the courtesy of the 
curators of the herbaria mentioned, and through the loan by Dr. J. K. 
Small of several type specimens from the herbarium of the New York 
Botanical Garden. 


Liabum arthrothrix Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Chrysactinium; scapose, 1-headed; leaves rosulate, lanceolate or 
oblanceolate, small, coriaceous, callous-toothed, above bright green and 
densely pilose with many-celled yellowish hairs, beneath densely white- 
tomentose; involucre 8-11 mm. high. 

Rhizome up to 4 cm. long, horizontal; ae crowded in a basal rosette, 
without evident internodes, 1-5.5 em. long (including the petioliform margined 
base, this 2.5 em. long to nearly wanting), 3-8 mm. wide, acute, long-cuneate 
at base, callous-pointed and with 1-8 callous-pointed teeth on each side above 
middle, apparently not tomentose above even when young, obscurely tripli- 
nerved, the lateral veins concealed beneath by the tomentum, the costa 
usually evident; scape solitary, siender, 14-28 cm. high, naked, arachnoid- 
tomentose, pilose throughout with many-celled purplish hairs; head 1.8-3 


1 Received. March 21, 1927. 


JUNE 4, 1927 BLAKE: SOUTH AMERICAN SPECIES LIABUM 289 


em. wide; involucre hemispheric, about 5-seriate, strongly graduate, appressed, 
the outermost phyllaries lance-triangular to ovate-triangular, obtuse to sub- 
acuminate, subcoriaceous, scarcely margined, 3-nerved, obscurely ciliolate, 
0.6—-1.6 mm. wide, the middle ones lance-linear, acuminate to obtuse and 
apiculate, 3-nerved, thinner, narrowly scarious-margined, obscurely pilose- 
ciliate, the innermost linear, acuminate, 1—3-nerved, thin, 0.6-1 mm. wide, 
all often purplish-tinged above, essentially glabrous dorsally; rays about 30, 
yellow, the tube 3-4.5 mm. long, pilose with many-celled hairs, the lamina 
linear-elliptic, 4-nerved, 3-toothed, 10-14.5 mm. long, 1.5-2.5 mm. wide; 
disk corollas yellow, very sparsely short-pilose toward apex of tube, clavate- 
glandular on teeth, 6.8 mm. long (tube 2.8 mm., throat slender-funnelform, 
2.4 mm., teeth 1.6 mm. long); young achenes pilose; pappus simple, pure 
white, about 4.5 mm. long, the bristles finely hispidulous, not dilated apically. 

Ecuapor: Paramo of Lavaguro, Prov. Loxa, Sept. 1864, Jameson (U.8.); 
Yausai, alt. 3700 m., April 1904, Rivet 602 (Par.), 604 (Par.); paramo, be- 
tween Ofia and Cuenca, Prov. Azuay, alt. 2700-3300 m., 9-10 Sept. 1923, 
Hitchcock 21645 (type no. 1,195,670, U. S. Nat. Herb.). 


Distinguished from L. acaule (H. B. K.) Less. and L. rosulatwm Hieron. 
by the articulate hairs of the upper leaf surface, and from L. tenuzor, described 
below, by its smaller coriaceous leaves which show no sign of tomentum above 
even when young. 


Liabum tenuior Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Chrysactinium; scapose, 1-headed; leaves rosulate, lanceolate or 
oblanceolate, medium-sized, papery, callous-denticulate, above dull green, 
at first thinly arachnoid, rather densely pilose with persistent many-celled 
hairs, evidently 3—-5-plinerved, beneath canescently and persistently arach- 
noid-tomentose; involucre 14 mm. high. 

Rhizome short; leaves about 10 in a basal rosette, 5-7.5 cm. long (including 
the margined petioliform base, this 1-2 cm. long), 1-1.5 em. wide, acute, 
callous-pointed, long-acuminate at base, with 2-5 remote pairs of dark cal- 
lous teeth (about 0.5 mm. long), comparatively thin, reticulate-veined, the 
veins conspicuous in transmitted light; scape slender, naked, 43 cm. high, 
arachnoid-tomentose, glabrescent below, above the middle pilose with deli- 
cate, purplish, many-celled hairs, the base of involucre pilose with many-celled 
yellowish hairs; head about 3 cm. wide; involucre hemispheric, about 5-seriate, 
strongly graduate, appressed, the outermost phyllaries triangular, obtuse to 
acute, 3-nerved, with greenish center and narrow subscarious margins, slightly 
ciliate, 1.5-2 mm. wide, the middle ones narrowly oblong-lanceolate, 1.8-2 
mm. wide, acute to acuminate, 3—5-nerved, the innermost linear, acuminate, 
1—3-nerved, 1 mm. wide; rays apparently about 30, yellow, short-pilose with 
many-celled hairs toward apex of tube, the tube 5 mm. long, the lamina ellip- 
tic-linear, 4-nerved, obtusish, scarcely denticulate, 16 mm. long, 1.5 mm. wide; 
disk corollas yellow, pilose on tube especially toward apex, essentially glabrous 
on teeth, 8 mm. long (tube very slender, 4 mm. long, throat slender-cylindric, 
2 mm., teeth linear, acutish, 2 mm.); young achenes pilose, 1.6 mm. long; 
pappus simple, pure white, 6 mm. long, the bristles slender, hispidulous, not 
dilated apically. 

Kcuapor: Casitagua, May 1903, Rivet 478 (type, herb. Par.; photo. and 
fragm., U.S.). 


290 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


Closely allied to ZL. arthrothriz, but with longer involucre and much thinner 
leaves in which the reticulation is evident by transmitted light, while those of 
L. arthrothriz are thick and opaque. The disk corollas of the two species also 
differ in shape and pubescence. 


Liabum bicolor Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Chrysactinium; herbaceous (?), densely whitish-tomentose except 
on involucre and upper leaf surface; stems decumbent, branching, leafy 
below, terminated by long monocephalous peduncles; leaves oblanceolate, 
subentire, coriaceous, soon green and glabrate above; involucre 11 mm. 
high. 

Leafy portion of stem about 10 cm. long or more, sometimes dichotomously 
branched, slender, striate; internodes 0.7—4 cm. long; leaves opposite, oblanceo- 
late or narrowly obovate, 2-4.5 cm. long (including the petioliform margined 
base, this 1.5 cm. long or less), 5-9 mm. wide, obtusish, callous-apiculate, 
entire or with few remote callous teeth, above at first arachnoid-tomentose, 
quickly glabrate and dark green, not shining,beneath very densely and thickly 
whitish-arachnoid-tomentose, obscurely triplinerved; peduncles solitary, 
naked, erect, about 20 cm. high, slender, arachnoid-tomentose, pilose with 
delicate, many-celled, purplish hairs; head about 2.8 em. wide; involucre 
hemispheric, about 5-seriate, strongly graduate, appressed, the outermost 
phyllaries triangular, acute, firm, 1-1.5 mm. wide, the middle ones lance- 
linear, 3-nerved, the innermost linear, 1-3-nerved, acuminate, 0.7-1 mm. 
wide, narrowly subscarious-margined, all obscurely ciliolate, with purplish 
tips; rays about 30 or more, yellow, the tube pilose above with several-celled 
hairs, 3 mm. long, the lamina elliptic-linear, 4-nerved, entire, obtuse, 12 mm. 
long, 1.3 mm. wide; disk corollas yellow, pilose with several-celled hairs 
on tube and base of throat, sparsely clavate-glandular toward tip of teeth, 
7.3 mam. long (tube slender, 4 mm., throat slender-campanulate, 1.3 mm., 
teeth nearly linear, acutish, 2 mm.); young achenes pilose; pappus simple, 
pure white, 5 mm. long, the bristles hispidulous, not dilated apically. 

Ecvuapor: Mountains, Prov. Loxa, Sept. 1864, Jameson (type no. 534900, 
U.S. Nat. Herb.) 


Evidently closely allied to the Peruvian L. caulescens Hieron. The latter 
is described as having oblong-cuneate subcoriaceous leaves and 1-nerved 
middle phyllaries. 


Liabum amphothrix Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Chrysactinium; caespitose, whitish-tomentose throughout except on 
involucre; stems decumbent, somewhat branched, terminating in elongate 
monocephalous peduncles, leafy below; leaves lanceolate to nearly linear, 
above pilose with several-celled hairs and persistently or fugaciously arach- 
noid-tomentose, beneath whitish-arachnoid-tomentose; involucre 9-12 mm. 
high. 

Herbaceous or sutteuticnlecs: stems several, often dichotomously branched, 
the leafy portion 2-20 em. long, slender; internodes mostly 0.5-2.5 em. long; 
leaves opposite, 2.5-5.5 em. long (including the petioliform base), 3-10 mm. 
wide, repandly few-denticulate or sometimes subentire, acute or acuminate, 
callous-apiculate, papery to subcoriaceous, triplinerved, the margin some- 
times revolute, the upper surface densely pilose with several-celled persistent 
yellowish hairs (on the upper leaves sometimes represented only by subsessile 


JUNE 4, 1927 ' BLAKE! SOUTH AMERICAN SPECIES LIABUM 291 


glands or even these nearly wanting), and at first arachnoid-tomentose, the 
tomentum often nearly or quite deciduous; peduncles solitary at tips of stems 
and branches, slender, naked, 13-30 cm. high, arachnoid-tomentose and 
especially above pilose with delicate many-celled purplish hairs; heads 3-3.5 
em. wide, decurved after flowering; involucre hemispheric, about 5-seriate, 
strongly graduate, appressed, the outermost phyllaries ovate or oblong- 
ovate, 1.5-2.8 mm. wide, obtuse, callous-apiculate, 3-nerved, very thinly 
arachnoid-ciliate, sometimes arachnoid-tomentose when young, the middle 
ones lance-oblong, acute or acuminate, callous-pointed, 3-nerved, the inner- 
most linear or lance-linear, acuminate, 1—3-nerved, more broadly subscarious- 
margined, all obscurely glandular-puberulous on back above or essentially 
glabrous, often purplish above; rays about 30, yellow, the tube pilose with 
many-celled hairs, 3-4 mm. long, the lamina elliptic-linear, 4-nerved, 2-3- 
denticulate, 9-16 mm. long, 1.7-2.5 mm. wide; disk corollas yellow, pilose 
on tube above with many-celled hairs, clavate-glandular on teeth and some- 
times on throat, 6.5—7 mm. long (tube slender, about 3.3 mm., throat campanu- 
late, 1.5 mm., teeth nearly linear, acutish, with papillose apical crest, 1.8- 
2.3 mm.); receptacle paleaceous-fimbrillate, the fimbrillae about 1.2 mm. long; 
young achenes silky-pilose; mature achenes obovoid, somewhat compressed, 
2.3 mm. long, 1 mm. wide, 8-9-ribbed, pilose especially above with white, 
brown-based hairs, densely verrucose especially on ribs below; pappus nearly 
simple, about 2-seriate, pure white, somewhat unequal, 5 mm. long, the bristles 
hispidulous, not thickened above. 

Peru: In deep grass of slopes, Mito, Dept. Hudnuco, alt. 2745 m., 8-22 
July 1922, Macbride & Featherstone 1665 (type no. 518161, herb. Field Mus.; 
dupl. in U. 8. Nat. Herb.); sunny grassy swale, Chinchapalea, about 13 km. 
above Mito, alt. 2900 m., 16-27 July 1922, Macbride & Featherstone 1591 
(Field, U. 8.); among rocks, about 24 km. northeast of Hudnuco, alt. 3965 m., 
12-22 June 1922, Macbride & Featherstone 2157 (Field, U.S8.). 


Allied to L. caulescens Hieron. and L. bicolor Blake, but distinguished by 
the persistent jointed pubescence of the upper leaf surface, which is sometimes 
lacking on the uppermost leaves. No. 1591 is a form with leaves only about 
3mm. wide. 

Liabum perfoliatum Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Starkea (?); stem, peduncles, and lower leaf surface tomentose; 
leaves elliptic or ovate-elliptic, crenate, green and bullate above, connate- 
perfoliate; heads small, in umbels of about 3 at apex of elongate peduncles, 
slender-pedicelled; involucre 6-7 mm. high, strongly graduate, the phyllaries 
oval to linear-elliptic, obtuse, appressed. 

Perennial herb, 60 cm. high; stem essentially simple, subterete, sometimes 
weakly grooved, densely grayish-tomentose, bearing about 10 pairs of leaves 
and 1—3 terminal peduncles; leaves 4.5-11 cm. long, 1.8—4 cm. wide, acuminate 
to a usually obtuse apex, cuneately and gradually or sometimes abruptly 
narrowed to the connate bases (these 2-7 mm. wide), crenate-dentate (teeth 
low, rounded, crenulate, 5-7 mm. apart), thin-papery, above deep green, 
quickly glabrous, strongly and beautifully bullate, beneath densely whitish- 
or grayish-tomentose, featherveined, the lateral veins about 8-10 pairs, not 
prominent; peduncles slender, 10-16 cm. long, rather thinly tomentose and 
finely pilose chiefly above with jointed purplish hairs; bracts minute, 2 mm. 
long; pedicels erect, 1-5.5 em. long, naked, normally monocephalous; heads 
2 cm. wide; disk 7 mm. high; involucre campanulate, 5-6-seriate, thinly arach- 


292 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


noid, glabrescent or glabrate, the outermost phyllaries ovate or oval, about 1 
mm. long, rounded, the next ovate to oval, rounded, with greenish 3-nerved 
center and narrow substramineous margin, about 1.5 mm. wide, the inner 
linear-elliptic or linear, obtusish or acutish, substramineous with greenish 
midnerve; receptacle alveolate, the alveolar margins subentire, about 0.2 
mm. high; rays about 15, yellow, the tube and base of back pilose, the lamina 
oblong, about 10 mm. long, 2 mm. wide; disk corollas (immature) compara- 
tively few, yellow, sparsely pilose on tube, hispidulous at apex of teeth; 
young achenes about 7-ribbed, sparsely pubescent, 0.7 mm. long; pappus 
yellowish white, of about 12 unequal, flattened, fragile, hispidulous bristles 
1.5-2.5 mm. long, and perhaps also a few short squamellae. 

CotomsiA: In forest, “La Gallera,’’? Micay Valley, Dept. El Cauca, Cor- 
dillera Occidental, alt. 2000-2200 m., 1 July 1922, Killip 7952 (type no. 
LAO SN 7 MUL SseNiat. clerk?) 


A most distinct species of the L. grandiflorum group, readily recognized 
by its leaves, inflorescence, and involucre. The disk corollas, achenes, and 
pappus are too immature to be described satisfactorily. 


Liabum amplexans Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Starkea; herb; stem, lower leaf surface, peduncle, and pedicels 
tomentose; leaves broadly ovate, rough above, triplinerved, abruptly narrowed 
into short, broadly winged, connate-clasping petioles; peduncle solitary, 


terminal, elongate, the heads medium-sized, about 10 in a subsimple umbel-— 


late cyme; involucre 9-11 mm. high, the phyllaries lance-subulate, acuminate. 

Stem apparently decumbent at base, obtusely about 6-angled, 3 mm. 
thick, below thinly arachnoid-tomentose and densely pilose with jointed 
purplish hairs, above obscurely jointed-pilose; lower internodes 1.5-5 cm. 
long, the uppermost one 15 cm.; leaves in few pairs, the larger broadly cor- 
date-ovate, the blades 4.5—-7.5 cm. long, 3.5-5.5 em. wide, abruptly contracted 
into broadly winged connate-clasping petioles 7-15 mm. long and 4-10 mm. 
wide, acute, closely serrate with callous-mucronate teeth (the mucros slender, 
1 mm. long), firm papery, above dull deep green, subbullate, densely-hispidu- 
lous with jointed yellowish hairs, and with a slight fugacious arachnoid tomen- 
tum, beneath densely whitish-tomentose, along veins densely pilose with 
jointed yellowish brown hairs, triplinerved from base of blade and reticulate, 
the veins and veinlets prominulous beneath; uppermost pair of leaves smaller, 
3 cm. long; peduncle 18 cm. long; principal bracts narrow, bladeless, 1 cm. 
long; pedicels mostly 2.5-4.5 em. long; involucre hemispheric, about 6-seriate, 
strongly graduate, the phyllaries triangular-subulate to linear, acuminate or 
attenuate, l-nerved, 1-1.4 mm. wide, erect, thinly arachnoid, glabrate or 
glabrescent, ciliolate, the inner puberulous above, the outer purplish, the 
inner substramineous; receptacle alveolate, the alveolar margins toothed, 
about 0.3 mm. high; rays about 32, yellow, pilose on tube and base of back, 
the tube 3.5 mm. long, the lamina linear, 4-nerved, bidenticulate, 6.5 mm. 
long, 1 mm. wide; disk corollas numerous, yellow, glabrous except for the 
apically hispidulous teeth, 6.7 mm. long (tube 3.4 mm., throat campanulate, 
1.3 mm., teeth apically thickened, 2 mm.); immature achenes 10-ribbed, pi- 
lose, 1.2 mm. long; pappus yellowish white, the inner bristles hispidulous, 
obscurely or not dilated apically, 5 mm. long, the outer few, setiform, 0.5—-1 
mm. long. 

Ecuapor: Vicinity of Las Juntas, 29 Sept. 1918, Rose, Pachano, & Hite 
23232 (type no. 1,023,386, U.S. Nat. Herb.). 


JUNE 4, 1927 BLAKE: SOUTH AMERICAN SPECIES LIABUM 293 


Allied to L. grandiflorum (H. B. K.) Less., in which the leaves are smooth 
to the touch above and the involucre 13 mm. high, and to LD. weberbaueri 
Muschl., which is described as having the leaves arachnoid-tomentose and 
glabrate above, the involucre shorter and phyllaries broader, and the rays 
longer. Hitchcock 21452, from between Loja and San Lucas, may be a poorly 
developed form of L. amplexans. 


Liabum subcirrhosum Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Andromachia; plant densely whitish-arachnoid-tomentose except 
on upper leaf surface and involucre; leaves triangular-ovate, greenish above, 
borne on slender, very narrowly margined, connate-auriculate petioles; heads 
medium-sized, in small rather close cymes; involucre 11-12 mm. high, the 
phyllaries all subulate, densely glandular-pilose above, attenuate, the inner 
subcirrhous-tipped. 

Apparently herbaceous, ‘‘80 cm. high; stem terete, 4 mm. thick, hollow, 
branched above; internodes mostly 4-8 cm. long; leaves opposite, the upper 
alternate; petioles 2.5-3 cm. long, abruptly dilated at base into connate mu- 
cronate-denticulate auricles 4-7 mm. high; blades 6-7.5 em. long, 3.5—-4 cm. 
wide, acuminate, at base narrowly or broadly cuneate, mucronulate along 
margin (mucros slender, callous-tipped, 0.6 mm. high, 3-10 mm. apart) 
and obscurely repand, thin-papery, above thinly arachnoid and puberulent, 
glabrescent, beneath densely white-arachnoid-tomentose, subtriplinerved 
(the veins about 6 pairs, the lowest pair somewhat stronger than the others) ; 
heads about 2.5 cm. wide, in irregular cymose clusters of 3-8 at apex of stem 
and branches, the densely tomentose pedicels mostly 2-4 cm. long; involucre 
about 5-seriate, strongly graduate, arachnoid-tomentose at base, densely 
glandular-pilose with yellowish white (or in the outer phyllaries purplish) 
hairs above, the phyllaries all 1 mm. wide or less, subulate to narrowly lin- 
ear-subulate, with loose attenuate tips (in the innermost subcirrhous), the 
outer purplish, the inner greenish stramineous, the middle ones 3-nerved; 
receptacle merely foveolate; rays about 50, yellow, pilose on tube and base of 
back, the tube 3 mm. long, the lamina linear, 4-nerved, 3-denticulate, 9 mm. 
long, 1.2 mm. wide; disk corollas numerous, yellow, slenderly cylindric- 
funnelform, sparsely pilose on tube and throat, pilose-tufted at apex of teeth, 
6.4 mm. long (tube 2.2 mm., throat scarcely distinguished, 1.8 mm., teeth 
2.4mm); achenes densely hispidulous, 1.8 mm. long; pappus double, brownish 
white, the inner of 20 or more fragile, strongly hispidulous, not apically 
dilated bristles 6 mm. long, the outer of about as many persistent blunt 
lacerate squamellae about 0.3 mm. long. 

ARGENTINA: Rare, La Playa, Dept. Andalgala, Prov. Catamarca, 12.2. 
1917, P. Jérgensen 1673 (type no. 922182, U. S. Nat. Herb.). 


Allied to L. candidum and L. auriculatum Griseb., especially the former, 
from which it is distinguished by its considerably narrower phyllaries with 
extremely attenuate tips. The three may eventually require a separate 
section for their reception. 

Liabum excelsum (Poepp.) Blake. 


Andromachia excelsa Poepp. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 44. 1845. 


This species has not been recognized among the material examined, but 
from description seems to be distinct. It is customary to cite the new plants 


294 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


described in all three volumes of the ‘‘Nova Genera ac Species” as of Poep- 
pig & Endlicher. The title pages of the first two volumes bear the names of 
both botanists, but that of volume 3 the name of Poeppig only, so that it 
seems necessary to attribute to Poeppig alone the authorship of the new 
genera and species in this volume. 


Liabum mikanioides Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Oligactis; scandent shrub; stem and branches densely short-pilose 
with jointed brownish hairs and obsoletely arachnoid-tomentose; leaves ovate 
or oval-ovate, serrulate, coriaceous, glabrous above, densely tomentose be- 
neath, short-petioled; heads small, 10-flowered, subsessile, very numerous 
and subspicate on the wide-spreading branches of axillary and terminal pyra- 
midal panicles. 

Stem subterete, striate, solid, brown-pithed, 3-5 mm. thick; leaves oppo- 
site; petioles very stout, 8-10 mm. long, naked, not auriculate, above flattish 
and persistently sordid-tomentose, beneath rounded and glabrate; blades 
6-11 em. long, 3.5-6.5 cm. wide, acute or obtusish, broadly cuneate-rounded 
at base, callous-serrulate except toward base (teeth acutish, 0.5 mm. high, 
2-8 mm. apart), above deep dull green, quickly glabrate and smooth except 
usually along costa, beneath densely tomentose with brownish-white hairs, 
featherveined, the chief lateral veins 8-10 pairs, prominulous above, pro- 
minulous and glabrescent beneath; panicles about 15 cm. long, 8 em. wide, 
the branches densely floriferous except at base, spreading at a right angle, the 
lower ones subtended by reduced leaves, the heads spicately clustered on 
short branchlets; involucre 5—6-seriate, strongly graduate, 3.5 mm. high, the 
phyllaries ovate (outer) to linear-elliptic, 1 mm. wide or less, obtuse, firm, 
brownish, somewhat darkened toward apex, essentially nerveless, somewhat 
deciduously arachnoid-pilose-ciliate and ciliolate; receptacle alveolate; corol- 
las not seen; achenes about 10-ribbed, pilose, 2 mm. long; pappus yellowish 
white, double, the inner of about 30 hispidulous, apically dilated, somewhat 
flattened bristles 4.5 mm. long, the outer of about 20 narrowly linear acute or 
acuminate squamellae 1.2-1.5 mm. long. 

Cotomstia: “Climbing shrub, flowers yellow,’’ in clearing, “Alaska,” 
above Salento, Cordillera Central, Dept. Caldas, alt. 3000-3400 m., 10-13 
Aug. 1922, Pennell 9706 (type no. 1,141,228, U. S. Nat. Herb.). 


Closely allied to L. sessiliflorum (H. B. K.) Less. In that species the 
branches are persistently arachnoid-tomentose, without jointed hairs, and the 
leaves are elliptic to elliptic-oblong, acuminate, one-quarter to one-half as — 
wide as long. The species is named in reference to its close habital resem- 
blance to such species of Mikania as M. houstoniana (L.) Robinson. 


Liabum subviride Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Munnozia; stem 6-angled, arachnoid, soon glabrate; leaves triangu- 
lar-hastate, soon glabrous and green on both sides, the petioles narrowly 
winged above, connate-auriculate at base; heads small, yellow, very numerous 
in a terminal flattish panicle. 

“Shrub;” stem (above) weak, hollow, about 5 mm. thick, rather obtusely 
6-angled, striate, reddish-brown, sparsely arachnoid, soon nearly completely 
glabrate; leaves opposite; petioles cuneately margined above (or in the upper- 
most leaves nearly to base), 2-4.5 em. long, 4-7 mm. wide above, connate- 
auriculate at base, the appendages reniform, about 3 mm. high; blades 10-11 


A 

y 

‘ 

ae ee er 
(a 


JUNE 4, 1927 BLAKE: SOUTH AMERICAN SPECIES LIABUM 295 


em. long, 7.5-9.5 cm. wide across the wide-spreading, narrow, acuminate 
basal lobes, 3.5-5.5 em. wide just above them, acuminate or attenuate, at 
base subtruncate and then shortly cuneate-decurrent on petiole, repand- 
dentate or serrate (teeth 1-3 mm. high, 3-8 mm. apart), above deep green, 
thinly arachnoid, glabrate or glabrescent, beneath somewhat lighter green, 
thinly arachnoid, quickly glabrate except sometimes along costa, subpapyra- 
ceous, triplinerved from near base, the veins delicate, barely prominulous 
beneath; panicle ternately divided, about 18 cm. long and wide, very many- 
headed, flattish, pilosulous with several-celled brownish hairs, the pedicels very 
slender, mostly 2-2.5 cm. long, the lowest bracts of inflorescence similar to the 
leaves but smaller, the others mostly tiny, subulate-linear; heads about 
42-flowered, about 1.5 em. wide; disk in fruit 7-8 mm. high; involucre 
campanulate-hemispheric, about 4-seriate, strongly graduate, 4-6 mm. high, 
the phyllaries lance-ovate or oblong-ovate (outer 1.3-1.5 mm. wide) to 
narrowly oblong, acute, the outer thinly pilose-ciliate, 3-5-nerved, and with 
short subherbaceous tips, the inner substramineous, essentially glabrous, 
3-nerved; rays about 20 (?), 1-seriate, the tube pilose, 2.2 mm. long, the lamina 
elliptic, 2-3-denticulate, 6.5 mm. long, 1.8 mm. wide, glandular-puberulent 
dorsally; disk flowers about 24 (?), the corollas 5.5 mm. long (tube slender, 
pilose with jointed hairs above, 3 mm. long, throat campanulate, 0.8 mm. long, 
teeth 1.7 mm. long, slightly yellowish-crested at tip, clavate-glandular on back 
above) ; receptacle deeply alveolate, the alveolar margins lacerate-ciliate, about 
equaling the ovaries; achenes subterete, about 10-ribbed, hirsutulous above, 
1.2 mm. long; pappus brownish-white, the inner bristles numerous, slender, 
not thickened apically, hispidulous, 5 mm. long, the outer few, similar, half 
or two-thirds as long. 

Peru: “Shrub with yellow flowers,’ Lucumayo Valley, not far from 
Ollantaytambo, Prov. Cuzco, alt. 1800-3600 m., 19 June 1915, O. F. Cook & 
G. B. Gilbert 1365 (type no. 604546, U. 8. Nat. Herb.). 


Related to Liabum hastifolium Poepp. In a long series of that species 
from Columbia, Ecuador, Peru, and Bolivia, the leaves are always densely 
pilose with jointed hairs above and persistently white- or gray-tomentose 
beneath, the petioles are never auricled, and the panicle is nearly always 
strongly convex. 


Liabum angustum Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Munnozia; branches 6-angled, densely pilose with dark many- 
celled hairs below, above thinly arachnoid and less densely pilose; leaves: 
narrowly lance-hastate, glabrous above, white-tomentose beneath, the slender 
naked petioles connate-auriculate; heads rather small, in loose cymose 
panicles on axillary and terminal branches; involucre 5-6 mm. high, essen- 
tially glabrous. 

“Tiana;”’ branches pithy, 3-4 mm. thick, 6-angled and striate; leaves oppo- 
site; petioles slender, channeled, 2—-2.5 ecm. long, sparsely pilose and arach- 
noid, essentially naked except at base where abruptly widened into connate 
auricles, the appendages reniform or semiorbicular, subentire, up to 8 mm. 
long; blades narrow-lanceolate or linear-lanceolate, 8-11 cm. long, 0.8-2.4 
cm. wide across the short narrow acuminate (sometimes obsolete) basal lobes, 
about the same breadth near middle, long-acuminate and somewhat falcate, 
very shortly cuneate at base, remotely callous-denticulate, coriaceous, above 
deep green, glabrous, beneath densely and closely whitish-tomentose (the 
costa and chief veins glabrate), weakly triplinerved; heads (immature) about 


296 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


1.8 cm. wide, in 4-7-headed narrow cymose panicles on axillary and terminal 
peduncles, these densely puberulent with short dark many-celled hairs and 
obscurely arachnoid, the bracts small, linear, the pedicels flexuous, divaricate, 
mostly 2-3 cm. long; involucre about 4-seriate, slightly graduate, the outer- 
most phyllaries few, lance-oblong, acute, ciliate, the next ovate or oval-ovate, 
5-7-nerved, about 1.5 mm. wide, substramineous, with short subherbaceous 
subglandular acute tip, the innermost linear-lanceolate, acuminate, glabrous, 
about 3-nerved; receptacle deeply alveolate, the alveolar margins lacerate, 
membranous, about 3 mm. long; rays (very immature) about 35, the tube and 
base of limb pilose, the tube about 1 mm. long, the lamina 4-nerved, linear, 
bidenticulate, about 6 mm. long; disk corollas (very immature) about 66, 
pilose on tube, clavate-glandular toward tip of teeth, 4 mm. long (teeth 1.5 
mm); immature achenes hispidulous; pappus (immature) brownish, about 4 
mm. long, setose, not obviously biseriate. 

Prru: “Liana, flowers light yellow,” Villecabamba, an hacienda on Rio 
Chinchao, Prov. Hudnuco, alt. 1830 m., 17-26 July 1923, Macbride 5198 
(type no. 536236, Field Mus.; dupl. no. 1,191,539, U. S. Nat. Herb.). 

Allied to L. lanceolatum (Ruiz & Pav.) Sch. Bip., to which Cook & Gilbert 
1361 and 1370, from the Lucumayo Valley of Peru, are somewhat doubtfully 
referred. In that plant the leaves are hastate-sagittate and strongly cordate 
at base, there are no “‘stipular’’ appendages, and the stem lacks the long dark 
hairs of L. angustum. ‘The Peruvian L. trinerve (Ruiz & Pav.) Sch. Bip. and 
L. venosissimum (Ruiz & Pav.) Sch. Bip. are also allied, but both are so 
briefly described that they cannot be identified without examining authentic 
specimens. 

LIABUM SAGITTATUM Sch. Bip. Flora 36: 37. 1858. 


Munnozia sagittata Wedd. Chlor. And.1: 211. 1857. 
Chrysastrum sagittatum Willd.; Wedd. Chlor. And.1: 211. 1857, as synonym. 
LInabum hastatum Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 19: 263. 1892. 
Munnozia hastata Wedd.; Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 19: 263. 1892, as 

synonym. 7 

This common species, ranging from Colombia to Peru and better repre- 
sented in herbaria than most members of the genus, is variable in involucral 
characters and may be capable of subdivision. Owing to uncertainty as to the 
identity of L. trinerve (Ruiz & Pav.) Sch. Bip. and L. venosissimum (Ruiz & 
Pav.) Sch. Bip., which are evidently very closely related, it seems best at 
present not to attempt segregation. Schultz’s species was based on a Hum- 
boldt plant in the herbarium of Willdenow, said to be from Peru, and on 
Linden 805 and Funck & Schlim 1293 from Colombia. Weddell’s name, 
independently proposed but likewise derived from Willdenow's herbarium 
name, was based on Jameson 392 from Ecuador and three collections from 
Colombia (Humboldt & Bonpland, Goudot, and Funck & Schlim 1293). The 
sheet of Jameson 392 in the Kew Herbarium bears the false name Munnozia 
hastata Wedd., on which Britton based the name Liabum hastatum, although 
citing the page of the ‘Chloris Andina’ on which the name M. sagittata 
appears. Willdenow’s generic name, Chrysastrum, was published (as a sub- 
genus) by Schultz in the form Chrysartrum, evidently by error. 


JUNE 4, 1927 BLAKE: SOUTH AMERICAN SPECIES LIABUM 297 


Liabum eriocalyx Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Munnozia; suffrutescent; stem subterete, densely arachnoid- 
tomentose, glabrate below; leaf blades narrowly oblong, about 4 times as 
long as wide, slightly hastate or sagittate, subpenninerved, above densely 
pubescent with short several-celled hairs and somewhat arachnoid, beneath 
densely and sordidly arachnoid-tomentose, the stout petioles wingless, 
exauriculate; heads few, cymose, medium-sized; involucre 7-8 mm. high, 
scarcely graduate, densely and persistently arachnoid-tomentose. 

“Half-woody liana;” stem stout, 5-8 mm. thick, striate-ridged, the tomen- 
tum brownish-white; internodes on young branches 1-4 cm.’long, on the old 
stem elongate; leaves opposite; petioles 1.5-3 cm. long, sometimes barely 
winged above, channeled, densely arachnoid-tomentose and beneath the 
wool sordid-pubescent with jointed hairs; blades 9-12.5 em. long, 2-3 em. 
wide, acuminate, callous-pointed, at base short-cuneate to subtruncate or 
slightly cordate (the ears short, about 3 mm. long), callous-denticulate (teeth 
0.5 mm. high, 4-8 mm. apart), coriaceous and apparently fleshy; heads 2.5-3 
em. wide, 5-9 in a terminal cyme or cymose panicle (the lower branches sub- 
tended by leaves), the pedicels tomentose, mostly 5-10 cm. long; involucre 
broad, about 4-seriate, the outer phyllaries ovate or oval-oblong, obtuse, 
about 3 mm. wide, the innermost lance-oblong to linear-lanceolate, acute or 
acuminate, 3—5-nerved, glabrate; receptacle deeply alveolate, the alveolar 
margins submembranous, ciliate, about 3 mm. long; rays about 28, yellow, 
pilose on tube and base on back, the lamina linear, 4 (rarely 6) -nerved, 15 
mm. long, 1.5 mm. wide; disk corollas numerous, yellow, pilose on tube, 9.2 
mm. long (tube 5mm. long, throat 2.2 mm., teeth 2 mm., apically thickened); 
young achenes turbinate, about 10-ribbed, hispidulous, 1.3 mm. long; pappus 
brownish white, of slender hispidulous graduate setae, not thickened apically, 
the inner 6 mm. long, the outer about 3 mm. long. 


Peru: ‘‘Semi-woody liana in partially sunny thicket,’ Hacienda Schunke, 
La Merced, Dept. Junin, alt. 1220 m., 27 Aug.—l Sept. 1923, Macbride 5783 
(type no. 536813, Field Mus.; dupl. no. 1,191,551, U. S. Nat. Herb.). 

Nearest L. corymbosum (Ruiz & Pav.) Sch. Bip., which has a thinly arach- 
noid or glabrate involucre and shorter, proportionately much broader leaves 
(the blades 5.5-10 em. long, 3-5 cm. wide). 

LIABUM CORYMBOsUM (Ruiz & Pav.) Sch. Bip. Flora 37: 34. 1853. 
Munnozia corymbosa Ruiz & Pavon, Syst. Veg. Peruv. Chil. 195. 1798. 

This species, very briefly described by its authors, is represented at the 
Paris Herbarium by a sheet from the herbarium of Pavon, received from 
Boissier and labeled Munnozia corymbosa, Fl. Peru. Agreeing well with the 
short diagnosis, it may be accepted as authentic for the species. Fragments 
of this plant obtained for the National Herbarium through the courtesy of 
Dr. H. Lecomte agree excellently with Macbride’s no. 3886 from Huacachi, 
near Mufia, Peru, alt. 1980 meters, described as a liana with fleshy upper 
parts and bright yellow flowers. The species is distinguished, among the 
Munnozias of the L. sagittatum group, by its fleshy, densely rufescent-lanate- 
tomentose young branches and its triangular-ovate, merely cordate or slightly 
sagittate leaves (5.5-10 em. long, 3-5 em. wide). above densely pubescent 
with jointed hairs and at first arachnoid-tomentose, beneath grayish-tomen- 


298 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


tose. The heads are about 10 to 13, long-peduncled at tips of branches in 
loose eymose panicles, and the involucre is 7-8 mm. high; the petioles are 
not auriculate. 


Liabum isodontum Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Munnozia; stem, petioles and inflorescence thinly arachnoid- 
tomentose and densely pilose with jointed purplish hairs; leaves oblong- 
triangular, sagittate-hastate, weakly triplinerved and veiny, rather evenly 
dentate, pilose above, grayish-tomentose beneath; petioles naked, not au- 
riculate; heads numerous, medium-sized, cymose-panicled, long-pedicelled; 
outer phyllaries ovate or ovate-lanceolate, 2 mm. wide or more. 

Suffrutescent (?); stem stout (5 mm. thick), subterete, striate; leaves 
opposite; petioles slender, 3.5-5 cm. long, 1-2 mm. wide, channelled above; 
blades 11-13.5 cm. long, 4-5.5 em. wide, acuminate, sagittate-hastate with 
broadly triangular sinus and short, acuminate lobes, rather evenly crenate- 
dentate (teeth about 2 mm. high, 3-6 mm. apart, acute but usually appear- 
ing obtuse by the reflexing of the tips), firm-papery, above deep green,:rather 
densely pilose with weak, jointed, brownish hairs, beneath similarly pilose 
along the veins and thinly gray-tomentose; heads about 3-3.5 ecm. wide, about 
40 in a loose panicle made up of axillary and terminal branches, the upper 
bracts small, linear-subulate, the pedicels usually 2-5 cm. long; involucre 
about 4-seriate, somewhat graduate, 7-8 mm. high, short-pilose with jointed 
purplish hairs, the outermost phyllaries ovate, acute or subacuminate, 
purplish above, usually 2-2.8 mm. wide, the others lance-ovate to (inner) 
lanceolate, acuminate, 3—7-nerved, the lax tips purplish or in the innermost 
greenish; receptacle deeply alveolate, the alveolar margins lacerate-ciliate, 
about 3 mm. long; rays 20 or more, yellow, pilose on tube and back, the tube 
3 mm. long, the lamina linear, 4-nerved, bidenticulate, 2.3 cm. long, 1.5 mm. 
wide; disk corollas numerous, yellow, 8 mm. long (tube 3 mm., pilose with 
jointed hairs of biseriate cells, throat slender, 2.2 mm., teeth 2.8 mm., clavate- 
glandular on back and sparsely pilose-barbate near apex); young achenes 
turbinate, densely hirsute-pilose; pappus brownish white, of slender weakly 
hispidulous graduate setae, not dilated at apex, the inner 6 mm. long, the 
outermost 1 mm. long. 

Bortvia: Unduavi, North Yungas, alt. 3300 m., Nov. 1910, Buchtren 
A808 (type no. 1,179,268, U.S. Nat. Herb.). 


Nearest L. glandulosum Kuntze, also a Bolivian species, known only by the. 
type in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden. In that plant the 
leaves (only the uppermost known) are broadly triangular (8 by 5cm.), coarsely 
doubly dentate with acute teeth and with long, slender, acuminate, wide- 
spreading basal lobes; the petioles are broad and submarginate; and the 
phyllaries are all narrowly lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate and less than 2 mm. 
wide. 


Liabum taeniotrichum Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Munnozia; stem densely and sordidly spreading-pilose with many- 
celled dark hairs and sparsely arachnoid; leaves petioled, oblong-ovate, 
shallowly cordate at base, repand-dentate, above green and evenly pilose on 
surface with many-celled dark hairs, beneath similarly but more densely 
pilose and with a very sparse arachnoid tomentum; heads several, rather 


JUNE 4, 1927 BLAKE: SOUTH AMERICAN SPECIES LIABUM 299 


large, long-peduncled, with numerous long rays; involucre about 8 mm. high, 
the phyllaries slightly graduate, ovate to lanceolate, acuminate, loose, cilio- 
late and pilose; achenes densely pilose. 

Stem herbaceous above, striate, 4 mm. thick; leaves opposite; petioles 
naked, not auriculate at base, pubescent like the stem, 2.5 cm. long; blades 
13.5 cm. long, 6 em. wide, acuminate, callous-tipped, rather coarsely repand- 
dentate throughout except toward apex (teeth acute, callous-tipped, about 
2 mm. high, 4-8 mm. apart), more densely pilose along the veins on both sides, 
papery, obscurely triplinerved, weakly prominulous-reticulate on both sides, 
the basal pair of nerves arising near the base, strongly curved, extending 
about one-third length of leaf, the other chief lateral veins 6-7 pairs, spreading 
nearly at a right angle, all uniting near margin of blade; uppermost leaves 
much smaller, oblong-ovate, cuneate at base; heads 4.5 cm. wide, yellow, the 
peduncles 11-17 em. long, axillary and terminal, 3-4-headed, the bracts subu- 
late, about 1 cm. long, the pedicels 3-8 cm. long, pubescent like the stem; 
involucre about 3-seriate, scarcely graduate, the outermost phyllaries ovate or 
lance-ovate, with pale subchartaceous body and short loose or spreading 
acuminate herbaceous tip, the inner lanceolate, with loose acuminate sub- 
herbaceous tips, all rather sparsely or densely pilose on surface with purplish 
or whitish, jointed, sometimes gland-tipped hairs, densely ciliolate with 
whitish hairs, and at first somewhat arachnoid; receptacle deeply alveolate, 
the alveolar margins lacerate-ciliate, about 3 mm. long; rays about 40, 
hirsute on tube and back (the hairs composed of 2-seriate cells, not notched at 
apex), the tube 2 mm. long, the lamina linear, 4-nerved, 3-denticulate, 17 mm. 
long, 2 mm. wide; disk corollas very numerous, densely spreading-hirsute on 
tube, base of throat, and teeth, sparsely so on throat (the hairs of 2-seriate 
cells), 6.5 mm. long (tube 2.3 mm., throat oblong, 1.7 mm., teeth 2.5 mm.); 
achenes (very immature) turbinate, densely appressed-pilose, 1 mm. long; 
pappus of numerous yellowish-white hispidulous bristles 6 mm. long and some 
shorter equally slender outer ones 1.5—2.5 mm. long. 

Prru: Province of Chachapoyas, Mathews (type in Kew Herb.; photog. 
and fragm., U. 8. Nat. Herb.). 


Evidently close to L. zsodontum, described above, but without the sagittate 
leaf-bases of that species. 


Liabum pulchrum Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Munnozia; stem, petioles, and inflorescence thinly arachnoid- 
tomentose and densely pilose with dark jointed hairs; leaf blades triangular- 
hastate, lobulate-decurrent on upper part of petiole, persistently jointed- 
pilose above, the petioles with large, dentate, connate auricles; heads large, in 
a loose eymose panicle, long-pedicelled; involucre 1.2—1.5 em. high. 

“Taiana;”’ stem stout, weak, hollow, bluntly striate-angled, 5-8 mm. thick, 
the tomentum deciduous below; leaves opposite; petioles 5-7 em. long, rather 
slender, lobulate-winged for 1-1.5 cm. at apex (lobes about 4 pairs, unequal, 
acute, 3-9 mm. long), then naked, at base abruptly dilated into connate lobate- 
dentate auricles about 1 em. high; blades 10-12 em. long, 7-11 cm. wide across 
the basal lobes, 5-9 em. wide just above them, acuminate, shallowly cordate 
at base with wide-spreading acuminate basal lobes, rather evenly repand- 
dentate (teeth deltoid, mucronulate, 1-2 mm. high, 2-5 mm. apart), firm- 
papery, above deep green, beneath densely jointed-pilose with purplish hairs 
on veins and veinlets and sparsely so on surface, and thinly gray-arachnoid- 
tomentose (the tomentum obsolescent in age), strongly triplinerved from base; 


300 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


heads 7 cm. wide, about 6-20 in loose terminal and axillary cymose panicles, 
the bracts small, the rather stout flexuous pedicels 4-9 cm. long; involucre 
broad, about 4-seriate, slightly graduate, jointed-pilose, the 2 or 3 outer series 
of phyllaries oblong-ovate or lance-oblong, acuminate, 2.8-4 mm. wide, sub- 
stramineous, often purplish-margined and -tipped, weakly many-nerved, the 
innermost lance-linear, long-acuminate, 3—5-nerved, with rather loose ob- 
scurely greenish tips; receptacle deeply alveolate, the alveolar margins lacer- 
ate-ciliate, 3 mm. long; rays about 40, yellow, pilose on tube and back, the 
tube 4 mm. long, the lamina linear, 5-nerved, 3.2 cm. long, 2.2 mm. wide; 
disk corollas numerous, yellow, pilose on tube and sparsely on teeth, at apex 
of teeth pilose-barbate, 10 mm. long (tube 5mm., throat 2mm., teeth 3 mm.); 
immature achenes oblong, about 10-ribbed, sparsely hirsute, 1.6 mm. long; 
pappus brownish, of slender finely hispidulous graduate setae, not dilated 
at apex, the innermost bristles 9 mm. long, the outermost 2.5 mm. 

Peru: “Beautiful liana, bright yellow,’ Mufia, trail to Tambo de Vaca, 
Dept. Hudnuco, alt. 2440 m., 5-7 June 1923, Macbride 4312 (type no. 535394, 
Field Mus.; dupl. no 1,191,493, U.S. Nat. Herb.). 


Related to the Bolivian L. pinnulosum and L. hirtum Kuntze, but readily 
distinguished by its much larger involucre, in addition to other characters. 


LiaBUM RUSBYI Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 19: 263. 1892. 


In the original description the color of the flowers was not mentioned. 
In Buchtien 3032, described as a shrub 2 m. high, the ‘‘flowers’”’ (probably the 
rays) are said to be violet, a color hitherto unrecorded in the genus. 


Liabum hexagonum Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Munnozia; “scandent shrub;’’ stem thinly arachnoid, strongly 6- 
angled; leaves elliptic or lance-elliptic, subentire, thin-coriaceous, glabrous and 
immersed-veined above, densely ochroleucous-tomentose with obscure vena- 
tion beneath, the short barely margined petioles connate-auriculate at base; 
heads few, loosely cymose-panicled, long-pedicelled; outer phyllaries with 
spreading blunt tips. | 

Stem stout (6 mm. thick), hollow but firm, the angles ridged, the thin 
tomentum deciduous except from the deep grooves; main internodes 7-12 em. 
long; leaves opposite; petioles scarcely margined, channelled, thinly arach- 
noid, abruptly widened at base into reniform or suborbicular entire connate 
auricles 4-7 mm. long; blades 9.5-15 cm. long, 2-3.8 cm. wide, acuminate, 
somewhat falcate, acutely cuneate at base, finely serrulate (teeth minute, 
subremote, mostly concealed by the slightly revolute margin), above deep 
green, reticulate-veined (the veins immersed), penninerved, the chief lateral 
veins about 12-15 pairs; heads about 2.8 cm. wide, about 9 in a terminal loose 
cymose panicle, the bracts small or minute, the pedicels 5-11 cm. long, thinly 
arachnoid and densely jointed-pilosulous; involucre hemispheric, about 4- 
seriate, graduate, 7-9 mm. high, the 2-3 outer series of phyllaries ovate- 
oblong or oval, about 3 mm. wide, with pale base and spreading rounded 
submembranous tips, thinly arachnoid outside, glabrous inside, the inner 
oblong, obtuse, the innermost lance-oblong, acuminate, thinly arachnoid and 
somewhat jointed-pilosulous; receptacle alveolate, the alveolar margins 
prolonged into triangular teeth 1 mm. long; rays 18 or more, yellow, the tube 
pilose, 4.5 mm. long, the lamina oblong, 4-nerved, 9 mm. long, 3.5mm. wide; 
disk corollas yellow, 7.5 mm. long (tube pilosulous, 3.5-4 mm. long, throat 
campanulate, 0.8-1 mm. long, teeth 3 mm. long, clavate-glandular on back 


_ JUNE 4, 1927 BLAKE: SOUTH AMERICAN SPECIES. LIABUM 301 


and barbate-pilosulous at tip); young achenes about 10-ribbed, sparsely 
pilose; pappus brownish, graduate, of obscurely hispidulous bristles, not 
dilated apically, the inner 5 mm. long, the outermost 1 mm. 

Bouivia: Unduavi, North Yungas, alt. 3300 m., Nov. 1910, Buchtien 
3079 (type no. 43733, U. 8S. Nat. Herb.). 


Nearest Liabum rusbyi Britton, and, like it, probably to be included in the 
section Munnozia. The strongly 6-angled stem, subentire leaves, and blunt 
spreading phyllaries characterize the species. 


Liabum silphioides (Poepp.) Blake. 
Prionolepis silphioides Poepp. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 55. pl. 261. 1845. 


Liabum affine Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Munnozia; stem subterete, arachnoid-tomentose, glabrescent or 
glabrate; leaves large, oblong-ovate, crenate-dentate, soon glabrous above, 
densely tomentose beneath, feather-veined, subcoriaceous; heads few, large, 
short-rayed, on long pedicels; involucre 1.2 em. high, of oval or oblong, broadly 
rounded, submembranous-tipped phyllaries; pappus as long as tube of disk 
corollas; flowers ‘‘yellowish green.”’ 

“Liana,’’ the stout, weak, hollow stem herbaceous at least above, about 8 
mm. thick; leaves opposite; petioles stout, broad, 3-8 em. long, channelled, 
arachnoid-tomentose beneath, narrowly wing-margined above or throughout, 
abruptly dilated at base into connate denticulate auricles about 4 mm. high; 
blades of the larger leaves oblong-ovate, 17-21 cm. long, 6-8 cm. wide, acute, 
at base broadly rounded to cuneate-rounded, crenate-dentate (teeth about 
1 mm. high, 3-6 mm. apart, usually appearing obtuse through the reflexing 
of the callous tip), above rather pale green, quickly glabrate except along the 
arachnoid costa, beneath densely and closely whitish- or somewhat ochro- 
leucous-tomentose, penninerved, the chief veins about 12 pairs, slender, 
scarcely prominulous above, evident beneath and with the secondaries reticu- 
late; upper leaves much smaller (10 cm. long, 3.5 cm. wide), oblong, short- 
petioled; heads hemispheric, about 2.8 cm. wide in flower and fruit, about 1.5 
cm. high, about 7 in a terminal simple cyme and also on 1-3-headed elongate 
peduncles from the upper axils, the bracts small or minute, the loosely 
spreading pedicels tomentose, 5-11 em. long; involucre about 4-seriate, gradu- 
ate, appressed, the phyllaries oval, oblong, or slightly obovate-oblong, 4-5 
mm. wide, glabrous, with substramineous base and shorter to subequal, sub- 
membranous, about 11-nerved, broadly rounded tip; receptacle alveolate, the 
alveolar margins submembranous, lacerate-ciliate, 5mm. long; rays numerous, 
bilabiate, long-pilose on tube and back, the tube 4 mm. long, the inner lip 
linear-acuminate, nerveless, 8 mm. long, the outer bifid to below the middle, 
12 mm. long, the lobes unequal in breadth, 2—4-nerved, densely barbate out- 
side below apex (hairs slender-clavate, their cells 2-seriate); disk corollas 
numerous, 12.5 mm. long (tube very sparsely pilosulous or essentially gla- 
brous, 6.5 mm. long, throat slender-campanulate, 2.2 mm. long, teeth 3.8 
mm. long, clavate-glandular on back above, below apex densely barbate with 
hairs like those of the ray corollas); achenes nearly oblong, brownish, 10- 
ribbed, 2 mm. long, bearing a very few hairs near tip; pappus brownish, the 
bristles slender, not dilated at apex, obscurely hispidulous, eraduate, the 
inner 9 mm. long, the outer about 4 mm. long, all fragile and readily deciduous 
from the very shallow saucer formed by their connate bases. 


302 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


Peru: ‘Liana, flowers yellowish green,’’ Mufia, trail to Tambo de Vaca, 
Dept. Huanuco, alt. 2440 m. , o-/ June 1923, M acbride 4337 (type no. 535421, 
Field Mus.; - dupl. no. 1,191 497, UNS: Nat: "Herb.). 


This interesting plant is evidently very closely allied to L. silphioides 
(Poepp.) Blake, but differs in so many details that it seems best to describe it 
as anew species. Liabuwm silphioides was described as a 3-foot herb with 4- 
angled stem, proportionately broader and membranous leaves (the lower sub- 
cordate), golden flowers, and pappus about half as long as the tube of the disk 
corollas. The rays of L. affine, as described above, suggest those of the 
Mutisieae, but they are probably abnormal; at any rate those of L. silphioi- 
des, certainly a very closely related plant, are not so described. 


Liabum stenolepis Blake, sp. nov. 


Section Hato; stem, petioles, and pedicels spreading-hirsute; leaves uae 
cordate-ovate, coarsely repand-dentate, slender-petioled; heads numerous, 
cymose-panicled, long-pedicelled, comparatively large; involucre 12-13 mm. 
high, the outer phyllaries narrowly lance-triangular, acuminate, with long 
hispidulous herbaceous tips, the innermost elongate-linear, less than 1 mm. 
wide. 

“Tiana; stem stout (6 mm. thick), pithy, obtusely 6-angled, densely 
spreading-hirsute with tuberculate-based hairs, glabrescent below; leaves 
opposite; petioles 4-7 cm. long, naked except at base where bearing oblong 
herbaceous connate auricles 1 cm. long; blades about 12 cm. long, 8-11 cm. 
wide, acuminate, shallowly cordate at base, coarsely repand-dentate (teeth 
about 4-7 pairs, deltoid, acute, up to 1 cm. high) and remotely callous- 
denticulate, submembranous, above deep green, beneath somewhat paler, 
rather densely strigose on both sides and along the veins spreading-hirsute, 
palmately 7—9-nerved from base; panicle ternately divided, about 25 cm. 
long and wide, about 24-35-headed, pubescent like the stem, the pedicels 
mostly 2.5-5 em. long, the bracts small, subulate; disk in fruit 1.8-2.2 cm. 
wide; involucre broad, about 6-seriate, graduate, the 3-4 outer series of 
phyllaries elongate-triangular (about 1.5 mm. wide), with short, substramine- 
ous, sparsely hispidulous base and much longer, loose, acuminate, callous- 
pointed, herbaceous tips, these hispidulous on both surfaces and ciliolate, the 
2 innermost series of narrowly linear, obtuse or acute, 3-5-nerved, substrami- 
neous phyllaries (about 0.6 mm. wide), ciliolate, essentially glabrous dorsally ; 
receptacle areolate, glabrous; rays (only immature ones examined) numerous, 
glabrous, the tube 1.5mm. long, the lamina linear, 6 mm. long, 0.6 mm. wide, 
3-nerved, obscurely bidenticulate; disk flowers numerous, their corollas 
(immature) hirsute at base of throat, hispidulous at tip of teeth, 6.7 mm. long 
(tube 2.6 mm., throat 1.4 mm., teeth 2.7 mm.); achenes oblong, 1.5 mm. long, 
strongly 3 (ray) or 4 (disk)-ribbed, whitish, glabrous or rarely very sparsely 
hispidulous above; pappus brownish-white, 6 mm. long, of numerous nearly 
smooth somewhat flattened setae, and a few short similar but more slender 
outer ones about 1 mm. long. 

Peru: “Liana, flowers lemon-yellow,’ Mufia, trail to Tambo de Vaca, 
Dept. Hudnuco, alt. 2440 m., 5-7 June 1923, Macbride 4338 (type no. 535422, 
Field Mus.; dupl. no. 1,191,498, U.S. Nat. Herb.). 


Allied to L. vulcanicum Klatt and L. pallatangense Hieron., but with con- 
siderably longer involucre, the outer phyllaries narrowly linear-lanceolate and 


_ JUNE 4, 1927 BERRY: CYCADS 303 


rather densely hispidulous dorsally, the inner elongate-linear. The type of 
Erato polymnioides DC., examined by the writer in 1925, is the same species 
as L. pallatangense Hieron. De Candolle’s name is not available because 
of the use of the name Liabum polymnioides by R. E. Fries in 1907 for an 
Argentinian species. 


Liabum tenerum (Sch. Bip.) Blake. 


Kastnera tenera Sch. Bip. Flora 37: 38. 1853. 


Cotompia: Cliffs at cascade, La Lora to summit, new Quindio trail, 
Cordillera Central, Dept. Tolima, 14 Aug. 1922, Killip 9775. 


Mr. Killip’s plant agrees so closely with Schultz’s careful original descrip- 
tion as to leave no doubt of its identity. The type was collected in the same 
general region (“‘prov. Cauca pr. Quindiu Paramilla alt. 10,500 ped. Februario 
1848: Linden! n. 1136’), and probably, according to information received 
from Dr. F. W. Pennell, within 10 miles of the spot where Killip collected the 
species. Liabum niveum Hieron. is very closely allied, having the same 
involucre and pappus, but is apparently distinct in its arachnoid-tomentose 
peduncles and young growth and in the dense white tomentum of the lower 
leaf surface. 


LIABUM HYPOLEUCUM (DC.) Blake, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 39: 144. 1926. 
Vernonia hypoleuca DC. Prodr. 5: 27. 1836. 


When transferring this species to Liabum, I suggested that it was probably a 
Peruvian species, although originally described as collected in Mexico by 
Haenke. Its characters are in the main those of the L. glabrum group of 
Mexico, not those of any South American group, and it now seems probable 
that the habitat originally recorded was correct. 


PALEOBOTANY.—Cycads in the Shinarump conglomerate of southern 
Utah.1 Epwarp W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University. (Com- 
municated by J. B. REESIDE, JR.) 


The rarity of fossil plants in the Triassic formations of the western 
United States is my excuse for the following note. In 1921 R. C. 
Moore made a small collection of plants from the Shinarump con- 
glomerate at a locality 33 miles east of Wagon Box Mesa and 2 miles 
east of Water Pocket Canyon in eastern Garfield County, southern 
Utah. The plants are contained in a brown sandstone or sandy clay- 
ironstone, and the bulk of the material, including all that is deter- 
minable, appertains to a single species. 

The collection was reported upon by F. H. Knowlton in a letter 
dated Oct. 14, 1922, and was said to represent Otozamites macombir 


1 Published by permission of the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. Received April 
25, 1927. 


304 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


Newberry, and Equisetum or Schizoneura sp. A careful study does not 
corroborate these tentative determinations. Before describing this 
material it may be useful to refer to the status of older Mesozoic 
floras in this general region. 

In 1876 Newberry published a description of 14 species of fossil 
plants in his account as geologist of the Macomb expedition to New 
Mexico. Of these, Olozamites macombit and Zamites occidentalis 
came from the old copper mines near Abiquiu and the balance from the 
State of Sonora, Mexico. In 1886 Major Powell made a second 
small collection near Abiquiu, and in 1889 Knowlton made a third 
collection. These two collections were described in 1890 by Fontaine 
& Knowlton,? who recorded the following additional species: HKqutse- 
tum abiquiense Fontaine, Equisetum knowltont Fontaine, Zamites 
powell1 Fontaine, Cheirolepis miinstert Schimper, Palissya braunt 
Endlicher (?), Palissya cone (?), Cycadites (?), Ctenophyllum (?), and 
Araucarioxylon arizonicum Knowlton. Ward visited the region in 
1899 and 1901 and prepared an elaborate geological report,’ but added 
nothing to the paleobotany but the name Araucarites chiquito for an 
obscure cone (?) which has never been described nor figured. 

Ward recognized in what he called Powell’s ‘““Shinarump formation’’ 
two fancied members—the ‘‘Leroux beds” above, which includes the 
so-called ‘‘Belodont beds,”’ of Upper Triassic age and referable to the 
Chinle formation; and a lower, called at first “Shinarump conglo- 
merate’’ and later the ‘“‘Lithodendron member,” which, he believed, 
contained all of the abundant petrified wood of the region, and which 
includes Shinarump conglomerate in the strict sense and a part of the 
Chinle formation. 

Gregory, who carried out extensive field work in the Navajo Country 
from 1909 to 1913, the results of which are recorded in U. 8. Geological 
Survey Professional Paper 93 (1917), not only summarized the history 
of exploration of the region, but gave reasons for dropping Ward’s 
terminology and restricting the Shinarump conglomerate to the sense 
in which it was proposed by Powell. 

It seems remarkable that in a region noted for the abundance of 
silicified wood, some of it in place where it grew, so few traces of foliar 
parts should be found, especially since all of the wood examined 
microscopically is coniferous, and coniferous foliage is usually the last 
type of vegetation to disappear under all conditions of sedimentation. 

2W.M. Fontaine and F.H. Knowuton. Notes on Triassic plants from New Mexico. 


Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 13: 281-285. Pls. 22-26. 1890. 
3L. F. Warp. U.S. Geol. Surv., 20th Ann. Rept. (2): 315-334. 1900. 


_ JUNE 4, 1927 BERRY: CYCADS 305 


My impression is that vast quantities of foliar remains have been 
entombed, but these have become so oxidized as to have practically 
disappeared, except locally. I know that in the so-called ‘“‘Popo 
Agie beds” of Wyoming, of approximately the same age as the Shina- 
rump, fossil plants are common, but usually so near the vanishing 
point as to be generally unrecognizable.‘ 

Turning now to the plants collected from the Shinarump con- 
glomerate of southern Utah by Mr. Moore, the supposed Hquisetum 
or Schizoneura is represented by fragments of longitudinally ridged 
objects, sometimes preserved for lengths of 9 centimeters without 
showing any nodes. If these fragments represent arthrophytes they 
could hardly be Equisetum since the vascular bundles in that genus 
normally alternate at the nodes. The genus Schizoneura normally has 
bundles continuous from internode to internode, but in the case of 
these Shinarump fragments the ridges are not parallel and I therefore 
conclude that they almost certainly represent fragments of some 
large-pinnuled cycad. 

The abundant and definitive plants from this locality are identical 
with what Fontaine called Zamites powellt from Abiquiu, but since 
they are not referable to Zamites and also were never adequately 
described, they may be characterized as follows: 


Otozamites powelli (Fontaine) 


Zamites powelli Fontaine, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 13: 284, Pls. 25, 26. 1890. 

Fronds exhibiting great variation in the size of the pinnules, not only with 
respect to their proximal, median or distal positions, but also from frond to 
frond. Rachis fairly stout, about 2 millimeters in diameter in the only 
specimen which shows it clearly, slightly flexuous and striated. Pinnules 
inserted on the top of the rachis, which consequently appears unduly slender 
when viewed from above. The pinnules are alternate, variously spaced, but 
on the whole closely spaced; their angle of divergence from the rachis varies 
from 45° to 90° and although partly explained according to their position in 
the frond, varies from frond to frond. This is shown by the same sized pin- 
nules in different specimens showing a similar variability. Pinnules coriace- 
ous, linear, slightly faleate, truncately rounded at their tips; the base con- 
tracted and more or less retuse, generally equilateral, but occasionally having 
the distal half more expanded than the proximal half. Veins thin, varying 
from 15 to 25 per pinnule, radiating from the area of attachment directly to the 
margins, forking proximad. The lamina between the veins forms raised ridges 
that give the appearance of stout close-set veins. 

The largest fragment in the collection is 13 centimeters long and shows parts 
of 14 pairs of pinnules. One specimen shows parts of 12 pairs of narrow pin- 
nules 5 millmeters wide, and immediately beside it are fragments of 5 regu- 
larly oriented pinnules 12 millimeters wide. One small fragment shows 


4H. W. Berry. Journ. Geol., 32: 488-497. 1924. 


306 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


1-5. Otozamites powelli (Fontaine).—l, fragment showing the maximum 
observed width of pinnules; 2, 3, showing character of the material and general form, 
with insertion and venation of the pinnules; 4, outline of a basal pinnule (except base) ; 


5, outline of a normal pinnule (except base). 


Figs. 


JUNE 4, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 307 


pinnules (presumably distal) between 2 and 2.5 millimeters wide, and other 
characteristically veined fragments have widths of 1.5 centimeters. In some 
specimens the pinnules are preserved with their margins incurved as though 
buried while dry by wind blown sediments. 


Otozamites powelli differs from Otozamites macombii in the more regular 
alternate arrangement of the pinnules, those of the two sides inserted closer 
together on top of the rachis, which is more slender, and in the shape and 
relative proportions of the pinnules. In Newberry’s species they are twice as 
wide, and range in form from orbicular or reniform to oblong. There is no 
doubt that a single botanic species might readily show an equal amount of 
foliar variation, but in the absence of association or intergradation the two 
must be considered distinct species. 

There are various foreign species of Otozamites, both in Europe and Asia 
which resemble the present fossil, mostly from beds believed to be Rhaetic in 
age, but such long distance comparisons have but slight significance. The 
only American form which is similar is the variety intermedius of Otozamites 
hespera Wieland from the supposed Lias of Oaxaca, southern Mexico. 

The problem of the generic limits in fossil cyead fronds is a difficult one, 
about which students have decided differences of opinion, and this is especially 
acute as between Zamites and Otozamites, the former originally including the 
latter, which was proposed as a sub-genus of Zamites by Braun in 1842. The 
only recent systematic work which discusses this generic difficulty is that of 
Halle (The Mesozoic Flora of Graham Land, 1913). He restricts Otozamites 
to forms with an asymmetric, auriculate base, the distal lobe more prominently 
developed than the proximal. Thus defined his Zamites includes forms which 
I would refer to Otozamites. 

Venation, although dependent to a considerable extent upon form, should 
not be ignored. Naturally the longer and narrower the pinnules, the more 
nearly will the veins approach parallelism, and in any genus with a contracted 
area of attachment the veins will converge within such limits, but in Zamites 
none of the veins flare directly to the lower margins as they do in Otozamuites. 
The auriculation of the base, as the present species shows, may be present or 
absent among the pinnules of a single frond. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


The Pick and Hammer Club met at the Geological Survey on April 30. 
Professor WALTER H. BucHeEr of the University of Cincinnati spoke on the 
subject of Continental tectonics. 

The annual field meeting of the Petrologists’ Club was held on May 7 in the 
vicinity of Baltimore, with Prof. J. T. Singewald of Johns Hopkins University 
as guide. 


308 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 11 


RESOLUTIONS 


The following resolutions on the death of Charles Doolittle Wolcott were 
adopted by the AcApEmyY: 

Whereas: there has passed from us one friendly in spirit, wise in counsel, 
highly eminent in attainments in his chosen fields of geology and paleontology, 
honored by many universities and learned societies of the world, who in his 
long life had filled with distinction several of the highest scientific offices of 
the United States: 

Resolved: that the Washington Academy of Sciences hereby records its 
profound sense of the loss occasioned by the death of its member and former 
president, CHARLES DooLirrLE WatcorTt, and its sympathy for his family. 

Resolved: that this resolution be spread upon the minutes of the Academy 
and copies be transmitted to the family and to the Smithsonian Institution. 


3 
& 
ie 
og 

q 

2 


each month 


4 


ms of the 
editors by 


and the twenty-seventh of 


the thirteenth 


Sea Norges aNnp ute Poa ae 
RUsOUUMONE. 


osu tga. 
P \ 
eae 4 1097 og Satake 
FTN =f a ea 
see 
~%,> 4 
eS Vet a 


A VATION At. i kL =, 


a 
~ 
a - 

ON cao tT 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
OF SCIENCES 


pms ey | BOARD OF EDITORS 
aS 3. PETERS — AaNnEs CHASE Joun B. REEsIDE, JR. 
: | DEPARTMENT or etn MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 
aR OK 3 | | ASSOCIATE EDITORS 
_L. H. Apams S. A. Ropwer 
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
E. A. GOLDMAN . G. W. Stosz 
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
R. F. Grieas J. R. SWANTON 
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ~- : ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 


BY THE . 
_ WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SC: ENCES 
tgs Mr. RoyaL AND GuILFoRD AVES. 
| BatTIMorE, MaryLAND 


. 


Entered as Sacara Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md.. under the 
(Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at s; ecial rate of postage provided for 
in Section a Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 


+ 


Ale 


| This Jota: the official eae the Washington pte of ciences, 
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this en 
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the 

short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanati n 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affili 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. T 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calend 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript, reaching the edit 

the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from t 
issue of the JouRNAL for the f pron ine fourth or nineteenth, respectivel, 


M anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without. essential cha 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. Tot 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be 
serially and submitted on aseparate manuscript page. _ . Sta 
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined ts) {es 
or diagrams of simple character. : 

Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to auth ) 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; 5 the editor 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. 

Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of P ices 


Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12ipp.) 0 46 pp. Cover te ie ‘eo y 
50 §$.85. $1.65 $2.55. $3.25 $2.00 5 | 
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 225 OO. 2s) Se aa oe 
150. (2:25 4.30) 5% 36230 6250. es SO 
200 2.50 4.80 nF ay es at Wldues ey OU Vans Satis 078 ak 
‘250 3.00.0). 6.80) 6220. 80 a 


Anadditional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. re ae ‘ | 


Covers bearing the name of the author nad fle of the article, with inclusive pagi- 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. ous 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or ‘reprints 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. rt 


The rate of Subscription per Vole TS ses eeseseseneeereeseeteetetenetens $6. 00" 
Semi-monthly numbers..........-... sesso eee een ceceecsnnseecsevesenees oy no 
Monthly numbers.......... 662. e eee eect nee c cence eet ee see ceececsnsccnses OO 


Remiitances should be made payable to COViahtar ta Aree of Seistioed i and 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, 1 D. C. hee 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. | a 
Exzchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other ‘publications. ee 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is mi a . 
within thirty days after date ofthefollowingissue. PU eines ns 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to Desiuber 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, ‘Special rates 
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vou. 17 | Junn 19, 1927 No. 12 


BOTANY.—New plants fram Central America.—IX. Pavu C. 
STANDLEY, U. 8. National Museum.! 


On the following pages are described thirteen new Central American 
plants, chiefly trees and shrubs. Of special interest are the two new 
species of Weinmannia, representatives of a genus of trees of which 
only a single species has been known previously from Central America. 

There is included in the present paper a description of a new species 
of Hybanthus from western Mexico. 


Weinmannia Wercklei Standl., sp. nov. 


Usually a large shrub or small tree but sometimes (according to Wercklé) 
a large tree, the older branchlets slender, terete, dark reddish brown, the 
young ones compressed, densely puberulent, with short or elongate internodes; 
stipules soon deciduous, oval, 3-5 mm. long, broadly rounded at apex, green, 
glabrous within, sparsely or densely sericeous or strigillose outside; leaves 
simple, the petioles 2-3 (rarely 10) mm. long, puberulent or glabrous; leaf 
blades lance-oblong to ovate-oblong, mostly 3.5-5.5 em. long and 1.2-2.3 
em. wide (on young sterile branches up to 12 by 6 cm.), acute or acuminate, 
acute at base, rather coarsely crenate-serrate, subcoriaceous, deep green 
above, glabrous, beneath paler, often brownish when dried, sparsely pilose, 
at least along the costa, with short appressed hairs, in age glabrate, the costa 
slender, prominent beneath the lateral nerves about 13 on each side, incon- 
spicuous, nearly straight, extending to the margin; racemes terminal and 
axillary, pedunculate, densely many-flowered, the rachis 2-3 em. long, 
puberulent, the pedicels slender, fasciculate, 2-5 mm. long, puberulent; 
calyx 5-parted, sparsely puberulent or glabrate, scarcely more than 1 mm. 
long, the lobes ovate, acute; filaments glabrous; ovary narrowly ovoid, densely 
whitish-pubescent, the styles glabrous, 1 mm. long. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 678753, collected at San Crist6- 
bal de Candelaria, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, altitude 1,700 meters, 
by C. Wercklé (Pittier no. 3685). The following sterile specimens are 
conspecific: 


1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For the 
last preceding paper of this series see page 245 of this volume of The Journau. Re- 
ceived March 30, 1927. 


309 


310 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 


Costa Rica: La Palma, Province of San José, alt. 1,450 m., Biolley & 
Tonduz 12513; Standley 37990. Cerros de Zurqui, Province of Heredia, 
alt. 2,200 m., Standley & Valerio 50589. El Mufieco, Province of Cartago, 
alt. 1,500 m., Standley & Torres 51140. Santa Maria de Dota, Province of 
San José, alt. 1,800 m., Standley 41581. 


Only one species of Weinmannia, W. pinnata L., with pinnate leaves, has 
been known heretofore from Central America. In its foliage characters 
W. Wercklez resembles W. lamprophylla Hieron., of Colombia, which has a 
glabrous ovary. 


Weinmannia burseraefolia Standi., sp. nov. 


Tree, the older branchlets blackish, with short internodes, glabrous; 
stipules broadly oval, persistent and recurved, green, coriaceous, glabrous; 
leaves pinnate, the petiole 1.5-1.8 cm. long, suleate on the upper surface, 
glabrous, narrowly margined above, the rachis 3.5—4 cm. long, sparsely short- 
barbate at the nodes, elsewhere glabrous, narrowly winged between the 
lobes, the wings entire, 2-4 mm. in (combined) width; leaflets 9, oblong-ellip- 
tic to ovate-elliptic, 2.2-3.5 cm. long, 1-1.4 em. wide, acutish to acuminate, 
sessile, the lateral ones oblique at base and acutish, the terminal one acumi- 
nately contracted at base; leaflets coriaceous, finely appressed-serrate, 
(serrations about 11 on each side), glabrous, lustrous above, slightly paler 
beneath, the costa very slender, prominent on both surfaces, the other vena- 
tion inconspicuous. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,306,224, collected in wet 
forest at Yerba Buena, northeast of San Isidro, Province of Heredia, Costa 
Rica, altitude 2,000 meters, February 28, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and 
Juvenal Valerio (no. 49848). 


At the time of collecting the specimens the tree was recognized as distinct 
from the common Weinmannia pinnata, but it was impossible to discover 
fertile branches. Although the material is sterile, I have little hesitancy in 
describing it as a new species. From W. pinnata it differs in its acute, gla- 
brous, closely serrate (not crenate) leaflets. In general appearance W. 
burseraefolia somewhat suggests W. crenata Presl, of northern South America. 


Alchemilla pascuorum Standl., sp. nov. 


Sarmentose perennial, the stems 10-30 cm. long, procumbent, often root- 
ing at the nodes, with elongate internodes, slender, hirsute with long, slender, 
chiefly appressed hairs; basal and lower stem leaves slender-petiolate, the 
uppermost leaves sessile or short-petiolate; stipules connate into a sheath, 
cleft into narrowly oblong, green, sericeous lobes; lower petioles 2 cm. long 
or shorter, appressed-hirsute; leaf blades reniform, 2-4 cm. wide, deeply cleft 
into 5-7 lobes, these broadly cuneate-obovate, rounded at apex, deeply ser- 
rate above the middle, with narrow, obtuse or acutish teeth, green on the 
upper surface and sparsely sericeous, beneath grayish green, rather densely 
sericeous with long, slender, closely appressed hairs; blades of the uppermost 
leaves deeply 3-lobed; flowers green, cymose, in small dense clusters near or 
at the ends of the branches, the pedicels 1.5 mm. long or shorter; hypanthium 
globose-urceolate, 1.5 mm. long, densely sericeous; sepals and bractlets erect, 
subequal, 0.6 mm. long, the bractlets lanceolate, the sepals lance-ovate, 


gone 19, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA oll 


acute or acutish, sparsely sericeous or glabrate; achenes broadly ovoid, obtuse, 
somewhat compressed, 1 mm. long, dark brown, nearly smooth. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium no. 1,228,245, collected in wet 
meadow at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 
1,800 meters, March 21, 1914, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38455). 

This plant is frequent in the pastures of the high mountains of central 
Costa Rica, and the following collections may be cited: 

Costa Rica: Southern slope of Turrialba Volcano, near Finca del Voled4n 
de Turrialba, alt. 2,000—-2,400 m., Standley 35028, 34940. Las Nubes, 
Standley 38386. ‘Rio Birris, Standley 35416. Fraijanes, alt. 1,600 m., 
Standley & Torres 47627. 


On Turrialba the plant is called “mochililla.”” Like the other species, it 
is grazed by cattle. 


Alchemilla pascuorum is a near relative of A. venusta Cham. & Schlecht., 
of Mexico and Guatemala, but in that the stems are hirsute with spreading 
hairs, and the leaves also are loosely hirsute. 


ALCHEMILLA SUBALPESTRIS Rose, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 10: 96. 1906 


This species, known previously only from Mexico, may bé reported from 
Costa Rica. It was collected near Finca La Cima, above Los Lotes, north 
of El Copey, altitude 2,100 meters, in December, 1925, Standley 42551. 


ACAENA CYLINDROSTACHYA Ruiz & Pavon, Fl. Peruv. 1: 68, pl. 104, f. 2. 
1798 

This species, apparently common in the central and northern Andes of 
South America, may now be reported from Costa Rica. It was collected 
by the writer (Standley & Valerio 43639, 43682) on Cerro de las Vueltas, 
Costa Rica, at 3,000 meters, in December, 1925. Itisfrequentinthe paramos 
of this high peak. Although not a very conspicuous plant, it attracts atten- 
tion because of its handsome leaves with beautiful silky pubescence. One 
other species of the genus, Acaena elongata L., is common in the higher 
mountains of Central America, and ranges northward to Mexico. 


Oxalis Maxonii Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants woody or suffrutescent, branched, ascending or recumbent, the 
branches up to 1 m. long, red-brown, pilose with short, straight, mostly 
appressed hairs and puberulent with short curved hairs, the internodes short 
or elongate; leaves palmately 3-foliolate, the petioles very slender, 1.5-5 em. 
long, pilose with slender, ascending or appressed, whitish hairs; leaf- 
lets short-petiolulate, the petiolules less than 2 mm. long, pilose with stiff 
spreading white hairs, the blades ovate or broadly ovate, 2-4.5 cm. long, 
1.2—2.3 cm. wide, acute to very obtuse at apex, obtuse to rounded-obtuse at 
base, the lateral leaflets asymmetric, smaller and more obtuse than the 
terminal one, thin, green and glabrous on the upper surface, ciliate, beneath 
paler, thinly appressed-pilose with slender hairs, often glabrate; cymes slender- 
pedunculate, about equaling the leaves, 2 to 4-flowered, the bracts linear, 
about 4 mm. long, the pedicels proper 2-3 mm. long, minutely appressed-pi- 
lose, shorter than the slender peduncles, the bractlets linear, minute; sepals 
4.5-5 mm. long, lanceolate, acute or obtuse, erect, thinly pilose with short 
slender white appressed hairs, thin, greenish; petals yellow, 1.5 em. long, 
rounded at apex, glabrous; filaments 7 mm. long, densely pubescent; styles 


312 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 


densely pubescent; capsule (immature) oval-globose, 4 mm. long, densely 
pubescent with short slender whitish ascending hairs. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 675390, collected in brushy 
undergrowth near the river, El Boquete, Chiriqui, Panama, altitude 1,000 
to 1,300 meters, March, 1911, by William R. Maxon (no. 4996). Here are 
referred the following additional collections from Chiriqui: 

Panama: Along river in shade, El Boquete, Pittier 2970. Woods along 
Griffen Trail, Horqueta Mts., alt. 1 (00 m., Killip 3527. 


_ In general appearance this is like O. acuminata Schlecht. & Cham., of 
Mexico and Guatemala, but in the latter the flowers are smaller, and the 
long-acuminate leaflets are pubescent on the upper surface. 


Picramnia longifolia Standl., sp. nov. 


Shrub 2.5-3 m. high, the young branches slender, at first sparsely and 
minutely puberulent, densely leafy; leaves 17 to 21-foliolate, the petiole 
2-3 cm. long, the rachis 14-20 cm. long, sparsely puberulent or glabrate, the 
leaflets alternate, rather distant, the petiolules 2-8 mm. long, puberulent; 
leaflets obliquely ovate to oblong-ovate or (the lowest) broadly ovate, 3-4.5 
em. long, 1-2 cm. wide, rather abruptly acuminate or long-acuminate to an 
obtuse tip, at base very oblique, acute on one side, obtuse or rounded on the 
other, deep green above, slightly paler beneath, sparsely and minutely puberu- 
lent on the costa, elsewhere glabrous; staminate inflorescence pedunculate, 
about 20 ecm. long, the rachis sparsely puberulent, the inflorescence much 
interrupted, the glomerules sessile and distant, the panicle branched near 
the base, the branches 5-10 mm. long, the bracts about equaling the glomer- 
ules; staminate flowers scarcely 1.5 mm. long, short-pedicellate, 4-parted, 
glabrous or nearly so, the sepals oval; pistillate racemes (in fruit) peduncu- - 
late, 10-12 cm. long, ‘simply racemose, the rachis very sparsely puberulent, 
the pedicels solitary or fasciculate, stout, 5-8 mm. long, glabrate, divaricate 
or ascending; sepals 4, rounded, persistent and spreading in fruit, minutely 
and densely appressed-pilose; fruit dark red, obovoid-globose, about 1 cm. 
long and 8 mm. thick, rounded at apex, glabrous. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,307,021, collected i in wet 
forest on Cerro de las Caricias, north of San Isidro, Province of Her edia, 
Costa Rica, altitude about 2,400 meters, March 11, 1926, by Paul C. Stand- 
ley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 52211). No. 52108, from the same locality, 
belongs to this species. 


Related to P. quaternaria Donn Smith, the most abundant Picramnia of 
Costa Rica, which differs in its less numerous leaflets and simple staminate 
inflorescences. 


Hybanthus serrulatus Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants herbaceous or suffrutescent (only upper part of plant at hand), about 
60 cm. high, the branches green, sparsely or densely incurved-puberulous; 
leaves alternate, the stipules subulate, 1.5—2.5 mm. long, the petioles 4-8 mm. 
long, puberulent; leaf blades ovate, the larger 5 cm. long and 2.3 cm. wide, acu- 
minate, obtuse to acute at base, ‘thin, finely and closely crenate-serrate to 
the base, finely villosulous above with whitish hairs, beneath slightly paler, 
incurved-puberulous, especially on the nerves; flowers numerous, in racemes 
terminating short or elongate axillary branches; racemes 4 cm. long or shorter, 


JUNE 19, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 313 


the pedicels 4-6 mm. long, widely ascending, finely puberulent, the bracts 
leaflike, lanceolate, 1.5 cm. long or shorter, those at the base of the pedicel 
filiform and stipule-like; sepals broadly ovate, obtuse, nearly 2 mm. long, 
green, densely scaberulous-puberulent; lower petal 2.7 mm. long, densely 
puberulent outside, narrowly spatulate, the blade much shorter than the 
claw, the other petals about equaling the sepals; capsule rounded-ovate, 3 
mm. long, scaberulous, minutely rostrate at apex; seeds ochraceous. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 386032, collected in clay soil 
in the Sierra Madre of Michoacan or Guerrero, Mexico, altitude 1,100 meters, 
November 4, 1898, by E. Langlassé (no. 558). 


Related to H. fruticulosus (Benth.) Johnston, of Lower California, in 
which the much narrower leaves are remotely and unequally dentate or 
subentire. 


Begonia Torresii Standl, sp. nov. 


Plants perennial, erect (the base sometimes decumbent), 25-40 cm. high, 
branched, the branches few, ascending, short or elongate, succulent, short- 
villous or glabrate; stipules oblong to ovate, about 1 cm. long, obtuse, green, 
glabrous, tardily deciduous; petioles slender, 4-15 mm. long, short-villous; 
leaf blades oblong or ovate-oblong, sometimes broadest near the apex, 2.5—7 
em. long, 1-3 cm. wide, obtuse to acuminate, oblique at base, rounded on 
one side, very acute on the other, irregularly duplicate-serrate, often coarsely 
so, or laciniate-serrate, especially near the apex, the teeth usually setose- 
mucronate, at first often copiously short-villous on both sides but in age 
usually glabrate; peduncles 1 or few-flowered, slender, erect, equaling or 
longer than the leaves, glabrous, or sparsely villous below; flowers pink; 
bracts oval, 4-6 mm. long, green, glabrous; staminate sepals oval, 6 mm. 
long, glabrous, exceeding the petals; capsule green, glabrous, 2 cm. long and 
wide, rounded at base, abruptly contracted above into a stout beak 1 cm. 
long, the body of the capsule 3-lobed, the lobes divaricate, triangular, abruptly 
contracted into a short horn. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,228,283, collected in wet 
forest at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,900 
meters, March 21, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38561). The following 
additional collections may be cited: 

Costa Rica: Las Nubes, Standley 38599, 38523, 38640, 38816. Southern 
slopes of Turrialba Volcano, near the Finca del Volein de Turrialba, alt. 
2,400 m., Standley 35338. 


The species is named for Prof. Rubén Torres Rojas, in whose company 
part of the material was collected. Begonia Torresii belongs to the section 
Casparya (sometimes recognized as a distinct genus), and is related to B. 
urticae L.f., of Colombia. It is probably the plant reported from Costa 
Rica by A. De Candolle? as Casparya urticae y hispida, although the descrip- 
tion does not agree very well. The Colombian B. urticae differs from B. 
Torresti in its thicker, more obtuse and more densely pubescent, short- 
petioled leaves, and in its pubescent fruit. 


Begonia Valerii Standl., sp. nov. 


Erect herb, 1-1.5 m. high, the stem stout, leafy above, usually simple, 
densely pilose with soft spreading brownish several-celled hairs; stipules 


2 Prodr. 15!: 274. 1864. 


314 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 


lanceolate to ovate, 1.5-2 cm. long, attenuate, densely brown-pilose, soon 
deciduous; petioles slender, 8-17 cm. long, brown-pilose; leaf blades broadly 
oblique-ovate, 16-26 cm. long, 9-16 cm. wide, abruptly cuspidate-acuminate, 
very oblique at base and deeply cordate, densely, finely, and unequally 
dentate, thin, deep green above, thinly pilose with long spreading hairs or 
glabrate, beneath slightly paler, thinly pilose, especially on the nerves, with 
long, rather stiff, spreading hairs, about 10-nerved at base; peduncles 20-30 
em. long, thinly pilose, exceeding the leaves, the cymes lax or dense, several 
times dichotomous, many-flowered, 7-20 cm. broad, the branches sparsely 
pilose, the flowers umbellate at the ends of the branches; pedicels 5-15 mm. 
long, very slender, sparsely pilose; flowers white or pinkish; staminate flower 
with 2 sepals, these suborbicular, about 7 mm. long and wide, rounded at 
apex, rounded to subcordate at base, glabrous outside or sparsely pilose 
near the base; petals none; filaments united at base; capsule 3—lobed, 6 mm. 
long, sparsely pilose or glabrate, 2 of the wings very narrow, the third oval- 
oblong, horizontal, rounded at apex, about 1 cm. wide. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,000, collected in wet 
forest at El Arenal, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude about 500 meters, 
January 19, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 45245). 
The following collections also are referred here: 

Costa Rica: El Arenal, Standley & Valerio 45287. Pejivalle, Province 
of Cartago, Standley & Valerio 46885, 46963, 47112. 


In general appearance this resembles B. znvolucrata Liebm., which has 
glabrous pedicels and usually lobed leaves. B. Biolleyi C. DC., also closely 
related, is separated by its much more copious pubescence, that of the lower 
surface of the leaves consisting of long matted hairs. » 


Begonia Carletonii Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants small, with short, densely leafy rootstocks 2-3 mm. thick, emitting 
numerous long fibrous roots and also slender stolons; stolons rooting at the 
nodes and bearing a single leaf, sometimes also a peduncle, at each node, the 
internodes 5-8 cm. long, sparsely setose-pilose; stipules lanceolate, about 
9 mm. long, attenuate, persistent, thin, brown, pilose; petioles slender, 3.5—5 
em. long, pilose with long slender spreading brown hairs; leaf blades obliquely 
ovate, 6—9.5 cm. long, 2.7—-5 cm. wide, long-acuminate, oblique at base and 
shallowly cordate, the basal lobes broadly rounded, palmately 8-nerved at 
base, the central nerve 3 times dichotomous, thin, sparsely setose-pilose on 
both surfaces, green above, paler beneath, the margin closely, finely, and 
unequally sinuate-dentate; peduncles equaling the leaves, 2 or 3-flowered, 
very slender, sparsely pilose; bracts and bractlets ovate or oblong, obtuse, 3 
mm. long or shorter, erect, persistent; ovary densely villous; staminate flowers 
slender-pedicellate, the 2 sepals rounded-ovate, 6 mm. long, rounded-obtuse, 
rounded at base, sparsely pilose, the petals oblong-spatulate, 6 mm. long, 
rounded at apex, glabrous; capsule 7 mm. long, sparsely pilose, the 3 wings 
very unequal, the largest 6 mm. broad, obtuse, divaricate. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,081,658-659, collected in 
the a of Bocas del Toro, Panama, April 22, 1921, by M. A. Carleton 
(no. 206). 


This begonia, although a small and inconspicuous plant, is exceptionally 


JUNE 19,1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 315 


neat in appearance. It is not closely related to any Central American species 
with which I am acquainted. 


Oreopanax Donnell-Smithii Standl., sp. nov. 


Tree, the young branches very thick, densely leafy, densely stellate-to- 
mentose; bud scales densely tomentose; petioles slender, 6-21 cm. long, 
glabrous; blades of the larger leaves cordate-suborbicular to rounded-ovate, 
19-24 cm. long, 16-18 cm. wide, rounded or very obtuse at apex, broadly 
rounded at base and shallowly cordate (sinus narrow, I—1:5 cm. deep), charta- 
ceous, entire, glabrous, deep green above, pale beneath, 5-nerved at base 
(with 2 inconspicuous slender lower nerves); blades of the leaves at base of 
inflorescence smaller, broadly ovate to oval, rounded at apex, broadly rounded 
‘or emarginate at base; panicles large, pyramidal, 20-30 cm. long and broad, 
the branches stellate-pubescent with minute ochraceous hairs; bracts 1—-1.5 
mm. long, triangular, divaricate; staminate flower heads dense, many-flowered 
subglobose, 5 mm. in diameter, forming lax racemes 5-13 cm. long, the pe- 
duncles stout, divaricate, 5-8 mm. long, stellate-pubescent; bractlets broad, 
rounded at apex, glabrate, ciliolate; corolla lobes 1.5 mm. long, ovate, obtuse; 
filaments slender, exceeding the corolla, the anthers oval, 0.8 mm. long. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 355151, collected at Atirro, 
Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, altitude 600 meters, April, 1896, by John 
Donnell Smith (no. 6533). Here may be referred the following collections: 

Costa Rica: Rio de las Vueltas, Tucurrique, alt. 635 m., Tonduz 13120 
bis. Orosi, alt. 1,000 m., P7ttier 1764. 


This tree is a relative of O. capitatum (Jacq.) Decaisne & Planch., which 
has much narrower leaves. Oreopanar Donnell-Smithit resembles also O. 
costaricense March., but in that the inflorescence is glabrous. 


Oreopanax nubigenum Standl., sp. nov. 


Tree 6-10 m. high, the branchlets thick and stout, densely leafy, very 
sparsely stellate-pubescent or glabrous; scales of the leaf buds rounded, 
glabrous, ciliate, the stipule-like bracts enveloping the budding inflorescence 
as much as 6 em. long, glabrous; petioles slender, 3.5-17 cm. long, glabrous; 
leaf blades broadly deltoid-rounded, often as broad as long, sometimes 
rounded-rhombic, 7.5-15 cm. long and broad, acute or abruptly acute, rarely 
obtuse, at base varying from truncate to obtuse but often very broadly cun- 
eate, entire, coriaceous, glabrous, 5-nerved at base; fruiting panicles 9-17 cm. 
long, rather dense, the branches stellate-pubescent, the bracts 1.5-3 cm. long, 
triangular, acute, ciliate, divaricate; fruiting heads very numerous, containing 
4-8 fruits, the peduncles stout, divaricate, 8-13 mm. long, stellate-pubescent; 
fruits subglobose, 5 mm. long, 6 or 7-celled, glabrous. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,228,409, collected in wet 
forest at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude, 1,800 meters, 
March 21, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38806). Represented also by the 
following collections: 

Costa Rica: Las Nubes, Standley 38711. Cerros de Zurqui, Province of 
Heredia, alt. 2,200 m., Standley & Valerio 50808. 


This, also, is a relative of O. capitatum and of O. Donnell-Smithii. From 
the latter it is distinguished by the acute leaves, which are not cordate at 
base. 


316 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 


Sciadophyllum nicaraguense Standl., sp. nov. 


) 

Shrub 2.5 m. high; petiole 40 cm. long, stout, terete, obscurely strigillose 
or glabrate; petiolules stout, 4.5-13 cm. long, glabrate; leaflets (4 present on 
the single leaf available) oval-oblong, 24-32 cm. long, 9.5-15 em. wide, 
broadly rounded at apex and caudate-cuspidate, the acumen 2—2.5 cm. long, 
attenuate, at base rounded, pergamentaceous, entire, concolorous, glabrous 
above or nearly so, somewhat lustrous, beneath dull, sparsely pubescent with 
minute appressed hairs, the costa and lateral nerves salient on both sur- 
faces, the lateral nerves about 19 on each side, divaricate, curved near the 
margin and irregularly anastomosing, the ultimate nerves prominulous, 
closely reticulate; rachis of the inflorescence (only fragments present) ferrugi- 
nous-tomentulose, the bracts deciduous; umbels few-flowered, the peduncles 
6-8 mm. long, the pedicels about 3 mm. long, ferruginous-tomentulose; ovary 
tomentulose; calyx nearly 2 mm. broad; disk annular, fleshy; styles connate 
into a conic column nearly 2 mm. long. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,082,152, collected at San 
Juan del Norte, Nicaragua, March 2, 1896, by C. L. Smith (no. 78). 


Only incomplete material is available for study, but this is sufficient to 
prove the plant a distinct species. Only one other member of the genus, 
S. systylum Donn. Smith, is known from Central America. It grows in the 
mountains of Costa Rica. The flowers of S. nicaraguense resemble those of 
S. systylum, but the latter plant has copious stellate pubescence. 


Dendropanax monticola Standl., sp. nov. 


Tree 4.5-6 m. high, glabrous throughout, the older branchlets ochraceous ; 
petioles slender, 1.3-6 cm. long; leaf blades ovate or elliptic-ovate, 7-13.5 em. 
long, 2.5-6 em. wide, acuminate or long-acuminate, rounded or very obtuse 
at base, pergamentaceous, entire, deep green above, slightly paler beneath, 
triplinerved, the lateral nerves 4 or 5 on each side, divergent at an angle of 
about 55 degrees, arcuate, slender, irregularly anastomosing close to the margin, 
the costa very slender; umbels few, few-flowered (flowers about 10), arranged 
in a terminal short-pedunculate umbel or in a short raceme; rachis of the 
raceme 1.6—4 cm. long, the umbels on peduncles 1.8—4 cm. long, the peduncles 
naked; pedicels 4-7 mm. long; ovary turbinate, nearly 2 mm. long, the calyx 
entire or remotely denticulate; petals green, obtuse or rounded at apex, 1.5 
mm. long; stamens shorter than the petals; fruit not seen. , 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,305,191, collected in wet 
forest near Fraijanes, Province of Alajuela, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,600 
meters, February 12, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Rubén Torres Rojas 
(no. 47538). The following collections represent the same species: 

Costa Rica: Fraijanes, Standley & Torres 47418. Cerro de las Caricias, 
Province of Heredia, alt. 2,000-2,400 m., Standley & Valerio 52051. La 
Ventolera, southern slope of Volcdn de Pods, Standley 34687. 


The nearest relative of this tree is D. querceti Donn. Smith, also Costa 
Rican, which has usually solitary umbels, and leaves which are broadest at 
or above the middle and narrowed at base. 


Dendropanax praestans Standl., sp. nov. 


Small tree, the branchlets stout, ochraceous, glabrous, densely leafy at the 
ends, the internodes very short; stipules very small, scarious, the margins 


JUNE 19, 1927 -STEJNEGER: A FROG FROM TIBET O17 


laciniate; leaves dimorphous, those of some branches merely dentate, those of 
other branches all or nearly all digitately trilobate, the petioles slender, 2—7 
em. long, glabrous; blades of the simple leaves ovate-oblong to ovate, 8.5-12.5 
em. long, 3.5-6 cm. wide, acuminate, at base obtuse or broadly cuneate, 
irregularly sinuate-serrate, the teeth obtuse, a few of them often much larger 
than the others, the leaves entire near the base or below the middle, 3-nerved 
at base, the lateral nerves about 5 on each side, arcuate-ascending; lobed 
blades about 13 em. long and broad, broadly cuneate at base, lobed to within 
3 cm. of the base, the lobes narrowly oblong, about 2 cm. wide, attenuate to 
apex, irregularly sinuate-serrate, the sinuses between the lobes rounded; leaves 
all subcoriaceous, glabrous, deep green above, paler beneath, minutely 
punctate, the venation prominent beneath; umbels many-flowered, arranged 
in a short-pedunculate terminal umbel, the peduncles of the ultimate umbels 
stout, 1.5-2 em. long, naked or bearing near the base a short cuplike sheath- 
ing bract; pedicels stout, 4-5 mm. long, sparsely and minutely puberulent or 
glabrate; hypanthium hemispheric, the calyx very short, 3 mm. broad; petals 
triangular-oblong, acute, glabrous, 2-2.5 mm. long; stamens shorter than the 
petals, the filaments short, subulate; fruit subglobose, 5-celled, 5-6 mm. 
broad, glabrous; styles united for half their length. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 677609, collected in wet forest 
of Cuesta de las Palmas, southern slope of Cerro de la Horqueta, Chiriquf, 
Panama, altitude 1,700 to 2,100 meters, March, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 3213). 


Here belong, probably, leaf specimens collected by myself (no. 41973) 
at Laguna de la Essuadra, northeast of El Copey, Costa Rica, at about 2,100 
meters. These leaves are very large, about 30 cm. long, and deeply 5-lobed, 
the lobes coarsely serrate, or the terminal one pinnately lobed. 

Among all the other North American species of Dendropanav (Gilibertia) 
this may be recognized at once by the toothed leaves. 


ZOOLOGY.—A new genus and species of frog from Tibet... LEONHARD 
STEJNEGER, U.S. National Museum. 


In his Monograph of the South Asian, Papuan, Melanesian, and 
Australian Frogs of the genus Rana, Boulenger? described (p. 107) a 
series of ten frogs from Southern Tibet under the name of Rana pleskei 
(Guenther). The three localities: Lake Yamdok, 15,000 feet alti- 
tude, Kamba Jong [Kampadzong], and Gyantse are situated south of 
the Brahmaputra on the north slope of the Himalayas, north of the 
frontiers of Sikkim and Bhutan. Guenther’s types came from western 
Szechwan, China. 

The National Museum having recently received from the Rev. D. C. 
Graham good material of the true Nanorana pleskei and also, in ex- 
change with the British Museum through the kindness of H. W. 
Parker, two specimens from Tingri, Tibet, not far from the general 


‘Received May 7, 1927. 
2 Rec. Indian Mus. 20: 1-226. 1920. 


318 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 


region whence came Boulenger’s material, I am in a position to affirm 
that the latter belongs to a new species totally different from Guen- 
ther’s species. In further confirmation, Dr. Thomas Barbour was 
kind enough to lend me for comparison a specimen from Yatong 
[Yathung] in the projecting angle of Himalayan Tibet between Sikkim 
and Bhutan. 


Altirana, new genus 


Diagnosis.—‘‘Vomerine teeth, if present, much reduced; no tympanum; 
no stapes; fingers and toes not dilated at the tips; outer metatarsals separated 
by web in their distal third or fourth only; zygomatic branch of the squa- 
mosal short; omosternal style not forked at the base; terminal phalanges 
obtuse.” (Boulenger.) 


To this should be added that the precoracoid is as well developed as in 
Rana typified by R. temporaria. 


Altirana parkeri, new species 


Diagnosis.—Digits without terminal dilatations and horizontal grooves; 
tympanum absent; outer metatarsals separated in their distal third; no 
dorsolateral glandular fold; no long tooth-like protruberance in front of 
lower jaw; toes fully webbed; subarticular tubercles present but rather flat 
and indistinct; fifth toe slightly shorter than third; second and fourth fingers 
subequal; tibiotarsal articulation reaching the shoulder. 

Type-locality—Tingri, Tibet, at 15,000 feet altitude. 

Type.—U.S. National Museum, No. 72328. 


WAS 2zNeMe M.C. Z. 
No. 72328 fad. No. 11636 oad. 


Measurements Millimeters Millimeters 

‘Lip ‘ofssnout; CO GVEMU arcs erect eo eees Ae eee ee: 25:00 2eaaere 34.00 

Stinky OPE) ee om terior DOrdernvOlmeyienw jn... Canes D200. eee see 5.75 

SESS 1 eS he. SC NOSE EMU cs tee ate, kat cone cee a. Sask ene oe eee Dic2D <a 3.10 
INFOSETIT ONE Voce ete ant Minnis teeth Bie eRe dee ri Penne a eee 2), 25 Neer 2.25 
oneitudimalrdiameter Gimeyen. 2). caer ee eee 3600 4.00 
Distance; betweenimostrls ier. heen ate eee eee 3:00: :aee ee 3.00 
Interorbital awit oy. Sate ok ee Me eee oe ee ee eee 200’, 2s 2.00 
Width otsupperteyelidisicrs. cis toys ne tat Seen ee 2: 50in eae 3.00 
Width rottnende Or. 69. aoc eon sind cee pe seen: 2 even SES gn Ere 12.2550) See 12.00 
FOrenle ey: RAs Gey OER b AE Ee OS ete Ee tee, ee 1600: eee 16.00 
Hind les trompyent, to tip.ot, fourth toe. eee ten eee 44 000 Uses ee 44.00 

nf SST DELON +. Veer - Darah, eat: Ses et ae ee 43.00: 42.00 
Tiras oe ere eee ae ae MOR OR POU PREM Me ari aye 14° 00.2 14.00 
Foot trom: heelstor tip ol founthatoer es saat eee 2600 eee 23.00 


In view of Boulenger’s careful account of the Himalayan specimens a de- 
tailed description of the type is not deemed necessary here, but I would call 
attention to the fact that Boulenger expressly states (p. 108) that males are 
“without secondary sexual characters,’’ while the specimens before me clearly 
demonstrate the presence of a large nuptial pad-like swelling on the inner side 
of the first finger which is covered with minute dark spinules, as are also the 


JUNE 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 319 


bases of the first and second fingers, a feature strongly developed in the 
Museum of Comparative Zoology specimen, and only slightly less in the type. 
The inference is that Boulenger’s specimens were not collected during the 
breeding season. 

Boulenger’s reference of Nanorana pleskez to the genus Rana and especially 
his statement that the pectoral arch is asin Rana temporaria, which has strong 
and well ossified precoracoids, and that the tympanum is completely sup- 
pressed, undoubtedly misled Dr. Vogt into instituting the genus Montorana, 
with the species VM. ahli, for specimens possessing a tympanum and having 
the precoracoid ‘‘very weak, thin as a thread, only imperfectly ossified.”’ 
As a matter of fact, Vogt’s Montorana ahliis the true Nanorana pleskei. 
Dr. Tsarevski, who at my request examined the types of the latter, writes me 
that the precoracoid “‘is very slender, very thin, with slight ossification.” 

It is consequently plain that Boulenger’s Rana pleskez, which he regards as 
forming a distinct subgenus Nanorana, does not belong to it at all. He con- 
siders it as ‘‘a very aberrant species,” ‘‘as a dwarfed, degraded form derived 
from the Rana liebigii group with which it is connected to a certain extent by 
R. blanfordii.”’ It is quite possible that Boulenger is correct in this phylogeny, 
but the characters and combination of characters indicated in the diagnosis 
of his subgenus, and which I have adopted for the genus as above, are 
sufficient to set it off by itself from the rest of the unwieldy genus Rana. 

I have named the species for Dr. H. W. Parker, in charge of the herpetologi- 
cal collection of the British Museum, in recognition of his help in clearing up 
important points connected with this investigation. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 
950TH MEETING 


The 950th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 5, 1927. 

Program: N. H. Heck, Observations while passing through an unusual 
waterspout formation on the Pacific Ocean. The paper describes observa- 
tions in the Pacific Ocean of water spout phenomena while actually in the 
formation by one who is not a meteorologist but who has had occasion during 
survey work in small craft to watch the weather very closely. Four spouts 
are described. ‘The first was normal and of the type ordinarily seen. The 
second was very large, probably 1000 feet in diameter, forming a.cylinder 
dropping from the clouds. With the spout complete the spray could be seen 
rising and falling on the edge of the spout as in a fountain, at least 600 feet 
above the surface of the sea. Surface of the sea was broken water after the 
spout disappeared instead of regular waves due to wind. The third spout 
was seen in process of formation when directly under cloud in which it was 
forming and it was seen that it formed between bands of cloud moving in 


320 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 


opposite directions. Fourth spout was very unusual. The spout tried to 
form and failed and series of bands of clouds reaching to sea surface from the 
cloud revolved around the axis of a cylinder remaining nearly vertical and 
parallel to each other. (Author’s abstract). 

The paper was discussed by Messrs. HryL, HumMpHreys, HAWKESWORTH, 
and AULT. 

W. J. Humpureys, The tornado. ‘The tornado is far more frequent in the 
central and southeastern portions of the United States than in all the rest 
of the world. In tropical regions it is unknown. It occurs in the warm 
section of the cyclone more or less east of the windshift line. 

In those portions of the United States where tornadoes are most frequent 
it appears that anticyclonic winds frequently overrun lower cyclonic winds, 
and produce a windshift line in midair independent, and well ahead, of the 
surface shift. This necessarily leads to strong local convections starting 
from this higher level, and at or near the boundary between the two systems 
of wind, cyclonic and anticyclonic. Furthermore, although the courses of 
these two winds over the earth cross each other, one being from the south-— 
west, say, the other from the northwest, perhaps, nevertheless, if both are 
moving eastward with the same velocity, as may be the case, with reference 
to each other they will be moving in exactly opposite directions. That is, 
they will be flowing beside each other—not through or above and below each 
other—whatever their respective directions over the earth beneath. Con- 
vection between two such currents, dragging in material from each, neces- 
sarily produces rotation, and always 1n the same sense as that of the cyclone. 

In short, then, the tornado is a joint product of cyclone and anticyclone 
generated by convection along a mid-air windshift line. It does not occur 
in tropical regions because there the anticyclone is unknown. (Author’s 
abstract). } 

The paper was discussed by Messrs. FERNER, FRANKENFIELD, HECK, 
Crook, TUCKERMAN, and PAWLING. 

P. R. Heyt, presented an informal communication on the question as to 
the mass equivalent of energy as related to the medium in which energy is 
radiated. It was discussed by Messrs. TucCKERMAN and ADAMS. 


H. E. Merwin, Secretary. 
THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


429TH MEETING 


The 429th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, April 13, 1927, President © 
Butts presiding. 

Informal communications: D. F. Hnwerr described a fault plane exposed 
at the foot of Mt. Parnassus in Greece, which, because it appears less weath- 
ered than nearby inscriptions at Delphi, suggests movement of one or two 
feet within the past 2500 years. 

Program: Professor DonaLp H. McLaueuuin, Harvard University: Geol- 
ogy and physiography of the Andes in Central Peru. The region discussed les 
to the east of the city of Lima and includes the portion of the Andes between 
the well-known mining districts of Cerro de Pasco and Huancavelica. A 
detailed description has been published in the Bulletin of the Geological 
Society of America (34: 591-632. 1924.) and in Informaciones y Memorias 
de la Sociedad de Ingenieros del Peru (37: 69-107. 1925.) The papers are 
based on the work of the geological department of the Cerro de Pasco Copper 
Corporation. 


JUNE 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY o2l 


The dominant rocks of the region are Mesozoic limestones and sandstone. 

They rest on somewhat metamorphosed Palezoic sediments, and are uncon- 
formably overlain by red shales and sandstones with various conglomerates 
which are provisionally placed in the Tertiary. Volcanic rocks (mostly pyro- 
clastic) occur as an extensive formation between the Paleozoic sediments and 
the lowest limestones of the Mesozoic, and a later important accumulation 
of voleanic rock is found at the top of the geologic column, resting upon 
Tertiary (?) red beds. All the formations are intruded by numerous stocks 
and irregular masses of igneous rock, generally porphyritic in texture. Dior- 
ite, trachyte and quartz monzonite have been observed. The important 
deposits of copper and silver, for which the region is famous, are genetically 
related to small stocks of these relatively late intrusives. 
_ The present Andes were formed by the warping uplift of a region of low 
relief, which was produced by long erosion that followed the last period of 
intensive deformation, probably in the early Tertiary. The uplift took place 
in three or more stages, and in certain areas appears to have been accom- 
panied by some faulting. The ancient surface has been almost obliterated by 
the violent erosion on the steep western side of the range, but can still be seen 
in large areas situated between the great canyons of the streams of the eastern 
drainage which dissect the central plateaux. Glaciation formerly extended 
as low as 12,000 feet in favorable places and is responsible for the details of the 
topography in the summit regions. (Author’s abstract.) 


430TH MEETING 


The 430th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, April 27, 1927, President 
ButTTs presiding. 

Program: F. L. Hess: Notes on Florida phosphate deposits. The produc- 
tion of phosphate from Florida is about 84 per cent of the entire United States 
production. - 

From limited observations near Bartow the phosphate gravel of the Bone 
Valley formation seems to be rolled pebbles, possibly from the Ocala lime- 
stone exposed near Dunellon, although there is a possibility that the 
pebbles may have come from phosphatic limestone in the lower part of 
the Alum Bluff formation. The phosphate pebbles are the only gravel found 
in a large area of Florida, and were apparently laid down in salt water, as 
shown by the presence of great numbers of dugong bones and shark teeth, 
but were close to land, as shown by the presence of numerous mastodon bones. 
It is not probable that the dugong bones were weathered from the underlying 
limestone because in places a number of ribs are sometimes found close to- 
gether and apparently in their natural spatial relationships. 

The phosphate pebbles are being leached, and apparently amorphous 
calcium phosphate is being deposited either in an irregular sheet under the 
richest beds of phosphate pebbles or in the sand along cracks carrying the 
drainage from the pebble beds. The fluorine content of the land pebbles 
ranges from about 14 to 33 per cent, and is utilized in Denmark and Belgium 
for the manufacture of sodium-fluo-silicate. The product is shipped to the 
United States, and a present attempt to have the duty on the material raised 
may result in the loss to Florida of its foreign phosphate trade. 

As the phosphate is very cheap ($3 to $5 a ton) and is the only gravel to be 
obtained in a large area of Florida, itis used for concrete work and for macad- 
amizing roads. (Author’s abstract.) 

G.F. Loucuuin: Ore at Deep Levels in the Cripple Creek District, Colorado. 
Study of deep mine workings in the southeast quarter of the Cripple Creek 


322 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 


volcanic breccia has on the whole verified the conclusions reached by Lindgren 
and Ransome in 1906 (U.S. Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 54), but has found that. 
veins of telluride ores identical in mineral composition with those mined at 
comparatively shallow levels continue along master fissures to more than 
3000 feet below the present surface or more than 5000 feet below the original 
surface of the voleano. The distribution of ore shoots is controlled by fissuring 
which was developed intermittently in part by local disturbances within the 
volcanic mass and in part by regional disturbance. A local structural feature 
of much importance is the small neck of basaltic breccia, along the margins of 
which the famous Cresson orebody has been mined. 

The process of vein formation, though complicated in detail, is regarded 
for practical purposes as having taken place in three stages: the first char- 
acterized mainly by dark purple dense fluorspar accompanied by quartz 
and relatively coarse grained pyrite; the second by lighter purple fluorspar, 
quartz, dolomite, celestite, roscoelite, and tellurides; the third by vug linings 
of coarsely to finely crystalline quartz, fine drusy pyrite, a little fluorspar, 
and in the Dante mine considerable cinnabar. 

Of special interest is a low grade pyritic ore formed in a mass of breccia 
in the Dante and Cresson mines and attributed to a process similar to ‘‘miner- 
alization stoping” as recently described by Locke (Econ. Geol. 31: 481). 
Ore shoots in the vicinity pitch in the direction of this breccia, which is 
believed to lie above a local source of ore-forming solution. Similar miner- 
alized breccia has been found to the south in the Roosevelt Tunnel and the 
Ajax Mine. 

The main deep vein in the Portland mine follows a fissured phonolite dike 
along the granite-breccia contact which here trends N. N. W. This trend is a 
local deflection along a contact of generally east-west trend and northward 
pitch. The productive part of the vein pitches northward parallel to the con- 
tact, and for the most part has a simple vein structure; but where the granite- 
breccia contact turns westward, the vein branches. The main part of it turns 
with the phonolite dike along a N. N. E. fissure. The N. N. W. part con- 
tinues but is of comparatively low grade, but the ground between the two 
branches is cut by minor parallel N. N. E. veins which are productive for 
short distances. The structure here resembles that of the rich Captain and 
Hidden Treasure veins described by Lindgren and Ransome. 

The northward pitch of the main deep Portland Ore shoot is in contrast to 
the southward pitch of ore shoots in the Bull Hill area to the north. Where 
the vein fissures of Bull Hill have been followed northward on the deepest 
levels of the Eagles Mine, they are tight and generally non-productive. Evi- 
dence as a whole indicates a downward convergence of productive ground 
southward from Bull Hill and northward from the Portland mine, towards a 
local source beneath the Last Dollar and Modoc mines. Future production 
from such deep ground depends more on cost of mining than on the downward 
persistence of telluride ore. (Awthor’s abstract.) 

Parker D. Trask and Kirrury F. Maruer: Stratigraphy of the Lake 
Ainslie Region, Cape Breton Island, Nova Scotia. The results presented here 
are due to joint work by the two authors during the summer of 1925, but the 
lot of obtaining the majority of the stratigraphic details fell to Mr. Trask, 
Mr. Mather concentrating his attention on unravelling the complicated struc- 
ture of the region. The Lake Ainslie Region is located in central western 
Cape Breton Island, some 40 miles northeast of the Strait of Canso and about 
75 miles west of Sydney. The following generalized section, based chiefly on 
sections made along the several Mabou Rivers, summarizes briefly the stratig- 


JUNE 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 323 


raphy of the region. The formations, to which local names have been given, 
are for the most part continental in origin and vary considerably in thickness 
from the figures given. The formations described in the pioneer work of 
Fletcher (Can. Geol. Surv. Ann. Repts. 1875-1877 and later years) are sub- 
divided, and although not personally compared, analogies between the for- 
mations of the Lake Ainslie Region and those of the Sydney Region, described 
by J. E. Hyde (Can. Geol. Surv. Summ. Rept. 1912: 392) and Hayes and Bell 
(Can. Geol. Surv. Mem. 133. 1923), are pointed out. 


GENERALIZED SECTION OF FORMATIONS IN THE LAKE AINSLIE REGION, CAPE BRETON 
IstaAnD, Nova Scotia 


Pennsylvanian: 
Port Hood coal-measures: Spee 
Highly cross-bedded sandstones and shales with intercalated coal seams. 
MieknesssnOleMeaASUMed! o. ye Hoes sb hs os Seskioe cae Balok ten ere ade bw aigioe wie (?) 


Important unconformity. (Port Hood measures rest on all formations from 
Super-Mabou to the Judique series. ) 
Pennsylvanian (?) (In part perhaps equivalent to the Pt. Edward formation of 
the Sydney Region, which according to Hyde is Pennsylvanian.): 
Super-Mabou beds: 
Sandstones and shales, predominantly redincolor....................0005- 1500 
Mabou formation: 
Chiefly gray shales, almost fissile. Numerous intercalated gray sandstones 
containing plant fragments. Some reddish zones and one zone, 15 feet 
thick and 500 feet above base of formation, of alternating laminae of gyp- 


SEED Derm (Vee FS) ANT Vee Re ae CR i a Se 1500 
MacFarlane red beds: 
Red sandstones and shales. Some cross-bedding, but mostly fairly well 
SS PESHUTIN@OI Re ho ag Re IETS ok Rr ee rca ea ere meee 1000 


Middle Bridge formation: 
' Chiefly dark gray thin-bedded shales, containing numerous creamy white 


thin limestone layers, some of which weather in a peculiar mammillary 
Ages tL OTe RT to, Peg te AN oe SB Sy heat Se cogs Tals Na, tay eta) Shade sand. eRe 250 
Total Pennsylvanian (?) 4250 
Unconformity. 
Mississippian: 
Judique series. (In part at least of Windsor age. Comparable to the Windsor 
series of Hyde at Sydney. Core drilling recently conducted by Mr. K. C. 
Heald indicate that the Judique series is thicker and contains considerably 
more gypsum and limestone than given here. ): 


Red sandstone and shale. Gypsum near base................-.2+-00e ees 500 
Black oolitic limestone, in places characterized by an abundance of Nucula? 5-15 
Redesamdstomesamed ssi alei i ame hen asic et ec ins die we ec eee 300-600 
Yellow impure limestone and limestone breccia, which weathers in a pecu- 

liam honeycomb) pattern. Fossiliferousim places. ......5..-....:----->-: 25—40 
Red sandstoneand shale. Somesy psu... 42... .--. 2 i ano eee ee 100-200 
ibinelylamunatedteravgshalecn. 1. skal ols, o.0 wad BEd occ c= Wale ob eiclete lace hermes 30 
Bentonite and gray tuff. Found on Baddeck River..................0.0000- 0-1 
Finely laminated massive gray limestone. Very persistent and easily recog- 

nized by tts peculiar ribbon=hikeystrucbure.... ...... desc. ss e+ se dane « 30 
Redssandscomerancrshal wee wmee: cos 2 Co. 3 a sion ws cache os ekemeie es ae eeaeee =< 150 


Total Mississippian 1550 


324 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 


Mississippian (*): 
Dunbar series. (Comparable to middle division of Hyde’s Mississippian 


at Sydney.): 
Ainslie sandstone: 

Fine to medium-grained cross-bedded sandstone....................0- 700 
Gray and greenish sandstone and shale zones, the sandstones several hun- 

dred feet thick and the shales less than 100 feet. .......................... 1500 
Chocolate and dark red cross-bedded sandstones and shales.............. 1200 


Total Dunbar series 3400 


Kewstoke conglomerate. (Comparable to the ‘‘Carboniferous conglomerate”’ 
series of Fletcher and Hyde.): 
Chiefly massive coarse-grained arkosic sandstones and conglomerates which 
become progressively more fine-grained toward the top. Pinkish in some 
zones. Layers of impure coal 1000 feet from the top of the formation on 
S..E. Mabou Rivers. 2060 oo el f eee OS ee 150-3000 


Total Kewstoke conglomerate 3000 


Pre—Carboniferous: 
Marbles, quartzites, gneisses, granites, volcanics, and chlorite schists....... (7) 


The yellow fossiliferous, cavernous limestone occurring in the middle of the 
Judique series at Middle River yielded the following fossils, which have been 
identified by Professor P. E. Raymond, of Harvard University, and are 
thought by him to be more closely allied with the Windsor fauna of the 
Magdalen Islands than with that of the Windsor District of Nova Scotia and 
to be of Middle or Upper Mississippian age: Productus tenuicostiformis Beede 
(common), P. dawsoni Beede, Dielasma cf. D. sacculus (Martin) (common), 
Composita dawsoni (Hall and Clarke) (rare), Aviculopecten sp., Parallelodon 
dawson Beede (rare). A very similar fauna was found by Hayes (Can. Geol. 
Surv. Summ. Rept. 1917 (F): 21) in a brown cavernous limestone near 
Sydney. (Author’s abstract.) . 

W. P. Wooprine, W. W. Rusey, Secretarzes. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


Net M. Jupp, Curator of American Archeology, United States National 
Museum, left Washington May 28th to complete his explorations at Pueblo 
Bonito, New Mexico, under the auspices of the National Geographic Society. 
This season’s expedition is the seventh sent by the Society for the purpose. 
of recovering and recording the story of this prehistoric Indian village. 


page 


this 


month. 


+ 
s 


Me) 
é 
oe 


. 


ie) 
: 
; 
3 
g 
Z 


ppear on 


-seventh of each 


eties will 


oci 


of 


bi 


3 


~ 


CONTENTS 


ORIGINAL PapERS 


Page 

Botany.—New plants from Central America. IX. Pau. C. STanDLEY........... 309 

Zoology.—A new genus and species of frog from Tibet. L&oNHARD STEJNEGER... 317 
PROCEEDINGS 

Philosophical ‘Saciety.. (2:50. 0 eo eG Se ue ea ee 319 

Geological Society ios. 4 ee ee es Or ante elon lar Rie eit nee 320 

Screntiric Notns anp News (0006062) Peseta ae ee 2p ele ie ee . 324 


OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY 


President: ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. 
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TucKERMAN, Bureau of Standards. 
Recording Secretary:*W. D. LamBert, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 
Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 


oe ae JULY 19, 1927 pas A NOT 


ee sont ee yy, iy 


=e é 
JOURNAL” JUL 9.1977 : 
ee Be. 


Ny aad es 
OF THE ~STieway MU2= 


LEM ee 


NASHINGTON ACADEMY 
OF SCIENCES 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


: J. Peters Agnes CHASE Joun B, Rezsipe, Jr. 
t OF 1 Siig Lares taco a BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 


"ASSOCIATE EDITORS 
<4 H. Apams Ss. A. Hogue 


PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY : ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


_E. A. GotpMan G. W. Srosz 


' BIOLOGICAL SOCIBTY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


R. F. Grices : J. R. Swanton 
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


Roger C. WELxLs 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
EXCEPT IN JULY, UGUST: AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 


cay BY THE 


"WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


AL Sapih 


Mr. RoyaL anp Gurtrorp AvEs. 
Batrtimore, MARYLAND 


et, 


‘ntered. as Second (¢ es: January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
i Herds of August 2 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
Tee Se Section 1103, Ast of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 


This Jo OURNAL, the oticint organ of ihe sivaahington’ in 
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To th 
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members: he 
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanatin 

(8) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affi 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. ‘ 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except 
whemit appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calen 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the edit 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from 
issue of the J OURNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respecti ) 


aren § anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: hey should be 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential han 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To. 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that. footnotes be mn 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. aoe 
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text fi 
or diagrams of simple character. ee 
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be. sent te 
unless requested. It is urged that augtead meas be submitted in final form; 4 
will exercise due care in seeing that c opy is followed é | 
reat Reprinis.—Reprinta will be furnished at the following schedule of 


Copies 4:pp.  —s- & pp. 12 pp. 3 16 pp. Cover 
50 $ .85 ~©$1.65 $2.55 $3 .25 $2.00 : 
100 ~=——é«z212. 90 3.80 — 4,75 6.00 2.50 
150 2.25 ~~ 4.30 6.29 6.50 3.00 
200.—isa2.50—t—“‘<‘éwké«wS SO 5.75 900% = = ASO 
250 3.00 ie 5.30 6. 25 De: 7.50 ee ie (4.00 — 


An additional charge of 25 ae will be made for each split page. a : ae : : 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive > pagi- 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. | : 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request : for extra copies: or reprints 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. — Be ha ae 
The rate of Subscription per SoluMe SS ve sa ‘$6. 0° 
Semi-monthly numbers. 260.2. sos fs sc cde ch es pepe one evo nae hades on ae 


Monthly numbers... 0.000 iieteeeeieceeeteseeceetsicenetsss OD 


Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences,’ ” ond 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, ae Cc 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, onde . 
Exchanges.—The JourNau does not exchange with other. publications. _ 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made 
within thirty days after date of the isllowase issue, NOt 


*Volume I, however, from June AP 1911, to ficcoutbes 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, ‘Spesal: rates — 
; are given to members of scientific nocistics affiliated withthe Academy. 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vou. 17 Juty 19, 1927 No. 138 


OCEANOGRAPHY—Current harmonic constants for San Bernardino 
Strait, P. I. L. P. Disnry, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey. 
(Communicated by H. A. Marmer.)! 


Although harmonic analyses of the tide have been made for numer- 
ous places in the Philippine Islands it was not until 1926 that a com- 
prehensive series of current observations in San Bernardino Strait 
furnished sufficient data for deriving the first harmonic constants 
for the currents in any of the waterways of the archipelago. 

These observations were obtained between May 15 and June 14, 
1926, by Lieutenant F. S. Borden from the Coast and Geodetic Survey 
Steamer FATHOMER. ‘The station was located midway between Cala- 
yuan and Totoog Points in fifty-five fathoms of water. Observations 
were made every half hour throughout the series with standard 15 
foot current pole so weighted on the end as to float with but one foot 
out of water. For the greater depths, 20, 50, and 80 feet, Gurley cur- 
rent meters were used. The directions of the current were obtained 
both by pelorus and compass methods and by angles on distant trian- 
culation stations. 

A harmonic analysis of these observations covering a 29 day series 
beginning May 15, 1926, has recently been made by the Coast and 
Geodetic Survey. The analysis is based upon the hourly velocities 
of the current as obtained from both meter (20 foot depth) and pole 
observations and consequently represents an average depth of 133 
feet. 

The results derived from the analysis are given in Table 1. The 
current amplitudes are expressed in knots, and the epochs, as custom- 
ary, are referred to the local meridian. The more important compo- 
nents were derived from a direct analysis and cleared for the effects of 


1 Received May 21, 1927. 
325 


326 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


other components. The secondary components were derived by in- 
ference from the principal components. ‘These inferred values are 
enclosed in parentheses. 


TABLE 1.—Current Harmonic Constants, SAN BERNARDINO Strait, P. J. 


COMPONENT lal kK COMPONENT ; H K 
knots degrees knots degrees 

th (0.100) (242) . 00 (0.055) (262) 
Ki 1.776 223 Py (0.588) (223) 
Ks (0.386) (257) Q1 (0.268) (165) 
Le (0.086) (246) 2Q (0.036) (145) 
My (0. 114) (203) Rp (0.012) (257) 
Mp 3.047 232 Se 1.418 257 

M4 0.1438 328 S4 0.052 281 

Mg 0.044 338 Te (0.084) (257) 
Ms 0.032 108 Ae (0.021) (243 ) 
No 0.360 217 bs (0.073) (206) 
Qn (0.048) (203) 5 (0.070) (219) 
01 1.382 184 p1 (0.052) (167) 


Through the use of these constants the currents in San Bernardino 
Strait can now be readily predicted on the tide predicting machine in a 
manner analogous to that used in the prediction of tides. 

The constants furthermore furnish a ready means of determining 
the characteristics of the current in San Bernardino Strait, the princi- 
pal constants alone being sufficient for an approximate determination. 
Thus, approximately, it is seen that the average maximum velocity of 
the current is about 3 knots, while the strength of current at the times 
of spring and neap tides is about 43 and 14 knots, respectively. The 
ages as derived from the constants are: phase age 24.6 hours, parallax 
age 27.6 hours, and diurnal age 35.5 hours. The type of current is 
determined to be of the mixed type, the ratio of K,; + 0, to M, being 
1.04. 

With regard to the type of current, the observations bring to light the 
existence of a nontidal current in San Bernardino Strait which materi- 
ally affects the tidal current in the Strait, especially near the times of 
the moon’s maximum north and south declinations. On such days 
the large diurnal inequality in conjunction with the southwesterly 
nontidal current causes the current to flood for the greater part of the 
day with varying velocity. This results in one ebb and a flood with 
two maximum velocities and an intervening minimum velocity. 

A reduction of the observations shows an average maximum flood 

velocity of about 4.6 knots and an average maximum ebb velocity of 


JULY 19, 1927 KILLIP: NEW SPECIES CORDIA AND TOURNEFORTIA BA | 


about 3.7 knots. The average strength of the minimum flood was 
found to be about 1.3 knots. Considering the minimum flood as a 
negative ebb the average velocity of the maximum ebb would be about 
2.2 knots. ‘This indicates that during the period of.observations the 
southwesterly nontidal current was flowing with a velocity of about 1.2 
knots, which agrees with the velocity as determined directly from the 
stencil sums for components. 


BOTANY .—WNew species of Cordia and Tournefortia from northwest- 
ern South America... ExuswortH P. Kinurp, U.. 8. National 
Museum. 3 


A revision of the Andean species of two genera of Boraginaceae, 
Cordia and Tournefortia, has been prepared by the writer. Publica- 
tion of this is being postponed in order to include in the treatment the 
results of study of numerous specimens of these genera collected by 
the recent Killip-Smith expedition to eastern Colombia. The new 
species so far noted in preparing this revision, ten of Cordia and seven 
of Tournefortia, are here published in advance. 


Cordia crassifolia Killip, sp. nov. 


Tree (?); branchlets terete, densely short-rufo-hirsutulous or tomentose; 
petioles about 1 cm. long, stout; leaves oblong-obovate, 10 to 15 cm. long, 
4 to 7 em. wide, obtuse or acutish at apex, gradually narrowed to a rounded 
base, entire, conspicuously nerved (lateral nerves 7 or 8 pairs), reticulate- 
veined, thick-coriaceous, lustrous and scabrid with short subappressed white 
hairs above, rufo-hirtellous and smooth beneath; inflorescence much shorter 
than the leaves (5 cm. long in type though evidently not fully developed), 
subdichotomous, the branches and calyces densely subappressed-ferruginous- 
hirsute, the flowers sessile, borne in clusters of 4 to 6 at ends of branches of 
inflorescence; calyx cylindric, 3 to 4 mm. long, indistinctly ribbed, the teeth 
minute; corolla lobes obtuse; anthers linear-oblong. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 940117, collected in Colombia or 
Ecuador, by F. C. Lehmann (no. 6611). 


The corolla is not sufficiently developed for the positive determination 
of the position of this species, but the small, indistinctly ribbed calyx suggests 
a relationship with C. opaca and C. sulcata, rather than with C. alliodora or 
C. alba. | 

Cordia colombiana Killip, sp. nov. 

Tree; branchlets terete, dark chestnut-brown, glabrous or very sparingly 
pilosulous toward ends; petioles stout, about 1 cm. long, slightly sulcate, 
glabrous; leaves ovate or ovate-oblong, 10 to 18 em. long, 4 to 8 em. wide, 


abruptly acuminate at apex (acumen about 2 em. long), rounded or sub- 
cuneate at base, entire, conspicuously nerved and veined (principal lateral 


1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- 
ceived June 6, 1927. 


328 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


nerves 4 or 5 to a side), coriaceous or subcoriaceous, lustrous, glabrous or 
minutely hispidulous; inflorescence terminal, cymose, the cymes subdichoto- 
mous, up to 4 cm. wide, the branches ferruginous-hirsutulous, the peduncles 
short; calyx cylindric-obovoid in bud, broadest at apex, at length cylindric- 
turbinate, 4 to 5 mm. long, densely ferruginous-tomentose, the lobes deltoid, 
1 to 1.5 mm. long; corolla white, funnel-shaped, 6 to 8 mm. long, about 3 
mm. wide at throat, glabrous, the lobes orbicular, 2 mm. wide; stamens 
exserted; styles filiform, exserted, the divided portion equaling the united 
portion. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1, 140 ,963, collected in thicket, 
between San Antonio and Rio Ortega, Department El Cauca, Colombia, 
altitude ie to 2300 meters, July 2, 1922, by F. W. Pennell and E. P. Killip 
(no. 8024). 


The foliage of this species is very similar to that of C. bogotensis, a plant 
with flowers fully three times as large, and differing in other details. 


Cordia allartii Killip, sp. nov. 


Tree(?); branchlets terete, glabrous; leaves oblong or oblong-lanceolate, 
15 to 25 cm. long, 8 to 12 em. wide, attenuate-acuminate at apex, rounded at 
base, entire, conspicuously nerved and veined (principal lateral nerves 5 or 6 
pairs, distant, arcuate-ascending), coriaceous, lustrous on both surfaces, 
glabrous, occasionally minutely hispidulous on nerves beneath; inflorescence 
cymose, about 4 cm. long, the branches and calyces densely ferruginous- 
tomentose, the flowers sessile, in clusters of 3 or 4; calyx obovoid in bud, at 
length cylindric-campanulate, 4 to 4.5 mm. long, 3 to 4 mm. wide at throat, 
the lobes ovate-deltoid, 2 mm. long, acute; corolla tube as long as calyx, the 
lobes orbicular-ovate, 2.5 to 3 mm. long, rounded, reflexed; stamens not 
exserted, the anthers oblong, 1 mm. long; ovary lance-ovoid. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,230,256, collected at Colonia 
Tovar, Venezuela, altitude 1800 to 2000 meters, December, 1924, by A. 
Allart (no. 352). 


Related to C. colombiana but with broadly campanulate calyx and much 
broader corolla lobes. 


Cordia macrodonta Killip, sp. nov. 


Tree or shrub; branchlets quadrangular, ferruginous-puberulent and 
finely pilosulous, scabrous; petioles 0.5 to 1 cm. long; leaves broadly ovate, 
6 to 11 em. long, 4 to 6.5 em. wide, abruptly short-acuminate at apex, nar- 
rowed to petiole, coarsely and sharply serrate-dentate except in lower third, 
penninerved (principal nerves 6 or 7 to aside, the secondary nerves prom- 
inent), membranous, short-strigillose-hispid above (hairs swollen at base), 
finely pilosulous beneath; inflorescence paniculate-cymose, the peduncles 
about 4 em. long, the flowers borne singly near the ends of the branches; 
calyx globose-turbinate, about 2 mm. long, appressed-ferruginous-strigillose, 
the teeth triangular, acute, 0.5 mm. long; corolla tube cylindric, about 3.5 
mm. long, the lobes orbicular; stamens attached at throat of tube, scarcely 
1 mm. long, the anthers oblong, less than 0.5 mm. long; fruit ovoid-conie, 
5 mm. long, 4 mm. wide, glabrous. 

Type in the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 548642, collected at 
San Antonio, Province Huancabamba, Dept. Puira, Peru, altitude 1200-1300 
meters, March, 1912, by A. Weberbauer (no. 6015). 


JULY 19, 1927 KILLIP: NEW SPECIES CORDIA AND TOURNEFORTIA 329 


Belonging to DeCandolle’s section Corymbosae this species is at once dis- 
tinguished from other representatives of the section by the coarsely serrate 


leaves. 
Cordia coriacea Killip, sp. nov. 


Tree (2): branchlets subangular, sulcate, finely canescent-puberulent; 
petioles 5 to 10 mm. long, canaliculate, suleate: leaves ovate-elliptic or ovate- 
oblong, 10 to 15 cm. long, 5 to 7 cm. wide, attenuate-acuminate at apex, 
cuneate and often oblique at base, entire, penninerved (midnerve strongly 
sulcate, the lateral nerves 6 or 7 to a side, ascending, arcuate toward ends), 
inconspicuously closely reticulate-veined, coriaceous, above sublustrous, 
glabrescent, minutely tomentellous on nerves, beneath brownish-puberulent 
on nerves and veins, elsewhere softly grayish-tomentose; peduncles about 
5 em. long; inflorescence about 4 times dichotomous, cano-puberuJent, the 
flowers sessile, in clusters of 3 or 4 at ends of the divaricate branches of the 
inflorescence; calyx turbinate, 4 to 4.5 mm. long, 2.5 to 3 mm. wide, slightly 
suleate, cano-puberulent, the lobes lanceolate, 1 mm. long, acute, erect; 
corolla lobes linear-oblong, 2 mm. long, 1 mm. wide, obtuse; stamens exserted, 
the anthers linear, 1 mm. long; ovary depressed-globose; style 3 mm. long, 
exserted. 

Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,133,957, collected at Charo- 
pampa, near Mapiri, Bolivia, altitude 570 meters, November, 1907, by O. 
Buchtien (no. 2040). 

The sulcate calyx places this species near C’. opaca and C. crassifolia. The 
calyx, however, is turbinate rather than cylindric, and the shape of the leaves 


and nature of the indument are quite different than in either of these. 


Cordia venosa Killip, sp. nov. 


Tree; branchlets terete (younger portions subangular and sulcate), densely 
rufo-tomentose; petioles 1 to 2 em. long; leaves ovate or ovate-oblong, 10 to 
20 cm. long, 7 to 8 cm. wide, acute or attenuate-acuminate at apex, rounded 
at base, entire, strongly nerved and veined (principal lateral nerves 6 to a 
side, arcuate-ascending), reticulate-veined, subcoriaceous, above dark green 
(almost black when dry), rufo- tomentose on principal nerves, finely hir- 
sutulous on secondary nerves and veins, the indument beneath similar but 
much denser; inflorescence cymose, the branches dichotomous, densely rufo- 
tomentose, the peduncles about 6 cm. long; calyx broadly ovoid in bud, at 
length cylindric-campanulate, 4 to 5 mm. long, about 3 mm. wide, rufo- 
tomentose, the lobes deltoid, 1.5 to 2 mm. long, acute; corolla pale greenish 
white, pilosulous at throat within, the lobes oblong-spatulate, 4 mm. long, 
2.5 mm. wide, rounded or truncate at apex, dark-veined; stamens scarcely 
exserted, 2 mm. long, the anthers ovate-oblong, 2 mm. long; ovary conical, 
longer than style. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,140,957, collected at San 
José, above San Antonio, Department El Cauca, Colombia, altitude 2300 to 
2500 meters, July 1, 1922, by F. W. Pennell (no. 7657). 


In the shape and texture of the leaves this species closely resembles C. 
bogotensis and C. colombiana. From both it is readily distinguished by the 
dense indument on the branchlets and the under surface of the leaves. The 
flowers are much smaller than those of C. bogotensis, and the shape of the 

calyx and corolla lobes is different from those in C. colombiana. 


300 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


Cordia mollissima Killip, sp. nov. 


Shrub, thickly and softly lanate-tomentose throughout; branches terete; 
petiole up to 1 cm. long; leaves ovate-lanceolate, up to 7 cm. long, 3.5 cm. 
wide, acute or acuminate at apex, rounded or acutish at base, serrulate except 
at base, penninerved (primary nerves about 8 to a side), reticulate-veined 
(nerves and veins deeply impressed above), dark green above (mid-nerve 

paler), paler beneath (veins darker); inflorescence contracted supra-axillary 
few-flowered cymes, before anthesis nearly globose heads, the branches 
becoming evident after anthesis; calyx campanulate, about 2 mm. wide, 
lobed one-third to one-half the length, the lobes deltoid, acute; corolla cy- 
lindric, 3 to 3.5 mm. long, shallowly lobed; stamens and style about 1.5 
mm. long; anthers ovate-oblong, 0.5 mm. long, scarcely exserted. 

Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 
548725, collected near Taen, Province Taen, Department Cajamarca, Peru, 
altitude 1200 to 1300 meters, April, 1912, by A. Weberbauer (no. 6202). 
Duplicate in Berlin herbarium. 

Peru: Chachapoyas, Mathews 3134 (K). 


Related to C. corymbosa but differing in the dense white indument and 
in the closely serrulate leaves. 


Cordia krauseana Killip, nom. nov. 


Cordia pauciflora Krause, Bot. Jahrb. Engler 37: 629. 1906, not Cordia 
pauciflora Rusby, 1896. 7 


Cordia asterothrix Killip, sp. nov. 


Shrub 1.5 to 2 meters high, much-branched, the branches smooth or slightly 
scabrid, more scabrid and cano-stellate-tomentose toward tips; petioles 5 to 8 
mm. long; leaves ovate or ovate-lanceolate, 2.5 to 5 cm. long, 1 to 3 cm. wide, 
obtuse or acutish at apex, rounded at base, abruptly cuneate to petiole, 
irregularly crenate-serrate, densely stellate-hispidulous above, also tomentose 
when young, cano-stellate-tomentose beneath; peduncles up to 6 cm. long, 
cano-stellate-tomentose; heads 1.5 to 2.5 em. in diameter, densely flowered; 
calyx campanulate, 5 to 7 mm. long, densely cano-stellate-lanate, the teeth 
filiform, 2.5 to 3.5 mm. long; corolla white, the tube subequal to calyx, 
glabrous, the limb rotate, 7 to 10 mm. wide; anthers exserted, ovate-oblong, 
about 1 mm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,043,330, collected along 
Rio Limén, Venezuela, May 10, 1917, by H. M. Curran and M. Haman 
(no. 808). 

CoLomBiaA: Department Huila, Quebrada de Angeles to Rio Cabrera, 
450-500 meters, Rusby & Pennell 333 (N, Y). 


This differs from C. macrocephala in not having the corolla tube exserted 
beyond the calyx, and in the white, rather than rust-colored, indument of the 
calyx. 

Cordia rosei Killip, sp. nov. 


Small tree or shrub, 4 to 5 meters high, much branched, the branchlets 
terete, dark brown, glabrous, the younger parts ferruginous-short-hirsute; 


2 The various herbaria at which specimens have been seen by the writer are thus 
indicated: F, Field Museum of Natural History; K, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew; 
N, U.S. National Herbarium; Y, New York Botanical Garden. 


suLY 19, 1927 KILLIP: NEW SPECIES CORDIA AND TOURNEFORTIA ool 


petioles 1 to 2 cm. long, straight or slightly geniculate near base; leaves ovate- 
lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate, up to 9 cm. long, 5 cm. wide, acute or acu- 
minate at apex, usually tapering at base to petiole, crenate-serrate, entire at 
base, penninerved (primary nerves 5 to 7 to a side, furcate toward margin), 
reticulate-veined, above rugulose, scabrous and sparingly hispidulous, 
beneath lanate, densely subappressed-pilose on the nerves and veins with 
glistening whitish hairs; inflorescence spicate, the spikes terminal on the 
branches or on short branchlets, not branched, cylindric, 3 to 6 em. long 
(peduncle usually shorter than spike), up to 1.5 cm. thick, very densely 
flowered, ferruginous-tomentose throughout; calyx campanulate, about 3 
mm. wide at throat, 5-lobed about a third its length, the lobes ovate-deltoid, 
acute; corolla cylindric-campanulate, 4 to 5 mm. long, about 4 mm. wide at 
throat, shallowly lobed, glabrous; stamens 2 mm. long, the anthers ovate, 
slightly exserted; style about 2 mm. long, cleft about half its length. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,021,916, collected at Hacienda 
de Licay, vicinity of Huigra, Province of Chimborazo, Ecuador, August 20, 
1918, by J. N. Rose and G. Rose (no. 22247). 

Ecuapor: Province Chimborazo, Huigra, Rose & Rose 23860 (N); 
Hitchcock 20387 (N). Province Tungurahua, Ambato, Pachano 219 (N). 


Allied to the Peruvian C. subserrata, this proposed species differs in hav- 
ing very compactly flowered spikes and smaller corollas. 


Cordia micayensis Killip, sp. nov. 


Shrub; branchlets terete below, angular toward tip, ferruginous-hirsutulous; 
petioles 1 to 2 cm. long, ferruginous-hirsutulous; leaves broadly ovate or 
ovate-lanceolate, 10 to 13 cm. long, 5 to 7 cm. wide, acuminate at apex, 
cuneate at base, closely serrate, entire at base, reticulate-veined (principal 
nerves 7 to 9 on aside, approximate at base and apex, rather distant at middle, 
the veins impressed on upper surface), above hispidulous and scabrellous, 
hirsutulous on the nerves, beneath appressed-pubescent on the nerves, else- 
where glabrous; inflorescence spicate, the spikes terminal and lateral, the 
peduncles and rachises 14 to 17 cm. long, densely ferruginous-hirsutulous; 
calyx tubular-campanulate, 4 to 6 mm. long, 3 mm. wide, hirsutulous, the 
teeth ovate-lanceolate, about 2 mm. long, apiculate; corolla tubular-campan- 
ulate, 7 to 8 mm. long, 3 to 3.5 mm. wide at throat, white, glabrous without, 
tomentose at throat within, 5-lobed, the lobes about 1.5 mm. long, rounded; 
stamens included; styles 2 mm. long, included, fruit ovoid, 5 mm. long, 
acutish. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,140,959, collected in forest at 
La Gallera, Micay Valley, Department El Cauca, Colombia, 1800 meters, 
July 1, 1922, by E. P. Killip (no. 7920). 


The main characters by which this species can be distinguished from C. 
cylindrostachya, its nearest relative, are more ovate leaves, larger calyx with 
longer teeth, prominent corolla lobes, and much shorter style. 


Tournefortia chinchensis Killip, sp. nov. 


Liana (or shrub, 2 meters high?); branches terete (or the ultimate sub- 
angular), scurfy, ferruginous-hirsutulous; petioles 0.5 to 1 em. long; leaves 
opposite, ovate-oblong to narrowly oblong, 3 to 7 em. long, 0.8 to 3 cm. wide, 
acute, slightly narrowed at base, entire, penniveined (nerves impressed above, 
elevated and prominent beneath, the principal lateral ones 6 or 7 to a side), 


332 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


subcoriaceous, glabrous or sparingly hispidulous above, glabrous beneath 
except for the ferruginous-hirsutulous nerves and veins; inflorescence 3 or 
4-dichotomous, the ultimate branches 2 to 3 cm. long in flower, the flowers 
about 2 mm. apart: sepals linear, 2 to 3 mm. long, about 1 mm. wide, acute, 
glabrous or sparingly pilosulous ‘without; corolla tube cylindric, 6 to 9 mm. 
long, 1 to 1.5 mm. in diameter, slightly enlarged near middle, ferruginous- 
tomentose, greenish, the lobes orbicular, minute, scarcely 1 mm. long, glab- 
rous; white; stamens attached near throat of tube, 1 to 1.5 mm. long; style 
5 mm. long, clavate; fruit depressed-subglobose, about 8 mm. in diameter, 
white, glabrescent. 

Type i in the herbarium asi the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 536185, 
collected at Villacabamba, Rio Chinchao, Department Hudnuco, Peru, 
altitude about 2000 meters, July 17-26, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 5142). 
Duplicate in U. S. National Herbarium. Weberbauer 6607, from southwest 
Comas, Province Jaiya, Department Junin, altitude 3300-3400 meters, is 
also this species; the leaves are proportionately narrower than in the type. 
This locality is considerably farther south than that at which the type was 
collected. 


The differences between this species and its two nearest relatives, all char- 
acterized by minute corolla lobes, may be shown by the following key: 


Flowers sessile; corolla tube appressed-hirsute; branchlets smooth. 
T. ANDINA. 

Flowers pedicellate; corolla tube tomentose; branchlets rough. 
Calyx lobes 2 mm. long or less; leaves alternate.......... T. OVALIFOLIA. 
Calyx lobes more than 2 mm. long; leaves subopposite. T. CHINCHENSIS. 


Tournefortia setacea Killip, sp. nov. 


Liana; stems subquadrangular, appressed-strigillose, with short white 
hairs, the older portions glabrate; petioles 0.5 to 2 cm. long; leaves subopposite 
or in three’s, oblanceolate or ovate, 5 to 14 cm. long, 3 to 7.5 cm. wide, abruptly 
acuminate, narrowed at base, subdecurrent, entire, penninerved (lateral 
nerves 5 to 8 to a side), membranous, above dark green, appressed-short- 
strigillose and minutely whitish-punctate, beneath paler, appressed-strigillose 
on the nerves, otherwise nearly glabrous; inflorescence terminal and lateral, 
7 cm. wide or less, few-branched, short-peduncled; flowers sessile; sepals linear- 
setaceous, 4 to 5 mm. long, 0.5 mm. wide or less, appressed-strigillose, green; 
corolla tube cylindric, 4 to 5 mm. long, about 1 mm. in diameter, appressed- 
strigillose and white-punctate without, the lobes ovate-orbicular, about 1.5 
mm. long, minutely mucronulate, cream-colored; stamens attached near base 
of corolla tube, the anthers narrowly linear, about 2.5 mm. long; fruit conical, 
3 to 4mm. long, appressed-strigillose, white. 

Type in the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 536620, collected at La 
Merced, Department Junin, Peru, altitude about 600 meters, August 10-14, 
1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 5579; duplicate in U. 8. National Herbarium). 

Prru: Department Hudnuco, Cushi, 1800 meters, Macbride 4829 (N, F). 

Boutvia: Bopi River, Mulford Biological Exploration 481 (N, Y). 


This resembles 7’. bicolor Sw., a common plant of the American tropics. 
The long setaceous sepals, like those of T. wmbellata, of Mexico, at once 
distinguish it. 


JULY 19, 1927 KILLIP: NEW SPECIES CORDIA AND TOURNEFORTIA 3093 


Tournefortia auro-argentea Killip, sp. nov. 


Shrub or small tree; branches subquadrangulate, hirsutulous-tomentose, 
at length glabrate; petioles 2 to 3 cm. long; leaves opposite, ovate, § to 17 cm. 
long, 5 to 8 cm. wide, acute or acuminate at apex, tapering at base, entire or 
subundulate at margin, conspicuously nerved (nerves ascending, subopposite, 
7 or 8 pairs), subcoriaceous, rugulose, above sparsely hispidulous, tomentellous 
on midnerve, beneath minutely hirsutulous-tomentellous on nerves and 
veins; inflorescence 2 or 3-dichotomously branched, the branches hirsutulous- 
tomentose, the flowering portions up to 7 cm. long; sepals lanceolate, 4 to 5 
mm. long, 1.5 mm. wide, acuminate, hispidulous with silvery-white hairs; 
corolla white (?), the tube 6 to 7 mm. long, golden-brown-hirsute, the lobes 
ovate, 2 mm. wide, mucronate; fruit globose, 6 to 7 mm. in diameter. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 703566, collected on the road 
from Torondoy to Mucuchias, Cordillera de Mérida, State of Mérida, Venez- 
uela, altitude 3000 meters, March 27, 1915, by Alfredo Jahn (no. 396). 


Tournefortia vestita Killip, sp. nov. 


Shrub, about 1.5 meters high; branchlets sulcate, stout, 5 to 7 mm. thick 
even toward end, densely hirsute with subreflexed brown hairs up to 4 mm. 
long; petioles stout, up to 2.5 em. long, with indument like that of stem; 
leaves ovate-oblong or ovate-lanceolate, 15 to 25 em. long, 5 to 14 cm. wide, 
acute to abruptly short-acuminate, acute and subdecurrent at base, entire or 
minutely serrulate, penninerved (lateral nerves 9 to 11 to a side), densely 
appressed-hirsute above with hyaline hairs, densely hirsute or hirsute- 
tomentose beneath with matted hyaline hairs; inflorescence terminal and 
lateral, the peduncles 5 to 7 em. long, stout, hirsute, the branches 2 or 3 times 
dichotomous, the flowering portions up to 12 cm. long; flowers sessile; calyx 
lobed nearly to base, the lobes linear-attenuate, 5 to 7 mm. long, hirsute; 
corolla greenish white, the tube cylindric, 8 to 10 mm. long, 1.5 to 2 mm. wide, 
hirsute with subappressed reflexed hairs, the lobes orbicular, about 2 mm. 
wide, rounded at apex; fruit globose-ovoid, 5 to 6 mm. in diameter, glabrous. 
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 32812, collected in clay and mud 
soil, Coroico, Department La Paz, Bolivia, September, 1894, by M. Bang 
(no. 2470). A duplicate is in the herbarium of the New York Botanical 
Garden. 


Boutvia: Department La Paz, Mapiri, 1800 meters, Rusby 1922 (Y). 

The differences between 7’. vestita and T. obscura, another species with 
hispid-hirsute branches and narrow calyx lobes are: 7’. vestita, corolla tube 
1.5 mm. wide or more, inflorescence two or three times dichotomous, with 
equal branches, leaves more than 15 em. long, the pubescence hyaline above, 
densely matted beneath; 7’. obscura, corolla tube less than 1.5 mm. wide, 
inflorescences a repeatedly dichotomous cyme, the branches very unequal, 
leaves usually much less than 15 cm. long, the pubescence of slender straight 
hairs. 

Tournefortia obovata Killip, sp. nov. 

Small tree; branches quadrangulate, hirsute, at length glabrous; petioles 

1.5 to 2 em. long, ferrugineous-hirsute-tomentose; leaves obovate, 9 to 16 cm. 


long, 4 to 7 cm. wide, rounded or acutish at apex, tapering gradually at base, 
(nerves subopposite, 12 to 15 pairs, divaricate), above bullate, hispid, beneath 


334 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


ferrugineous hirsute-tomentose; inflorescence 3 to 4-dichotomous-branched, 
the branches hirsute, the flowering portions up to 5 em. long; calyx-lobes 
ovate-lanceolate, 1.5 to 2 mm. long, hirsute; corolla ‘‘greenish,”’ the tube 3 
mm. long, 2 mm. wide, cano-hirsute, the lobes orbicular, obtuse; fruit globose, 
glabrous. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 530946, collected at Cali, 
Department El Valle, Colombia, altitude 1000 to 1200 meters, December, 
1905, by H. Pittier (no. 755). 


From 7. fuliginosa, to which it is related, this species is distinguished by 
obovate, less acute leaves, shorter and more slender spikes, smaller calyx 
and shorter corolla-tube. 


Tournefortia buchtienii Killip, sp. nov. 


Shrub, about 4 meters high; branches subterete, ferruginous-tomentose, 
rough; petioles up to 2 cm. long; leaves opposite, oblong or oblong-elliptic, 
7 to 14 em. long, 3 to 5 cm. wide, acuminate, rounded or acutish at base, 
entire, penninerved (nerves slightly impressed above and elevated beneath, 
the primary ones about 10 to a side, the transverse secondary nerves rather 
conspicuous, nearly parallel), reticulate-veined, membranous, above dark 
green, appressed-strigillose except along nerves, beneath ferruginous-hir- 
sutulous, especially along nerves; peduncles 6 to 7 cm. long, ferruginous- 
tomentose, subternately-branched, the branchlets 2 or 3 times dichotomous, 
the flowers borne on the ultimate branches at nearly uniform intervals of 
2.5 mm.; sepals linear, 2 to 3 mm. long, acute, ferruginous-hirsutulous; 
corolla tube narrowly cylindric, 7 to 10 mm. long, 1 to 2 mm. wide, dilated 
just below throat, ferruginous-tomentose without, the lobes orbicular, minute, 
‘0.5 to 1 mm. wide; stamens attached near throat of tube, linear, 2 mm. long; 
‘style thick, about "7 mm. long; fruit ovoid-conical, about 7 to 8 mm. long, 5 
‘to 8 mm. in diameter, glabrescent, white. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,133,948, solleeted at Unduavi, 
‘South Yungas, Bolivia, altitude 3200 meters, February 12, 1907, by O. 
Buchtien (no. 2949). <A duplicate of this is in the herbarium of the New York 
Botanical Garden. 

Bouivia: Unduavi, Rusby 1923 (Y). 


Tournefortia rollotii Killip, sp. nov. 


Low shrub; branches subquadrangulate, stout, the older glabrescent, the 
younger densely grayish-hirsute; petioles 2 to 4 cm. long, canaliculate above, 
hirsute; leaves broadly ovate, 8 to 15 cm. long, 5 to 10 cm. wide, acute at 
apex, rounded at base, abruptly tapering to petiole, slightly undulate at 
margin, conspicuously nerved (nerves ascending, subopposite, about 8 pairs), 
reticulate-veined, above pilosulous, beneath densely tomentose with fine 
hairs; cymes 3-dichotomous, the peduncles and branches ascending, densely 
hirsute; calyx lobes narrowly lanceolate, 3 to 4 mm. long, hirsute; corolla 
white, the tube 5 mm. long, hirsute-tomentose, the lobes ovate or ovate- 
lanceolate, 3 to 3.5 mm. long, 1 mm. broad at base, long-cuspidate, the cusp 
2 to 2.5mm. long; fruit ovoid-globose, 7 to 8 mm. long, 5 to 6 mm. in diameter. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,059,749, collected on the 
Pdéramo de Guasca, Department Cundinamanca, Colombia, by M. Rollot 
(Ariste-Joseph no. A492). 

Co.tomBia: Department Cundinamanea, Zipaquira, Pennell 2565 (Y). 


JULY 19, 1927 STANDLEY: RUBIACEAE FROM MEXICO 300 


The unlobed fruit of 7. rollotii and its erect habit indicate a relationship 
with the species placed by DeCandolle in the first section of Prttonia, rather 
than with the more or less scandent plants, with lobed fruits, of the second 
section. The corolla lobes, relatively broad but terminating in a distinct 
cusp, suggest 7’. peruviana and T. mapirensts, of the latter section. 


BOTAN Y.—Some Rubiaceae collected in Mexico in 1841-43 by Frederik 
M.Liebmann. Pauu C. Stanpiey, U. 8. National Museum. ! 


The U.S. National Museum received recently for study, from the 
University Botanical Museum of Copenhagen, through the kindness of 
Dr. Carl Christensen, a large series of plants of the family Rubiaceae, 
collected in southern Mexico in 1841-48 by Frederik Michael Lieb- 
mann. The material included most of the plants of this group ob- 
tained by Liebmann, the greater part of which had never been identi- 
fied. Many of them had been submitted to Hooker, and some of the 
duplicates retained at Kew were listed by Hemsley in the Botany of 
the Biologia Centrali-Americana. Although many of the specimens 
which passed through Hooker’s hands were named specifically, others 
were identified only to the genus. Some of the latter were studied 
also by Oersted, in connection with his work upon Central American 
Rubiaceae, and a few were indicated by him as new, but he never 
published descriptions of them. 

Determination of this collection has given interesting results. Lieb- 
mann was an exceptionally efficient collector, with a keen eye for dis- 
tinguishing species, and he found a number of well-marked Mexican 
Rubiaceae which have eluded later collectors. His whole series of 
plants was one of the largest ever obtained in Mexico, consisting of 
90,000 specimens. He was not content with one specimen of each 
plant that he recognized, but repeated his collections. ‘Too many of 
his successors have been satisfied to make a single collection of each 
species that they were able to distinguish in the field, and as a conse- 
quence they have overlooked the critical species which require a nice 
discrimination for their recognition. Doubtless a part of Liebmann’s 
success resulted from the fact that he visited regions which have not 
received attention from more recent collectors. It is a noteworthy 
fact that the earlier botanists working in Mexico were able to visit 
remote regions, while those of recent decades seem not to have wan- 
dered far from the principal railway lines. 


1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- 
ceived June 13, 1927. 


336 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


Study of the Liebmann material has disclosed several species which 
are apparently new, and one plant which can not be referred satisfac- 
torily to any known genus. It is unfortunate that these rich collec- 
tions did not receive thorough study immediately upon their arrival 
in Europe, eighty years ago, for they include many species which have 
been based upon material procured by later collectors, some of them, 
indeed, of very recent date. 

There are described below the new species recognized in the reliquiae 
Inebmannianae, and there are cited also some of the numbers which 
illustrate rare or little-known species. Upon the basis of the Lieb- 
mann plants there may be reported from Mexico for the first time 
several common American Rubiaceae of wide distribution. The 
species here listed form a noteworthy addition to the woody Rubiaceae 
enumerated in the Trees and Shrubs of Mexico.? 

Most of the Liebmann material was received on loan, and has 
now been returned to Copenhagen, after photographs had been made 
of some of the more important specimens. There were received 
also numerous duplicates for deposit in the National Herbarium. In 
the citation of specimens in the following pages, the letter ‘‘C”’ indi- 
cates that the number cited is represented only in the Copenhagen 
herbarium. 


RONDELETIA HETERANTHERA T. §. Brandeg. Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 4: 387. 
1913 


This species has been known only from the type collection, from Bafios del 
Carrizal, Veracruz. Liebmann, however, collected ample fruiting material, 
of which the following collections may be cited: ae 

Mexico: Petlapa, Liebmann 11376 (Rubiaceae no. 203). Colipa, Lieb- 
mann 11379 (Rubiaceae no. 139). Palanque, Liebmann 11378 (Rubiaceae 
no. 138). Misantla, Leebmann 11383 (C; Rubiaceae no. 140). 


Rondeletia Liebmannii Standl., sp. nov. 


Branchlets very slender, subterete, brown, densely pilose with short 
spreading whitish hairs, tardily glabrate; stipules 5-6 mm. long, filiform- 
subulate from a short, narrowly triangular base, short-pilose or puberulent, 
erect, persistent; leaves opposite, those of a pair unequal, the petioles slender, 
3-9 mm. long, densely short-pilose; leaf blades elliptic-oblong or lance-oblong, 
broadest at or near the middle, 5.5-11 cm. long, 1.7—3.5 cm. wide, gradually or 
abruptly long-acuminate, with a narrow, often falcate acumination, acute to 
broadly obtuse at base, thin, deep green above, sparsely setose-hirtellous with 
short pale spreading hairs, the venation impressed, beneath slightly paler, 
densely short-pilose, at least on the nerves, with short spreading whitish 
hairs, the venation prominent, the lateral nerves about 9 on each side, 
arcuate, ascending at an acute angle, distinct nearly to the margin; inflo- 


2 Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 23: 1349-1394. 1926. 


guy 19, 1927 STANDLEY: RUBIACEAE FROM MEXICO 337 


rescence terminal, thyrsiform-paniculate, 2-4 em. long, the peduncle about 
5 mm. long, the lateral branches very short, each bearing a few-flowered dense 
cyme, the flowers 4-parted, the pedicels 0.5 mm. long, the branches densely 
short-pilose with spreading hairs; bracts linear, 3 mm. long or shorter; hy- 
panthium densely whitish-tomentose, the calyx lobes narrowly linear, 0.5 
mm. long, unequal; corolla tube very slender, 8 mm. long, pilose with short, 
whitish, spreading or ascending hairs, the lobes short, rounded, glabrous 
within, the throat naked; capsule subglobose, 3.5 mm. long, brown, ob- 
scurely costate, glabrate. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,315,231, collected i in Oaxaca, 
Mexico, 1841-43, by Liebmann (no. 11834). 


Related to the Guatemalan R. rufescens Robinson, which has much denser 
pubescence, long panicles, shorter calyx lobes, and broad stipules. 


Rondeletia polycephala Standl., sp. nov. 


Branches slender, terete, blackish, densely pilose with short spreading 
ferruginous hairs, the internodes short or elongate; stipules persistent, thick, 
7-8 mm. long, subulate from a broadly triangular base, erect, rigid, brown- 
pilose or glabrate; leaves opposite, sessile or nearly so, the blades oblong- 
ovate or ovate-elliptic, 6-12 cm. long, 2.7—-5 em. wide, rather abruptly acu- 
minate or long-acuminate, at base broadly rounded to cordate, with deep 
narrow sinus, thick, deep green above, short-villous on the nerves, elsewhere 
very sparsely villous with very short, spreading hairs, the venation impressed, 
beneath densely and persistently white-tomentose, the veins stout, prominent, 
the lateral nerves about 9 on each side, slightly arcuate, distinct to the 
margin; inflorescence terminal, thyrsiform-paniculate, 4-9 em. long, the 
peduncles 2.5-9.5 cm. long; flowers sessile, borne in very dense, many- 
flowered, headlike cymes, these sessile along the main rachis or on stout 
peduncles 5 mm. long or shorter, the rachis densely brown-pilose; bracts 
lance-oblong, 3-4 mm. long; hypanthium subglobose, nearly 2 mm. long, 
densely white-pilose; calyx lobes 4, unequal, oblong-ovate, 2-2.5 mm. long, 
obtuse, brown-pilose; corolla densely pilose outside with short spreading 
whitish hairs, the tube slender, 9-12 mm. long, the 4 lobes rounded, spreading, 
2.5-3 mm. long, glabrous within, the throat naked; anthers included, linear- 
oblong, 1.5 mm. long. 

Type in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum, Copenhagen, collected 
in Oaxaca, Mexico, by Liebmann(no.11826). A fragmentary specimen of the 
same collection is in the U. S. National Herbarium. Here is referred also 
LIiebmann 11836 (Rubiaceae no. 79) from Oaxaca. 


The latter specimen was seen by Hooker, who labeled it ‘‘Rondeletia n. 
sp.,”’ but apparently the plant was unknown to Hemsley, since it is not 
mentioned in the Biologia Centrali-Americana. In the key to the species of 
Rondeletia in the North American Flora this plant runs at once to R. Thiemei 
Donn. Smith, a Honduran species, which is not closely related. 


Manettia Liebmannii Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants suffrutescent, apparently scandent, the branches slender, subterete, 
the older ones with pale exfoliating epidermis, the young branches obscurely 
and very minutely puberulent, the internodes elongate; stipules 1.5 mm. 


338 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


long, broadly triangular from an annular base, mucronate-acute, persistent 
and thickened in age; leaves opposite, the petioles stout, 2-3 mm. long; leaf 
blades broadly ovate to lance-ovate, 3-5 cm. long, 1-3 cm. wide, long-acu- 
minate, with narrow obtuse acumination, at base rounded, sometimes 
abruptly short-decurrent, subcoriaceous, somewhat lustrous, very minutely 
and obscurely puberulent on the nerves or glabrous, deep green above, the 
reticulation of the nerves evident but scarcely prominent, beneath scarcely 
paler, the costa slender, prominent, the lateral nerves very slender, often 
nearly obsolete, 4 or 5 on each side, strongly ascending, arcuate; flowers 
cymose-paniculate, the panicles axillary and terminal, dense or open, many- 
flowered, slender-pedunculate, equaling or shorter than the leaves, the 
branches puberulent; bracts persistent, triangular-subulate, 1-2 mm. long; 
pedicels 3 mm. long or shorter; flowers 4-parted; hypanthium campanulate, 
0.6 mm. long, minutely puberulent; calyx lobes 4, erect, 1 mm. long, triangular 
to lance-oblong, acute; corolla salverform, glabrous or nearly so outside, the 
tube thick, 2-2.5 mm. long, the lobes broadly ovate, obtuse, 1 mm. long, 
short-villous within; capsule 2-2.5 mm. long, broader than long, glabrous, 
two-thirds inferior, shallowly bisuleate and obscurely costate, rounded- 
truncate at apex, rounded at base, septicidally bivalvate at apex; seeds 
(immature) numerous, compressed, narrowly winged. 

Type in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum, Copenhagen, collected 
at Pelado, Mexico, August, 1842, by Liebmann (no. 11485; Rubiaceae no. 
147). A fragmentary specimen of the same collection is in the U.S. National 
Herbarium. Collected also at San Juan de Estado by Liebmann (no. 11487). 


The reference of this plant to Manettzia is not altogether satisfactory, 
because of the small capsules and small flowers, but the habit of the plant. 
suggests this rather than any other genus. By Hooker the plant was referred 
to Hedyotis, but if, as appears to be the case, the seeds are winged, it can not 
be referred to the Oldenlandieae. ‘The general aspect of this plant does 
suggest that tribe, but there is no known American genus of that relationship 
to which it can be referred satisfactorily. 


BouvARDIA VILLOSA Standl. N. Amer. Fl. 32: 107. 1921 


A very sharply marked and apparently rare species, known previously 
only from the type collection from Alturas de Matatlin, Oaxaca, Conzattz 
1486. A Liebmann collection may now be recorded: 

Mexico: Mitla, Oaxaca, May, 1842, Liebmann 11051. 


HILLIA TETRANDRA Swartz, Prodr. Veg. Ind. Occ. 58. 1788 


This species has not been known heretofore north of Guatemala, but it was © 
collected in Veracruz by Liebmann. 
Mexico: Mirador, Liebmann, 11518 (C). Mecapalco, Liebmann 11517 
(C). 
Habroneuron Standl., gen. nov. 


Slender strigose shrub, apparently scandent, the branches terete; leaves 
opposite, short-petiolate, membranaceous, entire, finely lineolate between the 
nerves; stipules narrow, interpetiolar, deciduous; flowers terminal, solitary, 
sessile or nearly so; hypanthium oblong; calyx 4-parted, the lobes narrowly 


JULY 19, 1927 STANDLHY: RUBIACEAE FROM MEXICO 309 


linear-attenuate, much longer than the hypanthium; corolla salverform, 
the tube long and slender, the limb 4-lobate, the lobes broad, imbricate, the 
throat sparsely papillose-villosulous; stamens 4, linear, sessile, basifixed, 
inserted at the middle of the corolla tube, included; fruit unknown. 

Type species, Habroneuron mexicanum Sitandl. 


Habroneuron mexicanum Standl., sp. nov. 


Branches very slender, fiexuous, with short or much elongate internodes, 
dark reddish brown, glabrate in age, when young densely short-strigose with 
whitish hairs; stipules narrowly linear-attenuate, about 5 mm. long, thin, 
brownish, strigillose or glabrate on the outer surface, glabrous within; petioles 
slender, 3-20 mm. long, strigillose; leaf blades obovate-oblong to oblong- 
oblanceolate or oblong-elliptic, usually broadest above the middle, abruptly 
acuminate, with broad or narrow, acute acumination, at base obtuse to long- 
attenuate, densely strigose along the nerves on both surfaces with whitish 
hairs, sparsely short-strigose elsewhere, the costa very slender, prominent 
beneath, the lateral nerves very slender and inconspicuous, 5 or 6 on each 
side, ascending at an acute angle, arcuate, distinct nearly to the margin; leaf 
tissue conspicuously lineolate on both surfaces, but the striations irregular, 
not parallel, and forming a close reticulation; hypanthium 3 mm. long, 1.5 
mm. thick, densely strigose; calyx lobes 8-10 mm. long, about 1 mm. wide, 
long-attenuate, erect, whitish-strigose; corolla densely strigose outside with 
long stiff whitish hairs, the tube 27 mm. long, glabrous within, the lobes 
broadly rounded, 5 mm. long; anthers 6 mm. long, 0.6 mm. wide. 

Type in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum, Copenhagen, collected at 
Tintalecingo, Mexico, by Liebmann (no. 11527). A fragmentary specimen 
also in the U.S. National Herbarium. 


Because of the lineolate leaf tissue, this plant is associated at once with 
such genera as Sommera and Plocaniophyllon, of the tribe Mussaendeae, 
but in that group the corolla lobes are valvate. In habit, leaves, and pu- 
bescence the plant suggests the genus Sabicea, of the same tribe, to which it 
must be related. The available material is, unfortunately, not ample, except 
in leaves and branches, and I have not felt justified in dissecting another 
flower besides the one which has been dissected by some earlier student. 


Sommera fusca Oerst., sp. nov. 


Branchlets dark reddish brown, with short internodes, when young densely 
hirsute with ascending or subappressed hairs; stipules 1-1.5 cm. long, ca- 
ducous, narrowly lanceolate, long-attenuate, brown, sparsely hirtellous; 
petioles 1-2 cm. long, pilose with stiff straight appressed hairs; leaf blades 
oblong-elliptic to oblong-obovate, usually broadest above the middle, 5—13.5 
em. long, 2.7—-6 cm. wide, obtuse or acutish at apex, usually acute at base but 
sometimes obtuse, thin, deep green on the upper surface, glabrous, con- 
spicuously parallel-lineolate in the areoles, paler beneath, densely appressed- 
pilose with pale hairs along the nerves; inflorescences umbelliform-cymose, 
mostly 4 or 5-flowered, the peduncle 7-14 mm. long, densely hispidulous, 
the pedicels in fruit up to 6 mm. long, in anthesis much shorter; bracts 
caducous; hypanthium subglobose, 3 mm. long, densely appressed-pilose with 
fulvous hairs; calyx 3-6 mm. long, cleft nearly to the base, the 5 lobes oval to 
oblong, obtuse or rounded at apex, persistent, slightly accrescent in age, 


340 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


pubescent with short appressed hairs; corolla salverform, the tube cylindric, 
8 mm. long, densely pilose with short, ascending or subappressed, pale hairs, 
the 5 lobes spreading, ovate, obtuse, 2-2.5 mm. long, puberulent within, the 
throat short-villous; fruit (probably immature) subglobose, 7-9 mm. long, 
hispidulous with spreading or subappressed hairs; seeds about 1 mm. long, 
angulate, blackish brown, foveolate. 

Type in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum, Copenhagen, collected at 
Jocoaltepec, Mexico, June, 1842, by Liebmann (no. 11720; Rubiaceae no. 36). 
Duplicate specimen of the same collection in the U. 8. National Herbarium. 


This species is well marked by the obtuse leaves and by the broad obtuse 
calyx lobes. 


Sommera acuminata Oerst., sp. nov. 


Branches very slender, somewhat flexuous, subterete, brownish, short- 
hirtellous, the internodes mostly 1-3.5 cm. long; stipules linear-lanceolate, 
8 mm. long, long-attenuate, appressed-pilose with very short hairs, deciduous; 
petioles 6-11 mm. long, densely hirtellous; leaf blades Janceolate or ovate- 
lanceolate, 6—9.5 cm. long, 2.5—3.5 cm. wide, rather abruptly long-acuminate, 
with narrow, slightly falcate acumination, acute to rounded and short- 
decurrent at base, thin, deep green above, scabrous, hirtellous on the nerves, 
beneath paler, hispidulous on the nerves, the costa slender, prominent, the 
lateral nerves slender, about 6 on each side, arcuate, strongly ascending; 
inflorescence cymose, usually 3-flowered, the peduncles 1—3.5 cm. long, densely 
short-pilose with spreading hairs, the pedicels 3 mm. long or shorter; bracts 
deciduous; hypanthium 2.5 mm. long, densely hispidulous; calyx cleft to the 
base, the 5 lobes lanceolate, 8-10 mm. long, long-attenuate, persistent, his- 
pidulous on both surfaces; corolla salverform, densely hispidulous outside, 
the tube 12 mm. long, 2 mm. thick, the lobes rounded, 3 mm. long, glabrous 
within; immature fruit ellipsoid, 6-7 mm. long, hispidulous, 2-celled. 

Type in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum, Copenhagen, collected at 
Amatldn, Mexico, by Liebmann (no. 11712). A duplicate of the same collec- 
tion is in the U. S. National Herbarium. 


This plant is perhaps not a true Sommera, but it agrees in most respects 
with the genus to which Oersted has referred it, and there is no other genus 
to which it may be referred satisfactorily. The corolla is unusually slender 
for plants of this genus, and, of greater importance, the leaves do not exhibit 
the ‘‘moiree-streifung’’ which characterizes other plants of the genus. 


Chione mexicana Standl., sp. nov. 


Small tree, glabrous throughout, the older branchlets slender, subterete, 
grayish, the internodes mostly 1.5-3.5 em. long; stipules lance-deltoid, 4—5 
mm. long, long-acuminate, caducous; petioles 8-13 mm. long; leaf blades oval- 
elliptic to narrowly elliptic-oblong, 6.5—-12.5 cm. long, 2-6 cm. wide, usually 
acute or attenuate at base, at apex abruptly contracted, with short broad 
obtuse tip, subcoriaceous, lustrous, deep green above, the costa and lateral 
nerves impressed, beneath paler, the costa slender, prominent, the lateral 
nerves slender, 5 or 6 on each side, prominent, ascending at an acute angle, 
nearly straight, coarsely and irregularly anastomosing remote from the 
margin; inflorescence cymose-corymbose, densely many-flowered, long- 
pedunculate, 2-6 em. broad, some of the flowers sessile, the others on short 


guLY 19, 1927 STANDLEY: RUBIACEAE FROM MEXICO 041 


stout pedicels, these in fruit sometimes 6 mm. long, the bracts minute; hy- 
panthium narrowly turbinate, 2—2.5 mm. long, the calyx limb scarcely 1 mm. 
long, deeply 5-dentate, the teeth broadly triangular, acute to rounded at 
apex; corolla 3.5-4 mm. long, the 5 lobes rounded, half as long as the tube, 
obscurely erose-denticulate; anthers linear-oblong, 2.5-3 mm. long, exserted, 
scarcely exceeding the filaments; fruit oblong-ellipsoid, 8-10 mm. long, 3 
mm. thick, obtuse at base, lustrous. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,266,079, collected in damp 
open forest at Zacuapan, Veracruz, Mexico, June, 1926, by C. A. Purpus 
(no. 10757). The following collections represent the same plant: 

Veracruz: Mirador to Jalapa, Liebmann 11097, 11663. Papantla, 
Liebmann 11104. Mirador, Liebmann 11106 (C), 11099 (C; Rubiaceae no. 
281), 11098 (C; Rubiaceae no. 285). Papantla, Liebmann 11100 (C; 
Rubiaceae no. 282). San Pablo, Iiebmann 11101 (C; Rubiaceae no. 284). 
Paso del Correo, Liebmann 11103 (C; Rubiaceae no. 286). Without locality, 
Liebmann 11107, 11102 (C; Rubiaceae no. 283). 


This species has not been represented in the National Herbarium until 
recently, when specimens were received from Dr. Purpus. Hemsley‘ referred 
the Liebmann collections to C. glabra DC., a synonym of C. venosa (Swartz) 
Urban. A note by Hooker upon one of the Copenhagen sheets states that the 
plant is ‘‘apparently the same as C. glabra DC. of which C. elliptica Griseb. 
and glabra Griseb. are vars., but leaves membranous.’’ Comparison with 
West Indian material proves that the Mexican plant is clearly distinct in its 
thin leaves, much smaller flowers, smaller fruit, and deeply dentate calyx. 
In C. venosa the calyx is nearly truncate. 


PSYCHOTRIA BRACHIATA Swartz, Prodr. Veg. Ind. Oce. 45. 1788 
This species, common in some parts of Central America, has not been 
reported from Mexico, but the following collection may be cited: 
Mexico: Lacoba, Liebmann 11592. 


Psychotria Chamissoana (Loes.) Stand. 


Mapouria Chamissoana Loes. Verh. Bot. Ver. Brand. 65: 112. 1923. 

The type, from Tecolutla (‘‘Tecolute’”’), Veracruz, Schiede 1266, has not 
been seen, but the collections cited below agree with the description. 
Loesener reports the species also from Nentén, Guatemala. 

Mexico: Consoquitla, Liebmann 11601 (GC), 11655 (C; Rubiaceae no. 
156). Without locality, Liebmann 11654 (Rubiaceae no. 154). Zacuapan, 
Veracruz, Purpus 10889. | 


Psychotria flava Oerst., sp. nov. 


Young branches very thick and stout, with short or elongate internodes, 
subterete or obtusely quadrangular, sometimes puberulent at the nodes but 
elsewhere glabrous; stipules quickly deciduous, broadly ovate-triangular, 
1.5 cm. long, narrowed to the apex and shallowly cleft, the apical lobes 
1—1.5 mm. long, densely ferruginous-puberulent on the outer surface; leaves 
opposite, the petioles stout, 0.5-2 em. long, densely puberulent or short- 
pilose; leaf blades narrowly oblanceolate-oblong to obovate-oblong or some- 
times linear-oblanceolate, mostly 18-32 cm. long and 2.5-13.5 cm. wide, 


4 Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 2: 45. 1881. 


342 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


acute to obtuse, usually cuneate-attenuate at base, thick, yellow-green and 
glabrous above, the lateral nerves prominent, beneath dull, minutely hirtellous 
on the nerves and puberulent between them, the pubescence persistent, the 
costa stout, prominent, the latera] nerves slender or stout, prominent, 19-26 
on each side, arcuate-ascending, distinct nearly to the margin; inflorescence 
terminal, capitate-paniculate, the panicles radiately branched, 5-10 cm. 
long, the peduncle stout, erect, 6.5-9.5 cm. long, the branches densely hirtel- 
lous; branches of the panicle verticillate, 8 or fewer branches in each whorl, 
the primary branches 1.2—2.8 em. long, divaricate, bearing usually 3 pedun- 
culate, subglobose, few or many-flowered heads 4—6 mm. in diameter; hy- 
panthium and calyx tomentulose, the calyx limb less than 1 mm. long, trun- 
cate or obscurely repand-denticulate, 1.5 mm. broad; corolla 4.5 mm. long, 
salverform, glabrous, the tube widened upward, the lobes ovate, obtuse, 1.5 
mm. long; anthers exserted, oblong, 1 mm. long; fruit subglobose or obovoid, 
8-15 mm. long, glabrous, rounded to acute at base, the cells plane on the 
inner surface; stones obtusely costate dorsally; seeds shallowly sulcate on the 
inner surface. 

Type in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum, Copenhagen, collected 
at Misantla, Veracruz, Mexico, by Liebmann (no. 11605). The following 
collections are conspecific: 

Mexico: Misantla, Liebmann 11506 (C). Comaltepec, Liebmann 11630 
(C). Without locality, Liebmann 11604 (Rubiaceae no. 108), 11602 (Rubia- 
ceae no. 106). Jovo, May, 1841, Liebmann 11603. 


The species is distinguished by the large narrow yellowish leaves, copiously 
pubescent beneath, and by the characteristic inflorescence. 


Psychotria gardenioides (Scheidw.) Standl. 


Rhodostoma gardenioides Scheidw. in Otto & Dietr. Allgem. Gartenzeit. 
10: 286. 1842. | 

Palicourea gardenioides Benth. & Hook.; Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 
2: 52. 1881. 


When manuscript was prepared for the Trees and Shrubs of Mexico, no 
authentic material of this plant was available for study, and it was listed? | 
as a doubtful species. Inthe Liebmann collection there are several specimens 
referable to this species, some of which were identified by Hooker. The plant 
represents a very distinct species, quite unlike any other known tome. The 
limits between the genera Psychotria and Palicourea are notoriously vague, 
but this plant, it seems to me, may be placed in the genus Psychotrza much 
more satisfactorily than in Palicourea. The following collections may be 
cited: } 


Mexico: Without locality, Liebmann 11554 (C), 11553 (C), 11591 in 
part (C), 11548 (C; Rubiaceae no. 100), 11549 (C; Rubiaceae no. 98). Chu- 
apan, Liebmann 11548 (C; Rubiaceae no. 101). Cazadero, Liebmann 11549 
(C; Rubiaceae no. 97). Jecatepec, Liebmann 11550 (C; Rubiaceae no. 99). 
Cuapan, Liebmann 11552 (C). Paso del Correo, Liebmann 11551 (Rubiaceae 
no. 95). Tampico, Palmer 516. 


5 Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 23: 1392. 1926. 


JULY 19, 1927 STANDLEY: RUBIACEAE FROM MEXICO 343 


PsYCHOTRIA ULIGINOSA Swartz, Prodr. Veg. Ind. Occ. 43. 1788 
The species has not been reported from Mexico, but two collections may 
now be listed: 
Mexico: Jovo, Liebmann 11650. Without definite locality, Liebmann 
mlGo1° (C). 


Faramea Liebmannii Standl., sp. nov. 


Glabrous throughout; young branches slender, subterete, the internodes 
2.5-5.5 em. long, green; stipules green, 4-5 mm. long, united into a sheath, 
the free portion semiorbicular, subulate-mucronate, the mucro 1.5-2 mm. 
long; petioles stout, 6-8 mm. long; leaf blades narrowly oblong, 12.5-17 cm. 
long, 3.5-4.5 cm. wide, rather abruptly short-acuminate, with narrow obtuse 
tip, attenuate to the long-acuminate base, broadest at the middle, thin, 
bright green, concolorous, the costa stout, prominent, the lateral nerves 
slender, prominent, about 13 on each side, divergent at a wide angle, slightly 
arcuate, irregularly anastomosing remote from the margin; inflorescence 
terminal, sessile, branched from the base, the branches slender, few-flowered, 
the whole inflorescence about 2.5 cm. long; pedicels 1.5—5 mm. long; hypan- 
thium 1.5 mm. long, oblong, the calyx 0.6 mm. long, truncate or obscurely 
denticulate, green; corolla salverform, the tube 2mm. long, the lobes spreading, 
linear-oblong, obtuse, 5 mm. long; anthers linear, 1.5 mm. long, exserted. 

Type in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum, Copenhagen, collected 
at Tepitapa, Mexico, by Liebmann (no. 11404; Rubiaceae no. 105). A 
duplicate specimen of the same collection is in the U. 8. National Herbarium. 


Only one other species of the genus, Faramea occidentalis (L.) A. Rich., 
has been reported from Mexico, and to that the present plant is not closely 
related. It is amply distinct, also, from the few species which are known 
from Central America. 


MiITCHELLA REPENS L. Sp. Pl. 111. 1753 


It is truly remarkable that this common plant of the eastern United States 
should reappear in southern Mexico, but Hemsley, in the Biologia Centrali- 
Americana, cites two records for it. The plant was collected also by Lieb- 
mann (no. 11804) at Tanetze, Mexico. It seems not to have been found 
by recent collectors, and the species has not been represented heretofore in 
the National Herbarium by Mexican specimens. Liebmann’s material, 
although incomplete, seems to differ in no respect from the common form of 
the United States. 


344 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 


951ST MEETING 


The 951st meeting was held at the Cosmos Club February 17, 1927, as a 
joint meeting with the WasHINGTON ACADEMY of ScrENcES. The address 
of the evening was given by Dr. ArTHUR Haas of Vienna on The atom as a 
source of energy. 


952D MEETING 


The 952d meeting was held at the Cosmos Club February 19, 1927. 

Program: Rosert B. Sosman, The character of the 573-degree of inversion 
of quartz. The paper dealt with the so-called alpha-beta or “high-low” 
reversible inversion which occurs in quartz at 573°C. (adopting the value 
found for the point by Bates and Phelps). Thisis an inversion of very differ- 
ent type from the sluggish inversions between quartz, tridymite, and cristo- 
balite, but similar in many ways to such polymorphous inversions as the mag- 
netic inversion in pure iron, characterized by rapidity of change, complete 
reversibility, small energy-change, and slight modifications in the structure 
of the substance. Graphs showing the character of the change of various 
mechanical, thermal, and optical properties were presented. Some of the 
questions that need experimental study are: (1) Is there a real discontinuity 
in properties at 573°, or can the change be represented simply by two continu- 
ous curveswhich intersect” The data favor the existence of a discontinuity. 
(2) Is there a temperature-hysteresis in the inversion? The data on this 
point are less certain, but such hysteresis (independent of time) seems to be 
present. (3) Is the change in properties simultaneous for all properties? 
There is evidence that the optical change precedes the volumetric. (4) Is 
there ever an equilibrium between the high-temperature and low-temperature 
phases? The change appears to be unlike a melting-point, and resembles 
rather a mechanical or electrical system which passes through a region of 
instability. (Author’s abstract.) 

W. P. Waits, One bit of evidence regarding the relation of chalcedony to 
quartz. In the actual carrying out of calorimetric experiments at high tem- 
peratures there are numerous difficulties, of which the most impressive and 
usually the most serious is the enormous increase in thermal! leakage or heat 
transfer. In order to cope with this difficulty the maximum shortening of 
time is desirable, which usually leads to small dimensions, even though these, 
on account of the unfavorable relation of surface to mass which they bring, 
still further increase the thermal leakage rate. A well-known and exceedingly 
valuable resource is to compare two calorimeters, reading the differential 
temperature. Irregularities in the leakage rate and uncertainty as to the 
supply of heat from the furnace walls thereby have their effects greatly less- 
ened. I formerly disparaged this method on account of the complications it 
introduced, but these seem small compared to the advantages. When all 
has been done, however, the best precision obtainable by such methods is 
little better than 1/100 as good as is obtainable at prevailing room 
temperatures. 

The exact nature of chalcedony has been in doubt for some time. Micro- 
scopic evidence has indicated that it is a rather peculiar form of quartz. But 


JULY 19,1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 345 


Fenner showed conclusively that chalcedony failed to manifest the character- 
istic quartz inversion when tried with apparatus which had given this inver- 
sion easily with normal quartz. Since he was working under the natural 
supposition that chalcedony either was quartz or was not, he saw no reason to 
scrutinize his negative result any further. Subsequently E. W. Washburn 
reported that chalcedony gives the X-ray pattern of quartz, and Dr. R. B. 
Sosman, from a study of Fenner’s original observations, detected some evi- 
dence of the quartz inversion and suggested that further experiments might be 
worth while. An examination with duplicate calorimeters especially ar- 
ranged for this test readily gave unmistakable signs of the quartz inversion, 
though in a strikingly different form from that manifested in the same appara- 
tus by quartz. The inversion in chalcedony is completed at practically the 
same temperature as that in quartz within the precision of the experiment, 
which is probably better than a degree, but the inversion in chalcedony un- 
doubtedly begins at a lower temperature. Whether the total amount of 
heat involved is as great as with quartz can not be told from the results so 
far obtained, and further work is in preparation. (Auwthor’s abstract.) 

FREDERICK Bates and Francois P. Pueups, The 573-degree inversion of 
quartz. The a @ 6 inversion of crystalline quartz has long been extensively 
studied, using nearly all major physical phenomena as a means of attack and 
culminating in the recent work of the elder Bragg and his associate Gibbs. 
Its bearing on the general theory of allotropy is important. In the present 
investigation the principal experimental results obtained are as follows: 

(1) It has been possible for the first time to study the phenomena at prac- 
tically the inversion temperature. 

(2) The heating and cooling curves have been obtained with a precision 
higher than that obtained by previous investigators. 

(3) There is a temperature hysteresis effect. 

(4) There is a discontinuity during inversion. 

(5) Superheating and supercooling are essential to bringing about the in- 
versions. ‘The inversion starts on heating at 573.30°C. and on cooling at 
572.38°C. 

(6) The discovery of the character of the inversion makes possible the appli- 
cation of the Phase Rule for the determination of the temperature of equilib- 
rium of the two solid phases. This is found to be 572.68°C. and is the true 
inversion temperature. The long-accepted value of the inversion tempera- 
ture, 575°C, is in error. 

(7) The unknown heat of transition (latent heat) has been determined at 
0.162 g. cal. 

(8) The unknown specific heat of a quartz at the inversion temperature is 
found to be 0.54 g. cal. 

(9) An explanation of the mechanism of the inversion Is given. 

(10) The temperature at which the inversion starts, 573.30°, is a fixed and 
definite temperature occurring with great sharpness and suitable for a new 
type of base point on the thermometric scale, as well as for the standardiza- 
tion and checking of thermocouples in the average physical laboratory. 
(Author’s abstract.) 


953D MEETING 


The 953d meeting was held at the Cosmos Club March 5, 1927. 
Program: PauL ScHuREMAN, Tides in wells. Attention was called to the 
fact that periodic rising and falling of the water in some wells, corresponding 


346 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


to the tides in the open ocean, had been noted by Pliny the Elder as early as 
the first century of the Christian Era. Reference was made to an investiga- 
tion of tidal fluctuations in wells on Long Island, New York, by the U. 8. 
Geological Survey during the early part of the present century and also to 
investigations of tides in a well at Tarka Bridge Farm in South Africa. The 
latter investigation by Dr. Arthur Young in 1905 and 1908 developed a peri- 
odic tide of seven inches in amplitude in a well which is one hundred miles 
from the seacoast and about half a mile above sea level. 

The paper dealt principally with tide observations in a well at Longport, 
New Jersey, which were obtained through a cooperative arrangement be- 
tween the New Jersey Department of Conservation and Development and 
the U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey. ‘These observations covered a period 
of more than a year. This well, which is eight hundred feet deep, is located 
about five hundred feet from the ocean shore and during the observations the 
water level in the well varied from 15 to 31 feet below mean sea level. 

The mean range of the periodic tide in the well was 2.3 feet which is a little 
more than one-half as great as in the open ocean in this vicinity. Compari- 
sons were made with the records from the Coast and Geodetic Survey tide 
station on Atlantic City Steel Pier and it was found that on an average the 
times of high and low waters in the well were +2 to 14 minutes later than 
in the ocean. Various irregular fluctuations of the ocean level due to 
meteorological disturbances were reflected by corresponding fluctuations on a 
smaller scale in the well. 

It was concluded that the tides in the well were caused by the deformation 
of the strata of clay overlying the water-bearing area, the water being forced 
into the well and drawn out again by bending of the strata as the load of water 
in the nearby ocean was shifted by the rising and falling of the tide. (Author’s 
abstract). 

L. J. Briaes, High-frequency fatigue testing of metals. 

JESSE PAWLING, In an informal communication, spoke of an unexplained 
small difference in the observed position of the nadir, depending upon the 
position of the observer with respect to the observing instrument. © 

H. E. Merwin, Recording Secretary. 


BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
699TH MEETING 


The 699th meeting was held in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club on 
December 18, 1926, at 8:10 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair, 
and 67 persons present. 

The President read a letter from Mrs. Rena G. KNOWLTON in reply to a 
letter of condolence from the Council of the Biological Society on the death of 
Dr. KNowuton. T.S. Patmer referred to the services of Dr. KNowuTon to 
the Society during his 42 years’ membership, of which he served 14 as 
treasurer, 4 as vice-president and 2 as president. He was active in both 
zoology and botany, and did much work in compiling botanical definitions for 
dictionaries and encyclopedias. 

A. WETMORE reported two birds new to Maryland, which will be recorded 
in a forthcoming number of the ‘‘Auk.’”’ He also reported the observation by 
K. A. Preble and himself of a snowy owl, horned larks, and a northern shrike 
about one mile below Ocean City, Maryland, on December 4, 1926. 


JuLY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL. SOCIETY 347 


T. S. Patmur stated that three snowy owls had recently been taken close 
to Washington (at La Plata, Md., Lanham, Md., and at Belmont Bay on the 
Potomac near Occoquan). Three others had also been reported at greater 
distances from Washington. 

K. A. GoLDMAN reported that he had been informed that the snowy owl was 
not uncommon in winter on the northern coast of Washington. 

Duncan 8. JoHnson, Johns Hopkins University: The Blue Mountains of 
Jamaica and their vegetation (illustrated).—The Blue Mountains of Jamaica 
catch the northeast trade winds, so that the steep north side is very wet, the 
rainfall reaching 170 or even 200 inches, while on the south side it is much less. 
The vegetation varies correspondingly. The speaker described a trip from 
Port Antonio across the mountains to Kingston and then up to Cinchona at an 
elevation of 5,000 feet. Slides of the characteristic wild and cultivated plants 
were shown, and the process of collecting and curing coffee was described. 

F. C. Lincoun, Biological Survey: The migration of young herring gulls 
(zllustrated) —This paper will be published in the ‘‘Auk.”’ 


700TH MEETING 


The 700th meeting of the Biological Society was held in the New Assembly 
Hall of the Cosmos Club on January 15, 1927, at 8:10 p.m., with President 
OBERHOLSER in the chair and 51 persons present. 

Titus ULKE exhibited a book of pressed specimens of mermaid weed, also 
bladderworth and other plants from Norway. 

C. W. Stiuzs referred to newspaper accounts of the sineies of Dr. SAMBON 
on the parasitic origin of cancer in the intestinal canal. This is a subject at 
present in controversy, especially in England. Dr. STILEs’ own examinations 
never resulted in finding any association between nematode parasites and 
cancer (carcinoma) in the oesophagus of cattle, and experiments on rats, by 
him and Mrs. Bakr, were negative and do not support SAMBON’s hypothesis. 
Dr. Bartscu asked if there was a possibility of a secondary parasite being 
involved, i.e., protozoa—a filtrable virus—associated with nematodes. Dr. 
STILES replied that while protozoa have been described as causing cancer, it 
is still unproved. Cancer is not to be reduced to any one cause. 

FRANK THONE of Science Service referred to a telegram to Science Service 
in regard to the Scopes trial and stated that newspaper accounts were not 
quite correct or complete, i.e., the fine was reduced, the law was held con- 
stitutional but probably limited so that only materialistic philosophy cannot 
be taught. The case will probably be ‘“‘nolle prossed.” 

Dr. OBERHOLSER read a letter from Dr. M. W. Lyon of South Bend, 
Ind., a former secretary of this Society, congratulating the Society on its 
700th meeting. 

The regular program was as follows: The Biological Society of Washington— 
past, present, and future, by four speakers. Early days of the Society—An 
historical survey by T.S. Parmer. An interesting and humorous account of 
High lights in our history, by L. O. Howarp. Our present membership, 
a geographical and statistical survey by F. C. Lincotn. A program for 
broader and greater contacts and future growth under Plans for the future, 
by Paut Bartscu. 

A.$. Hitcucock gave a brief account for the activities of botanist members 
of oe Society and to what extent they have taken advantage of the Pro- 
ceedings. 


348 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


701sT MEETING 


The 70lst meeting was held in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club 
January 29, 1927 at 8:10 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair, and, 
73 persons present. The following new members were elected: W. F. ALDER- 
SON, GEORGE ARONSON, Marcaret BoswELu, C. W. Coin, W. L. Hatt, 
W.C. JOHNSON, Harry Lerman, H. A. LINDSLEY, Pre Lowney, BERNARD 
McBnripez, PEREZ SIMMONS, VIRGINIA JT STORCK, JAMES SUTER, D. M. 
TAYLOR, RE Wester, M. FRANCES WILLOUGHBY, Este 8. Wricut. 

Vernon BarLey reported evidence indicating that the opossum does not 
really hibernate. Last fall one took up its abode under his back doorstep, 
where it made a warm nest of leaves, and was kept supplied with food and 
drink through the winter. On two occasions the thermometer fell to 8°F., 
and on others it was from 12 to18°F. On the coldest morning a thermometer 
pressed into the fur gave an outside body temperature of 75°, showing that the 
animal was not torpid. These observations raised the question whether other 
carnivores such as bears and raccoons really hibernate. In real hibernation, 
the animal is without evidence of breathing, and the external temperature 
drops to about 44°. 

A. 8. Hrrcucocx reported the action of the International Congress of 
Plant Sciences at Ithaca in 1926 in regard to nomenclature with special 
reference to the interim committee there appointed. 

J. N. Ross exhibited a photograph of a woodpecker nest in a giant cactus in 
Arizona. H. C. OBERHOLSER stated that in some places it had been neces- 


sary to replace wood telephone posts by iron ones, because of the damage 


done by woodpeckers. 

The regular program was as follows: 

C. W. Stites: Personal experiences with Elias Metchnikov. ‘The speaker 
gave interesting personal reminiscences of Metchnikov. 

VERNON Battey: Mouse plagues and how they happen (illustrated).— 
Accounts of mouse plagues go back fully a thousand years. They have been 
especially prevalent in south central Europe, where all the crops have often 
been destroyed. ‘The first definite record of a mouse plague in this country is 
in 1907, when great alfalfa ranches in the Humboldt Valley, Nevada, were 
temporarily ruined by Microtus montanus. ‘The use of poison, supplemented 
by the efforts of gulls, herons, crows, birds of prey, and carnivorous mammals, 
reduced the numbers to normal before the close of the season. The speaker 
has raised meadow mice in captivity to learn their normal rate of increase. 
Under optimum conditions a family of 6 to 8 is produced regularly every 21 
days. One female in one year gave birth to 18 families, including about 79 
young. The first family was born when the mother was 45 days old. Mathe- 
matical investigation showed that under optimum conditions one pair would 
increase at the end of a year to over one million individuals. It is evident 
that a plague comes about when plenty of food is available and when the mice 
are protected from their natural enemies. 

In discussion, C. W. Stites spoke of the Tiss known as dirt eating in 
man and animals, with special reference to the case of the negro in the South 
in which the disease took the form of eating live mice. 

P. B. Jounson stated that there was a discussion of mouse plagues of 
antiquity in the bulletin on meadow mice by the late D. E. Lantz. He spoke 
also of the mouse gods of the Mediterranean region, and the connection of 
Apollo under the name Apollon Smintheus with plagues of mice. 


JULY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 349 


702D MEETING 


The 702d meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club, 
February 12, 1927, at 8:10 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair and 
300 persons present. New member elected: R. Kent BEatrtiz. 


J. N. Rose: The distribution of the cacti (allustrated) —The speaker gave an 
account of his field work while carrying on investigations of the cactus family, 
during which he visited practically all the great cactus regions of North and 
South America. Four journeys were made to South Anierica, where many 
new and rare species of cacti were collected. The cactus family is purely an 
American one, and about equally distributed between North and South 
America. The species of South America are nearly all different from those of 
North America, and usually belong to different genera. Some of the genera 
found in western Argentine simulate genera to be found in New Mexico and 
in Arizona, but are quite distinct. This resemblance is also to be found in 
other groups outside of the cacti, as for instance the creosote bush and palo 
verde. Many cacti have been introduced into the Old World. Some of the 
species have become a great pest in Argentina by overrunning the rich wheat 
fields. The cactus is also very abundant in parts of Africa and southern 
Europe and in Palestine. Some artists who had visited Palestine, but did not 
know that the cactus is there an introduced plant, had shown in their can- 
vases biblical characters standing beside these introduced cacti. The cactus 
family is now represented by about 120 genera and contains more than 1200 
species. The lecture was illustrated by numerous colored slides. 

S. F. Buaxe, Recording Secretary, 


President OBERHOLSER expressed the sorrow and sympathy of members 
of the Biological Society at the death of Dr. C. D. Watcort, Director of the 
Smithsonian. Dr. WaucoTt was a former vice-president of this society. 

A. A. DoouiTTLE exhibited two jars, hermetically sealed for over two years, 
containing growing plants; in one jar containing carbon dioxide, algae, grass- 
like plants, and ferns were living; in the other jar containing fresh air was a 
living fern. 

The regular program was as follows: 

T. S. Paumer: The personality of Thomas Nuttall—The speaker gave 
interesting data on the habits and work of Nuttall. 

EK. P. Wauxer: The present status of wild life in Alaska (illustrated) .— 
(No abstract received.) 

W. M. Mann: The Smithsonian-Chrysler Expedition to Tanganyika (il- 
lustrated).—The speaker gave an account, illustrated by motion pictures, of 
the expedition and its method of capturing and bringing back alive African 
mammals and birds. 

T. E. Snypar, Secretary pro tem. 


703D MEETING 


The 703d meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club 
February 26, 1927, at 8 pm., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair and 
102 persons present. 

C. W. Stiuzs inquired how it was known that the jars containing living 
plants exhibited at the previous meeting were hermetically sealed. Mr. 
DoouiTTLeE replied that they were ordinary Mason jars with the covers 
tightly screwed down on the rubbers. 

J. M. Aupricu reported the death of Dr. Mario Bezzi, the prominent 
Italian dipterist. 


300 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


J. M. Atpricu: Thomas Say, naturalist (illustrated)—Thomas Say, 
born in 1787, was the son of a Quaker apothecary of Philadelphia. He 
made a collecting trip along the Atlantic Coast of Georgia and Florida in 
1818, and was on Long’s expedition to the Rocky Mountains in 1819, and 
also on Long’s 1823 expedition to the source of the Missouri River. It is 
possible that he also made a trip to Mexico. He was one of the members of 
Robert Owens’ colony at New Harmony, Indiana, where he stayed until 
his death in 1824. He wrote on many zoological subjects. 

In discussion, Dr. Paumer referred to Say’s ornithological work. It is 
generally believed that most of the bird specimens of the Long expeditions 
were collected by T. R: Peale. Dr. Strnes mentioned that some ticks and 
crustacea important in medical zoology were described by Say. 

A.S. Hitcucock: A recent botanical trip to Cuba (illustrated).—The speaker 
spent about four weeks in Cuba during November and December 1926, visit- 
ing Pinar del Rio, Soledad, Baragud, Guaro, and Camaguey. At Pinar del 
Rio he collected grasses in the pine woods in company with Brother Léon 
and Professor Roig, both well-known botanists of the Island. At Soledad, 
near Cienfuegos, is Harvard House, a laboratory associated with Harvard 
University and offering facilities to visiting biologists for natural history 
studies. Baragud, a central on a large sugar estate, is the seat of alaboratory 
of the recently organized Tropical Plant Research Foundation. Guaro, 
near Preston, in the province of Oriente, is the headquarters for agricultural 
research on the estates of the United Fruit Company. Herradura, the home 
of Professor F. 8. Earle, in the province of Pinar del Rio, was also visited. 
Professor Earle, formerly Director of the Cuban Experiment Station at San- 
tiago de las Vegas, is now sugarcane technologist for the Research Foundation 
mentioned above. Many interesting grasses obtained on the expedition 
through the Island are now being studied. (Author’s abstract.) 

KE. A. GotpMan: Conditions affecting migratory waterfowl in Mexico (il- 
lustrated).—The protection of migratory birds, especially of such waterfowl — 
as ducks and geese that are much hunted as game, is a subject for interna- 
tional consideration. The speaker spent the time from January 25 to April 
6, 1926, in Mexico, visiting the principal wintering grounds of these birds to 
investigate the occurrence and distribution of the various species and to se- 
cure other information concerning conditions in that country with a bearing 
upon the administration of the Migratory Bird Treaty Act with Great Brit- 
ain, through the Biological Survey, U. 8. Department of Agriculture. The 
principal regions visited were the Valley of Mexico, in the Federal District, 
the Valley of Toluca, in the State of Mexico, Lake Patzcuaro, in Michoacan, 
Lake Chapala, in Jalisco, Tampico, in Tamaulipas, the lake region of south- 
western Coahuila and northeastern Durango, lakes west of the City of Chi- 
huahua, and lagoons near the mouth of the Rio Grande. The investigations 
revealed the fact that great numbers of northern ducks, including the pintail, 
shoveller, canvas back, redhead, lesser scaup, blue-winged, green-winged 
and cinnamon teals, while-fronted and snow geese and other waterfowl win- 
ter in the regions visited. Special attention was given to the use of guns set 
in batteries for killing ducks for the market in and near the Valley of Mexico. 
(Author’s abstract.) 


704TH MEETING 


The 704th meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club 
March 12, 1927, at 8:00 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair and 
101 persons present. New members elected: Miss PENELOPE GRAHAM, 


suny 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY aol 


Miss Peart Hicks, KENNETH E.. Hoses, Miss E. W.Scort, Miss Lituian T. 
SMITH. 

ALEXANDER WETMORE mentioned the receipt of Oligocene bird fossils from 
Colorado. 

Paut Bartscu stated that the mockingbird, which has wintered in his yard 
for a number of years, has learned to mimic perfectly the whistle used by Mrs. 
Bartsch in calling him to food. 

A. S. Hircucock reported the substance of a recent discussion in the 
Journal of Economic Biology on the place of the systematist in biological 
work. Discussed by Dr. Bartscu and Dr. Howarp. 

S. F. Buaxe: Frederick Pursh, an early American botanist.—Frederick 
Pursh, author of the only complete flora of the United States and Canada 
ever published, was born at Grossenhayn, Saxony, on February 4, 1774, and 
died at Montreal in 1820. After studying at Dresden, he came to America 
in 1799 to take charge of a botanic garden near Baltimore. Most of his 12 
years in the United States were spent in charge of botanic gardens, including 
those of William Hamilton (1802-05) and Dr. David Hosack (1807-1810). 
With the financial support of Dr. B. 8. Barton, Pursh made a collecting ex- 
cursion in 1806 from western Maryland to the mountains of North Carolina, 
returning by the coast, and another in 1807 to the Pocono Mountains of 
Pennsylvania, the salt springs in the vicinity of Onondaga, New York, and 
Oswego, on Lake Ontario, thence east to the Champlain Valley and the vicin- 
ity of Rutland, Vermont. In 1810-11 he made a voyage to the West Indies 
for his health. On his return he landed at Wiscasset, Maine, and visited Dr. 
Peck’s garden at Cambridge on his way to New York. In 1811 he went to 
- London, where, under the patronage of A. B. Lambert, he completed his 
“Flora Americae Septentrionalis,’”’ published early in 1814 (probably in 
January). Little is known of Pursh’s life after this. He came to Canada, 
collected materials for a flora of that country, which were destroyed by a 
fire, and died soon after. (Author’s abstract).—Discussed by W. A. Dayton, 
R. K. Bratriz, and W. W. EGGLEsTon. 

W. B. Beuu: Some biological relationships and their significance. The 
speaker called attention to the tendency of the human mind to satisfy itself 
by naming objects or phenomena and to cling tenaciously to such expressions, 
thus often building up a wall of words which obscures the essential considera- 
tions or problems involved. He stressed the need for constant critical re- 
examination of established notions to eliminate untenable statements or in- 
terpretations and make possible genuine progress through direct incisive 
thinking, both in research and the applications of scientific results to industry 
and human well being. As an illustration he discussed the commonly used 
expression, ““‘Balance of Nature,’ pointing out that while it rests upon a 
sound basis it has been subjected to much abuse through improper interpreta- 
tion and application. The essential facts have been obscured by a mass of 
fictitious interpretations of relationships among animals, plants, and man- 
kind. Along with elements of stability there is in nature constant ebb and 
flow, a condition which, if overlooked, result in snap judgment and improper 
conclusions. 

That fluctuation and change is the regular course of events in nature was 
supported by reference to records of paleontology. Some recent instances 
of fluctuation in numbers and relationships of animals such as porcupines, 
mice, and rabbits, were noted, and attention called to inadequate explana- 
tions based on faulty conceptions of the principle of balance in nature as a 
factor in control. These have misled both scientists and the general public 
with the result that more vital control agencies have been long overlooked. 


352 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


This has retarded research on such essential factors as competition, parasites, 
and diseases. The intricate relationship and far-reaching importance of 
tularemia among rabbits, involving in its course, ticks, flies, other rodents, 
predacious species, and man, was cited asa casein point. The need was em- 
phasized for more extensive research in the relationship of the parasites of 
wild species to wild and domesticated animals and of the food habits of ro- 
dents, predatory animals and big game, to livestock and agricultural produc- 
tion, in order to secure a sound basis of fact for consideration in working out 
conservation and control programs. | 

C..F. M. Swynnerton, Chief of Game Preservation Department, Tan- 
ganyika Territory: The tsetse fly problem in Tanganyika (illustrated). The 
speaker described the efforts being made to combat the tsetse fly by the de- 
struction of bush growth, on which it is dependent, and illustrated his talk by 
numerous lantern slides. 


705TH MEETING 


The 705th meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club on 
March 24, 1927, at 8 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair and 95 
persons present. 

L. O. Howarp: An anecdote concerning a famous pathologist and an equally 
famous parasitologist—-The speaker related some amusing anecdotes relating 
to Dr. Raphael Blanchard and Dr. A. Laveran. Discussed by Dr. Stiuzs, 
who gave interesting personal glimpses of Dr. Blanchard. 

C. D. Marsu: Coyotillo, a peculiarly dangerous stock-poisoning plant. 
(illustrated). This paper will be published in full elsewhere. 

P. H. Dorsett: Plant hunting with the camera in North China, Ceylon, 
Sumatra, and Java (illustrated) —The speaker described his experiences 
in collecting plants and seeds for the Department of Agriculture and illus- 
trated his talk by many colored slides. 


706TH MEETING 


The 706th meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club 
April 9, 1927, at 8:10 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair, and 92 
persons present. New member elected: J. J. CARROLL. 

S. F. Buake reported that purple grackles are again roosting at night in the 
Trinity College grounds, as in previous years. 

A.S. HitcuHcock reported a case of synonymy in grasses. . 

C. W. Stites: Rudolph Leuckart, the greatest teacher I have ever known. 
The speaker gave an interesting and intimate account of Rudolph Leuckart, 
under whom he studied. 

A. 8. Hircucock: The typification of Linnaean plant genera. The speaker 
presented a brief account of his work in preparing a list of types for Linnaean 
genera in cooperation with the botanists at Kew.—Discussed by Dr. STILES 
and Dr. Howarp. 

A. po AMARAL: Snakes, venoms, and antivenins (illustrated). There are 
perhaps 500 species of poisonous snakes in the world. “The venoms are very 
complex, each one hitherto studied consisting of from 8 to 20 different princi- 
ples. In general, the secretions of perhaps 95 per cent of known snakes are 
venomous, but most of them have no fangs for the injection of poison. Each 
venom must be treated with a different antivenin. The different types of 
poison apparatus were described and illustrated. At least 1500 people in 
the United States are bitten by poisonous snakes every year. The mortality, 


JULY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY — 803 


- so far as known, ranges from 15 to 75 per cent, depending largely on the size of 
the snake and the corresponding variation in the amount of venom secreted. 
The method of capturing poisonou’ snakes to extract the venom for use in the 
preparation of antivenin was described and illustrated. The serum most 
widely distributed at present by the Antivenin Institute is a polyvalent serum, 
applicable to cases of poisoning by rattler, copperhead, and water moccasin. 
The immunity conferred by the use of this serum lasts about ten days. The 
production of specific antivenins is being carried on, and a wider use for them 
is expected in the future. The polyvalent serum now used is made necessary 
by the fact that people do not distinguish the species of poisonous snakes 
sufficiently accurately to make it safe in general to apply specific serums. 


707TH MEETING 


The 707th meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club 
April 23, 1927, at 8:10 p.m., with President OBERHOLSER in the chair and 65 
persons present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and ap- 
proved. New members elected: Miss CLariBeL R. BarNnetTT, Wm. T. Cox, 
Miss ANNIE L. Davis, D. W. Stauson, and Dr. G. H. WuHire. 

The first part of the meeting was devoted to brief notes on birds and was 
opened by H. C. OBERHOLSER, who described the abundant waterfowl on 
the Potomac River in recent years. Whistling swan have returned to the 
Washington region and are especially abundant at Widewater on the Poto- 
mac. Canvasback have greatly increased in numbers and as many as 100,000 
have been observed on Broad Creek near Fort Washington. A raft of 120,000 
scaup was seen at Occoquan during the past winter. Early in the season the 
best place to observe ducks is at Indian Head or below; later on between 
Washington and Mt. Vernon. 

Mrs. L. D. Mrnmr described the last trip of the Audubon Society, on which 
76 species were observed. 

Irwin HorrMan stated that he had recently seen a kingfisher entering the 
same hole in which he found it nesting eleven years ago. 

M. K. Brapy mentioned the observation of phoebes along the Potomac in 
December and February and inquired what they fed upon. S. A. RoHWER 
replied that insects were about during the winter, but flew only on warm days. 

Miss M. T. Cooks reported that practically all birds due to arrive by April 
28 have now been reported. ‘Two early records have been broken, those for 
the yellow-throated warbler and white-crowned sparrow. 

VERNON BaILeEy reported his observation of trumpeter swans in Yellow- 
stone Park, where they have been found for seven years past. During the 
past season he saw three pairs there, two of them with young. 

Wi.u1AM B. Batt reported his observations on nesting Caspian tern, white- 
faced glossy ibis, and other birds in southern Oregon in 1926. 

R. M. Linsey reported that in Haskin’s ‘“‘Book of answers,’’ it was stated 
that the nighthawk makes the longest flight from its breeding ground of all 
birds, and inquired whether this was correct. H.C. OBERHOLSER stated that 
the Arctic tern makes the longest flight. 

The regular program was as follows: 

F.C. Lincoun: Flight lines of ducks. A study of the data represented by 
the 3,867 returns obtained from 19,578 banded ducks and geese shows im- 
portant details of the migrational highways followed by these birds. 

It is noted that even with species that are more or less continental in their 
distribution, there is a marked adherence to longitudinal zones. Briefly, 


304 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


these zones are represented by the eastern and western parts of the country, 
the one hundredth meridian forming the dividing line. This is demonstrated 
by the relatively small number of birds that, banded either to the east or west 
of this line, have been recovered on the opposite side while in the United 
States. On the great breeding grounds of the central provinces of Canada 
and on the wintering grounds of the Gulf coast of the United States, there is a 
convergence of lines otherwise widely separated. 

The importance of these data is obvious, in connection with the serious 
conditions existing at several points in the West, where annual losses of wild- 
fowl from alkali poisoning presents a serious problem in conservation. Such 
information shows conclusively that a relative abundance of ducks and geese 
in the Mississippi Valley and on the Atlantic coast can not be expected to 
restore the equilibrium and offset the losses in the western zone. (Author’s 
abstract. ) 

T. S. Patmuir: Intensive bird study in the suburbs of large cities. The 
speaker drew attention to the fact that the suburbs of large cities are especially 
favorable places for bird study due to the existence of permanent organiza- 
tions of persons interested and to the presence of museums. Statistics were 
given for Cambridge, New York, Philadelphia, Washington, Chicago, and 
San Francisco. The local organizations in these places were described and 
some of their special activities. 

A. H. Hows: Some recent bird notes from Florida. The speaker has 
made seven trips to study the animal life of Florida since 1918. The State 
list of birds now includes 412 species and subspecies. Among the birds of 
especial interest are pelican, sandhill crane, spoonbill, wood ibis, white ibis, 
limpkin, everglade kite, and great white heron. The habits of these birds 
were described and illustrated by photographs. 


7O8TH MEETING 


ASTH ANNUAL MEETING 


The 708th regular and 48th annual meeting of the Biological Society was 
held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club May 7, 1927, at 8 p.m., 
with President OBERHOLSER in the chair and 18 persons present. ‘The 
minutes of the preceding annual meeting were read and approved. ‘The 
president spoke of the past year as one of the most successful in the history 
of the Society. 

T. S. Paumnmr, one of the delegates to the 200th anniversary meeting of the 
American Philosophical Society, gave an informal report of the occasion. 
The reports of the recording secretary, corresponding secretary, treasurer, 
and Committee on Publications were read and ordered placed on file. The 
report of the Auditing Committee was read. T.S. PALMER gave an informal 
report for the Trustees of Permanent Funds. 

The president appointed I. Horrman and Mrs. T. E. Snyper as tellers and 
the following officers were then elected: 

President, EK. A. Goupman; Vice-Presidents, A. WmTmore, G. E. CHAM- 
BLIss, H. H. T. Jackson, C. W. Stiues; Recording Secretary, 8S. F. BLAKE; 
Corresponding Secretary, T. E. Snyppr; Treasurer, F. C. Lincoun; Council, 
BC: FULLER, W.R. Maxon, A. A. DoouitrLE, Boo SWALss, I. HorrMan. 

S. F. BLAKE, Recording Secretary. 


JULY 19, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS B00 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


Dr. E. T. ALLEN of the Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of 
Washington, left Washington in June to continue his field work on the hot 
springs of the Yellowstone National Park. 


Dr. N. H. Darton of the U. 8. Geological Survey has returned from Cen- 
tral Venezuela where he has been making geologic reconnaissance surveys 
for an oil company during the past six months. 


CuarLes V. TuHEIS has been appointed a Junior Geologist in the U. S. 
Geological Survey. 


Dr. Rocrr C. We tts of the Geological Survey has accepted appointment as 
Associate Editor of the WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES to represent the 
Chemical Society. 


The following delegates and guests of the American Geophysical Union will 
attend the Third General Assembly of the International Geodetic and Geo- 
physical Union at Prague, September 3 to 10, 1927. 


Delegates 

Dr. Louis A. BauvEr, Director, Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of 
the Carnegie Institution of Washington, accompanied by Mrs. Bauer. 

Dr. WiLL1AM Bowts, Chief, Division of Geodesy, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic 
Survey, accompanied by Mrs. Bowie and their adult son. 

Dr. J. H. DELLINGER, Senior Physicist, Radio Section, U. S. Bureau of 
Standards, accompanied by Mrs. Dellinger. 

Commander N. H. Heck, Chief, Division of Terrestrial Magnetism and 
Seismology, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. 

Mr. W. D. Lampert, Mathematician, Division of Geodesy, U. 8. Coast and 
Geodetic Survey, accompanied by his sister, Miss Mary B. Lambert. 

Dr. R. A. MiniurKkan, Director, California Institute of Technology. 

Dr. Harry Fre.tpine Rep, Professor of Dynamic Geology, Johns Hop- 
kins University. 


Guest 
Prof. L. C. Graton, Department of Geology, Harvard University, accom- 
panied by Mrs. Graton and their adult son and adult daughter. 


ELLSworRTH P. Kiuuip, of the National Museum, has returned from a botan- 
ical trip to the Eastern Cordillera of Colombia. The party, consisting of Mr. 
Kiture and ALBERT C. SmiTH, of New York, was sent by the National 
Museum, the New York Botanical Garden, the Gray Herbarium of Harvard 
University, and the Arnold Arboretum to obtain botanical specimens in the 
little-known region between Bucaramanga and the Venezuelan border. Ten 
paramos, between 12,000 and 15,000 feet altitude, in the vicinity of Bucara- 
manga, were visited, and collections were also made along the headwaters of 
the Orinoco and Maracaibo drainage basins. Approximately 6000 numbers 
were obtained in these regions, an additional thousand being collected near 
Cartagena and Santa Marta, on the Atlantic coast. 


AGNES Cuass of the Bureau of Plant Industry has returned from ten weeks 
spent in the study of grasses, mostly American, in several European herbaria. 


356 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 13 


A month was spent in Geneva, where the De Candolle Herbarium, recently 
united with the Delessert Herbarium, is now accessible for study. 


P. G. Lepia, who had resigned from the Bureau of Standards to accept a 
position as observer in the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of the 
Carnegie Institution of Washington, has been assigned to the staff of the 
magnetic observatory at Huancayo, Peru. Mr. Lxepie sailed from New York 
on July 7 for Lima. 


W. C. PARKINSON will leave Peru on July 29 to return to Washington after 
having completed the work he was engaged upon as consulting magnetician at 
the Huancayo Observatory. 


ANDREW THomson, Director of the Apia Observatory, arrived at 
Washington, July 6, to spend some time at the Weather Bureau and the 
Department of Terrestrial Magnetism. He will attend the meeting of the 
International Geodetic and Geophysical Union at Prague in September. 


Obituary 


GEORGE BisHoP SUDWORTH, a member of the AcapEmy, died May 10, at 
his home in Chevy Chase, in his 64th year. He was born at Kingston, 
Wisconsin, and educated at the University of Michigan. From boyhood he 
was a student of birds and plants. After a year of teaching, Mr. SupworTH 
came to the U. 8. Department of Agriculture as botanist and dendrologist in 
the Division of Forestry in 1888, and was chief dendrologist in the Forest 
Service at the time of his death. He did extensive field work on the forest 
flora of the United States and is the author of several volumes on our trees, as 
well as a great number of bulletins and papers on dendrology and scientific 
forestry. 


editors 


ye 
sa Y 
aoe 


} 


by the 


& = ‘ a a a 
+ ae 


tings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page 
thirteenth and the twenty-seventh of each month. 


Oceanography. —Current ae constants cS San Be 
LP pidner. oe : 


Botany. —New species of Gas and. pane ern a. from 
America. Enusworts P. Kini... 


“Botany. —Some Rubiaceae collected i in Reslop in 1841 
mann. Pau C. STANDLEY . Ape Pay na eS eh 


Phiocophieal Sociciy. a u one ‘ ve A 


3 


_ Biological Society sere eceeeeeseererere 


- ScrentiFIC Notus AND Beige ae a Oe 
~Oprrvarr.. yey ee a 


Vou. 17 Avueust 19, 1927 No. 14 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
__ OF SCIENCES 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


Wiiuram J. Peters Aanes CHASE Joun B. Reusipe, Jr, 
DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 


ASSOCIATE EDITORS 


L. H. Apams S. A. RonwER 
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 

E. A. GoLDMAN G. W. StosE 
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 

R. F. Griaes J. R. SWANTON 
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


Rocer C. WELLS 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 


BY THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Mr. Royan anp GuILFoRD AVES. 
Battrorn, MaryLanp 


Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 


3 ournal of the Ww 


This J OURNAL, the official 
present a brief record of current scien 
(1) short original papers, wri 
short notes of current scientific lite 
(3) proceedings and programs of m 
notes of events connected with the Scie 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nin ex 
when it appears on the nineteenth Wohines creel to 
manuscript reaching th 


publication is an essential feature; a1 
the twentieth of the month will ordinar ppear, on reques 
issue of the J OURNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respe 


M anuscripts may be sent to any riernher of the Board of E ito 

a clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without esse tial cha 
. editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious mino: rs. 

se should appear only as footnotes and should include year of pale 
the work of both the editors and printers it is Suggested that f 

serially and submitted on aseparate manuscript page. _ mo 

Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will | > Cl 

or diagrams of simple character. — se 
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof 

unless requested. It is urged oe manuscript be submitted i in 

will exercise due carein seeing that copyisfollowed. __ 

ae Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the followin, 


Copies eyes. $505) ae 8 pp. | 12 pp. 

50: $85 Ses $2.55 

100 1.90 POOF CAND 

150 <2 2a alee 525 D: 
200 2.50 Oe BO Wn ae LO ok A ce «oie Cees 
250 3.00; 6.20. (62h te ee 


An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for cach split page. ; 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. : | 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his riage for ie copies ‘or 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. 
The rate of Subscription per polemie ts oil tt Ss 
SemisMoOnenly NUMBEIE re ces ss ia ee oe ee cee Be owes 
Monthly suinbere 6 feces ee eke eee 


- Remiitances should be made payable to “Washington Academy ° ences,” 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Bes, 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, Boe On. 25 
Ezchanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other publications. — Fee 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, ey — fom is s made 
within thirty days after date of the ee issue. ek 


oe 
MS 


* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to ce 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special r rates = 
are given to a of acientific Sopiatics affiliated with the cogase ack ote 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vou. 17 Avueust 19, 1927 No. 14 


MATHEMATICS.—On the analytical and graphical representation of 
the arithmetic, geometric and other means.!. C. E. VAN ORSTRAND, 
U. 8. Geological Survey. 


The means ordinarily employed in mathematical statistics are sim- 
ple functions of certain average values obtained from the equation 


Pity TP P2keYo T+ ++ Pann (1) 
Cera apee 


which represents the least square adjustment of the line, y = mz, 
through the points, %1,yi; V2,Y2; ..-.- tnyn Whose respective weights 


are Pi, Po, --.- Pn- 
In the following consideration of each special case there has been 


put for convenience 


Si 
el 
ae I 
dea | ' 
| Vise aGe | 
oh pes ! 
t 1 c 
{ | eae ! f ; 
} { \ ' 
t 1 | l 
! ! ! | 
1 { | | i i 
see Qa t ! | I ! 1 | 
oO leap nen ee eee ee Le ale te ! 1 | x 
2 x 
7 = x, a x, X xX, 
Fie. 1 


1 Published by permission of the Director, U. 8. Geological Survey. Received May 
20, 1927. 
307 


358 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO 


Substituting in (1) the relations 


Ir =H Ye = oH Yn = 1 
1 if 1 
Dao ie eo ae 
we have 
Ly n i 


Wes] Vane S355 oo. = Ee LS 
D2; 


ny Gime Go se oe, YM +:.4%o + 5. ee 


n 
Referring to the diagram, Fig. 1, we have 
ao = ll 
Bi Resa ee, f j 
oa = — : = arithmetic mean. 


n 


THE GEOMETRIC MEAN 


Fie. 2 
Putting 
tn = U5 = is 2] Un Sl 
1 1 1 
oe log 2, ee log ra ery log Xn 


and writing log x for « we have 


. 14 


AuG. 19, 1927 VAN ORSTRAND: REPRESENTATION OF VARIOUS MEANS 309 


_ a ee ae 
i Bloga” loga,+logz.+ ...logz,  loga,+logs.+ ...logz, 
n 
ap, — 1 


: log z+ log a+ ... log xz, 
n 


oa = log (geometric mean) 


. geometric mean = e- 


THE HARMONIC MEAN (a) 


l 
' 
' 
\ 
1 
{ 
! 
| 
{ 
\ 
' 
| 
' 
t 
t 
\ 
t 
\ 
J 
aa 
z, 


4 


\ 
U 
' 
' 
' 
\ 
| 
1 
oF. 
x 


2 


onl aia 
rd | ee 

X 

gs ----- 


Fig. 3 


_ Replacing the abscissas by their reciprocals and putting 


Ua YN eo ie) cousin ae 1 
Pi = Ui; Po = Vo, ... Pa = In 
we have 
n 1 h 
aa i awn j 7\ = harmonic mean. 
alee ae =e al ara a ee =a 
vy X2 n TNX Xo Ver 
ee 
ty t 1 1 
O80 Ne oe ae —) = reciprocal harmonic mean. 
TN \U1 2 Gs 


360 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


THE HARMONIC MEAN (b) 


Another representation of the harmonic mean is obtained from the 
relations 


UG ie Oa es Oris Unis 1 
ea 1 al 
Pi =. v2 P2 —* or’ : Pn a; Lene 
There results | : | 
: | | 
= (*) aye al 1 1 é 
m= ta Gace Tarde) oe —) = rec:procal of harmonic mean. 
nN Te NG bo ni 
Allon 
1 
ES = TITTIES. 


1/1 il 1 
—(~$=+4...—> 
12 bl Ai) Abra. 


THE CONTRA-HARMONIC MEAN 


AuG. 19, 1927 VAN ORSTRAND: REPRESENTATION OF VARIOUS MEANS (361 


ut ‘ 
Ui = Ya. = = SL 
Pi = P2 = = Pn = 1 
then we have ; 
aie ; 
os re Te «w+ x? + Gat 
TEEPE) a Lin 
ab = 1 
Ce pre ee zi. 
02 = _ = contra-harmonic mean. 
i Bo He ees Ba : 


THE ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE 


Fic. 6 
Put 
i 1 ih 
SS SS lice Sr ee oe ES Se 
Y1 ary Ye a5’ Yy Ln 
ig pea Manette pn 1 
and equation (1) becomes 
n 1 
m == Se ee, =— ae en Le i a ae Le 
> 2? art xv? + ... 2,? 
a 
ab = 1 
Se Gera Vo". a ee, 
Odea ee a | SS MIE SUA x. 


‘362 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


\/ Bee A oe fat Cyt eae 


a = root-mean-square. 


The root-mean-square is evidently the abscissa of the point of inter- 
section of the line, y = mz, with the hyperbola, zy = 1, for we have © 


nN 1 
Y= N= eee ee, ee 
Deleon es Gas 5 


“ 7? Xo" eee pe 
ni oc = (ye es ee 


n 


If we overlook the physical requirements and base our definition on 
the mathematical relations only, it is evident that the definitions of 
harmonic mean and reciprocal harmonic mean are inconsistent—the 
definitions should be interchanged as each of the other means is a 
function of 1/m instead of m. 

It is interesting to note that with the exception of the root-mean- 
square which is defined with reference to the simplest form of hyper- 
bola, all of the means here discussed are defined with reference to 
the straight line, y = a+ bz, in which a = 1 and b = 0. 

Generalizing our results, we may say that certain means may be 
defined as the abscissa, or as a function of the abscissa of the point 
of intersection of the line, y = mz, with the curve, y = f(z). The 
value of m is determined by the method of least squares from the n 
points (v1, y: weight p, ... Xa, Yn Weight p,) on the curve y = f(z), 
the abscissae (14, 2 ... %,) of the n points being the quantities whose 
mean is to be determined. A further generalization of the definition 
consists in replacing the x coordinates by functions of these coordi- 
nates such as log x. | | 


PALEONTOLOGY .—New species of mollusks from the Hocene of 
Texas... JuutiA GARDNER, U. 8. Geological Survey. 


This paper contains descriptions and figures of 21 new species and 
subspecies of mollusks from the Claiborne and Wilcox groups in Texas, 
distributed as follows: Cook Mountain formation, 16; Lisbon forma- 
tion, 1; Yegua formation, 1; Wilcox group, 3. 


1 Published by permission of the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. Received May 
12, 1927. 


AauG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 363 


Family LEpIDAE 
Genus Lepa Schumacher 
Leda trivitate Gardner, n. sp. 


Figure 5 


1919. Leda houstonia Harris, Bull. Am. Pal. 6: pl. 23, f. 18. Not Leda 
houstonia Harris, 1895. 

Shell small, thin, rather highly polished, compact; the aititude of the shell 
exceeding half the latitude, broadly and quite strongly inflated. Umbonal 
angle very large. Umbones not conspicuous; slightly bulbous and feebly 
opisthogyrate, placed a little in front of the median vertical. Anterior 
dorsal margin more gently sloping than the posterior; anterior extremity 
broadly rounded; posterior extremity obtusely rostrate; base line strongly 
arcuate; posterior ridge obtuse and, toward the ventral margin, often ill- 
defined; posterior area thus delimited, narrow, lanceolate with faint traces of 
secondary rays, both posterior and anterior sometimes visible. External 
surface for the most part smooth; a microscopically fine, concentric striation 
usually developed toward the lateral and ventral margins; traces of radial 
threadlets often visible upon the ventral portion of the rostrum and, more 
rarely, upon the anterior ventral margin. Ligament pit minute, sub- 
umbonal, wider than it is high. Teeth strong, elevated medially, lower 
toward the distal extremities of each series; anterior teeth not far from ten in 
number, coarser than the posterior teeth which run close to fifteen. Adductor 
impressions relatively large; the anterior sub-circular, the posterior larger and 
more angular. Pallial line obscure. Inner margins entire excepting for a 
very fine crenulation along the rostrum. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 4.0 millimeters; diameter, 
2.1 millimeters. 

Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369248. 

Type locality——Bluff on San Antonio River 4 miles south-southeast of 
Floresville, Wilson County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne 


group). 

Leda trivitate is closely allied to Leda houstonia Harris. It is, however, a 
smaller, relatively higher and more inflated species, with a less sharply defined 
sculpture both radial and concentric. 

It is more widely distributed than L. houstonza and more abundant at the 
localities at which it occurs. 


Leda jewetti Gardner, n. sp. 


Figure 6 


Shell small, plump, polished, the young not far from equilat2ral; the adults 
produced slightly and obtusely rostrate posteriorly. Anterior dorsal margin a 
little higher than the posterior; anterior lateral margin broad and broadly 
rounded; posterior extremity narrow, obtuse; base line strongly arcuate, 
constricted in front of the rostrum in the adults. Umbones full, the tips 
proximate and opisthogyrate, slightly anterior. Lunule and escutcheon 
similar, the former a little less produced, narrow, lanceolate, delimited by a 


364 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 14 


ridge most elevated near the umbones. Posterior area defined by a secondary 
ray evanescing upon the rostrum. External surface concentrically threaded 
medially, the threads uniform over a symmetrical area, the sculpture abruptly 
disappearing a little in front of the rostrum and more gradually evanescing 
anteriorly. Ligament minute, sub-umbonal. Dentition vigorous, the teeth 
elevated and acutely A-shaped medially, those of the anterior series more 
crowded and more numerous than of the posterior. Adductor sears obscure, 
relatively large and well up under the dorsal margins. Pallial line obscure. 

Inner margins entire. : 

Dimensions: Altitude, 3.8 millimeters; latitude, 6.2 millimeters; semi- 
diameter, 1.7 millimeters. 

Holotype. —U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369243. 

Type locality.—8 miles south of Jewett, Leon County, Texas. 7 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation HOWE part of the Claiborne 
group). 

Leda jewetti is doubtless the Texas analogue of the Mississippi species Leda 
catasarca Dall. The outlines and dimensions of the two forms are similar 
but the posterior area of L. catasarca is more sharply defined; the concentric 
ribbing is broader and less uniform, usually less elevated and developed overa 
more restricted area. In L. jewetti the entire medial portion of the shell is 
threaded from the umbones to the base line, the triangular sculptured area 
extending from an approximately equal distance in front of and behind the 
umbone. In L. catasarca, on the contrary, the sculpture is comparatively 
feeble over the entire anterior half of the shell, though it 1s continued pos- 
teriorly to a greater degree than in L. jewetti. 


Leda atakta Gardner, n. sp. 
Figures 7, 8 

Shell rather small, plump, constricted and rostrate posteriorly. Umbones 
sub-central, quite full; the tips proximate and opisthogyrate. Anterior dorsal 
margin obliquely descending; posterior dorsal margin slightly produced and 
feebly concave; base line arcuate, ascending posteriorly. Lunular area 
depressed but not well defined. Escutcheon produced for about half the 
distance from the umbones to the posterior ventral margin, feebly depressed; 
the margin elevated and clearly defined by an elongate-cordate area inclosing 
the escutcheon and extending from the umbones to the extremity of the rostral 
ray; a second ray developed anterior to the rostrum, well defined but not 
conspicuous; its extremity indicated at the ventral margin by a slight jog. 
Concentric sculpture not developed upon the umbonal area; surface away 
from the umbones threaded with well rounded lirae evanescent upon the 
anterior portion of the shell and abruptly disappearing a little in front of the 
secondary rostral ray; rostrum incrementally striated but not threaded. 
Chondrophore minute, sub-umbonal. Dentition moderately: strong; the 
teeth in the anterior series approximately 18 in number; posterior series feebly 
concave, of nearly the same length as the anterior but less crowded, containing 
only about 15 component teeth. Adductor and pallial scars very obscure; 
shell reinforced by a slight thickening upon the inner surface directly. in 
front of the rostrum. 


AuG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 3695 


Dimensions: Altitude, 3.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.0 millimeters; diameter, 
2.6 millimeters. ; 

Holotype.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369241. 

Type locality Smithville, Bastrop County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne 
group). | 

Leda atakta is a species of no striking characters but it does not conform 
to any of the prescribed groups. Leda jewett: is relatively higher, with 
rostral rays and with a concentric sculpture developed over a greater part 
of the surface. Leda media to which L. atakta is closely related is more 
produced and attenuated posteriorly, with a finer concentric sculpture de- 
veloped upon the umbones, as well as upon the medial and ventral portions 
of the shell. In both species, however, the sculpture is obsolete upon the 
anterior portion of the shell. 


Family ARCIDAE 
Genus BarBATIA Gray 


Barbatia deusseni Gardner n. sp. 


Figures 20, 21 
1919. Arca rhomboidella Harris (part), Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 51. Not 
Arca rhomboidella H.. C. Lea, 1833. 

Shell rather small, moderately heavy, transversely elongated, obliquely 
constricted mesially ; basal margin parallel to the hinge; anterior lateral margin 
obliquely truncated; the posterior lateral margin vertically truncate, rounding 
into the base but angulated at the hinge. Umbones prominent, inflated, 
overtopping the hinge line; the tips flattened, incurved, prosogyrate, and 
falling within the anterior third. External surface closely sculptured radially, 
the ribs 40 in number on the type, finest and closest upon the obscure medial 
depression; slightly coarser and tuberculated anteriorly; coarsest and least 
crowded upon the obtuse posterior keel; anterior and medial ribs medially 
suleate; posterior ribs entire though somewhat nodulated; a very fine, even, 
concentric threading visible in the interspaces and reflected in the nodulation 
of the ribs. Cardinal area very narrow, asymmetric; area beneath and in 
front of the umbone smooth; area behind the umbones obliquely grooved. 
Hinge very narrow medially, widening laterally; teeth beneath the umbones 
very short and vertical; short and oblique along the narrow posterior portion 
of the hinge, the distal teeth quite coarse and approximately parallel to the 
hinge. Muscle scars and pallial line obscure. Inner margins coarsely 
dentate. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 11.6 millimeters; latitude, 17.7 millimeters; semi- 
diameter, 5.2 millimeters. 

Holotype.—U.8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369244. 

Type locality —One mile below Collins Ferry, Burleson County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne 
group). | 


Lea’s Claiborne species, with which the Texas form has been confused, is 


decidedly less gibbous, more elongated transversely, and with a less uniform 
ribbing. 


366 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


I have the pleasure of naming this form in honor of Alexander Deussen, 
Esq., who by his assiduous collecting has so largely increased our knowledge 
of the Tertiary of Texas. 


Family OsTREIDAE 
Genus OSTREA Linnaeus 


Ostrea duvali Gardner, n. sp. 
Figures 1-4 

Shell of moderate dimensions for the genus, inequivalve, ovate-trigonal in 
outline, frequently with a large attachment area and relatively broad in con- 
sequence. Surface layer decorticated; right valve built up of overlapping 
concentric lamellae so that the shell thins toward the ventral margin, and 
would be heaviest in the umbonal area were it not for the encroachment of the 
ligament area; a subcutaneous radial threading on the right valve but no true 
radial scuplture developed; left valve fluted with narrow radials ranging in 
number from 20 to 25 in the narrower forms and running to 35 and 40 in the 
broader; obsolete on the attached surface. Ligament area large, flattened 
in the right valve; the media] depression in the left valve broadly U-shaped. 
Lateral margins of right valve finely. pitted, the pitting persistent in some 
individuals around the entire inner margin. Adductor scars rather small, 
crescentic, not deeply excavated, posterior and below the median horizontal. 
Pedal scar obscure. 

Dimensions: Right valve, altitude, 10.6 millimeters; latitude, 6.1 mulli- 
meters, semi-diameter, 2.4 millimeters. Left valve of another individual; 
altitude, 10.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.95 millimeters; semi-diameter, 3.45 
millimeters. : 

Cotypes.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369239. | 

Type locality —Austin-Elgin Ferry road, 1 mile north of Austin-Bastrop 
Highway, Bastrop County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Wilcox group, probably the Indio formation. 

Ostrea duvali suggests in the sculpture characters Ostrea crenulimarginata 
Gabb and Ostrea multilirata Conrad. If the left valves alone were known, 
they would be referred without serious misgivings to O. multzlirata; if the right 
valves only, they might be confused with O. crenulimarginata Gabb. ‘The 
finer, more numerous radials of O. dwvalz serve to separate it from O. crenuli- 
marginata, and the absence of radials upon the right valves distinguish it 
from O. multilirata. 

The exact horizon of Ostrea duvali is not known but it is certainly Wilcox 
and younger than Ostrea multilirata Conrad. 

I have the pleasure of dedicating this species to Mr. Hugh Duval of Bastrop, 
Texas, to whose kindness I am indebted for the knowledge of the locality. 
Many visiting geologists during the past few years have profited by Mr. 
Duval’s keen observation, intelligent interest in the country about him, and 
his splendid collections—the best that I have seen in the way of a local 
assemblage. 

Occurrence.—Austin-Elgin Ferry road, 1 mile north of Austin-Bastrop 
Highway, Bastrop County ; Caldwell Knob, Bastrop County; 1 mile northeast 
of New Berlin, Guadalupe County. 


AuG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 367 


Family PHOLADOMYACIDAE 
Genus PHoLADOMYA Sowerby 


Pholadomya (claibornesis subsp.?) harrisi Gardner, n. sp. 


1919. Pholadomya claibornensis Harris, Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 197. pl. 59, 
f.9.. Not Pholadomya claibornensis Aldrich, 1886. 

Shell exceedingly thin, nacreous, oblong. Trigonal in outline, expanded 
anteriorly; the posterior dorsal margin approximately parallel to the base; 
the posterior extremity very broadly rounded. Umbones full, prominent, 
nearly terminal, the tips incurved and in contact. Concentric folds rather. 
coarse, strong and regular, though incremental in character; radials well’ 
developed upon the medial portion of the shell, absent upon the extreme | 
anterior and over a slightly greater posterior area; discontinuous, inclined 
to be nodose at the intersection with the concentric rugae and obsolete in the 
interspaces. Characters of the hinge and interior not known. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 22.0 millimeters; latitude, 30.0 millimeters. 
(Taken from drawing.) 

Holotype.—Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. 

Type locality —Two miles east of Alto, Cherokee County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne 
group). 

The Texas specimens have been separated from those from Alabama 
because of the stronger and more persistent radial sculpture and apparently 
coarser concentric markings. The species is poorly preserved, as a rule, and 
has only a meager representation so that it is difficult to determine either the 
constancy or the value of these differences. 


I have the pleasure of naming the form in honor of Prof. Gilbert D. Harris 
of Cornell University. 


Family VERTICORDIIDAE 
Genus VERTICORDIA (Searles Wood Ms.) Sowerby 


Verticordia satex Gardner n. sp. 
Figures 22, 23 


Shell hihi nacreous, small, comprenced: subtrigonal in outline, inequi- 
lateral. Umbones sub- central, incurved, strongly prosogyrate. Margin 
directly in front of the umbones deeply excavated by the false lunule. Es- 
cutcheon absent. Anterior extremity strongly arcuate; posterior dorsal and 
lateral margins forming a parabolic curve from the umbones to the arcuate 
_ base. Outer surface heavily corded with 14 subequal, abruptly elevated ribs 

radiating from the umbones in gentle curves, convex posteriorly, more widely 
spaced medially but with no sharp break in the spacing; interradials deeply 
concave and wider than the radials; entire external surface micro-granular; 
outer margins sharply dentate. Ligament opisthodetic, deeply inset, con- 
tinued to the apices of the umbones. A single, rather stout, subumbonal 
cardinal developed in the right valve, received in the left valve between the 
dorsa] margin and the thickened inner margin of the lunule which functions as 
a denticle; posterior margin of right valve grooved to receive the bevelled 
margin of the left. Anterior muscle scar small, elongate, quite deeply sunken, 
its dorsal extremity beneath the ventral margin of the false lunule, posterior 


368 | JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14: 


muscle scar obscure. Pallial line remote from the margin, distinctly 
impressed. } 

Dimensions: Altitude, 3.0 millimeters; latitude, 3.0 millimeters; semi- 
diameter, 0.7 millimeter. 

Holotype. —U.S8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369240. 

Type locality—Mbosley’s Ferry, Brazos River, Brazos County. Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne 
group). i 

Verticordia satex is doubtless related to Verticordia eocenensis Langdon de- 
seribed from Wautubbee Hills, Clarke County, Mississippi. The Texas 
species is a smaller and more delicate shell, less inflated, more trigonal in 
Ousaney with a more sharply elevated radial ccukptute 


Family CRASSATELLITIDAE 
Genus CRASSATELLITES Kriger 
Subgenus CRASSINELLA Guppy 


Crassatellites (Crassinella) pteleina Gardner n. sp. 


Figures 18, 19 


Shell very small, quite thin, nearly equilateral, evenly inflated, roughly a 
sector of 90°. Umbones inconspicuous, somewhat flattened upon their 
summits, the tips turned slightly forward. Lunule and escutcheon co-. 
extensive with the dorsal margins, the lunule the narrower and the less 
produced; both of them sharply defined by the angulation of the valve and 
by the absence of any sculpture. Anterior dorsal margin shorter than the 
posterior; base arcuate. Surface smooth excepting for a somewhat exag- 
gerated incremental sculpture, strongest upon the umbones and toward the 
tateral and ventral margins; an exceedingly fine radial lineation similar to 
that often discernible upon the recent C. lunulatus developed in some in- 
dividuals. Ligament entirely internal; the ligament pit produced beneath 
the tips of the umbones. Hinge plate minute, the dentition delicate; right 
anterior cardinal partially fused with the dorsal margin; posterior cardinal 
short, slender, cuneate; anterior dorsal margin grooved its entire length to 
receive the bevelled edge of the left valve; posterior dorsal margin slightly 
modified to function as a lateral; dentition of left valve not known but doubt- 
less normal. Adductor scars large but obscure. Pallial line simple, distant 
from the ventral margin. 

- Dimensions: Altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.75 millimeters; semi- 
diameter, 1.0 millimeter 
_ Holotype.—Aldrich collection, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. 
Type locality — Elm Creek, Lee County, Texas. 


Geologic horizon—Yegua formation (upper part of Claiborne group). 
The species is remarkable for the even inflation of the disk, and the absence 
of any well-defined sculpture. Nothing very close to it has been recognized. 


_Crassatellites (Crassinella) aldrichi Gardner n. sp. 


Figures 14-17 


°-1919. Crassinella minor Harris (part), Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 92. 
Not Astarte minor Lea, 1835. 
‘Shell minute, compressed, narrow trigonal, nearly equilateral. Umbones 


‘AUG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 369 


acute, feebly arcuate, the tips proximate, with a slight posterior inflection, 
nearly central in position. Dorsal margins straight, converging at an angle 
of not far from 90°; base line arcuate, a little more strongly upcurved an- 
teriorly than posteriorly. Lunule and escutcheon co-extensive with the 
dorsal margins; escutcheon the wider of the two, and like the lunule defined 
not only by the angulation of the valves but also by the abrupt disappearance 
of the concentric sculpture. Sculpture very irregular in development, never 
very sharp; tips of umbones usually smooth; the rest of the shell concentrically 
wrinkled, the folds coarser, as a rule and less closely spaced-upon the medial 
portion of the shell than upon the ventral, tending to flatten a little toward 
the margins of the lunule and the escutcheon where they abruptly disappear. 
Ligament entirely internal, the pit produced well beneath the umbones. 
Dentition delicate; anterior cardinal of right valve fused with the cardinal 
margin; posterior cardinal, laminar, somewhat cuneate; posterior dorsal 
margin bevelled to function as a lateral; anterior dorsal margin of right valve 
suleate, the inner margin elevated medially; anterior cardinal of left valve 
elevated, laminar, the posterior cardinal very short and partially fused with 
the dorsal margin; margin of ligament pit elevated, simulating a tooth; 
anterior dorsal margin of left valve bevelled, the posterior suleate, and the 
inner margin raised medially. Adductor scars relatively large. Pallial 
line simple. Inner margins not crenate. 

Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 2.6 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- 
meters, semi-diameter, 0.8 millimeter; left valve: altitude, 2.4 millimeters; 
latitude, 2.3 millimeters; semi-diameter, 0.7 millimeter. 

Cotypes.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369249. 

Type locality—4 miles southeast of Floresville, Wilson County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne 
group). 

Crassatellites (Crassinella) aldrichi is the analogue in the Texas Eocene of 
Crassatellites (Crassinella) of Alabama. It is a smaller species than C. parva 
Lea with a more obtuse sculpture. The sculpture is not developed upon the 
umbones, as a rule, while in C. minor Lea the fine, sharp laminae are initiated 
at avery early stage. 

Crassatellites aldrichz is restricted inits distribution and never very abundant. 
I have the honor to name it for Truman H. Aldrich, Esq., long among the 
foremost of the Tertiary paleontologists. 


Family CARDITIDAE 
Genus VENERICARDIA Lamarck 


Venericardia horatiana Gardner, n. sp. 


Figures 28, 29 


Shell rather small, thin, rudely quadrate, moderately inflated; obscurely 
flattened posteriorly. Umbones quite small, incurved, prosogyrate, acutely 
tapering, placed a little in front of the median vertical. Lunule minute, 
deeply impressed. Anterior end very broadly rounded; posterior dorsal 
margin obliquely sloping, rounding into the vertically truncate lateral ex- 
tremity; base line feebly arcuate. Tips of umbones reticulately sculptured; 
radials, excepting on weathered specimens, restricted to the dorsal posterior 
portion of the shell, most closely spaced posteriorly, not developed on the 


370 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


extreme half or third of the shell; radials usually 20 or 21 in number, moder- 
ately elevated near the umbones and showing a slight tendency to be nodose; 
inter-radials near the umbones broadly U-shaped, the incrementals very 
fine and sharp and evenly developed in the channels but not over-riding the 
radials; radial sculpture away from the umbones sub-cutaneous; the inter- 
radials appearing as very feebly incised lines; least feeble posteriorly; a 
scalloped incremental sculpture showing faintly upon the ventral portion of 
the shell. Hinge plate moderately heavy. Ligament external, the area 
narrow and much produced. Dentition normal; anterior cardinal of right 
valve nearly obsolete; medial cardinal heavy, asymmetrically cuneate, pos- 
teriorly produced, feebly striated transversely ; posterior right cardinal slender, 
elevated; anterior left cardinal short, stout; posterior cardinal much produced, : 
relatively slender, the inner surface of the anterior and both the laterai 
surfaces of the posterior cardinal transversely striated. Characters of interior 
sharply defined by the slight thickening of the shell over the surface of the 
adherent mantle. Adductor scars very distinct, the anterior rudely reniform, 
the posterior semi-elliptical; pedal scar small but deeply impressed, directly 
dorsal to the anterior adductor. Pallial line simple, rather far removed from 
the ventral margin; inner margins strongly crenate. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 25.0 millimeters; latitude, 27.0 millimeters; semi- 
diameter, 9.0 millimeters. 

Holotype.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369238. | 

Type locality.—13 miles west of Sabinetown, Sabine County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Wilcox formation. 


Venericardia horatiana is remarkable for the quadrate outline, and the 
character of the sculpture. Beneath the outer shell layer, the radials are 
angular and persistent to the ventral margin; but in perfectly preserved 
specimens, they are almost entirely concealed by the epidermal veil. This 
epidermis is produced, at the lower margin, a trifle beyond the layers beneath 
and the scalloping of this thin edge is remarkably sharp. 

Though obviously of the general group of V. planicosta, this species is not 
approached very closely by any others. 


Venericardia trapaquara subsp. texalana Gardner, n. subsp. 
Figures 24-27 
1919. Venericardia trapaquara Harris (part), Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 81. 
(USO 

Shell of only moderate dimensions, rather thin, rudely trigonal to quadrate 
in outline, moderately inflated. Umbones gibbous, the tips incurved and 
prosogyrate, anterior in position. Lunule minute, depressed, sharply de- 
limited. Anterior extremity strongly bowed in front of the lunule; posterior 
dorsal margin gently sloping, rounding broadly into the vertically truncate 
lateral margin; base line feebly arcuate. External surface sculptured with 
20 to 22 obscurely terraced radials, each crowned with a narrow, sharply 
serrate cord; inter-radial channels broadly U-shaped, sharply delimited; 
microscopically sculptured by the down-curved incrementals. Ligament and 
dental characters normal. Adductor scars less conspicuous than in the 
heavier forms. Ventral and lateral margins strongly serrate. 

Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 17.0 millimeters: latitude, 16.0 mulli- 


AUG. 19,1927 © GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 371 


meters; semi-diameter, 7.5 millimeters; left valve; altitude, 17.0 millimeters; 
latitude, 16.5 millimeters; semi-diameter, 6.65 millimeters. 

Holotype.-—Academy Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, Pa. 

Type locality —Black Shoals, Brazos River, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne 
group). 

This subspecies is remarkable for the relatively small number of ribs, and 
its sculpture is similar to that of V. natchitoches Harris, though the umbones 
are much lower. More perfect material may prove the subspecies to be 
deserving of specific rank. 

Forms from St. Augustine, obviously of this same group, are more com- 
pressed and develop only 16 or 17 radials. Juveniles from the environs of 
Sabinetown are apparently referable to this subspecies though they are 
slightly more compressed than those from the type locality. | 


Subgenus PLEUROMERIS Conrad 


Venericardia (Pleuromeris) leonensis Gardner, n. sp. 


Figures 38, 39 


Shel: minute, solid, ovate-trigonal in outline, moderately inflated. Um- 
bones broadly rounded, the tips proximate and nearly central; the smooth 
embryonic shell usually retained. Lunule relatively large, much depressed, 
sharply delimited. Dorsal margins converging at an angle of not far from 
45°; anterior extremity bowed slightly in front of the lunule; posterior and 
ventral margins broadly rounded. External surface strongly fluted by the 
radials; radials 14 or 15 in number, as a rule, minutely nodose, increasingly 
elevated ventrally; inter-radials broadly U-shaped, microscopically striated 
by the incrementals, wider toward the ventral margin than the radials. 
Ligament external, opisthodetic, lodged in a narrow groove, about one-fourth 
as long as the posterior dorsal margin. Dentition rather delicate for so solid a 
shell; anterior right cardinal nearly obsolete; medial cardinal asymmetrically 
cuneate, much produced; posterior right cardinal obsolete; right posterior 
dorsal margin modified to function as a lateral; left anterior cardinal short, 
deltoid; left posterior cardinal relatively slender, produced parallel to the 
dorsal margin, separated from the cardinal by a deep trigonal sub-umbonal 
socket; a narrow pocket in the posterior dorsal margin to receive the modified 
dorsal margin of the right valve; anterior dorsal margin near the extremity 
of the lunule slightly modified and received in a corresponding groove in the 
right valve. Adductor scars relatively large. Pallial line simple. Inner 
margins coarsely crenate. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 2.2 millimeters; latitude, 2.0 millimeters; semi- 
diameter, 1.0 millimeters. 

Holotype.—U. S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369247. 

Type locality.—8 miles south of Jewett, Leon County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne 
group). 

Venericardia leonensis is smaller than Venericardia parva Lea and the ribs 
are less numerous. V. parva symmetrica Dall is quite similar in outline 


though more compressed. If I have read the description and figure of V. 


372 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


tortidens Harris correctly, it is very close to leonensis, but thinner shelled and 
less trigonal in outline. 
Venericardia leonensis is known only from the type locality. 


Family CHAMIDAB 
Genus PsEupOCcHAMA Odhner 


Pseudochama harrisi Gardner, n. sp. 


Figures 43, 44 
1919. Chama monroensis Harris, Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 1380. pl. 41, f. 2-4. 
Not Chama monroensis Aldrich, 1903. 

Shell small, moderately heavy, rudely circular in outline; right valve evenly 
but not strongly inflated, the left attached valve much deeper. Umbones 
twisted forward, conspicuously so in the left valve; the nepionic characters 
not preserved. Lunule and escutcheon not defined. External surface of 
right valve sculptured with crowded lamellae, their free edges produced into 
spines, usually finer and longer upon the anterior portion of the shell; left 
valve not well preserved, apparently much more distantly sculptured. Liga- 
ment marginal, lodged in a deep groove produced to the tips of the umbones. 
Dentition rude; the prominent flattened subumbonal process in the left valve 
received between amorphous corrugated ridges in the right. Muscle scars 
large and prominent, the anterior elongated. Pallial line entire. Inner 
margins crenate. 

Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli 
meters; diameter, 6. 0 millimeters. 

Holotype.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 1389451. 

Type locality.—8 miles west of Enterprise, Clarke Co., Mississippi. 

Geologic horizon.—Lisbon formation (lower part of Claiborne group). 


In sculptural characters, the species is much nearer to P. mississeppiensis 
(Conrad) than it is to P. monroensis (Aldrich). The Vicksburg form, how- 
ever, is more closely and strongly spinose than any of the lower Claiborne 
Eocene forms under observation. 

I have the pleasure of naming the form in honor of Prof. Gilbert D. Harris 
of Cornell University, who was the first to indicate the peculiarities of this 
species. 

Family Luctnipar 
Genus PHacorpEs Blainville 
Subgenus Parvituctna Dall 


Phacoides (Parvilucina) sabelli Gardner, n. sp. 
Figures 10-13 


Shell small, solid, moderately inflated, inequilateral. Umbones small but 
well rounded, the tips acute and directed forward; prominent by reason of 
their elevation; nearly central in position. Lunule rather large, abruptly 
depressed, probably broader and more sharply defined in the left valve than 
in the right. Escutcheon exceedingly narrow. Dorsal margin excavated 
at the lunule; anterior lateral margin broadly rounded or even obtusely 
angulated; posterior dorsal margin obliquely sloping, the lateral margin 
vertically truncate; base line strongly arcuate, often obscurely angulated 


 aua. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS | 373 


posteriorly; posterior area flattened or even a little concave, defined by an 
obtuse keel running from the umbones to the posterior ventral margin; a 
shallow groove sometimes discernible near the margin. External surface 
smooth excepting for an incremental sculpture; and, in exceptional indi- 
viduals, an exceedingly fine radial lineation. Ligament marginal, inset, the 
groove short, moderately deep, directed backward from the tips of the um- 
bones. Dentition rather vigorous for so small a shell; anterior cardinal of 
right valve fused with the dorsal margin; posterior cardinal deltoid; anterior 
cardinal of left valve broader and more elevated than the posterior, separated 
from it by a trigonal pit for the reception of the right posterior cardinal; 
right laterals short, rather stout, conic, with a groove between them and 
the dorsal margins; receiving pockets of left valve correspondingly deep, 
their inner margins elevated. Adductor scars strongly impressed, the an- 
terior reniform, the posterior irregular in outline. Pallial line entire; surface 
thickened and somewhat punctate over the area of the attached mantle. 
Inner margins crenate. 

Dimensions: Right valve; altitude, 2.8 millimeters; latitude, 2.7 milli- 
meters; diameter, 1.0 millimeter. Left valve: altitude, 2.5 millimeters: 
latitude, 2.5 millimeters: diameter, 1.0 millimeter. 

Cotypes. —U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369245. 

Type locality—a14 miles west of Sabinetown, Sabine Come Texas. 

Geologic horizon. Snes formation. 


Phacoides sabelli is remarkable for the absence of any sculpture. It is 
restricted in its known distribution to the type locality. 


Family DiIrpLODONTIDAE 
Genus DipLoponta Bronn 


Diplodonta satex Gardner, n. sp. 
Figures 34, 35 


Shell small, rather’ compressed, rudely quadrate in outline. Umbones 
full but narrow, acute and feebly prosogyrate at their tips and overtopping 
the dorsal margins a little behind the median vertical. Anterior dorsal 
margin more produced than the posterior, the anterior extremity obtusely 
truncate vertically; the posterior, obliquely truncate; base line broadly 
arcuate. Lunule and escutcheon not developed. External surface smooth 
excepting for a quite sharp concentric grooving restricted in some indi- 
viduals to the anterior portion of the shell, in others developed upon the 
posterior as well. Ligament marginal, opisthodetic. Hinge apparently 
normal, though known only from the left valve; left anterior cardinal bifid, 
the posterior short and laminar, fused with the dorsal margin. Adductor 
sears and pallial line obscure. Inner margins beveled. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 7.2 millimeters; latitude, 7.0 millimeters; semi- 
diameter, 2.5 millimeters. 

Holotype. —U.S8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369234. 

. Type locality—Three-fourths mile south of Elkhart, Anderson County, 
exas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Monnéan formation (lower part of Claiborne 
group). 

The angular outline is perhaps the most characteristic feature of this 
species. It is rather widely distributed in Anderson and Houston Counties 
but it has not been recognized elsewhere. 


374 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


Family LeproniparE 
Genus Borntia Philippi 


Bornia zapataensis Gardner, n. sp. 
Figure 9 


Shell small, thin, approximating a low isosceles triangle, slightly de- 
pressed medially; apical angle about 110°. Posterior dorsal margin slightly 
higher than the anterior; lateral margins quite sharply rounded, base line 
nearly straight. Lunule and escutcheon not defined. External surface 
radially grooved, the radii inclined away from the median vertical, leaving 
a small medial arc devoid of radial sculpture; radials sufficiently strong 
upon the anterior and posterior areas to flute the inner surface; a micro- 
scopically fine concentric striation developed over the entire disk. Interior 
. filled with a hard matrix concealing the characters of the hinge and adductor 
and pallial scars. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 5.0 millimeters; latitude, 6.5 millimeters. 

Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369237. 

Type locality.—3 miles southeast of Zapata, Zapata County, Texas. . 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne 


group). , 

Bornia zapataensis is the analogue in the Cook Mountain in Texas of Bornia 
zsoceles in the McBean formation in Georgia, and Bornia scintillata Dall in 
the Gosport sand. The sculpture of the Texas species approaches more 
closely to that of B. scintillata but it is neither so fine nor so sharp and covers 
a greater. portion of the surface. 

The type is unique. 

Family TELLINIDAE 
Genus TELLINA Linnaeus 


Tellina makelloides Gardner, n. sp. 
Figures 41, 42 


Shell very thin and fragile, about twice as broad as it is high; anterior 
portion much produced and evenly rounded; posterior end very short and 
obscurely rostrate. Umbones small, rising but little above the dorsal margin, 
strongly posterior, being only about half as far from the posterior extremity 
as they are from the anterior. Tips of umbones acute and inclined to be 
opisthogyrate. Posterior dorsal margin more steeply declining than the 
anterior; base line feebly arcuate; an inconspicuous but well defined fold, 
uniform in development from the umbones to the lower rostral angle. Ex- 
ternal surface smooth excepting for incrementals, strongest toward the 
ventral margin and, particularly, upon the rostral area. Ligament external, 
opisthodetic, the area linear, lanceolate, and extending for about half the 
length of the posterior dorsal margin. Hinge characters unknown. Adduc- 
tor scars very obscure, as might be expected in so thin a shell. Rostral fold 
indicated on the casts by a rather sharp ridge. Pallial sinus not observed. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 28.5 millimeters; diam- 
eter, 5.2 millimeters. 

Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369246. 

Type locality ——Three-fourths mile south of Elkhart, Anderson County, 
Texas. 


AUG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 379 


Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne 
group). 

The type is a partially calcified cast with portions of the shell still adhering, 
The maximum diameter is at some little distance in front of the beaks. 
Tellina cynoglossula of the Claiborne is similar in outline but is smaller and 
more strongly sculptured concentrically. 

The species is restricted in its known distribution to the environs of the 
type locality. 

Family CoRBULIDAE 
Genus CorBuLa Bruguiére 
Subgenus CarYocoRBULA Gardner 


Corbula (Caryocorbula) engonatoides Gardner, n. sp. 
Figures 30, 31 


Shell small, the right valve slightly larger than the left, notably com- 
pressed, rather solid, rudely rectangular in outline; rostrate posteriorly, the 
rostrum acutely angular, sharply pinched and slightly produced at the ex- 
tremity; area between the rostrum and the raised margin of the escutcheon 
concave. Umbones low, somewhat anterior in position, flattened upon 
their summits, incurved and prosogyrate, the umbo of the right valve 
slightly in advance of that of the left. Lunule not differentiated. Es- 
cutcheon well defined both by the raised margin and the sharp change in 
the direction of the incrementals, wider in the right valve than in the left. 
Dorsal margins gently sloping; anterior extremity well rounded, the posterior 
extremity obliquely truncate between the keels; base line nearly horizontal, 
feebly constricted in front of the produced posterior keel. External sculpture 
absent or very feeble upon the dorsal portion of the shell, developed upon 
the medial and ventral portions in the form of very heavy concentric folds, 
often with a fine secondary concentric striation; concentric sculpture very 
strong on crossing the keel, continuing across it to the margin of the es- 
cutcheon, becoming laminar toward the ventral margin, and reduced to in- 
crementals upon the escutcheon. Ventral margin of right valve incurved 
and overlapping the left. Ligament very short, inset, opisthodetic. Hinge 
normal; the single cardinal in the right valve moderately stout, conical, re- 
ceived in a correspondingly deep-subumbonal pit in the left valve; a dentate 
process developed behind the ligament support of the left valve but no true 
teeth. Interior more or less thickened in the adults. Muscle scars promi- 
nent. Pallal line distinct, obscurely truncate posteriorly but not sinuated. 

Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 5.3 millimeters; latitude, 8.5 milli- 
meter; diameter, 2.4 millimeters; left valve: altitude, 4.5 millimeters; 
latitude, 7.5 millimeters; diameter, 2.5 millimeters. 

Cotypes.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369250. 

Type locality.—Smithville, Bastrop County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne 
group). 

Corbula engonatoides is present in the lower part of the Claiborne group of 
Wautubbee, Mississippi, and has been confused with C. engonata Conrad | 
a Vicksburg species. The earlier form has a much more decided sculpture. 


The keel of C. engonata is distinct but it is not acute. In C. engonatoides it 


376 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


is not only acute, but, toward the ventral margin, sharply pinched. Directly 
in front of the keel, in the adult, there is a slight constriction of the basal 
‘margin while the area behind it is decidedly concave. Neither the basal 
constriction nor the posterior depression have been observed in the Vicks- 
burg form. The concentric sculpture, as a rule, is initiated later in C. 
engonatoides and is more pronounced. The very faint radial sculpture of 
the C. barratiana type which is usually discernible behind the keel of C. 
engonata has not been detected upon its progenitor. 


Corbula (Caryocorbula) augustae Gardner, n. sp. 
Figures 32, 33 


Shell small and very fragile, strongly inequivalve; the right valve much 
higher than the left and overlapping it ventrally and posteriorly. Right 
valve elevated trigonal in outline; the left, transversely ovate; right valve 
acutely rostrate posteriorly; a secondary keel developed at the margin of 
the escutcheon; the area between them depressed. Prodissoconch smooth 
and thick, capping the umbones as in C. texana Gabb. Umbones set a 
little in front of the median vertical, the right much more elevated than the 
left. Lunule not defined. Escutcheon smooth and rather narrow, produced 
the length of the dorsal margin. Anterior end well rounded from the um- 
bones to the base; posterior extremity in right valve vertically truncate, 
acutely rounded in the left; base line arcuate. External surface of right 
valve concentrically furrowed from the prodissoconch to the ventral margin, 
the rugae overriding the keel and persisting to the margin of the escutcheon, 
though with diminished strength; concentric furrows upon left valve, coarser 
and fewer in number, weakening toward the anterior and posterior dorsal 
margins. Ligament short, inset; the support in the right valve relatively 
prominent. Right cardinal slender, a shallow groove near the ventral 
margin of the right valve for the reception of the edge of the left. Muscle 
scars not conspicuous. Pallial line entire, obscure. 

Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 6.0 millimeters; latitude, 7.0° mulli- 
meters; diameter, 3.0 millimeters. Left valve: altitude, 4.5 millimeters; 
latitude, 5.7 millimeters; diameter, 2.0 millimeters. 

Cotypes.—U. S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369242. 

Type locality — Augusta, Houston County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne 
group). 

The right valve strongly suggests a delicate C. smithvillensis Harris but 
the left valve with its coarse concentric sculpture is quite distinct from: the 


high, inflated, feebly sculptured left valve of Harris’s species. 


Family RiInGIcuLIDAE 
Genus RinaicuLa Deshayes 


Ringicula trapaquara subsp. deusseni Gardner, n. subsp. 
Figure 40 


Shell small, solid; rather squat; the aperture a little more than half the 
altitude of the entire shell. Whorls approximately five in number; those of 
the conch and protoconch not sharply differentiated; initial turn largely 
submerged, the succeeding volution becoming eradually higher and more 
inflated; beginning of conch probably indicated by the narrow posterior 


AUG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS OV7 


tabulation introduced near the opening of the third whorl; whorls of spire 
trapezoidal in outline, the body broadly rounded. Surface sculptured with 
a relatively broad and deep sulcus near the posterior suture and nine or ten 
lineal sulci upon the body; area directly in front of the posterior sulcus 
smooth. Aperture oblique, constricted behind; peristome heavily calloused; 
outer lip slightly patulous, terminal varix wide and heavy, continuous with 
the parietal wash both anteriorly and posteriorly; serrate excepting along - 
the margins of the siphonal exits. Columellar folds heavy, three in number; 
the posterior, posteriorly inclined, placed directly behind*the abrupt con- 
striction of the body, the medial nearly horizontal and very close to the 
marginal anterior plait; both the incurrent and excurrent siphonal notches 
rather broad and deep. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 2.5 millimeters; maximum diameter, 1.6 milli- 
meters. 

Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369236. 

Type locality.—4 miles southeast of Floresville, Wilson County, Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne 


group). , 2 

The subspecies deussent differs from Ringicula trapaquara, strict sense, 
in the absence of spiral sculpture over the posterior portion of the body. 
The sulci are often not developed, at least upon the early whorls of the spire, 
in R. trapaquara s.s. but in the subspecies this character persists to the adult 
stage. The subspecies has been confused with Ringicula biplicata Lea, a 
similarly sculptured form but more slender and decidedly less calloused 
about the aperture. 


Family LIMNAEIDAE 
Genus PLanorsis Miiller 


Planorbis andersoni Gardner, n. sp. 
Figures 36, 37 


Shell small, exceedingly thin, discoidal, depressed on the umbilical, and 
to a lesser degree, on the apical surface. Whorls five in number, the two 
earliest included in the protoconch; first whorl of conch constricted at its 
opening and depressed below the plane of the protoconch; later whorls in- 
creasing rather rapidly in diameter and altitude; body relatively high, 
broadly rounded along the periphery; obtusely rostrate on both the apical 
and umbilical surfaces. Surface sculpture not developed. Aperture reni- 
form, adnate to the body wall upon the inner surface; less produced and 
more sharply rounded anteriorly than posteriorly. Umbilical surface 
funnel-shaped and somewhat scalariform, revealing all of the obtusely 
carinated posterior extremities of the component whorls. 

Dimensions: Altitude, 1.0 millimeter; maximum latitude, 2.2 millimeters; 
latitude, at right angles to maximum latitude, 2.0 millimeters. 

Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369235. 

Type locality —Three-fourths of a mile south of Elkhart, Anderson County, 
Texas. 

Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne 


group). 
This fresh-water genus has not been previously reported from the Eocene 
of Texas. It is fairly common at the single locality at which it is represented. 


378 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


Figures 14. Ostrea duvali Gardner, n. sp. (p. 366). 
1. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 10.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.95 milli- 
meters. 
2. Interior of right valve (cotype); altitude 10.6 millimeters; latitude, 6.1 milli- 
meters. 
3. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 10.6 millimeters; latitude, 6.1 milli- 
meters. 
4, Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 10.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.95 milli- 
meters. 
Figure 5. Leda trivitate Gardner, n. sp. (p. 363). 
Dorsal view of double valves (type); latitude, 4.0 millimeters; diameter, 2.1 mil- 
limeters. 
Figure 6. Leda jewettt Gardner, n. sp. (p. 363). 
Exterior of right valve; altitude, 3.8 millimeters; latitude, 6.2 millimeters. 
Figures 7,8. Leda atakta Gardner, n.sp. (p. 364). 
7. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 3.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.0 millimeters. 
8. Dorsal view of double valves (type); diameter, 2.6 millimeters. 
Figure 9. Bornia zapataensis Gardner, n. sp. (p. 374). 
Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 5.0 millimeters; latitude, 6.5 millimeters. 
Figures 10-13. Phacoides (Parvilucina) sabelli Gardner, n. sp. (p. 372). 
10. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- 
meters. 
11. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 2.8 millimeters; latitude, 2.7 milli- 
meters. 
12. Interior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 2.8 millimeters; latitude, 2.7 milli- 
meters. 
13. Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- 
meters. 
Figures 14-17. Crassatellites (Crassinella) aldricht Gardner, n. sp. (p. 368). 
14. Interior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 2.6 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- 
meters. 
15. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 2.6 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- 
meters. 
16. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 2.4 millimeters; latitude, 2.3 milli- 
meters. | 
17. Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 2.4 millimeters; latitude, 2.3 milli- 
meters. 
Figures 18,19. Crassatellites (Crassinella) pteleina Gardner, n.sp. (p. 368). 
18. Interior of right valve (type); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.75 milli- 
meters. 
19. Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.75 milli- 
meters. 
Figures 20, 21. Barbatia deusseni Gardner, n.sp. (p.365). 
20. Interior of right valve (type); altitude, 11.6 millimeters; latitude, 17.7 milli- 


meters. 
2h. Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 11.6 millimeters; latitude, 17.7 milli- 


meters. 


3v9 


SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 


NEW 


GARDNER 


AuG. 19, 1927 


Figures 1-4, Ostrea duvali 


380 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


Figures 5-23. 5, Leda trivitate; 6, L. jewetti; 7, 8, L. atakta; 9, Bornia zapataensis, 
10-13, Phacoides (Parvilucina) sabelli; 14-17, Crassatellites (Crassinella) aldrichi; 
18, 19, C’. pteleina; 20, 21, Barbatia deusseni; 22, 23, Verticordia satezx. 


AuG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 381 


Figures 24-29. 24-27, Venericardia trapaquara subsp. texalana; 28, 29, V. horatiana. 


382 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


Figures 30-44. 30, 31, Corbula (Caryocorbula) engonatoides; 32, 338, C. augustae; 
34, 35, Diplodonta satex; 36, 37, Planorbis andersoni; 38, 39, Venericardia (Pleuromeris) 
leonensis; 40, Ringicula trapaquara subsp. deusseni; 41, 42, Tellina makelloides; 48, 44, 
Pseudochama harrist. 


AuG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 383 


Figures 22, 23. Verticordia satex Gardner, n. sp. (p. 367). 
22. Interior of left valve (type); altitude, 3.0 millimeters; latitude, 3.0 milli- 
meters. 
23. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 3.0 millimeters; latitude, 3.0 millimeters. 
Figures 24-27. Venericardia trapaquara subsp. tezalana Gardner, n. subsp. (p. 370). 
24. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 17.0 millimeters; latitude, 16.0 milli-. 
meters. 
25. Interior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 17.0 millimeters; latitude, 16.0 milli- 
meters. j 
26. Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 17.0 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli- 
meters. 
27. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 17.0 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli- 
meters. 
Figures 28, 29. Venericardia horatiana Gardner, n. sp. (p. 369). 
28. Interior of left valve (type); altitude, 25.0 millimeters; latitude, 27.0 milli- 
meters. 
29. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 25.0 millimeters; latitude, 27.0 
millimeters. . 
Figures 30, 31. Corbula (Caryocorbula) engonatoides Gardner, n. sp. (p. 375). 
30. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 5.3 millimeters; latitude, 8.5 milli- 
meters. 
31. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 4.5 millimeters; latitude, 7.5 milli- 
meters. 
Figures 32, 33. Corbula (Caryocorbula) augustae Gardner, n. sp. (p. 376). 
32. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 6.0 millimeters; latitude, 7.0 milli- 
meters. 
33. Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 4.5 millimeters; latitude, 5.7 milli- 
meters. 
Figures 34, 35. Diplodonta satex Gardner, n. sp. (p. 373). 
34. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 7.2 millimeters; latitude, 7.0 millimeters. 
35. Interior of left valve (type); altitude, 7.2 millimeters; latitude, 7.0 millimeters. 
Figures 36, 37. Planorbis andersoni Gardner, n. sp. (p. 377). 
36. Umbilical view (type); maximum diameter, 2.2 millimeters; diameter at right 
angles to maximum diameter, 2.0 millimeters. 
37. Apertural view (type); altitude, 1.0 millimeter. 
Figures 38, 39. Venericardia (Pleuromeris) leonznsis Gardner, n. sp. (p. 371). 
38. Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 2.2 millimeters; latitude, 2.0 milli- 
meters. 
39. Interior of right valve (type); altitude, 2.2 millimeters; latitude, 2.0 milli- 
meters. 
Figure 40. Ringicula trapaquara subsp. deussent Gardner, n. subsp. (p. 376). 
Apertural view (type); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; diameter, 1.6 millimeters. 
Figures 41, 42. Tellina makelloides Gardner, n. sp. (p. 374). 
41. Posterior view of double valves (type); diameter, 5.2 millimeters. 
42. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 28.5 milli- 
meters. 
Figures 48, 44. Pseudochama harrisi Gardner, n. sp. (p. 372). 
43. Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli- 
meters. 
44. Interior of right valve (type); altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli- 
meters. 


384 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


Davip Wuite, who has been serving as Chairman of the Division of Geology 
and Geography of the National Research Council for the past three years, has 
returned to his former position in the U. S. Geological Survey. 

EK. O. Utricu, of the U. 8. Geological Survey, sailed for England late in 
June and will spend about six weeks in Europe. 

EUGENE STEBINGER, formerly geologist in the U. 8. Geological Survey and 
at present engaged in commercial geology with offices at Buenos Aires, 
Argentina, recently visited Washington on his way to Europe. 

W. P. Wooprine, of the U. 8. Geological Survey, has accepted an appoint- 
ment as Professor of Invertebrate Paleontology at the California Institute of 
Technology at Pasadena, to take effect in September. 

Frank Reeves has been granted leave from the U. 8. Geological Survey 
for four months to do commercial work in petroleum peolbeyl in Canada. 

F. L. Ransomn, formerly geologist of the U. 8S. Geological Survey, has 
resigned from the faculty of the University of Arizona and has accepted the 
Professorship of Economic Geology at the California Institute of Technology, 
Pasadena. 

M. N. Sxort, of the U. 8. Geological Survey, has been appointed Lecturer 
in Mining Geology at Harvard University during the absence of Professor 
Graton on his sabbatical year. 


Obituary 


Doctor Erwin F. Smitu, a member of the Acaprmy, a distinguished scientist 
of the Department of Agriculture and internationally known plant patholo- 
gist, died at his home in Washington, D. C., April 6, 1927. Dr. Smrira was 
born at Gilbert Mills, N. Y., Jan. 21, 1854, but early removed to Michigan, 
where he obtained his university training and lived until he came to the 
Department of Agriculture in 1886. At that time but little attention was 
given to plant diseases and few believed that bacteria were the cause of 
them. Long before the end of Dr. Smirn’s 40 years of diligent service, he 
‘was recognized as one of the foremost plant pathologists in the world and 
leader in a branch of science which now exceeds in number of workers any 
other branch of botanical endeavor in this country. Dr. Smita was the author 
of a three-volume monograph on Bacteria in Relation to Plant Diseases 
and An Introduction to Bacterial Diseases of Plants, besides a vast number 
of contributions in scientific journals. One of his most important contribu- 
tions to science and one which attracted world-wide attention was his work 
on certain plant cancers. He proved that these were caused by bacteria, 
and suggested the probability that animal cancers were also of bacterial 
origin, pointing out the striking analogies between the tumors of plants and 
animals. Besides his direct contributions Dr. Smita forwarded science by 
the help and encouragement he gave to a generation of younger workers. 
He was president of the Society of American Bacteriologists in 1906, of the 
Botanical Society of America in 1910, of the American Phytopathological 
Society in 1916, and of the American Society for Cancer Research in 1924. 
At the time of his death he was in charge of the Laboratory of Plant Pathology 
in the Bureau of Plant Industry. 


2 


this page 


on 


> 


societies will 


appe 
of 


iated 


th and 


o> 


: 
a 


seventh 


Vhs 


_ SCIENTIFIC Norss AND ee ee ate 


eeoreeeoeerveceee 


7 


OBITUARY... 002+ e.eseteseee seen 


seenvneezneeveneé 


President: siacigoee Weucue Smithsonian Lasts tution 
Corresponding Pee de ae pe See ee Bureau 0 of . 


Vor. 17 SEPTEMBER 19, 1927 No. 15 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
OF SCIENCES 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


WixuiaAM J. PETERS AaGNEs CHASE JouN B. Reesips, Jr. 
DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 


ASSOCIATE EDITORS 


L. H. ApAms S. A. Ronwer 
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 

E. A. GOLDMAN G. W. Stost 
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 

R. F. Griees J. R. SWANTON 
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


Roger C. WELLS 


CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 


BY THE 

WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES , 
Mr. Roya AND GUILFORD AVES. tse SEP 
BattTmore, Maryianp 4s 


Entered as Second Class Matier, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 


This Tegsas'i ‘the official « organ ie the Washington nee! of ne 
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this en 

(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of she 
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanat: 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calenc 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on 1 
_ the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the aut: 
issue of the J OURNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. Fat 


M anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. | 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. ; 

| Iliustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text, 
or diagrams of simple character. ae 

Proof -—In order to facilitate aout publication no proof will be gent. to authors. 
unless requested. It is urged that Pee suscary be. submitted i in final form; i the 
will exercise due care inseeing thatcopyisfollowed. — si 

Authors’ Reprints —Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of pri 


Copies 4, pp. g pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Gaver, 
50 $85 $1.65 $2.55. $3.25 — $2.00 

100 1,90)". 3.80 — 4.75 HOB EF 2.50 

. 150 Pa a0 Boe GOO i ae Oe 
ZOO sui Seo A BOG BT ¢ Meant Ges 8 Uaemeene rar 5 a" 
200) 3. 00. 5.30 © 6.25 2 1 o : 4,00. 


An additional charge of 25 cents will be ade for each split page. : . Gaal 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with! inclusive page pa) 
i nation and date of issue, will be seit when ordered. BUN 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for ae copies or reprint 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his escort a | 


The rate of Subscription per polteme 1B ia sien sa chek yee eee $6. 00* 
Semi-monthly mumibers. 26.56. os elie ls 2 Se le alee ae alee aida ae 
i Monthty numbers. gi, is os evs occ oe tac oe BERD od len oleic ere beat ee’ eae nina enar vad ‘ 
Remittances should be made payable to “Washington ee of Bdievoas, ey cai sen: 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, : D. Cc. Nee 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, Bes Ons Oe eta. oe 
Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other ‘publications. Hh 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided ae claim is made a 
within thirty eh after date of the ay aikaad: issue. i 


. Aolaiine I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special aie 
are given to members of scientific societies afiiliated withthe Academy. 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


VoL. 17 SEPTEMBER 19, 1927 No. 15 


CHEMISTRY .—The element ‘“‘mosandrum” of J. Lawrence Smith! 
Roger C. WELLs, U. 8. Geological Survey. 


Before the discovery of the rare earth element illintum by Hopkins? 
American chemists sometimes lamented the fact that no elements had 
been discovered in this country. It is true that Hillebrand had 
collected helium from uraninite but he did not recognize it as a new 
element. A few claims had been made but not substantiated. On 
the other hand, it is well known that J. Lawrence Smith definitely 
- claimed the discovery of a new element in samarskite, which he called 
“mosandrum,”’ but the fact that this name is not in the present list of 
elements tacitly suggests to most people that Smith did not find a new 
element. As a matter of fact he undoubtedly had at least one new 
element, perhaps three, in a certain fraction of “cerium earths,” but 
his name “‘mosandrum”’ failed to hold for any of these elements on 
account of a peculiar combination of circumstances. Too many 
chemists were claiming new elements at that particular period and in 
the mix-up of conflicting claims Smith, Delafontaine and Soret “lost 
out,’ though each was dealing with material containing new elements, 
as shown by subsequent developments. 

Smith’s well known method for determining the alkalies is a good 
one but the method he used for analyzing samarskite, a mineral con- 
taining a great variety of elements, has since been found to be incom- 
plete and to yield imperfect separations of some of the constituents. 
For example, calcium and lead were apparently not found by him. As 
he was one of the first to study the rare earths of samarskite his prepa- 


1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received July 
2, 1927. 
2 Ind. Eng. Chem., News edition, Mar. 20, 1926; Jour. Franklin Inst. 204: 1. 1927. 


385 


- 386 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


rations containing a supposed new earth were naturally less pure than 
those made by later investigators. 

In spite of the shortcomings just mentioned reasons can be advanced 
for giving Smith credit for the discovery of samarium, and probably 
also of gadolinium and possibly europium. Working on earths ob- 
tained from samarskite in 1877 he modestly claimed the discovery of 
only one new element, which he shortly afterwards named mosandrum. 
It should be recalled that the only elements of the rare earth group 
recognized in 1877 were yttrium, cerium, lanthanum, didymium, 
erbium and terbium. But about the same time Delafontaine thought 
that he had found a new earth in “‘yttria,’’ the element of which he 
named philippium, and another in ‘‘didymia,’’ whose element he 
named decipium, so that when he and Marignac hesitated to recognize 
“mosandrum,” the weight of their authority and the uncertainties of 
the questions involved left the identity of ‘‘mosandrum”’ in doubt. 

Smith sent a communication to the French Academy? in September, 
1877, (which was, however, not read until the next July) in which he 
stated that the ‘cerium earths” extracted from samarskite contained 
an earth (about 3 per cent of the mineral) which he regarded as new, 
if it was not terbium, which Delafontaine thought it might be. 
Its molecular weight was 327. It was more soluble in dilute nitric — 
acid than ceria, also in an alkaline solution through which chlorine is 
passed. It differed from didymia in color and in the fact that its— 
solutions showed no absorption spectrum, and from lanthana in color 
and in the great ease with which its salts are decomposed by heat. 

Shortly afterwards he proposed the name mosandrum for the new 
element. 

In the light of present knowledge the element thus claimed by Smith 
could only be samarium, europium or gadolinium, as Smith was not 
considering the yttrium group. Let us see what happened in the 
next few years. Smith generously distributed samples of the earths 
extracted from samarskite to several American and French chemists 
for any further studies they might wish to make. 

Delafontaine and Marignac criticised Smith’s announcement of a 
new element adversely,‘ but it must be remembered that they were at 
that time strenuously engaged in establishing their own claims to the 
discovery of new elements.® 


3 Acad. sci. C. R. 87: 146. 1878. 

4 DELAFONTAINE, Acad. sci. C. R. 87: 600. 1878; Martenac, tdem. 87: 281. 1878. 

5’ DELAFONTAINE, Arch. sci. phys. nat. 61: 273. 1878; Acad. sci. C. R. 87: 509. 
1878; Marrenac, Arch. sci. phys. nat. 64: 97. 1878; Acad. sci. C. R. 87: 578. 1878. 


SEPT. 19, 1927 © WELLS: ELEMENT ‘‘MOSANDRUM”’ 387 
>] 


In the years intervening between 1878 and 1886 Lecog de Boisbau- 
dran, through fractionations, accompanied by spectroscopic study, of 
earths associated with “didymia,’ found, characterized and named 
samarium’ (from the mineral samarskite). He said, “I think I should 
state here that the recognition of the new metal is the fruit of the in- 
dependent researches of several persons. ‘To each should eventually 
be attributed his just share in the discovery.” These “unnamed 
persons”’ were J. Lawrence Smith, Delafontaine, Soret, and Marignac. 
The name mosandrum might have been applied to the element that 
was designated samarium, although Lecog de Boisbaudran made no 
mention of Smith’s element at the time he proposed the name 
samarium. 

In the same period Marignac isolated the oxide of a metal, Y., that 
he supposed might be the element claimed by Smith.? His methods 
included fractional decomposition of the nitrates by heat and fractional 
precipitation of the sulphates by potassium sulphate. Smith had also 
used these methods but Marignac repeated the operations many times 
and, as Crookes showed by means of a characteristic phosphorescent 
spectrum, his product, Ya, was pure, whereas that of Smith was impure. 
The same fraction containing Y, was also prepared by Crookes. ‘The 
element Y, was later named gadolinium.’ It might possibly also have 
been considered to be mosandrum. 

Finally, in 1886, some material that had been prepared by Smith in 
Louisville several years before was examined by Lecoq de Bois- 
baudran,® who actually found in it, after removing didymium, both 
samarium and gadolinium, with some terbium, thus substantiating in 
a remarkable way Smith’s original claim of a new element in 
samarskite. 

Kuropium was not characterized until afterwards but may have been 
present as part of the “samarium.” It is not easy to say who really 
discovered europium. 

It must be admitted that Smith recognized a new earth in samarskite, 
but he did not obtain it in a pure state. For that matter, however, 
the first preparations of yttria, ceria, didymia, terbia, erbia, ytterbia, 
samaria, and holmia were all later shown to be impure, although they 
were credited to their discoverers as new. 


6 LEcOQ DE BOISBAUDRAN, Acad. sci. C. R. 88: 322; 89: 212. 1879. 

7Marienac, Acad. sci. C. R. 90: 899. 1880; idem, 102: 646. 1886; CrooKss, zdem., 
102: 646. 1886. 

8 Lecog DE BOISBAUDRAN, Acad. sci. C. R. 102: 902. 1886. 

® LEcog DE BOISBAUDRAN, Acad. sci. C. R. 102: 647. 1886. 


088 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


It required the spectroscopic work of Lecoq de Boisbaudran to 
isolate samarium, and he is generally recognized as its discoverer in 
spite of his credit to several other unnamed persons. On the other 
hand, the spectroscopic work of Crookes established the identity of 
gadolinium but its discovery is generally credited to Marignac. Smith 
and Crookes should share to some extent in that honor. 

Marignac on several occasions insisted that Smith’s element could 
not be either of those claimed as new by himself or Delafontaine 
(philippium, decipium, and Y,), because its oxide was supposed to be 
yellow. But Smith did not say that his new earth was yellow; more- 
over, he says that its salts show no absorption spectrum. One cannot 
help feeling that Marignac’s insistence that Smith’s earth was yellow 
had more weight than it should have had in discrediting Smith’s real 
discovery. Smith may have realized that color is a deceptive guide, as 
small quantities of foreign oxides show strongly in the colorless earths. 
On the other hand, it was only after Soret’s spectroscopic study that 
Smith had sufficient confidence to advance the definite name mosan- 
drum for the element he claimed as new. 

When all the facts are considered, it appears that J. Lawrence Smith 
should be given credit for recognizing the existence of a new element 
in samarskite, although his own preparations were impure and his 
characterization of the element was indefinite. ‘The element he named 
‘‘mosandrum’”’ was in fact not one but at least two elements later given 
the new names samarium and gadolinium. 


MINERALOG Y—Sericite-lazulite pseudomorphs after orthoclase from 
Bolivia. Haru V. SHANNON, U.S. National Museum. 


The following description pertains to some very interesting speci- 
mens in the collection of the late Frederick A. Canfield of Dover, N. J., 
which is now in the National Museum. ‘The specimens were collected 
personally by Mr. Canfield in 1886 while he was in charge of the mines 
of the Royal Silver Mines of Bolivia, Limited. There are several 
examples of the material in the collection (Original Numbers 1650, 
5138, 5140) and others were contained in the duplicate material from 
the Canfield collection purchased from the estate by the Mineralogical 
Museum of Harvard University. 

The specimens bear the label ‘‘Turquois? ps. after orthoclase in 


1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 
Received August 2, 1927. 


‘SEPT. 19, 1927 SHANNON: SERICITE-LAZULITE PSEUDOMORPHS 389 


porphyry, Real Socavon, Potosi, Bolivia,’’ and an additional memoran- 
dum on one of the labels states that ‘‘these crystals have never had a 
complete analysis. The late L. C. Bierwirth found that they were a 
phosphate of alumina.’ The crystals in question consist of pale to 
deep turquoise-blue pseudomorphs after orthoclase phenocrysts 
sparsely scattered through a highly altered quartz porphyry. The 
groundmass is a pale buff mass of sericitic material containing scat- 
tered minute crystals of pyrite. The original embayed crystals of 
quartz are unchanged and the porphyritic structure of the rock is 
perfectly retained. ‘The larger orthoclase phenocrysts are now entirely 
composed of the turquoise-blue material. ‘hese are either simple 
crystals or Carlsbad penetration twins. They are thick tabular 
parallel to the (010) pinacoid and are somewhat longer than broad 
reaching extreme dimensions of 33 X 22 X 7mm. The crystal habit 
is usual, the only forms represented being the pinacoid 6(010), the 
prism m(110), the base c(001), and the back dome y(201). Coming, 
as they do, from the walls of a tin vein, these are strongly reminiscent 
of the perfect Carlsbad twin pseudomorphs of cassiterite after ortho= 
clase, from the walls of tin veins in Cornwall, which are to be found in 
old collections. 

The feldspar phenocrysts of intermediate size are not twinned wa 
range in constitution from those consisting of an outer crust of blue 
material surrounding a core of sericite, often stained brown by iron, to 
masses of soft white sericite including only a grain or two of blue 
substance. ‘The smaller phenocrysts, probably originally plagioclase, 
are now silky white sericite without any of the blue material. 

Several of the broken or imperfect pseudomorphs were detached 
from the matrix for study. When these were crushed they were found 
to contain small perfect euhedral crystals of arsenopyrite, pyrite and 
' quartz in a soft and lustreless blue groundmass. ‘The whole mass was 
ground and screened and the quartz and sulphides separated with 
methylene iodide-bromoform heavy solutions. The blue material was 
further separated into heavier and lighter fractions. It was hoped 
that the blue mineral could be isolated for analysis by this method, but 
microscopic examination of the best concentrates which could be pre- 
pared indicated this to be impracticable. ‘The purified material con- 
sisted of scattered blue grains in an abundant matrix of aggregated 
grains of sericite. Mechanical separation proved impossible and 
neither blue mineral nor matrix were attacked by boiling 1:1 hydro- 
chloric acid. When the material was fused with sodium carbonate and 
dissolved in nitric acid, the solution reacted strongly for phosphoric 


390 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


acid with ammonium molybdate reagent. When ignited it turned 
brown, and when the brown material was digested in acid the solution 
contained aluminum but gave no reaction for copper. 

Under the microscope the determination of the optical properties is 
difficult owing to the small size of the grains of the blue material, their 
ageregate character, and the confusion with the intergrown sericite. 
Determination of the refractive indices is especially difficult but the 
mean index, £, is about 1.654. The birefringence is moderately low 
and the grains perpendicular to an optic axis do not extinguish in 
white light but owing to the high dispersion give abnormal blue and 
liver-brown colors. The mineral is biaxial and negative, with 2V 
very small. The dispersion, r<v, is very strong. There is a 
suggestion of imperfect cleavage in one direction and the grains are 
distinctly pleochroic with X colorless, Y and Z blue. ‘These optical 
properties differ from those given by Larsen for lazulite in that the 
indices are higher and the axial angle is smaller. The mineral agrees 
with lazulite in dispersion, optical sign, and pleochroism. The optical 
properties other than sign agree more nearly with turquoise but that 
mineral is optically positive. ‘This difference and the fact that no 
copper could be detected support the identification of the blue phos- 
phate as lazulite. The higher indices and smaller axial angle are 
doubtless traceable to difference in composition between this Bolivian 
material and the ordinary Georgia lazulite upon which the data in 
Larsen’s tables are based. 

The possibility that the mineral is an abnormally biaxial man- 
ganapatite was considered but rejected. After long boiling with 1:1 
nitric acid the blue material was not dissolved, and the extract gave a 
barely perceptible manganese color with ammonium persulphate. 
The extract reacted for phosphoric acid but this is doubtless due to a 
small amount of apatite of ordinary character which occurs as minute 
grains and prisms scattered through the sericitic material. 


PALEONTOLOGY.—A new early Ordovician sponge fauna.! R. 8S. 
BasstER, U.S. National Museum. 


Although a few individual species are found sometimes in great 
numbers, Paleozoic sponges are comparatively rare. ‘The discovery of 
an entirely new fauna comprising two families, one of them represented 
by five new genera, is therefore of unusual interest. ‘This exceptional 


1 Received July 25, 1927. 


sEPT. 19,1927 BASSLER: NEW ORDOVICIAN SPONGE FAUNA 391 


assemblage of new sponges was discovered in early Ordovician rocks 
of Chazyan age by Messrs. H. G. Clinton and Percy Train of Man- 
hattan, Nevada, two enthusiastic students of the geology of this state, 
who transmitted the specimens to me for determination and presented 
a generous set to the U.S. National Museum upon condition that they 
be described. The exact locality of these new sponges is in McMon- 
nigal Canyon, about 10 miles west of the Devil’s Punch Bow] in Moni- 
tor Valley and about 60 miles north of Manhattan, Nevada. 
According to Mr. Train, the limestones outcropping here are several 
thousand feet thick and form the main backbone of the Monitor Range 
on the west side of the valley. All the new sponges occur near the 
valley floor in the lower few hundred feet of the series. 

The specimens are found in somewhat shaly limestone, often 
attached to thin fossiliferous layers containing brachiopods, trilobites, 
and other invertebrates of decided Chazyan aspect. Among the 
various forms of trilobites noted, several are new species of exceptional 
interest, and one occurs abundantly which upon close study cannot be 
distinguished from Pliomerops barrandei Billings, originally described 
from the Chazyan of Newfoundland. Curiously enough, most of the 
sponges belong to the family Archaeoscyphidae, hitherto represented 
only in strata in the easternmost portion of North America. 

As Messrs. Clinton and Train have a considerable number of these 
new sponges which they wish to send out to students, they have asked 
me to issue this preliminary note in advance of a more detailed, illus- 
trated article so that they may have names for their specimens. All 
of their specimens can be classified under two Early Paleozoic families: 
first, the Anthaspidellidae Ulrich and Everett, represented by Antha- 
spidella and Sireptosolen; and second, the Archaeoscyphidae Rauff, 
hitherto known from a single genus and species but now augmented 
by five new genera. ‘The following brief descriptions give the general 
features of these new forms. 


SILICISPONGIAE 


Order TETRACTINELLIDA 
Family ARCHAEOSCYPHIDAE Rauff 


Sponge attached, simple or branching, ranging from saucer and funnel 
shapes to turbinate and frondescent; simple or branched cloaca usually of 
considerable diameter; oscula represented by numerous, closely spaced, 
small pores penetrating the spicular tissue of the wall and opening on the 
outer surface at regular intervals. Spicular structure much as in the 
Anthaspidellidae. 


392 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 15 


Genus Nevadocoelia, n. gen. 


Simple, erect, obconical, pedunculate sponges pierced throughout their 
length by a wide cloaca and marked on their outer surface by transverse 
ridges or rows of nodes. 

Genotype.— Nevadocoelia wistae, n. sp. 


Nevadocoelia wistae, n. sp. 


Sponge elongate, as much as 12 centimeters in length and 4 centimeters in 
greatest width, tapering gradually towards the base, with the surface marked 
by undulating, more or less parallel transverse ridges, of which 7 occur in 3 
centimeters. 

The specific name is in honor of Miss Meta Wist of Manhattan, Nevada, 
in appreciation of her interest in the natural history of that state. 


Nevadocoelia traini, n. sp. 


Similar in growth to the preceding but with the surface marked by sharp 
nodes instead of transverse ridges. These nodes are arranged in somewhat 
irregular transverse rows and six of them occur on an average in 2 centimeters, 
measuring transversely. 


Nevadocoelia grandis, n. sp. 


Sponge not unlike NV. wistae in structure but much larger. The diameter 
is 7.5 centimeters and the ridges stronger, with only 3.5 in 3 centimeters. 


Nevadocoelia pulchra, n. sp. 


Sponge 7 centimeters in diameter and more than 11 centimeters high with 
the cloaca 2 or more centimeters wide; marked by unusually large surface 
ridges which form wide, ascending, flange-like expansions and measure at 
least 1.5 centimeters distant from each other. 


Genus Lissocoelia, n. gen. 


Sponge consisting of smooth, cylindrical, hollow stems, branching at 
irregular intervals. Surface minutely porous and with the general structure 
of the family. Cloaca narrow but extending the full length of the sponge. 

Genotype and only species— Lissocoelia ramosa, ni. sp. 


Lissocoelia ramosa, n. sp. 


Sponge smooth, branching, usually about 1.5 centimeters in diameter but 
increasing to 2 centimeters at a division point; the cloaca 0.5 centimeters wide. 
Surface smooth, marked by small rounded pores distributed equally through- 
out the spicular tissue. 


Genus Calycocoelia, n. gen. 


Sponge cup-shaped with the cloaca increasing in width from below upward 
and opening at the upper outer surface as a deep excavation. Surface smooth 
and exhibiting the general microscopic structure of the family. 

Genotype and only species.—Calycocoelia typicalis n. sp. 


Calycocoelia typicalis, n. sp. 


The cup-shaped form, smooth surface, and wide cloaca of this species, 
7 centimeters in diameter at the top and less than 4 near the base, char- 
acterize this interesting species. 


sept. 19, 1927 BASSLER: NEW ORDOVICIAN SPONGE FAUNA 393 


Genus Patellispongia, n. gen. 


Sponge as found in the rocks consisting of lamellar fragments, sometimes of 
considerable dimensions, but originally probably broad saucer-shaped ex- 
pansions attached by a short stem. Under surface comparatively smooth, 
covered by a thick dermal tissue which when weathered shows regular canals 
or channels. Upper surface with numerous evenly spaced rounded pores 
surrounded by the usual spicular tissue. 

Genotype.—Patellispongia oculata, n. sp. 


Patellispongia oculata, n. sp. 


This species forms broad lamellar expansions with the upper surface ex- 
hibiting numerous rather regularly spaced pores 1 millimeter in diameter 
with 6 to 7 in 10 millimeters. 


Patellispongia clintoni, n. sp. 


Sponge similar to the preceding in growth but the pores slightly larger 
and, more important from a specific standpoint, almost 5 millimeters apart. 


Patellispongia minutipora, n. sp. 


Sponge consisting of thin lamellae and differing particularly from other 
members of the genus in the minuteness of the pores, since at least 15 can be 
counted in 10 millimeters. 


Genus Hesperocoelia, n. gen. 


General structure similar to that of Patellispongia save that the broad 
saucer-shaped lamella of that genus is here represented by a flat, undulated, 
two-leaved frond pierced along the upper edge by a row of rounded or oval 
openings which constitute the cloaca. 

Genotype.— Hesperocoelia typicalis n. sp. 


Hesperocoelia typicalis, n. sp. 


Sponge a flattened, flabellate frond more than 5 centimeters high and about 
6 millimeters in thickness, traversed by longitudinal canals of varying di- 
ameter which emerge at the surface along the upper thin edge in a row of 
narrow openings, each about 3 millimeters long, spaced so that 5 occur in 
20 millimeters. The usual pores in the spicular tissue show on both sides 
of the sponge with an average of 4 pores in 3 millimeters, measuring 
longitudinally. 


Hesperocoelia undulata, n. sp. 


This species differs decidedly from the preceding in that the openings along 
the upper edge of the sponge are round, 4 millimeters in diameter with about 
3.5 In 20 millimeters. Moreover, the small pores penetrating the spicular 
tissue are more delicate and closely spaced. 


Family ANTHASPIDELLIDAE Ulrich and Everett. 
Genus ANTHASPIDELLA Ulrich and Everett. 


This fine genus is represented by two very distinct new species which I 
have the pleasure of naming in honor of the discoverers of this new fauna. 


394 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


Anthaspidella clintoni, n. sp. 


Although related to Anthaspidella scutula Ulrich and Everett from the 
Black River (Platteville) limestone at Dixon, Illinois, in that it has the 
clusters consisting of the oscula and radiating canals comparatively small and 
close together, the present species differs in that the clusters measure 15 
millimeters, on an average, from center to center. 

Anthaspidella traini, n. sp. 


Sponge suggesting Anthaspidella flerifera Ulrich and Everett, from the 
Black River limestone at Dixon, Illinois, but differing in that the clusters 
are farther apart, averaging 25 millimeters from center to center. 

Genus STREPTOSOLEN Ulrich and Everett. 
Streptosolen occidentalis, n. sp. 


Sponge with the form and general structure of Streptosolen obcenicus 
Ulrich and Everett, the genotype, from the Black River (Platteville) lme- 
stone at Dixon, Illinois, but differing in that the canals do not intertwine 
so much and the central osculum is much wider and has larger tubes. 


BOTANY.—The genus Hampea.. Paut C. StTanpuey, U. 53. 
National Museum. 


The genus Hampea consists of a small group of American trees and 
shrubs which has been referred by most authors to the family Bom- 
bacaceae, although others have believed its more natural position to 
be in the Malvaceae. The genus was based by Schlechtendal upon a 
single species, H. wntegerroma, described from Veracruz. In 1862 
Triana and Planchon described a second species, H. thespesioides, from 
Colombia, and in 1886 Sereno Watson a third from Guatemala. A 
variety of H. integerrima was described from Costa Rica in 1899 by 
Capt. John Donnell Smith, and in 1923 I transferred to the genus a 
Mexican plant described as a Thespesia by Presl, and published a new 
species from the Yucatan Peninsula. 

Practically all the scanty herbarium material of the genus has been 
referred without question to the original H. integerruma. Our repre- 
sentation of the genus has increased rapidly in recent years, and when 
an attempt was made recently to name two Central American speci- 
mens, it became evident that the group was badly in need of revision. 

In the present treatment nine species are recognized, one indigenous 
in Colombia, the others ranging from Panama to southern Mexico. 

Through the courtesy of Dr. B. L. Robinson the material of this 
genus in the Gray Herbarium has been lent for study by the writer. 


1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received 
July 7, 1927. 


SEPT. 19, 1927 STANDLEY: GENUS HAMPEA 395 


HAMPEA Schlecht. lLinnaea 11: 371. 1837. 
KEY TO THE SPECIES 


Leaf blades with small auriculiform appendages at base. Leaves entire; 
capsule glabrous within except along the sutures; calyx in bud closed, in 
anthesis irregularly lobed. 

Appendages of the leaf blade 5 mm. long; capsule 2-2.3 cm. long; seeds 

SS ora es Ta ae aioe ly ots Sts Na Soh de Ae BE yt 1. H. appendiculata. 

Appendages 2 mm. long; capsule 1.5-1.7 cm. long; seeds 5 mm. long. 

2. H. panamensis. 

Leaf blades not appendaged at base. 

Leaves glabrous beneath or essentially so. 

Leaves entire; calyx truncate, not closed except in very young buds, 
5-7 mm. long. Capsule densely hispid within. 3. H. integerrima. 
Leaves 3-angulate; calyx closed in bud until shortly before anthesis, 
imerilarhy:lowate, LO.mam, lone) is.j5 0 Mal ase: 4. H. Rovirosae. 

Leaves obviously stellate-tomentose beneath. Capsule glabrous within 

except along the sutures. 

Leaves cordate at base, angulate or lobate. 

Pedicels solitary; leaves 5 or 7-nerved at base... 5. H. thespesioides. 

Pedicels in dense clusters in the leaf axils; leaves 9-nerved. 

6. H.jplatanifolia. 
Leaves truncate or rounded at base or merely concave, not cordate. 

Capsules 2.5-3 em. long. Leaves entire. 7. H. tomentosa. 

Capsules 1-1.8 cm. long. 

_ Leaves entire, usually abruptly acuminate, sparsely and minutely 
stellate-pubescent beneath; pedicels in anthesis 1.4 em. long 
or shorter....... Ao ee RCL EMR ne Se te 8. H. stipitata. 

Leaves mostly angulate or shallowly lobate, rounded to acute 
at base, densely and coarsely stellate-tomentose beneath (in 
age sometimes glabrate); pedicels in anthesis mostly 2-3.8 
COMMOTION Ry gabe ec rk aN Sy ake ah Ly 9. H. trilobata. 

1. Hampea appendiculata (Donn. Smith) Stand. 

Hampea integerrima var. appendiculata Donn. Smith, Bot. Gaz. 27: 331. 

1899. 

Although described originally as a variety, it is evident that this Costa 
Rican plant is worthy of specific rank. It differs from H. zntegerrima in its 
appendaged leaves; lobed, not truncate calyx; and in the glabrous rather than 
hispid inner surface of the capsule. The following specimens are at hand: 

Costa Rica: La Palma, alt. 1,550 m., Tonduz 12462 (J. D. Smith 7379; 
type). La Hondura, Prov. San José, alt. 1,300 m., Standley 37627, 36141. 
Tilardn, Guanacaste, alt. 600 m., Standley & Valerio 44401. Platanares 
(Moravia), Rowlee & Jiménez 208. El Mufieco, Prov. Cartago, alt. 1,400 
m., Standley & Torres 50941. Los Ayotes, Guanacaste, alt. 600 m., Standley 
& Valerio 45458. Naranjos Agrios, Guanacaste, alt. 600 m., Standley & 
Valerio 46427. La Tejona, Guanacaste, alt. 600 m., Standley & Valerio 
45922. 


This species is usually a small tree, 5 to 25 meters in height. It is common 
in the wet forests of central Costa Rica and of the Province of Guanacaste. 
The local name is ‘‘buriogre.”’ 


396 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


2. Hampea panamensis Standl., sp. nov. 

Medium-sized tree, the trunk sometimes 60 cm. in diameter; young 
branches densely stellate-tomentose, the tomentum minute, ferruginous or 
ochraceous; petioles slender, 3.5-6.5 cm. long, stellate-tomentose; leaf blades 
ovate or broadly ovate, 9-22 cm. long, 5-12 cm. wide, entire or slightly 
undulate, abruptly acuminate or merely acute, at base truncate or rounded 
and often asymmetric, auriculate-appendaged at the insertion of the petiole, 
the appendages rounded, 2 mm. long; blades membranaceous, deep green on 
the upper surface, when young sparsely and very minutely stellate-puberulent 
but in age glabrous or nearly so, beneath paler, covered with a minute, 
appressed, rather dense stellate tomentum of fulvous hairs, 5-nerved at base; 
flowers numerous, fasciculate in the leaf axils, the pedicels 5.9 mm. long, 
stellate-tomentose; bractlets 3, narrowly triangular or subulate, 2-2.5 mm. 
long, appressed to the calyx, caducous; calyx in bud closed, globose, in an- 
thesis campanulate, 6 mm. long, minutely tomentose, shallowly and ir- 
regularly 3-lobate, the lobes rounded; petals spreading or reflexed, 1 cm. 
long, densely and very minutely tomentose outside, glabrous within, gland- 
dotted; capsule obovoid-globose, short-stipitate, 1.5-1.7 em. long, rounded 
at apex, verruculose and brown-tomentose, 3-valvate, within hispid along the 
sutures but elsewhere glabrous; seeds 2 in each cell, oval, 5 mm. long, blackish 
brown, lustrous, the aril caplike, covering less than half of the seed; pedicels 
in fruit slender, about 2 cm. long, the calyx persistent. 

Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,269,804, collected in the 
Almirante region, Province of Bocas del Toro, Panama, in 1927, by G. P. 
Cooper and G. M. Slater (no. 15). The following collections also belong here: 

Panama: Almirante region, Cooper & Slater 8. Changuinola Valley, 
V. C. Dunlap 227. 


The vernacular names are given as “burio” and ‘azote.’ The wood is 
described as creamy gray and of medium coarse texture. 3 

Hampea panamensis is closely related only to H. appendiculata, which has 
rather narrower leaves with much larger appendages, and with a denser to- 
mentum on the lower surface, and larger capsules and seeds. 


3. Hampea integerrima Schlecht. Linnaea 11: 372. 1837. 

This is the type of the genus. The original material was collected near 
Josocola and Hacienda de la Laguna, Veracruz, by Schiede. The plant is 
very uniform in foliage, flower, and fruit characters. The following specimens 
have been examined: 

Veracruz: Zacuapan, Purpus 4453, 4453a, 8030 (Gray Hb.), 10748. 
Orizaba, Botteri in 1856; Bourgeau 3116 (Gray Hb.). Mirador, Liebmann 
393. Misantla, Purpus 5925. Jalapa, C. L. Smith 1536 (Gray Hb.). 

Oaxaca: Colonia Melchor Ocampo, Conzatt: 173 (Gray Hb.). 


Known in Veracruz as “jonote blanco.” 
4. Hampea Rovirosae Standl., sp. nov. 


Young branchlets very sparsely and minutely stellate-puberulent, soon 
glabrous or nearly so; petioles slender, 3.5-16 cm. long, glabrate; leaf blades 


sEPT. 19, 1927 ’ STANDLEY: GENUS HAMPEA 397 


rounded-ovate to suborbicular, 8-17 cm. long, 7-16 cm. wide, abruptly short- 
acuminate to obtuse, at base truncate or subcordate, the smaller leaves 
entire, the larger angulately 3-lobate, membranaceous, deep green above, 
glabrous or nearly so, beneath slightly paler, with a few minute stellate hairs 
scattered along the nerves, elsewhere glabrous, 7-nerved at base; flowers 
fasciculate in the leaf axils, the pedicels stout, 5-15 mm. long, minutely and 
sparsely stellate-puberulent; bractlets filiform, 3 mm. long; calyx ovoid in bud, 
in anthesis irregularly and shallowly cleft, campanulate, 1 cm. long, minutely 
stellate-tomentose or glabrate; petals reflexed, nearly 2 em. in total length, 
broadly rounded at apex, minutely stellate-tomentose on the outer surface, 
glabrous or nearly so on the inner surface. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 943,425, collected on moist 
banks of the Rio Grijalva, Tabasco, Mexico, August 19, 1889, by J. N. 
Rovirosa (no. 586). Vernacular name, “‘majagua blanca.” 


Hampea Rovirosae is closely related to H. integerrima and may be only a 
form of that species. It differs from the latter in the broader, sometimes 
angulate leaves, and in the larger, irregularly lobed calyx. 


5. Hampea thespesioides Triana & Planch. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. IV. 17: 
188. 1862. 

No material has been seen of this species, the only one occurring outside 
Central America and Mexico. It is reported, in the original publication, 
from the following localities: 

Cotomsta: Forests of the Province of Antioquia, alt. 700 m., Triana. 
Between Las Ceibas and Honda, and between El Pefién and Quebrada 
Grande, Goudot. Near Muzo, Purdie. 


The vernacular names are “zapotillo” and “achote cimarrén.”’ 

Judging from the description, H. thespesiozdes is related to the following 
Costa Rican species. The authors. give no dimensions of the parts of the 
plant, and detailed comparison is therefore difficult. 


6. Hampea platanifolia Standl., sp. nov. 

Large shrub or small tree, with few branches, the young branchlets densely 
and coarsely stellate-tomentose with brownish pubescence; petioles stout, 
16-27 cm. long, stellate-tomentose; leaf blades rounded-cordate in outline, 
18-30 em. long and usually of equal or greater breadth, rounded to cuspidate- 
acuminate at apex, at base shallowly or usually deeply cordate, the sinus 
narrow or broad, 3-7 cm. deep, the blades angulately 3 or 5-lobed, the lobes 
broadly rounded or obtuse, often cuspidate, membranaceous, deep green on 
the upper surface, when young densely stellate-tomentose, the tomentum 
persistent along the nerves, rough to the touch, beneath paler, at first densely 
and rather coarsely stellate-tomentose with fulvous hairs, the tomentum in 
age sparser but copious, the blades 9-nerved at base; flowers numerous, 
densely clustered in the leaf axils, the pedicels stout, 8 mm. long or shorter, 
coarsely stellate-tomentose; bractlets linear or filiform, 4-6 mm. long, de- 
ciduous; fully developed flowers not seen; calyx at first closed, but expanding 
before anthesis, broadly campanulate, 5 mm. long and 7 mm. broad, densely 
and minutely tomentose, subtruncate and remotely repand-dentate, the 5 


398 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


teeth short, narrowly triangular; corolla in bud densely and minutely stellate- 
tomentose outside; pedicels in fruit stout, 2-8 cm. long; capsule densely and 
coarsely stellate-tomentose with yellowish tomentum, short-stipitate, 3- 
valvate, the valves 3.5-4.5 cm. long, 13-15 mm. wide, glabrous within except 
along the sutures, there hispid, the cells apparently about 5-seeded. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 938,656, collected in forest near 
El Copey, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude 1,800 meters, February, 
1898, by A. Tonduz (no. 11667). Three other sheets of the same collection 
are in the National Herbarium. 

Collected also at Capulin, on the Rio Grande de Tdrcoles, Province of 
Alajuela, Costa Rica, altitude 80 meters, April 2, 1924, Standley 40177. 

It is unusual in Costa Rica to find a species which grows at so great an 
elevation as 1,800 meters occurring at sea level, but it is probable that seeds 
have been transported downstream from the mountains to Capulin, where I 
found the plant growing. 

Hampea platanifolia is very unlike the other Central American species in 
its large, broad, long-petiolate leaves. It appears to be related to H. 
thespesioides, although the description of the latter species is deficient in some 
important details. Only open capsules of the Costa Rican plant are available, 
Their long narrow valves indicate that the fruit must be very narrow inout- 
line, and decidedly different from the globose capsule found in other species. 
7. Hampea tomentosa (Presl) Standl. Contr. U. 8S. Nat. Herb. 23: 787. 

1923. 

Thespesia tomentosa Presl, Rel. Haenk. 2: 136. 1836. 

The type was collected by Haenke in western Mexico. The following 
collections are in the National Herbarium: 

Oaxaca: Cafetal San Rafael, Distrito de Pochutla, alt. 800 m., Conzattz, 
Reko & Makrinius 3292. Cafetal Montecristo, alt. 800 m., Reko 3428. 

Satvapor: Ahuachap4n, alt. 800 m., Standley 19811. 

8. Hampea stipitata S. Wats. Proc. Amer. Acad. 21: 460. 1886. 

The following specimens have been examined: 

GUATEMALA: Chocén Plantation, a large tree, March 20, 1885, Watson 
31 (type; Gray Hb.). Quirigud, Standley 24600. Finca Sepacuité, Alta 
Verapaz, Cock & Griggs 576, in part. 

Honpuras: Near Puerto Sierra, Wilson 62. Near Cuyamel, Record & 
Kuylen 17. San Pedro Sula, Thieme 5603. 

Known in Honduras as ‘‘majao colorado.” 

9. Hampea trilobata Standl. Contr. U. 8S. Nat. Herb. 23: 787. 1923. 

Specimens have been examined, as follows: 

Camprecue: Apazote, Dec. 27, 1900, Goldman 488 (type). 

Yucatan: Izamal, Gaumer 845. Cotilcim, Gauwmer 23386. Without 
locality, Gaumer 24260. 

BritisH HonpurAs: Without locality, Record in 1926; Winzerling V.18. 

Known in British Honduras as ‘‘moho.”’ The Maya name used inYucatan 
is given as “‘toobhoob.”’ 


SEPT. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 399 


ZOOLOGY .—WNote on the occurrence of the Six-Lined Race-Runner 
in the District of Columbia.1 C.S. East, U.S. National Museum. 
(Communicated by A. WETMORE.) 


A specimen of the Six-Lined Race-Runner, Cnemidophorus sexlinea- 
tus (Linn.) was collected June 10, 1927, at Terra Cotta, within the 
District of Columbia, by Mr. August Busck of the Bureau of Entomol- 
ogy. Numerous other individuals of this lizard were observed at this 
place. So far as is known this is the first specimen of the species 
taken in the District. The nearest locality hitherto recorded is the 
junction of the Defence and Crain Highways, Prince George’s county, 
Md., a distance of about 20 miles, where Mr. M. K. Brady recently 
took three specimens. Previous to this the nearest records were from 
Chesapeake Beach, Calvert County, Md. Dr. W. P. Hay in A List of 
the Batrachians and Reptiles of the District of Columbia and Vicinity 
(Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 15:134. 1902) says: ‘‘As to the oc- 
currence of this species within our limits there is some doubt, but it 
has been taken at no great distance both north and south so it will 
doubtless be found here sooner or later.’? The specimen collected by 
Mr. Busck has been placed in the collection of the United States 
National Museum (U. 8. N. M. 72592). 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 


954TH MEETING 


The 954th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club March 19, 1927. The 
program of the evening was given in commemoration of the 200th anniversary 
of the death of Sir Isaac Newton. 

Program: FREDERICK EH. Brascu, Life of Sir Isaac Newton, and his con- 
temporaries. 

EpGar W. Woo.arp, The place of Sir Isaac Newton in the history of pure 
mathematics. The great reputation of Sir Isaac Newton as a pure mathemati- 
cian rests chiefly, though not exclusively, on the fact that he was one of the 
founders of the Infinitestimal Calculus, to the invention of which the greater 
part of the mathematics and physics of today owes its existence. The de- 
velopment of the concepts which Newton employed in constructing the Cal- 
culus may be traced back directly to the ancient Greeks; by the time of 
Newton a crude process of integration was in common use, and considerable 
approach had been made to differentiation but all his predecessors missed 
the analytical method which he devised—there was no differential or in- 
tegral calculus, properly so called. 


1 Received August 1, 1927. 


400 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


While the practical advantages of Newton’s methods far exceeded those of 
all previous results, nevertheless the methods of the ancient Greeks were con- 
siderably superior in respect to soundness of theory. Newton’s work is an 
interesting example of the way in which, even in mathematics, a correct in- 
tuition may appear and lead to a great wealth of new knowledge long before 
a logical proof of its correctness can be supplied, or even before the intuition 
itself can be correctly formulated. Neither Newton nor his contemporaries 
ever succeeded in placing the calculus on a satisfactory foundation; the 
rules appeared to give correct results, but it was not known why they did; 
all of Newton’s expositions of his calculus were vague, and encumbered with 
difficulties; the validity of the calculus was more than once questioned, often 
with good reason. Newton originally based his calculus on infinitestimals, 
using these to obtain his co-called fluxions; he later altered the foundations 
several times; he never used the method of limits to construct the calculus. 

During the period immediately following Newton, mathematicians, with 
great skill, exploited the wonderful powers of the new calculus, and exten- 
sively developed the purely formal part, but gave little attention to the 
foundations of the subject. The serious difficulties in which they, as a result, 
became involved led to a period of critzcal work during which modern stand- 
ards of rigor came into existence. Subsequent work in pure mathematics 
has consisted of building up the superstructure to greater and greater heights, 
while tying its parts together more and more firmly by severer standards of 
rigor, and basing the whole on ever deeper and stronger foundations, until 
at the present time the great structure of modern pure mathematics, while 
not perfect, is nevertheless the securest structure known to human thought. 
(A uthor’s abstract.) 

T. B. Brown, The contribution of Newton to optics. 

Paut R. Heyu, The contribution of Newton to mechanics and astronomy. 
Newton was a good deal of a general practitioner in science, as were all of the 
scientific men of his day. His work in optics and in mathematics was i1m- 
portant but not more so than that of a dozen others. Why, then, is his name 
preeminently remembered. If we look for the reason in his contributions to 
mechanics and astronomy as set forth in the Principia, we find that most of 
the facts therein stated were not original with Newton. 

His preeminence lay in his breadth of vision. He correlated the dis- 
jointed facts of his day which had been discovered by others and his bequest 
to his successors is a permanent economy of thought and a new point of view. 
(A uthor’s abstract.) 


955TH MEETING 


The 955th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club April 2, 1927. 

President AULT announced the death of Dr. WitLt1am H. Datu who was 
the last surviving founder of the Society. 

The address of the evening was given by Dr. W. H. Hossgs of the Univer- 
sity of Michigan on The first Greenland expedition of the University of Michigan. 
The University of Michigan expeditions to Greenland have had as their pri- 
mary object a study of the air circulation over the vast ice-cap (continental 
glacier) which covers all but a narrow marginal fringe of the continent. We 
have chosen to make our base within the Holstenborg district of southwest 
Greenland, where the land ribbon is widest, and this chiefly for two reasons. 
It was believed that, first, the margin of the inland-ice though here more dis- 
tant from the coast would be found to afford a less steep marginal surface and 


sEPT. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 401 


hence give an easier route to the interior; and, second, the crossing of the land 
area where broadest would afford an opportunity to ascertain whether there 
had been more than a single advance and retreat of the ice-front. 

In both these expectations we have not been disappointed. A feasible 
route to the interior of the ice-cap has been found, and it has been learned 
that a second advance and retreat of the ice-front has yrocured a hinterland 
characterized by subdued topography lying behind the much higher and more 
rugged topography of the coastal zone. 

Pilot balloon ascensions have been regularly carried out under the direc- 
tion of Mr. S. P. Fergusson, our aerologist, whose services were furnished us 
by the U. 8S. Weather Bureau for the season of 1926; and an ice-cap party 
sent up pilot balloons over the ice-cap itself, the first ascensions of this kind to 
be made either in the Arctic or Antarctic. 

The first sounding balloons to be sent up in Greenland reached in one case 
an altitude of 5500 meters and the meteorograph was recovered with record 
intact. These ascents were made possible by use of the new Rossby deflat- 
ing device. 

Studies of the effect of a simple fracture system within the rocks introduc- 
ing a very striking “‘checker-board”’ type of relief are being made by Mr. 
Ralph L. Belknap, the geodosist and geologist of the expedition who is to 
return to Greenland the present year. A study of the raised beaches has been 
carried out by Dr. Laurence M. Gould, assistant director of the 1926 Expedi- 
tion. 

It had been expected to advance in 1926 a considerable distance over the 
inland-ice toward the interior, but after its margin had been reached by four 
of the party with four Greenlanders, the failure to find game, which had once 
been abundant in the region, compelled a return on reduced rations and by 
forced marches after only four days had been spent at the ice-cap. This 
attack upon the ice-cap is to be carried out during the present season. 

Professor James E.. Church, Jr., authority on snow surveys and director of 
the Mount Rose Observatory, is to occupy a mountain station near the margin 
of the ice-cap and carry out meteorological observations throughout the year 
from the summer of 1927 to that of 1928. He will have as his companion Mr. 
P. C. Oscanyan, Jr., wireless expert, both having been members of the 1926 
Expedition. In this mountain station they will be exposed to the full force of 
the blizzard winds which blow outward in strophs from the interior of the ice- 
cap. 

In cooperation with the Michigan Greenland expedition of 1927-28, Dr. 
Constantin Dumbrava, Director of the Roumanian Greenland expedition, will 
establish his base near Angmagssali on the border of the ice-cap in southeast 
Greenland and in about the same latitude. He will also occupy a mountain 
station and make observations according to the same plan. Cooperative as- 
cents by pilot balloons will be made at both these stations and also at two 
stations in Iceland by Drs. Georgi of the Deutsche Seewarte of Hamburg, 
Germany, and Thorkel Thorkelssen of Iceland. 

During the present season also the attempt will be made to take sound- 
ings of the ice-cap by the echo methods now in use in connection with petro- 
leum surveys. (Author’s abstract.) 


402 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


388TH MEETING 


The 388th regular meeting was held December 2, 1926, in Room 43 of the 
National Museum, with President J. M. Aupricu, in the chair and 26 mem- 
bers and 19 visitors present. 

J. A. Hysuop read the following notice of the death of Dr. Henry Skinner 
of Philadelphia: The Entomological Society of Washington receives with 
sorrow and a feeling of serious loss the notice of the death on May 29, 1926, — 
of Dr. Henry Skinner, at one time a corresponding member of this Society. 
Dr. Skinner, one of the most widely known North American entomologists, 
was the Conservator of Insects in the Academy of Natural Sciences, Phila- 
delphia. He was for many years the editor of Entomological News, and a 
member of the International Commission on Zoological Nomenclature. His 
special entomological interest was in the Lepidoptera, to the literature of 
which group he made many valuable contributions. In the later years of 
his life he devoted himself almost exclusively to the Hesperiidae. 

Mr. RoHwer presented an invitation from the Carnegie Institution to the 
members of the Society to attend an exhibition on December 11, 12 and 13, 
illustrating the advances made in scientific methods, and accomplishments 
in the line of research by the Carnegie Institution. 

Program: Dr. EH. A. Ricumonp: Olfactory response of the Japanese beetle. 
The paper was illustrated with lantern slides showing various kinds of traps. 
The greatest activity of the beetles is between 10 A. M. and 4 P. M. The 
females numbered about one-third more than males. 

Discussion by Messrs. Howarp, ALDRICH, RICHARDSON, BaRBER, Mc- 
Inpoo, GraF and WHITE. 

Mr. 8. E. Crums: General observations on chemotropism in insects. 

Discussion by Messrs. McInpoo, RicHarDsoN, BAKER, GRAF and 
SIMMONS. 

Election of officers for 1927: President, J. A. Hystop; 1st Vice-president, 
J. E. Gra; 2nd Vice-president, A. C. BAkrER; Editor, W. R. Watton; Re- 
cording Secretary, Jon. S. Wap; Corresponding-Secretary and Treasurer, 
S. A. RoHwER. Executive Committee, A. N. CaupgEuu, T. E. SnypEr, and 
C. T. GrrENE. Nominee from the Society for Vice-President of the Washing- 
ton Academy of Sciences, A. G. B6vING. 

Cuas. T. GREENE, Recording Secretary. 


389TH MEETING 


The 389th regular meeting was held January 6, 1927, in Room 48 of the 
U. S. National Museum. President J. A. Hystop presided. There were 
present 28 members and 17 visitors. 

H. W. AuuEeNn, Riverton, N. J.; L. M. Scorr, Washington, D. C., and A. A. 
GRANOvVSKY, Madison, Wisconsin, were elected to membership. 

Dr. Howarp announced that he had attended that afternoon the funeral of 
Mr. John D. Patten, for a number of years a member of the Society and also 
for some years its Treasurer. He spoke especially of Mr. Patten’s hospitality 
to the Society and his great interest in its work. Mr. Patten’s interest 
seemed to be more in the members of the’ Society than in the subject, not 
being an entomologist himself. A committee composed of Messrs. Howarp, 
CAUDELL, and ROoHWER was appointed to present resolutions on Mr. Patten’s 
death. 


SEPT. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 403 


Program: Dr. J. M. Aupricu, retiring address: Limitations of taxonomy. 
The speaker discussed a considerable number of physical and psychological 
limitations, which led him to believe that the ultimate classification of insects 
is very much farther in the future than commonly believed, even by the tax- 
onomists. The address will be published in full in Science. 

Discussed by Messrs. Howarp, RoHweEr, and Morrison. 

Dr. J. M. Swaine, Ottawa, Canada, conveyed greetings from the Entomol- 
ogical Society of Ontario to the Entomological Society of Washington, and 
expressed his pleasure at opportunity for studying in the U. S. National 
Museum, especially in the Casey and other special collections. He spoke 
briefly of some of his recent field work from Cape Breton to British Columbia, 
and of a trip on the Pacific Coast and in the Mohave Desert. 

Mr. Rate Hoprpine, of Vernon, B. C., outlined briefly some of his recent 
work in British Columbia in control of fruit insects, discussed some note- 
worthy insect outbreaks, and recorded the collection by him of 173 cutworms 
around a marigold bush. 

Mr. R. E. Campsetu, of Alhambra, California, reported on a field trip 
through parts of Southern California, on which trip he collected a number of 
rare Bostrichids, Dinapate wrighti Horn, from palm trees, on which he later 
caused the market price to drop from $20 to $5 and less per pair. 

Discussed by Messrs. HysLtop, CurRIE, and SIMMONS. 

Prof. W. P. Furnt, of Urbana, Illinois, conveyed greetings from the Illinois 
entomologists to our Society and expressed his pleasure at being with us. 

Prof. J.S. Housrr, of Wooster, Ohio, discussed the address of the praia 
and added another chapter to his famous so-called “fishworm story,” 
which angleworms had been reported by him as attacking onions. He nar- 
rated another instance of injury by them, this time to pansies. 

Prof. Joun J. Davis, of Lafayette, Indiana, gave some reminiscences of 
meetings of the Society years ago at Singerbund Hall. He discussed some 
of the Indiana work by himself and Mr. Cleveland on the effects of flies on 
dairy cattle in relation to milk production. They found that spraying the 
animals notably increased milk flow. 

Mr. L. M. Pratrs, Morgantown, West Virginia, discussed insect conditions 
a his State and gave reminiscences of attendance at former meetings of the 

ociety. 

Mr. A. A. GRaANovsky, Madison, Wisconsin, referred briefly to recent work 
by that State in airplane dusting of hemlock forests and to researches con- 
ducted by the Experiment Station on the relation of certain leaf-hoppers to 
alfalfa yellows. 

Mr. PEREZ SIMMONS presented a brief paper on the ability of the larva of 
the cheese skipper, Pzophila casei Linn., to endure unfavorable conditions. 
The unusual hardihood of the maggots of the cheese skipper is shown by 
their ability to withstand starvation, low temperatures, high temperatures, 
and immersion in many liquids which would be promptly fatal to most insects. 
The usual duration of larval life in hot weather is five or six days, but when 
proper food is lacking the larval stage may last forasmany months. Maggots 
were found to live in a temperature of 45° to 50°F. for a maximum of seven 
months. They withstood 32°F. for three months. Half-grown larvae lived 
for 643 hours at 5°F. A Russian writer reports that larvae lived two weeks 
in a temperature of —7°F. Some larvae recovered after exposure to 122° 
to 124°F. for four hours. They survived about two minutes when immersed 
in water at a temperature of 129°F. Several European workers have con- 
ducted experiments with liquids, such as 95 per cent alcohol, ether, formalde- 


404 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


hyde, turpentine, petroleum, carbon disulphide, and xylol, and maggots 
proved to be surprisingly resistant to immersion in these reagents. Maggots 
buried by the speaker in Pyrethrum powder pupated in it, and others pupated 
after immersion for 37 hours in gasoline. Although other insects are reported 
to be more resistant to starvation and to high and low temperatures, the all- 
round hardihood of the cheese skipper larvae appears to be without parallel. 
(Author’s abstract.) 

Discussed by Dr. AupRicH, and by Dr. Howarp, who narrated a story 
from Reade’s ‘‘Cloister and the Hearth.” 


390TH MEETING 


The 390th regular meeting was held February 8, 1927, in Room 43 of the 
U. S. National Museum. President J. A. Hysior presided. There were 
present 30 members and 16 visitors. 

The Secretary-Treasurer reported briefly on a meeting on January 17 of 
the Executive Committee and read a letter recently received from Dr. Geza 
Horwath thanking the Society for the friendly greetings sent him in celebra- 
tion of his 80th birthday. He also read a letter from the Honorary President, 
Dr. E. A. ScHWARzZ, in which Dr. ScHwarz formally presented to S. A. RoHWER 
as Corresponding Secretary of our Society his library of books and pamphlets. 
After remarks by Dr. Howarp it was ordered by the Society that suitable 
resolutions of thanks be transmitted to Dr. Schwarz. Not only the gift 
but the thoughtfulness and affection which prompted it are deeply appre- 
ciated by the Society. 

The principal feature of the program was a symposium on arsenical spray 
residue, conducted under the direction of Dr. A. L. QUAINTANCE, who gave 
a brief historical résumé of the progress of work with arsenicals since about 
1860. He called special attention to arsenate of lead, which was developed 
in 1892 by Prof. Moulton as a treatment. for shade and other trees in con- 
nection with the control of the gipsy moth in Massachusetts. This arsenical 
was much the best of any available for use on such deciduous fruits as apples 
and pears by reason of its quality of sticking to fruit and foliage and its 
harmlessness to the plants. In consequence arsenate of lead has become the 
main dependence of orchardists for the control of such serious pests as the 
codling moth and plum curculio. In some regions the codling moth especially 
is excessively destructive and growers have been given to excessive spraying 
with arsenate of lead, sometimes so late in the season that a considerable 
amount of arsenate of lead spray residue might be present on the marketed - 
fruit. This condition gradually grew worse and necessitated a decided change 
in spray practice and the development of methods to remove spray residues 
on fruit before marketing. Not only is arsenic in excessive quantities ob- 
jectionable, but lead also, an accumulative poison, is considered by phar- 
macologists and others to be equally or more dangerous. ‘The speaker there- 
fore felt that considerable experimental work should at once be undertaken 
to determine other arsenicals than arsenate of lead, and other stomach poisons 
than arsenicals for the use of orchardists and vegetable growers. He ex- 
plained that a large cooperative program of experimental work was being 
developed between the Bureau and a number of the Entomologists of the 
State Agricultural Experiment Stations. While the situation at present was 
considered critical, the speaker had no doubt of the timely working out of 
the problem. 

Dr. P. B. Dunsar, Assistant Chief, Bureau of Chemistry, discussed the 


SEPT. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 405 


problem from the viewpoint of the health of the fruit consumer and fruit 
grower, not that of a physician. He outlined recent work with various lead 
arsenate sprays with especial reference to toxic effects, and discussed the 
cumulative effects of lead stored in the human system in chronic poisoning; 
also certain economic phases of the problem, including possible foreign em- 
bargoes from certain European countries. Consideration also was given to 
restrictions as to the time of application of sprays in relation to harvesting 
crops; studies of methods by which fruit could be cleaned after harvesting; 
the possible use of hydrochloric acid in removing lead-arsenate from apples 
and pears, and the use commercially of cleaning machinery. At a meeting 
at Salt Lake City, Utah, after the middle of February the whole situation 
will be reviewed, including discussion of damages from ill-timed spraying and 
the use of acid-dipping methods. He considered the outlook as a whole to 
be quite promising. 

Dr. B. A. Porter discussed the plans which have been outlined for a com- 
prehensive reexamination and intensive study of the codling moth problem. 
While it might seem that this problem had been worked threadbare, phases 
were pointed out where the surface had been not more than scratched, and 
many others where more intensive study will undoubtedly add further in- 
formation of value. 

Mr. W. H. Wuite called attention to the arsenical residue problem as it 
affected the control of certain truck crop pests, and directed particular atten- 
tion to the arsenical residue on celery as a result of attempting to control 
the celery leaf-tyer (Phlyctaenia rubigalis) at Sanford, Fla., by treating with 
arsenicals. A brief summary of the results of a cooperative project to de- 
termine the arsenical residue of celery treated with calcium arsenate both 
in the form of a spray and a dust was presented. This work indicated that 
if effective arsenical treatments were applied 1t would be necessary to wash 
the treated product to avoid dangerous amounts of arsenic reaching the con- 
sumer. Sodium fluosilicate, which had been suggested as a substitute for 
arsenicals, was being tested as a control for the celery leaf-tyer, and the in- 
dications were that this chemical shows promise asaremedy. It was believed 
that this material, although possibly not as dangerous as the arsenicals to 
the consumer, was harmful, and in all probability it would be necessary to 
wash celery treated with it before marketing. 

Dr. SIEGLER gave a brief review of experiments in mechanical control now 
being conducted at the Sligo, Md. laboratory, including chemical treatment 
of bands with various substances, the use of corrugated paper vs. burlap 
bands. He considered the chemical treatments most promising. 

Dr. CuHarues H. RicHarpson stated that the laboratory work on the ar- 
senical problem at Washington will consist of the study and preparation of 
toxic compounds by the Bureau of Chemistry and the determination of their 
insecticidal value by the Bureau of Entomology. ‘This work naturally divides 
itself into two parts: An investigation of the toxicity of the arsenic compounds 
and an investigation of other non-arsenical compounds. The investigation 
of arsenical compounds will extend beyond the present emergency to a 
thorough study of arsenic compounds that might be used on non-edible crops 
or in baits where there is no danger of effect upon human health. It offers 
an opportunity to study more intimately such complexes as the arsenates of 
iron, aluminum and copper and to investigate the feasibility of using some 
form of arsenic absorbed on colloidal substances. Special effort will be 
directed toward the discovery of a substitute for acid lead arsenate because 


406 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


of the prejudice against lead. The study of non-arsenical compounds will 
probably first resolve itself into an examination of the fluosilicates and flu- 
orides, as these seem now to be the most promising substitutes for the 
arsenicals. In addition, other groups of inorganic and organic compounds 
which are thought to have possibilities will be studied. Particular attention 
will be given to methods of comparing the toxicity of compounds which are 
to be used as stomach poisons. It is hoped to formulate methods by which 
insects may be dosed with known quantities of a compound per unit of body 
weight under controlled temperature and humidity. Attempts will also be 
made to study tolerance to stomach poisons, and the absorption, storage 
and elimination of toxic substances by insects. 

Dr. McInvoo stressed the undesirability of giving too much publicity to 
the entire situation. 

Mr. Woop discussed methods of application of calcium cyanide in dusting, 
including comparison of present work with work on chinch bugs in windy 
weather. 

Prof. Cory also directed attention to the bad impression conveyed by too 
much publicity given to the problem. He also discussed control of Spanish 
leaf-miner on beets by the use of barium carbonate as reported by a Russian 
worker and noticed in the Review of Applied Entomology. 

Mr. Asort briefly referred to the use of barium carbonate and other chemi- 
cals as stomach poisons. 

Mr. Barser, at the request of Dr. Frank E. Blaisdell of San Francisco, 
California, presented a brief paper concerning an unidentified black beetle. 
excavated from the ruins of an Egyptian city dated between 117 and 235 
ALD, 

Mr. Gauwan reported that the Motschulsky types of certain Hymenoptera 
within the genus Harmolita recently had been received by Waterton at the 
British Museum. ! 

Mr. RoHwer, commenting on Mr. Gahan’s note, stated that certain Mot- 
schulsky types of beetles had been received by Dr. Arrow at the British 
Museum. Dr. Arrow’s study of these types established the fact that the 
species found in the eastern part of the United States and previously con- 
sidered to be Serica japonica Mots. should be called Aserica castenea Arrow. 

Dr. ALDRICH reported on a shipment of Muscoid flies from the Museum 
in Vienna sent to him for study, in which were found a number of old speci- 
mens which Dr. Riley had Dr. Coquillett send to Europe many years ago. 

J.S. Wann, Recording Secretary. 


39lsT MEETING 


The 391st regular meeting was held March 3, 1927, in Room 48 of the 
U. S. National Museum. President J. A. Hystop presided. ‘There were 
present 18 members and 12 visitors. 

On invitation of the president, Dr. Stanistaw MInkiEwicz, of the Insti- 
tute for Agricultural Research, Department of Entomology, Pulaway, Poland, 
made a brief address expressing his pleasure at being able to attend a meeting 
of our Society and conveying greetings from the entomological fraternity of 
his country. He is studying in this country under the auspices of the Rocke- 
feller Foundation, and his itinerary covers travel from Nova Scotia to the 
Pacific Coast. He will remain in America eight or nine months. 

Remarks also were made on invitation by Mr. A. F. Burasss, of the Gypsy 
Moth Laboratory at Melrose Highlands, Massachusetts. He gave a brief 
resume of the previous summer’s work on his problem, with especial reference 


SEPT. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 407 


to airplane dusting in forest areas. He is much encouraged over the results 
of the additional season’s work along this line, as he feels that methods have 
been more effectively developed toward practical control. He also dis- 
cussed a recent report from Mr. Muesenbeck containing data and showing 
photographs of somewhat comparable work in Germany. Mr. Burcsss 
stressed the practical value of having our own men become acquainted with 
work of this kind in foreign lands, as important and valuable information 
may thus be secured. 

Program: Dr. C. A. We1cEL: Hot-water bulb slerilizers. The present re- 
striction governing the entry of Narcissus bulbs from foreign countries re- 
quires that all such imported bulbs shall be given the hot-water treatment 
either at the port of entry or other designated place. This treatment in- 
volves the submersion of bulbs in wire baskets or other containers in water 
ranging in temperature from 110 to 111°F. for a period of not less than 23 
hours. The object of this restriction is to prevent not only the further entry 
into this country of the three important bulb pests, the Narcissus fly, Merodon 
equestris Fab., the lesser bulb fly, Humerus strigatus Fallen, and the bulb 
eelworm, T'ylenchus dipsact Kuhn, against which the hot-water treatment is 
supposed to be effective, but also their further dissemination throughout the 
United States. The author discussed the various types of hot-water sterili- 
zers which have been constructed in this and other countries, giving special 
attention to the underlying principles involved in the construction of such 
apparatus, particularly the methods employed in maintaining a constant and 
uniform temperature of the water throughout the period of treatment. 

Discussed by Hystop, BurcxEss, and Howarp. 

A paper containing a review of the pea aphis problem was presented by W. 
H. Wuitse. A historical account was given of the pea aphis outbreaks and 
their effect on the pea canning and seed industries. Measures which had 
been taken to combat the pest were discussed. The paper was supplemented 
by lantern slides, illustrating various control devices. Discussed by BurGEss, 
WeIcEeL, Howarp, Simmons, Hystop, and SNODGRASS. 

Dr. Howarp discussed briefly the phenomenon of phoresy apropos of a 
recently published paper by Ch. Ferriere. 

Mr. Rouwer reported the recent receipt from Mr. Bishopp of a Chalcid 
parasite of secrew-worm flies which was studied several years ago and thought 
to be new species. The present material was referred to Mr. Gahan, who 
determined it as Brachymeria fonscolombei (Dunfoar). The American and 
European species were found to be the same, and it is fairly common in 
Europe. He discussed the distribution of some of our parasites, notably 
those within the genus Apanteles, and stressed the need for more study of 
world-wide material rather than that from a single country. 

Mr. Hystop reported the receipt recently from Dr. Van Dyke in Cali- 
fornia of larvae which proved to be those of a typical Cebrio. Hitherto, the 
Cebrionidae have been supposed to occur only east of the Rocky Mountains 
and the Plastoceridae only west of the mountains. 

Dr. Howarp spoke of the discovery some years ago by Dr. Hooker and 
Mr. Wood of two Hymenopterous parasites of ticks in Texas for which he 
founded the genus Izodiphagus, and of the subsequent finding of a European 
species of this same genus in ticks on deer near Paris, France, He said that 
the European species had recently been brought to this country and estab- 
lished on the Island of Naushon near Boston and that Dr. Cooley is trying 
to take the same European parasite to the Bitter Root Valley in Montana 
in the hope that it will parasitize the Rocky Mountain spotted-fevyer tick, 


408 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 


Mr. BarBER, commenting on Mr. Rohwer’s remarks gave several exampies 
of the extreme desirability of having more studies of insects from a world- 
wide viewpoint, and pointing out a number of cases of synonomy which would 
not have occurred had not the studies been made on a comparatively pro- 
vincial basis. 

| J.S. Wane, Recording Secretary. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


In the U. 8. Geological Survey the Section of Areal Geology has been 
combined with the Section of the Geology of Nonmetalliferous Deposits, 
with G. R. MANSFIELD as Geologist in charge. H. D. Mismr has been placed 
in charge of the Section of the Geology of Fuels. 

The Italian Government has nominated Dr. Henry 8S. WAsHINGTON, of the 
Geophysical Laboratory, Cavaliere of the Order of the Crown of Italy and has 
decorated him with the Cross of the Order, in recognition of his work on the 
rocks and volcanoes of Italy. 

Dr. A. F. Forrstr, who for some months has been studying certain 
groups of Paleozoic cephalopods at the National Museum, has returned to 
his regular duties as teacher of physics in Steele High School, Dayton, Ohio. 

A. S. Hitcucock has spent about three months in Washington, Orezon, 
and northern California, studying the grass flora. Much of the work has 
been carried on in the National Forests in company with members of the 
Forest Service investigating range problems. 


tings of Lie afiiated societies, will appear on this page 
e thirteen th and pe. twenty-seventh of each month. = 


ae 


CONTENTS 


ORIGINAL PAPERS 


Chemistry.—The element ‘‘mosandrum” of J. Lawrence Smith, R.C. Weuis.... 385 


Mineralogy.—Sericite-lazulite pseudomorphs after orthoclase from Bolivia. Harn 


VO SHANNON. oO i OS Aa 
Paleontology.—A new early Ordovician sponge fauna. R. 5. BABSLER YA 3... 8 ... 390 
Botany.—The genus Hampea. Paut C. STANDLEY........0.00....0..020..00. Soe 
Zoology.—Note on the occurrence of the Six-Lined Race-Runner in the District eps." : 

Oolumbia.! CS. Mase oy ees re ul aes alee ek oe cit tats eae 399 

PROCEEDINGS 
Philosophical Society oo hee eC Pee ee es ak ae ee 399 
Entomological Society........... ig Meh edere eee le Cie Mates URC hy CU MUNE S/S Lee a ae 402 
‘ScrenTiFIC Notes AND NEWS. 660006000 oy oo ea a Was cs eae ee 408 


OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY 


President: ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. 
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. Tuckerman, Bureau of Standards. 
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 
Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


Agnes CHASE  Joun B. Reesipe, Jr. 
BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 


"ASSOCIATE EDITORS - i oes A Dial omg H 
> sth ee ft S. A. Rowen é Osh; ; ‘ ‘ sai 


— pmnosorarcat + socreTy a ih ia ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY  —t™*~ SHUN: 9 


Be | ‘i ; 1 G.W.Srose aa aris Hike 


i * ‘ > a ® 
; GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY va Pat ste eh 
ee Yin Pe 5 ‘2; SWANTON | nae 


ANTHROPOLOGICAL soctEry © Wasee ht ge Le aan 


: NR, ¢ , ‘a 
Roane c. ‘Weuns ; he yearn aa 
_. CHEMICAL SOCIETY, : ee A cetey ae 


"PUBLISHED eMart Bickieins BRL oane buy rane 
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY ; 


a ss BY THE a er i ‘a 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Be ee ae 


Mn Roran AND GUILFORD AVES. el as a 
‘3 eS Fig: My kK 
| Baurmwors, MARYLAND / (ht ae eS. 3 
4 ae es ata Re = iw ee ee \ 5 y 
it | | “ UGE Gi. 4 1927 foie es 
, ) \ . . &. f Ae’ i 
ovided for _ _« Sha) vA 
BA i MR ; yen 
: w 


This JOURNAL, the official organ | f the Sreleuston ahaa | f clences 
present a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this er 

(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the 
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and afiilia 
“notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except d 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to leas 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the edit 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from 
issue of the Jougnat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respective 


M anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Bod of Baitees Mi should} } 
cleariy typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. 
| Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures 
- or diagrams of simple character. _ 

. Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be aunts to. authors 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. . Meee. 

Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices. eats 


Copies 4;pp. S pp.) 12 pps 16 pp. Cover Ah ee By 
50 $.85. -— $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 Be OG co aia 
100 1.90 — 3.80. 4.75  — 6.00 ih Bea 3 Aa i 
150 | 2.25. 4.30 5.25 BBO oS I Se ae teem sab 
. 200 2.50 4.80 8.75 Baie Ui Ch Va hte 7X hy ee Me 
250. 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 OG aah Marmasse ; 


Anadditional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. ae chee ie a ie Bones 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, = inclusive pagi- : ke : 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. Bye ah me a 


As an author will not ordinarily see feone his request for extra copies | or r reprints i 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. ry | i hes ae : 


The rate of Subscription per volumets os. . co. t ss cose eb wman spe ame vee . $6.00* 
Semi-monthly numbers................ Ci aes lle koe aN cs arg te na a ae 
Monthly numbers....... sini: Peo ute ta he eae aa) 6 bias Geta lo Cae eb Us oh tate ee ct -— sai 


Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Serres id an 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, 183 ae. 

European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. 

Ezchanges.—The JounNnaL does not exchange with other. publications. 

Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made Ma 
within thirty days after date of the following issue. 


*Volume [, however, from June 19, 1911, te December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special rates ed eps than % 
are given to members or scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. SOR eae RS al 


A A RT OSA Pe ee ea er oe 


JOURNAL 


OF THE ° 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vou. 17 OcToBER 4, 1927 No. 16 


MINERALOGY.—Calctte oolites with pentagonal dodecahedral form.' 
EARL V. SHANNON, U.S. National Museum. 


The present paper contains a description of some very unusual 
forms of calcite oolites from Idaho and Japan. ‘The Idaho specimens 
are from the collection of the late Frederick A. Canfield and those 
from Japan are in the reference collection of the National Museum. 
These oolites are regular pentagonal dodecahedra, a geometrical form 
impossible as a crystal form. It is suggested that they owe their 
peculiarity to pentagonal dodecahedral packing of the oolites in their 
original resting place. 

The Idaho material (Canfield No. 5801) is labeled “‘Calcite, Eagle 
Rock, Idaho; these forms are regular pentagonal dodecahedrons— 
said to be impossible for crystals. Presented by Dr. F. M. Endlich, 
who collected them. See Dana page 268.” On page 268 of the sixth 
edition of Dana’s System of Mineralogy the following reference to the 
material from this locality appears: ‘““Minute concreticnary forms 
having a spherical concentric structure within and externally the form 
of a regular pentagonal dodecahedron (not pyritohedron) have been 
obtained from a calcareous spring near Eagle Rock, Idaho; their form 
has not been explained.” The information given by Dana was 
doubtless obtained from examination of the same material as that in 
the Canfield collection, since no reference to these forms has been 
found elsewhere in the literature. Nothing definite has been learned 
relative to the occurrence. Eagle Rock is not given on any map or 
In any gazeteer which has been examined. The specimens were col- 
lected by F. M. Endlich, apparently while engaged in work on the 
Hayden Survey, probably about 1872. In several places in the re- 

1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 
Received August 31, 1927. 

409 


410 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


port for that year mention is made of Eagle Rock or Taylor’s Bridge 
across Snake River, apparently northwest of Ross Fork and probably 
at or near the site of the present bridge south of Tilden and east of 
Yuma. ‘There is no mention of the calcite oolites or of any calcareous 
spring.” | 

The Canfield material consists of a dozen white and porcellanous- 
appearing individuals 2 millimeters in diameter. ‘They are almost 
model pentagonal dodecahedra although the edges are somewhat 
rounded and some of the faces are curved. ‘They possess sufficient 
luster to cause most of the faces to yield a visible though faint signal 
on the goniometer, and the majority of the faces fall in the positions 
of the planes of the geometric form. Although they naturally suggest 
pyritohedra to the mineralogist, the edges are all of equal length and 
the interfacial angles are all the same. 

One broken individual was crushed and examined under the micro- 
scope. ‘The structure is distinctly concretionary and very finely 
fibrous spherulitic. The natural tendency to break parallel to the 
fibrous structure competes with a parting in thin skins parallel to the 
spherical surface. The spherical flakes are approximately perpen- 
dicular to the optic axis of a majority of the aggregated fibers and are 
largely dark between crossed nicols, but are granular with stippling 
by grains of higher birefringence. The flakes as a whole give an 
apparent interference figure which is uniaxial or slightly biaxial with 
2h nearly zero and with positive sign. Calcite is optically negative 
and it would seem that this positive interference figure is anomalous 
and is due to the fibrous structure—a supposition strengthened by 
the features of the grains which lie parallel to the fibers showing maxi- 
mum birefringence, for the elongation of these fibers is negative, and 
thus contradicts the observed positive interference figure. Measure- 
ments of the refractive indices were not satisfactory. Basal flakes 
yielded for w the apparent value 1.655, and prismatic flakes gave for 
« a value considerably above 1.485. The apparent birefringence is 
thus somewhat lower than that of calcite, but this is doubtless another 
anomaly due to the structure. No grain large enough to examine 
was crystallographically a single unit but each was made of an enor- 
mous number of individual fibers, only a majority of which were in a 
position to show the ultimate indices. Where the birefringence is 
very high, as in calcite, and the material fine grained, a relatively 
small dilution of the extreme values for the indices by fibers away 


2. H. Brapuny, The Snake River Division. U.S. Geol. Geogr. Survey Terr. (Hay- 
den), 6th Ann. Rept., p. 209. 1873. 


ocr. 4, 1927 SHANNON: PENTAGONAL DODECAHEDRAL OOLITES 411 


from the critical position must effect a considerable change in the mass 
index. 

Lacroix’ has given the name ‘“‘ktypeite’”’ to pisolitic material from 
Carlsbad, Bohemia, and Hammam-Meskoutine, Algeria, formerly 
referred to aragonite and similar in character to the oolites from 
Idaho. Its specific gravity was given as varying fram 2.58 to 2.70, 
or less than that of calcite. Its birefringence was found to be 0.020 
while that of calcite is 0.172. In parallel polarized light a black 
distorted cross was noted, while portions gave a positive black cross 
in convergent light. Heated to low redness the pisolites decrepi- 
tated and finally were ‘“‘transformed into calcite.” ‘“Ktypeite”’ is 
quite probably the same as the material here described and owes its 
apparent deviation from the optical properties of calcite to the in- 
timately fibrous concretionary structure, the relation to calcite being 
similar to that of chalcedony to quartz. 

The most striking and unexplainable feature of the Idaho material 
being the geometrical form, a search was made through the various 
collections of the National Museum for other examples of oolites or 
pisolites exhibiting similar features. The only other samples found 
(U.S. N. M. Cat. Nos. 47,123 and 86,694) were from Shinano Prov- 
ince, Japan. These consist of some hundreds of pisolites varying 
from 2 millimeters to 15 millimeters in diameter. The smaller of 
these are spherical or ellipsoidal in form, and the larger are subangular. 
Two of the subangular specimens about 10 millimeters in diameter 
are well defined pentagonal dodecahedra with rounded edges and 
concave faces. 

In an attempt to determine whether the oolites under discussion 
are aragonite or calcite three of the small spheres from Japan, one of 
the larger Japanese dodecahedra, three snowy-white and perfectly 
spherical oolites 2 millimeters in diameter from the “‘Snake River Hot 
Springs,’ Montana, (U.S. N. M. Cat. No. 45,998), one of the Idaho 
dodecahedra, and a small fragment of “flos ferri’’ aragonite from 
Steiermark, Austria, (U. 8S. N. M. Cat. No. 87,304), were boiled to- 
gether in dilute cobalt nitrate solution. ‘The dodecahedra from both 
Idaho and Japan and the spherical oolites from Japan took on the 
pale blue color of calcite while the ‘‘flos ferri”’ and the Montana oolites 
showed the deep violet characteristic of aragonite. It seems estab- 
lished that the polyhedral oolites under discussion are calcite. 

The writer is informed by Mr. Laurence La Forge that Wirt Tassin 


=A. Lacroix, Acad. sci. C. R. 126: 602. 1898. See Dana, Syst. Min., 6th ed., 
App. 1, p. 39. 1899. 


412 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


found polyhedral oolites in the collections of the Hayden Survey and, 
after engaging in considerable speculation as to the origin of the 
unique forms, analyzed them and found them to be pure calcium 
carbonate. No record of the figures of this analysis can be found nor 
any of the analyzed sample. ‘The present writer found the material 
to dissolve completely in cold dilute hydrochloric acid. 

The internal structure of the dodecahedral forms is that character- 
istic of radiate-fibrous concretionary oolites—a structure that almost 
invariably produces a more or less spherical form. Thus the sym- 
metry of the exterior of the oolites cannot be the result of internal 
structure or forces, and it becomes pertinent to inquire as to what 
external conditions may have produced the polyhedral forms. The 
normal explanation in mineralogy for external geometric symmetry 
which is at variance with internal molecular structure is either pseudo- 
morphism or inversion. In pseudomorphism a previously existing 
crystal with euhedral boundaries has been converted into another 
substance by chemical reaction without a change inform. The molec- 
ular structure of the second substance bears no relation to the external 
geometric form inherited from the preceding mineral. In the present 
case the erystal-like forms are pentagonal dodecahedra, represented 
in crystallography only by the pyritohedron, so named because it is of 
frequent occurrence with the minerals of the pyrite group. It is a 
solid bounded by twelve faces, each of which is a pentagon with four 
equal sides and one longer side, and closely resembles the regular 
pentagonal dodecahedron of geometry with regular pentagons as 
faces. ‘The regular pentagonal dodecahedron is one of the two regular 
solids of geometry which are impossible in crystallography because 
they are contrary to the laws of symmetry and rational indices. The 
ratios of the axial intercepts of a crystal face must be either whole 
numbers, zero, or infinity, whereas the intercepts of the face of the 
regular pentagonal dodecahedron in prismatic position are as 


14++/5 


ile :0. The only possible explanation of the origin of the calcite 


forms in question by pseudomorphism is to assume that they have 
replaced pyrite crystals bounded by a pyritohedron of high and 
irrational indices closely approaching the regular pentagonal dodeca- 
hedron in angle—an assumption which is highly improbable. 

The other cause of lack of correspondence between external crystal 
form and internal structure, inversion, is illustrated by many minerals 
of which leucite is a typical example. This mineral, which occurs as 
isometric trapezohedral crystals of perfect form, is usually biaxial in 


oct. 4, 1927 SHANNON: PENTAGONAL DODECAHEDRAL OOLITES 413 


polarized light under the petrographic microscope and has the proper- 
ties of a doubly refracting substance. The accepted explanation of 
this discordance between form and internal structure is that the 
substance at an elevated temperature has the symmetry represented 
by the external form, but at ordinary temperatures possesses the 
symmetry represented by the internal structure. -The mineral was 
formed at high temperature and the external form was determined by 
that temperature. The internal structure, however, inverted in 
cooling to that stable at ordinary temperatures. In the case of cal- 
cium carbonate there is no high temperature form which approaches 
isometric symmetry and inversion therefore cannot be invoked as 
the cause of the form of the unusual oolites. 

Since the pentagonal dodecahedral forms cannot be logically ex- 
plained by changes in internal structure or by pseudomorphism it 
seems reasonable to investigate the possibility that they are due to 
forces operating externally. Oolites structurally lke those under 
consideration and more or less spherical in form are frequently formed 
in caleareous springs and the most perfectly rounded ones are those 
which are kept more or less continuously in suspension by the rising 
current of water. Since the Idaho examples are typical oolites struc- 
turally, and were formed in a calcareous spring, there is sufficient 
reason for assuming that they were originally spherical and that the 
spherical form was subsequently modified by external forces. The 
most probable force to be considered is the result of mutual interfer- 
ence or crowding and the problem becomes that of the mutual defor- 
mation of spheres. If it be assumed that spherical oolites of uniform 
size and perfect form settled in recesses of the spring and continued 
to grow at a uniform rate, they must ultimately have reached the 
point where the surfaces of contact were practically plane. Com- 
pression of closely packed plastic spheres would give the same result, 
were the pressure essentially equal from all directions, but the calcite 
spherulites are essentially rigid and their deformation can scarcely 
be attributed to pressure from outside the mass of oolites. It is 
doubtless due to continued growth by accretion from the calcium 
carbonate of the spring water. 

The natural supposition would be that when uniform spheres have 
been so modified as to fill space solidly by becoming plane surfaced 
polyhedra, each polyhedron would be a geometric holohedron and the 
problem presented for solution would be the classic one of the division 
of space with minimum partitional area. Were only two dimensions 
represented the problem would be easily solvable and the solution 


414 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


capable of facile experimental demonstration. Thus a single layer 
of uniform spheres is easily seen to assume a hexagonal packing and 
the ideal deformation of cylinders into hexagonal prisms, as classically 
represented in honeycomb textures, is illustrated by many natural 
examples. In three dimensional packing the problem is not so simple. 
The mathematical solution derived as to the angles for stable equi- 
librium is simply that every angle of meeting of film-surfaces is exactly 
120°.4 The rhombic dodecahedron is a polyhedron of plane sides 
between which every angle of meeting is 120°. Space can be filled 
with or divided into equal and similar rhombic dodecahedrons and 
the rhombic dodecahedron might seem to be the solution of the prob- 
lem for the case of cells equal in volume and having every part of 
the boundary of the group either infinitely distant from the place 
considered or so adjusted as not to interfere with the homogeneous 
interior distribution of the cells. The rhombic dodecahedron is the 
only plane-sided polyhedron which presents a solution of the equilib- 
rium problem. Lord Kelvin concluded from theoretical considera- 
tions, however, that, as found by Plateau by experimentation with 
soap films, the angles of the rhombic dodecahedron, giving when space 
is divided into such figures twelve plane faces meeting at a point, are 
essentially unstable. He concluded that the requirements of sta- 
bility are best fulfilled when the rhombic dodecahedron is so divided 
by insertion of planes that the unit becomes what he calls a minimal 
tetrakaidecahedron or an isotropic tetrakaidecahedron, familiar to 
crystallographers as a cuboctahedron, having curved arcs of 19° 28’ for 
its edges. 

Desch® has critically considered this problem from the standpoint 
of the metallurgist with the view of determining and explaining the 
forms of the crystal grains in solidified metals. According to the 
hypothesis of Quincke, metals and other substances, immediately 
before solidification from the liquid state, separate into two immiscible 
liquids, one in much smaller quantity than the other. These liquids 
have interfacial surface tension and a foam is formed, the liquid present 
in smaller proportion arranging itself in cell walls and the other con- 
stituting the cell contents. Crystallization then takes place within 
the cells and the cell walls are represented in the solid mass by the 
boundaries of the crystal grains. If this hypothesis is correct the 


4Sir Witt1am Tuomson (Lord Ixelvin), On the division of space with minimum 
partitional area. Phil. Mag. 24: 503-514. 1887. 

6 Crecin H. Descu, The solidification of metals from the liquid state. Jour. Inst. 
Metals 22: 241-263. 1919. 


oct. 4, 1927 SHANNON: PENTAGONAL DODECAHEDRAL OOLITES 415 


grains in a solidified metal should approximate the form of cells of a 
foam and these, according to Kelvin, should be cuboctahedra® with 
curved edges. Desch experimented with masses of foam and ob- 
tained a certain proportion of cells having the cuboctahedral form. 
By far a greater number, however, had the five sided faces character- 
istic of the pentagonal dodecahedron. He then proceeded to the 
examination of the form of the grains in beta brass. This brass 
containing aluminum was made to separate into its individual grains 
by immersion in mercury. In this also the majority of faces were 
five sided and the form of most of the grains seemed to approach the 
pentagonal dodecahedron. 

The writer confirmed the observations of Desch on the cells of a 
foam. A large mass of fairly uniform bubbles was produced in a 
closed vessel by slowly blowing air at constant low pressure through a 
fine capillary tube. By observing the reflections of light from the 
contact surfaces of the interior of the mass it was found that a con- 
siderable majority of the faces were of pentagonal outline and that 
the cells approximated the form of the regular pentagonal dodeca- 
hedron. A much smaller proportion showed four and six sided faces, 
confirming the presence of Kelvin’s cuboctahedral cell. The latter 
is further confirmed by the practical absence of anything recognizable 
as a rhombic dodecahedral cell. 

Since the problem was considered as one of interfering spheres, a 
number of equal spherical masses of plastic modeling clay about 1 
centimeter in diameter were packed in a spherical space and subjected 
to, as nearly as possible, equal pressure from all directions. When 
the masses of clay were separated and examined, the interior units 
had become polyhedra and a considerable majority of them showed 
five sided faces. 

In packing uniform spheres to fill space there are-two extremes of 
compactness of the group. Thus the loosest packing is six-contact 
packing, that is, any sphere taken as a nucleus is in contact with six 
other spheres. Compression of such a group would result in the 
nuclear sphere assuming a cubic form. On the other hand, the closest 
possible packing is twelve-contact packing, in which each nucleus of 
the group is in contact with twelve other spheres. There are three 


® The term cuboctahedral is here used in preference to tetrakaidecahedral because 
crystallographers are more familiar with it. It is to be understood that the tetra- 
kaidecahedron of Kelvin is a simple ¢uboctahedron or octahedron evenly truncated by 
the faces of the cube so that all edges are of equal length. This yields a fourteen- 
faced solid in which six of the faces are squares and eight are regular hexagons. 


416 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


convenient ways in which twelve spheres may be brought into con- 
tact with the central sphere. First, six units may be arranged around 
the circumference in a plane with the nucleus, and a triangular group 
of three placed above and three below. Crystallographically con- 
sidered the equatorial spheres would yield faces, if the spheres were 
forced together, in the position of a hexagonal prism with a trigonal 
pyramid above and below. ‘This may consequently be referred to as 
the hexagonal-trigonal packing. The second grouping may be con- 
structed with four spheres placed below the nucleus, four above, and 
four around the equator. By compression such an aggregate will 
yield a rhombic dodecahedron and such packing is called rhombic 
dodecahedral packing. In the third arrangement five spheres form 
a ring above the equatorial plane of the nucleus and five below, offset 
so as to occupy the interstices of the upper five. One sphere at the 
top and one at the bottom completes the group. This group, upon 
compression, gives a regular pentagonal dodecahedron as the nucleus 
and may be called pentagonal dodecahedral packing. 

The faces formed upon any sphere, considered as a nucleus of a 
homogeneous group, by continued uniform growth or by compression 
must obviously obey the law which requires that the planes of contact 
be at right angles to the lines joining the centers of the spheres. In 
the case of rigid spherulitic oolites of calcium carbonate, all growing 
outward at a uniform rate, the form attained must be polyhedral and 
governed entirely by the initial position of the oolites with reference 
to one another. Assuming a close packing there would be a twelve- 
contact arrangement and the resultant polyhedra must be either 
pentagonal dodecahedra, rhombic dodecahedra or the hexagonal 
trigonal form mentioned above. The cuboctahedron, the minimal 
form, could not arise because it would require fourteen point packing 
of the original spheres, which is impossible. 

The pentagonal dodecahedral forms under discussion may then be 
reasonably interpreted by assuming a pentagonal dodecahedral pack- 
ing of the oolites in their original resting place. The fact that the 
pentagonal dodecahedron is the form which actually occurs suggests 
that the corresponding packing is most easily assumed, a suggestion 
further supported by the experiment wherein numerous plastic spheres 
were packed and compressed. To test the suggestion further a large 
number of ordinary uniform-sized shot were placed in a round bot- 
tomed vessel, shaken until settled and cemented with heated wax. 
Upon dissection of this mass of spheres, the great majority seemed 
to be packed in pentagonal arrangement. The experiments with 


oct. 4, 1927 GIRTY: ASTARTELLA 417 


masses of foam, both by Desch and by the writer are also in agreement. 
There is an essential difference in the behaviour of foams, however, 
since the spheres of foam are more mobile, are capable of greater 
movement and deformation and of subdivision, and are more sharply 
dependent upon surface tension. It is very likely, though, from the 
large number which approach pentagonal symmetry that the normal 
packing is pentagonal. The fact that no rhombic dodecahedral foam 
cells are noted substantiates the ideas of Kelvin, but it is also true 
that every instance of rhombic dodecahedral twelve-point packing 
must result in the formation of cuboctahedral cells in a foam. The 
relative scarcity of cells of this form further argues as to the greater 
stability of the pentagonal dodecahedral packing. The foam cells 
behave to a remarkable degree like rigid spheres, even to an appreci- 
able deviation from the theoretical angle of stability demonstrated 
by Plateau in his study of foam films on a wire framework. 

The case of metals especially concerned in the work of Desch is a 
little harder to understand. The coincidence of the pentagonal 
structure of the granular: metal with that of foam is apparently a 
substantiation of the Quincke hypothesis. In a homogeneous cooling 
metal-fusion one would expect the solidification outward from nuclei 
in a spherical front, and in ideal cases, wherein the temperature was 
homogeneously distributed, these nuclei might be expected to be 
very equally spaced. Except by means of the foam hypothesis of 
Quincke, it is dificult to account for the preference shown for a pen- 
tagonal packing. 

The calcite oolites examined in the Idaho lot are without doubt 
selected, ideally perfect examples which may represent the concentra- 
tion of hundreds or thousands of less perfect or variously bounded 
individuals. Their form is of extreme interest and it is highly de- 
sirable that the locality be visited and a large number of these unusual 
forms collected as well as studied in place. The explanation of 
their form above set forth seems the most rational one to fit the facts 
of the case, but further study of the problem would seem to be highly 
desirable. 


PALEONTOLOGY.—The generic characters of Astartella Hall. 
Grorce H. Girtry, U. 8. Geological Survey. (Communicated 
by J. B. Rexzsipe, JR.) 


The genus Astartella was established by James Hall in 1858. The 
only species referred to it at that time was A. vera which consequently 


1 Published by permission of the Director of the U. 8. Geological Survey. Received 
August 31, 1927. 


418 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


is the genotype. ‘The original description, which is very brief, runs 
as follows: 


Shell bivalve, thick, smooth or concentrically furrowed: lunule impressed; 
ligament external; hinge teeth two in each valve, the anterior tooth of the 
right valve large and strong, with a longitudinal pit in the summit. Related 
to Astarte. 


This diagnosis has, so far as I am aware, never been revised or re- 
written up to the present time; yet on attempting to verify it from 
specimens in my collection I found it far from complete and in some 
respects inaccurate. 

The astartellas are one of the commonest pelecypods of our Pennsyl- 
vanian faunas and if we except a few species which appear to be 
isolated because perhaps they are rare, but which may be brought 
into close relationship when more is known about them, all the species 
or at least all the more common species are pretty much alike. In 
any collection of considerable size several species might be distin- 
guished on selected specimens, all of them, however, connected by 
other specimens of intermediate character. With the astartellas, 
then, the question is not whether they represent more than a single 
genus so much as whether they represent more than a single species. 
The specimens upon which my observations were made therefore 
unquestionably belong to Hall’s genus. I have identified them with 
Astartella concentrica Conrad although it is by no means certain that 
Conrad’s species and the type species of Asiartella are not the same. 
Astartella concentrica had been in the literature some fifteen years when 
A. vera was described, but it was cited under the genus Nuculttes and 
was evidently unknown to Hall. 

Although shells of this type constitute one of the most common of 
Pennsylvanian pelecypods, they rarely show characters of prime 
generic importance. If they are not actually broken in that part, 
the hinge margin is liable to be covered by hard rock. Or, as often 
happens, thanks.to the hinge teeth and perhaps also to the marginal 
denticles, the two valves occur together so that one of them is con- 
cealed by the other. To be sure, the shape of these shells is in a 
measure characteristic and also the sculpture of widely spaced con- 
centric lamellae, although Hall in the original description does say— 
I suspect with an eye to the off chance—that the shell is smooth or 
concentrically furrowed. In further comment upon his diagnosis, the 
right valve is the only one whose interior was figured by Hall and, if 


oct. 4, 1927 GIRTY: ASTARTELLA 419 


judgment is permitted from certain expressions used, it was the only 
one known to him. It seems doubtful, as will be shown later, whether 
either valve actually does have two “hinge teeth,”’ by which expression 
it is fairly certain Hall meant cardinal teeth. 

The hinge teeth, as just remarked, are rarely to be seen in these 
shells, but one of the other generic characters, the “external ligament” 
(or at least its receptacle), is a conspicuous feature in any specimen 
that is even fairly well preserved. By that designation Hall undoubt- 
edly had in mind a sharply defined bevelled surface behind the beaks 
which corresponds to a similar though smaller surface anterior to 
them which Hall calls the “‘Iunule.’”’ On most specimens these two 
structures show no material difference except in size, and when I have 
had occasion to refer to the posterior one I have called it an escutch- 
eon. The same term was employed by Meek in describing Astartella 
newberryt. It may actually have been a ligamental area as Hall 
considered it; nevertheless, my specimens seem to show another 
structure on the interior of the shell which was apparently a place of 
ligamental attachment, and although this fact, even if established, 
might not necessarily prove that the external structure did not also 
function in the liigamental equipment, it would tend to discredit Hall’s 
interpretation. 

Hall’s description, I believe, was predicated largely if not wholly upon 
the right valve. In my collection left valves showing the hinge are 
decidedly more numerous than right valves. They show that this 
valve was equipped with a single prominent cardinal tooth which had 
a large, deep pit or socket on the anterior side. On the posterior 
side the cardinal tooth is confluent with a thickening of the hinge 
margin or sort of hinge plate from which it rises considerably, but by 
no means as much or as abruptly as it rises from the deeply exca- 
vated socket in front of it. The shell on the anterior side of the 
socket is as high and prominent as the cardinal tooth itself; it is 
probably to be considered a lateral tooth, though it is merely the shell 
margin which as it recedes, forms the broad, sharply defined lunule. 

The hinge structure of the right valve, as already noted, is not 
shown by as many specimens as the left valve, but it is shown very 
well indeed by one of them. ‘This specimen has a single large wedge- 
shaped cardinal tooth that is flat on top and slightly indented by two 
longitudinal grooves. The tooth has a deep triangular socket on 
the posterior side; on the anterior side it descends vertically, but 
not quite so far, and is continuous with a narrow shelf-like projection 
that is carried forward almost to the anterior extremity of the shell. 


420 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


This, the anterior prolongation of the hinge-plate, is guarded on its 
outer or upper side by the thin, strongly projecting edge of the es- 
cutcheon, and as its inner edge also is elevated, a short groove is 
inclosed between them. 

But little difficulty is experienced in correlating the structures of 
the two valves. The flat-topped denticle in the right valve evidently 
fits into the deep pit that is anterior to the cardinal tooth of the left 
valve, while the cardinal tooth of the left valve is received by the 
deep pit that is posterior to the cardinal tooth of the right valve. 
Thus I recognize but a single cardinal tooth in each valve instead of 
two. Nevertheless, it is possible to harmonize my observations in 
some measure with those of Hall, for a slight prominence exists pos- 
terior to the socket of the right valve where Hall has figured a posterior 
cardinal tooth. His figure, however, is not accurate; at least it is not 
in accord with my observations, and I should hardly regard this ele- 
vation as being a tooth. The structure in this part is peculiar and 
will be considered more in detail farther on. Hall’s figure shows two 
other structures that are really important, although, inasmuch as he 
did not have the left valve to compare them with, he failed to recog- 
nize their significance. His figure shows, though not clearly, a groove 
passing down the anterior side of the shell margin for a short distance. 
Actually, as has just been described, this margin is thickened into a 
narrow shelf that extends forward almost to the anterior extremity, 
and this shelf-like structure bears a groove along its upper surface 
by reason of its raised margins. Hall’s figure also shows quite clearly 
a projecting lamina back of the peak which is really the margin of 
the shell along what he calls the ligamental area. 

The construction of the left valve is just the reverse of this for the 
shell is thickened along the posterior margin of the hinge line and 
grooved to receive the sharp and projecting edge of the right valve, | 
while the shell margin in front of the beak is, as already described, 
sharp and projecting so as to fit into the groove of the right valve 
corresponding to it. Whether this reciprocating structure of the 
two valves would properly be called teeth, I am not sure. In each 
case one ‘‘tooth’’ seems to be merely the shell margin and not an 
independent structure comparable to the cardinal teeth. 

[I must now try to make clear the singular construction of the hinge 
where in the right valve Hall thought he recognized a posterior 
cardinal tooth. At this point there is constructed a flat-lying plate 
approximately parallel to the hinge plate proper, but free above and 
connected with it only at the lower side. This plate incloses a very 


mec, 4,.1927 GIRTY: ASTARTELLA 421 


narrow, very deep cleft or crack as if -part of the shell had been in- 
completely sawed off from above. In other language, this structure 
begins as a narrow groove under the beak which rapidly becomes 
deeper though not broader so as to detach from above a laminar pro- 
jection that lies almost flat and is but slightly separated from the main 
body of the hinge plate. ‘To the reader the thought would probably 
suggest itself that this is some appearance due to accident, but it is 
very clearly shown and is quite persistent on both valves and in a 
number of specimens. This plate helps to form what appears to be 
a receptacle for the ligament, for there is a well-defined striated area 
partly underneath the plate and partly visible beyond it on the 
posterior side which I would say was a place of ligamental attach- 
ment. ‘The lower boundary of this ligamental area was a continuation 
of the lower margin of the lamina where it joins the hinge plate; the 
upper boundary is a distinct angular ridge which forms the lower 
margin of the escutcheon. Posteriorly this hgamental area narrows 
strongly from below upward, giving place to the structure which may 
be called the posterior lateral tooth. 

The somewhat remarkable structure which I have tried to describe 
must, I think, be a place of ligamental attachment. It can have 
nothing to do with dentition though a slight elevation of the surface 
more or less incidental to it was apparently identified by Hall as a 
posterior cardinal tooth. In this respect the two valves are alike and 
the lamellae could not possibly have interlocked. In so far as one 
may venture the word, this structure must have served for the attach- 
ment either of a muscle or of a ligament, and one can scarcely question 
that it was for the latter. As I have already remarked, this would 
not preclude the interpretation of the ‘‘escutcheon” as a ligamental 
area, but it would render the interpretation less probable. 

The escutcheon also begins under the umbo above the ligamental 
groove. It regularly widens posteriorly but is sharply defined below 
by a ridge and is distinctly an external character. 

One more feature, somewhat trivial perhaps, may be mentioned. 
The dental socket does not itself extend to the umbo, but it is repre- 
sented upon the plane of the lunule by a triangular structure similar 
in appearance to the pseudodeltidium of certain brachiopods and 
formed apparently by shell that filled in (or possibly overarched) 
the socket as the tooth of the other valve moved forward or was worn 
off at the upperend. This structure is sharply defined by grooves and 
is convex, especially on the posterior side. It may be concave on the 
anterior. 


422 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


10 x2 . : Poet 7 x4 

Figures. 1-11, Astartella concentrica Conrad. 1-3, left valve, X4, X2, and X1. 

4-6, right valve, X4, X2, and X1. 7, fragment of a left valve tilted to show the covering 

of the dental socket and its track, x4. 8, another fragment of a left valve, X4. 9-11, 

left valve, <4, X2, and X1. i 
Lawrence shale, Iatan and St. Joseph, Missouri. 


ocT. 4, 1927 KILLIP: NEW PASSIONFLOWERS 423 


To summarize the structure of this genus as shown by my specimens, 
each valve has a single large cardinal tooth, the cardinal tooth of the 
right valve being anterior to that of the left valve when the two 
valves were joined. The left valve, consequently, has a deep pit or 
socket on the anterior side of the tooth, while the right valve has a 
socket on the posterior side of the tooth. In addition the anterior 
part of the cardinal margin in the left valve forms a linear tooth that 
is received by a groove in the thickened anterior margin of the right 
valve. On the other hand, the posterior part of the cardinal margin 
in the right valve forms a linear tooth that rests in a groove in the 
thick posterior margin of the left valve corresponding to it. Between 
the cardinal tooth and the posterior tooth in each valve is an area of 
ligamental attachment partly inclosed by a leaflike plate which is 
continuous below with the main hinge structure. The sharply de- 
fined areas on the exterior of the shell are lunule and escutcheon, 
although the posterior one may have housed a ligament as Hall 
originally thought. 

The muscular imprints consist of a rather large, deep, and sharply 
defined scar at the anterior extremity of the shell, and another some- 
what larger, but less deep and less sharply defined, opposite to it on 
the posterior superior angle. The pallial line connecting these im- 
prints is indistinct in all the specimens seen, but it appears to be 
without a sinus, as indeed, has generally been believed. A short 
distance back of the upper margin of the anterior scar and excavated 
in the underside of the hinge plate is a small but rather deep pedal scar. 


BOTANY.—WNew passionflowers from South America and Mevzico. 
EvuswortH P. Kiuuip, U. 8. National Museum. 


In preparing a revision of American Passifloraceae the writer has 
had the opportunity of examining the collections of several herbaria 
in the United States and Europe. As this revision will not be ready 
for publication for some time the new species recently noted are here 
described in advance. Photographs of the type specimens in other 
herbaria are deposited in the United States National Herbarium. 


Passiflora stellata Moritz, sp. nov. 


Stem slender, subtriangular, striate, finely pilosulous; stipules setaceous, 
5 mm. long; petioles up to 3 em. long, biglandular at base of blade, the 
glands 0.5 mm. long; leaves 4 to 6.5 cm. long, 4 to 8 em. wide, 3-lobed about 


1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 
Received August 13, 1927. 


424 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


one-third their length (lobes broadly triangular or triangular-ovate, 2 to 3 
em. wide, acute or obtusish), subtruncate at base, 5-nerved, entire at margin, 
sparsely and minutely pubescent above, more densely pubescent beneath, 
membranous; peduncles about 2.5 cm. long; bracts setaceous, scattered: 
flowers white or greenish (?); sepals oblong, about 2 cm. long, hyaline at 
margin, cucullate at apex, keeled, the keel terminating in a horn 3 mm. long; 
petals linear, less than 1 cm. long, obtuse, white, membranous; corona fila- 
ments In a single series, liguliform, about 7 mm. long; operculum membranous, 
7 mm. high, slightly plicate, erose at margin, white; eyueeey slender, 
striate, slightly swollen at base; stamens very slender, cm. long; ovary 
ellipsoidal, 6-grooved, glabrous. 

Type in the herbarium of the Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, col- 
lected ‘in reg. temp. et subfrig.,” New Grenada (Venezuela?), in 1852, by 
M. Moritz (no. 1961). Duplicate in the British Museum. 


This is quite distinct from any known species. The shape of the leaves 
and the presence of glands at the apex of the petioles indicate a relation- 
ship with P. warmingii. The stipules, however, are setaceous, not folia- 
ceous; the faucial corona consists of a single, not a double, series of filaments; 
the gynophore is more slender; and the ovary ellipsoidal, not ovoid. 


Passiflora quadriflora Kallip, sp. nov. 


Plant glabrous throughout; stem angular, strongly compressed, striate, 
scabrous; stipules setaceous, about 1 cm. long; petioles 7 to 9 mm. long, tor- 
tuous, glandless; leaves narrowly lanceolate, 5 to 8 cm. long, 1.5 to 2 em. 
wide, unlobed, acute, mucronulate, rounded or subcuneate at base, entire, 
3-nerved (nerves nearly parallel, conspicuous), reticulate-veined, ocellate 
between lateral nerves and midnerve, coriaceous or subcoriaceous; peduncles 
in pairs, 2-flowered, the main portion and the branches nearly equal, each 
about 1 cm. long; bracts setaceous, 3 to 5 cm. long, scattered; flowers rotate- 
campanulate, about 5 cm. wide, greenish (?); sepals lanceolate, about 2 
cm. long, 0.5 em. wide at base, acute; petals linear-lanceolate, 5 to 6 mm. 
long, 1 to 1.2 mm. wide, obtuse, white, membranous; corona filaments in 
two series, the outer filiform, 5 to 6 mm. long, the inner series capillary, 
2 mm. long: operculum membranous, 2 mm. long, slightly plicate, finely 
fimbriate one-third its length; nectary ring annular; limen shallowly saucer- 
shaped, 0.5 mm. high; ovary globose; styles very slender, about 8 mm. long. 

Type in the herbarium in the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 
536227, collected at Villeabamba, hacienda on the Rio Chinchao, Peru, 
altitude about 1900 meters, July 17 to 25, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 5189). 
A specimen of this collection is also in the U. 8. National Herbarium. 


This species presents several unusual characters. The peduncles are 
2-flowered, but they do not terminate in a tendril as in the case of P. 
cirrhiflora, P. tryphostemmatoides, and P. gracillima. The leaves are un- 
lobed, an unusual form in the subgenus Plectostemma, to which the species 
clearly belongs. The operculum, in addition, is more conspicuously fim- 
briate than in most species of this subgenus. 


Passiflora goniosperma Killip, sp. nov. 


Plant densely pilose-hirsutulous throughout, the hairs of the stem often 
recurved or retrorse; stem subtriangular, tortuous; stipules linear-lanceolate, 
4 to 6 mm. long, up to 1 mm. wide, aristate, subfaleate; petioles 5 mm. long 


oct. 4, 1927 3 KILLIP: NEW PASSIONFLOWERS 425 


or less, glandless; leaves oblong in general outline, 2-lobed one-quarter to 
one-third their length, 1.5 to 4.5 em. along mid-nerve, 2 to 6 cm. along 
lateral nerves, 2 to 4 cm. between tips of lobes (lobes obtuse, mucronulate, 
the sinus truncate or slightly rounded, occasionally emarginate, often 
mucronulate at end of midnerve), scaberulous and densely hirsute above 
with subappressed white hairs which are enlarged at pase, usually pilose- 
hirsute and paler beneath; flowers in pairs on short (2 cm.), axillary, leafy 
branches, rarely on the main stem; bracts none; sepals lanceolate, about 
7 mm. long, 2 mm. wide, acute, hirsutulous without; petals narrowly linear, 
3 to 4 mm. long, 1 mm. wide; corona filaments in a single series, liguliform, 
2 mm. long; operculum membranous, closely plicate, white; limen annular ; 
ovary ovoid, longitudinally 6-grooved, white-puberulent ; fruit asymmetri- 
cally ellipsoidal, up to 4 cm. long and about 1 cm. wide, sharply 6-angled, 
long-tapering at ends; seeds obovate, 3 to 4 mm. long, 1.5 to 2mm. wide, 
blackish, lustrous, narrowed at both ends, the axis more or less curved, the 
lateral margins thin-winged, the central portion of each face elevated, 
forming a sharp-toothed ridge (hence the seed quadrangular in cross-section). 
Type in the Universitetets Botaniske Museum, Copenhagen, collected 
at Nifia de Dolores, (Oaxaca?), Mexico, August, 1842, by Frederik Lieb- 
mann (no. 4076; Passiflora no. 29). 
Oaxaca: Santa Gertrudis, Liebmann 4075, Passiflora no. 30 (Copen- 
hagen). Sierra de Ixthlin, Conzatte in 1913 (U. S. N. M., Gray Her- 
barium), in 1918 (Missouri Botanical Garden). 


The seeds of P. goniosperma differ markedly from those of other Ameri- 
can species of Passiflora. Each of the two faces has the appearance of being 
compressed laterally to form a narrow longitudinal ridge; the transverse 
ridges, normally extending from margin to margin in the species of the sub- 
genus Plectostemma with sulcate seeds, are reduced to a row of teeth along 
this longitudinal ridge. The ellipsoidal, 6-angled fruit, the absence of 
bracts, and the general aspect of the plant, however, show a rather close 
relationship with P. capsularis, the species to which the type specimen of 
P. goniosperma was referred by Masters. In addition to the seed char- 
acters, other marks which distinguish it from P. capsularis are the smaller 
leaves, with rounded subparallel lobes (lobes usually acute, divergent in 
P. capsularis). 


Passiflora conzattiana Killip, sp. nov. 


Stem slender, terete, pilosulous, becoming glabrate, reddish; stipules 
setaceous, about 4 mm. long; petioles densely pilosulous, 0.8 to 2 cm. long, 
glandless; leaves 2 to 5 cm. long, 3 to 8 cm. broad, 2-lobed (lobes acute, 
rarely obtusish, widely divergent, the sinus shallowly semilunate or the 
upper margin nearly truncate), entire, cordate at base, 3-nerved (nerves 
often terminating in a short cusp), thin, sparingly setose above, densely 
pubescent beneath; peduncles solitary or in pairs, slender, up to 2 cm. long; 
bracts none; flowers small, 1 to 2 em. wide; sepals linear-lanceolate, 3- 
nerved, sparingly pilose without, glabrous within, 8 to 10 mm. long, 2 mm. 
broad, ‘petals linear-lanceolate, 4 to 5 mm. long, 1.5 mm. broad; corona 
filaments in a single series, relatively few, liguliform, 3 to 4 mm. long, 0.4 
mm. broad, deep red; operculum membranous, erect, closely plicate, red 
below, pale yellow or white above, the margin minutely fimbrillate; limen 
annular; gynophore glabrous, 4 to 5 mm. long; anthers oblong, 3 mm. long, 


426 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 16 


1 mm. broad; ovary narrowly ovoid, densely puberulent or tomentulose; 
styles clavate, 3 mm. long; stigma ‘globose, 0.8 mm. in diameter; fruit 
narrowly ellipsoidal, about 5 cm. long (including the long slender stipe and 
the caudate tip), 1 cm. wide, 6-angled, finely pubescent, at length glabrous; 
seeds broadly obcordate or suborbicular, 1.5 to 2 mm. long and wide, trans- 
versely 5 or 6-grooved, the ridges smooth. 
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,206,806, collected at Mirador, 
Veracruz, Mexico, June, 1921, by C. A. Purpus (no. 8804). 
San Luis Potosi: Las Canoas, Pringle 3638 (Gray Herbarium). 
Veracruz: Near Jalapa, Rose & Hough 4260 (U.S. N. M.), 4938 (U.S. 
N. M.), 7840 (U. S. N. M.). Totula, Liebmann 4154, Passiflora 28 
(Copenhagen). 


The principal points of difference between this species and P. capsularis 
and P. rubra are much smaller flowers, smaller leaves nearly truncate at the 
upper margin, nearly orbicular, rather than oblong, seeds. Several of the 
specimens here cited were distributed as P. rubra, a species frequent in 
the West Indies and South America but apparently not found in Mexico. 


Passiflora urbaniana Killip, sp. nov. 


Plant scandent, with slender tendrils; stem terete, softly ferruginous- 
villosulous or almost tomentose toward end; stipules minute, semiannular 
about stem, barely 0.5 mm. long; petioles 5 to 10 mm. long, slightly dilated 
at base, glandless, densely ferruginous-tomentose; leaves oblong or lance- 
oblong, 4.5 to 8 cm. long, 2 to 4 cm. wide, obtuse or rounded at apex, entire 
or remotely undulate-serrulate, 3- (or 5-)nerved (nerves impressed at base, 
the lateral not reaching to middle of margin, the secondary nerves 5 to 7 
on each side), subcoriaceous, minutely hispidulous above, densely and 
softly ferruginous-tomentose beneath; peduncles 5 to 8 cm. long, pilosulous; 
bracts 2 to 2.5 em. long, 1 to 1.5 em. wide, viscous, deeply bipinnatisect, 
the segments gland-tipped; flowers about 5 cm. wide, the tube short-cam- 
panulate, hirsutulous without; sepals oblong, about 2 cm. long, 0.6 cm. 
wide, obtuse, greenish and hirsutulous without, 3-nerved, the middle nerve 
becoming carinate toward apex, and terminating in a short horn; petals 
linear, slightly shorter than the sepals, lavender; corona filaments in 5 
series, those of the two outer filiform, about 1.3 cm. long, violet at base, 
radiate, those of the inner series almost capillary, about 2 mm. long, erect; 
operculum membranous, erect, about 1 mm. high, non-plicate, minutely 
denticulate; limen similar to operculum, about 2 mm. high; ovary subglobose, 
densely white-villous-tomentose. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 529493, collected at Sanitago 
de las Vegas, Province of Havana, Cuba, where cultivated, May, 1906. 
(Herbarium de Cuba, Estacién Central Agronémica no. 2588.) Said to 
have been grown from seeds from Belize, British Honduras. Specimens of 
this collection have been seen in the New York Botanical Garden, the Gray 
Herbarium, and the Berlin Botanical Garden. 


This is a most unusual species, and it is unfortunate that its precise origin 
is uncertain. The bracts and flower structure show that it belongs to the 
subgenus Dysosmia, of which the only other species with entire oblong 
leaves is the Brazilian P. clathrata. That is an erect, suffrutescent plant 
with very short peduncles and a wholly different indument. The leaves 


ecry 4 1927 KILLIP: NEW PASSIONFLOWERS 427 


are very similar in shape and size to those of P. multiflora, a native of the 
West Indies, belonging to a wholly different group of Passzflora. There is a 
bare possibility that this may be a hybrid of P. multiflora and some species 
of the Dysosmia group, perhaps P. foetida. 


This new species is named for Dr. I. Urban, the eminent student of the 
flora of the West Indies, whose assistance to me at Berlin is highly ap- 
preciated. 

Passiflora mesadenia Killip, sp. nov. 


Stem subquandrangular, striate, pilosulous; stipules subreniform, 1.5 to 
2 em. long, 0.5 to 0.8 cm. wide, aristate, glandular-dentate near base; petioles 
up to 2 em. long, 2 or 3-glandular at middle, the glands short-stipitate, 
about 2 mm. long and 1 mm. in diameter; leaves 4 to 6 cm. long, 6 to 8 cm. 
wide, 3-lobed to middle (lobes acute, the middle lobe oblong-lanceolate, the 
lateral lobes ovate-lanceolate), subauriculate at base (basal lobes slightly 
overlapping), shallowly and irregularly dentate-serrate, 5-nerved, reticulate- 
veined (nerves and veins impressed above), subcoriaceous, dark green and 
glabrous above, paler and pilosulous on the nerves and veins beneath; 
peduncles solitary, up to 5 em. long, subquadrangular, stout; bracts 4 to 
5 em. long, acute, united about half their length, glabrous; flower-tube 
cylindric, 7 to 8 em. long, about 1 em. in diameter, pink without, glabrous; 
sepals oblong, about 4 cm. long, 1 cm. wide, obtuse, concave toward apex, 
short-awned on outside just below apex, pink without, white within; petals 
oblong-spatulate, as long as the sepals, about 1.5 em. wide, obtuse, white; 
corona reduced to a row of small thick tubercles about 1 mm. long; oper- 
-culum 5 to 6 mm. long, the margin recurved, denticulate; limen closely 
surrounding base of gynophore, lobulate; ovary narrowly ovoid, glabrous, 
pruinose. 

Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 
536001, collected at Villcabamba, hacienda on the Rio Chinchao, Peru, 
altitude about 1800 meters, July 17-26, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 4960). 


This species differs from P. macrochlamys, a near relative, in the con- 
spicuous petiolar glands, borne near the middle of the petiole, auriculate 
_leaf-bases, much smaller stipules, and longer flower tubes. 


Passiflora roseorum Killip, sp. nov. 


Stem angular, striate, densely tomentulous; stipules oblong, 1.5 em. long, 
8 to 9 mm. wide, oblique and subcordate at base, fimbriate-dentate, the 
teeth 2 to 3 mm. long, not gland-tipped; petioles up to 1.5 em. long, bearing 
2 or 3 rudimentary glands, or glandless; leaves 3.5 to 4 em. long, 4.5 to 5 
em. wide, 3-lobed (lobes triangular-ovate or suborbicular, 1.5 to 2 em. 
wide, rounded at apex, the angle at sinus between middle and lateral lobes 
about 90°), truncate at base, 5-nerved, glandular-serrulate, thick-coriaceous, 
glabrous and sublustrous above, densely brown-tomentose beneath, the 
nerves and veins impressed above; peduncles up to 5 cm. long; bracts 4 em. 
long, united two-thirds their length (free portions ovate-lanceolate, about 
1.5 em. wide, abruptly acuminate), puberulent without, tomentose within: 
flowers violet, the tube cylindric, 7 to 8 cm. long; sepals oblong, about 3 
em. long, 1.5 cm. wide, obtuse, minutely awned on outside just below apex; 
petals subequaling the sepals, obtuse; corona reduced to a deeply crenulate 
ring, scarcely tuberculate; operculum dependent, the margin recurved, 
subentire; gynophore slender, not exserted; ovary obovoid, glabrous. 


428 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,022,682, collected in the 
vicinity of Zaragura, Ecuador, September 28, 1918, by J. N. Rose, A. 
Pachano, and George Rose (no. 23154). 


This may be a hybrid between P. jamesoni and P. ecuadorica, the fringed 
stipules suggesting the former and the small, shallowly lobed leaves the 
latter. Unlike either of these the under surfaces of the leaves and the 
involucre are covered with a dense brownish tomentum. | 


Passiflora anastomosans (Lam.) Killip. 
_ Tacsonia anastomosans Lam. in DC. Prodr. 3: 335. 1828. 


Passiflora acutissima Killip. 


Tacsonia lanceolata Mast. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 13!: 536. 1872. 
Passiflora lanceolata Harms, Bot. Jahrb. Engler 18: Beibl. 46: 11. 1894, 
not Passiflora lanceolata G. Don (1834). 


Passiflora matthewsii (Mast.) Killip. 
Tacsonia matthewsii Mast. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 13!: 539. 1872. 


Passiflora urceolata (Mast.) Iallip. 
Tacsonia urceolata Mast. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 13!: 539. 1872. 


Passiflora paulensis Killip, sp. nov. 


Plant glabrous throughout; stem terete, striate; stipules subreniform, 
0.7 to 1.5 em. long, 2 to 2.5 cm. wide, cuspidate, crenulate to subentire, 
membranous; petioles slender, up to 2 cm. long, 2 to 4-glandular, the glands 
stipitate, up to 1 mm. long; leaves ovate-oblong or oblong-lanceolate, 5 to 7 
em. long, 3 to 4 cm. wide, acute, rounded and subpeltate at base, entire, 
subtripli- or quintuplinerved, arcuate-veined, membranous; peduncles 
slender, up to 3.5 em. long; bracts cordate- ovate, 2 to 2.5 em. long, 1 to 
1.5 cm. wide, acute, conspicuously reticulate-veined, chartaceous, pinkish 
when dry; flower-tube broadly campanulate, ventricose at base; sepals 
oblong, about 2.5 cm. long, 1 cm. wide, obtuse, cucullate; petals oblong- 
spatulate, slightly longer than sepals, obtuse; corona filaments in 5 series, 
the two outer 2 to 2.5 em. long, terete, fasciate, those of the two succeeding 
series minute, about 1.5 mm. long, the inner series about 2 mm. distant, 
membranous at base, filamentose on margin, the filaments 2 mm. long; 
operculum membranous, horizontally spreading, serrulate at margin; limen 
cylindric, 7 mm. high, the lower two-thirds adnate to gynophore, the upper 
third flaring outward; ovary subglobose, glabrous. 

Type in the herbarium of the Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, collec- 
ted at Apiahy, S4o Paulo, Brazil, in 1883, by Puiggari. 


Although numerous species have been described in this group of the sub- 
genus Granadilla with entire leaves and foliaceous stipules and bracts, none 
of these descriptions apparently apply to this plant. The material examined 
at Berlin was distributed as P. subrotunda, which appears to be only a small- 
leaved form of P. mucronata. From P. mucronata, P. paulensis differs in 
the shape of the bracts, which are borne close to the flower, more slender 
petioles, leaves of a much thinner texture, and in the arrangement of the 
corona. 


oct. 4, 1927 KILLIP: NEW PASSIONFLOWERS 429 


Passiflora dalechampioides Killip, sp. nov. 


Plant glabrous throughout; stipules semi-oblong, 1.5 to 3.5 cm. long, 0.7 
to 1.5 em. wide, acute, mucronulate, rounded at base, oblique, attached 
laterally near base; petioles 2 to 3.5 em. long, bearing 6 to 9 short-stipitate 
glands on dorsal side; leaves trisect to within 2 mm. of base (segments 
lanceolate or elliptic-lanceolate, 3.5 to 10 cm. long, 1 to 3.5 em. wide, acu- 
minate, mucronulate, glandular-serrulate in sinuses, often overlapping), 
cordate at base, 3 or 5-nerved, reticulate-veined, subcoriaceous, sublustrous; 
peduncles 3.5 to 10 cm. long, articulate just below apex; bracts oblong or 
oblong-lanceolate, 1 to 1.2 cm. long, 0.5 to 0.6 cm. wide, acute, mucronulate, 
thin-membranous, glaucous, borne at point of articulation; flowers about 
4.5 em. wide, ‘‘greenish blue,’ the tube short-campanulate; sepals linear- 
oblong, about 2 cm. long, 0.6 to 0.8 cm. wide, cucullate and short-awned at 
apex; petals linear, about 1 cm. long, 0.3 cm. wide; corona filaments in 3 
series, the outermost filiform, about 7 mm. long, the two inner capillary, 
2 to 3 mm. long; operculum membranous, 2 mm. high, denticulate; nectar 
ring a short membrane; limen tubular, adnate to base of gynophore; ovary 
ovoid; fruit ovoid, 4 em. long, 2 cm. wide (probably larger), the exocarp 
coriaceous; seeds obovate-oblong, about 5 mm. long, 3 mm. wide, reticulate. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 943534, collected at Coroico, 
Yungas, Bolivia, in September, 1894, by M. Bang (no. 2441). Duplicates 
in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden and in the Gray 
Herbarium. 


This collection was identified by Masters as P. trisulca. The leaves bear 
a general resemblance to that species, though they are much more deeply 
lobed, and the petiolar glands are more numerous. ‘The flowers are smaller, 
the outer corona filaments filiform, not liguliform, and the operculum merely 
denticulate. The shape of the leaves suggests rather P. weberbaueri, a 
wholly different species of the subgenus Granadillastrum. 


Passiflora rubrotincta Killip, sp. nov. 


Plant glabrous throughout; stem terete, wiry, drying yellowish; stipules 
subreniform, 1.5 to 2 cm. long, 0.5 to 0.8 em. wide, minutely mucronulate 
at one end, rounded at other, remotely crenulate or subentire, coriaceous; 
petioles about 2 cm. long, glandless; leaves 4.5 to 8 cm. long and wide, 
angulately 3-lobed (middle lobe ovate-deltoid, 3 to 4 cm. long, 4 to 5 cm. 
wide at base, obtusish, the lateral lobes less than half as long), distinctly 
peltate, truncate at lower margin, 5-nerved, coriaceous, dark green and 
lustrous above, dull and reddish beneath; peduncles 4 to 7 cm. long, slender, 
articulate about 2 mm. from apex; bracts cordate-ovate, about 1 cm. long, 
0.7 cm. wide, acute, mucronulate, reddish; flowers 4 to 5 cm. wide, the 
tube campanulate; sepals oblong-lanceolate, about 5 mm. wide at base, 
coriaceous, dorsally awned just below apex, the awn foliaceous, about 1 
em. long; petals linear-spatulate, slightly shorter and narrower than the 
sepals; corona filaments filiform, in 3 (or 4?) series, the inner barely 2.5 mm. 
long; operculum membranous and non-plicate below, filamentose above, the 
filaments about 3 mm. long; limen tubular, closely surrounding base of 
gynophore; ovary ovoid. 

Type in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden, collected in 
Bolivia, the precise locality not stated, by M. Bang (without number). 


430 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


The angularly lobed, distinctly peltate leaves at once differentiate this 
species from relatives of the subgenus Granadilla. 


Passiflora tenuifila Killip, sp. nov. 


Plant glabrous throughout; stem terete or the younger parts subangular; 
stipules semi-oblong or subreniform, 1 to 4 cm. long, 0.5 to 2 em. wide, ob- 
tuse or acutish, mucronulate at apex, rounded at base, subentire, glaucescent 
beneath; petioles 2 to 5 cm. long (lower up to 8 cm.), 2 to 5- glandular, the 
glands up to 2 mm. long, thickened at base, scattered or subopposite; leaves 
3.5 to 8 em. along midnerve, 3 to 7 cm. along lateral nerves, 5 to 12 cm. 
between apices of lateral lobes, 3-lobed two-thirds to three-quarters their 
length (lobes oblong or obovate-oblong, 1 to 3.5 cm. wide, rounded or obtuse, 
mucronulate at base, glandular-serrulate in the acutish sinuses, the middle 
lobe narrowed at base), cordate, 5-nerved, subpeltate, membranous, glauces- 
cent beneath; peduncles 3 to 8 cm. long, slender, articulate less than 2 mm. 
from apex; bracts cordate-ovate, 1 to 1.5 cm. long, 0.6 to 1.2 cm. wide, 
abruptly acute and mucronate at apex, glandular-serrulate at base, glaucous, 
borne at point of articulation, persistent; flowers up to 3.5 em. wide, the 
tube patelliform, introrse at base: sepals narrowly oblong, 5 to 7 mm. wide, 
obtuse, carinate, bright green along the keel, white at margin, the keel 
terminating in a foliaceous awn 4 to 6 mm. long; petals about two-thirds as 
long and as broad as sepals, obtuse, white; corona filaments very slender, 
almost capillary, in 4 series, the outer two 5 to 7 mm. long, radiate, the 
inner two 1.5 to 2.5 mm. long; operculum membranous, 1 mm. high, slightly 
plicate at margin, filamentose, the filaments attached dorsally just below 
margin, 1 to 1.5 mm. long; nectar ring a low fleshy ridge; limen shallowly 
cupuliform, loosely surrounding base of gynophore; ovary ovoid, glaucescent. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,232,864, collected at Marechal 
Mallet, Parand, Brazil, about 800 meters altitude, January 2, 1904, by 
P. Dusén. A duplicate of this collection is in the Gray Herbarium. 

Braziu: Ijuhy, Rio Grande do Sul, Lindman 1363 (U. 8. N. M.). 

Paracuay: Along Upper Parana River, Fiebrig 6230 (U. 5S. N. M., 
Gray). 


This material was distributed as P. coerulea and P. tucumanensis. The 
species is not even closely related to P. coerulea, differing greatly in leaf 
shape and flower structure. Though belonging to the complex group of 
granadillas with 3-lobed leaves and foliaceous stipules, it is at once dis-— 
tinguished by small flowers with very short, almost capillary corona rays. 
Passiflora tucumanensis, P. naviculata, and P. giberti in general appearance 
closely resemble P. tenwifila, but, in addition to larger flowers with coarser 
corona rays, the first two have glandless petioles, and the third has a dis- 
tinctly plicate operculum. 


Passiflora phaeocaula Killip, sp. nov. 


Plant scandent, the tendrils well-developed; stem subquadrangular, 
slender, dark purple; stipules setaceous, soon deciduous; petioles 5 to 8 mm. 
long, glandless or obscurely glandular at base of leaf, minutely puberulent; 
leaves oval, 3.5 to 5 em. long, 2 to 2.5 em. wide, rounded and slightly emargi- 
nate at apex, rounded at base, entire, penninerved (lateral nerves 5 to 7 
to a side), reticulate-veined (nerves and veins elevated and conspicuous on 


oct. 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 431 


both surfaces), thick-coriaceous, lustrous and glabrous above, dull and 
minutely puberulent beneath; peduncles solitary in axils, 1-flowered, 4 to 
6 mm. long, shorter than the adjacent petiole; bracts soon ‘deciduous; flower 
‘ tube funnel-shaped, about 8 mm. long, 5 mm. ‘wide at throat, dark-maculate 
within; sepals narrowly oblong, about 2 cm. long, 0.6 em. wide, obtuse, 
ecorniculate; petals similar and subequal to sepals; corona filaments in 2 
series, the outer about 1 em. long, subdolabriform, linear below, dilated to 
width of about 1.5 mm. above middle, attenuate at tip, the inner filiform, 
about 1.5 mm. long, shallowly bifid; operculum borne*in lower third of 
tube, erect, 4 mm. long, filamentose nearly to base; ovary ovoid, puberulent. 

Type in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden, collected 
along the Upper Rio Negro, Brazil, in 1907 or 1908, by Weiss and Schmidt. 


Among species of the section Pseudoastrophea this is most readily recog- 
nized by the small, very thick leaves with a conspicuous much-elevated 
reticulate venation. The peduncles are shorter than the petioles, in this 
respect resembling only P. candida. In both series the corona filaments 
are much fewer than in P. candida, P. haematostigma, and other relatives, 
and the outer filaments are essentially entire at the margin of the dilated 
portion. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
392ND MEETING 


The 392nd regular meeting was held April 7, 1927, in the U.S. Department 
of Agriculture Motion Picture Laboratory, 1363 C. Street 8S. W. President 
J. A. Hystop presided. There were present 23 members and 15 visitors. 

Mr. Fuioyp F. Smiru, of Willow Grove, Penn., was elected to membership. 

Program: W. H. Larrimer: The control campaign against the European 
corn borer. (Illustrated by two motion picture films of the Department 
entitled ‘‘The corn borer and what to do about it,’’ and “Corn and the borer,” 
—and also by several lantern slides dealing with the various phases of the 
corn borer activities, such as copies of the original $10,000,000 authorization 
and appropriation bills, organization charts for the campaign, portraits of 
some of the executive personnel.) In addition to data in explanation of the 
film and the slides the speaker gave a brief outline of the events of the past 
few months concerning the corn-borer clean-up campaign, with not only em- 
phasis on the scope and magnitude of the enterprise, but also with emphasis 
on its experimental character, as being solely an effort to check the spread 
of the pest, and with no attempt at absolute extermination of it, the experi- 
mental character of the campaign being clearly realized and understood not 
only by the President, the Director of the Bureau of The Budget, and the 
Congressional Committee, but also by the International Corn-Borer Com- 
mittee, some of the members of which were most active in obtaining the 
ten million dollar appropriation. 

A. C. Baker: The citrus white fly in California. The speaker gave a 
brief account of the campaign against this pest and his visit to that State in 


432 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 


this connection. He pointed out that a previous attempt had been made to 
eradicate the white-fly, which, probably due to a lack of knowledge of its 
host plants, was unsuccessful. ‘The present campaign resolved itself for this 
same reason into one of treating the entire infested area, in the hope of re- - 
ducing the white-fly population to a point where danger of its transfer to the 
southern citrus region would be minimized, and if possible to a point where 
eradication might be considered feasible. 

Informal remarks were made on request by T. H. CoLuBroox TAYLOR, 
who has been working on cocoanut insects in the Fiji Islands, and who was 
en route to his old home in England on a vacation. He gave a brief outline 
of his work and experiences in the South Seas, and discussed with some detail 
his researches on the life history and control of Levuana iridescens Bath- 
Baker, a serious pest of cocoanuts in Fiji. This injury, commonly known as 
“Browning disease,’ was first noticed by explorers in 1860, and again was 
recorded in 1907. By 1923 it had spread to about a hundred of the near-by 
islands. Considerable time in control work was given to spraying experi- 
ments with lead arsenate paste and sea water, but much difficulty was ex- 
perienced in spraying because of the great height, 90 feet or more, of the 
cocoanut trees, and because of the corrosive qualities of the sea water on the 
spraying equipment. Search was made in a number of the other countries 
for parasites, and, at last, in Java, a Tachinid, Piychomyia remota Aldrich, 
was found. Serious difficulties were encountered in actual transportation by 
steamer of the parasites because of inadequate facilities, lack of ice, etc., for 
properly taking care of them. Much of the rearing work, too, was done 
under highly adverse conditions. He also touched briefly upon explorations 
made in other places, notably those in New Guinea and the Solomon Islands. 

Dr. Bévine directed attention to two copies of a Danish entomological 
Magazine, ‘“Entomologiske Meddelelser,” vol. 15, Nos. 5 and 6, 1926, which 
contained an article entitled ““The History of Danish Entomology” by Kai 
L. Henricksen, stating that it presented a very excellent résumé of the sub- 
ject and that there was included a number of good portraits of the outstanding 
leaders of the work in that country, and natives who in other countries have 
been identified with entomological work. 

Mr. Rouwer directed attention to an old paper by Fabricius written in 
1774 in which the author had recorded a thought quite similar to that ex- 
pressed recently in an address by Dr. Howard that if we only had closer 
acquaintance with and more intimate knowledge of insects we could better 
learn to control them. | 

—J.S. Wane, Recording Secretary. 


CONTENTS 


ORIGINAL PAPERS 
Page 
Mineralogy.—Calcite oolites with pentagonal dodecahedral form. Earn Y. 
SERANINON 3/5) 55) 5 Seay ie AS DTC OM SNA OC 9 is a a . 409 
Paleontology.—The generic characters of Astartella Hall. Grorer H. Girry.,.. 417 
Botany.—New passionflowers from South America and Mexico. ExLusworts P. 


RE ee aE ne BOG Ve eVGA NDR MER RRR O00 a ee 423 
PROCEEDINGS 

Entomological Soeietyy os 3s is eee Swi levis bile athe o's eerie’ » op nuaie o an «. 481 

ScrenTiPic  NOTHS "AND INE WH io. 5 0 Pee he Be See Ug be Oe a ee 432 


OFFICERS Ol THE ACADEMY 


President: ALEXANDER WeETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. 
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. Tuckerman, Bureau of Standards. 
Recording Secretary: W. D. LamBer?, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 
Treasurer: R.. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 


BOARD c oF EDITORS. : | 
 AenesCuasp=——(itsi‘isés~SSOHN Bese, JW 
BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY Ae ad Bick _ ‘NATIONAL MUSEUM. 9 oe ag 


"ASSOCIATE } EDITORS et ae 
ae Rouwee 82S 


ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY . Sat yaar ac 


G. W. Srosr 


ox GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


Ey R. SWANTON SR 


_ANTHROPOLOGICAL eocinry. eee 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 


JULY, AUGUST AND PEETEMBER, WHEN, MONTHLY, x gait Sti 


aye pete at ee rate of ee Brovided for 
tober 3, 1917, : eine ere es eee 3, 1918, 


This eee the official o organ ‘of th 
seas a brief record o pincer pena 


ure pul lis 

(3) seit cad programs ae meeting 8 of the Ae and 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. © 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each putes ts e 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres 

publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reac eS i 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from tk 
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, i iv y 


Manuscripts may be sent to any qeanuee of ihe Board of Edi ors; t 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without esse 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious mino! 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publicatio 

the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footno 
serially and submitted on aseparate manuscript page. 

Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to 
or diagrams of simple character. 

Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to autho 

unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in final form; th dit 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. 

Authors’ A eine oe wil be furnished at the following schedule of P 


Copies 4.pp. 8 pp. . 12 pp. 16 PP. — 
50° $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 
100 1.90 S80. ATS 600 
150 2.25 «4.30. 6.25. 6:50 
200 2.50 - ABO ee PO et EO . 
290 3.00 5.30. 6.25 és 750 i 


An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each Ze 2 : 


Covers bearing the name of the author and fails of the coe with inetusi 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. a tian 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his at f or extra copies or epri 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his | manuscript. : 


The rate of Subscription per clube 
Semi-monthly numbers. reba cieepeda sa cusewnseccssstn ete ess eens cabs singe 
Monthiy numbers..... de erie 6 on eh 


Remittances should be made ayable to “Washington Academy of Sciences,” n 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, Dx € 
European Agent> ~ Weldon | & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. 2. ay ae 
Ezchanges.—The JOURNAL does not exchange with other. publications. Roget a: 
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that cla is made 
within thirty days after date of ae foxpwane ft issue. cere 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to Dersmations9 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special: rates. 
are given to members of scientific societ ies affiliated with the tie ag fa 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


Vou. 17 OcToBER 19, 1927 No. 17 


CHEMISTRY.—Dvazo sulfonates! W. L. Hauu and H. D. Gres, 
Hygienic Laboratory, U. S. Public Health Service. 


In 1868, about a decade after Griess’ epoch making discovery of 
the diazo compounds, Schmitt and Glutz,? while studying the reactivity 
of these compounds towards various reagents, synthesized the first 
diazo sulfonates. They observed that the addition of moist diazonium 
chlorides to concentrated solutions of sodium hydrogen sulfite pro- 
duced clear yellow solutions which did not evolve nitrogen even 
when heated to boiling. From diazotized ortho- and paraamino- 
phenol, treated in this manner, they isolated beautiful yellow crystal- 
line compounds having the formula C;H,-OH-N.SO;K. They con- 
cluded that the acid sulfite had condensed with the diazo phenols and 
predicted that the reaction would be characteristic for all diazo 
compounds. 

Strecker and Romer? (1871) studied the behavior of diazo-benzene 
towards potassium hydrogen sulfite and, as predicted by Schmitt and 
Glutz, obtained a condensation of the acid sulfite with the diazo com- 
pound, but they noted that during the reaction sulfur dioxide was 
evolved. Their recrystallized compound was colorless and reduced 
certain metallic salts, and an analysis gave the molecular formula 
CsH;N.SO;K. They proved that the sulfonic group was not directly 
attached to carbon and attempted to write a structural formula for 
the compound, but failed to recognize the simple relationship between 
their experiments and those of Schmitt and Glutz. 

Fischer? (1875) seems to be the first to explain the mechanism of 

1 Published by permission of the Surgeon General, U. S. Public Health Service. 
Received Sept. 2, 1927. 

2 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 2: 51. 1869. 


3 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 4: 784. 1871. 
4 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 8: 589. 1875. 


433 


434 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


the syntheses. He proved that Schmitt and Glutz’s yellow com- 
pound and Strecker and Rémer’s colorless compound were similar in 
type. In repeating Strecker and Roémer’s work, Fischer used neutral 
sulfite and later alkaline sulfite,» and obtained a yellow compound 
whose molecule contained two less hydrogens than found by Strecker 
and Romer. With oxidizing and reducing agents, Fischer was able 
to convert a yellow compound into a colorless one and vice versa, 
thereby demonstrating a chemical reversibility.® 

Diagramatically, the synthesis and reversibility of the diazo sulfo- 
nates may be represented by the following equations,’ where R is 
an aromatic radical and X a metal. 


R SOX R . SO;X 
| a 
| mt Labile, Syn Configuration 
| Cl ee %, Orange to Red Coloration 
| cee 
R ah Red 
| | ee 
ING) IN AE le) Gerrans eee ene i —N 
gee | 
SO;X H |} oSO3% 
Stable, Anti Configuration Stable, Anti Reduced Form 
Yellow to Orange Coloration Colorless 


This property of the diazo sulfonates to undergo reversible oxidation 
and reduction, and the possibility of measuring their electrode poten- 
tials, instigated the syntheses of 10 of these compounds, five of 
which apparently are new. So far, measurements made of the 
electrode potentials are not conclusive enough to warrant publica- 
tion of this phase of the problem. 

The part played by the diazo sulfonates in advancing the science 


5 Ann. Chem. 190: 67. 1878. 

6 Although Strecker and Romer noted that when their compound reduced silver 
nitrate a yellow solution was. produced, and from this solution they isolated a yellow 
silver salt, they were at loss for an explanation as to what had taken place. 

7 Adopting Hantzsch’s theories. For a detailed discussion of the stereochemistry 
of the diazo sulfonates see J. C. Carn, The chemistry and technology of the diazo com- 
pounds, Edward Arnold, London, 1920; and LacumMan, The spirit of organic chemistry, 
p. 216, The Macmillan Co., New York, 1904. 


- oct. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES 435 


of chemistry has been an important one. HE. Fischer’s® researches on 
the use of the diazo sulfonates in hydrazine synthesis, first discovered 
by Strecker and Romer,’ has indeed proved to be a very fruitful 
piece of work. The use of the diazo sulfonates by Hantzsch, Bam- 
berger, Blomstrand, and others, as evidence for and against the con- 
stitution of diazo salts, has been noteworthy. Many substitution 
products of the simplest benzene diazo sulfonates were synthesized 
in the search for a stable molecule of the syn configuration. These 
researches have thrown some light on the stabilization of such a 
labile molecule. 

The outstanding characteristic of these compounds in the pure 
state, synthesized as here described, is their surprising stability. The 
authors have on hand some compounds that gave a check analysis 
after the lapse of over a year and a half. Apparently, all diazo sulfo- 
nates will keep perfectly when not exposed to moisture and excess 
light. All the sodium or potassium salts containing a single aromatic 
ring that have either been studied or described are yellow to orange 
and give like-colored solutions, the color and solubility depending 
upon ring structure. 

Hydrazine sulfonic acids'* can be prepared from the diazo sulfo- 
nates by reduction with zinc dust and acetic acid. By careful re- 
crystallization, avoiding oxidation,!! colorless crystalline compounds 
may be obtained. 

Like many organic syntheses, the production of the diazo sulfonates 
is comparatively simple when one has learned from experience the 
proper procedure. Experiments have shown that success lies in the 
proper control of the pH. As Fischer showed the Schmitt and Glutz 
method to be faulty, so do we find the Fischer and subsequent methods 
inadequate when applied to certain intermediates. One must always 
bear in mind that at no time during the condensation should sulfur 
dioxide be liberated. Should this happen there may be obtained a 
gummy mass or even a tar, which possibly is a mixture of the oxidized 
and reduced sulfonates, sulphazides, and what not. Only a slight 
excess of sulfite should be used in certain cases, otherwise disulfonates 
of type formula R-NSO;NaNHSO;Na may be obtained, where R is 
an aromatic radical, usually containing nitro or sulfonic acid groups. 

Since in practically all diazotizations here considered an excess of 


8 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 8: 592, 1005. 1875. 

® Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 4: 785. 1871. 

10}. Fiscuer. Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 8: 590. 1875. 
11H, REISENEGGER. Ann. Chem. 221: 315. 1883. 


436 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


acid is necessary and at the same time prevents the formation of diazo 
amido compounds, cne is confronted with the problem of obtaining a 
reaction between the diazonium solution and sulfite without liberating 
sulfur dioxide. Investigators in the past evaded this difficulty by 
either isolating the diazonium compound and using neutral or acid 
sulfite solution, or by adding the diazonium solution directly to 
sulfite made excessively alkaline. Later workers showed that if 
after diazotization the excess acid was neutralized near 0° and this 
solution added to sodium sulfite good results were obtained, but we 
found the method did not apply in all cases. The following procedure 
was finally devised and worked excellently where the others had 
failed. The diazotized solution was added, simultaneously with an 
amount of sodium hydroxide sufficient to neutralize the excess acid, 
to the cooled sodium sulfite solution, the rates of adding the alkali 
and diazonium solutions being such that the pH of the reaction was 
kept between empirical values and at no time was sulfur dioxide 
liberated or alkali concentration high enough to cause decomposition. 

In all cases, except one, a yield of crystals colored from a brownish 
orange to almost red, was found to be caused by too great an al- 
kalinity during the reaction. 

Whatever the procedure, experience has proved that for good 
yields high concentrations of all solutions are advisable, and even then 
salting out of the product is necessary for the very soluble compounds. 


EXPERIMENTAL DATA!” 
1-Methylbenzene-2-diazosodiumsulfonate 


I-G Hs C C.H.-2-N.SO3;Na 


To 10.7 grams of commercial ortho toluidine’ were added 30 cubic centi- 
meters of water and 25 grams of concentrated (36 per cent) hydrochloric 
acid. Upon cooling, crystals of the hydrochloride separated. Nevertheless 
at 0° the suspension was easily diazotized with 21 to 24 cubic centimeters of 
a 36 per cent solution of sodium nitrite. The end-point was determined 
with starch iodide paper. A beaker containing 52 cubic centimeters of a 
25 per cent sodium sulfite solution“ was surrounded by a salt-ice mixture 
and the diazotized solution run into the cold sulfite suspension until a spot 


12 The authors are indebted to C. G. Remsburg, Division of Chemistry, Hygienic . 
Laboratory, for the analyses of the following compounds, except the nitrogen ‘deter- 
minations which we determined by the combustion method. 

13 Although these quantities are for tenth molal proportions, ten times the amounts, 
or molal quantities, were found to work equally well. 

14 Sodium sulfite slowly changes to sulfate. It is therefore advisable to make pre- 
viously a rough analysis. We found it convenient to use an analyzed saturated solu- 
tion kept in a tightly stoppered bottle. 


oct. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES = ——<‘«s«éS $77 


plate determination showed the ee solution to have an acidity of about 
pH 5.6 (deep blue to brom cresol green or just orange red to brom phenol 
red). Cold 20 per cent sodium hydroxide was next dropped in until the 
alkalinity increased to about pH 8.2 (yellowish green to thymol blue); 
more diazotized solution was then added until pH 5.6 was noted, then more 
alkali until pH 8.2, and so on in alternation until all the diazotized solution 
was added. At the end the alkalinity of the liquid should be adjusted to 
about pH 10 (distinctly blue to thymol blue). A total of 6 to 8 cubic centi- 
meters of the 20 per cent alkali is required. With a little’ experience one can 
add simultaneously to the sulfite, the alkali and diazotized solution, and 
still keep within the required pH (5.6 to 8.2) zone. During the reaction 
beautiful light orange plates separated, which probably were a mixture of 
the syn compound and crystals of sodium sulfite. ‘The beaker was removed 
from the ice bath, 10 grams of sodium chloride added, and the whole heated 
slowly with stirring at 70°. The resulting deep orange red solution was 
filtered and cooled to 0° with occasional stirring. Clumps of short yellow 
needles crystallized. These were separated from the mother liquor and 
purified by three recrystallizations from hot water, in which they were very 
soluble. The compound was dried at reduced pressure over soda lime-cal- 
cium chloride-caustic soda mixture. All subsequent drying of crystals was 
made in this manner unless otherwise stated. 

Analysis: 

Calculated for C7H;N.,SO3Na: N 12.61, 8S 14.43 
Found: N 12. 78, S 14.22 

Colorless crystals of the hydrazine sulfonate were prepared by reduction 
of a hot saturated 25 per cent acetic acid solution of the diazo sulfonate 
with an excess of zinc dust, heating and stirring on a steam bath until the 
solution was practically colorless. After filtering and cooline the ye 
separated, but no further investigation was made. 


1-Methyl-4-sodiumsulfonatebenzene-2-diazosodiumsulfonate 
a -CH 3-4-8 O3N a: Gol 3-2-N oS O3N a 


To 18.7 grams (see footnote 13) of commercial 2-aminotoluene-4-sulfonic- 
acid was added 30 cubic centimeters of water and only 15 grams of con- 
centrated 36 per cent hydrochloric acid. ‘To the suspension, cooled to 0°, 
21 to 24 cubic centimeters of a 36 per cent solution of sodium nitrite was 
added. ‘The diazotized compound was partially insoluble and evidence of 
its precipitation was noted after one-half of the amount of nitrite had been 
added. The end-point was determined with starch iodide paper. There 
was slowly dropped into the yellow diazotized suspension 13 cubic centi- 
meters of a 40 per cent sodium hydroxide solution, forming the sodium 
salt of the sulfonic acid and neutralizing the excess acid. Although a 
suspension still persisted, 52 cubic centimeters of a 25 per cent sodium 
sulfite solution was added, producing a complete solution. At no time 
was the temperature of the reaction allowed to rise above 10°, and at the 
end the pH of the solution was about 9.0 (blue to thymol blue). Upon 
adding 25 grams of sodium chloride, heating to 70°, filtering and cooling, 
deep yellow, short needles crystallized. ‘these were separated and re- 
crystallized twice from hot water. Great care was exercised in recrystalliza- 
tion since this compound was extremely soluble in hot and cold water. 
The purified product was dried at 100° and when dry it absorbed moisture 
very quickly from the atmosphere. 


438 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


Analysis: 
Calculated for C7H¢NeS,.0gNae:N 8.64, §S 19.78 
Found: N 8. 69, S 19.42 
By means of acetic acid and zinc dust reduction, the colorless hydrazine 
sulfonate was prepared. 


1 ,38-Dimethylbenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 
1 ,3(CH3)2C.-H3-4-N2SO3;Na"® 


To 12.1 grams (see footnote 13) of commercial 4-aminometaxylene was 
added 30 cubic centimeters of water and 25 grams of concentrated 36 per 
cent hydrochloric acid. Exactly the same procedure and quantities of 
nitrite, sulfite, and alkali were used as in making 1-methylbenzene-2-diazo- 
sodiumsulfonate. In the present case, however, 25 grams of sodium chloride 
was added and subsequent heating to 70° caused a slight tarring which we 
were not able to prevent. 

The tar was easily removed in the filtration and gave no further trouble. 
On cooling the hot solution to 0° bundle-like short orange yellow needles 
ee They were filtered, recrystallized from hot water, and dried. 

Analysis: 

| Galeunied for CsH,N-SO3Na: WN 11.86, S 13.58 

Found: N 12.15, 8 13.29 

By means of acetic acid and zinc dust the compound was reduced to the 
colorless hydrazine sulfonate. Upon drying, the crystals became slightly 
pink. 


1-Hydroxy-2 , 6-dichlorobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 
1-H 0-2 ,6-Cl.: On AH o-4-N SONa 


Schmitt ee Glutz’ (1868) in a simple quantitative manner synthesized 
a dichlorophenoldiazosulfonate. They must, however, have used a 4,6- 
dichloro-2-aminophenol as their starting material, 

We diazotized commercial 2,6-dichloroparaaminophenolsulfate, in the 
usual manner. The diazotized compound precipitated!’ and the suspension 


_ 4% The synthesis and reduction of this compound showed it to be the most unstable 
of the series. 
- 1% Per. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 2: 52. 1869. 

17 Paraaminophenol, when diazotized and treated with a sodium hypochlorite solu- | 
tion made according to the method of Raschig (Fer. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 40: 4586. 
1907), substituted two chlorine atoms in the 2,6-position of the ring and gave the same 
type of precipitate. Indications are that the precipitate was an anhydride having 
the graphic formula. 


Evidence in favor of such a structure is as follows: 

. Certain diazotized compounds form similar anhydrides, as, for example, diazotized 
sulfanilic acid. A corresponding precipitate was obtained when 2,6-dibromopara- 
aminophenol was diazotized whereas its methyl ester was soluble. In the last case the 
substituted methyl group prevented formation of the anhydride. 


ocT. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES 439 


was added to a slight excess of the molecular requirement of alkaline sodium 
sulfite. The sulfite, in this case, was not completely in solution and con- 
tained enough 20 per cent sodium hydroxide to neutralize the excess acid 
used in diazotization. After standing for an hour, with occasional stirring, 
the whole was heated to 70°, filtered and cooled. The crystallized yellow 
plates were separated, recrystallized three times from hot water, and dried. 
The dry compound quickly absorbed moisture from the atmosphere. 
Analysis: | 
Calculated for CsH3;N2ClSO.Na: N 9.56, S$ 10.94, .Cl 24.20 
Found: N 9.55, $10.72, Cl 24.14 
Upon reduction with zine dust and acetic acid, the hydrazine sulfonate!® 
was prepared in colorless crystals. 


1-Hydroxry-2 ,6-dibromobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 
7-HO-2 ) 6-Bro-CsHe-4-N2SO3Na 


Boéhmer (1881)!* first made this compound by brominating paradiazo- 
phenol with bromine water. He separated the precipitated diazotized 
product, treated it with sodium hydrogen sulfite and heated. His diazo- 
sulfonate contained 2 molecules of water of crystallization. Hantzsch and 
Davidson (1896)*° prepared the potassium salt of this diazosulfonate, using 
potassium sulfite as a sulfonating agent. In repeating Bohmer’s work, we 
found that his method of bromination with bromine water required too 
large a volume.?! Therefore we first synthesized 2,6-dibromo-4-amino- 
phenol by the bromination, in an acetic acid solution, of paranitrophenol 


The precipitate was separated and dissolved in 36 per cent hydrochloric acid at 
20°. A residue was filtered and the filtrate reduced at 0° with a solution of stannous 
chloride in 36 per cent hydrochloric acid. The hydrazine hydrochloride, 1-HO-2, 
6-Cl2,CsH3-4-NHNH-2HCl, so obtained was filtered, dissolved in water, and twice 
precipitated from its solutions by adding one-half its volume of 36 per cent hydrochloric 
acid. After drying over caustic soda—soda lime mixture it gave only a poor analysis, 
and as it was found to be rather unstable even when isolated and dried, no further 
study was made. 

A preliminary report of this hydrazine was presented at the Washington, D. C., 
meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, Dec. 29, 1924. 

18 Although we were able to obtain the hydrazine hydrochloride by stannous chloride 
reduction, the Fischer hydrazine sulfonate method gave no results. 

19 Journ. Prakt. Chem. 24: 453, 465. 1881. 

20 Per. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 29: 1532. 1896. 

21 We used a modified procedure by which a tenth of a mol of diazotized para- 
aminophenol was easily brominated ina small volume. The brominating solution was 
prepared as follows: Promine, 35 grams, was dissolved in a saturated solution of 40 
grams of potassium bromide at 20°. The solution was then diluted to a volume of 400 
cubic centimeters. When the concentrated bromine solution was added, with stirring, 
to the diazotized phenol in the presence of much crushed ice, the anhydride of 2,6- 
dibromo-4-diazophenol was precipitated. The precipitate was separated, dissolved 
in 36 per cent hydrochloric acid, reduced to the hydrazine, ete. (see footnote 17). 
The hydrazine hydrochloride, 1-HO-2,6-BreCsH; -4-NHNH:2HCIl, so obtained, although 
apparently more stable than the dichloro compound, decomposes slowly in solution 
and likewise when dry. 

Analysis: 

Caleulated for CsH;ON-2Br.Cl: N 8.80 
Found: N 9.00 


440 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


(Mohlau and Uhlman 1895).22 The 2,6- dibromonitrophenol was reduced 
at 70° with tin and concentrated hydrochloric acid and the tin precipitated 
with hydrogen sulfide. The 2,6-dibromo-4-aminophenolhydrochloride when 
diazotized precipitated, and the suspension was added directly to a 10 per 
cent excess over the calculated quantity of alkaline sodium sulfite suspen- 
sion, heated, cooled and crystallized. The purified diazo sulfonate, when 
dried at reduced pressure, did not contain two molecules of water of erystalli- 
zation, as did Béhmer’s compound. 

Analysis: 

Calculated for CsH;N2BroSSO.Na: N 7.33, 88.39, Br 41.85 

| Found: N 7.86,. 87.71, Br 42:15 

Zinc dust and acetic acid reduced the compound to the colorless hydra- 
zine sulfonate.22 The isolated crystals were not analyzed. 


1-Methoxy-2 ,6-dibromobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 
iL (Ova! 30-2 ) 6 -B 9° C,H. o-4-N oS O3N. a 


Hantzsch and Pohl” (1902), after the method of Stadel?® (1882) and 
Korner®® (1874), synthesized 2 ,6-dibrom-4-anisidine by the use of methyl 
iodide in the mythelation of the silver salt of 2,6-dibromo-4-nitrophenol 
and reducing the methylated compound. The resulting dibromoanisidine 
was specially diazotized and from the isolated diazonium nitrate, both the 
syn and antidiazotates were made. They found the two isomeric diazotates 
to have approximately the same stability. Apparently they did not extend 
their researches into the corresponding diazosulfonates. Since our interest 
lay in the antidiazosulfonate we synthesized it by methylating 2 ,6-dibromo- 
4-nitrosodium-phenolate by means of dimethylsulfate in several different 
ways. The methylation of this compound is the subject of an interesting 
study which we hope to describe in a future article. 

The compound was recrystallized at 60° from ethyl alcohol containing 
10 per cent, by volume, of acetone and one per cent of sodium hydroxide. 
A portion of this product when further crystallized from ethyl alcohol 
gave a melting point of 122.7° against 122.6° (uncorrected) in the literature.” 
Another portion recrystallized from chloroform gave a melting point of 
123.7° (uncorrected). ‘The compound sublimed very slowly at 95° and the 
sublimed product likewise gave a melting point of 123.7° (uncorrected). 

Reduction to the 2,6-dibromoanisidine was accomplished by treating 
104 grams of the dibromonitroanisol with 275 cubic centimeters of 36 per 
cent hydrochloric acid and 80 grams of granulated tin. The tin was added ~ 
in small portions to the continuously stirred suspension. If the tempera- 
ture was kept between 75° to 85°, the reduction proceeded satisfactorily 


Bohmer (Journ. Prakt. Chem. 24: 472. 1881) tried to synthesize this hydrazine 
by reducing the isolated diazonium compound with zine dust and acetic acid. He 
proved its presence in a qualitative way but because of instability never isolated it. 

A preliminary report on this hydrazine was made at the Washington, D. C., meeting 
of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, Dec. 29, 1924. 

22 Ann. Chem. 289: 94. 1896. 

23 Attempts to prepare the hydrazine hydrochloride by the Fischer method were 
unsuccessful. 

41 er. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 35: 2969. 1902. 

26 Ann. Chem. 217: 70. 1883. 

26 Gazz. chimi ital. 4: 390. 1874. 


oct. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES 44] 


and completion was noted after 3 to 4 hours. At the end there was a brown 
solution having approximately a volume of 600 cubic centimeters at 102°. The 
tin double salt crystallized upon cooling, was separated, dissolved in hot water, 
and the tin was precipitated by leading hydrogen sulfide into the hot solution. 
The hydrochloride of the dibromoanisidine crystallized from the filtered, 
hot, tin-free solution. A portion was recrystallized from 20 per cent hydro- 
chloric acid, dried?’ and analyzed. 

Analysis: 

Calculated for C;7HsONBr.Cl: WN 4.41 
Found: N 4.42 

Unlike Hantzsch and Pohl we diazotized the dibromoanisidine in the usual 
manner except that a decided excess of hydrochloric acid was necessary.”8 
For 32 grams of 2,6-dibromo-4-anisidine hydrochloride there were required 
200 cubic centimeters of water and 25 grams of 36 per cent hydrochloric 
acid. ‘This thick suspension was diazotized at 0° to 5° by very slowly drop- 
ping in 24 to 26 cubic centimeters of a 36 per cent solution of sodium nitrite. 
The end-point in this case could not be determined since an excess of nitrite 
was needed to take care of small lumps of the undiazotized material which 
seem to react very slowly toward the end. A slight precipitate persisted 
which was possibly a trace of the anhydride of the unmethylated compound 
and a small amount of the diazoamino compound. This precipitate was 
removed by filtration. The excess acid, in the clear diazotized solution,?° 
was neutralized by slowly dropping in, with stirring, 60 to 65 cubic centimeters 
of 10 per cent sodium hydroxide solution. A yellow precipitate was formed. 
The pH of the suspension had to be adjusted between 5.6 and 5.8 (orange 
red to brom phenol red) for a successful sulfonation, then 52 cubic centi- 
meters of a 25 per cent solution of sodium sulfite was slowly run in. The 
contents of the beaker set almost solid, but after a slow heating to 90° a 
dark orange red solution containing a slight precipitate was produced. 
The solution was filtered and cooled, whereupon beautiful yellow plates 
were Obtained. ‘The crystals were separated, recrystallized from hot water 
and dried. 

Analysis: 

Calculated for C;H;NeBr,SO,Na: N 7.08, § 8.10, Br 40.37 
Found: N 7. 06, pi 700.) “br 4000 

By reduction with zine dust and acetic acid the corresponding colorless 

hydrazine sulfonate was prepared. ‘The isolated crystals were not analyzed. 


£7 If the compound was dried at 100° it partly sublimed. 

28 In several instances where the acid was not in sufficient excess a yellow insoluble 
precipitate was formed. Analysis of this precipitate, after recrystallizing from ben- 
zene, indicated the formation of the diazoamino compound having a melting point of 
187.7°, uncorrected. 

Analysis: 
Calculated for CisHi102.N3Bri: Br 55.81, N 7.34 
Found: Er 56.37, N 7.74 

29 When this solution was treated with stannous chloride dissolved in 36 per cent 
hydrochloric acid, colorless crystals of the hydrazine hydrochloride precipitated. 
These were filtered, and an attempt to purify them was unsuccessful because all solvents 
tried caused a decomposition with an evolution of nitrogen. The isolated crystals, 
when dried over caustic soda, were found to be stable. 


442 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 17 


1-Hydroxybenzene-4.-diazosodiumsulfonate 
1-HO- CH .-4-N.SO3;Na 


The potassium salt of this compound was first made and described by 
Schmitt and Glutz*® (1868) as containing water of crystallization. As 
previously mentioned they used potassium hydrogen sulfite as the sulfonat- 
ing agent. Fischer®! (1877) made the compound by the use of alkaline 
sulfite. Reisenegger®? (1883) showed that Schmitt and Glutz’s compound 
did not contain a molecule of water of crystallization. We made the sodium 
salt of this diazo sulfonate by adding a diazotized solution of paraaminophenol 
to a 10 per cent excess over the calculated quantity of alkaline sodium sulfite. 
After heating to 70°, filtering and cooling, there was produced a mass of 
canary yellow crystals. These were separated, recrystallized from hot 
water three times and dried. 

Analysis: 

Calculated for CsH;N.SO.Na: N 12.50, 8 14.31, Na 10.26 
Found: N 12. 43, S 14. 40, Na 10.43. 

one Reisenegger® (1883) we obtained the colorless hydrazine sulfonate 
upon reduction with zinc dust and acetic acid. ‘lhe addition of ethyl alcohol 
to a cold saturated solution of this compound caused it to crystallize. No 
further study was made. 


1-Ethoxybenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 
Orveh 50 . C ell -4-N oS O3N a 


Altschul* (1892) first synthesized this compound by treating diazotized 
paraaminophenetol with alkaline sodium sulfite. We likewise prepared it 
with alkaline sodium sulfite. 

Analysis: 

Calculated for CsH,»N2SOiNa: N 11.11, 8S 12.72 
Found: N 11.12, $12.51 

By a method similar to that of Altschul®* (1892), with zine dust and 
acetic acid, we easily reduced the compound to the colorless hydrazine 
sulfonate. ‘The isolated crystals were not analyzed. 


1-Dimethylaminobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 
1-(CH3)oN : C.Hs-4-N»SO3Na 


Stollé’* (1912) made this compound by isolating the diazonium chloride 
of diazotized paraaminodimethylaniline, dissolving it in water, and adding 
a solution of sodium bisulfite. Our method of preparation was perhaps 4 
little simpler inasmuch as the diazotized compound does not have to be 
isolated. To 17.5 grams of paraaminodimethylaniline hydrochloride dis- 
solved in 300 cubic centimeters of water, was added 15 grams of 36 per cent 
hydrochloric acid. ‘The solution was diazotized at O° by slowly adding 


30 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 2: 51. 1869. 

31 Ann. Chem. 190: 73. 1877. 

32 Ann. Chem. 221: 316. 1883: 

33 Ann. Chem. 221: 317. 1883. 

34 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 25: 1843. 1892. 

35 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 25: 1844. 1892. 

38 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 45: 2681, 2682. 1912. 


oct. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES 443 


about 42 cubic centimeters of an 18 per cent sodium nitrite solution. The 
end-point was determined by starch iodide paper. The diazotized solution 
was slowly run into an alkaline sodium sulfite mixture (52 cubic centi- 
meters of 25 per cent sodium sulfite plus 28 cubic centimeters of a 10 per 
cent solution of sodium hydroxide). ‘lhe pH of the resulting brown suspen- 
sion was about 9.0 (blue to thymol blue). Heating to 90°, filtering, and 
the addition of 70 grams of salt yielded brown needles. ‘These were recrys- 
tallized and purified by boiling with decolorizing carbon. ‘The pure, deep 
brownish orange crystals were dried and analyzed. 
Analysis: 
Calculated for CsHioN3SO3Na: N 16.73, 8 12.77 
Found: N 16.41, § 12.44 
We found this diazo sulfonate to be the least stable in solution. Even 
in the dark, a hundredth molecular solution decomposed with the separa- 
tion of a precipitate. 
According to Stollé*” (1912) zine dust and acetic acid reduce the diazo- 
sulfonate to paraaminodimethylaniline. 


1-Sodiumsulfonatebenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 
1-NaSO3-CeH.4-4-N2SO3;Na 


Strecker and Rémer*® (1871) tried to synthesize this diazosulfonate but 
did not isolate the compound. Fischer*’ (1877) isolated a light yellow com- 
pound, apparently a mixture of oxidized and reduced forms. Pechman??® 
(1895) prepared the potassium salt, precipitating it with alcohol. He pointed 
out that in the presence of’ an excess of sulfite the diazodisulfonate 


KSO;< _>N — N-SO0:K - 3H,0 
SO.K 


could be obtained. We confirmed this in a qualitative way. Hantzsch and 
Schmiedel* (1897) also prepared the potassium salt of the diazomonosul- 
fonate but found it to contain a molecule of water of crystallization. We 
synthesized the sodium salt of this diazosulfonate as follows. 

To 96 grams of sulfanil.c acid, 125 grams of 36 per cent hydrochloric acid 
and 200 cubic centimeters of water were added. ‘This was diazotized at 5° 
with about 115 cubic centimeters of a 36 per cent sodium nitrite solution. © 
The diazotized compound precipitated as the anhydride, colorless needles. 
Into the cooled suspension 70 cubic centimeters of 40 per cent sodium 
hydroxide solution was dropped until the pH was 9.8 (blue to thymol blue). 
The approach to the end-point was noted by a yellow appearance of the 
diazotized compound. Sodium sulfite, 260 cubic centimeters of a 25 per 
cent solution, was slowly added and a deep orange solution obtained. Then 


37 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 45: 2680. 1912. 
88 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 4: 784. 1871: 
39 Ann. Chem. 190: 76. 1877; Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 8: 593. 1875. 
40 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 28: 863. 1895. 
#1 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 30: 79. 1897. 


444 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


100 grams of salt was added and the solution heated to 90°, whereupon a 
partial separation of the diazo sulfonate took place. Cooling to 5° yielded 
yellow needles, which were separated and purified by precipitation from a 
water solution with an equal volume of methyl alcohol. The compound 
was dried at 100° and then analyzed. 
Analysis: 
Calculated for CsH:N2S,0sNaz: N 9.03, 5S 20.67 
Found: N 9. 02, S 20.02 
Like Pechman*? (1895), we obtained the colorless hydrazine sulfonate by 
reduction with zine dust and acetic acid. The isolated crystals were purified 
by methyl alcohol precipitation, and a final washing with absolute methyl 
alcohol. They were dried at 60°. 


Analysis: 
- Caleulated for CsHsN28,0;Nae: N 8.97 
Found: N 8.90 
| SUMMARY 


A brief review of the historical development and uses of the diazo 
sulfonates is given. 
In pursuit of certain definite diazo sulfonates 10 were prepared and 
apparently the following five are new: 
-1-Methylbenzene-2-diazosodiumsulfonate | 
1-Methyl-4-sodiumsulfonatebenzene-2-diazosodiumsulfonate 
1 ,3-Dimethylbenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 
1-Hydroxy-2 ,6-dichlorobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 
1-Methoxy-2 ,6-dibromobenzenediazosodiumsulfonate 
Three new hydrazines were prepared: 
1-Hydroxy-2 ,6-dichlorobenzene-4-hydrazinehydrochloride 
1-Hydroxy-2 ,6-dibromobenzene-4-hydrazinehydrochloride 
1-Methoxy-2 ,6-dibromobenzene-4-hydrazinehydrochloride 
A new diazoamino compound was prepared: 
1-Methoxy-2 , 6-dibromobenzene-4- diazoamino-4’-methoxy-3" ,5 
dibromobenzene : 


pes 


, MINERALOGY.—“Blythite” and the manganese garnet from Amelia, 
Virginia Earu V. SHannon, U. 8. National Museum. 


In analyzing spessartite or spessartite-bearing garnets during the 
past several years the writer has at times found difficulty in obtaining 
an exact agreement of the results of analyses with the general garnet 
formula, 3RO-R.O;:3Si02. When the manganese in many garnets 


42 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 28: 868. 1895. jit 
1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 
Received September 7, 1927. 


ocT. 19, 1927 | SHANNON: BLYTHITE 445 


high in content of this element is all calculated as manganous oxide 
the bivalent bases are a little too high and the trivalent oxides corre- 
spondingly low. This fact led some time ago to the supposition that 
manganese in garnets might, like iron, exist in two states of oxidation, 
bivalent and trivalent, and that there might be small amounts of an 
unnamed garnet molecule in which the trivalent alumina is replaced 
by manganic manganese. Although practically convinced that such 
a molecule exists, the writer has felt disinclined to put foward such a 
conclusion without experimental proof, and has held the matter in 
abeyance pending the working out of a suitable method for the deter- 
mination of manganic manganese in a silicate as insoluble as garnet. 
The problem was discussed orally with Drs. Clarence 8. Ross, Walde- 
mar I’. Schaller, Henry 8. Washington and Edgar T. Wherry. ‘The 
present writer was consequently much interested when his attention 
was directed by Drs. Ross and Schaller to the recent article on garnets 
by Fermor? in which he recognizes and names the following new 
molecules: 


3FeO- Fe.03:3Si02 = Skiagite 
3MnO:- Fe.03:38i02 = Calderite 
3MnO-Mn,03-38i02 = Blythite 


Fermor found “blythite,’”’ named for the analyst, T. R. Blyth, for- 
merly assistant curator of the Geological Survey of India, in only 
one of the Indian garnets analyzed. ‘The material is orange-red to 
orange, and is from the Gondite series, whose rocks are composed 
largely of manganese garnet and quartz. The oxidation and decom- 
position of the garnet result in the formation of workable manganese 
ores, and the garnet rock is thrown by the thousands of tons on the 
dumps of the manganese mines.? The locality of the analyzed material 
was Chargaon, Nagpur. ‘The analysis follows: 


MANGANESE GARNET FROM NAGPUR, INDIA 
(T. R. Blyth, analyst) 


Per cent 
SUNOS Go in SIPs SUR OR EN i ae ace A 2 I Hen nS = 1 I I 0 arene URE ery 34.71 
AMIN Ds Gedislsd old basis BAAS ACHE SERRE cE FOGLE CPOE APIA AR BORA MADAM Sorte ESA Cute ts 8.05 
Fe.O; cer eoereneereeee ene eeeee eer ee eee eee seoseeseereseseeeoereseereeeeeeeeesenoeeeeeeses ene 8 38 
REL CONN eee tree ee dete I Me Ore «cise ea waves woth ora ek 8 SOE Ob Rian Oe anes 38 83 
JY [Od Rae Ales Ri ad Ts A A Oe Oa a Pe aE SS oir br as 5.40 
SO Oe tein ia MOE a a Kieet, 9 Wiig Rea are MME OS oe DRM ER Roa eS 4.97 
BO eae OP re ee Ae eevee eae Seek ING 1S SOL ei, GLU SEA A ale pee ee oe eee trace 

100.34 


' 2]. Lurau Frermor, On the composition of some Indian garnets. Records Geol. 
Surv. India 49: pt. 2: 191-207. 1926. 


; ,°? L. Lerigo Fermor. Mem. Geol. Surv. India 37: 167-168. 1909. 


446 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


This analysis is interpreted by Fermor in terms of mineral mole- 
cules as follows: | 


Per cent 
Pyrope BMgO=):AlQasBSiOo. s sean geese Ast eh os clue bay domed chee ven eee Hokie lee 
Almandite areO:: AlsO3 BSiOb wi) seco said op ohic sto so «5 26 hile oe eee ee none 
Spessartite . SMO: (AlLO;-asiOot... 4) se ere en ee pire eh) A Oe 
Grossularite’ 8CaO"/ A150; :3Si0.)). eee oe LN: A eee none 
Andradite 3CaO = MecOs SSiOb users eee VALE. «oe a ee . 16.01 
Calderite 3MinO: ‘HesOx-3S1@ ah o.8 Skits eo ickdisus 2 eval the acer ee ee 12.81 
Blythite 8MnO- Mn O27: 8510, Sjeseois cities cGtcae ss se AO ae 34.72 

100.00 


Since the material is not near the pure end-member, it is called 
‘“magnesia-blythite’ by Fermor. The specific gravity is given as 
4.15 to 4.20. Unfortunately no indices of refraction are given for 
any of the garnets described in the paper. | 

While examining the analyses of garnet in the literature the writer 
noted that the manganese garnet from Amelia, Virginia, according to 
the analysis quoted by Dana‘ from Bradbury® (through Fontaine‘), 
showed very low alumina and high manganese content. It was 
accordingly decided to subject this garnet to a reexamination, to see 
what information it might yield concerning the possible existence and 
characteristics of such a molecule as ‘‘blythite.”’ 

Bradbury’s analysis indicates the Amelia garnet to contain only 
12.63 per cent of alumina whereas pure spessartite requires 20.6 per 
cent to conform with the formula. According to Fontaine’s descrip- 
tion the garnet was found on the walls of a large cavity discovered 
in pit No. 2 of the Rutherford mica mine. It is in angular masses 
loosely deposited in the interstices between broad, platy crystals of 
the clevelandite variety of albite, the garnet being younger than the 
albite and associated with still younger helvite. The material is 
stated to be pale pink to flesh-red or, in some fragments, brownish- 
purple. The fusibility is 3; hardness 6.5; specific gravity 4.20. The 
analysis and ratios, all manganese being stated as MnO, are as follows: 


4H. S. Dana, System of mineralogy, 6th ed., spessartite anal. 1, p. 442. 1895. 

5C. M. BrapBury. Chem. News 50: 120. 1884. 

6 W. M. Fontaine, Notes on the occurrence of certain minerals in Amelia County, Va. 
Am. Journ. Sci. 3d. ser. 25: 335. 1883. 


ocT. 19, 1927 SHANNON: BLYTHITE . 447 


ANALYSIS AND RATIOS OF SPESSARTITE 
(C. M. Bradbury, analyst) 


Per cent Ratios 
SOMA en he oe aera eee aes Bos ahs 36. S4 ec BOS og? pe, 2 OOSRE ony LS 
it 2 Se RE Re ty 1S Se ea ae 12 26orereae: Od LZ aati a (024: LTP We op | 
DE yy 6 o's ics SRA METI Ao t Cs 6 are ——.. ——: 
RMN ho ee ye. a: / leds pigeme ts 064). 
0 SP olka Sianeli SOR IES ORR te Sol rE A A a ABD ee eet tO2ZBU% den oho O ae i) pee 
OE A 6 I ee) Ue ge a ENE 012 
OE S's. orctede fats bia ei GEBE Geel aie WS es o's aoe WAG sae 027) 

99.70 


This analysis gives rather exactly the formula 6MnO- AI,03-5Si0z, 
which certainly cannot be the correct formula for a garnet. Either 
the mineral is new, the manganese is largely in the manganic form, or 
there is a serious error in the analytical work. ‘The material was 
apparently pure, however, and the analytical work appears super- 
ficially to be of high grade. If, in the interpretation of the analysis, 
enough manganese be calculated as Mn.O; to make the ratio for 
R.O; one-third the ratio for SiO», the following results are obtained: 


Per cent Ratios 
oe 36:30): o (ENB S es 60S. 22> £201 XSi sOue) 
RUM ied hiss wd meme » PD. Gaoe oe alee Hie ou 20 KCL OOS) 
Mn.0; (GE ot oe OTE 
7nd... ies tS cae 064 
DO. ie re BSD GLA ay 469 TPES MGT SCS, COR DC, 3) 
Sere or br ed) ERE So bye WA Cite eae. .012 
A ea ne eae RetOe a le .027] 

100.93 


The recalculated figures agree better with the garnet formula, 
and the mineral molecules, calculated from the bivalent bases, are: 


Name Formula Mol. weight Ratio Per cent 
“Blythite’ 3MnO-Mn203-3Si02...... HSI Saeco MOTT ck oe a ee 42.47 
Spessartite 3MnO- Al.03-3S8i0O2...... AOR SO) sie SOMOS csi ceeamcee: 39.17 
Almandite 3 FeO- Al203-3Si02...... AGS Ges. RODE OS oa ere 10.40 
Grossularite 3 CaO- Al.03-3SiO2...... GY Ip See ae POOR Ra eae BR 3 1.81 
Pyrope 3MgO- Al203-3Si102...... 404.06...... LOQG: saan dese. a eee 3. 64 
! 97.56 


Recalculating to 100 per cent and prorating the specific gravity, 
we have: 


Parent SON) eee 
ta lart Ge aia, eer annae eae eet. SEO EAL ASN 5S gaat 4353 y 
5) DOSS MAUS ae AG e155 alan Gk Re ae em AD VS icseye 1.6783 
Aiming. ae teas 6 Asean es blade. Sek Rip hire Jsth LO MIBSeS. 2: 4560 
Grouswlaiiencetene sok. yet Gauttysei, ch) be dia esewehs TeSGue ore .0657 
dN 9) 0) Shae ese SAC asa Lala 41 ER aA a eae nee . 1309 

100.00 2.3309 + .4353y 


448 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


The values for index of refraction and specific gravity of the end- 
members of the garnet group used in the foregoing and the following 
interpretations are those of Ford,’ who derived the following con- 
stants for the garnet molecules: 


Index (n) pas 
DPEESArbtites wees a. Geko eee SR OR Mesias ie ink A, ane ER EN I 1 S0GF ace 4.180 
VANTIN LEG eos are ill oes isch) ies Me Nace att et ah. ae ee 1 A830 cece 4.250 
Grogs ularitey cccccucdss ates oa aLe eee) Rent. ae 1 eon 3 530 
PV EODO Care oie sie ere GEESE Cle eR cen at nee De LW0Se one 3 510 
NWOT A CIEE ees ees I LEAS, od a te cE NT 1 L895 ee 3.750 


Assuming then that the analysis and the determination of the 
specific gravity for the Amelia garnet are correct, and that the inter- 
pretation given correctly represents the garnet, the specific gravity 
ef the pure “‘blythite’” may be calculated from the data given above 
by the following simple equation in which y is the specific gravity 
of “‘blythite:’ 

.4353y + 2.3309 = 4.2000 


.4353y = 1.8691 
y = 4.294 


The specific gravity thus derived for the pure “‘blythite,” 4.294, 
would make it the heaviest of the common garnets, 

If the index of refraction of an analyzed garnet is known, the index 
of an unknown end-member may be calculated by the same method 
as for the specific gravity. ‘The analysis and determinations of the 
physical constants, however, must be highly accurate for the values 
thus obtained to be of value. 

In order to check the published analysis of the Amelia mineral and 
to secure an analysis of material which could be examined optically, 
a lot from the U. S. National Museum collections was selected for 
study. This lot (Cat. No. 47,705), received in March, 1888, as a 
gift from’ Dr. George F. Kunz, consisted of five pieces of practically 
pure garnet having an aggregate weight of over half a pound (265 
crams), the largest piece measuring 6 by 4 by 2 centimeters and 
weighing about 95 grams, The masses are hackly and preserve 
bladed molds of some platy mineral, probably clevelandite, which has 
been leached out. The natural unbroken surfaces of the mineral 
are partly coated with an olive-green clayey substance and show 


™W. E. Forp, A study of the relations existing between the chemical, optical, and 
other physical properties of the members of the garnet group. Am. Journ. Sci. 4th ser. 
40: 33-49. 1915. 


oct. 19, 1927 SHANNON: BLYTHITE 449 


delicate parallel tracings intersecting at the angles of the faces of the 
rhombic dodecahedron. No other substances are attached to the 
garnet and it is ideally pure and free from inclusions. ‘The specimens . 
range in color from light to deep reddish amber, are transparent, and 
have a greasy to resinous luster and conchoidal fracture. In parts 
the material approaches gem quality. The specific gravity is 4.153, 
high enough to be noticeable in handling. When crushed, screened, 
and examined under the polarizing microscope, the sample was found 
very pure, homogeneous, colorless, and completely isotropic with an 
index of refraction of 1.794 + 0.002. The powder screened through 
200-mesh is almost white. 

Upon analysis the following results were obtained, all manganese 
being stated as MnO: 


NEW ANALYSIS OF GARNET FROM AMELIA, VA. 


(Earl V. Shannon, analyst) 


Per cent Ratios 

Me a inn ec ee Son AD err Ee AER: 19863 
TE oe RS trace... . — — 
POR ee es ok eee sncin ole oe ees i Wages si ea 170 ~ | 
ty SS ee oS i O20 ae Hi a eta gs 
i) Se ee SB oie a ne 4 908 Ft: 068 
RRA Bae te 20s Soe chara 8 aistel vies bars aye. A GGis oe 3 030 
te Bn Oe a ee ee nee Dade Ste 006 688. .-. .218 x 2 
SLE: odd rr an BROS. ce 535] 
EAC Ad sty A Re 58 

99.40 


The ratios are not in exact agreement with the garnet formula. By 
adding .022 to the ratio for R,O; and subtracting the equivalent .044 
from the ratio for R’’O the results agree exactly. The recalculated 
analysis and ratios are then: 


Per cent Ratios 
SSE meee i ee Seth as cto talus cw gue eiets St as capes ART! east MeL ts) Weare nn |e bait Cis 
MISO Ne ert eeu Ar. Uo be Gost. hal trace 
NLC 9 a RS? 0 Li saSe ee 170 
1B Ss OAS EN ae ic i ES Wes ne er LO Doak O0GR2. SS OS Ss SS Ger 
Mn;0; pisioierarel eel elrahaielviishcleleleielehetel ch clicierolenc cree cies 3.47 S.0.0. 0108 022 
PG ees es te cee cries cle oe EE ele ese! bs ciclo yg ACO Se ohare 068 
CHT Oe Sere MIR ier aero A a a rr L665 030 . 
ON are Set eC ee 
AP Tern Obs a err coat eote ele eit UR hei eg iets ee SAS SE ae: 491 
18 (ol OE RSME enrch sce NAN: arsenate Leen a 58 


450 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


Calculated as mineral molecules the revised analysis gives: 


Mol. wt. Ratio Per cent Proportional ee " 
ree gravity 
Spessartite............ 495.89...... VADs ales (Oe: 3 1: 26740. 2.9481 
SOR rytlante! Fee eva Dil Oo fie tee HODDER: 1m Beeler 1218... .1213a 
Almandite...... RMA 498 .65...... O23 2258 DL A eee 1 20Q9e sree .4875 
Ame radites iodine hss 508.79...... (0OGS 0%. SOO aetiens OD AS seceaee . 1144 
Grossulanite, ccc. ABT OST ace: SOO ee cea soy ea US14 kee .0639 
Pyurope, een 40406, 00 oo Ls baal ep. ‘0188; .0284 
. 199 99.68 1.5803 3.6673 


| | +.1213n +.12132 
For the specific gravity, x: | 


12182 + 3.667 = 4.153 
Si2téc— 72486 
zx = 4.01 


By the same method, for the index 7: 


.12138n + 1.5803 = 1.797 
aon ee lee, 
(3 Wel 


The values just found for specific gravity and index must, however, 
be considered as only of academic interest and not conclusive, owing 
to the small proportion of the “‘blythite’’ constituent. 

There is one other analysis of the Amelia garnet available, that 
published by Clarke.® ‘The mineral is described as brilliant brownish- 
red masses of considerable size, and although some of the material is 
dark, the specimen analyzed was very light in color. Like the 
material in the National Museum, it was received from Dr. George 
F. Kunz, and was doubtless from the same original lot. The analysis 
gave the following results and ratios: 


ANALYSIS OF GARNET FROM AMELIA, VA. 


(F. W. Clarke, analyst) 


Per cent oe eho ae 
re) RO ipa nus tet Ma AGT A lien ds Se Rea BOLO eon .§86.....° 586; 7 bas 
ATCO S. o eR ARES nN ae ea ante 200A ea 210 
FeO) es eee 7B a 2204295) sete 
OO. ipa ecat tegen oe Glee he laans taal avers BAe R RNAS LS Ne Al We 024 
)Y Ia © ene BCI Meena UAE A poke HIN UN 5 LAA OO. (Oates. 546?.. 587 .196 X 3 
CAO CE ee Oe ee a Oe ee OAM es 017 
VT eh oo Me a AC ae a Nera un eee none 
PINs ie ia tsa eaves! ale ae MEG eG RUN UE Ee ee EE ONE 

100.17 


’F. W. Cuarx, Spessartite from Amelia County, Va. U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 60: 
129. 1890. 


oct. 19, 1927 SHANNON: BLYTHITE 451 


In this case the trivalent bases—alumina and ferric iron—are 
decidedly higher in percentage than the garnet formula requires, 
although the silica and bivalent bases are in good agreement with each 
other. Ford used Clarke’s analysis but saw fit to disregard that of 
Bradbury. The index of refraction and specific gravity accepted by 
Ford were determined by him for a sample furnished by Dr. Kunz, 
not for Clarke’s analyzed material. The values are 1.8008 and 4.255 
respectively. 

It becomes pertinent now, after a perusal of the three foregoing 
analyses, to inquire into the reason for the difference between the 
results obtained by Bradbury and those of the two subsequent 
analyses. Either there are garnets from the same locality of dis- 
tinctly different composition or Bradbury’s analysis is in error in the 
amounts of alumina and manganese oxide determined. Opposed to 
the first possibility are the facts that all of the specimens are alike in 
external characters and associations, all came from the same place 
at about the same time, and probably all from the same pocket. 
Fontaine gives the specific gravity as 4.20; Ford measured 4.255; and 
the material analyzed by the writer, as the mean of three determina- 
tions, supplied the value 4.153, indicating only moderate variation in 
composition. Two other specimens with the same catalogue number 
as the writer’s analyzed sample and from the same lot show the garnet 
in the interstices of beautiful, platy albite masses. Although of 
various shades of color, this garnet is all identical in index of refrac- 
tion with the analyzed material. It appears then, highly improbable 
that there is more than one garnet in the various analyzed lots under 
consideration. 

The second possibility, analytical error, must be considered. Im- 
probable as it may at first appear, it is very easy indeed to confuse 
aluminum and manganese in analyzing spessartite. It is almost uni- 
versal practice to separate these constituents, when the manganese 
is high in amount, by making the first precipitation by the basic 
acetate method. This consists of adding an excess of an alkali 
acetate to the cold neutral solution of the chlorides. No precipi- 
tation occurs but the following reaction is believed to take place in the 
cold solution. 


AIC}, + 3NaC,H;0. = 3NaCl oe Al(ClEO?); 
(soluble) 


452 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


On boiling a very voluminous precipitate of basic aluminium un 
separates out thus: 


ae 
A\(C;H,0,); + 2HOH = Al— OH + 2HG.H,0, 


C.H 30, 
(insoluble) 


This second reaction is reversible, and if the solution is allowed to 
cool the precipitate of basic aluminium acetate redissolves. It is 
therefore necessary to exercise the utmost care to filter the precipitate 
at boiling and to recover alumina from the filtrate. Otherwise 
alumina which passed through the filter may be thrown out as an 
unsuspected impurity in the manganese sulphide of the succeeding 
separation and may be weighed with the manganese pyrophosphate. 
The analysis may still foot-up fairly well and the error may pass un- 
noticed. As a demonstration of this the writer ran an analysis of a 
massive spessartite from Connecticut which is to be described in 
another paper. With the exercise of every precaution to avoid loss 
of aluminum this analysis gave 20.48 per cent of Al,O3. Carelessly 
rerun, with the basic acetate precipitate allowed to cool and without 
special recovery of alumina from the filtrate, this same mineral gave 
only 9.64 per cent of Al,O;. It seems quite likely that this explana- 
tion accounts for Bradbury’s results, and one is inclined to wonder 
whether the single analysis of the ‘magnesia blythite’’ from India, 
with its high percentage of manganese, may not have a similar ex- 
planation. An error of one per cent in the determination of alumina 
in the analysis would cause an error of 5.41 per cent in the ‘“‘blythite’’ 
in the calculation of the mineral molecules—a large factor wherewith 
to multiply the error in the analysis. 

In conclusion, while the evidence available seems to favor the 
inference that a ‘“‘blythite’’ molecule enters into some mixed crystals 
of garnet to some extent, the mineral cannot be considered as firmly 
established until a satisfactory analytical procedure for the determina- 
tion of manganic manganese in garnet is developed and used on a 
garnet possessing a considerable content of the manganic molecule. 


oct. 19,1927 REESIDE: ACANTHOCERAS RHOTOMAGENSE FAUNA 453 


GEOLOGY.—An Acanthoceras rhotomagense fauna in the Cretaceous 
of the Western Interior.: JOHN B. ReEsipe, Jr., U. 8S. Geological 
Survey. 


Ammonites belonging to the genus Acanthoceras in the strict sense, 
that is, to the group of A. rhotomagense Defrance, have been reported 
from the Woodbine sand and basal Eagle Ford clay ef Texas.2. They 
have not been recorded, so far as the writer knows, in the literature 
dealing with the Cretaceous of the Western Interior province. <A note 
of two localities in this region where Acanthoceras aff. A. rhotomagense 
occurs is therefore of interest to students of Cretaceous stratigraphy 
and faunas. 

One locality, in south-central Colorado, found by G. K. Gilbert, 
many years ago lies 15 miles west of the head of Rock Canyon, in 
Pueblo County southwest of Pueblo, and the horizon of the fossils is 
in the Graneros shale about 60 feet above the Dakota sandstone. Most 
of the species associated with the Acanthoceras are undescribed pelecy- 
pods and gastropods, though unnamed species of Turrilites and Mam- 
mites (Pseudaspidoceras), and an engonoceratid are also represented by 
fragmentary or somewhat distorted specimens. ‘The next underlying 
marine fauna is in the Purgatoire formation, beneath the Dakota sand- 
stone, and is composed of Comanchean species. The next overlying 
fauna is in the Greenhorn limestone, about 150 feet higher in the 
section, though the intervening part of the Graneros shale has yielded 
Exogyra suborbiculata Lamarck, a small Ostrea, and Inoceramus labia- 
tus Schlotheim. The Greenhorn limestone is 25 feet thick and con- 
tains Inoceramus labiatus, a new species of Thomasites, Helicoceras 
corrugatum Stanton, Baculites gracilis Shumard, ‘‘Acanthoceras’’ colora- 
doense Henderson, and Metoicoceras whiter Hyatt. Two hundred feet 
higher in the section, at the top of the Carlile shale, a fauna with 

1 Published by permission of the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. Received Oct. 
1, 1927. 

— RupouF Lasswitz, Die Kreide-ammoniten von Texas (Collectio F. Roemer). Geol. 
Pal. Abh. 10: 237. 1904. 

GAYLE Scort, Hiudes stratigraphiques et paléontologiques sur les terrains crétacés du 

Texas p. 136. Grenoble, 1926. 


GAYLE Scott, The Woodbine sand of Texas interpreted as a regressive phenomenon. 
Bull. Am. Ass. Petr. Geol. 10: 617. 1926. 


454 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 17 


Prionocyclus wyomingense Meek, Ostrea lugubris Conrad, and Sca- 
phites warrent Meek and Hayden occurs. An expected intermediate 
fauna with Prionotropis woolgart Mantell (of Meek) has not been 
recognized. 

The second locality, in middle western Colorado, about 7 miles west 
of Delta in Delta County, was first found by G. H. Stone and later 
rediscovered by H. J. Weeks. Here the horizons are in the upper 
sandstone and upper shale of the Dakota (?) sandstone, the lowest 
marine beds in the local Cretaceous section. The specimens of 
Acanthoceras are very rare and are accompanied only by an Inocera- 
mus of the group of I. crippsi close to I. beluuensis Reeside. Some 75 
feet higher in the section, in the Mancos shale, Gryphaea newberryi 
Stanton and Inoceramus labiatus occur, and 200 to 300 feet higher 
still, the Prionocyclus fauna. The basal part of the Mancos shale in 
adjacent areas in Colorado and eastern Utah has yielded Exogyra 
suborbiculata, EL. columbella Meek, Metoicoceras whitei, and a species 
of Mammites (Pseudasprdoceras?). An interesting species at this 
horizon a little farther west is Hxogyra olisuponensis Sharpe. The 
Prionotropis woolgart fauna has not been recognized in this second area. 

The similarity in the sequence of faunas in the two areas makes it 
likely that the age of the beds containing the Acanthoceras is nearly 
the same and that the deposition of sandstone at the western locality 
began sometime after it had ceased at the eastern locality, the inter- 
vening time being represented by the 60 feet of lower Graneros shale 
between the Acanthoceras horizon and the Dakota sandstone. 

The genus Acanthoceras, in the strict sense, has been universally 
considered to characterize the Cenomanian part of the Upper Cre- - 
taceous, and such species as Melowcoceras whiter the lower ‘Turonian. 
The occurrence of Acanthoceras in the Western Interior region permits 
a more definite age assignment of the containing beds and a more 
definite correlation with the Gulf region and with other areas outside 
the United States. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


393D MEETING 


The 393d regular meeting was held May 5, 1927, in Room 43 of the Na- 
tional Museum. President J. A. Hysuop presided. ‘There were present 21 
members and 13 visitors. 


aor. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 455 


On request Dr. Cart JorDAN of the Tring Museum, a specialist in Lepidop- 
tera, but who now has in preparation a monograph on fleas, discussed some. 
of his recent work, contrasting it with former activities and dwelling upon 
some of the marked differences in the two lines of research. He reported 
that. his monograph is well under way and he now has under consideration 
some seven hundred known species of fleas. He also touched on recent 
general studies by various investigators in Europe and America on the inter- 
relationships of insects with other animal forms. 

Dr. Howarp, in commenting on Dr. Jordan’s address, emphasized the 
importance of his work, and referred to their associations together i In company 
with Dr. Schauss at the Oxford Congress, and expressed hope that Dr. Jordan 
would be here again in 1928. 

Upon request another visitor, I. C. Bisnorp, of the Bureau of Entomology 
located at Dallas, Texas, expressed his pleasure at being able to attend a 
meeting of our society and at the prospect of being able soon to attend these 
more regularly. 

Program: Dr. W. EK. Dove and Dr. G. F. Wuttre: The creeping eruption. 
(Illustrated.) It was pointed out that creeping eruption as defined in most 
text books is 2 human skin disease due to the migration of fly larvae in the 
skin. The recovered larvae in some instances have been identified as those 
of Gastrophilus, in others as Hypoderma. In still other cases no larva was 
found. ‘There is, therefore, not a single creeping disease but a number of 
them. One of these creeping diseases occurring in the South Atlantic and 
Gulf States has been shown to be due not to a fly larva but to the larva of a 
nematode. It has been demonstrated further that the nematode in this 
instance is Ancylostoma braziliense, one of the dog and cat hookworms. Out 
of twenty-seven street dogs examined in Jacksonville, Florida, twenty-six 
were found infected with this worm. The number of worms harbored by 
each dog varied from near fifty to more than five hundred. The potential 
infestation of an area is further indicated by the fact that each female worm 
may lay up to five thousand eggs per day. 

Discussed by Ewine, GAHAN, BAKER, BisHorprp, Howarp, and Hystop. 

Dr. P. W. Mason: A discussion on the specialization of aphids from general 
feeders to monoxenous feeders. Evidence shows that aphids originated in 
north temperate regions. These early, primitive forms were general feeders 
on any existing vegetation. From these heteroxenous feeders, they gradually 
evolved to dioxenous feeders, which condition is normal at the present time. 
The next step will probably be to that of monoxenous feeders. Several 
examples were given of species which have already learned to live on one 
host, some of them having so lived since Tertiary times, when the alternate 
host was destroyed by glaciation. When migration finally ceases, each 
species which is now dioxenous will probably evolve into two species, one on 
the present primary and one on the present secondary host, if each host con- 
tinues to exist. 

Discussed by Hystop and BAKER. 

Dr. ALpRIcH reported the recent accession by the National Museum of a 
collection of Lepidoptera made by Henry F. Schoenborn, containing consid- 
erable European material noteworthy for range of distribution and for being 
especially well mounted. He also directed attention to and commented on a 
recently issued paper by C. H. T. Townsend, entitled ‘‘Synopse dos generos 
muscoideos da regido tropical de America, com generos e especies novas.”’ 
Dr. Aldrich further stated that he had for distribution on request separates 
of his recent Presidential address on “Limitations of taxonomy.” 


456 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 


Dr. Howarp stated that a letter just received from R. B. Coad at Tallulah, 
La., reported that though the laboratory force was safe, the flood waters 
were standing ten feet in depth all over the city of Tallulah, that airplanes 
recently used in boll weevil work were being used in flood rescue work. Some 
very interesting airplane photographs of the flooded areas were sent, showing 
refugees on elevations greatly resembling work of prehistoric mound builders. 
This suggested possibility that some of these mounds originally might have 
been constructed for use in periods of flood. 

Dr. Baker reported the recent finding in Texas of the Mexican fruit fly 

or orange maggot, Anastrepha ludens, formerly Trypeta ludens. 
- H.S. Barser showed a map and discussed an apparently unrecorded trip 
made by Thomas Say into old Mexico. He quoted Dr. Schwarz’s remark— 
“So! Say went to Mexico! I did not know that before’—made more than 
twenty years ago while discussing Thomas Say’s remarks on the nest and 
honey of the types of his Polistes meilifica from near Jalapa, and on the be- 
havior of the Indians from whom Say had obtained them. A number of other 
remarks by Say, occurring in various papers on shells, insects, and aboriginal 
artifacts were cited, indicating that about 1828 Thomas Say had collected 
at Vera Cruz, Jalapa, Mexico City, Tacuba and Chaleo. Mr. Barber be- 
lieves that the type localities of most of the species described by Say with the 
simple statement “‘Inhabits Mexico” are either in the vicinity of the City 
of Mexico, or along the old road from Vera Cruz to the capital. He showed 
a trail map of the routes and dates of Say’s travels in so far as he had been 
able to learn them, which is expected to appear with more detailed notes in 
Entomological News. 

Dr. H. Morrison directed attention to a meeting next week of the Indiana 
Academy of Sciences to be held at New Harmony, Indiana, the former home 
of Thomas Say, at which meeting this fact and Say’s relation to American 
entomology would be emphasized. 

J.S. Wane, Recording Secretary. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


LAURENCE La Forces has resigned as geologist in the U. S. Geological 
Survey. 

S. F. ScHAIRER, graduate student in the department of chemistry at Yale 
University, has joined the staff of the Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie 
Institution of Washington. | 

CHARLES E. Resser and R. 8. Bassuter have returned from a field-study 
undertaken for the purpose of securing data necessary to complete a manu- 
script on the stratigraphy of the Cambrian of the Rocky Mountain region, 
left unfinished by the late Dr. C. D. Walcott.. Their expedition traveled 
by motor-truck from the Wasatch Mountains in Utah to Alberta and British 
Columbia, and visited areas of Cambrian rocks at many places along the 
route. 

Irwin R. Pout, Division of Paleontology, U. S. National Museum, spent 
six weeks in July and August, in co6peration with the Milwaukee Public 
Museum, in a study of the lower Devonian of the lower Peninsula of Michigan 
and adjacent areas. 

W. F. Fosoac and Harry BERMAN have completed a trip to mining dis- 
tricts in northern Mexico, conducted under the auspices of the U.S. National 
Museum and the Mineralogical Museum of Harvard University, for the pur- 
pose of collecting exhibition specimens of the minerals of the region. 


i UNCEMENTS OF 1 THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND 


19. The Society of Poti: 
The Medical Society. . 
The Medical Society. — 3 | 
_ The Srna phroal 2 bd Soe a5 he eae 


AE ‘he: dedtiaas of the affiliated societies will appear on this page 
e editors by the eleventh and the twenty-fifth of each month, - 


r t- £ 5 we bak 
. : M ; 


eee 


CONTENTS 


= 
ORIGINAL Papers 

Page 
Chemistry.—Diazo sulfonates. W.L. Haut and H. D. Grpps......... ao ats aia eee 

Mineralogy.—‘‘Blythite” and the opti garnet from Amelia, Virginia. Earn 
Vi SHANNON. 02 Sos rena odeoip ts in Geo cae pee ue aes ade 0 oe .-. 444 

Geology.—An Acanthoceras rhotomagense fauna in the Cretaceous of the Western 
Interior. JOHN B. REESIDE, PR ea eceewaea @eerereevoveone Su eee eeseeseetot® 453 

PROCEEDINGS 

Entomological Society............-.cecceeeeoes Miccelesccsesticcseeeete. aan 
Screntivic Notes AND NEWS........-.+000+. biselbiceds athe ccs ar 


OFFICERS OF THE: ACADEMY 


President: ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. 
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckerMAN,. Bureau of Standards. 
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lamprrt, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 
Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 


cS 
; 


PuVOn. 17 - Novemper 4, 1927 No. 18 


en ite Aho Hiliin 
sn LEGh i as ree 2 t Sy 
2 ee” 
- 7 Ay | 
eum) i aN 4) 
f/ &: 4 Ad 7 ad 
r , be f i = 
pace, 
J O U RN AL v i vA 
N 1S 
- 
ase 


OF THE 


OF SCIENCES 


Mae Oh BOARD OF EDITORS 

phist D its "- . ‘ 

oS Witrram J. Peters Aaenes CHasE Joun B, Ressipe, Jr. 
yey ih DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY : NATIONAL MUSBUM 


ASSOCIATE EDITORS 


L. H. Apams S. A. Ronwzr ; 
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
divi & BE. A. GOLDMAN G. W. Stosz 
i BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 
x R. F. Grieas J. R. Swanton 
nl BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIBTY 
| 
Mf Roger C. WELLS 
+9 CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


1 PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 

ay i EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 

a) ieee BY THE 

i | WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 

aba Mr. Royat anp Guitrorp Avss, 

Bist Battmmorr, MarybanD 

ye : : 

it | Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
iy et of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
HPs: « in Section 1103, dy of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918, 

ra 


J ean of the Washington Academy of Sciences _ 


This JourNnaL, the official organ of the Weahiogton eeaens at Succes k ims 
present a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this end it publish 
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2 
short notes of current scientific literature published in or eianeres, from Washingto i 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4) _ 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. ky JouRNaLisissued 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, Vedi & uringthesummer 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt ree 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or =» 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the shes ci in the ON Sa | 
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. #5, 


¢ as it i Bes 
ae 


Manusertpis may be sent to any ihe abet of the Board of Editors; they seid be a 
clearly'typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References  _— 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate  . 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered — PEON 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Nate gM 
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures eae 
or diagrams of simple character. A fa 
Prooj.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors _ At 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors” e 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. 
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule - prices, fe 


Copies £°pp $ pp 12 pp. 16 pp Cover 
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3 .25 $2.00 
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50 
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3:00 
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50 * 
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 64.00 


An additional charges of 25 cents will be made‘for each split page. 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi- | | 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints 2 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. | 


The rate of Subscription per volumeis...... Fidinin diptaia vie She kimvatate’ @ ell alae ikea . $6.00° . 
Semi-monthly maymbers. .. 5). oes cele Cob ce wea e vied cig'e Gee Mine eels w/e eimieiiea 5 lt ouramenn 
Montaly, sumberaiy oy oo sac cn we ces, «wilson an Gai Veale vamnts rah ae ate pein 50 


Remitiances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,”’ and 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, D.C, 

European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, london 

Exchanges.—The Journnat does not exchange with other ‘publications. 

Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made . 
within thirty days after date of the following issue. | 


*Volume I, how ever, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates 
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy, 


JOURNAL 


OF THE , 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vou. 17 NovEMBER 4, 1927 No, 18 


PHYSICS.—A magneto-electron theory of gravitation.! CHESTER SNOW. 
(Communicated by L. J. Briaas.) 


This unified theory of gravitation and electricity originated in the 
discovery that in a world governed by the Lorentz theory (which 
neglects gravitation) no one could ever detect the ‘‘change’’ made by 
replacing every electric density p by p cos a and adding a magnetic 
density p sin a, where a is an arbitrary constant. This gave rise to 
the conception of charge-magnitude with electric and magnetic charge 
as its two rectangular components, so to speak, the mode of resolu- 
tion being unessential in the description of nature just as in the case 
of plane vector. ‘The reflection that the Lorentz theory is not com- 
plete because it fails to include gravitation led to the following 
modification of this conception. The electric and magnetic charges 
of an electron being «. < 0 and d, > 0 are of the form 


€. = Mm, Cos (r — a) = — Mm COS a 
: (1) 
A = 7m, Sin (tr — a) = =m, sin , | 
For a proton 
€2 = My COS a 
(2) 


Az = Mm. SIN a] 


These “charges” refer to their field-producing character in the Max- 
well-Lorentz field equations. The necessary and sufficient condi- 


1 Publication approved by the Director of the Bureau of Standards, Department 
of Commerce. This paper is a condensed statement of work presented before the 
Philosophical Society of Washington, October 15, 1927, and is to be published in more 
complete form as a Scientific Paper of the Bureau of Standards. Received Sept. 
29, 1927. 


457 


458 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 18 


tions for the compatibility of these field equations enable us to draw 
three conclusions as to the constants m, and mz. 
1. They must be invariants. 
2. They must be strictly conserved (even when we abandon the 
preliminary assumption that space-time is flat). 
3. A physical velocity may be consistently assigned to them, 
which probably implies (1) and (2). 

This is taken as a physical definition of ‘thing’ or substance, 
without implying any metaphysical right to the exclusive “occupancy 
of space.” It is important (for this theory) to emphasize the fact 
that the so-called electromagnetic energy, whose density is supposed 
to be (#2? + H?)/8a and rate of flow |#,H]/4z, fails to qualify as 
substance under each of these three specifications. ‘This concept 
arises when (and only when) we resort to physical averages of the 
field and treat matter in bulk. 

Dynamics presents us with one and only one concept thus qualify- 
ing as substance, namely (invariant), mass. We accordingly identify 
“electricity” and ‘magnetism’ with mass. They are measures of 
the strength or quantity of the substance in its field-producing 
character just as mass measures the same substance in its inertial 
aspect. If m, and m, are the masses of electrons and protons in 
grams, the equations (1) and (2) give their “charges” also in grams. 
The factor 8 which reduces grams to c¢.g.s. electrostatic units of charge 
is found in terms of the mass m, grams of an electron, its numerical 
electric charge «, expressed in c.g.s.e.s.u., and the Eonar of gravita- 
tion y, by the relation 


ese yt = 5.4 x 10" ey) 
Pe eae 
This follows from the fact that a is defined by 


eylas: Lore so that y = 6? sin? a (4) 
e€ 


If p: denotes the mass density of electrons and wu; their mean velocity, 
with p. and wu, for protons, then the complete vector field Ho of 
the Maxwell-Lorentz field equations (macroscopic) may be resolved 
into two fields Hy) = H + e and H, = H, + h, where EL,H depend 
only upon the electrical aspect of mass and satisfy 


NOV. 4, 1927 SNOW: MAGNETO-ELECTRON THEORY OF GRAVITATION 459 


E U U v 
Cun bt ==) A, i oe COS a =47 6 — 
C C C 


div H = 47 (po — p;}) coSa@=476 


| (3) 
curl H+ = =) 
¢ 
Give — © | 


The field e,h depends only upon the magnetic aspect of mass and 
satisfies 


P=) ag | 
Cc 
Gaye. — 20) | 
(6) 
cule +2 = — 4a (mn +") sina=—4eu 
C C C C | 
divh =47(p+ p)sSnaea=4ru | 


The mean density of electricity « and the mean electrical velocity v 
are abbreviations defined by equation (5). The mean density of 
magnetism » > O and the mean magnetic velocity wu are defined by 
(6), the latter being also the mean mass velocity, since u differs from 
the mean mass density p only in the fact that it is p sin a. In these 
equations the masses and hence charges are still being measured in 
grams. ‘The theory is first presented on the assumption that space- 
time is flat. In a later formulation we abandon this assumption and 
view the first statement as an approximation. 

It is the writer’s belief that there are no phenomena, either elec- 
trical or gravitational, which give evidence of finite volume of elec- 
trons and protons. We may treat them as point-masses. The field 
vectors are regarded as conveniences for expressing the mutual in- 
fluence of these masses wpon each other and no self-destructive field is 
introduced. ‘The fields mean nothing by themselves; it is only the 
equations of mutual influence which have a meaning. ‘These equa- 
tions show that if we could pin a proton down and neglect the space- 
time curvature it produces, a point-electron properly aimed would 
approach it with finite velocity, attaining the velocity of light at the 
moment it passed through the first point called a proton. On the 


460 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . VOL. 17, No. 18 


views here presented, the two points might come to rest superposed 
in space-time so that if their masses were equal their electrical aspects 
would go into eclipse. Their inertial and magnetic (gravitational) 
aspects would still be distinct. The criticism that the field vectors 
E or h become meaningless as an electron is approached is therefore 
a criticism of the language used, although the description of mutual 
influence remains definite and finite. The volume integral of H? or 
h2 over a volume including an electron has no mathematical or physical 
meaning. The corresponding physical averages E, etc., of these 
vectors, which we use for certain ideal descriptions of matter, neglect- 
ing much of its internal motion, are finite and continuous by defini- 
tion and lead to the concept of energy density which is limited to 
macroscopic applications. 

In the microscopic treatment, the second members of the field 
equations (5) and (6) are all zero, and they are to be supplemented 
with a statement of the nature of the singularities in the usual manner 
as fluxes of H and h. ‘Those conditions at infinity are also assumed 
which will exclude all solutions not of the form of retarded functions. 

The expression for the force may be inferred from the suggestion 
made by equations (1) and (2) which is that electric and magnetic 
charges, although both measured in grams, are as distinct and inde- 
pendent aspects of mass as two perpendicular directions in a plane. 
In fact, while we are neglecting the curvature of space-time (so that 
with imaginary time its geometry is formally Euclidean), we may 
view it as part of a six-dimensional continuum formally Euclidean, 
the two new directions being called the electric and magnetic hyper- 
directions. ‘They are perpendicular to each other and to space-time. — 
The vector masses m, and m, are hypervelocities reckoned in units 
that are meaningless to us. All electrons and protons have the 
constant and unalterable components of hypervelocity as indicated 
in equations (1) and (2). When we ignore all the magnetic aspects of 
mass we are looking at a five-dimensional section which is perpen- 
dicular to the magnetic axis. With our electric component of mass 
we respond to the influences of other masses which are propagated 
to us with velocity c (in space-time) and which are produced solely 
by the electrical components of these masses, and represented by 
E,H. Our response in space-time is represented by the classical 


electromagnetic force 6c \B + 2 nt. 


In a five-dimensional section perpendicular to the electric axis all 
electrical aspects are ignored because they are invisible or end-on. 


Nov. 4, 1927 SNOW: MAGNETO-ELECTRON THEORY OF GRAVITATION 461 


The field e,h arises solely from the magnetic aspect of masses, and 
the only component of our masses which respond to this is the mag- 
netic component, the space-time effect being described by the force 


aus — cc e|t. which is our way of describing the universal attrac- 
c 


tion of gravitation. 
The mutual influences of bodies in space-time is described by the 
force density 


f= 66 lag AF i= al =e ih — - || (7) 
( C CoM 
although in the hyperplane they appear to be without mutual in- 
fluence. These two hyperdirections both stand in cylindrical rela- 
tion to space-time and are so absolute as to be only pictorial for us 
whose experience is four-dimensional. 
The meaning of equation (7) is that a particle with electric charge 
@ grams and mass M grams moves in the complete field according 
to the equation 


d U 
dt \/ An i 
c 

If electric charge now be measured in c.g.s. electrostatic units in the 
field equations (5) and in the force expression (7) and (8), the term 
6? disappears and we have precisely the present-day theory of elec- 
tricity, combined with a theory of gravitation. If the magnetic 
density » be replaced by mass density p in the field equations (6), 
this replaces (by reason of equation (3)) the factor 62u by yp in (7) 
and 6? sin a by y in (8). Gravitation is thus described in terms of 
two vectors, e,h, to which mass is related like magnetism, together 


with the force density — yp {i — ie et. 
G 


On the assumption that space-time is flat, the motion of a planet 
M with velocity u about a stationary sun M’ is given by the vector 
equation 


M qe +(%,H]!—earin — E e|| sina (8) 
C C 


pease) ca MEME 


dt vi - (¥) 7? 


where 7; is a unit vector from M to M’. This differs from the New- 


T1 (9) 


462 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 18 


tonian law only in that Newton’s equations have on the left side 
M oe the difference being about one part in a hundred million in 
se case of the earth’s orbit. The perturbation of one planet on 
another differs from Newton’s by the same order of magnitude. ‘This 
views the sun’s influence in rendering the geometry of space-time non- 
Galilean as smaller than hitherto imagined. 

As we do not believe that space-time is flat, the foregoing presenta- 
tion of the theory must be regarded as an approximation. Its com- 
plete statement is next made in tensor form, using for this purpose the 


unit of time : but retaining the gram for mass and the e.s.u. for 


charge. 
The electromagnetic field is defined as usual in terms of the anti- 
symmetric tensor f’” derivable from an electrical four-potential 4,, 


Vedat Om _ I 
[ee Alig ff ea a Ph a 10 
ee ads a 
where oo is the proper density of electricity. The gravitational 
field is defined by a similar antisymmetric tensor f#” 
aa 


“Ou, Oy, 
BAN ey Al TA cen OEE Ms eis Se a cs Sa 11 
wm), i Ae ds Iw On” On" cay 


where po is the proper density of mass. In the microscopic treatment 
o) and po in equations (10) and (11) are zero at all ordinary points, 
but these equations serve to indicate how the electrical and magnetic 
(gravitational) characters of the singularities determine the two 
fields. The motion of a particle with mass M grams and charge 
Q e.s.u. in these fields is determined by 


da" ane eda, 1 alae i 
cs a ag ; 12 
ane ae oe ds ds M at ys ds Oe 


which shows that even when uncharged or in a purely gravitational 
field f’, it departs widely from a geodetic world-line. The two types 
of field equations (10) and (11) involve the geometry throughy-— g. 
The dependence of the metric tensor g,, upon both the electrical 
and magnetic (gravitational) character of the singularities is assumed 
to be given by the radical modification of Einstein’s equation 


G2 a 8 7 CE ar Rey a) (13) 
C 


Nov. 4, 1927 | SNOW: MAGNETO-ELECTRON THEORY OF GRAVITATION 463 
where 


Vp ps Pe i du FS Fp (14) 


Ss 1 
eyes Cu = ae Sox Tf Guo SF” fas, (15) 


It is shown that from the two apparent conflicts with Einstein’s 
original theory, which we have in equations (12) and (13), there 
arises a perfect observational harmony, the rotation of perihelion of 
the planets and the bending of the ordinary light ray [ZH ,H]/4x 
being practically the same. 

A symmetrical static solution of (10), (11) and (18) is found for 
the case where 2!, x?, x3, x4 = 1, 6, ¢, t to be given by 


ds? = — pdr? — rede — r? sin? 6d ¢? + pdé? 
foe Ore ht = — Ono? fi, = Mort fi = Mp 


pave a[f 28] [82)- Cay er 


This suggests the amount of light-deflection to be expected in an 
electrostatic field. The gravitational light ray represented by the 
vector product |h,e]/42 would be deflected the same as the ordinary 
ray |H,H|/4x but the former is small beyond detection. The average 
equation for ideal continuous matter is 

1 


peat GS my ue ay Shae EL te Ho, ay nemy ea) 
2 C2 C2 


The fact that space-time is not flat, as indicated by the deflection 
of the light ray [H,H]/4x in the sun’s gravitational field h shows 
that the six-dimensional picture which the form of this theory suggests 
can not be formally Euclidean. It is possible that a six-dimensional 


geometry might be developed which would lead to equation (13) 
starting from a line element of the form 


(dr)? = g,, dx" dx” + (4, dx" + dx)? — (y, dx* + dx®)? (19) 


where the summations in » and » are from 1 to 4 and the coefficients 
¢, and y, are the electrical and gravitational four-potentials, so that 


464 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 


6, dx*, y, dx“, and g,, dx" dz” are all invariant to transformations of 
the four space-time coordinates.? 


GEOLOGY.—The Upper Cretaceous section in the Colob Plateau, south- 
west Utah. G. B. Ricuarpson, U. 8. Geological Survey. 


The Colob Plateau lies in southwest Utah, in eastern Iron and 
Washington counties and western Kane County, and extends from 
Cedar City and Kanarraville on the west to Orderville and Upper 
Kanab on the east. ‘The name applies specifically to the bench under- 
lain by the Cretaceous rocks, with the Eocene rocks of the Pink 
Cliffs rising above to the level of the High Plateaus—here known as 
the Markagunt and Paunsagunt—and with the bold escarpment of 
Jurassic and probably Jurassic rocks in the White Cliffs descending 
at the outer margin to the deeply eroded ‘Triassic red beds. 

The Cretaceous deposits of Colob Plateau are of interest to geolo- 
gists in that they are on the western border of outcrops of the Cretace- 
ous of the Interior Province and were very likely near the margin of 
the Upper Cretaceous sea in which the deposits were laid down. 
Some information on the Cretaceous rocks of the region has been in- 
cluded in several papers? though with but little detail as to fossils 
and sequence of strata. The data presented here were gathered a 
number of years ago and a first draft of the paper has lain unpublished 
for some time. No description of the Cretaceous strata of the Colob 
region has appeared in the meanwhile, however, and, so far as the 


2With this form, the field equations (10), (11), and (13) show that G4” —4 y“G (for 
the six-space R,) vanishes in all components in which space-time suffixes enter and 
the equations of motion (12) indicate that a charged particle follows a geodetic line in Re. 
It also appears that the resolution of charge into electric and magnetic (gravitational) 
components is physically indeterminate, which means that we may choose these two 
perpendicular directions x° and x° arbitrarily in their plane, thus altering the form but 
not the content of our description of nature. Certain other transformations such as 
zg =a? + U (x1, x, x3, xt) do not alter even the form of that description. Electricity 
and gravitation combined are thus viewed as manifestations of the geometry of a six- 
dimensional world of which space and time are a part. A relation of this proton to the 
hydrogen nucleus is suggested. 

1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received 
Sept. 30, 1927. 

2C. E. Dutton, Geology of the High Plateaus of Utah. 1880; T. W. Stanton, The 
Colorado formation and its invertebrate fauna. U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 106. 1893; 
W. T. Lez, The Iron County coal field, Utah. U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 316. 1907; 
G. B. Ricnarpson, The Harmony, Colob, and Kanab coal fields, southern Utah. U.S. 
Geol. Survey Bull. 341. 1909. 


Nov. 4,1927 ~ RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 465 


writer knows, no more recent field studies have been made. It 
seems desirable, therefore, to make available the data in hand. 

The Cretaceous strata of the Colob Plateau consist of 2500 to 3000 
feet of buff to drab sandstones and shales, with subordinate lenses of 
gray limestone and, near the base, workable beds of coal. Approxi- 
mately the lower three-fourths of these beds are of Colorado age and 
the uppermost part of Montana, probably late Montana, age. A 
generalized section follows: 


GENERALIZED SECTION OF CRETACEOUS AND ASSOCIATED STRATA IN 
Cotos PLaTEau, UTAH 


Wasatch formation: , 

Varicolored beds of limestone, shale, and sandstone; conglomerate at 

base. -oPresmiwater shells: |. hee over 500 feet. 
Unconformity. 
Montana group (probably later part): : 

Buff sandstone and shale; conglomerate at base. Plants and fresh 

SEGPEECS C121 Ss 6 Me Mace pea dee Ae ECE Ele Aas een about 500 feet. 
Unconformity. 
Colorado group: 

Buff sandstone and drab shale in the east, as much as 1000 feet thick 
and of marine origin; hiatus in the west. 

Drab marine shale in the east, as much as 1000 feet thick; changing to 
interbedded shale and sandstone in the west, with the shale of 
lesser importance. 

Sandstone, shale, and coal; in the east 300 to 400 feet thick and non- 
marine; in the west, very much thicker and non-marine in lower 
part, marine in upper part. Conglomerate at base. 

Total about 2500 feet. 
Unconformity. 
Morrison formation: 
Varicolored shale and sandstone with lenses of limestone and gypsum 
about 400 feet. 
Unconformity. 
San Rafael group: 

Massive gray limestone, subordinate lenses of gypsum. Marine shells 

about 400 feet. 


The limestone of the San Rafael group yielded fossils identified by 
T. W. Stanton as Trigonia sp., Plicatula sp., Cidaris? sp., Campto- 
nectes sp., and Lima occidentalis Meek and Hayden. ‘These deter- 
mine the age of the beds as Upper Jurassic. The overlying vari- 
colored deposits have not yielded fossils but there is very little doubt 
that they belong to the Morrison formation. At present the Morri- 
son formation is assigned by the U. S. ‘Geological Survey with doubt 
to the Cretaceous though many geologists believe it better placed in 
the late Jurassic. 


466 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 


The Upper Cretaceous strata lie unconformably upon the Morrison 
formation with an undulating contact. The basal member consists 
of a variable bed of conglomerate from 15 to 30 feet thick, composed 
of rounded pebbles of quartzite and limestone up to six inches in 
diameter. Fossil plants have been found not far above this bed? 
and marine shells of Colorado age occur still higher. Its exact age 
and relation to the similar units in other parts of Utah, often desig- 
nated Dakota (?) sandstone, are not determinable. In this paper 
the conglomerate will be considered as basal Colorado. 


TS6éS 


lM, il Up 


CLIFFS 
UNANTNY! 


Ail 


The rocks of Colorado age are about 2500 feet thick and above the 
basal conglomerate consist of buff, fine grained, quartz sandstones 
with much calcareous cement; buff, drab, and dark carbonaceous 
sandy and clayey shales; thin lenses of gray limestone; and one or 
more beds of coal within the lower 700 feet of the formation. The 
succession of strata is varied and even adjacent sections are unlike 
in detail. In general view, there is in the east a relatively thin 
coal-bearing basal sandstone unit, a middle thick shale unit, and an 
upper sandstone unit. ‘Toward the west, the lower sandstone unit 
thickens at the expense of the shale unit and the shale unit itself 


3T. W. Stanton, oral communication. 


Nov. 4, 1927 RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 467 


acquires sandstones. The upper unit is apparently absent through 
removal by erosion before the deposition of the overlying Montana 
beds. ‘These changes result in the absence of the important shale 
unit in the western section, though it is conspicuous in the eastern 
section, as, for example, in Long and Kanab Valleys. 

Faunally the Colorado group in the Colob Plateau may be divided 
into four units, the lower two of which are really two facies—in a 
broad view contemporaneous but in individual sections coming in 
succession. ‘The coal-bearing beds in the lower part of the group 
contain littoral and brackish-water species, of which the most common, 
according to T. W. Stanton, to whom I am indebted for examining 
all of the collections of shells, are Ostrea soleniscus Meek, Cyrena sp., 
Corbula nematophora Meek, Glauconia coalvillensis Meek, Eulimella 
funicula Meek, Admetopsis rhomboides Meek, A. subfusiformis Meek. 
These species are associated at Coalville, Utah, with the principal 
coal bed, and most of them have been found also in the Oyster Ridge 
sandstone member of the Frontier formation in southwest Wyoming. 

The beds above the coal-bearing zone, the lower part of the shale 
unit in the east and the upper part of the lower sandstone unit in the 
west, contain a purely marine fauna which includes among many 
other species the following: Gryphaea newberryz Stanton, Inoceramus 
labiatus Schlotheim, Liopistha (Psilomya) meekt White, Turritella 
white. Stanton, Baculttes gracilis Shumard, Helicoceras pariense 
White, Metoicoceras whiter Hyatt. ‘This fauna occurs widespread in 
the lower Benton and equivalents, such as the basal Mancos shale of 
eastern Utah, New Mexico, and Colorado, and the Mowry shale and 
Frontier sandstone of central Wyoming. In these areas there is no 
zone of brackish-water fossils comparable to that described in the 
previous paragraph, the marine fauna constituting the first in the 
section, and the whole sequence of deposits is thinner. It seems very 
likely therefore that the marine fauna in the region to the east is 
contemporaneous with both the brackish-water and marine faunas 
of Colob Plateau and that the differing thickness is due to relative 
distance from the source of the sediments. 

Above the zone with Metoicoceras a zone of upper Benton age occurs, 
though it is not well represented in the collections. It is best dis- 
tinguished by the presence of species of Prionotropis. ‘This fauna is 
widespread also, occurring in the lower part of the Mancos shale, in 
the Carlile shale, and their equivalents. In the Colob Plateau this. 
faunal unit is in the middle shale unit. 

In the upper part of the Colorado group a fauna of Gracie ee 


468 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 18 


and littoral species occurs, closely related to and in part identical 
with that of the basal Colorado. Most of the genera are repeated 
and some of the species. However, at Coalville, near Manti, and 
in the Kaiparowits Plateau, Utah, a similar zone contains, in addi- 
tion to the less distinctive species, some that indicate a Niobrara 
age, and it seems reasonable to infer that the upper zone in the 
Colorado group of Colob Plateau is likewise of Niobrara age. This 
zone is apparently missing in the western Colob, for the overlying 
fresh-water beds of Montana age descend so low in the section that 
they rest upon beds. that include the horizons of the Prionotropis 
fauna. 

Above the Colorado group lie several hundred feet of buff sandstone 
and shale of Montana age. A conglomerate of rounded pebbles of 
limestone and quartzite forms the basal unit and rests on an un- 
even surface of older beds. This conglomerate is about 20 feet 
thick on the average. ‘These Montana beds contain fresh-water 
shells, among them Unio holmesianus White, Viviparus panguit- 
chensis White, and species of Planorbis and Physa—species known 
in late Cretaceous beds elsewhere. Fossil plants also occur. F. H. 
Knowlton examined the collections and made tentative determina- 
tions, some of them being listed on page 470, but the flora is chiefly 
undescribed and gives little help in correlation. A similar late 
Montana unit of fresh water origin is present at many places in 
central and eastern Utah. 

The next younger unit in the sequence is an irregular succession of 
limestone, sandstone, and shale of various colors. ‘The contact with 
the underlying rocks is marked by a surface of erosion and a basal 
conglomerate of rounded pebbles of limestone, quartzite, and the 
underlying sandstone. Fossils are rare in these rocks and only frag- 
ments of Viviparus and Unio were obtained, but the characteristic 
peculiarities of lithologic constitution and color leave room for little 
doubt that they belong to the Eocene Wasatch formation so well 
developed in other parts of the high plateaus of Utah. 

It is of interest to compare the sections in several other areas in 
Utah that lie near the western border of the Cretaceous of the Interior 
Province with that in the Colob Plateau. The section near Salina 
and Manti! shows almost exactly the same units as in the Colob. A 
thick lower unit, chiefly of sandstone, but containing also shale and 
conglomerate, has a lower Colorado marine fauna in the upper part. 


41). M. Sprrker and J. B. Reesipe, Jr., The Cretaceous shoreline in Utah. Bull. 
Geol. Soc. Amer. 37: 429-438. 1926. 


Nov. 4, 1927 RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 469 


This is succeeded by shale with Prionotropis, and then a unit of sand- 
stone and shale with a marine upper Colorado fauna. The Montana 
group is represented by a thick series of coarse-grained beds with a 
thin unit of coal-bearing strata near the top. The age of these 
Montana beds is not well established by fossils but it is believed 
that they are of late Montana age. At Coalville® the succession of 
strata is more complicated but the sequence of faunal units, and, in 
a general way, of lithologic units, is parallel to that at Salina and 
Manti and in the Colob. A lower unit of sandstone, conglomerate, 
and shale contains a lower Colorado fauna; a second of shale with 
minor sandstone and conglomerate contains a middle Colorado fauna 
with Prionotropis; and a third unit of sandstone and shale contains 
a Niobrara fauna. Above the upper Colorado beds lies a unit of 
rather coarse beds with a fresh-water fauna and a flora of Montana, 
probably late Montana, age. The succeeding beds at Coalville and 
at Salina and Manti are unconformable Wasatch deposits. 

The following sections show the composition and approximate 
thickness of Cretaceous strata in Colob Plateau and the horizons at 
which fossils were collected: 


LOCAL SECTIONS 


SECTION OF CRETACEOUS Rocks ON MAPLE CREEK (T. 36 8., R. 10 W.), 
East oF Crepar City, Uta 


Wasatch formation: 
Conglomerate, rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite. 
Unconformity. 


Montana group: Feet 
DING SAG eae wt ee Sa Le Neeru aemertn rpm ea 0? eye! 3 110 
AMA ST OME, TMASSHY EDULE. 4c acpcrsac tes cats epee wobec ra odes oeOreth at eae eh 50 
OTE Be, Be RN ia a Release Une, Cera eRe LM 24. 90 
Sandstone, massive buff, containing fragments of a dicotyledon, 

yO) CENREVINE Dyed ed (OTASH(HUIS SSS) Smee Se SOO Me Reema reg cere 0 
UO ABER GS spendin (SSIES cs ame Aeiea Maps 5 mae eno Pe sk eg eae Te 45 
Unconformity. 
Colorado group: 
SAMO SnOMe VMs MACs. Pvcmactetree osc hci Medene ace e bake CMMs oes Ate eee ere 60 
Dhiglesdrab awathithin beds of. sandstone... ....... do. ee ee 400 
SAME SOMES MMACSNVER UT. a 2.2 27 5s cies vet eg So) «oo coy one nlag eee 150 
SUOBVIOG 5 yo 8 GEA ES eee eed RS. <a Ee 70 
Sandstone and shale, alternate thin beds.......:.........6---.- 100 
Sandstone and shale, containing many oysters.................. 70 
SALVO SCOME PIMACSIVE MOUNT eyed os 5. Leas ik oe eb cle ne ee eee 45 
Sandstone and shale, containing many oysters.................-. 60 
SAMA SCOME IMA SS UVC alle i ce snc. « wvuwched cemle Sie Wows wig eed ee SRE OR 33 
Sandstone, conglomeratic, containing scattered pebbles......... 12 


5C. H. Wecemann. The Coalville coal field. U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 581. 1915. 


470 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 


Sandstone, massive buff (several layers full of oyster shells). 
About 500 feet above the base of the sandstone the following 
fossils were collected: Gryphaea newberryi Stanton, Camptonec- 
tes platessa White, Liopistha (Psilomya) meeki White, Lunatia 
sp., T'urritella white: Stanton, Baculites graciles Shumard?, Heli- 


coceras pariense White, Metoicoceras whiter Hyatt.......... 1300 
Sandstone, thin-bedded, fossiliferous.............0... 0000 eee eee 27 
Sandstone, massive luih. 7a a ee 38 


Shale and marl containing the following fossils: Cyrena sp., 
Corbula nematophora Meek, Glauconia coalvillensis (Meek), 
HKulimella funicula Meek, Admetopsis rhomboides Meek, 
Admetopsis subjusiformis Neck...) ..)..) oe ee 6 

Coalvand shale wi ay Ue 0 2 

Wyster. bedi ah lee, eo ives NAR ie ts eve 8 

Sandstone, massive buff... 0.28 ee 2. lee oe 45 

Limestone, shaly, containing the following fossils: Avicula gas- 
trodes Meek, Barbatia micronema Meek, Cyrena (?) sp., Corbula 
nematophora Meek, Glauconia coaluillensis (Meek), Eulimella 
funicula Meek, Admetopsis rhomboides Meek, Admetopsis 


Subjusiformis, Meek ecu oe cle ie cc os es | pee ae 3 
Coal'and shale ei 6 
Sandstone,miassive buihs.se..0 ee 


Base concealed. 


Total measured 2800 


SECTION OF CRETACEOUS Rocks SouTH oF Buack Mountain (T. 37 S., 
R. 10 W.), East of KANARRAVILLE, UTAH 


Wasatch formation: Feet 
Conglomerate, rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite, 1 to 6 
inches in diameter. 


Unconformity. 

Montana group: | dati | 
Come ale dss os ioe 27 yo ceuelse ere oe Goon sin oes eae is ie Oke, ie ee roc 
Samdstome ule ee i ee se ke gloat Ste kOe cay kee 21 
Shale lights UO 17 


Sandstone, buff, containing the following plants: Dammarites 
caudatus? Lesq., Podozamites oblongus? Lesq., Podozamites 
angustifolius? (Kichw.) Schimp., Platanus newberryana? Heer, 
Platanus sp., ef. P. primaeva Lesq., Betula cf. B. beatriciana 
Lesq., Menispermites ovalis? Lesq., Cinnamomum sp., Vibur- 


NUN TOOUSTUIN, NGESG ice oe osc tis bie whey cil ds doe ue eh kare eee iif 
Shale, Teg i sss LG RO, Oa Ect Aaa, «a 1d 
Sandstone, bult i Mai ISN caked ler 12 
Dhrale Heh G se oh Me Re Cc RNR Ne A be ie 15 
Unconformity. 
Colorado group: 
Sandstone, bude ee ee Ge PS CoO, te ee eae 11 
Shale, drab ee Ps bs LA a0 Ia ila, RUA Oo We eee eee 50 
Sandstome,: butts wes eo a aaa le eee ee Ae eae 3 
Shales dira et aneiey ei: a oo ated Og UP ch ee ce ae 100 


Sandstome, massive: ull yee we. i ayea Mies een were ae ahead ee 15 


Nov. 4, 1927 RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 471 


Shale, drab, with thin beds of sandstone; contains the following 
fossils in the lower part: Ostrea sp., Anomia sp., Modiola sp., 
Barbatia micronema (Meek), Cyrena sp., Corbula nematophora 
Meek, Hulimella funicula Meek, Chemitzia? sp., Admetopsis sp 700 

Sandstone, massive buff, containing the following fossils in the 
upper part: Ostrea sp., Cyrena Glauconia coalvillensis (Meek), 


TMOTLCLODS DSHS EG PAE is hos don oad sR Ske BO ale cra ee ua ae 600 
SMe mCAT DOM COMMGn tater sets toc Mah. cic! Cale ue a, whucte ees) Senet 17 
SoMOCCOMe MMU cro... ak. cick eeu Shaken ESN Vou 5” 12 
SIDES CURD Oa) eG: SAN ASA NC PARP eee COUR Ey ANCE ei 30 
Sandstone, ule... 2. ch. Bite ligy Su ES OER ED oth ee ce mao eS 20 
“2 CHG SEE | ws a ics Sa RE ted Se NR Ae Choe iy Up i AN i 80 
Slee CaWOMACEOUSi...) tastes fo '.s2' ss bw ete tis © oie eaters 22 
“SATE OISRROIE Bo ONT T 0 on Mie ah ot RR nS Ml RE me mE HORA? 25 
Sire aC SIAM De te tt eels ss, < sh casineese se ace, een ole cae tale Ao cane ~ 
SHINDUG STKOVAS) =| OUOUIES ly 4 ee Rthara ee ea ao GHA er Rane RE DO NT «NEE 30 
JOE BOE CWE 5 dic ERE Ae eR SL a RS ATMEL en RA Cth 35 
Shale, carbonaceous.......... AAR IES tA US: i aba A MOAR VS ai 45 
LotOIEWs oleate. ea a eg st. Tad a mR CASSELL TS 6 
PSHE, CIEEN OE See ate Nae lM as anager er RNR aA te ara aN PA 6 
SSO ST HONOSS, OLDIE Ck a RE one ee Re OP RL a a UPR a 8 
ollie, GIGI.) icp, o ac igertas NeeRORY CPI EN RIC tae ana Eri, rg amg ae ad NE 21 
“Suni FSRCOHIE,, LOU UT 3 Pha aaa a A rah a Et Ie RR 5 
SS. 1Fd BL, EY, Ah voll BARAd Mite ane NI a en Cee RR rN Oe 17 
5 2i0 | SNOUT, OUTIL Sed ai Ae Mi AT etal Bt Se SO Saag ec eee Cen OE 15 
SHUGINE:, GUFEEN Ch tne oz net mane a Opa Mo A a BONN PA 70 
SSM OM erm Ol ecenr nl ert ag cuibe A ac Soom Gg baa OR 6 
ws! PMB RiP SEH Te Us MAN Ale a bes Mae eA RNs Gn eo Ue mR REDE mI. 45 
SEPSIS [OUTIL a to coke de a pea 6 Pane le Aa a Ie 100 
Peeing] ome maT SMM Lees sch eM nes acode cegcncoee See 15 
SIIB.” LORUBGE S'S ahs Oh iaet aes NS MARE Nese et tA He Pal 20 
HMA CUOHTIC OMI Cesta Ene tye Lacon yy aaah OV as clears Nin li Nee 8 
SIBLE” GHEEN Oy ucts ARP ERE ek aM a A en 4 25 
SeuINGL COME MUM meer sie) Lee Nee cele as Vay Ei id Sh Gbias A eA “22 
Since Gly CAGOOMACCOUSH min oo Cellule ihe Ge eo. fla ae ne 10 
SSID. ORONO Ge Eo RN 100 
TEMITIVESIUCIONS fe ata Sait retin Site oud atl MS a PLANT 2 
SHAS Bee CHEN Oe Maal oF en peut et TU cM GN Amy RS gre a eR 8 iL! 
SIG SC LOS OWN See Ie a ene asa eA RARE Seam MA UATE 10 
Smale viiomtes ee oe ete TORRES CEC OR: CONE IVAN ae aa RE 1 AO #1! 5 
SOU ISUCHANSS TORTURE ee Rete ae | ONC AREMREE REMOIA re es ge NG GSR em LR 0 Aol 
Conglomerate, pebbles of limestone and quartzite............... 30 

Total 2713 
Unconformity. 


Morrison formation. 


472 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 18 


SECTION OF CRETACEOUS ROcKS FROM THE HEAD OF Muppy Creek SoutH- 
west To NortH Fork oF VirGin River (T. 39 §., R. 8 W.), Norra 
OF ORDERVILLE, UTAH 


Wasatch formation: Feet 
Conglomerate, pebbles of quartzite, chert, sandstone and por- 
phyry (base of Wasatch?). 


Unconformity. 
Montana group: 
Sandstone; bul 30)... ge Once. oa: Rae oe ae 40 
Concealed’. oe eee ee a 75 
sandstone, bullet ae) eeweoee: Gk. vo 3 Onda Se 15 
hale: Welt ee acute hos SNe: oi gle. vo dee ea een 30 
NSamMcdstome MOUs cee eae ees, eee er Ae Sos SL - 11 
Concealed..... ee th wa oe AE oad Gaal Oe 40 
Shales lighting. che do CURD Hess ee a ee 17 
pandetone, Oullyen wee Uadta ai bere Ln) aad cs ce rr 26 
Sandstone, with lenses of limestone, containing Viviparus pan- 
guitchensis White, Viviparus sp., Physa sp., Planorbis sp. . 12 
Concealed 7. ee. oe os ee aml Oe 150 
ro) GEN (mv foc On PNR AME ORL ere SULT Ae a Pee SS 15 
Sandstone, | OLUDEIRS eebeemmn Sistine as hic ean ainda nop on ae i) 
NHS CSRs L OULU SME eer Rania: Seine Nets Salo Uk tii tle ea: 0 dpe ae er 22 
SENS MOMS, O00, boc oa 66 Pe ean be ah oe eee 11 
ho) NES Caves cl oR oN ene Venn Re afer aRAE A AC VPS Vea OB fe eR 18 
pandstone, Dtilfiws ok 6G. els oe Oe aie fe el 5 
shale, WehGin ies acd oes Gey ico. odie eeu eae toned a 23 
Sandstone, butliiiis oi Wi. Ge ve ee. eines) Se Se 16 
» hale purplish. 00.0.2 eke ee ee ae ees er 5 
Shale, diehG ysis: Ce eS 17 
Sandstone, butte Soe ee oa ee 50 
plngiles Toh Gy. sie ee el aac eich ac che ie einen errr 40 
Sandstome, bull. 30 cede no bo ee a os eats er 4] 
olimailey ciel iat ans ncetepetc tet One Ia ca ore Gc Lenn ete op is ee Pete ne 11 
Sandstome,: bulh in. ei we Se ee a0 hd ep ree uae 17 
Gomeealed yy 3. G5 Fe Leas oe Paes te es os ee 15 
Same svommes doultia greene sens mn Cr So - ot 
Sandstome, nwhtte ge ea. eel nun el sucess Or Th 
Sandstome;tbulls: fc we Pw Ee 1165) 
Shale, light BBs TOILE ne Sal SN ret, ERE UL rr 20 
Conglomerate, small rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite 40 
Unconformity. 
Colorado group: : 
Pandstome,: bulls. 2). sions ak. Aaa Me, «eee oblate 22 
Shale sieht ein ae os ne een aes as a 40 
Sandstone, built... oi Pon ee Bee = Se et LN: 6 100 
lle re ee Lae I ae rh 1 ote at 5 
Nandstone, | bulies) oF ag Re a Sh err 100 
Shale; light: streaked with red... 0. 324.5 oon oe ee 20 
Sandstone, butiiy ee aes ee Ree See eis at Sekine ole a 53 
Come ale dy sccahil'n iain eve tune RS. ey He HN 5 te apg ge On 50 
Sandstone, Dulles 20 swe ec ee ole ee eka ee eee 5 


Coneealed. 08a oe ie BER Re oth oc Sore pane ir 25 


Nov. 4, 1927 RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 473 


SG SOMe,s Ulan ae: AP. sles aed, Sele ee ee Oe 8 
JOLY GEZIISIG ae eget os 1 Go Be nat, Oe a ot A Re a IR hae ne a 20 
Samdshone, misssMVe UM... occ eee oe se AE Wee 200 
pualesand thin-ped@edssaMdstONe.'.. i... 0.2.2. 205 ee 200 
‘S THOVCISHO 1a (Svat OTOUTER SL 5S 0220 ee A Re ate RN Mla = a a 40 
“SLOTS CHEST GH empl oskile) 5 sch 2 Se See es ge a aim De MEA syne ft 20 
SMM SLOME> MAA SSE L OU ee oo. ac ei. Seep oe Sele oe aveie ne Coe ee 110 
Concealed, probably chiefly shale.................. Tie Sele Nes Behe 100 
“SUD EWSS od THES he oa ETE Sa a a i i RE Nr 60 
Bancesied) prowablyemetly shale... eo Le 100 
Sul B er CHRD] Oe ec’ A RS aaa mee OI UR he Meee “SER T LS \ 70 
OND Sits €p eye ae aS a Ne a ni Revs A iC ae dae. 2 
Braatl uO Mery MMM Ce Cee ye oo. a eM ee Bie yon ot ee wae 50 
SS LDs GHB Si gtiths Sk OR GREER aU SB RM te acs Nee aaa A pet ere Rely 30 
“LDR ACLs ssc Se ce RR See re te at SNE I MAG £2 fg 125 
PO orleans Weal Rear ms) sfichs a Lisle Re Marca sia eetue cba e ca ine 8 
SUT Spee cael oss a an 5 2a RO Er ee ce cee Ea ye eR a 50 
Sandstone, white...... ye oka ents cee SUN RUP SED Nek Age SUE RERUN ahs 40 
Beene eDUIONS MMMM ce sehr. cites eae ae Lk gua CEM aneri 5 
PTO THOT. WLI Sis yaa meg ail 6 oN a Mi NC aia ar RRR 15 
DD 2 OUND STEED REY. Ga AMR A a ae ee 5 Re  en RR on rapa 15 

Total 25389 

Unconformity. 


Morrison formation. 


GENERALIZED SECTION OF CRETACEOUS ROCKS IN VALLEY OF VIRGIN RIVER 
NEAR Mount CarMEL, UTAH 


Wasatch formation (?): Feet 
Conglomerate. 
Unconformity. 
Montana group: 
Sandstone and shale, zone of fresh water shells and leaves...... 700 
Conglomerate, pebbles of quartz, + to 1. inch in diameter......... 10 
Unconformity. | 
Colorado group: 
Sandstone and shale, alternating beds, containing in the lower 
part: Ostrea soleniscus Meek, Anomia sp., Cyrena sp., 
Thracia sp., Corbula nematophora: Meek. 20.2.0... oe eS 1000 
Shale (including a few thin beds of sandstone) containing near the 
top: Prienotropis sp., Placenticeras sp.; and the following 
forms near the base: Pecten sp., Avicula sp., Inoceramus 
labsatus Schlotheim?, Liopistha (Psilomya) meekz White, Den- 
talium sp., Turritella whiter Stanton, Baculites gracilis 


Shumard?, 9M etovcoceras whiter Hyatt...0..5 22.) ea 700 
Nandsvomeindyshalencoal-pearing. ....4.. te... 2 oie oo ee eee: 400 
Conglomerate, pebbles of limestone and quartzite, 1 to 6 inches 

TIONED eye ice ieie ss edn. LORE e aE. Ahan cpt eee ee 15 

Total 2825 
Unconformity. 


Morrison formation. 


474 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 


SEcTION OF CRETACEOUS Rocks IN SInK VALLEY, SoUTH oF UPPER 
KanaBs, UTAH 


Wasatch formation: Feet 
Conglomerate, rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite, 1 to 
6 inches in diameter. 
Unconformity. 
Montana group: 
Sandstone, massive bull) 240 yo ee. tees oe 55 
Shale, “drab es oe ee ee 27 
Sandstone; massive ‘buff: 2.42400. 1. 30 
Dales wml Cee Ce Raa a 6 
Sandstone, massive, buff, containing the following fossils: Unzo 
(casts of two or more species), Physa sp., Planorbis kana- 
bensts White, Campeloma (?) sp., Viviparus pangwutchensis 
NGO) (oMiere ey Nie Morn n cite \ SiMe RMS cs a - 60 
Concealed (probably shale)... 20 7.20. a 27 
Sandstone, massive buff......... oe hal ete oie sls ado By) 
Conglomerate, rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite, 1 to 
2 inches in diameter...) 0285.08 ol) e. 27 
Unconformity. 
Colorado group: 
Sandstone, erayish-white. 23.0) ot. ees 150 
shale, ‘purplish-drabwc.. oe ae 20 
Sandstone, massive bull... 0.00 662 Se i. EO 65 
Concealed (probably shale). oo .05...00 S00. 3 Saha ee 60 
Sandstone, massive bull... 2.02000 Soe eC 16 
Concealed (probably shale) 0 oi sce os se 50 
Nandstone, massive buff, fine-eraimed’).)..° 25... eee 65 
Sandstone, yellowish, coarse-grained....... owe Oe 25 
Sandstone, conglomeratic; pebbles small and scattered........... 5 
Sandstone, masiive, buffs. Pe 50 
Concealed) (probably shale) ee ease ee eee nist aya 10 
Sandstone, massive Soultech howe 6 ee 11 
Shale. carbonaceous. .2 ound. haw. kbiiel Do a ee ee eee 7 
Sandstone, Ow i ea Ve tae, Be Naes igh.) ee a 11 
ho) OV2H Levi HI 02 8 pelea tae ne OnE RINE Ma MOOR og 5 oy wc 8 
Sandstone. containing oysters: ..2h.244 05.0). eee eee 11 
Sandstone, massive: buffs. ..t:. RS Rs aise bees a 100 
Shale, drab, clayey and sandy, and local thin beds of sandstone, 
containing the following fossils in the lower part: I[nmoceramus 
sp., Lucina sp., Liopistha (Psilomya) meeki White, Turritella 
whitec Stanton, Aporrhais prolabiata (White), Szgaretus textilis 
Stanton (?), Baculites gracilis Sbhumard (?), Helzcoceras 
pariense White, Metoicoceras whiter Hyatt................. 1200 
Sandstone; massive uit. 26h as oie alles nS 60 
shale, carbonaceous: 8h. oid aR siraha dalek «all ie ce er 25 
Sandstone, ult.) Pol aoe |e aa SEM sce ee 6 
Shale vod i has eee Ue a 11 
Shales carbONAaceOuUs ees sco ieiaie mae Shao ke Ice aaa 20 
Sandstone, massive; (oul 0.2) en oo ee Geet Lea ee 25 
Shale, vdiralow: seis cs tn ee age ANC ran er a 80 
Coaland ‘shale 23 oie 0 ag GR Ae AN ae ce 8 
Concealed (probalbly.shale)i: 0.0) sao ee i ies eee 40 


NOV. 4, 1927 RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 475 


Sandstone, ATEN A. ee CO ae re nena 2.5 TVR Cut 2 PAs ee Ree 7 
Conglomerate, rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite....... 15 


Total 2426 
Unconformity. 


~ Morrison formation. 


SECTION OF CRETACEOUS Rocks 5 MILEs NORTHEAST OF 
Uprer Kanas, UTaH : 

Montana group: Feet 
Sandstone, white, containing thin beds of shale................. 150 
Sandstone, buff to white, containing: Unio sp., Planorbis kana- 

bensts White, Viviparus panguitchensis White, Campelema 


SMELT COKE Nes Crh te de 2 SC.-SP sich athe ia paek oe oe he bea 9 ea a a9) 
prea md eee RIS: 2c. < Sig me a ew go io hag A OL 8 
“SETAC IS OID, NLU EE ie NR ie i mp LIN ats tM! 60 
Sandstone, buff, containing the following leaves: Cyperacites sp., 

BA TGLUS SO eI EI DESYRSIN |, fc 9/48 oo 13, elites cae SMR iA) od tO Lea 42 
Sandstone, white oy ek INR OE EERE IS CL ot OS RI Neen ea BEN Oty 17 
Conglomerate, pebbles of limestone and quartzite 4 to 2 inches 

U8, CE RTOD SY E18. 01 | AUER NR de 4 SIRO LCL Vee Di kh MR oe cae 30 

Unconformity. 
Colorado group: 
Sara CE TOURISTS Ae Sir cP PE AOR asl NG, gn dale at ae 145 
Pee eMOTOba bly Shale) ow. fate OU Oe PN Ne ee eae 20 
EVENS TIS. CUTE A Ae as Zn A eg es Seegeet Wa ate Met ee RRR cere care he teg 5 
Roncenled, (probably, ehieily. shale) 02). acdsee bowels tere Sake 100 
PeaPRO UDC OUR ae co Pe gee Lac cn Cys kya Sie ease oe ks 5 
SIEGE, DITEY Oala ei 7 esl Bieta lene hee hath anh alee eA cae RR RRM edie 40 
BemcLOMe Mdancive., DU Acs es eos k lo, Goi Wl! Yoh Pee 10 
mee mL Na Oar ee 0 es tbs eens has Lig de Bren on Ghent sao «ey Mts aha nan 18 
SS DLEVG SE ASVRTES TEE PSIST ERA DIL Sp Ge Ra oR ae ER 33 
Mancereunc proudly, SWAIG) oh.) seit: waht ce oe Sn ce waa 25 
SCULKG IS ACIDVSN A OUTS aha aR ae nla REN No AS OES ioe! a RR 20 
Wancealed (probably sale) !.) sass alison hes PE ee ai 15 
SAIC SOME IANA SSI MSIE SA ele ete hy ack sp. game Hyer ks aveek acje eek. cat eh aes 55 
Egle Ish 00 tio aale NR ls el a ae a a PN i te a A Reema tee Ry Ve 20 
SS enol Gigi IMACS RUE NIUE eel MV hk eek, Ah ae ee 15 
IO tice eer ie ain ne ere ua ri aa) Ute si ek 0S ull ook ai aaeee 40 
eater CIRO aor Wg Oe Ss ye laa, on Suh. 2 el OA 30 
Serta OI OMENS so aoe a 2 cen late ee A Fae) ice yt. va, Go ag 55 
SE EEN ey RN OE ge ee ae 5 
Sandstone, buff, coarse-grained; locally conglomeratic............ 52 
PAMGChOMe MONE Ceech lke we ome ol Me Real oc Kesh SOE i oily neil 43 
SHORE GTR OL Oe RNa © eae a Re or a le oe enn SY eeeate et 34 
SAMUS LOMeS MASSE MOMs i ot ioc so aces node de em ee 18 


Sandstone, fossiliferous; containing: Ostrea _soleniscus Meek, 
Anomia Sp., Barbatia micronema (Meek), Cyrena sp., Corbula 
sp., Admetopsis rhomboides Meek, Chemnitzia (?) sp., Pricno- 


UIRBIEUS Sh Ooty 3 S BAN OGM AAD a, Ok eT RORRES ays ibs 7c 72 hi ye 22 
SUE EL UK oT hs a ea Sem Povey ee any a 5 
SPANOS LOMewmMeassiyeulatmi eso. ce umee ey ee see eee ee: 80 


Shale, drab, clayey and sandy, with local thin beds of sandstone. 
(Same unit as 1200-foot shale in Sink Valley section, p. 473) 


Total measured 1278 


476 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 


PALEONTOLOGY .—Two new unionid pelecypods from the Upper 
Triassic... JOHN B. Rexsipe, Jr., U. S. Geological Survey. 


Triassic unionid pelecypods of the United States include four 
species from the Dockum group of Texas described by Simpson? as 
Unio subplanatus, U. dumblei, U. graciliratus, and U. dockumensis; 
three species from the ‘Trias’ (probably Chinle formation) of north- 
west New Mexico described by Meek? as Unio cristonensis, U. galli- 
nensis, and U. terrae-rubrae; two species from the Triassic of the 
Connecticut Valley, Unio emersoni ‘Troxell* and U. wilbrahamensis 
(Emerson) ;° six species from the Newark formation of eastern Penn- 
sylvania described by Pilsbry® as Dziplodon pennsylvanicus, D. 
borealis, D. wannert, D. carolus-simpson, D. yorkensis, and Myceto- 
poda diluculi; and two species, also from Pennsylvania, described 
by Pilsbry’ as Naiadites triassicus and N. wannert. All of these 
are believed to be Upper Triassic. 

Pilsbry considers U. dumblet and U. graciliratus, because of the 
radial beak sculpture, as probably referable to Dzplodon of the 
South American family Mutelidae rather than to typical Umno of the 
Holarctic family Unionidae. He suggests that when well-preserved 
specimens are found probably all of the other Triassic species will 
show relationship with the South American family, and that the 
Unionidae proper, which certainly appear in the Morrison formation, 
will be found to represent a migrant element coming to North America 
from Asia in Jurassic time. | 

In the western region, in addition to the Dockum group, unionid 
pelecypods have been noted at many localities in Upper Triassic rocks. 


1 Published by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. Received 
Oct. 4, 1927. 

2C. T. Simpson, Description of four new Triassic unios from the Staked Plains of 
Texas. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 18: 381-385. 1896. 

°F. B. Muux, Description of three new species of Triassic unios from the Gallinas 
Range, New Mexico. Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Surv. W. 100th Mer., Appendix LL, p. 
83-84. 1875. 

E. D. Corr, The extinct Vertebrata. Rept. U. S. Geol. Surv. W. 100th Mer. 4(2): 
9. pl. 23; f. 2-7. 1877. 

4E. L. Troxeny, Unios in the Triassic of Massachusetts. Am. Journ. Sci. (4) 38: 
460-462. 1914. 

5B. K. Emerson, A new bivalve from the Connecticut River Trias. Am. Journ. Sci. 
(4) 10: 58. 1900. 

6H. A. Pinspry in H. E. Wanner, Some faunal remains from the Trias of York 
County, Pennsylvania. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 738: 30-37. 1921. 

7H. A. Prussry in H. E. Wanner, Some additional faunal remains from the Trias 
of York County, Pennsylvania. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 78: 26-27. 1926. 


Nov. 4, 1927 REESIDE: NEW UNIONID PELECYPODS 477 


The ‘Popo Agie”’ beds (Jelm formation), the Dolores formation, and 
particularly the Chinle formation have yielded them. These forma- 
tions contain a similar fauna of vertebrates and are probably of about 
the same age. No unionids have been found in the earlier Triassic 
deposits. 

A form from west Texas and one from northeastern Arizona, each 
represented by a single specimen in the collections of the U. S. National 
Museum, do not fit any of the described species and seem worthy of 
record as new. Both are of types not before noted in the western 
Triassic, though apparently paralleled by forms in the eastern region. 
Because of radial beak sculpture rather than concentric they should 
both be assigned to Diplodon, but the specimen from Texas seems 
to the writer to be very much like some of the highly sculptured 
types of Cretaceous Unionidae for which Pilsbry proposes the name 
Proparreysia.® 


Diplodon? haroldi Reeside, n. sp. 
Figure 1 


Shell suboval, small; beak small, subcentral; posterior and anterior ends 
both broadly rounded. | 

Sculpture of two sets of moderately strong ridges intersecting at an angle 
of about 60° on a line passing from the beak to the basal margin slightly 
posterior to the middle of the shell. The posterior slope has the strongest 
corrugations, the anterior and basal parts few or none. Basal part shows 
several coarse concentric ridges. 

Hinge not preserved. 

Length and height, as preserved, 35 and 25 millimeters; probable complete 
length and height, 40 and 30 millimeters. 

Collected by Harold J. Cook in 1925 in Mitchell County, Texas, in the 
southeast corner. of the Staked Plains. Dockum group. 


This species is distinguished by its suboval form and by its relatively 
complex sculpture, resembling in some respects that of Diplodon wanneri 
but recalling much more that of such later species as Unio (Proparreysia) 
holmesianus White. It is really not very close to any of the described 
Triassic forms. 

The associates of D.? haroldi at the locality of occurrence were Unio 
dockumensis, U. graciliratus, U. cf. U. dumblei, and some reptilian remains. 


Diplodon gregoryi Reeside, n. sp. 
Figure 2 


Shell small, suboval; beak fairly prominent, subcentral; anterior end 
narrowly rounded, posterior end rather broadly rounded. 


8C. A. Wuits, Contributions to paleontology. No. 4. Laramie. 12th Ann. Rept. 
U.S: Geol. Surv. Terr., p. 67, pl. 22, f. 4. 1880. 


478 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 18 


Sculpture of about 15 nearly equal, broadly rounded radial ribs, with 
narrow shallow grooves between. Concentric sculpture weak except on 
the basal part. The radial ribs are weak or absent on the basal part of 
the shell. 

Hinge unknown. 

Length and height, as preserved, 13 and 11 millimeters; probable com- 
plete length and height, 16 and 12 millimeters. 

Collected by H. E. Gregory in 1911 in Beautiful Valley, Navajo Indian 
Reservation, Arizona. Shinarump conglomerate. | 


This species is characterized by its form and its radial sculpture. No 
close relatives are known in the western Triassic. In the eastern Triassic 
Diplodon pennsylvanicus seems to be the closest, though it differs sharply 
in the anterior position of the beak and in the outline of the valve. D. 


Figure 1 —Diplodon? haroldi Reeside, n. sp., lateral and anterior views of type 
specimen, natural size (upper figures’. Dockum group, Mitchell County, Texas. 
U. 5. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 73450. 

Diplodon gregoryi Reeside, n. sp., lateral and anterior views of the type specimen, 
< 2 (lower figures). Shinarump conglomerate, Beautiful Valley, Arizona. U.S. Nat. 
Mus. Cat. No. 73451. 


borealis has a different type of sculpture, with its broad flat ribs and very 
narrow interspaces. 

In the form and sculpture, D. gregoryi suggests strongly some marine 
species allied to Cardita, so much indeed that it was at first thought to be 
a marine species’—a very plausible assignment in view of the facts that 
carditoid shells are abundant in Mesozoic deposits, the specimen was accom- 
panied by only fragments of other shells, and nothing remotely like it had 
been reported from fresh-water deposits in North America. There seems 
little reason now to doubt that it is a fresh-water fossil, and that its habitat 
was such as to conform to the current interpretation of the conditions of 
deposition of the Shinarump conglomerate. 


*H. E. Grecory, The Navajo Country. U.S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 93: 41. 1917. 


Nov. 4, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS * 479 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


Prof. Leon W. Couuet, Professor of Geology and former Dean of the 
Faculty of Science at the University of Geneva, Switzerland, who will fill 
Prof. R. A. Daly’s chair at Harvard University during the first half year and 
during November will deliver a course of lectures at Princeton University, 
visited the Geological Survey in September and conferred on problems of 
tectonics and sedimentation with members of the Survey. + Prof. Collet will 
visit Washington again in November, at which time he will address the local 
geologists. Prof. Collet’s new book on The Structure of the Alps has just been 
issued. 

Dr. E. Serpu, of Berlin, mining engineer and geologist, known for his 
studies of the salt domes and potash mines of central Germany, in September 
presented to members of the U.S. Geological Survey his views on the bearing 
of salt structures on the interpretation of the structure of parts of the Alps. 

Dr. D. J. Musxxetov, Director of the Geological Survey, U. 8.8. R., who 
is visiting the United States to gather data on organization, administration, 
methods of work, publication, costs, etc., in connection with geologic work; 
spent some days in early October at the U.S. Geological Survey. He later 
attended the meeting of the Association of the State Geologists at Urbana, 
Illinois, and on November 2 spoke before the Geological Society at 
Washington. 

The National Academy of Sciences met at Urbana, Ilhnois, on Tuesday, 
Wednesday, and Thursday, October 18, 19, and 20. G. P. Merritt, U.S. 
National Museum, Davip Wuitet, U.S. Geological Survey, and C. 8. Hupson, 
Bureau of Standards, read papers and A. L. Day, Geophysical Laboratory, 
gave the evening lecture, open to the public, on the subject The volcano 
problem. Papers dealing with psychology and biology were given on Tuesday 
afternoon; botany and zoology in one section, and physics and chemistry in 
a second section, on Wednesday morning; and chemistry and geology on 
Thursday morning. 

The Association of State Geologists met with the National Academy at 
Urbana on Thursday morning, October 20, and on Thursday afternoon con- 
tinued its meetings in the offices of the Illinois State Geological Survey. 
The following day was given over to an excursion to points of geologic interest. 
W. C. MENDENHALL and Davin Waits, of the U. S. Geological Survey, and 
G. P. MerriLu, of the U. 8. National Museum were in attendance. 

M. R. CampBELL, of the U.S. Geological Survey, during the second week 
in October gave four lectures at the University of Pennsylvania as part of a 
comprehensive course on Fuel Engineering just instituted. This course is 
to be given by some 50 specialists, each of whom will discuss the aspect of the 
subject with which he is particularly familar. Mr. Campbell’s lectures 
dealt with Coal, lignite, and peat resources. 


The meeting of the Section of Geodesy of the International Geodetic and 
Geophysical Union at Prague was the most successful one that has been 
held since the Union as organized at Brussels in 1919. Delegates were 
present from 25 countries and 4 other countries were represented by proxy. 
The meeting of the Executive Committee was held on August 29 and 30, 
while the Section as a whole began sessions on August 31. The formal 
opening of the Union occurred on September 3. The outstanding report 
was that on work done by Dr, F. A. Vening Meinesz, Engineer of the Dutch 


480 ‘JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 


Geodetic Commission, in determining gravity at sea in a submarine of the 
Dutch Navy. In 1926 he traveled by submarine making gravity observa- 
tions en route from Holland to Java, across the Atlantic and the Pacific 
and through the Panama Canal; in previous years he had made gravity ob- 
servations from Holland to Java on a submarine through the Mediterranean 
~ Sea and the Indian Ocean. The reports from the United States and Canada 
showed much work done in the field and in the office since the Madrid 
reports and give accounts of new instruments and methods. 

In the Section of Terrestrial Magnetism and Atmospheric Electricity 
interesting reports were received from many of the 27 nations represented 
at the Congress. Proposed French work in Indo-China and in the Pacific 
was of special interest. Reports from the United States, including that of 
the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of the Carnegie Institution of 
Washington, were complete and the latter, especially, was filled with valuable 
material in regard to international work. Important subjects discussed 
included magnetic characterization of days, adoption of Greenwich time in 
observatory publications, advancement of auroral studies for which a com- 
mittee was appointed including Sir Frederick Stupart, and Commander 
N. H. Heck, and geophysical methods of studying surface geological struc- 
tures for which a committee including Mr. J. A. Fleming was also selected. 
Dr. Louis A. Bauer was elected president of the section. — 

In the Section of Seismology national reports of considerable interest were 
presented, especially that of Dr. Imamura for Japan who also discussed 
results obtained with the long period seismograph. Reports showed that 
the United States is rapidly taking its proper place in the investigation of 
seismological problems; a report for the Government, submitted through the 
Coast and Geodetic Survey, gave a comprehensive statement of all the 
activities in the United States, governmental and otherwise. Detailed 
reports described the reports of the Carnegie Institution of Washington and 
the Jesuit Seismological Association. 

The work of the Section of Oceanography was chiefly a statement of 
steps taken in the attempt to coordinate the activities of the Section with 
those of other. organizations. The possibilities and limitations of such 
cooperation were brought out. It was pointed out that a recent accomplish- 
ment of the Section was a preparation of lists of oceanographers and ocean- 
ographic institutions throughout the earth, publications of great value to 
those engaged in oceanographic work. 

With one exception eight sessions of the Meteorological Section were 
presided over by Sir Napier Shaw of London. A report of the Bureau of the 
Section showed that pyrheliometers had been purchased for installation in 
Samoa, Spitzbergen and Belgian Congo, and four special photometers designed 
by Richardson for measuring the Earth’s albedo from airplanes were ready 
for distribution. New subjects discussed included the publication of upper- 
air data, the adoption of the week as the unit of time for meteorological 
summaries and a common unitary system for all the sciences comprised in 
the Union. The American delegate, Dr. H. H. Kimball was named chair- 
man of a commission to arrange for better standardization of instruments 
and methods employed in radiation measurements. 


4 
a ; “hai ag t f "ths t 
: ‘ A > ele 4 


- 


_ ANNOUNCEMENTS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE 
Capea oy AND. AFFILIATED Lace beat 


a Waveribce 5 | The Watovial Society. OF We PORE welts. | 
Wednesday, November 9. The Medical pnpiaty sere cpa tle ie ON Ral SE ok an eee 
ursday, November 10. ‘The Chemical Society. 2 rely yeian 
aturday, November 12. ‘The Philosophical Society. SUNG Sues 
sd Ys. November 15. The Anthropological Rocaty: Bee aD ie) 
ich - The Columbia Historical Society. POS ee a 
. We November 16. The Archaeological Society. Program: BOC Me tuae 
ae Se | _  Dows Dunnam: Recent excavations in ss 
of Peale wate he: Medigal Society. , De Me te oF ae 
_ The Helminthological Society. | Eph ap camel stay PNT 
iS Sa The Biological Reet na bay Saey g 


» 4 
py k HY saree 


thee oe the Sakis of the affiliated séciaties a appear on this page Chowne Rae . 
, if sent to the erlitors by the eleventh and the Aven terete of eaeh mong: : as ene 


CONTENTS 


ORIGINAL PAPERS 


Physics.—A magneto-electron theory of gravitation. CuusterR SNOW........... 457 
Geology.—The Upper Cretaceous section in the Colob Plateau, southwest Utah. 


Cy. Bo RICHARDSON. ie ai Ries eS Ue eo a eld cle seein a bea wee RR aie ieee Cian mn . 464 
Paleontology.—T wo new unionid pelecypods from the Upper Triassic. JoHNn B. 


BERSIDE, IR dows ilcicernnece (ary re Sinisa e's leiviele'a/al slp 0a kane wise e eine wjoleiare 476 


SCIENTIFIC Notes AND NErws eeeteeeeeeee 6 @eseeceewenvneeveeeeeeeeeaeceeoe ee egoveoesee eee ee 479 


OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY 


President: ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. 
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. Tuckerman, Bureau of Standards. 
Recording Secretary; W. D. Lamsrrtr, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 
Treasurer: R. lL. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 


— 
>> sate 


= = 


o : a7. Een _Novemper 19, 1927. ib ooo, 49 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
OF SCIENCES 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


Cre Aanrs CHASE Joun B. Reestpe, Jr. 
DEPARRENT OF Ssdasmaunt MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 


| ASSOCIATE EDITORS 
 L. H. Apams S. A. Ronwer 


. PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


E. A. GoupMaNn G. W. Srosz 


BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


R. F. Griaes ; J. R. Swanton 


BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


‘ 


Rocer C. Weuus 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
‘EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 


BY THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


Mr. Royat anp GuItrorp AVES. 
BattimorE, MARYLAND 


» 


‘Entered as Beate Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of yeaa, ee for 
| in Section ee Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 


wh anscerpie fay he sent te any y me 
- dearly typewritten and in suitable form fo 
- editors cannot undertake to do more th 
_ should appear only as footnotes and should 11 e} 
_ the work of both the editors and print is suggest. 
i) See and submitted on a separate manuscript page 
_IUlustrations will be used only when DD essary and will be ( 
: or diagrams of simple character. uieeaay ae Da rived 
_Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publicat 
: unless requested. | It.is urged that manuscript be sub 
? nt exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. _ : 
Authors’ Repri ae ae will “a furmshied at the following Rare 


Or! $ 85 is 81.68 4) 1 $2.55. 


GS pa ate a wie ge 2005 4 30 so 5.25, Niven i 
Aer coat euniee KA oe e 3. 00, 5 30. 6. 25 1 AS 


Cover : s beating them name bof the aitiae er title of the til 2 a 
. nati has and date of 1 issue, will bef urnished when ordered. rule 


: As an ‘author will not ordinarily see proof, his sida for wets : 
soul invariably be attached to the first Page of his sear 


- ‘The rate of Subscription 1 per volume i ts. AP BOOS ee 
‘Semi-monthly NO ANRC IS Ste Fe 
_ Monthly BUMDONS 0 fs ince es Linnie eho so ees Vek odin 


beat one ‘Remittances should be Bie Seabie. to 5 “Washington Meadents of ' ie 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. ‘aris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washix 
‘ye uae ana European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. © 
a ke ties Exchanges.—The JOURNAL does not exchange with other publications. : 


ce x ae Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, ‘adie das 
a AR i eae within sags days after r date of the fottieet issue. Pee . 


‘ 


*Volume I, however, den June 19, 1911, to. beher 19, 1911, will be sent. ve $3. 00, “Special ra é 
are given to members of scientific patieties affiliated dices the are vi 4 Ay 


4 i 
F ; wy i a f Ate { : 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vou. 17 NOVEMBER 19, 1927 No. 19 


GEOPHYSICS.—A machine for measuring the depths of deep wells.! 
C. E. Van Orstranp, U. 8. Geological Survey. 


The accurate and efficient measurement of the depths of deep wells 
is a problem of fundamental importance in the fields of science and 
engineering. Unfortunately, however, but little has been done to 
place the solution of this important problem on a strictly scientific 
basis—the methods of a quarter of a century ago, although recognized 
as extremely awkward and for the most part incorrect, are still in use. 

The necessity of having a simple and accurate method of measuring 
the great depths to which thermometers are lowered into deep wells 
while making temperature tests has led me to attempt the development 
of apparatus which meets the fundamental requirements of simplicity 
and accuracy. The investigation to date has resulted in the apparatus 
shown in Figures 2 and 3. Incidentally, this apparatus may provide a 
simple means of obtaining the depths of geological formations, thus 
providing the geologist with accurate data on which to base his 
correlations. 

It is not necessary to describe here other depth recording devices. 
They are quite generally of the type that may be called rigid in contra- 
distinction to the type illustrated in Figures 2 and 3, in which it will be 
seen at once that flexibility is a predominant characteristic. 

The measuring parts of the machine shown in Figures 2 and 3 
consist of two flat faced metal wheels each with 23 inch face and 24 
inch circumference. A revolution counter geared to each wheel 
records the depth in feet. One counter only is shown in the illustra- 
tions. Two small pulleys, 24 inches by 23 inches, attached to a tri- 
angular frame serve to keep the cable centered with respect to the two 

1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received 
October 15, 1927. 

481 


482 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 17, No. 19 


measuring wheels. By spreading the triangle at the base, the opening 
between the pulleys can be adjusted to a cable of any diameter while 
adjustment to center is easily made by sliding the triangular frame 
on the large base frame. ‘The upper part of the base frame measures 
approximately 12 inches by 24 inches, thus permitting bailers of 6 
or 8 inches diameter to pass through the center of the machine when 
the steel bars carrying the wheels and pulleys have been disconnected 
and spread apart by rotation outwards about their points of support. 
The steel tubes shown on the sides of the steel frame for the insertion 
of legs are not always needed—it is generally more satisfactory to 
mount the ends of the frame on 2 inch boards which in turn are tacked 
lightly to the floor of the derrick. Two spiral springs assist in keeping 
the measuring wheels in contact with the cable, and at the same time 


Figure 1.—Proposed arrangement of measuring wheels and guiding pulleys. 


they permit a cable of varying diameter to pass between the wheels 
without interrupting the operation of the machine. 

The apparatus described here is intended primarily for use while 
lowering the cable into the well, but, since the cable runs more uni- 
formly while being removed from the well, it may be advisable to 
suspend the measuring parts as shown in Figure 1. T'wo methods of 
arranging the bars, represented respectively by the heavy and the 
dotted lines, are shown in the figure. A steel casting which permits 
of placing the measuring wheels above or below the plane of the cast- 
ing may be preferable to the steel frame. The casting has the ad- 
vantage of tending to keep the measuring wheels more nearly in the 
same vertical plane. 

In operation the machine is centered with respect to the cable in 
its normal position while being lowered into or removed from the well. 
Ordinarily, this position is not in the center of the well. A level placed 


Nov. 19, 1927 VAN ORSTRAND: MACHINE FOR MEASURING DEEP WELLS 483 


first longitudinally in contact with the upper tangent points of the 
measuring wheels and then transversely across the steel frame is used 
in making the final adjustment. Agreement of the records of the two 
counters at the end of the run is an exceedingly severe, but extremely 
useful check on the measurement. 

The chief sources of error are longitudinal and transverse vibrations 
of the cable. Longitudinal vibrations are caused by the slipping 
of the coils of the cable on the reel, whereas transverse vibrations are 


Figure 2.—Side view of depth recorder. 


the result of periodic impulses transmitted to the cable from the engine 
or other parts of the oil well machinery. Adhesion of the cable to the 
wall of the well and release from the same produce a combination of 
longitudinal and transverse vibrations that may be quite serious. 
Any one of the errors just described may be so serious as to prevent a 
machine from making an accurate record, but, for velocities of the 
cable not exceeding 200 feet per minute, these errors are not likely to be 
serious, and they can generally be eliminated by changing slightly the 


484 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 


speed of the engine, or by adopting some other simple method of 
procedure. | : 

In order to consider the possible discrepancies in the measurements 
resulting from sliding friction, let it be assumed that a well is measured 
first with a frictionless line and weight (W), the depths being recorded 
at the top of the well by means of a wheel which accurately records 


Figure 3.—Side and end view of depth-recorder without guiding pulley. 


the length of line passing the tangent point of the wheel as shown in the 
sketch, Figure 4. The depths recorded by the wheel are identical 
whether the weight is lowered into or removed from the well. As- 
suming Hooke’s Law, the true depth can be calculated from the 
observed depth on the basis that the tension in the line is due to a 
load equal to the weight (W) + 4 (weight of the line). 


Nov. 19, 1927 VAN ORSTRAND: MACHINE FOR MEASURING DEEP WELLS 485 


Assume a second case in which the frictional effects resulting from 
the movement of the line and weight (W) are identical in magnitude, 
but opposite in sign according as the cable is being raised or lowered. 
In this case the mean of the two observed depths corrected as before 
for a total load equal to the weight (W) + 4 
(weight of the line) leads to a correct result. 

In all practical applications, however, it is ob- 
vious that the ideal conditions just described are 
not fulfilled—the probability that the frictional 
resistances will exactly compensate. each other 
when the cable is moved in opposite directions 
is practically zero. Hence, it follows that the true 
depth of a well can not in general be determined 
from the mean of two observations made with 
a perfect recording machine at the top of the 
well. In measurements of one direction only, 
such as the well known method of ‘‘stringing over w 
the derrick,’ the error is increased as frictional 
effects are not compensated. Frictional effects _ Fisure 4—Showing 

; f ; cable and measuring 
resulting from the motion of the line do not ap- wheel. 
pear in measurements made with a metal tape, 
but the true depth of a well can not be determined from an observa- 
tion of this kind for the reason that the variation in the tension of 
the tape from the top to the bottom of the well is unknown. The 
adhesive force between the tape and the wall of the well is usually very 
intense. It is probably caused chiefly by atmospheric pressure acting 
in conjunction with a film of moisture that occupies the space between 
the surface of the tape and that portion of the inner surface of the well 
with which it is in contact. 

The preceding theoretical considerations show that identity of 
measurements with a perfect recording machine at the top of a well 
is not to be expected. I have no information as to the magnitude of 
the error when the oil well cable is used as a measuring line. With a 
number 20 polished steel piano wire carrying a load of 7 pounds (3.2 
kilograms), I have found differences of the order of magnitude of 0.5 
foot per 1000 feet of measured length.2 An exception to these ob- 
servations is that measurements of depths of something like 1000 feet 
are frequently identical regardless of the direction of motion of the 


LS, 


2 Apparatus for the measurement of temperatures in deep wells by means of maximum 
thermometers. Econ. Geol. 19: 247. April—May, 1924. 


486 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ~ VOL. 17, No. 19 


line, the wells in these instances being so nearly vertical over the first 
1000 feet that the line does not come in contact with the wall of the 
casing. 

In a recent test near Johnstown, Pennsylvania, one counter of the 
depth recorder registered 6719 feet, the other 6721 feet; and in a test 
made a few years ago with a single measuring wheel? in deep well No. 
1842 of The People’s Natural Gas Company, located near Ligonier, 
Pennsylvania, the recorded depth was 7697 feet. This result com- 
pared favorably with the value 7705 feet obtained by The People’s 
Natural Gas Company using the method of “stringing over the 
derrick.’”’ Other partial tests which have been made from time to 
time while lowering thermometers to different depths showed that 
discrepancies of 1 foot per 1000 feet of measured length are to be 
regarded as rather extreme. It has been impossible to make accurate 
comparisons, as an error of possibly 0.5 foot may have been made in 
reading the revolution counters. 

To test a depth recorder accurately, it would be necessary to measure 
off on the cable with a metal tape under given tension a given length 
as the cable passes in a vertical line from the top of the derrick to the 
floor. The total length of cable should be limited to a point such that 
frictional effects in the casing do not appear. I have not been able to 
make this test, but, judging from the agreement of the readings of the 
counters and the duplication of measurements to the same point on 
the cable, I am of the opinion that measurements of rather exceptional 
accuracy can be made with a machine embodying the fundamental 
requirements of stability, flexibility, and symmetrical distribution of 
load on the cable as contained in the apparatus shown in Figures 1, 2, 
and 3. An obvious advantage in the arrangement of parts shown 
in the figures is that the measuring wheels tend always to fall towards 
the cable without causing it to be displaced laterally from its normal 
position. The apparatus shown in Figures 2 and 3 is convenient for 
use on field trips when one desires occasionally to test a well in which 
the casing extends 2 or 3 feet above the level of the derrick floor. The 
more compact form shown in Figure 1 is probably more convenient 
for use while drilling or conducting other deep well operations. ‘The 
supporting bars could be attached also to the lower part of the steel 
frame so as to make an arrangement of measuring wheels like that 
shown in the upper part of Figures 2 and 3. 


8 See paper cited in footnote 2 for description of machine. 
4 Reset revolution counter. M34. Four figures. Veeder Mfg. Co., Hartford, Conn. 


NOV. 19, 1927 CUSHMAN: FORAMINIFERA IN COLLECTION OF EHRENBERG 487 


Finally, identity of measurements independent of the direction of 
motion of the measuring line is an essential requirement of a perfect 
recording instrument when operating under conditions such that 
frictional forces in the well do not make their appearance. In prac- 
tice, the mean of two readings obtained by running the cable in op- 
posite directions appears to be the closest approximation that can be 
made to the true depth of a well. 

I am especially indebted to Mr. John B. Tonkin, Vice President of 
The People’s Natural Gas Company, Pittsburgh, Pa., and Mr. Kern 
Dodge of Philadelphia, Pa., for their generous codperation in making 
the tests respectively at Ligonier and Johnstown, Pennsylvania. Mr. 
Dodge assisted personally in making the observations at Johnstown. 
The Ligonier well reached a total depth of 7756 feet making it, at the 
time of its completion, the deepest well in the world. This record of 
exceptional depth has since been surpassed by the deep well of the 
Chanslor-Canfield Midway Oil Company, Olinda 96, near Brea, 
California, the total depth as reported a few months ago being 8046 
feet. 


PALEONTOLOGY.—Notes on foraminifera in the collection of Ehren- 
berg. J. A. CusHMAN, Sharon, Massachusetts. 


Between 1838 and 1872 Ehrenberg published many new generic 
names for fossil and recent foraminifera. Of these very few are 
accepted at present and indeed of many not enough has been known to 
determine their status in the accepted scheme of classification. In 
order to place these uncertain genera and to learn more about the 
species which should be considered genotypes of Ehrenberg’s genera, I 
undertook a study of part of the original collection in Berlin. My 
thanks are due to Professor Pompecki, Rector of the University, for 
permission to study the collection and to Dr. Dietrich for his many 
courtesies. 

As the collection has apparently not been consulted for a great many 
years, something of its general character may be noted. Ehrenberg’s 
preparations, which include diatoms and foraminifera particularly, are 
chiefly balsam mounts. ‘These are for the most part still in excellent 
condition, the balsam slightly yellowed with age, as is to be expected, 
but very clear indeed and showing no signs of deterioration, and the 
specimens in no wise impaired for study. The collection is contained 


1 Received October 6, 1927. 


488 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 


in a large number of book-like holders with the volume numbers and 
the general localities marked on the backs. In each volume are 
usually twelve double card-board trays, hinged at the back and 
numbered and named on the top. These trays, when lifted out and 
carefully opened, display the mounts themselves, made of small cover- 
glasses with balsam between and fastened to strips of mica, five mounts 
to each strip. The ends of the strip are inserted in slits in a large 
sheet which fits into the tray and often bears on the lower part a list 
of the included species. On the surface of the cover-glasses are very 
small rings of various colors, each ring containing figured or named 
specimens. With the collection is a catalogue, arranged evidently by 
Ehrenberg, giving the genera, and under each genus in alphabetical 
order the species, and for each species the book and tray in which it is 
to be found. 

A collection of Ehrenberg’s original drawings, beautifully done 
in pencil, ink, and water color, is also preserved. There are more than 
twenty-five hundred sheets of these drawings, many sheets with numer- 
ous figures. The drawings are accurate and much better executed 
than are the figures on the published plates. Each individual figure 
bears a notation in ink or pencil referring‘to the volume, tray, strip, 
slide, and colored ring, so that the original specimen may be very 
quickly found. At first the system would seem to be a complex one, 
but it is in reality very workable, as the catalogue gives under each 
species a column referring to the original sheet of drawings on which 
the species appears. 

The specimens may be studied both by transmitted light, the method 
by which Ehrenberg largely worked, and by reflected light, by which 
it is possible to get a good idea of the surface. 

In the following pages a few notes are given on certain species of 
especial interest in settling questions of nomenclature which relate to 
American species. 

The genus Grammostomum of Ehrenberg has. as its first figured 
species G. tenue Ehrenberg (Abhandl. K. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1841, 
p. 426, pl. III, vii, f. 45). This then is the species which is the geno- 
type. <A study of this figured specimen shows it to be a Bolwina, 
and Grammostomum Ehrenberg, 1841, becomes a synonym of Bolivina 
d’Orbigny, 1839. The other two species named in 1841 were not 
figured by Ehrenberg, and Grammostomum tenue Ehrenberg must 
stand as the only choice. Later many different things were referred 
to Grammostomum by Ehrenberg. 


Nov. 19, 1927 CUSHMAN: FORAMINIFERA IN COLLECTION OF EHRENBERG 489 


Spirillina Ehrenberg, 1841, has as its genotype S. vivipara Ehren- 
berg, a recent species with the type from Vera Cruz. An examination 
of the original specimen shows that it is as figured by Ehrenberg and 
as understood by later authors—with a proloculum and long plani- 
spirally coiled second chamber, the wall calcareous and perforate. 
The species name is derived from the occurrence of two young speci- 
mens in the parent test, a feature which shows excellently in the 
mounted specimen. 

Allotheca Ehrenberg, 1841, is a monotypic genus, the genotype being 
A. megathyra Ehrenberg (Abhandl. K. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1841, p. 
426, pl. III, vu, f. 49). Sherborn gives a note in his Index, “= 
Planorb. farcata, Young; with coarse pores.’ <A study of the original 
figured specimen seems to place it under Discorbis Lamarck, 1804, 
and therefore Allotheca Ehrenberg should be considered a synonym of 
Discorbis. | 

Aristerospira Ehrenberg, 1858, had five species which were later 
figured (1873). In the order of the figures on the plate (Abhandl. 
K. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1872 (1873), pl. XI) these are Aristerospira 
isoderma Ehrenberg, A. laevigata, Ehrenberg, A. globularia Ehrenberg, 
A. alloderma Ehrenberg, and A. platypora Ehrenberg. I examined 
the types of all of these species, and found that they are to be referred 
to Discorbts Lamarck, of which Aristerospira becomes a synonym. 
The genotype of Aristerospira is A. tsoderma Ehrenberg, selected 
because it is the first of the original species figured. 

Pylodexia Ehrenberg, 1858, had two species at the time of descrip- 
tion, of which P. tetratrias Ehrenberg was later figured and is therefore 
chosen as the genotype. A study of the types of this species shows 
it to be a Globigerina. One of the specimens, evidently microspheric, 
shows the ‘‘Pulvinulina’’-like young as also figured by Rhumbler and 
others. On the original sheet of drawings this was marked in ink 
“Globigerina,” evidently by Ehrenberg. Pylodexia Ehrenberg is 
therefore a synonym of Globigerina d’Orbigny. 

Strophoconus Ehrenberg, 1848, had several species, the first of which 
figured, S. auricula Ehrenberg (Mikrogeologie, 1854, pl. XX, i, f. 2), 
should be designated as the genotype. It is a young Virgulina, as 
noted by Sherborn. 

Aspidospira Ehrenberg, 1844, had no species figured until the il- 
lustration in 1854 of A. saxipara Ehrenberg (Mzkrogeologie, 1854, pl. 
XXXII, ii, f. 38). This is the common Anomalina of the Cretaceous 
of America, not the same as “Planulina ariminensis” as given by 


490 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 


Sherborn in his Index. By reflected light the type specimen figured 
by Ehrenberg is seen to have a raised suture about the middle part. 
As drawn by Ehrenberg the earlier chambers are not correct and the 
suture really represents the raised area about the center. The speci- 
men is too thick and opaque to show the inner chambers pictured in 
the figure. 

Porospira Ehrenberg, 1844, had several species, but the first of these 
figured, P. comes Ehrenberg (Mvkrogeologie, 1854, pl. X XI, f. 93), 
is taken as the genotype. An examination of the type shows it to be 
an Anomalina, and Porospira becomes a synonym of that genus. 

Proroporus Ehrenberg, 1844, is really a monotypic genus, as it had 
but a single species, P. lingua, figured later (Mikrogeologie, 1854, pl. X XI, 
f. 83). The type of this genotype species, examined in Berlin, shows 
the aperture to extend to the inner margin of the last-formed chamber 
and the species is therefore a true Bolivina. The published figure 
shows a costate surface but neither the type specimen nor Ehrenberg’s 
original drawing show this. Proroporus Ehrenberg must therefore 
be placed as an exact synonym of Bolwvina and can not be used for 
those species which tend to become uniserial (See Loxostomum). 

Heterohelix Ehrenberg, 1843, was later changed by Ehrenberg to 
Spiroplecta but Heterohelix must stand as the generic name. The 
genotype is H. americana Ehrenberg. ‘The slide is marked “Kreide 
von obern Mississippi in Amerika.’”’ The young shell is planispiral, 
the test clearly caleareous and not arenaceous. It is a species of the 
American Cretaceous. | 

Cenchridium Ehrenberg, 1845, had as the only species C. sphaerula 
Ehrenberg. The original specimen and original Tapa ple vec! drawing 
show it to be an Entosclenia. 

Heterostomum Ehrenberg, 1854, has as its genotype H. cyclostomum 
Ehrenberg, the first figured species. ‘This is a very poor specimen from 
the Chalk of Gravesend, smooth, and possibly a Guembelina but not 
certainly. 

Pleurites Ehrenberg, 1854, has as the first species figured P. cretae 
Ehrenberg (Mikrogeologie, 1854, pl. X XVII, f. 32), which may be 
taken as the genotype. The type specimen has a smooth surface 
with the aperture and triserial form of Bulimina. Pleurites should be 
placed under that genus as a synonym. 

Loxostomum Ehrenberg, 1854, has as the species first figured L. 
subrostratum Ehrenberg (Mikrogeologie, 1854, pl. XXVII, f. 19), 
which is chosen as the genotype. The type specimen in the Ehrenberg 


nov. 19, 1927 WILLIAMS: MOSSES FROM ECUADOR 491 


collection, from Meudon, is biserial throughout, with the aperture in 
the early portion as in Bolivina, later above the base of the inner margin 
and tending to become uniserial. The test is calcareous and not as 
given in Sherborn’s Index, “‘Bigenerine Text. agglutinans.”’ ‘The 
name Lozostomum should therefore be used for those forms, derived 
from Bolivina, in which the aperture becomes terminal away from the 
inner margin. It will take the place of Proroporus Ehrenberg, as at 
present used, which, as already noted, is an exact synonym of Bolwzna. 

Notes were made on many other genera of Ehrenberg and on the 
American species figured by him in Plate XXXII of the Mzkrogeologie 
but these will be left for a later paper. 


BOTANY.—WMosses from Ecuador, collected in 1918 by Dr. J. N 
Rose.’ R. S. Wrutiams, New York Botanical Garden. (Com- 
municated by Winttiam R. Maxon.) 


This lot of 49 species of mosses, obtained incidentally while making 
general collections of phanerogams and ferns in Ecuador, is of course 
but a fraction of the moss flora that may be found in any favorable 
tropical region where the mountains reach heights far above snow- 
line. As will be seen, the greater number of species in the list are 
from the town of Huigra and vicinity, at about 9,000 feet elevation. 
Mosses often flourish in the tropics, however, from a few hundred feet 
above sea level to at least 16,000 or 17,000 feet, or nearly to the line 
of perpetual snow, and a collector able to give all his time to this one 
class of plants in a region where, from the same starting point, he 
might often make easy walking trips in a day to orange groves in one 
direction or to perpetual snows in the other, would soon find himself 
In possession of a wonderful variety of species. 

In this list, oddly enough, the 49 species are distributed among no 
fewer than 37 genera. The genus Campylopus is not represented at 
all, although it is widely distributed in South America, some 21 
species, for example, being already known from the neighboring 
country of Venezuela. Fvssidens, here represented by a single collec- 
tion, has 16 or more species in Venezuela, and Macromitrium about the 
same number. 

The collection numbers cited in parentheses below are those given 
by Dr. Rose. He was assisted by his son, George Rose, and A. 
Pachano. 


1 Received October 11, 1927. 


492 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 19 


FISSIDENS cRIspus Mont. 
Vicinity of Huigra, 9,000 ft., Sept. 4 (23650). 
PLEUROCHAETE LUTEOLA (Besch.) Thér. 
Trichostomum lvteolum Besch. Prod. Bryol. Mex. 34. 1871. 
Vicinity of Cuenca, Sept. 17-24 (24038). 
LEPTODONTIUM ACUTIFOLIUM Mitt. 
Cafiar, Sept. 16 (23661). 
LEPTODONTIUM LUTEUM (Tayl.) Hampe. 
Vicinity of Portovelo, Oct. 5-15 (24039). 
LEPTODONTIUM SULPHUREUM (C. M.) Mitt. 
Vicinity of Portovelo, Oct. 6-15 (24040). 
TORTULA DECOLORANS (Hampe) Mitt. 
Tixan, 9,200 ft., Aug. 23 (23635). 
TORTULA PICHINCHENSIS (Tayl.) Mitt. 
Vicinity of Zaragura, Sept. 27 (23675). 
TORTULA REPLICATA (Tayl.) Mitt. 
Vicinity of Huigra, Sept. 7 (23639, 236538, 28655). Vicinity of Cuenca, 
Sept. 17-24 (23670). 
RHACOMITRIUM CRISPIPILUM (Tayl.) Jaeg. 
Vicinity of Loja, Sept. 29-Oct. 3 (24041). 
ORTHOTRICHUM PUNGENS Mitt. 
Vicinity of Cuenca, Sept. 17-24 (24042). 


Macromitrium huigrense, sp. nov. 

Pseudoautoicous. Male plants minute, scarcely 0.5 mm. high, the flower 
composed of about 8 ovate, acute to rather obtuse, very mamillose-celled 
leaves, crenulate on the border and partly costate, inclosing a few small 
antheridia. Fertile plants with creeping stems and stout, erect branches 
mostly 1-2 cm. high; branch leaves crowded, 4-5.5 mm. long, appressed in 
the lower part when dry, the points spreading—flexuous, more or less twisted 
and sometimes undulate, long-lanceolate from a slightly narrowed base, 
plicate or keeled along the costa, the margins slightly crenulate along the 
middle, the apiculate point serrulate; costa slender, about 40u wide near 
the base, nearly or quite percurrent; cells of upper part of leaf mamillose on 
both sides, the median scarcely elongate, about 64 wide by 6—-9y long, in 
rows and somewhat furrowed between; basal cells much longer, with thick- 
ened and pitted walls often bearing prominent, scattered papillae over the 
surface; perichaetial leaves much like those of the branches but broader and 
smooth in the basal part; seta 14-18 mm. long, very rough throughout and 
twisted in the upper part when dry; capsule ovate, 8-ribbed when dry, about 
2 mm. long without lid, with stomata in three rows at its base, the conical 
lid with erect beak a little over 1 mm. long; preperistome of several rows of 
rather large, pale cells; peristome double, the outer of blunt teeth, at first 
united nearly to their apex, the outer surface finely punctate; inner peristome 
paler, about the height of the outer, the basal membrane extending about 
one-third up, the segments split into somewhat lanceolate, often irregular 
and curving points; spores rough, 35—40y in diameter; calyptra deeply fissured 
about the base and bearing prominent but rather scattered hairs over its 
surface. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Ecuador, at 9,500 ft. elevation, Sept. 3, 1918, J. N. & 
George Rose 23645, type. 


This apparently undescribed species has much the appearance of M. 


mov. 19, 1927 WILLIAMS: MOSSES FROM ECUADOR 493 
YO@NO\e- 
Bee Q 
cheat 
ae S YO, 
S95 my 
acing 
rOeaale 
OOOAAY | 
SOKAL|SE 
SOC IOe 
NEN) Vis 
teas 
QAR RON 
Figure A. Macromitrium huigrense, Sp. nov. 
1. Fruiting plant, about natural size. 9. Part of pedicel showing papillae, 
2. Male plant, X 40. x 200. 
3. Capsule, X 8. 10. Median cells of stem leaf, X 200. 
4. Calyptra, X 8. 11. Surface near base of leaf showing 
5. Stem leaf, X 8. papillae, X 200. 
6. Perichaetial leaf, x 8. 12. Leaf margin at base, X 200. 
7. Apex of stem leaf, X 200. 13. Part of peristome, X 150. 
8. Stoma, X 180. 


494 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 


proliferum Mitt., but the latter has a smooth pedicel. Except for the hairy 
calyptra it also somewhat resembles M. subscabrum Mitt. 7 


FUNARIA CALVESCENS Schwaegr. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Aug. 16 (23636). 
MIELICHHOFERIA Linpicir Hampe. 

Along railway, Sassa to Cotopaxi, Oct. 26 (23684). 
ACIDODONTIUM EXALTATUM Spruce. 

Vicinity of Huigra, at 6,000 ft. altitude, Aug. 18 (23634) ; 5,800 ft., Sept. 3 
(23641); 8,500 ft., Sept. 2 (23647); 8,800 ft., Sept. 4 (23649). 

ACIDODONTIUM SEMINERVE Hook. & Wils. 

Vicinity of Huigra, at 8,000 ft. altitude, Sept. 4 (23646). 
BRYUM ARGENTEUM L. : 

Vicinity of Cuenca, Sept. 17-24 (23666, 23673). Vicinity of Loja, Sept. 
29-Oct. 3 (23679). 

BryumM CrucEri Hampe. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Sept. 6 (23652). 
Mnivum LiguLatum C. M. 

Vicinity of Huigra, at 8,700 ft. altitude, Sept. 7 (23648). 
POLYTRICHADELPHUS ARISTATUS (Hampe) Mitt. 

Vicinity of Cumbe, Sept. 25 (23674). Zaragura, Sept. 27 (23677, 24044). 
POGONATUM POLYCARPUM (Sch.) Broth. | 

Near Cafiar, Sept. 16 (24037). 

POLYTRICHUM ANTILLARUM Rich. 

Vicinity of Azognes, Sept. 16 (23663). Vicinity of Cuenca, Sept. 17-24 
(23667). Along railway, Sasso to Cotopaxi, Oct. 26 (23683). Vicinity of 
Huigra, 5,500 ft. elevation, Aug. (23638). 

HeEpWIGIA ALBICANS (Web.) Lindb. 

Vicinity of Cuenca, Sept. 17-24 (24045). 
Ruacocarpus Excisus (C. M.) Par. 

Vicinity of Loja, Sept. 29—Oct. 3 (24002). 
PRIONODON LUTEOVIRENS (Tayl.) Mitt. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Oct. (24008, 24013). 
SQUAMIDIUM NIGRICANS (Hook.) Broth. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Sept. (24046). 
SQUAMIDIUM NITIDUM (Sull.) Broth. 

Vicinity of Huigra, at 5,200 ft. elevation, Sept. 3 (23640). 
PILOTRICHELLA HEXASTICHA (Schwaegr.) Jaeg. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Oct. (24000). 

PAPILLARIA IMPONDEROSA (Tayl.) Broth. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Oct. (24011). 
FLORIBUNDARIA TENUISSIMA (Hook. & Wils.) Broth. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Sept. (24047). 

LINDIGIA ACICULATA (Tayl.) Jaeg. 

Vicinity of Ayapamba, Oct. 15 (24048). 
METEORIOPSIS PATULA (Sw.) Broth. 

Vicinity of Cuenca, Sept. 17-24 (24050). Vicinity of Huigra, Oct. (24049). 
N&rckERA JAMESONI Tayl. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Aug. (23656) ; Sept. 11 (24051); Oct. (24001). 
Porotricuum KortTuaustanum (Dz. & Mb.) Mitt. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Oct. (24004). 

PorotTricHUM LONGIROSTRUM (Hook.) Mitt. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Oct. (24003). 


woy. 19, 1927 WILLIAMS: MOSSES FROM ECUADOR 495 


PoROTRICHUM STRIATUM Mitt. 

Vicinity of Huigra, at 9,000 ft. altitude, Sept. 7 (23651); Oct. (24006, 
24014). 
ENTODON BryRIcHII (Schwaegr.) C. M. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Aug. 16 (23631). 
ERYTHRODONTIUM LONGISETUM (Hook.) Par. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Sept. (23658.) Vicinity of Cuenca, Sept. 17-24 
(23668). 


Rozea Roseorum, sp. nov. 


Autoicous, the male flowers on the stem often near the base of the pedicel, 
about 0.2 mm. long, and consisting of pale, ecostate, ovate, lanceolate- 
pointed, nearly or quite entire leaves enclosing 6-8 antheridia. Plants in 
rather loose, thin cushions, with procumbent, slightly branching stems and 
distant, irregular branches, the latter mostly less than 1 cm. long; leaves 
rather cymbiform, scarcely plicate or recurved on the margins, narrowly 
ovate, acutely pointed and entire or minutely serrulate in the upper part, 
with costa vanishing near or a little above the middle of leaf; stem leaves 
2-3 mm. long, somewhat secund and spreading, those of the branches a little 
smaller, nearly erect and rather closely imbricate when dry, somewhat spread- 
ing when moist; leaf-cells smooth, elongate, except the basal, the median 
about 64 wide and up to 60uy long, slightly sinuous, with rounded ends and 
thin walls; the basal cells nearly square or transversely elongate, extending 
to the costa and upward for a distance of 15-25 cells in the margin; peri- 
chaetial leaves mostly entire, broadly lanceolate, with a pale, short costa, 
the inner a little shorter or sometimes longer than those of the stem; seta 
dark red, about 15 mm. long; capsule oblong to oblong-cylindric, 1.5-2 mm. 
long with the conical lid, the exothecal cells very irregular, more or less 
elongate, with thick walls, the stomata in 1 or 2 rows at the base; annulus 
none; peristome double, the teeth cross-striate on the outer face below, some- 
what obliquely striate near the middle and papillose above; segments of inner 
peristome finely papillose, from a basilar membrane nearly one-third the 
height of the teeth, narrowly lanceolate from a broad base, not or very 
slightly split along the keel, often rather irregular, mostly a little more than 
half the height of the teeth and without cilia; spores minutely punctate, up 
to 28u in diameter. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Ecuador, Sept. 12, 1918, J. N. & George Rose 23657, 
type. 


CYCLODICTYON ALBICANS (Sw.) Broth. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Aug. (24052). 
HOOKERIOPSIS ADUNCA (Mitt.) Jaeg. 

Vicinity of Cuenca, Sept. 17-24 (24053). 
LEPIDOPILUM INTERMEDIUM (C. M.) Mitt. 

On bamboo, vicinity of Huigra, Sept. 13 (23659). 
RHACOPILUM TOMENTOSUM (Sw.) Brid. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Aug. (23632); Oct. (24007). 
LESKEA GRACILLIMA Tay]. 

Vicinity of Cuenca, Sept. 17-24 (23669). 
RAUIA PLUMARIA (Mitt.) Broth. 

Vicinity of Huigra, Sept. (24054). 
THUIDIUM BRASILIENSE Mitt. 

Vicinity of Portovelo,Oct. 6-15 (24055). 


496 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 


eS 
SO = 
= 


ALE f 


——s 
~] 
ES 


Figure B. FRozgea Roseorum, sp. nov. 


1. Plant, about natural size. 7. Part of leaf base, X 200. 
2, 3. Upper and lower stem leaves, 8. Capsule, X 18. 
12: 9. Median cells of leaf, X 300. 
4. Inner perichaetial leaf, X 12. 10. Median cells of capsule, X 200. 
5. Male flower, X 12. 11. Stoma, X 200. 


6. Apex of stem leaf, X 300. 12. Part of peristome, X 150. 


Nov. 19, 1927 CHRISTENSEN: PTERIDOPHYTES FROM CHINA 497 


THUIDIUM CYLINDRACEUM Mitt. 
Vicinity of Huigra, Sept. 7 (24057). Without special locality or date 
(24056). 
THUIDIUM PERUVIANUM Mitt. 
Vicinity of Portovelo, Oct. 6-15 (23680). 
MITTENOTHAMNIUM ANDICOLA (Hook.) Card. 
Vicinity of Huigra, Oct. (24012). 
MITTENOTHAMNIUM REPTANS (Sw.) Card. 
Vicinity of Huigra, Aug. (24058). 


BOTANY.—On a small collection of pteridophytes from ihe province 
of Kansu, China. Cari CHRISTENSEN, Botanisk Museum, 
Copenhagen. i 


Although the fern flora of the southwestern provinces of China is 
now comparatively well known, very few species have been recorded 
hitherto from certain other provinces, notably Shan-si and Kansu. 
From the latter large province, which lies in the northwestern corner 
of China proper, the National Geographic Society’s Central China 
Expedition, under the direction of F. R. Wulsin, has brought home a 
small collection of ferns gathered by Mr. R. C. Ching in 1923, which 
Dr. William R. Maxon, Associate Curator of the U. S. National 
Herbarium, has sent me for identification. The collection contains 
barely a score of species, but is nevertheless very interesting, owing 
to the fact that here, so far to the north, we still find the same mixture 
of different regional elements that is noted in the southern provinces. 
As might be expected, the northern types (nine species) are in a 
majority; but not less than six species are of southern relationship, 
one or two of them (Drynaria, Polypodium) being nearly tropical; five 
species are common Central East Asiatic forms; and two (Athyrium 
and Adiantum pedatum) are common to North America and eastern 
Asia. 

The list of species is as follows, the new species being described at 
the end: 


WoopsIA GLABELLA R. Br. 

La Chang K’ou, near Sining; alt. 3060 m.; in shaded, very moist pockets of 
slopes (612). 
WoopstA LANOSA Hook. 

La Chang K’ou, near Sining; alt. 3000 m.; common in crevices of shaded 
cliffs by a stream (630). : 
Woopsia MAcRospora C. Chr. & Maxon, sp. nov. 

Gargannar, south of Old Taochow; alt. 3720 m.; crevices of rocky cliff, in a 
gorge; rare (906). 


1 Received October 5, 1927. 


498 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 


CYSTOPTERIS FRAGILIS (L.) Bernh. 

oss Ze Cheon K’ou, near Sining; alt. 2650 m.; shady cliffs; not common 
592). 

CYSTOPTERIS KANSUANA C. Chr., sp. nov. 

La Chang K’ou, near Sining; alt. 3060 m.; on densely shaded rocky cliff 
by astream (631). 

CYSTOPTERIS MONTANA (Lam.) Bernh. 

Ta Hwa, near Pingfan; alt. 2940 m.; common, under trees (553). Near 
Pingfan; alt. 2610 m.; common on moist, shaded cliffs (572). 

DRYOPTERIS BARBIGERA (Hook.) Kuntze. 

La Chang K’ou, near Sining; alt. 2910 m.; common on shaded rocky cliffs 
by a stream (635). | 
Dryopreris GirAuLpiI (Christ) C. Chr., sp. nov. 

Hsia Mo K’ou, near Lichen; alt. 2070 m.; common under trees (382). 
DryorTeris LINNABANA C. Chr., var. LONGULA Christ. 

Near Pingfan; alt. 2610 m.; common under trees, or on shaded moist rocky 
cliffs (573). 

DryopTerRis ROBERTIANA (Hoffm.) C. Chr. 

Gargannar, south of Old Taochow; alt. 3720 m.; in forest, at the foot of 
rocky cliffs; common (901). 

POLYSTICHUM SHENSIENSE Christ. 

Ta Hwa, near Pingfan; alt. 3210 m.; under bushes, in thin shade (518). 
La Chang K’ou, near Sining; alt. 3060 m.; shaded base of large rock on an 
exposed slope (609). 

POLYSTICHUM SHENSIENSE Christ, var. TENERIFRONS C. Chr. 

Archuen, south of Choni; alt. 4050 m.; common, in fir forest (979). 
ASPLENIUM SARELI1 Hook. 

Vicinity of Lichen; alt. 1860 m.; on shaded rocky cliff (307). 

ATHYRIUM ACROSTICHOIDES (Sw.) Diels. 

Gargannar, south of Old Taochow; alt. 4050 m.; mossy floor of densé 
fir and spruce forest; common (907). 

ADIANTUM RoBorowski Maxim. 

Gargannar, south of Old Taochow; alt. 3780 m.; on rocky cliff, in forest; 
common (902). 

ADIANTUM VENUSTUM Don. 

Lan Ze Cheon K’ou, near Sining; alt. 2610 m.; large dense colonies in very 
moist forest (587). 

ADIANTUM PEDATUM L. var. GLAUCINUM Christ. 

Hsia Mo K’ou, near Lichen; alt. 1950 m.; in dense forest (326). 
CHEILANTHES ARGENTEA (Gmel.) Kunze. 

Lan Ze Cheon K’ou, near Sining; alt. 2610 m.; on a shaded rocky cliff 
(597). 

CRYPTOGRAMME STELLERI (Gmel.) Prantl. 

La Chang K’ou, near Sining; alt. 3000 m.; moist crevices of shaded rock- 
slopes; common (614). 

POLYPODIUM CLATHRATUM Clarke. 

Near Pingfan; alt. 2610 m.; rocky crevice of shaded cliff, in moist gorge; 
common (571). Gargannar, south of Old Taochow; alt. 3750 m.; common on 
rocky cliffs in forest (903). 

DRYNARIA SINICA Diels. 

Moist exposed foothills, near Pingfan; alt. 2460 m.; forming dense carpet; 

common (481). 


Nov. 19, 1927 CHRISTENSEN: PTERIDOPHYTES FROM CHINA 499 


EQUISETUM RAMOSISSIMUM Desf. 
Vicinity of Ningsia; alt. 1770 m.; common along mountain streams (204). 


Woodsia macrospora C. Chr. & Maxon, sp. nov. 


Rhizome suberect, stout, 2-3 cm. long, 1-1.5 em. thick, becoming multi- 
cipital, densely clothed with thin, yellowish brown, lanceolate-subulate scales. 
Fronds numerous, laxly ascending, 8-15 cm. long, the stipes 2-8 cm. long, 
slender, dull yellowish, scantily clothed with lax linear-subulate scales, these 
smaller upward, extending throughout the rachis, intermixed with long and 
short septate hairs; blades lance-oblong, slightly or not reduced at base, 
obtuse at apex, 6-9 cm. long, 2-2.5 cm. broad, pinnate, terminating abruptly 
in a subconform pinna, thin-herbaceous, delicately flaccid-hairy throughout, 
with shorter hairs intermixed; pinnae 6-8 pairs below the terminal one, 
subequal, 10-13 mm. long, 5-8 mm. broad, nearly horizontal, alternate to 
subopposite, sessile, ovate-oblong, subequally truncate-cordate at base, 
broadly rounded at apex, crenate; veins evident, once or twice forked; sori 
large, uniserial, medial; sporangia with a few flaccid hairs intermixed, large, 
globose, with a thick annulus, the spores very large (about 60u in diameter, 
nearly black, globose, in lateral view coarsely verrucose, 1.e., the exosporium 
furnished with reticulate crests. 

Gargannar, south of Old Taochow; alt. 3720 m.; crevices of rocky cliff, 
in gorge; rare, August 29, 1923; R. C. Ching 906. 

In general habit somewhat resembling Woodsia Rosthornii Diels (W. 
Delavayi Christ), which, however, is much more hairy and has the blade 
narrowed gradually downward, the apex pinnatifid. Otherwise our new 
Species seems very unlike all other members of the genus, being especially 
remarkable for its impari-pinnate blade, large sporangia, and large black 
spores. The spores of W. Andersonz Christ, though similar, are scarcely 
verrucose, and that species is otherwise very different. 


Cystopteris kansuana C. Chr., sp. nov. 


Rhizome short-creeping, slender, 2-4 cm. long, about 1 mm. thick, flexuous, 
branched, very scantily paleaceous. Fronds several, borne 2-5 mm. apart, 
laxly ascending, 8-16 cm. long, the stipes capillary, castaneous, nearly or 
quite as long as the blades, with a few thin scales at base, glabrous; blades 
lanceolate, long-acuminate to a subcaudate apex, 4-8 cm. long, 1.3-2 cm. 
broad below the middle, bipinnate, thin-herbaceous, glabrous; pinnae in 6 or 7 
well-developed pairs below the pinnatifid apex, the lower ones at distances 
of 1—1.5 cm. apart, short-petiolulate, subopposite, 1 ecm. long or less, deltoid, 
inequilateral at base, the costae winged; pinnules 1-3 pairs below the pin- 
natifid apex, the distal basal one much the largest, toothed, with the teeth 
cleft; veins raised beneath, pinnate in the larger segments, forked in the 
smaller ones, running out to the extreme sinus of the emarginations, these 
usually bordered by 2 unequal teeth; sori medial or inframedial; indusium 
ovate, entire, brown, persistent; spores. immature. 

La Chang K’ou, near Sining; alt. 3060 m.; on densely shaded rocky cliff, 
by astream; R. C. Ching 631. 


In several respects the present species is similar to small forms of C. fragilis, 
from which it differs in its distinctly unequal-sided pinnae and raised veins, 
and especially by the termination of the veins; these run invariably to the 


500 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 


actual sinus of emarginations, whereas in C. fragilis they run out to the tip 
of the teeth. In C. regia (L.) Desv. also the veins run to marginal sinuses, 
but from this species C. kansuana is readily distinguished by its smaller size 
and less incised blades, and especially by its acroscopic basal pinnules, the 
pinnae being strongly inequilateral at base (the produced upper base trun- 
cate, the lower cuneate). C. kanswana finds a closer ally in C. Mairei 
Brause, from Yunnan, which has similarly unequal-sided pinnae with the 
veins running to emarginations, but that is a much larger plant, with stipe 
more than 20 cm. long and tripinnatifid blades. 


Dryopteris (Eudryopteris) Giraldii (Christ) C. Chr., sp. nov. 


Aspidium filtxmas var. Giraldii Christ, Nuov. Giorn. Bot. Ital. n. s. 4: 
94. 1897. 

Rhizome probably erect or oblique. Fronds suberect, up to 75 cm. long 
or more; stipe stramineous, up to 35 em. long, rather freely but deciduously 
paleaceous, the scales thin, pale brown, narrowly lanceolate; blade broadly 
deltoid-ovate, about 40 cm. long and broad, bipinnate-pinnatifid, herbaceous, 
pale green, devoid of hairs, the rachis stramineous, glabrous, but more or less 
paleaceous by soft pale lanceolate-linear scales; pinnae about 10 pairs, alter- 
nate, the basal ones often a little shorter than the following, their lower side 
not or very slightly produced; largest pinnae about 20 cm. long, 6 cm. broad, 
petiolate (1 em.), acuminate, unequal at base, the distal basal pinnule being 
somewhat elongate, the proximal one generally much shortened; pinnules 
12-15 pairs, alternate, the larger ones short-petiolate, the upper sessile and 
decurrent (costae sometimes alate to the base), inequilateral at base, narrowly 
deltoid, acuminate, about 4 cm. long, 1 cm. broad or more, pinnatifid two- 
thirds or three-fourths the distance to the costa, or the larger ones of the lower 
pinnae near pinnate; segments close, oblique, oblong, ending in 4-6 unequal, 
sharp, often spinulose, falcate teeth; distal basal segment as a rule somewhat 
elongate, the proximal one oblique, often much shortened; veins pinnate in 
the lobes, the ultimate ones simple, terminating in a hydathode at the base 
of the teeth; sori borne on the middle of the anterior basal veinlets of the 
segments, solitary or the larger segments bearing 3-6; indusia reniform, about 
1 mm. broad, persistent, glabrous, the margins slightly erose. 

Kansu: Hsia Mo K’ou, near Lichen; alt. 2070 m.; common under trees; 
July 8, 1923; R. C. Ching 382. 3 

SHEN-sI: Many collections, Giraldi (reported by Christ, loc. cit.); also 
Purdom 67. 

SHAN-sI: Several localities, Harry Smith 5642, 6384, 6536, 7621. 

SzE-CHuan: Harry Smith 4704. 


This species, which evidently is common in the mountains of Central 
China, is most distinct, but has been referred to various species. Numerous 
specimens collected in Shen-si Province by Giraldi, which are quite identical 
with those from Kansu and Shan-si Provinces, were regarded by Christ as a 
variety of D. filixmas; and I myself have referred with doubt certain material? 
from Shen-si to D. marginata (Wall.) Christ, and to the same species other 
specimens’ from northern Sze-chuan which differ somewhat from D. Giraldi 


2 Bot. Gaz. 62: 332. 1911. 
3 Med. Bot. Tradgird, Géteborg 1: 61. 


Nov. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 501 


in their smaller sori and more acuminate segments, with shorter teeth, but 
are otherwise identical. From all the allies of D. filixmas with more divided 
blades (D. marginata, D. fructuosa, and others) D. Giraldii differs, however, 
very distinctly in its unequal-sided secondary pinnules. In this character it 
resembles D. sparsa (Ham.) Kuntze, and it is in my opinion a member of the 
small group of which that is the best known species. D. sparsa differs widely 
from D. Giraldii in its much thicker texture and in having the teeth not 
nearly so sharp. 

To this group belong also D. Sabaei (Fr. & Sav.) C. Chr. and D. sub- 
tripinnata (Miq.) Kuntze, these, perhaps, forms of a single species which 
may include also D. gymnophylla (Baker) C. Chr.; and I think several Chinese 
specimens of D. Giraldiz have actually been referred to D. Sabaez. That 
species differs in its smaller size and broad deltoid blades, with strongly 
basiscopic pinnae. 

There remains yet to compare the new species with D. laeta (Komarov) 
C. Chr., which is unknown to me. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED 
SOCIETIES 


PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 


956TH MEETING 


The 956th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club April 17, 1927. 
Program: GREGORY BREIT: Wave mechanics. 


957TH MEETING 


The 957th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club April 30, 1927. 

Program: Howarp 8S. RappLeyE: Some ‘‘fool proof’ checks on computa- 
tions. A short discussion of various methods of checking certain types of 
calculations and their value in freeing the computation from blunders or 
mistakes of considerable size rather than checking absolutely the last figure 
of the result. 

The idea was emphasized that a check computation which arrived at the 
final result by a route or method differing as widely as possible from that 
followed or used in the original calculation was most apt to render the com- 
putation free from “‘busts.’’ Several examples of somewhat unusual checking 
methods were given. 

A method of checking the computation of the observed seconds in observa- 
tions taken with a direction theodolite was explained in detail as an example 
of the type of check which varies so widely from the original computation as 
to be a fair example of a ‘‘fool-proof”’ check. 

P. Hipnert: The thermal expansion of graphite. (Tech. Pap. Bur. Stand. 
21: 223-230. 1927.) 

C. H. Mryrrs and M. 8. Van Dusen: The vapor pressure of liquid carbon 
dioxide. ‘The vapor pressure of carbon dioxide was observed from the triple 
point (—56.59°C.) to the eritical point (+31.1°C.). The results are based 
on observations of three samples which were in contact only with glass and 


502 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 


mercury. Observations were made on five samples in metal containers but, 

because of unsatisfactory experimental conditions, the results obtained with 

these samples were given no weight in selecting the final values for the vapor 
ressure. 

i The material was prepared from pure sodium bicarbonate and pure sul- 

phuric acid, and was purified by fractional sublimations and distillations. 

Measurements of the triple point pressure (5.113 atmos.) were made, and 
the triple point temperature was calculated from an equation which represents 
the vapor pressure measurements. 

Observations of the critical temperature (31.1°C.) and its corresponding 
pressure (72.95 atmos.) were also made. 

A six constant equation was used to represent the results. It is believed 
that the values calculated from this equation are not in error by more than 1 
part in 3000. 

The results were compared with those of previous observers. 

Tables were published which give the vapor pressure in atmospheres or 
millimeters of mercury for each degree Centigrade and in pounds per square 
inch for each degree Fahrenheit. 


958TH MEETING 


The 958th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club May 14, 1927. 

Program: Oscar 8. Apams: The readjustment of the western triangulation 
net. During the past fifty years the first-order triangulation in the West 
has been gradually extended until now the total length of arcs is about twelve 
or thirteen thousand miles, or enough to reach half way around the earth at 
the equator. The earlier adjustments were made in separate sections as the 
work was finished and any loop closures that developed were adjusted into 
the last are of the loop. To correct this obviously unjustifiable procedure, 
Major William Bowie, Chief of the Division of Geodesy of the U. 8S. Coast and 
Geodetic Survey, early in 1924 devised a method of adjusment by the use of 
junction points and intermediate sections of ares so that these closures could 
be distributed throughout the whole network and no section would be re- 
quired to absorb an undue amount of the closures. . By the use of the Laplace 
azimuths in the adjustments of the sections, the resulting closures of circuits 
have been reduced considerably from what were found when no such con- 
ditions were introduced. In the total number of loops that were adjusted, 
the largest closure is 31 feet in 950 miles, which amounts to about ten paces 
in a distance equal to that from Washington to Kansas City. Only two loop 
closures were greater than one part in 200,000 and the mean of all the closures 
was about one part in 450,000. The closure around the entire outer boundary 
is 33 feet, in a distance of 5300 miles, or approximately one part in 842,000. 

N. H. Heck: [nternational attack on the earthquake problem. From time to 
time there have been discussions on seismology before the Society, but the 
international background has never been presented. 

The important contribution of Europe was discussed at considerable 
length. . 

Great Britain was the first to establish throughout the earth seismological 
stations with photographically-recording instruments and was among the 
first to study wave transmission and identify the various phases. Accord- 
ingly, this country is responsible for the long series of tables of epicenters of 
earthquakes from 1899 to the present, though since 1917 the International 
Seismological Summary has been prepared in Great Britain under the auspices 
of the International Geodetic and Geophysical Union. 


Nov. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 503 


* The Germans have used visible-recording seismographs of great mass to 
eliminate the effect of friction. Important contributions from this country 
include mathematical studies and identification of phases resulting from 
reflection and refraction, also identification of surfaces of discontinuity and 
study of depth of focus. Preparation of travel-time curves and tables has 
been an important contribution. 

The conception of a 60 km. layer beneath the continents is due to the work 
of the two Mohorovicics in Jugoslavia. : 

A very important Russian contribution was the Galitzin instrument, 
which in spite of certain difficulties is probably one of the best and most 
sensitive seismographs in existence today. Galitzin himself contributed an 
important treatise on transmission of elastic waves and the theory of the 
seismograph. French, Spanish and Italian contributions were discussed. 

Accordingly, the European attack on the earthquake problem is chiefly 
from the mathematical and physical viewpoint. The study has been aided 
by the relative infrequency of earthquakes, but also handicapped by the 
comparative lack of data recorded as compared to other countries. 

Coming to Asia, the Dutch East Indies have contributed by showing that 
submarine geology can be studied by means of seismograph investigations. 

To supplement existing impressions of the great destruction in Japan 
accompanying the earthquake of September 1, 1923, a number of special 
instances were given as to the disturbances of activities of all sorts. In- 
stances included complete destruction of the Hydrographic Office, the Land 
Office, partial destruction of the Imperial University at Tokyo, changes in 
Sagami Bay resulting from the raised shore and effect of land slides. A 
number of lantern slides depicting earth damage were shown. 

The Japanese are placing considerable confidence in scientific investigation. 
They are replacing their undamped with damped instruments and have 
Galitzin instruments in Tokyo. They have a special apparatus for recording 
very long waves. 

The situation in the rest of Asia, in Africa, and the American continents 
south of the United States was discussed, as well as Australia and the South 
Pacific. 

In Canada, Dr. Klotz contributed important travel-time tables and an 
important investigation is going on at present. 

In the United States, an early start was made with an American first 
suggesting the use of damping. However, the work failed to catch the 
imagination of the people and only moderate progress, scarcely worthy of this 
country, has been made. Recently the joint investigations in California by 
the Carnegie Institution of Washington, government bureaus, universities, 
and business institutions; the reorganization of the Jesuit Seismological 
Association and the installation of new instruments, adoption of improved 
methods and preparation of travel-time tables; the progress of the Coast and 
Geodetic Survey, which includes improved instruments in Porto Rico, Hawaii, 
and Alaska, as well as in certain places in the United States, all point to 
renewed activity in the subject which is likely to lead to important results. 
The Coast and Geodetic Survey is also preparing a quarterly report giving all 
earthquake shocks felt or recorded in the United States. 

To a certain extent this growth may be trusted to continue, and the sug- 
gestion is made that physicists will find in this field ample opportunities for 
investigation and worth-while work which is contributing to the interests of 
humanity. 


504 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . VOL. 17, NO. 19 


Q59TH MEETING | : 


The 959th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, May 28, 1927. 

Program: C. 8. CRAGOE: The thermal properties of petroleum oils. 

G. R. Waits and H. U. SverpRup: Preliminary note on the electromotive 
forces possibly produced by the earth’s rotating magnetic field, and on the observed 
diurnal variation of the atmospheric potential gradient. ‘The first part of the 
paper contains a formal computation of the electromotive forces which would 
be induced, upon certain hypotheses, at the magnetic poles of the earth on 
account of the rotation of its magnetic field. Supposing that these electro- 
motive forces act upon charged particles entering the upper atmosphere and 
coming from the sun, it is possible to compute an incoming ‘‘current.”’ The 
principal assumptions are: (1) That charged particles of a given sign are 
accelerated towards the earth when the electromotive forces have certain 
directions referred to the relative position of sun and earth, and (2) that the 
effect is of equal magnitude along the three rectangular axes. The “‘current”’ 
thus computed shows a diurnal variation and annual variations of phase- 
angle and of amplitude which are in remarkable agreement with correspond- 
ing variations of the atmospheric potential-gradient as actually determined 
from observations made at sea by the Carnegie, in the Arctic by the Maude 
expenditions, and at certain land stations. This agreement appears to be 
too good to be accidental; it is difficult, however, to develop a physical basis 
to explain, entirely satisfactorily, more than a quantitative relationship 
between the two phenomena: 

H. E. Merwin, Recording Secretary. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


Prof. H. N. Russreuu of Princeton University gave a talk at the Bureau 
-of Standards on November 4, on The structure of the elements of the iron group. 

J. W. Frencu, Technical Director of Barr & Stroud, Ltd., manufacturers 
of military optical instruments, Glaszow, lectured on Optical glass at the 
Bureau of Standards on October 15. 

The grasses collected on the South Atlantic Expedition, 1923-1926, ce the 
Cleveland Museum of Natural History, exploring schooner BLOssoM under 
the command of George Finlay Simmons, have been sent to the Grass Her- 
barium for study. Except for a few from Senegal the grasses were all col- 
lected on islands on both sides of the Atlantic. While the collection is not 
large there are many species not before recorded from Ascension, St. Helena, 
South Trinidad, Fernando Naronha, and the Cape Verde group. A complete 
set 1s deposited in the Grass Herbarium. 

The American Ornithologists’ Union held its annual meeting at the National 
Museum November 14 to 17. The officers for the year 1926-1927 were: 
Alexander Wetmore, Assistant Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution in 
charge of the National Museum, President; T. S$. Palmer and W. L. McAtee, 
of the Biological Survey, Secretary and Treasurer. An account of the meet- 
ing will be published in a later number of the JOURNAL. 


Se aed peat tea 


2 CEMENTS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY ANDY fo 
Bho serge ee SOCENT URS heh eons et i 


The Helminthotogiead Society. 

_ The Biological Society. Hea AP ae ao TES neue 
The Medical Society. Ge Nina eit 

The Geological Society. Program: | Pats 

De aie ‘Leon Count: The structure of the Alps. 

er26. The Philosophical Society, = © 

aba _ The Chemical Society: ‘data 1 Wee ahs 


Intersectional meeting at Sotlepe Park, Md. ; 
The Medical Society. | Mi ; 
e # The agency ati : i 
ot ey eee by the eleventh and twenty-fifth aay, of each month. 


hi ho ees i pod : 5 uo J 
ie oe ee ee 
=f og 
Oy ae -. Drcremper 4, 1927- : TINO. 20 
ey yu! toh tHE ry, k Fe; 
gf : ; 2 irc UE on ya : 3" 
fA ee: ee ay 
ae: ’ si Be 
- -JOURNAL “Seas” 
OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
fF ‘OF SCIENCES. _— 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


- Witu1am J. Peters Aanus Cusp Joun B. Rezsipu, Jr. 
RIMENT OF THRRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM 
| ASSOCIATE EDITORS: 

L. H. Apams S. A. Ronwer 
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 

E. A. Gotpman ee G. W. Srosz 
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GHOLOGICAL SOCIETY 

R. F. Griaas J. R. Swanton 
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


Roger C. WELus 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


o PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 


BY THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Mz. Royat anp Guitrorp Avzs. 
_ Banriworr, MarybanD  __ 


" Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
- Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. 


J puna of the Washington Academy of Sciences 


This J OURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Aondling of dcleheaey aims to 4 
present a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this end it ahi 5 eae 
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) 
zhort notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington; eae 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; Chee 
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALisissued 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except during thesummer 
whenit appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendar years. Prompt 
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or — 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the sage. in ie oe : 
issue of the Jougnat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. ie 


Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should | be 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The — 
editors cannot undertake to do more than eorrect obvious minor errors. References 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate — 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. 2 

Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures 
or diagrams of simple character. . 

Proof.—in order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors 
unless requested. It is urged that palo hs be submitted in final form; the editors 
will exercise due care in seeing that c opy is followed. aes 

Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices. ma 


Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp 16 pp Cover 
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2 .00 
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6. 2.50 
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00 
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50 
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00 


Anadditional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi- 
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. : 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints 3 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. es 


The rate of Subscription per volume is.......cc.ceceecececcs gti cae ce caeees $6.00" 
pemi-monthiy numbers: i600) 0 Sue aa ones ce ees wle ee ake eae ecae 
Monthly numibere. oreo sci ul 6 vices vs cteen vedas che kan eaceares ws 6 a ie 6 slg shee 


Remitiances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences, and 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, D.C. 

European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, Londen 

Eachanges.—The Journnat does not exchange with other ‘publications, 

Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made 
within thirty days after date of the following issue. 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be aent for $3.00. Special rates — 
are given to members of scientifie societies affiliated with the Academy. 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 


Vou. 17 DEcEMBER 4, 1927 No. 20 


GEOLOGY.—A recent collection of late Pliocene invertebrates from the 
head-waters of the Amazon.' JuLIA GARDNER, U. 8. Geological 
Survey. 


Through the courtesy of Dr. Joseph T. Singewald, Jr., a collection 
of late Tertiary fossil invertebrates, chiefly Mollusca, made from 
deposits along the Peruvian head-waters of the Amazon during 
the field season of 1925, has been sent to the U. 8. Geological 
Survey for examination. More than fifty years ago, in December, 
1867, a similar fauna was collected at Pebas, in the same region, by 
James Orton, at that time the head of the Department of Geology 
at Vassar College. Professor Orton spent only a few hours at Pebas, 
but later and more extensive collections were made by Mr. Hauxwell, 
a naturalist of long residence in the Amazon Valley. Field observa- 
tions were also made by Dr. Charles Frederick Hartt, who first went 
to Brazil as a member of Agassiz’s staff on the Thayer expedition and 
later was appointed chief of Dom Pedro’s Geological Commission. 
The Mollusca collected during these early explorations were distributed 
internationally and reports were made in scientific journals of the 
United States, England, and Austria and, very much later, of Brazil. 
The fauna was involved in questions of unusual interest—the age; 
the nature of the environment, whether dominantly fresh water, brack- 
ish, or marine; and the bearing of the deposits upon Agassiz’s theory, 
later discarded, of the glacial origin of the Amazon valley. Gabb? con- 
sidered the fauna “marine or perhaps rather a brackish water fauna’ 
but did not commit himself upon the age further than the observation 


1 Received November 3, 1927. 
2W.M. Gass, Descriptions of fossils from the clay deposits of the Upper Amazon. 
Am. Journ. Conch. 4: 197-200. pl. 16, f. 1-6. 1869. 


505 


506 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20 


that the retention of the color markings of Neritina “would point to a 
very recent era.’’ Conrad? believed the age “‘not later than Tertiary”’ 
and the biota either fresh or brackish but certainly not marine. He 
also observed that the condition of preservation of the double valves 
precluded the possibility of transportation for any distance from the 
spot in which the animal lived and died. Woodward?‘ did not greatly 
concern himself with the age further than assigning the fauna to the 
Tertiary, but he refuted Agassiz’s theory of the glacial origin of the 
deposits both by his own observations and by a communication from 
Professor Orton to the effect that ‘“‘the perfect preservation of the 
most delicate parts, some specimens retaining even the epidermis, 
shows a quiet lake or estuary,’’ and ‘‘that there certainly are no indica- 
tions of a grinding glacier.’ Woodward was convinced of the estua- 
rine ecology of the fauna and believed that the raised beaches observed 
by Darwin near the mouth of the Rio Plata and packed with Azara 
labiata d’Orbigny furnish an almost perfect analogy. Boettger’® 
thought the Pebas deposits represented the old delta of the Marafion, 
and that in the depth and extent of the old delta we have a geologic 
chronometer. He concluded that the Pebas was an interior fauna 
living at the mouth of the Marafion during Oligocene or possibly even 
Eocene times. He further observed that the extreme variability of the 
few but abundant species is characteristic of all interior faunas. Bar- 
rington Brown,® while engaged in geological work for the Amazon 
Steam Navigation Company, traced the Pebas beds as far down as 
Sao Paulo, 150 miles below the Peruvian boundary and more than 
double that number below Pebas. He found them, too,-50 miles up 
from the mouth of the Javary, the ‘stream entering the Marafion, as 
the Amazon is commonly known in that area, from the south and 
west and forming the boundary line between Peru and Brazil. He 
gave several sections, all of them indicating more or less clearly an 
interfingering series of blue clays and lignites, the clays commonly 
fossiliferous, the clay-lignite series overlain commonly to a consider- 
able thickness by a mottled grey and red clay, the ‘‘Drift” of Agassiz. 
The fauna, collected at Canama, on the Javary, was studied by 


3T. A. Conran, Descriptions of new fossil shells of the Upper Amazon. Am. Journ. 
Conch. 6: 192-198. pl. 10, 11; f.1, 7,8. 1871. 

4Henry Woopwarp, The Tertiary shells of the Amazon Valley. Ann. Mag. Nat. 
Hist. (4) 7: 59-64; 101-109. 1871. 

5 Oskar Bortrcer, Die Tertidrfauna von Pebas am oberen Maranon. Kais.—k6n. 
geol. Reichsanst., Jahrb. 28: 485-504. - pl. 13-14. 1878. 

6C. Barrincton Brown, On the Tertiary deposits on the Solimées and Javary Rivers 
in Brazil. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London 35; 76-81. 1879. , 


DEC. 4, 1927 GARDNER: LATE PLIOCENE INVERTEBRATES 507 


Etheridge,’ who considered it Tertiary, fresh water, estuarine, possibly 
in part marine, and inferred from it a westward extension of the sea 
1500 to 2000 miles west of the present debouchure of the Amazon. 
The Chara seeds common in the lignite are apparently referable to a 
genus widely distributed in stagnant, fresh, and brackish water. The 
excellent state of preservation of the wood, some of it only slightly 
altered, and the occasional coating of the woody parts of the surfaces 
with iron pyrites was noted by Barrington Brown. Interest in the 
Pebas fauna lapsed after 1879, but has been recently revived because 
of the economic possibilities, both in lignite and in the possible oc- 
currence of petroleum. In 1924, De Oliveira Roxo® reprinted the 
figures and much of the text of the papers by Gabb, Etheridge, and 
Woodward and described two new species, one a Planorbis, the other 
assigned to Pupura, a marine genus. ‘The figure is not convincing, 
however, and too much weight should not be given to the determina- 
tion. He doubtless reflected, however, the consensus of later opinion 
when he deduced a comparatively late age for the fauna, the upper 
Pliocene. 

The Singewald collections were made at the classic Pebas locality 
and from a number of other outcrops on the Marafion and Napo Rivers 
from which the series had not been previously reported. ‘This gives a 
possible area of outcrop extending from above Iquitos, Peru, to Sao 
Paulo, Brazil, some 400 to 500 miles along the Marafion; some 50 miles 
up the Napo, which enters the Marafion from the north; and an almost 
equal distance up the Javary, which enters it from the south. The 
series of fine grained clays and lignites through which the Marafion 
cuts its channel from Iquitos to Sao Paulo is apparently similar to that 
reported along the front of the Andes from Peru, through Bolivia and 
well down into the Argentine. 

Both the sediments and the state of preservation of the fauna— 
especially the common occurrence of the locked double valves of 
Amsothyris—indicate deposition in very quiet water. In some of the 
deposits there was not only no rapid movement but not even sufficient 
circulation to carry off the decaying animal matter, and the shale and 
its contained fauna present the characteristic features of the “black 


7R. Etueriper, Notes on the Mollusca collected by C. Barrington Brown, Esq., from 
the Tertiary deposits of Solimées and Javary Rivers, Brazil. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 
London 35: 82-88. pl. 7. 1879. 

8M. G. DE OLIVEIRA Roxo, Contribuigdo a paleontologia do Valle do Amazonis. 
Serv. Geol. Min. Brasil, Bol. 11: 1-52. 1924. 


508 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20 


shale’”’ described by Goldman*—a blue black shale heavily impregnated 
with iron pyrites and carrying a few but very abundant depauperate 
species. Such deposits are particularly characteristic of the mouths 
of rivers, where precipitation of suspended matter is suddenly ac- 
celerated not only by the loss of current velocity but also by the ad- 
ditional deposition induced by the salt water, particularly the floccula- 
tion of the organic matter. 

The entire Pebas fauna includes less than a score of species, most of 
them adaptable to either fresh or brackish water. One member of the 
Potamides group, described under the name Cerithium coronatum 
Etheridge, is not known to penetrate the upper courses of the rivers. 
Abundant small gastropods are referable to a group which favors the 
river just above the mouth. Cypris sp., the common fresh water os- 
tracod, is present in considerable numbers. The most abundant and 
by far the most characteristic group, Antsothyris, a non-marine bivalve 
related to Corbula, has not been recognized in the Recent waters but 
finds a close analogue in Azara labiata d’Orbigny, abundant at the 
mouth of the Rio de la Plata. Darwin observed this species not only 
near Montevideo but also near San Pedro on the Parana, about 100 
miles in an air line above Buenos Aires, where he noted vast numbers 
of Azara labiata packing the loose sands some 100 feet above the river 
bed. Mingled with the Azara of Montevideo, however, are numerous 
littoral species of which there is no trace in the Pebas fauna. Though 
the greater number of the Pebas species suggest the proximity of salt 
water, it does not seem probable that the Atlantic Ocean washed the 
foothills of the Andes so late as the Upper Pliocene. Even today the 
Amazon River suggests a series of inland lakes and this was probably 
true in the late Tertiary not only of the Amazon drainage but also of 
rivers to the south. The Andean streams must already have spread 
wide deltas, for the sediments are all fine. Across such flood plains 
the rivers wandered, leaving bayous and ox bows which perhaps 
became increasingly saline. The freest movement of the Pebas fauna 
seems to have been to the south, since there is probably a genetic 
relationship between two groups so unique and so strongly character- 
ized as Azara and Anisothyris. Both Anisothyris and Azara are 
much restricted in their distribution. Anisothyris is characteristic 
of the head-waters of the Amazon, Azara of the lower La Plata. Azara 
is sparsely represented in Rio Grande do Sul but no trace of it has 


°M. I. Goupman, ‘‘Black shale’’ formation in and about Chesapeake Bay. Bull. Am. 
Assoc. Petr. Geol. 8: 195-201. 1924. 


pDEc. 4, 1927 LEONARD: RUELLIA TUBEROSA AND RELATIVES 509 


been recorded from the lower Amazon. The line of communication 
between the late Pliocene Anisothyris and the recent Azara was prob- 
ably over the even now ill-defined divide between the upper Amazon 
and the La Plata. The close relationship between the fossil Mollusca 
of the head-waters of the Amazon and those now living in the lower 
La Plata is brought out much more emphatically by the fresh-water 
mussels of the Pebas fauna, which are now under investigation by 
William B. Marshall, Assistant Curator of the U.S. National Museum. 

The loosely organized drainage of the Upper La Plata and the Upper 
Amazon seems a more plausible explanation of the existing faunal 
relationships than the later erection of a barrier between the Upper and 
Lower Amazon. In any case there is little trace of any recent lineage 
of the late ‘Tertiary Pebas faunas in the lower waters of the Amazon. 


BOTANY.—Ruellia tuberosa and a few of its close relatwes.1. KMERY 
C. Lronarp, National Museum. (Communicated by WILLIAM 
R. Maxon). 


Every monographer, no doubt, is familiar with the fact that in most 
of his special groups there will be found a species more troublesome 
and puzzling than any of the others, a species with an extensive range, 
with numerous variations, and, when treated in monographs, often 
with a long list of synonyms. Scutellaria angustifolia Pursh of the 
skulleaps, Passiflora foelida L. of the passionflowers, and Ruellia 
tuberosa L. may be cited as examples. If they are treated as poly- 
morphic species their descriptions will be too indefinite or elastic to be 
- of much scientific value. If they are subdivided into a number of 
“‘species,’’ based on slight or variable characters, the nomenclature 
will be cumbersome and the keys difficult to follow; furthermore, the 
types of the segregated species will have been chosen to represent 
extremes of variation, and there will remain a number of poorly 
defined intermediate examples. | 

In highly variable species of this sort an intermediate course is often 
practicable. If abundant material is available, it will usually be 
possible to select suitable characters on which to base a central type as 
a nucleus, around which may be grouped the closely related forms, 
mostly as varieties. Often on following such a plan it will be found 
that these will conform more or less to definite geographic areas. In 


1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 
Received October 27, 1927. 


510 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20 


the present work, a paper preliminary to a revision of the American 
Ruellias, the complex “‘species” Ruellza tuberosa L. is treated in accord- 
ance with this plan. 

Ruellva, of the family Acanthaceae, is a large and variable genus, 
which has sometimes been subdivided into numerous genera. The 
plants vary from small herbs a few centimeters high to large bushy 
shrubs; the flowers may be inconspicuous or large and showy; the 
corollas tubular or broadly campanulate, and in color mauve, white, 
yellow, pink, or bright crimson; the indument extremely variable. 
Yet constant throughout all the species stand the four perfect didymous 
stamens, with the filaments of each pair united at the base and decur- 
rent on the corolla tube, the oblong symmetric anthers, and the cylin- 
dric or clavate capsules. | 

It may be interesting to call attention to the type of seeds found in 
this genus. They are invariably flat and suborbicular. Though 
covered by a closely adhering pubescence, the surface, when dry, 
appears glabrous; if moistened, the flattened inconspicuous covering 
swells into a woolly gelatinous mass. 


KEY TO THE SPECIES 


Ovary and capsule glabrous. : 
Mature capsule slender, cylindric, 3 mm. broad; calyx ciliate or gla- . 


LOPEGe Pee A Ee sp onh eI RUPE AY SDSL Meee AS el ea 1. R. tuberosa. 
Mature capsule stipitate, 4 to 5 mm. broad; calyx more or less glandular- 
utlberulle nts Agee eee nema mel a Be eae 2. R. intermedia. 


Ovary and capsule puberulent. 
Capsule eglandular or very sparingly glandular (North America). 
3. KR. nudiflora. 
Capsule densely glandular-puberlent (South America)....4. R. lorentavana. 


1. RUELLIA TUBEROSA L. Sp. Pl. 634. 1753. 
Ruellia clandestina L. Sp. Pl. 634. 1753. 
Cryphiacanthus barbadensis Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 197. 1847 (in part). 
Roots clustered, thick-fibrous or fusiform; stems erect or ascending, usu- 
ally branched, obscurely quadrangular, pilose or glabrate, bearing numerous 
minute cystoliths; petioles 0.5 em. long, channeled, pilose or glabrate; leaf 
blades ovate or oblong, 2 to 11 cm. long, 1.5 to 6 cm. broad, obtuse at apex, 
abruptly narrowed toward base, undulate-crisped, rather thick, sparsely 
pilose or glabrous, the cystoliths numerous, 0.1 to 0.25 mm. long; flowers 
one to several, in erect or ascending dichotomous cymes, the peduncles up to 
4 cm. long, glabrous or pilosulous, obscurely quadrangular, the cystoliths 
prominent; bracts linear, 3 to 8 mm. long; pedicels 5 to 10 mm. long, puberu- 
lent or glabrate; calyx 15 to 28 mm. long, the tube very short, the segments 
narrowly linear or subulate, ciliate or ‘glabrous, often spreading: corolla 
showy, purple, 3 to 6 cm. long, sparsely puberulent, the tube about 1 cm. 
long, 3 mm. in diameter, the throat narrowly campanulate, 15 mm. in di- 
ameter at mouth, the limb 2 to 4 em. broad, the lobes suborbicular, 12 to 15 
mm. broad, undulate or erose; one filament of each pair of stamens 3 mm. 


DEC. 4, 1927 LEONARD: RUELLIA TUBEROSA AND RELATIVES oll 


long, the other 8 mm., glabrous; anthers oblong, 4 mm. long, about 1 mm. 
broad, obtuse; style 20 mm. long, glabrous, the developed lobe of the stigma 
2 mm. long, 1 mm. broad; capsule cylindric, 17 to 20 mm. long, 3 mm. broad, 
acute at apex, the callus puberulent, otherwise glabrous; retinacula curved, 
1.25 mm. long, truncate at apex; seeds numerous (usually 20 or more in each 
capsule), lenticular, 2 to 2.5 mm. in diameter, appearing glabrous when dry, 
mucilaginous-pilose when moist. 
Type Locauity: Jamaica. 


Specimens examined :? 


i) 


FioripA: Without locality, Rugel 742. 

Cusa: Columbia, Curtiss 730. Nuevitas, Cam- 
aguey, Shafer 1129. 

Without locality, Wright 1353. 

JAMAICA: Port Antonio, on rocks of old Spanish 
fort, Harshberger 99. Hope Gardens, King- 
ston, dry ground, Mazon 1630. Between 
Kingston and Gregory Park, Mazon & Killip 
302. Mouth of Great River, west of Montego 
Bay, Maxon & Killip 1432a. 

Harti: Miragoane, Eyerdam 31. Without locality, 
Jaeger 130. Port au Prince, Leonard 2765, 
2785. LEtroite, Gonave Island, open woods, Fig. 1. Ruellia tuberosa. 
Leonard 3372. Etang, KtangSaumatre, clear- A. capsule, xX 2; B. tip 
ings, Leonard 3566. of capsule, X 10; C. 

Dominican Repusiic: Haina, roadsides and _ seed, X 10. 
open fields, Farzs 183. Barahona, Fuertes 221. 

Azua, Rose, Fitch & Russell 3692. San Pedro de Macoris, Rose, 
Fitch & Russell 4179. Without locality, Wright, Parry & Brummel 
362. 

Porto Rico: Guayanilla, roadside, Britton & Shafer 1797. Fajardo, 
Heller & Heller 988. Yauco, Heller 6295. Ponce, Prey 8. Isabel 
Segunda, rocky hillsides, Shafer 2434. Salinas de Cabo Rojo, Sin- 
tenis 618. San Juan to Cangrejos, Sintenis 618b. Fajardo, Sintenis 
1619. Guanica, Sintenis 3386. Guayama to Aguirre, brackish marsh, 
Underwood & Griggs 377. 

St. THomas: Raccoon Bay, Britton, Britton & Shafer 161. 

St. Croix: Bassin Yard, Ricksecker 259. 

St. Jan: Lamosure, rocky hill, Britton & Shafer 617. 

MontTsERRAT: Without locality, Shafer 502. 

GUADELOUPE: Without locality, Duss 2366. 

BarBapDos: Bathsheba, dry hillside, Muller 80. Without locality, 
Botanic Station Herbarium 74. : 

TrinipaD: Botanic Gardens Herbarium 2914. 

CotomstA: Estrella, Cafio Papayal, Lands of Loba, Dept. Bolivar, 
common along roadsides, Curran in 1916. Cartagena, Heriberto 
100. Dept. Atlantico, Pennell 12047. Santa Marta, Smith 746. 
Mariquita, Magdalena, Triana in 1852. Rio Frio, Santa Marta, 
Walker 1205. 

Curacao: Sint. Jaris, Curran & Haman 237. 

VENEZUELA: Ciudad Bolivar, L. H. & E. Z. Bailey 1621. Cristdbal 
Colén, Broadway 134. Rio Chico, Miranda, Jahn 1245. El Vallé, 


All specimens cited are in the U. S. National Herbarium. 


512 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20 


Miller & Johnston 88. Perijé, State of Zulia, Tejera 177. La Trin- 
dad de Maracay, Pittier 5774. Between San José and Rio Chico, 
State of Miranda, Pittier 6356. Hacienda El Volcan, near Santa 
Lucia, Pittver 8249. El Palito, near Puerto Cabello, in cactus forma- 
tion, Pittier 9085. Valera and vicinity, Trujillo, Pzttzer 10786. 

British GuraNna: Without locality, Jenman 4801. Peter’s Hall and 
vicinity, Georgetown, weed in field, Hitchcock 16681. Georgetown, 
Warren in 1924. 

The most striking characteristics differentiating the three allied species, 
R. tuberosa, R. intermedia, and R. nudiflora are found in the capsules. In 
FR. tuberosa these are noticeably slender and cylindric, and, except for narrow 
cuneate puberulent calluses at the tip, are entirely glabrous, whereas the 
capsules of R. nudiflora are shorter, broader, more abruptly narrowed to the 
solid stipelike basal portion, and strongly puberulent; the hairs, at least on 
the lower portions, retrorse. The seeds of R. tuberosa are smaller and more 
numerous, and the flowers are broader and seem to be deeper lavender. 

Between R. tuberosa and R. intermedia the difference is not so great. In 
habit and leaf characters the two species seem identical, but the capsules 
and seeds of R. intermedia agree in size and shape with those of R. nudiflora. 

The geographical distribution of these three species is likewise highly signifi- 
cant. From the United States true R. tuberosa is represented in the National 
Herbarium by a single specimen collected in Florida. In Cuba, Hispaniola, 
Porto Rico, and Jamaica southward throughout the West Indies and north- 
ern South America it is rather common. On the other hand, R. nudiflora 
with its varieties is confined to Texas, southern New Mexico and Arizona, 
Mexico, and northern Central America. 

Linnaeus described R. tuberosa as having ‘‘foliis ovatis crenatis, pedunculis 
unifloris.”” This would indicate that he had a one-flowered specimen, which 
is relatively rare in this species. 

Nees’s description of Cryphiacanthus barbadensis agrees with true R. tu- 
berosa, but the range given includes the regions producing both R. iznter- 
media and R. nudiflora, with varieties. Some of the varieties of R. nudi- 
flora described in the present paper correspond to the varieties accompanying 
that description. Later writers, except Lindau, describe R. tuberosa as having 
puberulent capsules and the wide range here stated. The type locality of C. 
barbadensis and R. clandestina is Barbados, an island well within the range of 
true ft. tuberosa. , 

As is frequently the case with plants of a showy or ornamental nature, a 
number of common names have been given to R. tuberosa. Some of these 
are “‘ipeca batard”’ or ‘‘petit ipica chandelier”? (Guadeloupe), ‘“‘many roots,”’ 
“estilladora’’ (Porto Rico), ‘‘patale macaque’ (Martinique), ‘‘salta perico”’ 
(Cuba), ‘“‘minie root” (Barbados), ‘‘fleurs pétards” (Haiti). 

2. Ruellia intermedia Leonard, sp. nov. 
Roots thick-fibrous; stems 5 to 40 em. high, erect or ascending, branched, 


quadrangular, puberulent, with additional spreading hairs about 1 mm. 
long; petioles 5 to 20 mm. long, channeled, puberulent, with a few longer 


DEC. 4, 1927 LEONARD: RUELLIA TUBEROSA AND RELATIVES 513 


spreading hairs; leaf blades ovate to suborbicular, obtuse or rounded at apex, 
rounded or narrowed and decurrent at base, 2 to 7 em. long, 1.5 to 4 cm. 
broad (those of the axillary shoots much smaller), thin, entire or undulate, 
both surfaces more or less puberulent, especially along the midrib and veins, 
sometimes with a few additional spreading hairs, the cystoliths prominent, 
up to 0.25 mm. long; flowers solitary or several in axillary dichotomous cymes, 
with a flower in the forks; peduncles up to 10 cm. long (usually not exceeding 
4 em.), puberulent; bracts lanceolate or oblanceolate, 3 to 15 mm. long, 1 to 
3 mm. broad; pedicels stout, 3 to 8 mm. long, puberulent; calyx 10 to 22 mm. 
long, puberulent, the short hairs often mixed with longer spreading ones, 
usually glandular, the tube 1 to 2 mm. long, the segments linear, about 1 mm. 
broad at base, acute at tip, sometimes spreading at ma- 
turity; corolla 4 to 6 cm. long, purple, puberulent, the tube 
2.5mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. in diameter, the throat funnel- 
form, slightly oblique, 1 to 1.5 em. broad at mouth, the limb 
2 to 4 cm. broad, the lobes ovate, 10 to 15 mm. long, 10 to 
14 mm. broad, undulate; one filament of each pair of stamens 
6 mm. long, the other 12 mm., glabrous; anthers oblong, 
3.5 mm. long, 1 to 1.5 mm. broad; ovary glabrous, with a 
tuft of hairs at the tip; style 3 to 3.5 cm. long, sparingly 
and minutely pilose, the developed lobe of the stigma 2.5 
mm. long, 0.5 mm. broad; capsule 18 mm. long, 4 to 5 mm. 
broad, bluntly pointed at apex, gradually narrowed to a Y 
solid stipitate base about 2 mm. long, glabrous except for Fig. 2. Ruellia in- 
the pilose cuneate calluses near the tip, 10 to 12-seeded; re- termedia. A. cap- 
tinacula truncate at apex; seeds lenticular, 2 to 2.5 mm. in Sule, X 2; B. tip of 
diameter, mucilaginous-pilose when moist. capsule, X 10; C. 
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 301,864, seed, X 10. 
collected at Bolafios, Jalisco, Mexico, September, 1897, by 
J. N. Rose (no. 2915). 
Additional specimens examined: 
SmnALOA: Imala, Palmer 1415. Las Palmas, Ortega 4516. Without lo- 
cality, Ortega 4222. Hacienda Oso, Culiacdn, Partida 2009. Rosario, 
Rose 1849. Mazatlan, thickets, Rose, Standley & Russell 14072. 

CouimMa: Colima, Palmer 41. 

MicHoacdNn or GUERRERO: Chutla, Langlassé 260. 

MoreEtos: Yautepec, Rose, Painter & Rose 8602. 

GUERRERO: Iguala, altitude about 1,000 meters, Rusby 15. 


This species is intermediate between R. nudiflora and R. tuberosa. It dif- 
fers from the former in the shorter rounded leaves and glabrous capsules and 
from the latter in the puberulent stems and broader fewer-seeded capsules. 
The specimens cited vary somewhat in the proportion of glandular hairs and 
in the size of the flowers. Rose, Standley & Russell 14072 is a stunted plant, 
only a few centimeters high. 

In Sinaloa the native name is given as “‘hierba del toro.”’ 


3. RUELLIA NUDIFLORA (Engelm. & Gray) Urban, Symb. Antill. 7: 382. 


1912. 
Dipteracanthus nudiflorus Engelm. & Gray, Bost. Journ. Nat. Hist. 5: 
229: 1845. 


Cryphiacanthus viscosus Oerst. Nat. For. Kjébenhavn Vid. Medd. 
1854: 128. 1854. Not. R. viscosa H. B. K. | 


514 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20 


Roots clustered, thick-fibrous; stems erect or ascending, 5 to 30 em. high, 
usually branched, obscurely quadrangular, puberulent, with occasional 
longer spreading hairs, or glabrate; petioles 0.5 to 4 cm. long, both puberulent 
and pilose; leaf blades ovate or oblong, 2 to 12 cm. long, 1.5 to 7 em. broad, 
obtuse at apex, narrowed or rarely rounded at base, decurrent, thickish, 
undulate-crisped, sparingly puberulent or pilosulous, sometimes glabrate; 
inflorescence a terminal panicle of erect or ascending dichotomous cymes with 
a pediceled flower in each fork, or, when the peduncles 
are very short, an interrupted spike of verticillasters, 
or occasionally a single verticillastrate head; peduncles 
up to 5 em. long but usualiy much shorter, puberulent, 
more or less glandular; bracts linear, 3 to 10 mm. long; 
pedicels 3 to 5mm. long, glandular-puberulent; calyx 
12 to 18 mm. long, glandular-puberulent, the tube 
very short, the segments linear or subulate; corolla 
purple, finely pubescent, 3 to 6 em. long, the tube 
slender, 1 to 3 cm. long, | to 2 mm. in diameter, the 
throat funnelform or narrowly campanulate, 1 to 1.5 
em. broad at mouth, the limb 1.5 to 3.5 em. broad, 
the lobes suborbicular, 10 to 15 mm. in diameter, erose; 
one filament of each pair of stamens 9 mm. long, the 
other 11 mm., glabrous; anthers 4.5 mm. long, about 

; ; 1 mm. broad; ovary puberulent; style 3.5 em. long 
i Maa een sparsely pilosulous; the developed lobe of the stigma 
<0 2mm. long, 0.56 mm. broad; capsule 15 mm. long, 4 

mm. broad, pointed at tip, short-stipitate at base, 

puberulent, 8 to 16-seeded; retinacula curved, about 

2 mm. long, truncate at apex; seeds lenticular, 3.5 mm. long, 3, mm. broad, 
mucilaginous-pilose when moist. 

TYPE LOCALITY: Open woods at Sim’s Bayou near Houston, Texas. 
Type collected by Lindheimer. 

Specimens examined: : 

Arizona: Picture Rocks, Tucson Mts., Bartram 396. Santa Cruz 
Valley near Tucson, Pringle in 1881. 

Texas: San Antonio, dry meadows, Ball 904; with white flowers, 905. 
Bryan, Brazos Co., low ground, Biltmore Herbarium 11080a. Travis 
Co., moist prairies, Bodin 214. Colombia, Brazoria Co., prairie, 
Bush 147, 313. Rio Hondo, Cameron Co., Chandler 7053. Sequin, 
Earle 431. Houston, Fisher 92. San Antonio, white flowers, fzsher 
103. La Porte, Harris Co., Fisher 628. Bracken, Comal Co., sandy 
soil, Groth 134. Hempstead, Walker Co., prairies, Hall 426. Hous- 
ton, wet soil, Hall 427. San Antonio, Havard in 1881 (%). Corpus 
Christi, Heller 1417. Without locality, Hzldebrandt. Burnet Co., 
Hill 18. Comanche Spring, Pecos Co., Lindheimer 1066. Bexar 
Co., Jermy 59. Without locality, wet places, Mackenzie 38. Santa 
Maria, Cameron Co., Nealley 170. Without locality, Nealley 86a, 
301. Brownwood, Brown Co., rich prairies, flowers white, Reverchon 
724. Blanco Co., flowers white, Reverchon 724. Corsicana, Navarro 
Co., Reverchon 3213. Dallas, low rich lands, Reverchon (Curtiss 
1945). Rio Cibolo, in mesquite woods, Ridell in 1839. Tarrant Co., 
dry woods along the Trinity River, Ruth 546. Bexar Co., Schulz 
740. Austin, escape from cultivation, Schulz 743. San Antonio, 
Slater in 1918. Brownsville, Cameron Co., Townsend 28. Pierce, 
Wharton Co., Tracy 7642. Kingsville, Tracy 9183. Tom Green 


DEC. 4, 1927 LEONARD: RUELLIA TUBEROSA AND RELATIVES 515 


Co., Tweedy 2. Houston, Ward in 1877. El Paso, Wright 431. 
Spofford, Kinney Co., Wooton 126. Industry, Austin Co., Wurzlow 
ae. 


TAMAULIPAS: San Fernando to Jiménez, Nelson 6605. Vicinity of 
Tampico, Palmer 436. Buena Vista, Wooton in 1919. 

Nuevo Lr6n: Monterrey, Bella Vista, Arséne 6184 (Bro. Abbon 6). 

CoauuILa: Sabinas, Nelson 6760. Saltillo, Palmer 159. 

SrinaLoa: Las Mochis, Tays in 1912. 

Duvuranco: Durango, Palmer 650. 

Oaxaca: Guatuleo, Liebmann in 1842 (type coll. of Cryphiacanthus 
viscosus Oerst.). 


The present species is usually distributed as R. tuberosa. It differs con- 
stantly from that in the narrower and more slender corolla and thicker and 
usually shorter puberulent capsules with fewer seeds. 

The vernacular names ‘‘tremadora”’ and ‘‘violeta”’ have been given to this 
plant in Mexico. Tays states that in Sinaloa it is used as a cure for snake 
bites. 

This species is extremely variable in habit, in size and shape of flowers and 
leaves, and in the nature of the pubescence. These variations are suffi- 
ciently constant to permit the maintenance of several varieties. 


Key To R. NUDIFLORA AND ITS VARIETIES 


Leaves puberulent (often grayish). 
Plants erect; at least a part of the inflorescence a naked terminal panicle; 
corolla 4 to 6 cm. long. 

ea laces broadiy Ovate. oc. J. kee ee. 3a. var. occidentalis. 

Memepladesreplonge.. £02 ee se So ee ee, 3b. var. grandiflora. 

Plants low, spreading or ascending; inflorescence of axillary cymes. 
ac. var. puberula. 
Leaves glabrous or pilosulous (usually sparsely so). 
Plants low, seldom over 10 cm. high, few-flowered; stems strongly pilosu- 
POS acd ran Naty Teck Gian pee a re gh al 3d. var. humilis. 
Plants tall, usually over 20 cm. high; flowers several or numerous; stems 
puberulent, sparingly pilosulous, or glabrate. 

Inflorescence verticillastrate; bractlets crowded; peduncles elongate. 
(The inflorescence of R. nudiflora and of the varieties ovata and 
occidentalis is often more or less verticillastrate, but when so, the 
MEGIGELS Rule evel y(SMORGs) oc. a gee ten res ae. var. congesta. 

Inflorescence of peduncled dichotomous cymes, some, at least, of these 
forming a naked terminal panicle. 

Leaves mainly basal; plants usually less than 30 cm. tall; inflores- 
cences beginning at the base of the plant...... of. var. yucatana. 
Leaves distributed on the stems; plants usually over 30 cm. tall; in- 
florescence more or less terminal. 
Leaves prevailingly large, at least some of them over 5 em. broad; 
inflorescences densely glandular-pilosulous....3g. var. glabrata. 
Leaves smaller, seldom over 4 cm. broad; inflorescences glandular- 


puberulent. 
Corolla 2 to 3 em. long, the tube 7 to 10 mm. long, the panicle 
large, open (plants of West Indies)....... 3h. var. insularis. 


Corolla 3 to 6 em. long, the tube usually over 10 mm. long; panicles 
usually narrow (mainland plants)........... 3. KR. nudiflora. 


016 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ‘VOL. 17, No. 20 


3a. Ruellia nudiflora occidentalis (A. Gray) Leonard. 


Ruellia tuberosa occidentalis A. Gray, Syn. Fl. 2': 325. 1878 (in part). 

Plants larger than in the species, up to 60 em. high; stems erect or ascending, 
branched, glandular-pubescent; petioles slender, 1 to 4.5 cm. long, glandular- 
pubescent; leaf blades ovate, 4 to 18 em. long, 2.5 to 8 em. broad, obtuse or 
rounded at apex, rounded or subcordate and decurrent at base, undulate or 
crenate, grayish-puberulent, more or less glandular; inflorescence a large 
terminal panicle, or an interrupted spike of verticillasters, the branches 
glandular-puberulent, the bracts linear, 5 to 10 mm. long, glandular-puberu- 
lent; peduncles up to 3 mm. long; calyx 1.5 to 2.5 em. long, densely glandu- 
lar-pilosulous, the segments linear-subulate; corolla purple, 4 to 5 cm. 
long, the tube 2 to 3 cm. long, 2 mm. in diameter, the throat funnelform, 
15 mm. broad at mouth, the limb 2 to 3 em. broad; one filament of each pair 
of stamens 10 mm. long, the other 14 mm.; anthers 3 mm. long, 1 mm. broad; 
style 4 cm. long; developed lobe of the stigma 2 mm. long, scarcely broader 
than the style; capsule 15 to 17 mm. long, puberulent, some of the hairs 
glandular. 


TyprE Locatity: Texas. Type collected by Berlandier. 
Specimens examined: 
“New Mexico”; Without locality, Wright 1455. 
Texas: Sabinal Canyon, shaded rocks, Revershon 1579. Atascosa Co., 
sandy soil, Schulz 489c. El Paso, Wright 480. 
Nurvo Lné6n: Monterrey, Guadalupe, alt. 540 meters, Arséne 6143 
(Abbon 25). Monterrey, along an irrigation ditch, Dodge 75. 
VeRAcRUZ: Rio de Santa Maria, Zacualpan, rocky open woods, Pur- 
pus 1940, 2264. Barranca de la Ternera, Purpus 8205. 
Oaxaca: Cuicatlan, Conzatti 3989. 


This variety is based on the large cordate ovate leaves, large viscid panicles, 
and slender corollas. 


3b. Ruellia nudiflora grandiflora Leonard, var. nov. 


Stem erect or ascending, puberulent with interspersed longer spreading 


hairs, more or less glandular above; petioles up to 1 cm. long, puberulent with 
minute curved hairs and sparsely pilose; leaf blades oblong, 3 to 6 cm. long, 1 
to 2.5 em. broad, strongly crenate-crisped to subentire, obtuse or acutish at 
apex, narrowed and decurrent at base, puberulent and pilosulous; flowers in 
3’s, subsessile on short ascending peduncles (up to 3 em. long), or verticillas- 
trate; calyx 15 to 22 mm. long, pilosulous, more or less glandular, the seg- 
ments subulate, 1 mm. broad at base; corolla 6 em. long, the tube slender, 
2 to 3 em. long, 2.5 to 3 mm. in diameter, the throat funnelform, 15 mm. 
broad at mouth, the limb 3 to 4 em. broad, the lobes 15 to 17 mm. broad, 
undulate; one filament of each pair of stamens 12 mm. long, the other 15 mm.; 
anthers 4.5 mm. long, 1.5 mm. broad; ovary puberulent; style 4 to 5 cm. long; 
mature capsule not seen. é 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 452,096, collected near Yaute- 
pec, Morelos, Mexico, July, 1905, by J. N. Rose, J. H. Painter, and J. 8. Rose 
(no. 8601). 

Additional specimen examined: 


DuraNnco: Ramos to Inde, Nelson 4691. 3 ; 
Nelson 4691 from Durango, is apparently eglandular, but in all other re- 


spects it agrees with the type. 


DEC. 4,1927 - LEONARD: RUELLIA TUBEROSA AND RELATIVES O17 


3c. Ruellia nudiflora puberula Leonard, var. nov. 


Low spreading plants 10 to 20 cm. high; stems ascending, branched, puberu- 
lent, the minute hairs mixed with longer spreading ones, the younger stems 
rather densely pilose; petioles about 1 cm. long; leaf blades oblong-elliptic, 2 
to 10 cm. long, 1 to 3 cm. broad, obtuse or rounded at apex, gradually nar- 
rowed and decurrent at base, firm, undulate-crisped, gray-puberulent with 
minute curved hairs interspersed with longer spreading ones; inflorescence of 
axillary dichotomous cymes with a flower in the forks; peduncles 1 to 9 cm. 
long, glandular-pubescent; bracts leaf-like, 5 to 10 mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. broad, 
occasionally much larger; pedicels 5 to 10 mm. long or the one in the lowest 
fork becoming stout, and 15 to 20 mm. long; calyx 15 to 30 mm. long, grayish- 
puberulent and ciliate, the segments linear, keeled, 1 mm. broad at base; 
corolla 3 to 4 cm. long, the tube 10 to 12 mm. long, 1.5 mm. in diameter, 
abruptly enlarged into the broadly funnelform or narrow campanulate throat, 
this 15 mm. broad at mouth, the limb 3 to 3.5 em. broad, the lobes rounded, 
undulate, often emarginate; one filament of each pair of stamens 5 mm. 
long, the other 9 mm.; anthers 3.5 mm. long, 1 mm. broad; style 2 to 2.5 
mm. long, the developed lobe of the stigma 2 mm. long, 0.5 mm. broad; cap- 
sule 15 to 18 mm. long, 4 mm. broad. 

Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 579,619, collected in pasture 
near Gualan, Guatemala, June 17, 1909, by Charles C. Deam (no. 6318). 


Additional specimens examined: 
Oaxaca: Tlacolula, alt. 1,600 meters, Conzatte 1454. Lagunas, alt. 
250 meters, Nelson 2652. ‘Tehuantepec, Orcutt 3322. 
GUATEMALA: Gualan, in pasture, flowers nearly white, Deam 6332. 
Fiscal, barren hilltop, Deam 6227. 
SaLtvapDor: Rio del Molino, Dept. Santa Ana, Calderdén 2184. Laguna 
de Olomega Dept. San Miguel, alt. 75 meters, Standley 21051. 


This variety differs from the species in its grayish, sparingly glandular 
pubescence, axillary inflorescences, and smaller flowers. The leaves are 
broader and more rounded at the apex. 


3d. Ruellia nudiflora humilis (Nees) Leonard. 
Cryphiacanthus barbadensis humilis Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 198. 1847. 
Low plants, 5 to 15 em. high; stems white-pilose, glandular-puberulent 
above; petioles about 1 em. long, white-pilose; flowers 2 or 3, in dichotomous 
cymes, the peduncles densely glandular-puberulent; pedicels 2 to 5mm. 
long; calyx 10 to 15 mm. long, the lobes subulate; corolla 3 to 4 cm. long, 
the tube about 12 mm. long, the throat funnelform, 10 to 12 mm. broad at 
mouth, the limb 2 to 2.5 em. broad, the lobes rounded, emarginate; one fila- 
ment of each pair of stamens 5 mm. long, the other 8 mm.; anthers 2.5 mm. 
long, 1 mm. broad; style about 2 cm. long, the developed lobe of the stigma 
2mm. long, 0.5 mm. broad; capsule 12 to 13 mm. long, 4 mm. broad. 
Typrt Locauity: Cuba. 
Specimens examined: 
Texas: Bexar Co., Jermy 146.° Fort Clark, Kinney Co., Mearns 
1440. 


This variety is distinguished by the short stems, small ovate pilose leaves, 
and short few-flowered cymes. 


518 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20 


3e. Ruellia nudiflora congesta Leonard, var. nov. 

Low plants; stem erect, 15 to 20 cm. high, branched, puberulent, the nodes 
pilose, glandular above; petioles 5 to 10 mm. long; leaf blades oblong, 4 to 8 
em. long, 1 to 3 cm. broad, rounded at apex, narrowed and decurrent at base, 
sparingly pilose, or the veins on the lower surface sparsely puberulent; inflores- 
cence verticillastrate, the flowers in 3’s, on peduncles 1 to 2 mm. long; bract- 
lets lanceolate, 3 to 5 mm. long, 1 to 1.5 mm. broad, glandular-pilosulous, 
crowded at base of pedicels; pedicels 1 to 2.5 cm. long, glandular-pilosulous; 
calyx 12 to 13 mm. long, the tube 1 mm. long, the segments subulate, keeled, 
densely glandular-pilose; flowers not seen; capsules about 1 mm. long. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 938,568, collected in San Luis 
Potosi, Mexico, in 1877 by J. G. Schaffner (no. 398). 


The verticillastrate inflorescence with crowded bracts and elongate pedicels 
is peculiar to this variety. In shape and arrangement of leaves it resembles 
the variety yucatana. 


3f. Ruellia nudiflora yucatana Leonard, var. nov. 

Roots thick-fibrous or fusiform; stem 5 to 30 em. high, usually branched, 
puberulent, the hairs short and curved, interspersed with longer spreading 
ones, glandular above; leaves mostly basal; petioles slender, up to 3 cm. long; 
leaf blades oblong-elliptic or spatulate, 4 to 12 em. long, 1 to 4 em. broad, 
rounded at apex, gradually narrowed and decurrent at base, pilosulose or 
glabrate, the cystoliths prominent; inflorescences peduncled, glandular-pu- 
berulent, dichotomous cymes produced by the entire plant, the lower axillary, 
the upper forming a naked terminal panicle, the flowers in 3’s, crowded at the 
tips of the branches; bracts linear, 5 mm. long; peduncles 1 to 3 mm. long, or 
that of the lowest flower occasionally reaching 15 mm.; calyx 5 to 14mm. long, 
glandular-puberulent, the segments subulate, the tips usually curved or 
twisted; corolla 2.5 to 3 cm. long, the tube 6 mm. long, the throat funnelform, 
1 cm. broad at mouth, the limb 2.5 cm. broad, the lobes rounded, about 1 cm. 
broad; one filament of each pair of stamens 4 mm. long, the other 6 mm.; 
anthers 2.5 mm. long, 1 mm. broad; capsule 12 mm. long. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 268,387, collected in open 
grounds near Izamal, Yucatan, in 1895, by G. F. Gaumer (no. 759). 

Additional specimens examined: 

YucatTAn: Izamal, in open grounds, Gawmer 488. Chichankanab, Gau- 
mer 1801. Without locality, Gawmer 24218. Mérida, waste ground, 
Valdez 23. | 


The small crowded flowers, the curved calyx segments, the spatulate basal 
leaves, and the presence of basal cymes characterize this variety. 


3g. Ruellia nudiflora glabrata Leonard, var. nov. 
Ruellia tuberosa occidentalis A. Gray, Syn. FI. 2!: 325. 1878 Gn part). 

Large plants; stem erect, branched, glabrous, sparsely pilose below, glandu- 
lar-puberulent above, the cystoliths prominent; petioles 1 to 3 cm. long, gla- 
brous or sparingly pilose; leaf blades ovate to oblong-ovate, 6 to 18 cm. long, 
3 to 10 em. broad, rounded or obtuse at apex, rounded, then narrowed and 
decurrent at base (narrowed basal portion relatively broader than in the 
variety occidentalis), undulate or crisped, glabrous or the veins sparingly 
pilose, the cystoliths prominent; inflorescence a terminal open panicle of 
dichotomous cymes with a flower in the forks, or, when the peduncles are 
very short, an interrupted spike of verticillasters, the branches of the in- 
florescence, the pedicels, and calyces glandular-pubescent; corolla purple, 2.5 


DEC. 4, 1927 LEONARD: RUELLIA TUBEROSA AND RELATIVES 019 


to 4 cm. long, the tube 1 em. long, 2 mm. in diameter, the throat funnel form, 
1.5 em. broad at mouth, the lobes rounded, 10 to 15 mm. broad, undulate or 
entire, the limb 2 to 3 em. broad; one filament of each pair of sane 6 mm. 
long the other 12 mm.; anthers a 5 to 4 mm. long, 1 mm. broad; style about 
2 em. long, sparingly puberulent, the developed lobe of the stigma 2mm. long 
0.5 mm. broad; capsule 15 mm. long, 3 to 6 mm. broad. 
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 44,091, collected alb Ciénaga, 
New Mexico, Aug. 1874, by J. T. Rothrock (no. 560). 
Additional specimens ‘examined: 
Arizona: San Bernardino Ranch, Mearns 737, 1999. Tumamoc 
Hill, Tucson, Harris C16551. Tucson, Smart in 1867; Thornber 55. 
TAMAULIPAS: Tampico, alt. 15 meters, Palmer 172. 
Sonora: La Ciénaga, under mesquite, Goodding 959. Guaymas, Palmer 
98. 
SinaLoA: Topolobampo, Palmer 194. Fuerte, along a hedge near town, 
Rose, Standley & Russell 13563. 
Couima: Without locality, Palmer 1287. 
Oaxaca: Cuicatlan, Nelson 1664. 
Tasasco: Without locality, Rovirosa 530. 
GUATEMALA: Gualan, low place in pasture, Deam 6317. 


Ruellia tuberosa occidentalis A. Gray, described as a plant with ‘leaves 
from glabrate to velvety-pubescent,” includes both R. nudiflora occidentalis 
(Gray) Leonard and R. nudiflora glabrata Leonard. As all the specimens 
cited belong strictly either to the glabrous type or to the velvety-pubescent 
type, with no intermediates, this character was chosen as a basis for separa- 
tion, the name occidentalis being assigned to the latter. 


3h. Ruellia nudiflora insularis Leonard, var. nov. 
Ruellia nudiflora Urban, Symb. Antill. 7: 382. 1912, in part, as to 
specimens cited; not Dipteracanthus nudiflorus Engelm. & Gray. 
Suffrutescent; stem up to 40 em. high, branched, erect or ascending, gla- 
brous or sparingly pilose, minutely glandular-puberulent above; petioles slender 
1 to 1.5 em. long; leaf blades ovate, 2 to 7 cm. long, 1.5 to 4 em. broad, rounded 
at apex, abruptly narrowed and decurrent at base, undulate or crenate-crisped, 
glabrous of the veins of the lower surface sparingly-pilose, the cystoliths 
conspicuous; inflorescences dichotomous cymes with a flower in the forks, 
the lower axillary, the upper forming a large naked open panicle; peduncles, 
pedicels, and calyces minutely glandular-puberulent; bracts lance-linear; 
pedicels up to 1 cm. long; calyx 15 mm. long, the segments subulate, 1 mm. 
broad at base; corolla bright purple, 3 cm. long, the tube 1 cm. long, 2 mm. in 
diameter, the throat funnelform, about 12 mm. broad at mouth, the limb 2.5 
em. broad, the lobes suborbicular, about 1 cm. broad, shallowly emarginate; 
one filament of each pair of stamens 5 mm. long, the other 7 mm.; anthers 4 
mm. long, | mm. broad; ovary puberulent; style about 2 cm. long; capsule 
16 to 18 mm. long, 4 mm. broad, puberulent. 
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 944,027, collected at Las Pailas, 
Cuba, May, 1889, by Fggers (no. 5452). 
Additional specimens examined: 
Harri: Fond Parisien, shore of Etang Saumatre, along irrigation ditch, 
Leonard 4158. 
DomINIcAN REPUBLIC: Guayubin, Provincia de Monte Cristi, alt. 100 
meters, Abbott 986. Barahona, Fuertes 804. 


520 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 17, No. 20 | 


Except for its shorter puberulent capsules and smaller flowers this variety 
bears a close resemblance to R. tuberosa L. 


4, RUELLIA LORENTZIANA Griseb. Abh. Ges. Wiss. Goetting. 24: 259. 1879. 

Suffrutescent; stem erect, obscurely quadrangular, glandular-puberulent, 
the cystoliths prominent, about 0.25 mm. long; petioles 1 to 3 em. long, 
glabrous or sparsely pilose, the cystoliths numerous; leaf blades ovate, up to 
10 cm. long, 5.5 em. broad, obtuse at apex, abruptly narrowed and decurrent 
at base, rather firm, crenulate-crisped, both surfaces glabrous or bearing a 
few scattered hairs about 1 mm. long, the cystoliths numerous and prominent; 
inflorescence a terminal interrupted narrow panicle, the branches 2 or 3- 
flowered; peduncles 1 to 5 em. long, glandular-puberulent; bracts linear, 3- 
to 8 mm. long, glandular-puberulent, pedicels 1 to 2 mm. long, glandular- 
puberulent; calyx 10 to 12 mm. long, glandular-puberulent, the tube 2 mm. 
long, the segments linear-subulate, unequal, 0.5 mm. broad at base; flowers 
not seen, the corolla described as ‘‘glabra; tubo e basi angusta supra calycem 
curve dilatato lobis late rotundatis duplo longiori, antheris inclusis cordato- 
oblongis;’’ capsule 2 em. long, 4 mm. broad, fusiform, abruptly narrowed 
and pointed at apex, narrowed at base, the solid portion about 4 mm. long, 
1 mm. broad at lowest point, 2 mm. broad at beginning of cavity 12 to 16- 
seeded, glandular-puberulent; retinacula tridentate at apex; seed flat, ovate, 
subcordate at base, about 3 mm. long and 2 mm. broad, mucilaginous-pilose 
when moist. 

Types Locauity: Tucuman, Argentina. 

Specimen examined: Argentina, Formosa, Jorgensen 2845. 


This species is closest to R. nudiflora glabrata but can be distinguished by 
its narrow panicle of crowded flowers, densely glandular stems, inflorescence, 
and capsules, smaller keeled calyx segments and glabrous (?) corolla. 


BOTAN Y.—WNew plants from Central America.—X.! Pauu C. STAND- 
LEY, U. 8. National Museum. 


Most of the plants described below belong to the genus Ardisia, 
of the family Myrsinaceae, a group of shrubs or small trees with edible 
fruits and handsome, though small, flowers. The genus is abundantly 
represented in the mountains of Central America. 

There is included also the description of a species of Hlaphrium ob- 
tained many years ago in Nicaragua by the pioneer Central American 
collector, Oersted. Although somewhat out of place here, I have 
inserted the diagnoses of two strikingly distinct Mexican plants pro- 
cured by Dr. Blas P. Reko, who has contributed to the National 
Herbarium material of so many rare Mexican species. 


1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 
For the last preceding paper of this series see page 309 of this volume of the Tor JouRNAL. 
Received October 31, 1927. 


DEC. 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 521 


Elaphrium Oerstedii Standl., sp. nov. 


Branchlets very stout, 7-8 mm. thick, densely leafy at the tips, covered 
below with the large scars of fallen leaves, ochraceous, densely and finely 
tomentose at apex but soon glabrate; leaves crowded at the tips of the 
branches, petiolate, the rachis and petiole together 12-15 cm. long, slender, 
copiously puberulent and short-pilose with fulvous hairs; internodes of the 
rachis 7-25 mm. long; leaflets 11-15, the terminal one sessile or petiolulate, 
the lateral ones sessile, oblong or lance-oblong, 4-6.5 em. long, 1.38-2.2 cm. 
wide, abruptly short-acuminate, with narrow, entire, acute or obtuse tip, at 
base obtuse and unequal, thick, shallowly and closely crenate, densely ciliate, 
puberulent above along the nerves, elsewhere glabrate, beneath paler, sparsely 
puberulent or short-pilose along the elevated costa, elsewhere glabrous or 
nearly so, the lateral nerves about 15 on each side, divergent at a wide angle, 
slightly arcuate, distinct nearly to the margin; panicles large, many-flowered, 
much branched, equaling or shorter than the leaves, pedunculate, the branches 
stout, angulate, short-pilose and puberulent, the flowers short-pedicellate; 
fruit obovoid, oblique, glabrous, 1.5 cm. long and 1 cm. broad, narrowed to 
the obtuse base. 

Type in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum, Copenhagen, collected in 
Nicaragua by Oersted. A specimen of the same collection is in the U. 8. 
National Herbarium. 


The type is an unmounted specimen, labeled in Oersted’s hand, ‘‘In Nicara- 
gua legi. Ord.’”’ A second sheet, evidently of the same collection, has the 
locality written in the same hand, as ‘‘In insula Jamaica.’”’ No such plant is 
known from Jamaica, and it is fairly safe to assume that the plant is a Nicara- 
guan one. 

Only a few species of Elaphrium are known from Central America, the genus 
being very poorly represented outside Mexico, except for the widely distrib- 
uted EH. stemaruba. LElaphrium Oerstedii is clearly distinct from any of the 
species reported heretofore from Central America. 


Ardisia Cutteri Standl., sp. nov. 


A small tree, the branches stout, terete, brownish; leaves oblanceolate, 
about 52 cm. long and 15 cm. wide, rounded at apex, long-attenuate from 
near the apex nearly or quite to the base of the short broad petiole, entire, 
subcoriaceous, green above, glabrous, minutely punctate, beneath paler, 
sparsely and very minutely brown-lepidote, the costa stout and salient, the 
lateral nerves very numerous, slender, prominent, divergent at a wide angle, 
connected by the lax irregular reticulation of the ultimate nerves; inflores- 
cence terminal, paniculate, about 17 cm. long and broad, tripinnate, the 
branches slender, brown-lepidote with minute appressed scales; flowers um- 
bellate at the ends of the branches, the pedicels stout, 6-8 mm. long; sepals 5, 
nearly distinct, orbicular, 2 mm. long, minutely lepidote dorsally, not evi- 
dently punctate, the margins finely brown-ciliolate; fruit globose, 1 em. in 
diameter, densely and coarsely punctate. 

Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,989, collected in wet 
forest near Pejivalle, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, altitude about 900 
ie February 7, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 
47122). 


522 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20. 


This handsome plant is well marked by its remarkably large leaves and 
fruits, and can scarcely be confused with any other Ardisia reported from 
Central America. The species is named for Mr. Victor M. Cutter, President 
of the United Fruit Company, as a slight acknowledgment of his hearty co- 
operation in furthering botanical exploration in Costa Rica. 


Ardisia minor Standl., sp. nov. 


A shrub or small tree 1.5-6 m. high, the branches terete, grayish or brown- 
ish, somewhat rugose, glabrous, densely leafy, with short internodes; petioles 
stout, 3-7 mm. long, shallowly sulcate on the upper surface, glabrous, often 
marginate to the base; leaf blades narrowly elliptic to oblong-elliptic, often 
broadest above the middle, 2.8-6.5 em. long, 1-2.5 em. wide, acute or short- 
acuminate, often rather abruptly so, the tip obtuse or rounded, at base acute or 
acutely cuneate and often decurrent, entire, thin, glabrous, above green, dull, 
the costa slightly impressed, the lateral nerves inconspicuous, beneath paler, 
the costa slender, prominent, the lateral nerves very slender, prominulous, 
ascending at an angle of about 50 degrees, connected by the lax reticulation of 
the ultimate nerves; young leaves coarsely brown-punctate; inflorescence 
terminal, usually shorter than the leaves, small, few-flowered, bipinnate, 
glabrous, the rachis usually 2 em. long or shorter, bearing usually 3 or 4 few- 
flowered umbels; bracts caducous; pedicels stout, 2-5 mm. long; sepals 5, 
nearly distinct, dextrorsely convolute, rounded-ovate to orbicular, 1.5 mm. 
long, obtuse to broadly rounded, glabrous, crenulate, green with scarious 
whitish margins, punctate with few coarse red-brown dots; fruit globose, black, 
6 mm. in diameter; style slender, 2-3 mm. long; endocarp 4—4.5 mm. in di- 
ameter, finely costate. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,306,429, collected in wet for- 
est on Cerros de Zurqui{, northeast of San Isidro, Province of Heredia, Costa 
Rica, altitude about 2,200 meters, March 3, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and 
Juvenal Valerio (no. 50571). Here are referred the following collections: — 

Costa Rica: Cerro de las Caricias, Prov. Heredia, alt. 2,000—2,400 meters, 
Standley & Valerio 52408. Yerba Buena, Prov. Heredia, alt. 2,000 m., 
Standley & Valerio 50134. Cerros de Zurqui, Standley & Valerio 50590, 
50613. Santa Maria de Dota, alt. 1,500-1,800 m., Standley 41621; Standley 
& Valerio 43456, 43467. Quebradillas, north of El Copey, Prov. San José,. 
alt. 1,800 m. , Standley 43040. Laguna de la Chonta, northeast of Santa 
Maria de Dota, alt. 2,100 m., Standley 42306. 


Ardisia minor belongs to the subgenus Icacorea and is closely related to A. 
compressa H. B. K. The latter is a widely distributed and highly variable 


species, but all its forms have larger leaves, an ampler, more branched inflores- 
cence, and pale sepals. 


Ardisia Maxonii Standl., sp. nov. 


A slender shrub or small tree 3-5 m. high, the branches stout, terete, rimose, 
glabrous, densely leafy, with short internodes; petioles very stout and broad, 
2-4 mm. long, glabrous, often marginate to the base; leaf blades oblong- 
obovate, sometimes broadly so, 4-7 em. long, 1.5-3.3 em. wide, very obtuse or 
rounded at apex, broadly obtuse to acute at base, entire, glabrous, green and 
dull above, beneath paler, often brownish, densely and very minutely brown- 
punctate, the costa stout, prominent, the lateral nerves slender, prominent, 


DEC. 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 523 


ascending, connected by the irregular lax reticulation of the ultimate nerves; 
inflorescence terminal, usually much exceeding the leaves, densely many- 
flowered, tripinnate, 8 cm. long and broad or smaller, the rachis glabrous, 
angulate, the flowers pale pink, chiefly subumbellate at the ends of the 
branches; bracts caducous; pedicels stout, 4-7 mm. long; sepals 1.5-2 mm. 
long, united below, suborbicular, rounded at apex, dextrorsely convolute, 
glabrous, entire, densely punctate with large glands; corolla 6 mm. long, the 
lobes oblong, obtuse, nearly distinct, symmetric, glabrous, minutely and 
obscurely punctate; stamens equaling the corolla, the filaments very short, 
the anthers oblong, 3 mm. long, deeply cordate at base, glabrous; style very 
slender, 3 mm. long. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 675771, collected in forest open- 
ing between the Rio Ladrillo and Los Siguas Camp, southern slope of Cerro de 
la Horqueta, Chiriqui, Panama, altitude 1,200 to 1,700 meters, March, 1911, 
by William R. Maxon (no. 5402). The following additional collections are 
at hand: 

Panama: Humid forest around Los Siguas Camp, alt. 1,700 m., Putter 
ae Camp Aguacatal, eastern slope of Chiriqui Volcano, alt. ap 100-2, 200 

pemwer oll (. 


cc... Mazxonii belones to the subgenus Icacorea and is related to A. 
trazuensis Oerst., of Costa Rica. The latter has smaller flowers and pointed, 
often acute leaves. 

Pittier has recorded the vernacular name “‘uvilla”’ for A. Mazonii. 


Ardisia pallidiflora Standl., sp. nov. 


A shrub, the branches stout, terete, ochraceous, rimose, glabrous, the in- 
ternodes about 1 em. long; petioles stout, 5-8 mm. long, deeply sulcate on the 
upper surface, lepidote-furfuraceous with small appressed brown scales; leaf 
blades narrowly obovate-elliptic, 5.5-7 em. long, 2-3 em. wide, abruptly acute 
to long-acuminate, with acute or obtuse tip, obtuse at base, entire, thick 
and firm, densely punctate with large glands, these most conspicuous on the 
young leaves, dull, the venation prominulous, beneath paler, sparsely lepi- 
dote with minute brown scales, the costa stout and prominent, the lateral 
nerves prominent, divaricate at a wide angle, connected by the lax reticula- 
tion of the ultimate nerves; inflorescence terminal, cymose, twice branched, 
lax, many-flowered, the flowers in umbels at the ends of the branches, the 
main rachis strongly zigzag, bearing at the base of each branch a leaftike 
brown-punctate petioled bract 1-1.5 em. long; bracts at the base of the pedi- 
cel 1-2 mm. long, persistent, linear, brown-punctate; pedicels slender, 10-13 
mm. long, pale, sparsely and very minutely lepidote, often strongly curved, 
thickened at apex; sepals 1.5 mm. long, rounded-ovate, very obtuse, glabrous, 
whitish, with scarious margins, bearing on the back a dense group of large 
brown-red glands, the margins minutely denticulate; flower buds 3.5 mm. 
long, acuminate; petals pale, ovate, acuminate, bearing a few large dark 
punctations; anthers shorter than the petals, lanceolate, 1.5 mm. long, long- 
acuminate. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 677649, collected in humid forest 
between Alto de las Palmas and top of Cerro de la Horqueta, Chiriqui, 
Panama, altitude 2,100 to 2,255 meters, March 18, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 
a200). 


524 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20 


A member of the subgenus Icacorea, but easily recognized among the Central 
American species of that group by the pale cymiform inflorescence, the per- 
sistent bracts, and the long curved pedicels. 


Ardisia tilaranensis Standl., sp. nov. 


A slender shrub 1.5-3 m. high, the branchlets terete, when young densely 
furfuraceous with coarse brown appressed scales; leaves mostly sessile or 
nearly so, rarely on petioles 8 mm. long, the blades narrowly oblanceolate- 
oblong, 11-18.5 em. long, 3-5 em. wide, acuminate or long-acuminate, nar- 
rowed to the base, this auriculate and often clasping, the auricles short and 
rounded; blades thin, sinuate-crenate, the upper surface green, dull, glabrous, 
beneath paler, rather densely lepidote with small, brown, closely appressed 
scales and conspicuously black-punctate, the costa slender, prominent, the 
lateral nerves very slender, numerous, divaricate at nearly a right angle, 
connected by the laxly reticulate ultimate nerves; inflorescence shorter than 
the leaves, twice pinnate, consisting of a few few-flowered umbels, the 
branches very slender, sparsely brown-lepidote, the panicle bearing at the 
bases of the primary branches | or 2 large green leaflike bracts, these 12-18 
mm. long, ovate or lanceolate, sessile and clasping; pedicels about 5 mm. 
long; sepals 5, nearly distinct, broadly ovate or rounded-ovate, acute or 
obtuse, 1 mm. long, denticulate, glabrous, bearing numerous coarse blackish 
punctations; fruit globose, 6-7 mm. in diameter, purple-black, densely and 
coarsely black-punctate with elevated glands. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,496, collected in moist 
forest at Quebrada Serena, southeast of Tilard4n, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, 
altitude about 700 meters, January 27, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal 
Valerio (no. 46169). The following collections from Guanacaste represent 
the same species: 

Costa Rica: Los Ayotes, alt. 700 m., Standley & Valerio 45422. El 
Silencio, alt. 750 m., Standley & Valerio 44729, 44763. 


None of the specimens are in good condition, but they are uniform, and show 
clearly that the plant is distinct from all other Central American species of 
Ardisia. It is perhaps related to the Costa Rican A. auriculata Donn. Smith, 
of which I have seen no material, but that is a glabrous plant with entire 
leaves 40 cm. long. 


Ardisia Nevermannii Standl., sp. nov. 


A slender shrub 1.5-2.5 m. high, the branches terete, densely leafy at the 
tips, very densely hirsute with long stiff spreading ferruginous hairs; leaves 
sessile or nearly so, the petioles less than 5 mm. long; leaf blades oblanceolate 
or oblanceolate-oblong, 16-29 cm. long, 5-8 em. wide, acuminate, long-attenu- 
ate to the base, there narrowly obtuse and subauriculate, entire, thin, deep 
green above and hirsute, much paler beneath, densely ferruginous-hirsute, 
conspicuously black-punctate; inflorescence terminal, pendent, the peduncle 
slender, 8-11 em. long, densely hirsute, the panicle lax, open, many-flowered, 
tripinnate, the primary branches long, slender, and curved, the flowers in 
umbels at the end of the branches, the panicles about 10 cm. long and broad; 
bracts persistent, those along the straight percurrent main rachis oblong or 
lanceolate, leaflike, 1-1.5 em. long; pedicels 5-8 mm. long, slender, hirsute; 
sepals 5, broadly ovate or oval, 1.5 mm. long sparsely hispidulous near the 


pc. 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 525 


base, coarsely black-punctate, the margins pale and scarious, glandular- 
ciliolate; petals 4 mm. long, coherent at base, elliptic-ovate, acutish, glabrous, 
purple or purple-pink, densely and coarsely dark-punctate; stamens slightly 
shorter than the petals, the anthers lance-oblong, 2.5 mm. long, much exceed- 
ing the filaments; fruit globose, black, 7-8 mm. in diameter, the endocarp finely 
costate. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,305,625, collected in wet 
forest at Finca Montecristo, on the Rio Reventazén below El Cairo, Province 
of Limén, Costa Rica, altitude 25 meters, February 18, 1926, by Rawle: 
Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 48603). The following collections from 
the same vicinity represent this species: 

Costa Rica: Finca Montecristo, Standley & Valerio 48484. Hamburg 
Finca, Standley & Valerio 48824, 48774, 48754. 


Ardisia Nevermanni is a very distinct species, not obviously related to 
any other known from Central America. The hirsute pubescence alone is 
sufficient to distinguish it. The species is named for Mr. Ferdinand Never- 
mann, a keen student of Costa Rican Coleoptera, at whose home I was so 
fortunate as to be a guest while collecting about El Cairo. 


Ardisia furfuracea Standl., sp. nov. 


A small tree, the branches terete, very stout, very densely and coarsely 
furfuraceous with loose, dark brown scales, the internodes short; petioles very 
stout and broad, 1-2 cm. long but marginate nearly or quite to the base, deeply 
suleate on'the upper surface; leaf blades oblong or narrowly oblong, 17-27 
em. long, 4-7.5 cm. wide, acute at base and apex, entire, thick, green and 
glabrous above or sparsely lepidote along the shallowly sulcate costa, beneath 
brown, very densely lepidote-furfuraceous with coarse loose brown scales, 
rough to the touch, the costa salient, very thick and stout, the lateral nerves 
very slender, prominulous, numerous, ascending at a wide angle; inflores- 
cence terminal, paniculate, pyramidal, about 20 cm. long and broad, tri- 
pinnate, the branches very stout, densely brown-furfuraceous; bracts cadu- 
cous; flowers sessile on the branches or in dense few-flowered sessile clusters, 
the pedicels, if any, 2-2.5 mm. thick and 1-1.5 mm. long; flower buds acute, 
about 4 mm. long; sepals dextrorsely convolute, orbicular, 2 mm. long, gla- 
brous, densely and coarsely punctate, the margin minutely denticulate: petals 
coalescent at base, ovate-oval, narrowed to the obtuse apex, glabrous, coarsely 
dark-punctate; anthers oblong-ovate, 1.8 mm. long, glabrous, cordate at 
base, the filaments nearly equaling the anthers, the stamens slightly shorter 
than the petals. 

Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,306,786, collected in wet 
forest on Cerro de las Lajas, north of San Isidro, Province of Heredia, Costa 
Rica, altitude 2,300 meters, March 7, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal 
Valerio (no. 51556). 


Ardisia furfuracea evidently is related to A. palmana Donn. Smith, of the 
same region. The latter has a much more open inflorescence and lacks the 
coarse furfuraceous covering which is so conspicuous in the species here 
described. 

The flowers of A. furfuracea are white with pinkish dots. 


526 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20 


Parathesis aeruginosa Standl., sp. nov. 


Branches stout, terete, the internodes 1-1.5 cm. long, densely stellate- 
tomentose with red-brown, rather coarse, sessile hairs; petioles stout, 3-9 mm. 
long, densely stellate-tomentose; leaf blades elliptic-oblong, broadest at or 
slightly above the middle, 12-16 cm. long, 4-5 cm. wide, abruptly short-acu- 
minate, cuneately narrowed to the acute base, decurrent upon the petiole, 
obscurely undulate-crenate, membranaceous, deep green above, sparsely 
stellate-pubescent along the costa, elsewhere glabrous, beneath densely 
stellate-hispidulous with red-brown hairs, the costa prominent, the lateral 
nerves numerous, slender, divergent at a wide angle, subarcuate, irregularly 
and laxly anastomosing near the margin; inflorescence terminal, paniculate, 
pyramidal, about 13 cm. long and broad, tripinnate, lax, many-flowered, the 
branches densely ferruginous-tomentose with sessile stellate hairs, the bracts 
linear, 2-3 mm. long; pedicels 2-4 mm. long; buds 3.5 mm. long; sepals nearly 
distinct, linear-triangular, 1.5 mm. long, stellate-hirtellous, acute; petals 
linear-oblong, 2.5 mm. long, minutely stellate-tomentose on both surfaces; 
stamens shorter than the petals, exserted in anthesis, the filaments very short, 
the anthers linear, 1.7 mm. long, with a black dorsal line; ovary conic, gla- 
brous, the style filiform, 2.5 mm. long, glabrous. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 861823, collected in forests of 
Tremedal, near San Ramén, Costa Rica, altitude 1,300 to 1,400 meters, April 
14, 1913, by A. Tonduz (no. 17659). 


Obviously related to the Guatemala P. sessilifolia Donn. Smith, which 
has similar pubescence but chiefly of stipitate, not sessile, hairs. 


Maba nicaraguensis Standl., sp. nov. 


Branchlets slender, subterete, ochraceous, densely furnished with pale, 
slightly elevated lenticels, the young branchlets densely fulvous-puberulent 
and short-pilose with spreading or ascending hairs; petioles stout, 4-6 mm. 
long, densely short-pilose; leaf blades chiefly obovate-oblong or oblanceolate- 
oblong, 3.5-7 cm. long, 1—2.5 cm. wide, obtuse to rounded at apex, gradually 
narrowed to the acute to obtuse (rarely rounded) base, thick, deep green 
above, densely pilose, at least when young, with short slender spreading hairs, 
beneath scarcely paler, densely velutinous-pilose with short, stiff, grayish, 
mostly straight but partly curved hairs, the costa stout, prominent, the lateral 
nerves about 5 on each side, strongly ascending, obscurely anastomosing 
near the margin; pistillate flowers axillary, solitary, the stout pedicels 14 
mm. long; calyx densely fulvous-tomentose on both surfaces, 3 to 5-lobate, 
8-10 mm. long, the tube campanulate, the lobes broadly ovate, obtuse, thick, 
much longer than the tube, their margins slightly recurved; pistillate corolla 
urceolate, the tube 8 mm. long, 5 mm. broad, glabrous near the base, above 
(like the lobes) densely sericeous, the 4 lobes ovate, obtuse, 3 mm. long, erect, 
their margins incurved, the corolla glabrous within; ovary densely short- 
pilose, the style stout, 2.5 mm. long, sericeous. 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,266,111, collected near Mana- 
gua, Nicaragua, April 16, 1926, by Diocleciano Chaves (no. 206). 


Only one other species of Maba is known from Central America, MM. Verae- 
crucis Standl., which has been collected in Salvador. It differs from M. 
nicaraguensis in having glabrate, usually acute or acuminate leaves. 

In the Nicaraguan tree the calyx seems to be as often 4 or 5-parted as 3- 


DEC. 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 527 


parted. In the genus Maba the calyx is supposed to be 3-parted; in Diospyros 
4 or 5-parted. It is evident that in this case, at least, this difference does not 
hold, and it is therefore doubtful whether Maba can be maintained as a dis- 
tinct genus. 

Diospyros Rekoi Standl., sp. nov. 


Branchlets terete, blackish brown or dark reddish brown, bearing numerous 
small, pale, slightly elevated lenticels, the youngest branchlets very densely 
tomentose with short spreading fulvescent hairs, usually also pilose with a 
few longer hairs, the internodes short, subterete or compressed; petioles stout, 
8-11 mm. long, densely tomentose; leaf blades variable, oval to oval-ovate, 
10.5-15.5 em. long, 6.5-7.8 em. wide, broadly rounded to acute at apex, at 
base rounded to abruptly short-cuneate, thin, densely velutinous-hirtellous 
on the upper surface, beneath very densely pilose-tomentose with ochraceous, 
slender, stiff but more or less entangled hairs, the costa and lateral nerves 
prominent beneath, the costa stout, the lateral nerves about 9 on each side, 
ascending, irregular; pistillate flowers (staminate flowers not seen) axillary, 
the inflorescences sometimes 2-flowered, but the pedicels usually solitary, 
stout, straight or curved, densely tomentose, 8-18 mm. long; calyx green, 
densely tomentose on both surfaces, 5-lobate nearly to the base, in anthesis 
1.5-2 em. long, somewhat accrescent in age, the lobes somewhat unequal, 
oblong-ovate to lance-oblong, 7-8 mm. wide, acute, abruptly short-acuminate, 
or narrowed to an obtuse apex; ovary ovoid-globose, 7 mm. broad, densely 
pilose with short spreading hairs, the pubescence long-persistent; corolla 
globose-urceolate, glabrous within, densely tomentose outside, the tube 11 
mm. broad at base, 6-7 mm. long, constricted above, the 5 lobes spreading, 
broadly ovate, obtuse, 4 mm. long; fruit depressed-globose, 4.5 mm. broad, 
glabrate. 

Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,269,427, collected at Achotla, 
Guerrero, Mexico, altitude 700 meters, May, 1926, by Blas P. Reko (no. 
4895). Called ‘‘zapote negro.” 


This is one of the most clearly distinct of all the Mexican species of Diospy- 
ros. In the writer’s key to the Mexican species? it runs at once to D. texana, 
a tree with small leaves and fruit, to which it is not closely related. The 
dense pubescence of the leaves is the most conspicuous character of the plant. 


Loeselia grandiflora Standl., sp. nov. 


Plants perhaps suffrutescent, probably 60 em. tall, much branched, the 
branches slender, stiff, the older ones with pale brown, exfoliating bark, the 
younger branches sparsely arachnoid-villous, at least about the nodes, the 
internodes mostly 3-5 em. long; leaves all opposite, sessile, lance-oblong to 
oblong-ovate, broadest at base, 3-4.8 cm. long, 1-2 cm. wide, long-attenuate 
to the narrow subulate-tipped apex, shallowly cordate and clasping at base, 
stiff, pale green, finely serrate with close spinulose-tipped teeth, minutely 
glandular-puberulent on both surfaces, the venation prominent and coarsely 
reticulate; flowers forming a large open much-branched panicle, the pedicels 
mostly 3-12 mm. long, sometimes longer, sparsely tomentulose and glandular- 
puberulent; bracts of the branchlets subulate, entire, appressed, those (2-6) 
at the base of the flower linear-lanceolate, 10-12 mm. long, dark purplish, 


2 Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 23: 1126. 1924. 


528 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 20 


glabrous, ciliate-serrulate, closely appressed to the calyx; calyx 6 mm. long, 
greenish, hyaline, glabrous, lobed nearly to the base, the lobes lanceolate, 
acute, entire; corolla tube very slender, 1 cm. long, finely villous outside, the 
lobes (including the claw) about 1.5 cm. long, glabrous or nearly so, linear- 
oblanceolate, cream-colored when dry, 2-3 mm. wide, glabrous or nearly so, 
obtuse at apex and entire or nearly so, the claws, very long and slender, pur- 
plish; filaments long-exserted, glabrous. ) 

Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,269,768, collected at Achotla, 
Guerrero, Mexico, altitude 700 meters, January, 1927, by Blas P. Reko (no. 
5100). No. 5057, from the same locality, is conspecific. 


It is a surprise to come upon a new Mexican plant so strongly marked as 
this one. It is true that collectors are still finding in Mexico numerous unde- 
scribed species of plants quite as distinct as any ever published, but the pres- 
ent plant is, after Loeselia mexicana, the most clearly differentiated species 
of its genus. In other species of Loeselia the leaves are all or chiefly alter- 
nate, while in L. grandiflora they are uniformly opposite. The large flowers, 
which must make the plant a rather handsome one, also are distinctive, and 
the form of the inflorescence is not matched in any other species. L. grandi- 
flora belongs to the section Huloeselia Peter. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


Pauut C. SranpueEy, of the National Museum, sailed from New York 
November 26, to spend the winter in botanical field work in Honduras. 
This Republic is almost wholly unknown botanically, and its exploration is 
expected to yield rich results. The work is being undertaken in cooperation 
with the Arnold Arboretum and the United Fruit Company. 


Professor A 8. Hircucock gave an address before the Botanical Society 
of Pennsylvania at Philadelphia, November 19, on The morphology and 
classification of the grass family. 


The Petrologists’ Club met at the Geophysical Laboratory on November 
15. Dr. G. P. Merritu of the National Museum discussed The petrology 
of meteorites. | 

The meeting of the Pick and Hammer Club at the Geological Survey on 
November 19 was devoted to an informal discussion of the Application of 
geophysical methods to geological problems. N. H. Heck, of the Coast and 
Geodetic Survey, reported on the action of the International Geodetic and 
Geophysical Union in appointing a committee on this subject, and spoke of 
the Coast Survey’s own work. W. J. Rooney described the cooperative 
study of electrical methods under way by the Department of Terrestrial 
Magnetism (Carnegie Institution) and the Michigan School of Mines. 
A. C. SPENCER reported on President Mason’s New York address on the 
electrical methods. F. L. Hess spoke on the work of the U. 8S. Bureau of 
Mines and the Colorado School of Mines. There was discussion by F.E. 
WricutT, O. H. Gisu, L. B. Tuckerman, P. R. Heyu, and others. 


g ANNOUNCEMENTS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY 
: AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES 


ae “ue ] eae. Dekoralee 6. The Botanical Society. 

a _ Wednesday, December 7. The Engineering Society. 
of The Medical Society. 

; "i ieaay,, December 8. The Chemical Society. 

- Saturday, December 10. The Philosophical Society. 


ak een» December 14. The Medical Society. 


The Geological Society. Program: 


Presidential Address: Coarnus Burts, Stratigraphic 
variations in the Appalachian Valley. 
Annual Meeting. 


ke : ona December 17. The Helminthological Society. 
? : The Biological Society. 


The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page 
i ite sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month. 


¥ 


Vou. 17 DEcEMBER 19, 1927 No. 21 


ee ee 
OOO arn me — 


OF THE 


WASHINGTON ACADEMY 
OF SCIENCES 


BOARD OF EDITORS 


Wiiiram J. Peters Aanrs CHasn 


JOHN B. Reesipr, Jr. 
DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY 


NATIONAL MUSEUM 


ASSOCIATE EDITORS 
L. H. Apams 8. A. RoHwer 


PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


E. A. GotpMan G. W. Stosz 


BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL‘SOCInNTY 


R. F. Griaags © J. R. Swanton 


BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 


Roaer C. WELLS 
CHEMICAL SOCIETY 


PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY 
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY 


BY THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Mt, Roya anp Guitrorp Aves, 
Battrmore, MaryLanp 


Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the 
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for 
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917, Authorized on July 3, 1018, 


Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences 


This JourNaL, the official organ of the Ge traecin ‘Acatabiy of Sciences, winiel t 
present a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this end it publishes: 
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2 
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington; 
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4) 
notes of events connected with the scientific lifeof Washington. TheJournNaLisissued 
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except during the summer 
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt — 
publication is an essential feature; a manuseript reaching the editors on the fifth or ~ 
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the pater ih, bie meas, 
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. ' Od tod 


M anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Kditors; they ahoke: ‘ ee 
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without. essential changes. The 
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors: Keferences 
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate 
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered . 
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. 

Jiiustrations will be used only when necessary and wil! be confined to text figures : 
or diagrams of simple character. ~ a 

Proof .—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors _ wee 
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors 
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ae, 

Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule. of riees. re 


Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover 
50 $.85 $1 .65 $2.59 $3.25 $2.00 
100 1.90 3.80. 4.7% 6.00 2.50 
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00 
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 £200 | ret 


250 3.00 5.30 ~ 6.25 7.50 : 
Anadditional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. : 


Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive Pasi 
nation and date of issue,;will be furnished when ordered. ~ : c 


As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra hci or reprints es 
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. Bate 


The rate of Subscription per volume ts.....2.ccccececvcecccssencceccensanes $6.00" 
Bemi-monthly numbers. co... 66s. ions ces oc coe scene waciia weeea ess +me came mee: Cammnnl am 
Moathly numbers i. ooo ig ook ova Bivens Ac le a Wn ees bs wale de eee 50 ae 


Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences,”’ "end oe 
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, D. C. ae 
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, Tan on. Te ae 
Ezchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other ‘publications. | ae 
Missing Nugnbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim 1 is | made ioe 
within thirty days after date of the following issue. 3 od ee 


*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates: 
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 
Vou. 17 DECEMBER 19, 1927 No. 21 


PHYSICS.—A note on the change of compressibility with pressure.' 
Leason H. Apams, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution 
of Washington. , 


The compressibility of practically all substances decreases with 
increasing pressure. For most solids this decrease is a very small 
quantity because the compressibility itself is very small; indeed, the 
change in compressibility is so minute that it is only by the use of 
delicate experimental methods and of a large pressure-range (10,000 
megabaryes? or more) that it can be measured. It is sometimes con- 
venient to determine the mean compressibility over a given pressure- 
range and not convenient or practicable to measure the variation of 
compressibility with pressure. The object of this note is to call 
attention to the relation between compressibility and change of 
compressibility of crystalline substances of moderate or low com- 
pressibility, for the purpose of providing an estimate of the pressure- 
coefficient of compressibility when the compressibility only is known. 

The results of available measurements are shown in Table 1. The 
second column gives the compressibilities of the substances listed in 
the first column, and in column 3 are the corresponding values of the 
change of compressibility with pressure. 

The compressibility 6, according to the usual custom, is defined as 
the relative change in the volume V per unit increase in pressure, P. 
That is, 

ey ed 
er Va dP 


in which V9 is the volume at P = 0; and @ is the compressibility at 


1 Received November 19, 1927. 
2 The megabarye (sometimes called the megabar) is the equivalent of 10° dynes per 
sq. cm. One megabarye = 0.987 atm. 


529 


_ 530 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


zero pressure. In Table 1 the quantity, — AS, means —101° & and 
is the decrease in the value of 10° for 10,000 megabaryes increase of 


pressure. For these substances of moderate compressibility “ is 


independent of pressure—at least within the error of experiment. 
Two widely different methods have been used in obtaining com- 
pressibilities of solids. The one involves the measurement of the 
change of length of a specimen when subjected to pressure. This 
method is capable of great precision and is the one by which the larger 
part of the data in Table 1 was obtained. It has the disadvantage 
that the cubic compressibility can be obtained from a single series of 
measurements only when the substance belongs to the cubic system — 
and is not aeolotropic from deformation or lack of homogeneity. The 
other method determines the volume-change and hence the cubic 
compressibility directly, and gives a true result for aeolotropic ma- 
terials. Its disadvantage is its lesser sensitivity as compared with 
the linear method. ; 
All of the available data for crystalline solids whose compressibility 
is 8-10-® or less are plotted on Figure 1, except tellurium, which does 
not fall in the diagram, and the alkali halides® which are known to be 
abnormal in many respects as compared with other compounds. 
The points for the alkali halides lie somewhat above the other points, 
forming, in a general way, a separate family of points. In the plot, 
measurements on cubic metals by the linear method are denoted by 
circles; direct measurements of cubic compressibility, or linear measure- 
ments in three directions on metals, by triangles; and measurements of 
all kinds on compounds, by crosses. Data for which different results 
were obtained with different samples (e.g. aluminum) are averaged to 
give asingle point. Linear measurements with substances not belong- 
ing to the cubic system, on samples cut in one direction only, have not 
been included. It will be noted that in general — A increases with 8B, 
that is, the greater the compressibility, the more it changes with 
increasing pressure. At first sight the points do not seem to fall any 
too well on a single curve, and yet the five or six points that are con- 
siderably off the curve probably attract the attention unduly as com- 
pared with the thirty or more points that do lie on or near the curve. 
It is not the purpose of the writer to urge that A is a single-valued 
function of 6 for all solids. In all probability AB depends on other 


*Slater, Phys. Rev. 23: 488. 1924. 


DEC. 19, 1927 ADAMS: CHANGE OF COMPRESSIBILITY WITH PRESSURE 531 


TABLE 1.—CompRESSIBILITY AND CHANGE OF COMPRESSIBILITY WITH PRESSURE FOR 
Various Souips. THe Unit or Pressure Is THE MEGABARYE 


COMPRESSI- CHANGE OF 


2 MATERIAL BILITY 1058 eee REFERENCE 
RPE yo et sperm ee rms Ge ty OROO Tes. OnG4 so ae 8 
PME SMRMMTNA CITE) 0s fares Ue. Sk oe Onsite ae O04. es 8 
Rae MMMININTIM TOG) ch 23 eke ot, As) Herrosed oye, hues ase oh 0.31 ; Pete Hee O00 ia. 8 eae 8 
"Le 57/5) S10 0 A ee ee oP ae ORS Oe eae On 02s eee 8 
LDA VELISIITE: SIVSbE Bai aan) Aes als See a OPA Gre opie. OF Oates 8 
DIED /SN STO eg a ere RRNA a ae OsS2er ee ee OEOS Rave Late 4,8 
PE. Til TUES Be Rint satya a aati en a aco Oras peer 0:04. he 8 
VE TIE Elis oo ethene See en CIE EN a Oar a: OSO4 et cata 8 
“LES RE. « UB ree ae pe BR a OR Sees a ree OR aaNet OHO 4a Car, er. 8 
COTIL TL. oc SBE eee RA era 1 em A On5OR ae On OS ate 8 
LTE 0. 2g ae a ale ae neo Pine NL ete et ORAS toss: ON0G) eae 8 
ie PRIERITOE My PS He. REN cen nde celebs O290N an ae OfO5= sarees 8 
SOLE 5 dB, Te A a Cre IBA CH ested mae > OOS esc 8 
feu PSTEE ITE COTTON 06 Dea ag a A pe pst! | Nee be re A a ee 8 
EMbrmMTIITN (CASTING)... is cbs yee kee ee ieee Ree 1 ETO ee ees 8 
er eUA TENA OM wel yk 2 ak ion ict ake a aha te ee OE Aste le: 8 
Deke. a). We ee ea PAR” Pee eS el ai OPS heer 3,8 
12) EIRLDSET (lee Ree SHOOT AE ee OS AQ wees tia aes! 8 
“SEEDERS te ae em LSB VEO ata ea ae TOE 5 Seuan eee: 8 
“CLD o DE ELEIIE DS a 2 RO 0 Shs See eee 1S Gos 8 
Et oe ee i ay see aii tes 2 ae OR DG Ae Hat 3,8 
ALTER. ooh RS Meir are ea ae en AR 8 Se Oia ee ae 3,4 
PMR BLINV EG te Se eee Sees we has Loe Degas ema nets O2Gbe= Wiinee -. 
UID. cig Se Ger an ERS ne ne [OO See O28 ba tts ae 3,4 
JE AD LAT). es ey a OSs el OSGi? oe ae 5 
Ji OMISE gs te SR a: Sor I, oh en Ee aie ie OEOB ed pee 5 
2 TAT TEVA, a ee aa a le rn DEAT A ET Me ORDO sees 3 
UA TEUET G9 sy ile RCS BRIT Sal A Oe ea a 7 (ae dopa Ope: YAM eae ee Sui 
pistes PIERRE DAI OS Oy AN Mc. CIS Sean a2 Danie Gin OF 40h eres 6 
IAGO Mey ewes ot ers Salnvers yk ag 3 ik BA te ice Oat eee 6 
NASIR DIU Sg ap ia ee a a a 1.2 PL eS O29. eae 6 
PERRIN MUERTOS te) ey oe RES a BOT! Ono are pines (1 02 sien ean ai a 
am REDE SRS eI are Nas cee Sree PNG Ae” ov eys cha lere ud § ORO Ree aie O20 4s eae W 
MING MEN eee ke cass gue eco Teas AR On1Be sae i 
CELI CIURD So SE RIN GRR Deed erty a AOD Pe pan TES Gey pee. QL08 5 Sere Uf 
Scivation ee IR he nt i ON GRO ae ORIG. eens {i 
DETR PU ae mate eles. Ola, Ni a ne AGT. ae oa. ORL Se eae 7 
Baa eTMUCHM tiny! ota ae lal eure ate ten ee ho) «alas (310 Bee Soe ee O10 4s Saas Cf 


3 Adams, Williamson, and Johnston, Journ. Am. Chem. Soc. 41: 12. 1919. 
4 Bridgman, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 60: 305. 1925. 

5 Bridgman, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 59: 109. 1924. 

6 Adams and Williamson, Journ. Frank. Inst. 195: 475. 1923. 

7 Bridgman, Am. Journ. Sci. 10: 483. 1925. 

8 Bridgman, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 58: 165. 1923. 


5382 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


"10119 [BJ USUIIIEd x9 
oy} UBYy} 1038019 A]pIeYy SI OAINO oY} ULOI] S}UIOd OY} JO JSOUL JO UOT}VIADP OYJ, “aInssoid jo osvo1OUI sokTeqesour 
000‘0L 4q pasneo gO] UI osvorDep oy} SI Yorym ‘fy— ysulese poyqod st “gOT ‘Ap[Iqissordui0o oy [—*] oIns17 


901 X F ALMIGISSAYADWOD 
Ol 6 8 L 9 S 4 E j | 


O 
So 
Y04 SFV— 


80 


oe) 
SSAYXVEVOAW OOOO! 


N 


pEc. 19, 1927 ADAMS: CHANGE OF COMPRESSIBILITY WITH PRESSURE 933 


factors, but the divergence of the points in Figure 1, is for the majority 
of the materials, hardly larger than the error of experiment—experi- 
mental error caused perhaps more by a lack of compactness in the 
material than by the direct errors of observation. This effect in 
crystalline aggregates is well illustrated by the behavior of marble. 
Ordinary marble may show, under pressure, a perfect volume-elasticity, 
yet at low pressures the compressibility is abnormally high and falls 
more rapidly than can be accounted for by the elastic properties of 
the calcite grains themselves. 

It is believed that the curve in Figure 1 will be of practical value in 
providing a rough estimate of the change of compressibility in sub- 
stances for which the mean compressibility only, over a given pressure 
range, is known. For example, if the mean cubic compressibility of a 
material over the pressure range from 0 to 10,000 megabaryes were 
found to be 1.10 x 10~®, then from the value of A given by the curve 
it would follow that 108 would be 1.16 at zero pressure and 1.04 at 
P = 10,000. It is probable that these estimated values would not be 
in error by as much as + 0.02. 

A solution of the problem of the change of compressibility with 
pressure must await a more complete knowledge of the dynamics of 
the atomic aggregates in crystals. The problem must be attacked 
from the theoretical side as well as the experimental, and until more 
is known of interatomic forces as a function of distance, any prediction 
as to Ag for a substance, if the mean compressibility only is known, 
must be made by some empirical method. For solids of moderate 
compressibility (excluding the alkali metals and alkali halides) the 
curve given in the figure will provide an estimate of the change of 
compressibility accurate enough for many purposes. 


SUMMARY 


The change of compressibility with pressure for crystalline solids 
is to a rough approximation dependent on the compressibility itself, 
the two quantities increasing together. The mutual relation 1s more 
obvious if the halides of the heavier alkalis be excluded; 85 per cent 
of the remaining observations deviate from a single smooth curve by 
an amount which is hardly greater than the experimental error. 
Hence this curve may be used to determine the order of magnitude, at 
least, of the pressure-coefficient of compressibility, if the mean com- 
pressibility over a given pressure-range is known. 


534 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


MINERALOGY .—Almandite-spessartite garnet from Gwynns Falls, 
Baltvmore.1 EARL V. SHANNON and Fornst A. GONYER. 


Pegmatite in the gneiss which is quarried at Gwynns Falls, Baltimore, 
bears garnet as scattered and fairly large crystals in a fairly coarse 
pegmatite, and as small crystals distributed in parallel lines in finer- 
grained pegmatite. The garnet of the latter rock, which presents a 
marked similarity to the banded garnetiferous rock in some of the 
gem-bearing pegmatites of the Southern California tourmaline field, 
was analyzed in the laboratory of the National Museum and the 
results are presented herewith. 

The specimen from which the analyzed material came consists 
principally of quartz and feldspar in granular gneissic bands with 
some schistose mica partings. The feldspar is principally white to 
pale buff orthoclase and forms grains up to 1 centimeter across. The 
garnet is aggregated into granular, parallel and somewhat wavy 
bands from 1 to 3 millimeters wide which follow the general parallel 
structure of the rock. These bands consist of imperfectly euhedral 
crystals averaging 0.5 millimeter but reaching an extreme size of 2.0 
millimeters and isolated in quartz and feldspar. ‘The color ranges, 
according to size, from pale brownish pink to dark brownish red. 

Garnet-rich pieces were crushed and screened between 40 and 100 
mesh sieves, and the minerals separated with methylene iodide heavy 
solution. The cleaned sample consisted principally of euhedral garnet 
crystals formed by an equal development of the faces of the trapezo- 
hedron and the rhombic dedocahedron. ‘The final sample showed only 
a very small number of extraneous grains, principally of adhering 
quartz, and when ground for analysis was homogeneously isotropic. 
The analysis gave the following results: 


ANALYSIS AND RATIOS OF GARNET FROM BALTIMORE 


(Forest A. Gonyer, analyst) 


Constituent Per cent Ratios 


SO en ace 599). godt) “god 1)" oR Sc se eee aes 
INCOR ge ed tie ata 2189. 208)) 
eis Ce. eh ka Oia eae) 1008) 218) ele ee 
MEO) Ape eas (A ioe Ad | 91.58... | . 
iN Oak CR Ea 148) 6 Oe 
NEO met TG | EDT -596.... 109 x3 Ses 
GAO) es he 2.34 042] 

100.20 


1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 
Received November 17. 1927. 


DEC. 19, 1927 SHANNON AND GONYER: ALMANDITE-SPESSARTITE GARNET 930 


It will be seen from the analysis that the garnet is a member of the 
almandite-spessartite series and contains the ferrous iron molecule 
a little in excess of the manganese molecule. Most all garnets from 
granitic pegmatites belong to this series. When the bases are com- 
bined in constituent molecules, the following mineralogical composi- 
tion is derived from the analysis: 


Molecule Formula Ratio Per cent 

PMUPRIAINCHIGE oat ete oe ees en 3FeO- Al,O3-38S102........ POO eres 49.87 
SD /LPESSHITE TH (aN: eee SU en 3MnO- Al,03-38Si02........ KOS ae waseioe 40.17 
_A TENS PRG IGS eM pee Ae me 3CaQO: Fe203-38102........ s009)s a tea es 4.58 
EOSSUMATIUC hy yn loses te ee eee SCO AlOz-ao1Os oe) fe. JOOS erste 2.26 
POART ID. 5 cect ee on Aer aa me 38M gO- AloO3-35102........ OOF eras 1.62 
eMummaima (EXCESS)... .. 2. sce ac ee he US Ose espace SOMO ee rare eis 1.82 
100.32: 


The calculated index of refraction of a garnet of the above composi- 
tion, excluding the excess alumina and using Ford’s data for the 
end members, is 1.816 while the index of refraction of the analyzed 
powder was found to be 1.808. 

The ratios of the first table show that the silica almost exactly 
balances the bivalent bases whereas the trivalent bases are a little 
too high to conform exactly with the garnet formula and show an 
excess of 1.82 per cent of alumina in the second table. Many analyses 
of manganese-bearing garnets present a deficiency of trivalent bases, 
and to conform to the general garnet formula 3R”’O-R’.03-3S8i02 it 
is necessary to assume some of the manganese to be present in the 
trivalent state. As shown in a previous communication,? the defi- 
ciency may at times be due to analytical error. In the present analy- 
sis the basic acetate method for separation of manganese from iron 
and alumina was not used, the iron and alumina being precipitated 
only by ammonia. The results showed trivalent bases high instead. 
of low, as is usual when the acetate method is employed. The whole 
analysis was then repeated and the results checked with the greatest. 
eare. As manganese is the most troublesome element in such an 
analysis, the additional amount of manganese in the weighed iron 
and alumina was determined. ‘The precipitate obtained from the 
final ammonia precipitation was ignited, weighed, fused with potassium. 
bisulphate, and obtained in sulphate solution in the usual manner. 
The solution was then made up to a volume of 250 cubic centimeters. 


2HarL V. SHANNON, ‘“‘Blythite’’ and the manganese garnet from Amelia, Virginia. 
Journ. Wash. Acad. Sci. 17: 444-453. 1927. 


536 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


in a calibrated flask. One fifth (50 cubic centimeters) of the solu- 
tion was withdrawn with a pipette and the manganese in it deter- 
mined colorimetrically. The balance of the solution was reduced, 
titrated for iron, and tested for titanium as usual. Minor amounts of 
manganese contaminating the lime and magnesia precipitates were 
likewise colorimetrically estimated and appropriate corrections made. 
The results were highly satisfactory and it has been concluded to 
avoid the use of the basic acetate method in future analyses. 


MINERALOGY.—Natrojarosite from Kingman, Arizona. Ear. V. 
SHANNON and Forrmst A. GONYER. 


Since the discovery that jarosite or members of the jarosite group 
of minerals are unusually common in the oxidized portions of ore 
deposits, especially in desert regions or areas of more or less arid 
climate, the interest in this group has increased among geologists 
and practical mining men as well as among mineralogists. Follow- 
ing the description of the original potash jarosite there were found, 
almost simultaneously, other analogues of the compound in which 
soda and lead were essential bases. ‘The lead compound, plumbo- 
jarosite, has in numerous places been worked as an ore of lead, and 
a variety occurring in small amount at the Boss mine, Nevada, proved 
to contain relatively very large amounts of platinum and palladium. 
In addition to these most interesting minerals, analogues of jarosite 
in which the potash is replaced by silver oxide and ammonium oxide 
have recently been found in Utah. In appearance these jarosites 
are so similar that they cannot be distinguished from each other with- 
out chemical tests. Although distinct and measurable crystals have 
been found, the minerals usually vary from yellow to brown in color, 
are more or less earthy in texture, and have in many cases been 
mistaken for earthy limonite. The finer-grained examples are dull 
in luster, but the coarser varieties are usually silky or satiny in 
lustre. 

A large lot of specimens of a jarosite was received at the National 
Museum from Mr. W. F. Smith, of Kingman, Arizona. The locality 
is given as the Georgia Sunset mining claim, ? mile east of MceConnico, 
a station on the Santa Fe Railroad in Mohave County, 4 miles south 
of Kingman. Since the material was pure and in good specimens 


1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 
Received November 17, 1927. 


DEC. 19, 1927 SHANNON AND GONYER: NATROJAROSITE FROM ARIZONA 537 


which it was desirable to preserve in the collections, it was analyzed. 
A representative specimen of the purer material was ground, and 
when examined under the microscope was found of satisfactory quality. 
The analysis gave the following results: 


ANALYSIS AND RATIOS OF NATROJAROSITE 


Constituent Per cent Ratio 

Mrrsmlibless <a see a2? at 

Fe,0;3 ret eW erste) lowe Veiveperrcuisl ever elie. 6 Niel Wi elven’ wie 48 .23 ottiawetetole 302 

2s) ee a a A a ROG Res a CRs Ee eB aobe ait Oe 

EOP A ye ek W5GA Peale = 

pe Pe AG ok ae see ee oe QO eee eee 001 

S009 OS SRR ea ae OOS ears ahs OO Lee ae NOS sea eaes 1-03><0 

2D) ee ee Be Oe at oe: 069 

Mare ee ee at: Di OGhe aki 024) 

is Oe 2) Sana none 

APOE ge ye. ars as bs trace 

(NEL OS Oe none 

er es, = Yo iee i! Kaan oe i 97 Ui Ay igre A eer ey orcs 1.05 X 4 

TE Do SO eee LO (O82 IS HO ak SOMERS. 99 X 6 
100.25 


The ratios give the formula for natrojarosite, (Na,K).O-3Fe.0;- 
480;-6H.O. The material is free from more than traces of silver 
and lead although a larger sample might have shown precious metals 
upon assay. 

The material is compact to earthy and golden-brown to yellow. 
The more friable and lustreless portions greatly resemble common 
yellow ocher. Other specimens consist of a greatly altered, kaolinized 
or sericitized, and bleached igneous rock heavily impregnated with 
pyrite. Others are similarly altered rock from which the pyrite has 
decomposed, leaving jarosite obviously derived by oxidation from the 
pyrite. 

Under the microscope the mineral is clean, transparent, greenish- 
yellow, and nonpleochroic with high birefringence. The powder is 
made up of tabular crystal grains, many of which show hexagonal 
or rhombohedral boundaries. Many of the crystals lie on their 
basal plane and since these are dark in all positions between crossed 
nicols the mineral is uniaxial, or nearly so, and is negative. The 
indices of refraction measured are: w-= 1.829, « = 1.760 + 0.002. 
The differences in optical properties between the several members 
of the group are not such that they can be differentiated micro- 
scopically. 


038 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


PETROLOGY.—Rocks. of the Galdpagos Islands.1 H. 8. Wasu- 
IncToN and Mary G. Kryss, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie 
Institution of Washington. 


In 1923 the Harrison Williams expedition of the New York Zoo- 
_ logical Society visited the Galdépagos Islands, where extensive zoolog- 
ical collections were made.? Dr. Beebe, Director of Scientific Work, 
was so good as to collect some of the rocks, in spite of the very limited 
time at the disposal of the expedition. For this and for his kind 
permission to describe some of the specimens we would express our 
hearty thanks. 

This small group of wholly volcanic islands, lying on the equator 
about 500 miles west of Ecuador, was first made known to science 
by Charles Darwin, who visited them in 1835 during the famous 
cruise of the Beagle and described them in a classic chapter.’ Since 
then several other expeditions have visited the group, as noted by 
Beebe in his book cited above. Most of these expeditions were for 
zoological and botanical purposes and, apart from Darwin’s masterly 
observations, the literature on the petrography of the islands is very 
scanty. Of the papers that deal especially with the rocks of the 
islands there appear to be but two that need to be mentioned here 
and that are not included in Beebe’s bibliography. One is a paper 
by Gooch! describing a set of specimens given him as a student by 
Tschermak; the other is a brief report by Merrill’ on a small collec- 
tion of rocks made during the Albatross expedition in 1891. Neither 
Zirkel nor Rosenbusch do more than make very brief mention of the 
‘““palagonite”’ tuff. 

Darwin estimated the number of craters at about 2,000, and 
several of them have been in eruption during the last hundred years 
or so.6 The lavas, in general, have been considered to be basaltic, 
with the peculiar yellow tuff described by Darwin, but the papers by 
Gooch and by Merrill give indication that there may be considerable 
variety, as will be noted later. The specimens especially studied by 
us were collected by Beebe on Eden, an islet off the northwest coast 


1 Received November 19, 1927. 

2 WILLIAM BEEBE, Galapagos: World’s End. New York, 1924. 

3 Darwin, Geological Observations, 3rd. ed., London, pp. 110-131, 1891. 

4 Frank A. Goocn, Tsch. Min. Mitth. 6: 133. 1876. 

> Merriuu, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 16: 235. 1893. 

6 See Sapper, Katalog der geschichtlichen Vulkanausbriiche, p. 95,1917. Also BEEBE, 
op. cit., pp. 411, 412. (ca. 1912, 1897). These two eruptions are not mentioned by 
Sapper. 


DEC. 19, 1927 WASHINGTON AND KEYES: ROCKS OF GALAPAGOS ISLANDS 599 


of Indefatigable. They consist of basalt and of the peculiar yellow 
tuff; the other specimens were so altered as scarcely to repay study. 

Basalt.—The rock is dense, non-scoriaceous, and very fine-grained, 
but not aphanitic, small glistening crystals of feldspar being visible 
through the mass. The color is very dark brownish gray—almost 
black. A few very small phenocrysts of feldspar are seen here and 


TABLE 1.—Basauts or GALAPAGOS AND OF Hawall 


(1) (2) (3) 

Lot. oy ae Se Sena Re See ONT Pei iE eee Rien ee Tego ea 48.24 48.04 48 42 
ee NER ew ee ie: Phos Magiierl ds ug da ape fe S2 15.35 13.97 
Bi atte a Rr SL a ae rn aa eae meaner Or ene 0.78 De ANG, 
SN nner Re Re res ce eS rr, a esr Stee ay 9.84 Os OPT 
Oe so OR ee SG Eee ai ied ee Me eo ae 5.84 Na Ere 4.61 
ELL. 12 3 TE ERE Bt are ee Teen ae Oates eas en 8 9.84 10213 8.86 
ae es sel dae cis SN ak aes Cha eee 3.63 3.26 DeOU 
UR ee ea altoid nae Picea viele ats 0.64 0.79 1.29 
Ei = lan c ~ Sa I ae eS ea et ra me Ane 0.72 0.27 0.84 
Sie ee Ne ee a aely ca ge se elas 0.11 0.04 0.42: 
Cb a. | GLE SRO SIS a cr a es or 3.88 Bula BAD 
NP tk pe Na Se 6 el ete a git iw 0.16 0.33 0.91 
eto elle Se RR As I dene ia eng 9 en 0.20 0.10 Ola 

99.7 100.62 99.78 

Norms 

OS so Sl NEARS gon eels Pareto ARR, AL —— - 0.84 
mPa eee, eA Rie Tk. ok cde Wiacan ot © 3.89 4.45 Che 
Ped oa SS ee ene ns Me er 29.87 DATES PAGEL 
RRP ry A SRR as ps RS oils wes 8, 25.02 24.74 19.46 
VE pee he ERE RP Tae aa a oars ES MR 0.28 ——~ —— 
RU ee fee AR ate h ain We. cee Pe hia cag Sarina? Semele 18.67 18.65 15.49 
pare Bees irs See Rees . hie, VE um Gree. —- 8.91 12.88. 
PRI See FO ee ance tas hey Beta 11.98 0.76 —_——. 
OLE Lo Wiens I i STP oR: ere Eeeiees eee Seen Re aS. A iis 8.35 6.03: 
ve se cas ik Gee RR aT ie Benes TPS, Fe A ads 7.45 5.93 6.23 
B05 SSS Ul aE a CIS IERA ont? Gb age ey iar: St levee or a 0.34 0.67 2202 


(1) Andesine basalt, Eden Islet, GalApagos Islands. Keyes analyst. 

(2) Andesine basalt, Hualalai, Hawaii. Washington analyst. Am. Journ. Sci. 6: 
104. 1923. 

(3) Andesine basalt, Mauna Kea, Hawaii. Washington analyst. Am. Journ. Sci. 5: 
493. 1923. 


there. In thin section, the texture is seen to be ophitic, the rock being 
made up of tables of andesine (about Ab;An,), with interstitial, anhe- 
dral, pale brown, non-pleochroic augite, and very few rather larger 
rounded olivines. There is no magnetite, but considerable darkish 
brown glass in interstitial patches. A narrow rim of the glass sur- 
rounds the olivines. . 


040 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


The chemical composition of this basalt is shown in No. 1 of Table 1. 
The analysis is that of a normal basalt, which may be matched by 
several of the basalts of Hawaii, as shown in Nos. 2 and 3 of Table 1. 
The only features worthy of special mention are the great prepon- 
derance of FeO over Fe: O3, and the high Na.O and TiO.. 

Tuff—Darwin devotes considerable space to the description and 
discussion of the origin of ‘‘a singular kind of tuff,’ which forms 
craters on Chatham and James Islands. ‘This is the so-called ‘“‘palag- 
onitic’’ tuff of Bunsen, Zirkel, and Rosenbusch. All the specimens 
examined by us came from the small islet of Eden. 

This tuff is very dense and compact, but most specimens can be 
readily scratched with a knife, having a hardness of 3 to 4. The color 
is a rather light, yellowish brown and the luster is peculiar—greasy 
or, as Darwin puts it, resinous. Fragments are slightly translucent 
on thin edges. The mass contains very small (1 to 2 mm.) grains 
of black augite and also fragments of basaltic lava, some of them 
scorlaceous. | 

The making of coherent thin sections of this tuff, using the most 
compact specimen, proved amatter of much difficulty, as the section 
broke up and spread into a number of detached pieces. ‘The greater 
part of the material is composed of small angular fragments of clear 
bright yellow glass, slightly mottled, the average index of refraction 
being 1.585, as kindly determined by Dr. Merwin. This glass con- 
tains a few small inclusions, some of them of augite and some inde- 
terminable, with a few small ellipsoidal vacuoles. These glass frag- 
ments are separated by a white doubly refracting mineral of very low 
refractive index, which appears to be zeolitic. The presence of 
this accounts for the peculiar action of the section. A few grains of 
olivine and one or two of augite are seen. | 

An analysis of a compact specimen, free from basalt fragments and 
from veinlets of calcite, is giver in No. 1 of Table 2, with one of a 
similar tuff made by Bunsen in 1851, and several analyses of similar 
rocks. In No. 1 the low 810., MgO, and KO are noteworthy, and 
it is very evident that the iron is almost wholly in the ferric state. 
The amount of H,O (both + and —) is remarkably high, the two 
together making up almost 21 per cent of the rock. Unquestionably 
much of this belongs to the rather abundant zeolitic material, but 
some of it is also probably contained in the glass. The complete 
absence of CO, in such a hydrated tuff is noteworthy. ‘The analysis 
by Bunsen, one of three made some 75 years ago, is of only historic 


DEC. 19, 1927 WASHINGTON AND KEYES: ROCKS OF GALAPAGOS ISLANDS O41] 


interest, but in its general outlines it greatly resembles the recent 
one and is evidence of Bunsen’s accurate work, given the facilities 
and methods of the time. 

As compared with analyses of similar rocks composed mainly of 
yellow glass, some analyses of which are given in the table, the Eden 
tuff is much less alkalic than the yellow tuff of San Felix (No. 3), 
which is derived from a nephelite basanite, and differs in other 
respects, especially in Al,O; and MgO. If it is assumed that there 


TABLE 2.—ANALYSES OF PALAGONITIC TUFFS 
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 


rine mee AS! Roe yi Sielg thas 38.07 36.35 48 .90 47.75 46.58 
Ji) 505 ee a 14. 64 13.03 8.14 13.80 18.34 18.61 
2) ew ite 7.93 9.99 5.57 er (fi 9.94 7.43 
LEEIO) sie eee a 0.87 —— SEU 6.84 1.09 3.1 
oO a 3.84 6.58 9.05 8.85 4.78 1293 
CaO. > a an eee 8.97 7.54 7.44 enc tele 8.14 
MRNA ee ccc. Rw «6 2.67 0.70 4.70 Spoz 3.34 3.85 
il Ce Ae 0.15 0.94 Sigs 0.96 0.19 OE 
1B AO = St 2 12.34 4.01 1.65 ——. ——- 
OE Rite i asa 8 | eas 8.35 a lay eens 
Oise ee none me 4.00 trace —— —— 
Ook cr rr 2.00 n.d. 4.76 Our one, SLOW 
TE Oe, on Ae 0.01 n.d. 0.83 0.04 0.01 —— 
beret ose Ok O14 n.d. meds trace 0.19 — 

100.61 100 .00 99 95 100.11 100.00 100 .00 


(1) Palagonitic tuff; Eden Islet, GalApagos Islands. Keyes analyst. 

(2) Palagonite, Gaidpagos Islands. Bunsen analyst. Ann. Chem. Pharm. 83: 221. 
1851. (Calculated to 100). 

(3) Basanite tuff, Cerro Amarillo, San Felix Island. Washington analyst. Bull. 
Geol. Soc. Amer. 35: 381. 1924. , 

(4) Palagonite (“‘Basalt glass’’), Palagonia, Sicily. Ponte analyst. Atti Accad. 
Gioenia (5) 3 (10): 7. 1910. 

(5) Analysis No. 1 calculated to 100.00, as free from H,0. 

(6) Yellow basalt tuff, Monte Pozzolana, Linosa Island. Calculated to 100.00, as 
free from H.O and CO,2. Washington analyst. Journ. Geol. 16: 29. 1908. 


has been no loss or other considerable change in the bases and if the 
analysis (No. 1) is calculated to 100 per cent on an H;O-free and 
CO.-free basis (No. 5), the result differs along much the same lines 
from the analysis of a palagonite of Sicily (No. 4), this being an al- 
tered basaltic glass occurring in basaltic tuffs, but peculiar because of 
its highly sodic character and low water content. On the whole, the 
Galapagos tuff, calculated to 100 per cent, most resembles the tuffs 
of the island of Linosa, which are derived from feldspathic basalts. 


542 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


So, although the evidence may not be conclusive because of the small 
number of specimens, yet it may be assumed that this peculiar 
yellow Galapagos tuff, or rather the predominant glass, is derived 
from basaltic rather than from tephritic lavas. At the same time, 
these yellow basaltic or tephritic glasses are so peculiar that the term 
‘“palagonitic’’ may well be applied to them. 

The origin of these Galdpagos tuffs was a source of much specula- 
tion to Darwin, who finally concluded that they were ‘‘produced by 
the grinding together of fragments of lava within active craters, 
communicating with the sea.’ The modern methods of study of 
rocks in thin section, unknown in his day, do not bear this out, but 
indicate, rather, that these and similar palagonitic rocks are much 
altered basaltic (or tephritic) glasses. The subject will be taken 
up again when specimens collected in the Val di Noto, Sicily, are 
studied. 

Conclusions.—In so far as the material at our command permits us 
to judge, it would appear that the lavas of the Galapagos Islands 
are chiefly andesine (and probably also labradorite) basalts, with their 
peculiar tuffs, which latter, as stated by Darwin ‘‘present the most 
striking feature in the geology of this Archipelago.’ At the same 
time the few brief notes given us by Gooch and Merrill indicate some 
features of greater complication and of especial interest as bearing 
on the relations of this group of volcanic islands to others of the 
Pacific. Both of these authors describe most of their specimens as 
being ordinary feldspar basalts, and Gooch explicitly states that 
nephelite was not observed in any of the specimens examined by 
him. Gooch, however, very briefly notes some pumice’ containing 
orthoclase, from Indefatigable and Abingdon.* Determinations by 


Gooch on the Indefatigable pumice showed 61.48 per cent of Si0,_ 


and 12.45 per cent of loss on ignition. The rock is, therefore, ob- 
viously trachytic’ or rhyolitic. Merrill also briefly describes an 
‘‘andesite (?)’? from Cocos Island, of which a ‘‘rough analysis” 
yielded the following results: SiO., 56.50; Al.Os, Fe.O3, 28.20; CaO, 
2.83; MgO, 0.98; KsO, 4.25; Na,O,e(by difference) 6.68; Sum, 99.44. 
‘The rock contained Cl “derived presumably from ocean spray.” 
He remarks that ‘‘this indicates that the rock is more nearly related 
to the andesites than trachytes, though abnormally rich in potash.” 
In other words, the rock appears to be trachyandesitic. 


7 Goocnu, op. cit., p. 137. 
8 Darwin states that he could find no pumice or trachyte on any of the islands. 


a a 


DEC, 19, 1927 KIRK: PYCINODESMA 543 


These two observations, scanty as they are, show clearly that not 
only are the lavas of the Galdpagos more complicated and varied 
than has been generally thought, but—and this is a matter of especial 
importance—that there is much similarity between their lavas and 
those of most of the Intro-Pacific volcanic islands. Thus, we find 
such “‘trachyandesites”’ at Hawaii and at other islands, and moreover 
trachytic lavas occur with basalts at many of them; as on Hawaii, 
Maui, Molokai, in the Hawaiian Islands; Tutuila in the Samoan 
group; Tahiti; Juan Fernandez Islands; San Felix; Nukuhiva, Marque- 
sas; and several others. A “phosphatized trachyte” is known from 
Clipperton Atoll, many hundred miles north of the Galdpagos.!° 

This very general occurrence of trachytic and trachyandesitic 
lavas with dominant basalts is a feature of the petrology of the Pacific 
of very great importance, and one that appears to be of great bearing 
on some problems of geophysics. But it cannot be discussed here. 
It need only be said that thorough study of the lavas of the Gala- 
pagos Islands is highly desirable. 


PALEONTOLOGY.—Pycinodesma, new name for Pycnodesma Kirk 
not Schrammen.! Epwin Kirx, U. 8. Geological Survey. 


Under the title ‘“‘Pycnodesma, a new molluscan genus from the 
eilurian of Alaska,’’ (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 71; Art. 20, No. 2692. 
1927) I proposed the generic name Pycnodesma. ‘This name had been 
used by Schrammen for a Cretaceous sponge, and I therefore propose 
the name Pycinodesma, with Pycinodesma giganteum Kirk as the 
genotype, for this group of Silurian pelecypods. 


9 The references need not be given here. Some of the observational and analytical 
data are as yet unpublished. 

10 TEALL, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 44: 230. 1898. 

1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received 
November 17, 1927. 


544 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


ENTOMOLOGY.—New species of American Lepidoptera of the 
families Lamacodidae and Dalceridae.1 Harrison G. Dyar, U.S. 
National Museum. (Communicated by Auaust Busckx.) 


The species here mentioned will be discussed more fully in other 
places, but it is desirable to validate the names as soon as possible. 


Family LIMACODIDAE 
Genus Apopa Haworth 
Apoda maxima, new species 


Fore wing ocher-brown to reddish brown, the terminal area slightly paler 
than the basal one, or not so; a dark, somewhat oblique line across the 
middle, edged with whitish without. Hind wing a shade lighter than fore 
wing. Expanse, male, 27 mm., female, 28 mm. 

Male and female, Type No. 40665, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., Big Bend, Brewster 
County, Texas, 5000-7000 feet alt. (O. C. Poling, gift of F. Johnson). 


Genus SIBINE Herrich-Schaffer 
Section 1. Anellus of male hypopygium with a dorsal chitinous tongue 
Sibine clarans, new species 


Fore wing narrow, elongate, rather pointed; dark rufous brown, the 
veins, especially median and at base, blackish shaded; three white subapical 
dots, one small subbasal dot. Hind wing rosy whitish, inner area rosy 
brown. Expanse, male, 38 mm. Anellus with a horn on each side. 

Two males, Type No. 40666, U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 860, Cornell Uni- 
versity Coll., Yahuarmayo, Peru, 1200 feet, alt., April, 1912 (Dognin Collec- 
tion); El Campaniente, Col. Perene, Peru, June 14, 1920 (Cornell Univ. . 
Exp.). 


Sibine dorans, new species 


Like clarans; a little less rufous. Male anellus without horns; spines of 
penis a wide mass of small ones. 

Five males, Type No. 40667, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., La Oroya, Rio Inambari, 
Carabaya, Peru (Dognin Collection). 


Sibine tontineans, new species 


Similar to clarans and dorans, anellus without horns, spines of penis in a 
line, small at base, very large in the middle, small again at tip. Expanse, 
male 33-35 mm. 

Two males, Type No. 40668, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., St. Jean du Maroni and 
Nouveau Chantier, French Guiana (Le Moult, Dognin Collection). 


Sibine giseldans, new species 
Like tontineans, but much smaller in size. Expanse, male, 29 mm. 
Spines of penis a mass of very long slender ones. 
One male, Type No. 859, Cornell Univ. Coll., below Rio Negro, Amazonas, 
Brazil, September, 1920 (Cornell Univ. Exp.). 


1 Received November 12, 1927. 


DEC. 19, 1927 DYAR: NEW AMERICAN LEPIDOPTERA 545 


Sibine joyceans, new species 


Fore wing trigonate, rather short, dark, less reddish than in horrida; dots 
white, the subapical ones consolidated in an oblique line; hind wings rather 
dark. Expanse, male, 30-33 mm., female, 40-43 mm. Spines of penis 
numerous terminally, small, the basal ones few and large. 

Five males, two females, Type No. 40669, U. S. Nat. Mus., Panama 
(Busck and Zetek). 


Sibine iolans, new species 


Dark rufous brown as in pallescens Dogn. (= rufescens Walk.). Male 
without dots or markings. Hind wing pale rosy brown. Expanse, male 
31-85 mm. Male hypopygium as in nitens, the spines of penis more slender 
and numerous. 

Three males, Type No. 40670, U. S. Nat. Mus., Paramaribo, Surinam, 
May, 1904 (W. Schaus); Cayenne, French Guiana, June, 1904 (W. Schaus); 
French Guiana, 1900 (Pouillon). 


Sibine norans, new species 


Dark rufous brown without dots; hind wing dark brown. Male hypo- 
pygium as in pallescens (= rufescens), but the harpe finger-shaped at tip, 
oblique on one side. Expanse, male, 30-40 mm., female, 43-45 mm. 

Eleven males, three females, Type No. 40671, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Sao Paulo, 
Castro and Santa Catherina, Brazil; Paraguay (Schaus and Dognin Col- 
lections). 


Sibine didactica, new species 


Smaller than norans, similarly marked; two subapical and one subbasal 
white dots. Male aedoeagus a very narrow tube, much narrower than in 
nitens, etc. 

One male, Type No. 40672, U. 8. Nat. Mus., from the British Guiana 
Museum, presumably collected in that country. 


Sibine ximenans, new species 


Dark purple brown like nitens, the dots minute; hind wing very dark. 
Male hypopygium as in joyceans, the spines of penis numerous throughout, 
long and about alike. Expanse, male, 32 mm. 

One male, Type No. 40673, U. S. Nat. Mus., Rio Tocantins, Brazil 
(Dognin Collection). Another male in the Cornell University Collection 
is not made an allotype because the number of spines of the penis is much 
— La Merced, Rio Chamchamayo, Peru, June 3, 1920 (Cornell Univ. 
Exp.). 


Sibine violans, new species 


Rather large, dark shining purple brown; dots pale yellow, large, and 
tending to confluence.. Hind wing dark red-brown, the scales purplish and 
raised between the veins. Expanse, male, 33-35 mm., female, 48 mm. 
Generally similar to bonaerensis Berg, larger and more brilliantly marked. 

Two males, one female, Type No. 40674, U.S. Nat. Mus., Muzo, Medina, 
and Pacho, Colombia (A. H. Fassl, Dognin Collection). 


546 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


Sibine helenans, new species 


A small species, smooth dark purple brown. Expanse, male, 25-28 
mm., female, 40-42 mm. Male hypopygium as in bonaerensis Berg, but the 
wing-shape different, the present species having pointed fore wings. 

Three males, Type No. 40675, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Rurrenebaque, Bolivia, 
October, 1922 (W. M. Mann, Mulford Biological Exp.); Teffé, Amazonas, 
Brazil, September (A. H. Fassl, Dognin Collection). Also 14 males and 
three females examined from the Cornell University Collection from various 
localities on the Amazon and from Corumba, Matto Grosso, Brazil. 


Sibine priscillans, new species 


Large, rather hight rufous brown, with red stain subapically and sub- 
basally; single subapical and subbasal yellowish dots. Hind wing pale 
ereamy. Expanse, male, 43 mm. Male hypopygium of the type of violans, 
ximenans, etc. 

One male, Type No. 40676, U.S. Nat. Mus., Zacualpan, Mexico, Novem- 
ber, 1914 (R. Muller, Dognin Collection). 


Sibine laurans, new species 


Blunt-winged, rather ight purple brown, the fringe dark; a large orange- 
red shade along inner margin below a darker ray; no subapical marking, 
no dots. Expanse, male, 28 mm. , 

Two males, Type No. 40677, U. S. Nat. Mus., Sa Paulo Olivenga, 
Amazonas, Brazil, November—December (A. H. Fassl, Dognin Collection). 


Section 2. Male anellus without dorsal chitinized tongue 


Sibine reletiva, new species 


As in eatensa Schaus; smaller, the spines of the male penis shorter but 
large and stout and followed by minute ones. Expanse, male, 30-35 mm., 
female, 40 mm. 

Three males, one female, Type No. 40678, U.S. Nat. Mus., San Salvador, 
Central America (Dognin Collection). | 


Sibine ophelians, new species 


As in extensa; blunter winged, somewhat less strongly marked and thinner 
scaled. Expanse, male, 30-35 mm., female, 46-50 mm. Hypopygium as 
in reletiva, the spines of penis fine, slender, not followed by minute ones. 

Twelve males and three females, Type No. 40679, U. S. Nat. Mus., San 
Salvador, Salvador; Cayuga and Quirigua, Guatemala; Juan Vinas and 
Sixola River, Costa Rica (Schaus & Barnes); Lino, Panama; Pacho, Colombia 
(Dognin Collection). 


Sibine gertrudans, new species 


Blunt-winged, dark umber brown with little reddish tint; a blackish ray 
through cell and along submedian; dots obsolete. Hind wing purplish 
brown. Expanse, male, 30-35 mm. Hypopygium similar to ezxtensa, the 
spines of the penis smaller. The wing-shape differs. 

Eight males, Type No. 40680, U. S. Nat. Mus., Cuernavaca, Morelos, 
Mexico, July, August, November, December, 1906 (W. Schaus); Colima, 
Colima, Mexico, July, 1924 (R. Miller). 


DEC. 19, 1927 DYAR: NEW AMERICAN LEPIDOPTERA 547 


Sibine quellans, new species 


Fore wing pointed, dark shining brown with contrasting areas; subbasal 
and subapical reddish stains, no dots. Hind wing rather dark brown. 
Expanse, male, 30 mm. 

One male, Type No. 40681, U. S. Nat. Mus., San Antonio, Colombia, 
5800 feet alt., December, 1907 (M. G. Palmer, Dognin Collection). 


Sibine rollans, new species 


Blunt- and square-winged; light rosy red-brown; a narrow blackish ray 
from base below cell, the inner area below it bronzy red. Hind wing rather 
brightly reddish brown. Expanse, male, 25-27 mm. 

Eight males, Type No. 40682, U. 8. Nat. Mus., St. Jean and St. Laurent, 
French Guiana (Le Moult); Yahuarmayo, Peru, April-May, 1912; Codajias, 
Coary and Teffé, Amazonas, all from the Dognin Collection. Also 9 males 
in the Cornell University Collection, not mounted, but agreeing superfi- 
cially, Mackenzie, Demerara River, British Guiana, June 24, 1927; Tuma- 
tumari, Potaro River, British Guiana, June 27, 1927; Moengo, Cottica 
River, Surinam, May 23, 1927 (Cornell Univ. Exp.). 


Sibine francesans, new species 


Like eucleides Dyar, the wing even broader and squarer; a little less dark 
brown, the black ray under median vein more distinct. Expanse, male, 
36 mm. 

Two males, Type No. 40683, U. S. Nat. Mus., one without label, the 
other, Rio Songo, Bolivia (A. H. Fassl, Dognin Collection). 


Sibine zellans, new species 


Fore wing narrow, pointed, hind wing trigonate, the outer margin straight; 
dark purplish brown, no markings, the hind wing almost as dark as the fore. 
Expanse, male, 37 mm. Hypopygium with the two limbs of the aedoeagus 
irregular, one shorter than the other, the limbs quadrate, granular. 

One male, Type No. 40684, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Pard, Brazil (Moss). 


Sibine berthans, new species 


Like zellans, blacker, wings rather less pointed, the outer margin of hind 
wing convex. Female less intensely blackish, the ground brownish in 
places, a red apical stain, and subapical yellow streak on vein 6; hind wing 
lighter brown. Expanse, male, 34 mm., female, 54 mm. The spines of 
the penis are finer and more numerous than in zellans. 

Male and female, Type No. 40685, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Villa Rica, Paraguay, 
March, 1926 (F. Schade). 


Sibine sarans, new species 


Small, dark, blunt-winged, resembling st?mulea Clem. Hypopygium as in 
zellans, but the limbs of aedoeagus slender, irregular. Expanse, male, 23 
mm. Hypopygium much as in pawper Dyar. 

One male, Type No. 40686, U. S. Nat. Mus., San Sebastian Retalhuleu, 
Guatemala (L. Thiel). 


048 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


Genus Eucutea Hubner 
Euclea cassida, new species 


Fore wing won light yellow ground, the scales suberect and thin; blotched 
with blackish, especially at base, and defining a pale pinkish patch between 
the subapical silver dots and subbasal strongly waved line; no discal dot 
visible. Expanse, male, 23-24 mm. 

Two males, Type No. 40687, U. S. Nat. Mus., Amathura and Caicara, 
Amazonas, Brazil (Dognin Collection). 


Genus TaLtima Walker 
Talima sissypha, new species 


As in straminea Schaus, but the whole wing darkened with purple-brown; 
inner and outer margins darker. Expanse, male, 21 mm. 

One male, Type No. 40688, U. S. Nat. Mus., San Sebastian, Retalhuleu, 
Guatemala (L. Thiel). 


Talima varians, new species 


As in flexilinea Dyar the fore wing light purple brown, darker shaded 
at base; veins outwardly dark, crossing the slender flexuous outer line; apex 
broadly dark purple-brown beyond the line; hind wing rather pale stramine- 
ous, with a purple area across the middle. Expanse, female 23 mm. 

One cae Type No. 40689, U. S. Nat. Mus., Venezuela (Dognin Col- 
lection). 


Talima merilone, new species 


Like emilia; larger, the fore wing heavily suffused, the veins not lined; 
a round clouded discal area. Expanse, male, 22-23 mm. 

Two males, Type No. 40690, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., Colombia: Micay, August, 
1896; Pueblo Rico, San Juan Choco, 5200 feet alt., September, 1909 (Dognin 
Collection). 


Talima insulla, new species 


Like sulla Schaus, but the outer dark line absent, replaced By a narrow 
pale yellow shaded line, which is rather faint in the male, distinct in the 
female. Expanse, male, 20 mm., female, 26 mm. 

Two males, one female, Type No. 40691, U. S. Nat. Mus.; Type No. 
857, Cornell Univ. Coll., below Codajos, Rio Solimées, Brazil, September » 
6, 1920 (Cornell Univ. Exp.). 


Genus Monoteuca Grote & Robinson. 
Monoleuca angustilinea, new species 
Fore wing uniform red-brown; silvery line erect, sulphur-yellow tinted, 
narrow, slightly oblique, entering cell before origin of vein 2, preceded by 
faint reddish. Expanse, female, 23 mm. ; 
One female,-Type No. 40692, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Capron, Florida, March 
23 (H. G. Hubbard). 


Genus SISyROSEA Grote 
Sisyrosea brusha, new species 


Fore wing dark purplish brown, sparsely sprinkled with black scales; 
hind wing distinctly blackish. Expanse, male, 20 mm. 


DEc. 19, 1927 DYAR: NEW AMERICAN LEPIDOPTERA o49 


Two males, Type No. 40693, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Jalapa, Mexico (W. Schaus) 
Godeberi, Maroni River, French Guiana (Le Moult). 


Genus NatTApDA Walker 
Natada styx, new species 


Like deba; darker brown, the lines obscure, divergent below; hind wing 
blackish. Expanse, male, 25 mm. 

One male, Type No. 40694, U. S. Nat. Mus., Yahuarmayo, Peru, April, 
1912 (Dognin Collection). 


Natada ulaula, new species 


Like michorta; larger, darker, the indicated transverse lines farther apart 
and less numerous. Expanse, male, 30 mm. 

One male, Type No. 40695, U. S. Nat. Mus., Medina, Colombia, 500 m. 
alt. (A. H. Fassl). 


Genus Peroua Walker 
Perola prosper, new species 


Fore wing white, overlaid with olive brown, leaving a broad submarginal 
white band with rather irregular edges; white mottlings about cell and 
marginally; a dark dot in base of cell and large discal spot. Hind wing 
whitish. Expanse, male, 24-25 mm. 

Three males, Type No. 40696, U. S. Nat. Mus.; Type No. 856, Cornell 
Univ. Coll., ‘‘Lassance,’’ Minas Geraes, Brazil, November 9, 1919 (Cornell 
Univ. Exp.). 


Perola subpunctella, new species 


Like subpunctata Walk.; smaller. Expanse, male, 20-22 mm. 
Seven males, Type No. 40697, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Castro, Paranda, Brazil, 
(EZ. D. Jones); Villa Rica, Paraguay, February 9, 1921 (C. Jorgensen). 


Genus ALARop1A Moschler 
Alarodia minuscula, new species 


White, without markings; fore wing below smoky shaded, darkest along 
costa. Expanse, male, 11 mm. 

One male, Type No. 40698, U.S. Nat. Mus., Matanzas, Cuba, November, 
1902 (W. Schaus). 


Genus SEMyrA Walker 
Semyra erna, new species 


Markings of eucharista, but darkened, the silvery bar more distinct; 
hind wing blackish brown. Expanse, male, 17-19 mm. 

Four males, Type No. 40699, U. S. Nat. Mus., Villa Rica, Paraguay 
(F. Schade). 


Semyra lucilla, new species 
Markings of gladys, the whole wing dark purple-brown, the spots distinct, 
although not contrasted. Hind wing brownish black. Expanse, male, 
25 mm. 


One male, Type No. 40700, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Venezuela (Dognin Col- 
lection). 


050 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 


Genus IsocHarTEs Dyar 
Isochaetes ashtakel, new species 


Fore wing dark purple brown, hind wing bronzy_ black; some rufous 
patches basally; a black highly angled zig-zag line crossing the: wing centrally, 
rufous-edged without, and below the median vein forming a deep excavation; 
a dark outer line excurved over cell inclosing a curved pale space at end of 
cell, which is ovate in its upper half, obscured except for two whitish patches 
below. Expanse, male, 18 mm., female, 26 mm. 

Male and female, Type No. 40701, U.S. Nat. Mus.; Type No. 855, Cornell 
Univ. Coll., male, Molinas, Paraguay, October, 1925 (F. Schade), female, 
Ni  Essequibo River, British Guiana, di une, 1927 (Cornell Univ. 
Exp 


Genus VENADICODIA Dyar 
Venadicodia ruthaea, new species 


Fore wing brownish; basal space dark brown; a darker oblique bounding 
line from costa before middle to inner margin beyond middle; a little whitish 
in its irregular outer edge; outer area light brown; a small brown patch at 
apex, continued narrowly along termen. Hind wing blackish brown. 
Expanse, male, 18 mm. 

One male, Type No. 40702, U. 8. Nat. Mus., without locality (Schaus 
Collection). 


Family DALCERIDAE 


Genus Daucrra Herrich-Schiffer 


Dalcera consanguinea, new species 


Fore wing pale purple, shading to blackish outwardly; costal margin, 
inner and outer margins narrowly, pale yellow. Hind wing orange yellow 
with a narrow outer black border, in width less than one-fourth the length 
of the wing. Expanse, male, 39- 45 mm. 

Two males, Type No. 40713, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., Rio Tapajoz, Amazonas, 
Brazil; Porto Velho, Rio Madeira, Brazil (Dognin Collection). 

Perhaps not distinct from Dalcera semirufa Druce, which I know only 

by description. 


Genus AcrRAGA Walker 


Acraga perbrunnea, new species 


Dark purple, uniform, the hind wings apparently of the same color, 
though badly denuded in the specimen. Expanse, male, 25 mm. 

One male, Type No. 40714, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., Oxapampa, Peru, 2000 
m. alt. (Dognin Collection). 


Genus ANACRAGA Dyar - 
Anacraga citrinopsis, new species 


Color of citrina Schaus, but considerably larger. Expanse, male, 25 mm. 
One male, Type No. 40715, U. S. Nat. Mus., Callao, Peru (Mrs. M. J. 


Pusey). 


mee. 19, 1927 DYAR: NEW AMERICAN LEPIDOPTERA 551 


Anacraga ingenescens, new species 


Fore wing dull golden yellow, color of ria Dyar (luteola Hopp); hind wing 
pale yellow, more golden on the margin. Expanse, female, 32 mm. 

One female, Type No. 40716, U.S. Nat. Mus., Merida, Venezuela (Dognin 
Collection). 


Anacraga sororcula, new species 


Like sofia Dyar, smaller, most of the wing markings except the discal 
dot faint and obsolescent. Expanse, male, 12 mm., female, 16-17 mm. 

Four males, two females, Type No. 40717, U. S. Nat. Mus., Cayuga, 
Guatemala, May, September, October (Schaus & Barnes); Misantla, Mexico, 
September, 1910 (R. Miller). 


Anacraga phasma, new species 


White faint yellowish clouded markings on lower half of wing; no discal 
dot. Expanse, female, 17 mm. 

One female, Type No. 40718, U..S. Nat. Mus., Venadio, Sinaloa, Mexico 
(A. Kusche). 


Genus Protacraca Hopp 
Protacraga nigerella Dognin 


Dognin’s Dalcera nigerella is apparently the male of Hopp’s Protacraga 
micans. 


Genus Minonoa Dyar 
Contains the following species: 


Minonoa perbella Schaus (genotype) 
Minonoa variegata Jones (Dalcera variegata Jones) 


I have not examined specimens of this species, but feel sure from the 
wing shape and pattern of coloration that it will find place in this genus. 


Minonoa elvira Dognin (Acraga elvira Dognin) 


Dognin’s types are before me. The disparity in the sexes in color and 
even pattern of markings is remarkable. 


SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 


The annual series of lectures representative of the work of the Carnegie 
Institution of Washington was given in November and December, and 
included the following: November 15, Oscar Rippux, Internal secretions 
in evolution and reproduction; November 22, J. P. Aut, Purpose and progress 
of ocean surveys; November 29, Reminaton Keuuoce, History of whales— 
their adaptation to life in the sea; November 30, 8S. G. Moruey, Hxcavations 
at Chichen Itza, Yucatan, Mexico, and at Uaxactun, Peten, Guatemala, in 
1927 (presented at the Bureau of American Republics); December 6, 
WaLTER 8. ApAMs, The interior of a star and how it maintains its life. The 
annual reception and exhibit of apparatus and methods was held on Decem- 
ber 9. 


@Obituary 


Mr. FRANK SPRINGER, a member of the AcaprEmMy, died September 22, 
1927, at the age of seventy-nine. Mr. Springer was born in Iowa and re- 
ceived his earlier education in that state. As a young man he moved to 
New Mexico and soon became prominent as a lawyer, a successful business 
man, and a participant in public affairs. An interest in the study of the 
fossil crinoids aroused in his younger days in lowa, however, remained with 
him to the end of his career and resulted in extensive collections and in 
descriptive monographs that rank among the major contributions to Ameri- 
can paleontology. Mr. Springer’s magnificent collection and his library of 
erinoid literature have been housed for a number of years in the U.S. Na- 
tional Museum and were given by him to the Museum. 


Professor Mitton WHITNEY, a member of the AcApEMy and for more 
than thirty years Chief of the Bureau of Soils, Department of Agriculture, 
died November 11, 1927, in his 67th year. He was born in Baltimore, 
Maryland, and was educated in the schools of that city and at Johns Hopkins 
University. Before taking charge of the Bureau of Soils he was attached to 
Agricultural Experiment Stations in Connecticut, North Carolina, South 
Carolina, and Maryland, and was Professor of Agriculture at the University 
of South Carolina. His numerous publications deal with soil Payal and 
other problems connected with soils. 


INDEX TO VOLUME 17 


A { denotes the abstract of a paper before the Academy or an affiliated Society. 
published under the head Scientific Notes and News. 


A § indicates an item 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES 


Biological Society of Washington. 
Entomological Society of Washington. 
Geological Society of Washington. 
Philosophical Society of Washington. 


Proceedings: 240, 346. 

Proceedings: 172, 402, 431, 454. 
Proceedings: 23, 118, 200, 231, 270, 320. 
Proceedings: 20, 73, 171, 269, 319, 344, 399, 501. 


Washington Academy of Sciences. Proceedings: 96. 


AUTHOR INDEX 


Apsot, C. G. {fObservatory, new, in 
Southwest Africa. 20. 

Apams, L.H. Change of compressibility 
with pressure, note on. 529. 

—— {Interior of the earth, what we 
know about it. 171. 

Apams, Oscar 8S. {Triangulation net, 
readjustment of the western. 502. 

AtpEN, W. G. {Gros Ventre landslide of 
June 1925. 123. 

AupricH, J. M. Cordyligaster and Eu- 
cordyligaster, Dexiid genera, notes on. 
84. 

—— j{Diptera, collecting in Guatemala. 
180. 


—— jSay, Thomas, naturalist. 350. 

— jTaxonomy, limitations of. 403. 

AmaraL, A. po. {Snakes, venoms and 
antivenins. 352. 

ASCHEMEIER, C. R. j{Gorillas in French 
Congo. 241. 


Back, E. A. tAnthrenus seminiveus, note 
on. 178. 

BaILEy, VERNON. tMouse plagues. 
Baker, A. C. {Citrus 
California. 481. 
BassutER, R. 8S. Sponge fauna, new early 

Ordovician. 390. 
Bates, FREDERICK. 


348. 
white fly in 


tQuartz, 573-degree 


inversion of. 345. 
Bett, W. B. {Biological relationships. 
351. 


Berry, Epwarp W. Cycads in Shina- 
rump conglomerate of Utah. 303. 


BLAKE, S.F. Asteraceae, new, from Costa 
Rica. 57: 


— Inabum, new South American 
species of. 288. 

—  {Pursh, Frederick, early American 
botanist. 351. 


Bovine, A. G. jfEumolpinae, larva of. 
182. 

—— 7Flea beetle, Oedionychis gibbitarsa, 
larva, of. 176. 

Bowen, N. L. Analcite-rich rock from 
Deccan trap of India. 57. 

Bowie, Witui1am. Isostasy in geophysics 
and geology. 101. 

BrapLEy, W. H. {Tertiary and Recent 
fresh water algae reefs. 232. 

Bretz, J. HARLAN. jfChanneled scabland 
and the Spokane flood. 200. 

BROADBENT, B. M. jAzalea leaf miner, 
habits and development of. 175. 

BROMBACHER, W.G. jBarometric method 
of measuring aircraft altitudes. 75. 

Bryan, Kirx. 7Palouse soil of Columbia 
Plateau, Washington. 120. 

Carrns, J. E. I. Influence of low-resis- 
tivity layer subsoil on forward incli- 
nation of radio waves. 264. 

CampseLL, M.R. 7;Tidal streams, mean- 
ing of cut-off meanders in. 125. 

CuasE, AGNES. Grasses, new, from His- 


paniola. 72. 
— Grasses, new, from Panama. 142. 
CHRISTENSEN, _ CARL. Pteridophytes 
from Kansu, China. 497. 


503 


554 


Curistin, J. R. Rhigonema, intestinal 
nemas of millipeds. 17. 

Cops, N. A. &higonema, 
nemas of millipeds. 17. 

CoiuiER, A. J. {Madison limestone and 
Ellis formation in Montana, uncon- 
formity between. 130. 

Couuins, Henry B., Jr. Potsherds from 
Choctaw village sites in Mississippi. 
259. 

Coox, O. F. Ivory palms from Colombia, 
Ecuador and Peru, new. 218. 

Coutter, Joun M. Myrrhidendron, re- 
vision of. 213. 

CusHMAN, JosEPH A. Foraminifera in 
the collection of Ehrenberg. 487. 


intestinal 


—— Intuonella and Coskinolina in 
America. 198. 

Day, A. L. tEarth movements in Cali- 
fornia. 96. 


Disney, L. P. Current harmonic con- 
stants for San Bernardino Strait, 
Pel 3325: 

Dovz, W. E. 
454. 

DunsBar, P. B. {Arsenical spray residue. 
404. 

Dyar, Harrison G. Lepidoptera of 
families Limacodidae and Dalceridae, 
new American species of. 544. 


{Creeping eruption, the. 


East, C. 8S. Six-lined race-runner in 
District of Columbia. 399. 

EVERMANN, B.W. {Conservation of fish- 
eries of the Pacific. 242. 

Ewine, H. E. {fChiggers, control of. 
182. 


— Mallophaga, new genus and species 
of. 86. 

—— Menoponidae and _ Philopteridae, 
keys to related genera of. 91. 

Freracuson, H.G. tRegiona! relations of 
Nevada ore deposits. 121. 

GARDNER, JuLIA. Mollusks, new, from 
Eocene of Texas. 362. 

— Recent collection of late Pliocene 
invertebrates from headwaters of the 
Amazon. 505. 

Gissps, H. D. Diazo sulfonates. 433. 

GILMORE, CHARLES W. {Fossil footprints 
in Grand Canyon. 272. 

Girty, Grorce H. Astartella Hall, ge- 
neric characters of. 417. 


AUTHOR INDEX 


GoupMAN, E. A. {Migratory waterfowl in 
Mexico, conditions affecting. 350. 

GoNYER, Forrest A. Almandite-spessar- 
tite garnet from Gwynns Falls, Balti- 


more. 0534. 

— Natrojarosite from Kingman, 
Arizona. 586. 

GREENE, C. T. {Fruit flies, collecting, in 
Panama. 180. 


Hay, Ouiver P. Hquus laurentius Hay, 
type skull of. 5. 

Pleistocene geology and paleontol- 
ogy in Florida, recent reports on. 
277. 

Hecx, N. H. fEarthquake problem, in- 

ternational attack on. 502. 

+Submarine features in north Pacific 
Ocean, unusual. 127. 
+Waterspout formation, 

319. 

Hess, F. L. j{Cesium, source of. 124. 

—— Phosphate deposits, Florida. 321. 

Heryi, Paut R. {Constant of gravitation. 
270. 

—  j{Newton, contribution of, to me- 
chanics and astronomy. 400. 

Hitcucocx, A.S. fCuba, recent botanical 
trip to. 350. 

— Grasses from South America, new. 
215. 

— Ortachne breviseta, new grass from 
Chile. 141. 

—— Psammochloa mongolica, new grass 
from Mongolia. 140. 

Hosss, W.H. {Greenland expedition of 
the University of Michigan. 400. 
Horrman, W. A. tHaitian Anophelines. 

175. 


—_—— 


unusual. 


HorFMBISsTER, J. E. tSediments from 
Pacific Islands, unusual types of. 
275. 

Hoots, H. W. {Geologic features of 
southern end of San Joaquin Valley, 
California. 123. 

Howe tt, A. Brazier. Chinese squirrels, 
new. 80. 


Humeureys, W.J. t{Tornado, the. 320. 

Jaacpr, T. A. Engulfment in volcanism. 
23. 

JOHNSON, Duncan S. fBlue Mountains 
of Jamaica and their vegetation. 
347. 


AUTHOR INDEX 


Jonas, Anna I. {Ordovician shale and 
associated lava in southeastern Penn- 
sylvania. 240. 

KELLOGG, VERNON L. {Dr. F. H. Snow, 
veteran entomologist. 174. 

Keyes, Mary G. Rocks of Galapagos 
Islands. 588. 

iorrie, ELiswortH P. Cordia and 
Tournefortia, new species of, from 
South America. 327. 

——  Passionflowers from South America 
and Mexico, new. 423. 

Kirk, Epwin. Pycinodesma, new name 
for Pcynodesma Kirk not Schrammen. 
548. 

Lapv, H. 8. {Sediments from Pacific 
Islands, unusual types of. 275. 

LAMBERT, WALTER D. Variation of lati- 
tude and motion of the moon. 133. 

Larrimer, W. H. {Control campaign 
against European corn borer. 481. 

Lracu, G. C. {Trout propagation by 
Bureau of Fisheries. 2438. 

Lronarp, E. C. Hispaniola, new plants 
from. 665. 

—— Mimosaceae from Hispaniola. 254. 

— fuellia tuberosa and its allies. 509. 

Lincoitn, F. C. {Flight line of ducks. 
353. 

Lovueuuin, G. F. Ore at deep levels in 
Cripple Creek District, Colorado. 
321. 

McLaueuuin, Donatp H. {Geology and 
physiography of the Andes in Central 
Peru. 320. 

MANSFIELD, G. R. {Geology of south- 
eastern Idaho, summary of. 129. 
Marner, H. A. Tide at Tahiti, the. 

157. 

Mason, P. W. {Specialization of aphids 
from general to monoxenous feeders. 
455. 

Martuer, Kirtury F. {Stratigraphy of 
lake Ainslie Region, Nova Scotia. 
o22. 

- Matrues, F. E. flIce, cellular structure 

of. 126. 

{Influence of secondary faults on 
development of Grand Canyon topog- 
raphy. 2338. 

Meccers, W. F. Arc spectrum of lan- 
thanum, regularities in. 25. 


500 


MeERRIAM, JOHN C. {Origin and evolution 
of man. 97. 

Meyers, C.H. tVapor pressure of liquid 
carbon dioxide. 501. 

Miser, Hueu D. {Erosion in San Juan 
Canyon, Utah. 98. 

—— jShapes of stream pebbles in San 
Juan County, Utah. 270. 

MITCHELL, GEORGE T. +Tea and Cassina 
(Ilex vomitoria). 242. 

Mouter,F.L. fSpectra excited by atomic 
hydrogen. 75. 

Mo.uuer, J.R. tAnimal diseases (insects 
responsible for.) 99. 

—— 7Foreign insects. undesirable. 99. 

Moore, Raymonp C. {Problems in the 
history of Grand Canyon region. 272. 

Nouan, T. B. fPotash brines under- 
lying Great Salt Lake Desert, Utah. 
274. 

Noutan, W. J. {Sex forms of honeybees. 
bing 

Nuttine, P. G. Mechanical properties 
of moist granular solids. 185. 

PatmeER, T.S. fBird study in suburbs of 
large cities. 354. 

ParRKER, J. B. {Vespula diabolica in 
Brookland, D. C. 181. 

PuHELps, Francis P. Quartz, 573-degree 
inversion of. 345. 

Piper, ARTHUR M. {Metalliferous re- 
sources of Silver City, Idaho. 237. 

Pirtipr, H. Convolvulaceae from Vene- 
zuela, new. 284. 

Porter, B. A. fArsenical spray residue. 
404. 

QUAINTANCE, A. L. 
due. 404. 

RAPPLEYE, Howarp S. f‘‘Fool proof” 
checks on computations. 501. 

RepFievpD, A. H. fPetroliferous provinces 
of United States. 235. 

REESIDE, JOHN B., JR. Acanthoceras 
rhotomagense fauna in the Cretaceous 
of the Western interior. 453. 

— Unionid pelecypods, two new, from 

| Upper Triassic. 476. 

REEVES, Frank. ftLandslide origin of 

thrust faults around Bearpaw Moun- 

tains. 127. 

{Thrust faulting adjacent to High- 
wood Mountains, Montana. 232. 


Arsenical spray resi- 


506 


RessmrR, C. E. Cambrian in the Rocky 
Mountains, the. 130. 
RIcHARDSON, CHaRiLEs H. 
spray residue. 405. 
Ricuarpson, G. B. Upper Cretaceous 

section in Colob Plateau, Utah. 464. 
Rouwer, 8S. A. Scolid wasps from tropi- 


+Arsenical 


cal America. 150. 
Ross, J. N.  {Cacti, distribution of. 349. 
— Hydrocotyle, Central American 
species of. 194. 
—— Mimosaceae from Hispaniola. 254. 
—— Myrrhidendron, revision of, 213. 


Ross, C. P. fPaleozoic stratigraphy of 
Idaho. 125. 

Rounpy, P. V. {Geology and oil develop- 
ment of Elk Hills, California. 271. 

Ruspey, Witniam W. {Origin of Mowry 


shale. 235. 

—  fStream piracy in northeastern 
Wyoming. 120. 

SAaNForp, R. I:. tMagnetic analysis, 
problem of. 269. 

ScHALLER, W. T. {Mineralogy of the 


Tintic Standard mine. 121. 
SCHUREMAN, Pau. {Tides in wells. 345. 
SHANNON, Hart V. Almandite-spessartite 

garnet from Gwynns Falls, Baltimore. 

534. 

—— “Blythite”’ and the manganese gar- 

net from Amelia, Virginia. 444. 


— Calcite oolites with pentagonal 
dodecahedral form. 409. 

—— Natrojarosite from Kingman, 
Arizona. 536. 

— Sericite-lazulite pseudomorphs 


after orthoclase from Bolivia. 388. 
SHANNON, RayMonp C. Syrphid flies of 
subfamily Ceriodinae. 38. 


Simmons, Perez. tHistory of carbon 
bisulphide as fumigant. 179. 

— {Resistance of larva of cheese 
skipper, Piophila casei. 403. 

Snow, Cuuster. Magneto-electron the- 


ory of gravitation. 457. 
Snyper, T. E. {Forest insect pests and 
their control. 100. 
{Insects change building code. 178. 
tQuartz, 573-degree 


SOsMAN, RoseErtT B. 
inversion of. 344. 

STANDLEY, P. C. Alfaroa, new genus of 
Juglandaceae from Costa Rica. 77. 


AUTHOR INDEX 


SranpuHy, P. C. Central America, new 


plants from, VI. 7; VII. 159; VIII. 
245;1X. 309; X. 520. 

— Hamopea, the genus. 394. 

— Hydrocotyle, Central American 
species of. 194. 

— Rubiaceae collected in Mexico by 
Tiebmann. 3835. 


Stearns, H. T. {Volcanoes of Japan in 
1924. 118. 

STEJNEGER, LEONHARD. 
Tibet, new. 317. 

STEPHENSON, L. W. Origin of rock wall 
at Rockwall, Texas. 1. 

Stose, Grorer W. Ordovician shale and 
associated lavain Pennsylvania. 240. 

SverprupP, H. U. fElectromotive forces | 
possibly produced by the earth’s 
rotating magnetic field, and diurnal 
variation of atmospheric potential 
gradient. 504. 

Taytor, G. F. tNew type of thermostat. 
74. 

TRASK, PARKER D. {Stratigraphy of Lake 
Ainslie Region, Nova Scotia. 322. 

Van Dusen, M. S. {Vapor pressure of 
liquid carbon dioxide. 501. 

Van OrstrRAND, C. E. Analytical and 
graphical representation of arith- 
metic, geometric, and other means. 
307. 

—— Machine for measuring depths of 
deep wells. 481. 

VILLADOLID, Droaracias V. Naobran- 
chia occidentalis on Pacific Coast of 
United States. 230. 

Wait, G.R. tElectromotive forces possi- 

bly produced by the earth’s rotating 

magnetic field, and diurnal variation 
of atmospheric potential gradient. 

504. 

+Magnetic permeability of iron and 
magnetite in high-frequency alter- 

nating fields, 22. 

Wasuineton, H.S. Rocks of Galapagos 


Frog from 


Islands. 538. 

WeiceL, C. A. fHot water bulb steri- 
lizers. 407. 

Wetts, Roger C. “Mosandrum,’’ the 
element. 385. 


+Sediments, unusual 
275. 


WENTWorRTH, C. K. 
types of, from Pacific Islands. 


AUTHOR INDEX 


Wuerry, Epcar tT. Polygala, free 
methyl salicylate in some American 
species of. 191. 


— Soil reaction preferences of certain 
plant orders. 148. 

— Soil reactions of saprophytic or- 
chids. 35. 

Wuitr, G. F. {Creeping eruption, the. 
454. 

Wuitr, W. H. j{Arsenical spray residue. 
405. 

Wuitr, Waiter N. {Discharge method 
of estimating ground water supplies. 
238. 


507 


Wuitr, W. P. {Chalcedony, relation of, 
to quartz. 344. 

—— jImprovements 
stabilizers. 22. 

—— jMercury contact thermostats, new 
method of avoiding lag in. 74. 

Wiuuiams, R. 8. Mosses from Ecuador, 
collected by J. N. Rose. 491. 

WooprinG, W.P. +Geologic history and 
paleobiologic significance of Clemen- 
tia. 128. 

WootarD, Epe@ar W. fPlace of Isaac 

- Newton in history of pure mathe- 

matics. 399. 


in galvanometer 


558 SUBJECT INDEX 


SUBJECT INDEX 


Archeology. Potsherds from Choctaw vil- 
lage sites in Mississippi. H. B. 
CoLuINns, JR. 259. 

Astronomy. tNewton, contributions of, 
to mechanics and astronomy. P. R. 
Heyu. 400. 

Observatory, new, in southwest Africa. 
C. G. ABBot. 20. 

Biology. Anophelines, Haitian. W. A. 
HorrmMan. 175. 

+Biological relationships. W. B. Butt. 
351. 

{Diseases, animal (due to insect agency). 
J. R. Motier. 99. 

jForeign insects, undesirable. J. R. 
Mo.uier. 99. 

{Forest insect pests and their control. 
T. E. Snyper. 100. 

7Man, origin and evolution of. J.C. 
MERRIAM. 97. : 

tMouse plagues. VERNON BaILny. 348. 

Snakes, venoms and antivenins. A. 
DO AMARAL. 302. 

Botany. Alfaroa, new genus of Jug- 
landaceae from Costa Rica. P. C. 
SDTANDLEY.. @(.' 

Asteraceae, new, from Costa Rica. 
Die Bh A Ken. 01, 

+Blue Mountains of Jamaica and their 
vegetation. D. 8. JoHnson. 347. 

TCacti, distribution of. J. N. Ross. 
349. 

{+Cassina (Ilex vomitoria) compared with 
tea. G. T. MitcHELL. 242. 

Centra] America, new plants from, 
PC STAN DIR Wel) of.) Vile) 59): 
VI 245) EXC 309) 2 520) 

Convolvulaceae from Venezuela, new. 
Ee Purr ns 284 

Cordia and Tournefortia, new species of, 
from South America. EH. P. Kruuip. 
327. 

tCuba, recent botanical trip to. A. S. 
Hircucock. 350. 

Grasses, new, from Hispaniola. AGNES 
CHASE. 72. 

Grasses, new, from Panama. AGNES 
CHASE. 142. 

Grasses, new, from South America. 
iA Oe LUE CHCOCK. Vel 4 2a: 


Hampea, the genus. P. C. Sranpiey. 
394. 
Hispaniola, new species of plants from. 

E. C. Lronarp. 665. 

Hydrocotyle, Central American species 
of. J. N. Ross and P. C. STanpiEy. 
194. 

LIiabum, new South American species. 
S. F. BLake. 288. 

§Library, botanical, of John Donnell 
Smith presented to the Smithsonian 
Institution. 24. 

Mimosaceae from Hispaniola. J. N. 
Ross and E. C. Lronarp. 254. 

Mosses from Ecuador collected by J. N. 
Rose. R.S. Wituiams. 491. 

Myrrhidendron, revision of. J. M. 
CouttTEerR and J. N. Ross. 213. 

Orchids, saprophytic, soil reactions of. 
E. T. WHERRY. 35. 

Ortachne breviseta, new grass from Chile. 
A. 8S. Hircucock. 141. 

Palms, ivory, from Colombia, Ecuador 
and Peru, new. O. F. Coox. 218. 
Passionflowers, new, from South 
America and Mexico. E. P. Kiuurp. 

423. 

Psammochloa Mongolica, new grass from 
Mongolia. A. 8. Hircucocx. 141. 
Pteridophytes from Kansu, China. 

C. CHRISTENSEN. 497. 

*Pursh, Frederick, early American 
botanist. S. F. Buaxn. 3651. 

Rubiaceae collected in Mexico by Lieb- 
mann. P. C. STANDLEY. 330. 

Ruellia tuberosa and its allies. E. C. 
LEONARD. 509. 

tTea, story of. G.T.MitcHeiyi. 242. 

Tournefortia, new species of, from 
South America. E. P. Kruiitp. 327. 


See also Biology, Plant Chemistry, Plant 


Ecology. 


Chemistry. Diazo sulfonates. W.  L. 


Haru and H. D. Grisss. 483. 
“Mosandrum,” the element. R. C. 
WELLS. 385. 


Entomology. +Anophelines, Haitian. W. 


A. HorrMan. 175. 
tAnthrenus seminiveus, noteon. EH. A. 
Back. 173. 


SUBJECT INDEX 


Entomology (Continued) 

tAphids, specialization of, from general 
to monoxenous feeders. P. W. 
Mason. 455. 

tArsenical spray residue. P. B. Dun- 
BAR. 404. B.A. Porter. 405. A. L. 
QuUAINTANCE. 404. C. A. RicHARD- 
son. 405. W. H. Wuite. 405. 

tAzalea leaf miner, habits and develop- 


ment of. B.M.BroapBent. 175. 
+Building code, insects change. T. E. 
SNYDER. 178. 
{Bulb sterilizers, hot water. C. A. 
WEHIGEL. 407. 


{Carbon bisulphide as fumigant, history 
of. P. Simmons. 179. 
tCheese skipper, Piophila casei, resist- 


ance of larva of. P. Simmons. 403. 
{Chiggers, control of. H. E. Ewrne. 
182. 
{Citrus white fly in California. A. C. 


Baker. 481. 

{Corn borer, ‘European, control cam- 
paign against. W. H. LaArRimer. 
431. 

Cordyligaster and 
Dexiid genera, 
AupRicH. 84. 

{Creeping eruption, the. 
and G. F. Wuirr. 454. 

Dalceridae, new American species of. 
Harrison G. Dyar. 544. 

{Diptera, collecting, in Guatemala. J. 
M. AupricH. 180. 

_ fEumolpinae, larva of. 


Eucordyligaster, 
notes, (on. 2° Mi: 


W. E. Doves 


A. G. B6vine, 


182. 

{Flea beetle, Oedionychis gibbitarsa, 
larva of. A. G. B6vine. 176. 
Flies, Syrphid, of subfamily Cer- 
loidinae. R. C. SHANNON. 38. 
jForeign insects, undesirable. J. R. 
Mo.uuER. 99. 


Forest insect pests and their control. 
T. E. Snyper. 100. 

{Fruit flies, collecting, in Panama. C. 
T. GREENE. 180. 

jHoneybees, sex forms of. W. J. 
Nouan. 177. 

tHymenoptera, Motschulsky collection 
of, found in Moscow. 180. 

Lepidoptera, new American species of. 
Harrison G. Dyar. 544. 


959 


Limacodidae, new American species of. 
Harrison G. Dyar. 544. 

Mallophaga, new genera and species of. 
H. E. Ewrne. 86. 

Menoponidae, keys to related genera of. 
H. E. Ewine. 91. 

{tOedionychis gibbitarsa, larva of. 
Boévine. 176. 

Philopteridae, keys to related genera 
of. H. E..Ewine. 91. 

tSchwartz, E. A., library of, presented 
to Entomological Society. 404. 

Snow, Dr. F. H., veteran entomologist. 
VERNON KeLuoaa. 174. 

Syrphid flies of subfamily Cerioidinae. 
R. C. SHANNON. 38. 

{Taxonomy, limitations of. J. M. 
AupRIcH. 403. 

tVespula diabolica in Brookland, D. C. 
Jini PARKER rOl: 

Wasps, scoliid, from tropical America. 
S. A. Ronwer. 150. 

See also Biology. 
General Science. 

of the University of Michigan. 


AnG: 


*Greenland expedition 
400. 


Geodesy. tReadjustment of the western 
triangulation net. O.8S. Apams. 502. 
Geology. Acanthoceras rhotomagense 


fauna in the Cretaceous of the West- 
erm ‘Interior! Jy BeoREESIDE: Jin: 
453. 

Andes in Central Peru, geology and 
physiography of. D. H. McLaucu- 
LIN. 320. 

;+Earth movements in California. 
DAY 96: 

;Cambrian in the Rocky Mountains, the. 
C.E. Resser. 180. 

+Channeled scabland and the Spokane 
flood. J. H. Bretz. 200. 

tClementia, geologic history and paleo- 
biologie significance of, W.P. Woop- 
RING. 128. 

Colob Plateau, Utah, Upper Cretaceous 


vata Op 


section in. G. B. RicHarRpson. 464. 
jEarthquake problem, international 
attack on. N.H. Heck. 502. 


Elk Hills, California, geology and oil 
developments of. W. P. Wooprine 
and P. V. Rounpy. 271. 

Eocene of Texas, new mollusks from. 
JULIA GARDNER. 362. 


560 


-Geology (Continued) 


{Erosion in San Juan Canyon, Utah. 
EHDA Nisin, 198: 

{Fossil footprints in Grand Canyon. 
C. W. GILMORE. 272. 

tGrand Canyon region, problems in 
history of “RG; Moore, 272: 

+Grand Canyon topography, influence of 
secondary faults on development of. 
F,. E. MattTues. 283. 

{Gros Ventre landslide of June 1925. 
W.G. AtpEN. 123. 

tIdaho, summary of geology of south- 
eastern. G. R. MANSFIELD. 129. 

{Interior of the earth, what we know 
about it. L. H. Apams. 171. 

{Landslide origin of thrust faults around 
Bearpaw Mountains. FRANK REEVES. 
Of 

+Madison limestone and Ellis formation 
in Montana, unconformity between. 
A. J. COLLIER. 130. 

}Metalliferous resources of Silver City, 
Idaho. A.M. Pipgr. 237. 

{Mowry shale, origin of. W.W. Rupry. 
230% 

Ordovician, early, sponge fauna, new. 
R.S. Bassuer. 390. 

tOrdovician shale and associated lava in 
southeastern Pennsylvania. G. W. 
Stosge and A. I. Jonas. 240. 

tOre at deep levels in Cripple Creek 
District, Colorado. G. F. LouGHuin. 
SYA : . 

tOre deposits, regional relations of 
Nevada. H. G. Fercuson. 121. 

TPaleozoic stratigraphy of Idaho. C.P. 
Ross. 125. 

tPalouse soil of Columbia Plateau, 
Washington. Kirk Bryan. 120. 

{Petroliferous provinces of United 
States. A. H. RepFrrELp. 285. 

}Phosphate deposits of Florida. F. L. 
Hess. 321. 

Pleistocene geology and paleontology 
in Florida, recent reports on. O. P. 
RAG (ee 

Pliocene invertebrates from headwaters 
of the Amazon, recent collections of 
late. JuLIA GARDNER. 505. 

TPotash brines underlying Great Salt 
Lake Desert, Utah. T. B. Nowayn, 
274. 


SUBJECT INDEX 


Rockwall at Rockwell, Texas, origin 
of. L. W. STEPHENSON. 1. 

{San Joaquin Valley, California geologic 
features of southern end of. H. W. 
Hoots. 123. 

Sediments, unusual types of, from 
Pacific Islands. C. K. Wenrwortu, 
J. E. HorrMeister and H. S. Lapp. 
275. 

tSpokane flood, channeled scabland and 
the. J. H. Brerz, “200% 

{Stratigraphy of Lake Ainslie Region, 
Nova Scotia. P. D. Trask and K. F. 
MaTHER. 322. 

+Stream pebbles, shapes of, in San Juan 
County, Utah. H. D. Miszr. 270. 

Stream piracy in northeastern Wy- 
oming. W. W. Rusry. 120. 

{Tertiary and Recent freshwater algae 
reefs. W. H. BRapLEY. 232. 

{Thrust faulting adjacent to Highwood 
Mountains, Montana. FRANK REEVES. 
TED. : 

+Tidal streams, meaning of cut-off 
meandersin. M.R.Camppenu. 125. 

{Tintic Standard mine, mineralogy of 
the, W. 1. ScHAtmEre aie 

+Voleanism, engulfment in. T. A. JAG- 
GER. 23. 

tVoleanoes of Japan in 1924. H. T. 
STEARNS. 118. 


See also Geophysics, Mineralogy, Paleo- 


botany, Paleontology, V ulcanology. 


Geophysics. Isostasy in geophysics and 


geology. Witiiam Bowls. 101. 
Machine for measuring depths of deep 
wells. C. E. VAN OrnsTRAND. 481. 
Moon, variation of latitude and motion 

of the. W. D. Lampert. 138. 
+Tides in wells. Paun ScHUREMAN. 
345. 


See also Geology, Physics, Vulcanology. 
Hydrology. +Discharge method of esti- 


mating ground water supplies. W.N. 
White. 238. 


Mathematics. Analytical and _ graphical 


representation of arithmetic, geo- 
metric, and other means. C. EH. Van 
ORSTRAND. 307. 

+Computations, ‘‘fool-proof”’ checks on. 
H. 8S. Rappieye. 501. 

t+Newton, place of, in history of pure 
mathematics. E. W. Woouarpb. 399. 


SUBJECT INDEX 


Meteorology. Tornado, the. W. J. Hum- 
PHREYS. 320. 

Waterspout formation, unusual. 
Heck. 319. 

Mineralogy. Almandite-spessartite gar- 
net from Gwynns Falls, Baltimore. 
Eart V. SHANNON and Forest A. 
GONYER. 584. 

“Blythite’ and the manganese garnet 
from Amelia, Virginia. E. V. SHAN- 
NON. 444, 

Calcite oolites with pentagonal do- 
decahedral form. E. V. SHANNON. 
409. 

7Cesium, source of. F. L. Huss. 124. 

tMetalliferous resources of Silver City, 
Idaho. A.M. Piper. 237. ; 

Natrojarosite from Kingman, Arizona. 
Eart V. SHANNON and Forest A. 
GONYER. 536. 

+Ore at deep levels in Cripple Creek 
District, Colorado. G. F. LouGHutin. 
321. 

fOre deposits, 


N. H, 


regional relations of 
Nevada. H. G. Fereuson. 121. 

Sericite-lazulite pseudomorphs after 
orthoclase from Bolivia. E. V. SHan- 
NON. 388. 

{Tintic Standard mine, mineralogy of 


qhe: OW. T..ScHALLER.. 121. 

Necrology. {Brzz1, Marto. 349. Datt, 
Wittram Hearty. 244, 400. §Man- 
OUVRIER, LEON PIERRE. 212. {TPatT- 
TEN, JOHN D. 402. {SxKinNER, H.S. 
179, 402. Smita, Erwin F. 384. 
SPRINGER, FRANK. 552. SUDWORTH, 
GrorGE BisHop. 356. WatcorTt, 
CHARLES DoouitTLE. 7234, 308. 
foenNanG.  E «Wee 172. SWEENEY, 
Miuton. 552. 


Oceanography. Current harmonic con- 
stants for San Bernardino Strait, 
el ple PDisnEy:. 325. 

{Submarine features in north Pacific 
Ocean, unusual. N. H. Heck. 127. 

Tide at Tahiti, the. H. A. Marmer. 
157. 

Ornithology. +¥Flight line of ducks. 

LINncoLn. 353. 

+Migratory waterfowl in Mexico, con- 
ditions affecting. E. A. GoLDMAN. 
350. 

7Study, bird, in suburbs of large cities. 
T. S. Patmer. 354. 


HEC. 


561 


See also Zoology. . 

Paleobotany. Cycads in Shinarump con- 
glomerate of Utah. E. W. Berry. 
303. 

Paleontology. Acanthoceras rhotomagense 
fauna in the Cretaceous of the West- 
ern Interior. J. B. REESIDE, Jr. 
453. 

Astartella Hall, generic characters of. 
Ge Hi -Girrye) Al7- 
{tClementia, geologic history and paleo- 


biologic significance of. W.P.Woop- 
RING, * 128: 

Coskinolina in America. J. A. CusH- 
MAN. 198. 


Equus laurentius Hay, type skull of. 
Os Po Haye ob: 

Foraminifera in the collection of Ehren- 
berg. J. A. CuSHMAN. 487. 

{Fossil footprints in Grand Canyon. 
C. W. GitmorE. 272. 

Intuonella in America. 
198. 

Mollusks from Eocene of Texas, new. 
JULIA GARDNER. 362. 


J. A. CUSHMAN. 


Pelecypods, two new unionid, from 
Upper Triassic. J. B. RrEsIpE, JR. 
476. 


Pleistocene geology and paleontology in 
Florida, recent reports on. O. P. 
A211. 

Pliocene invertebrates, late, from head- 
waters of the Amazon, recent collec- 
tion of. JULIA GARDNER. 505. 

Pycinodesma, new name for Pycnodesma 
Kirk not Schrammen. Epwin Kirk. 
548. 

Sponge fauna, early Ordovician, new. 
R. 8S. Basster. 390. 

See also Paleobotany. 


Petrology. Analcite-rich rock from Dec- 
can trap of India. N. L. Bowen. 
57: 

tChalcedony, relation of, to quartz. 


W.P. Waite. 344. 

Rocks of Galdpagos Islands. H. S. 
WASHINGTON and Mary G. KeEryss. 
538. 

See also Geology. 

Physics. tBarometric method of measur- 
ing aircraft altitudes. W. G. BrRom- 
BACHER. 75. 

TChalcedony, 
WP. Waite. 


relation of, 
344, 


to quartz. 


5oZ SUBJECT INDEX 


Physics (Continued) 

Compressibility, change of, with pres- 
sure. Lrason H. Apams. 529. 

+Computations, “‘fool-proof”’ checks on. 
H.S. Rappipeye. 6501. 

+Electromotive forces possibly produced 
by the earth’s rotating magnetic field, 
and diurnal variation of atmospheric 
potential gradient. G. R. Wait and 
H. U. SvERpRup. 504. 

7Galvanometer stabilizers, improve- 
ments in. W. P. Wuitr. 22. 

Gravitation, constant of. P.R. Hryt. 
270. 

Gravitation, magneto-electron theory 
of. CHESTER SNow. 457. 

fice, cellulan: “structure! of) by Ee 
Matrues. 126. 

tMagnetic analysis, problem of. R. L. 
SANFORD. 269. 

jMagnetic permeability of iron and 
magnetite in high-frequency alter- 
nating fields. G. R. Wart. 22. 

Mechanical properties of moist granular 
solids: | RG NurrinG:) 85: 

tMercury contact thermostats, new 
method of avoiding lag in. W. P. 
Wuitr, 74. 

+Newton, contributions of, to mechanics 
and astronomy. P. R. Heyu. 400. 

tQuartz, 573-degree inversion of. 
FREDERICK Batss and F. P. PHELPS. 
345. R. B. Sosman. 344. 

{Thermostat, new type of. G. F. 
TAYLOR. 74, 

+Vapor pressure of liquid carbon di- 
oxide. C. H. Mryers and M. 8. Van 
Dusen. 501. 

Plant Chemistry. Free methyl salicylate 
in some American species of Polygala. 
E. T. WHERRY. 191. 

Plant Ecology. Soil reaction preferences 
or) “certam / plant «orders:)) Hay LT: 
WHERRY. 148. 

Soil reactions of saprophytic orchids. 
EK. T. WHERRY. 35. 

Radiotelegraphy. Influence of  low- 
resistivity layer subsoil on forward 
inclination of radio waves. J. E. I. 
CaIRNs. 264. 

Scientific Notes and News. 24, 53, 13 
156, 183, 215, 244, 276, 307, 324, 35 
3J84, 408. 432, 456, 479. 504, 528, 55 


Seismology. {Earth movements in Cali- 
fornia. A. L. Day. ‘96. 

tEarthquake problem, international 
attack on. N.H. Hecx. 502. 

Spectroscopy. tAtomic hydrogen, spectra 
excited by. F. L. Monumr. 75. 

Lanthanum, regularities in are spec- 
trum of. W. F. Mreaaers. 25. 

Technology. {Galvanometer stabilizers, 
improvements in. W.P.WuitTE. 22. 

+Thermostat, new type of. G. F. Tay- 
LOR. 74. 

{Thermostats, mercury contact, new 
method of avoiding lag in. W. P. 
Wuitr. 74. 

Terrestrial Magnetism. tElectromotive 
forces possibly produced by the 
earth’s rotating magnetic field, and 
diurnal variation of atmospheric po- 
tential gradient. G. R. Wait and 
H. U. Sverprup. 504. 

Gravitation, magneto-electron theory 
of. CHESTER Snow. 457. 

Vulcanology. tEngulfment in volcanism. 
T. A. JAGGER. 23. 

jJapan, volcanoes of, in 1924. H. T. 
STHARNS. 118. 

Zoology. tBird study in suburbs of large 
cities. T.S. Parmer. 354. 

tBulb sterilizers, hot water. C. A. 
WEIGEL. 407. 

tDucks, flight line of. F. C. Lincoun. 
353. 

§SElk, southern Yellowstone herd, plan 
for preservation of. 183. 

{Fisheries of Pacific, conservation of. 
B. W. EVERMANN. 242. 

Frog from Tibet, new. LEONHARD 
STEJNEGER. 3817. 

Gorillas in French Congo. C. R. 
ASCHEMEIBR. 241. 

Isacis Serjabin, rhigonemas inhabiting 
intestines of millipeds. J. R. Curis- 
Tim and N. A. Coss. 17. 

tMigratory waterfowl in Mexico, con- 
ditions affecting. E. A. GoLpMAN. 
350. 

tMouse plagues. VERNON BaILey. 348. 

Naobranchia occidentalis on Pacific 
Coast of United States. D. V. ViL- 
LADOLID. 230. 

Race-runner, six-lined-, in District of 
Columbia. C. 8. East. 399. 


SUBJECT INDEX 563 


Zoology (Continued) jSnakes, venoms, and antivenins. A. 
Rhigonema, intestinal nemas of milli- DO AMARAL. 352. 
peds. J. R. Curistre and N. A. Sea new Chinese. A.B. HowE.t. 
Coss. 1%. {Trout propagation by the Bureau of 
jSay, Thomas, naturalist. J. M. Aup- Fisheries. G. C. Leacu. 248. 


RICH. 3650. See also Biology, Entomology, Ornithology. 


i 
if sae N 
ine n't 


Ne lala nus 


TS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND 
PADTRIATED SOCMIEIS. 8 is Woes 

The Anthropological Society. Re ee ae 
The: THisterwal Buciety ee 


The Medical Society. 8 Be st 
‘The Medical Society. 6 Toke re ee 


Phe Houeateuaiy cs ee. 
The Society of Engineers. _ | hee eee: 
ene Mesen nome, | Sete Se oe a 


CONTENTS 


: OrreInaL Papers 


Physics.—A note on the change of compressibility with pressure. Laasox 3 
ADAMS ois ce ees cee Spay he cing Bee coma 6 oe Sawin et 
Mineralogy esate a ete garnet from Gwynns Falls, Baltimore: ‘Ean 

V. SHanwon and : Forest A, GONYER. : 30.6. cit kw as a ee oA 
Mineralogy.—Natrojarosite from Kingman, Arizona. Eart V. Seaon and 


Forest A. GONYER........ Vales. Wee ee hs are aes wee : 
Petrology.—Rocks of Galacsecs idence. 3 ee WasHineTon and Mary 3 
KEeymEs.. cence oeces ee ee ee a vie snl ete elem 538 
Paleontolory po Penida, new name for Pitenodeutis Kirk na Schrammen. ee 
Wepwitt! KIRK if. ke eis ose a en ee Bee es 
Entomology.—New species of SES Lepidoptera of the families Limacodidee 
and Dalceridee. Harrison G. Dyar.................... Vey aes open een 
Screntrric Notes AND NEWS......¢0.e0cceeereecens Sees 551 
OBITUARY..... eeeacee ar ce te ee a eo 552 
INDEX | ne aN 
Author Index ..... opt Bess ced wae We em enag ee emir eee 


Subject Inder iin. Visi ae ico ak og seat Pe ee eee ii waa Wides ss ewe sae 


OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY 


President: ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. — 
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckerMan, Bureau of Standards. 
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic ene. 
Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 


«a 


Vy 
i 
& 


oy 
IAEA: ry 


Ni oy 


© bee Y Op St gt BOT pee ap ger at ve ie d Pr Le ¢ 1h he © ee 
{ SUA MUNA UR RU hh Whe ty He Wim he td fe YBa shew ot Mya’ lay Ys Books tin ater kcre: % 
RAL O Wy WhO 6 RK BD hee Ui al i eee ” eS OU BU ow Leh LA Le ies ee ba ¥ 
ay UA iy LA FA AMA YO Hts He BAL yh be) MAY OOOO RSME Sle bebe & ‘ ah 
SEAR WENN nv ae DOOR tO CM RSAC ANU beds HHEEE I DDE PAREN GP whe hE ¥ 
ATA ba I bs ch why oy GO 8 4h ae ne tae ed byt PEAR O RAT LOE DT Be tl Dt tl nh pe | CV hb htt ihe beth. f , +; 
ARM H NO NE Ye Cae Ra ORICA OC A) AE ca aera A \ 


ee eee eh at ee ee “ 
aris! COE MIE HIV Rae bin 


: ji 
aiesi ‘ns wine toh en en wus WD Ha a bw 
tee — ieee wea ht a HSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES Pa, 

Hea ie i te : ) t 

4 : ye) Ben My nt me ans de ete , + re cys we ese Wr | f 
| ant ‘ent en ata ea teteh ape Huhy aeulh keycna wt » “ 
ty ore RUE che ') 

baat “ae } 

- ” i , H 
ey pak ee atin ony i DN UNOS , 

ss oe 4 Ha-oe pate an a \ ’ ' i! , 1 
aoe ae ei aes en Materettatienth ye ' ¢% 6 Pw * Tet WenH Hohes bs (l a att 
" 4) Mh pen Bie Tet aha? rune te ee Aree) ope ‘ beth pet beh i 

iti 1 lary Se yh Heh bh mat aN hd a np PA AUN ON AR LH my Lune A ae Ta WR 3 9088 01 — 1711 

. “ ‘ gee WD Be fiopid hea @ hob ae t q , i 
: ' stata felt re Sate fave Neha nbn b's Wy we nre Mok (iad Ueki - 

Sa) an ila teatelay a nan "G Vd Asan A NOM RA O eH Hel uk gl At Dy aA ee i! Mey th aly 

Sie “ey wR RE AVAL Me ao 4 DR TAA RUBS ALA Loch UY Mie ! LeRVE WA ant we 
r a] 4 ho i) se he ow TUE MDS HHO DW Dow gg OF Pa VOURRHWOH EEDA HET 
" grey t CHO VCMT EE UATE MEL ME eC wume to bt yt Ne | one ty . 
wr 6 Ve hh eh Oe eb ae berep nes ' We iro | i 
tt ch He "yy , hp ay Syope pr 4 AACA . ph pos bug 
i ) YU Pek Ope ADR A he be LA bed i> | , 

a ’ APRH ERNE He wy We ie } ‘ Pan Pra ‘ - 

r] ¥ % wh OOOO OL RCC a me A 

Ale ess TRO ABET sued Le A AL AR Ci meeetioh Eg t \ ' 

‘ th ms Het Hats te Penk ee yy GN A, yyy VAN \ i 

Baa peeks J NODES te of ‘ SEL SNR ‘ 
Jay oh ey eta Naeem \ Lita Pe Sa tet 4 yar WA Veoh? yy 
yeaiea oat is nay Abie pe lant meas taint cit an ihe eet aN w | i WAT) Ay 
mae ie yy » \ 4 {4 i] ‘h . { nib " . ' 
( te ein He Stel FA Bas} SOC DOOR RIED SCC NNR eta NY WAP AON aaah oa " \ 
i . ’ wre POR CK AN ea . He eee ' er ’ } 
Desh oe Hoy ait Wow at pa ofeinh ys hy a haen phe he Mites ! 

bebe Oh ts why we nate PD RM MN RC aa Lees i , 
‘ aoa dla eee tat an ye Ltt fae A Ape ep ot PREL A EOD Oe EO Lee EOE poe ahs a4 u-h4h) ” 5 { 
er iey we ARM ADA (te uitib MW RSA UNH tly A SUS 4 bib { { hh} ’ 

Ths a atetleety ig CPs ea 4 Biles Ahly yi 4 hhc a ee PAV SA LAA a ie wt meh b nf i er as Sr wi F ‘ 
ery hoki Sop nate he aM a A AC A ay 90 ae he SA Rh f : he > : 
oh ny in ay Paik aiu een Cures NH HI) RNS f A dthep & } bch h A 
enya 45 aCe oC an DL se of s { {> | ‘ 
oie ey Wt, wa ee wri War a ie ; » 
i) ‘ vs) Ri " ‘ ¥ ni Wane KP Wg bet tb ‘a: ehhh AY \ 
Pont ets fi fi ony Mean eh ying ¢ 
ets feu ce ms W Hy \ itm ecu Nt Ne x 
Sakeie i belt tity he ute begin catty wh elaalt i ' } f ' ' 
aft r aM pane 49) KY oan w a Masai b> 

Ch 8 } (is vit Ae aR R RB ERE Cb t bo we 

0 9 1) 408 debit Uf OX PU rbot BS AT Ri) b bf\t ! 

: AL wenus meth iy tite Y Pee tens ) 
‘s basa TATA he rai SUA Nh fo " 4 
Ai : L 

Hore i Hf Ntateitet abet ati tat Wey y 
<a id SS Te. a he P- Nene K " it Lenk ae ; 

a8 * 6 det ") Onn y a t ‘ woe * - 

Hoh 8 Shah w He Hana Wh 14 witht 1 wee NEM i He bu ws f F 

Ab ise q ] ! 4 ‘ . 

hea ¥ Re tg pit /s ve i wey Poon by } 
~ J y: ies ee fits byt} : ‘y ft . , . 

i Ke vy aett iy ot eae é > 

e fey. eed oh» We: " ne 
on \ ¢ mately i 2) gi Aa aS hd hy 7 ' f 

hats rH a ene ae tana Mee eaate nei ele Abe hs Bs : 

Paks a- \ eb ¢ te ! ‘ 

dd saat 5) aly Mola aalg ; et eaves Mears yt Arr 
Weleeis j : St A Wo Py ice: eho Eke b 
bet Hh Barge } x ore 4) Ce eh Meh eS. 4 » 
Aa bio Hind Leama Curae beat ’ ORO 
Wie ue t tA , 

” % : ry be 
Ne R r Pl 
Dit i iA ; 
; aeaey "ayia WN RN 
cork A Teg ih wt Th tt te. hist f ' 
Atte ds Wd ete ce fiteb ht ' 
ape mae IAN CADW { ( 

mikacsute ; aM Acta ‘ "4 > ” 
an tee cp © WR MN Bik ‘ ‘ 
ae Pea i a 

ee ke | 

kts Weed GAN a f 

eo $; Sree > 
Wy, ct ul Ghee ne} 

i Ca A at » 
i eee y } : 
ea MAY 
i lJ x 
Wiha. hee | » 
h , 
, 
KA : \ 
t% iG: Wh i ' r b % 
Ph Greet ere CK sun 
My ie 3 4 £7, tous 
* 
saute i ¥ : ye ‘ 
4 aes J ‘| 
ed y v 
( p $ 
Sah i X 
edit 
i Pyial end vi 
Sai y h ‘ t mht 
i #) NT ky ( wie + 
A, a 
NA) ae : ‘ 
ee i 
( " 
: : & 
BS Sate he ‘ 
bee vy 
“uh » 
ef vy A y \ t 
yy . ve e " al \ 
wan Mn b> 
si dei ry Me ea « 4 
Daa Ss iA a he 7 ae 
Carne , ) ‘ 
i at hits ‘4 A Goeth 4 ? . 
a ‘ ’ 
eee ew ie Nhewte wi ilin \ ’, ' 
" of - v rer 
, 

tapas ii : if at ‘ us 

he ie eae Rehan ae t 
y 5 Sy i > i ’ 

ui aN tale rea i iu Gh i Geb ; 

* “ x 1 * vi 
a ee ee a y 2 . 
anh a a ce myo ‘ eek 
wet } A thy WA ' : 
NRL AN, 5 uaa Aya Mea! wae 
Wehbe Mie tk reat 144 i ‘ ‘ 
Mh ’ ; ont Ie! ts Me \ 

C hers f r ni \ we Armee » + t 

sh we Shatin A Ke Ns ) ‘ 
bah ey mae ay ih t ste ec Li t 
Bate) ; Se So eran ' re k 

yey oe nh e. Sea ak " ’ ' 

wy a a tA aah het “Hi bee rit > 
ete ; 
- BE HEAT okt Bh, tbe | re) at yer powrt . 
y t Wy Te Pe ae Ont oS Ah hwe - rt oe | vow 
WED LTA ED heb bbe bes 
OCR i ef pruer 
He ah! t 
by i t ee 
‘ thresh habe ite itt e te: 
ih ere rb: oO Gide ‘ rt Wd ip ee 
relish lice) vi ' 
r eo wile bbe e poe 
aE RRR ye ' , ven Yr 
HU ba tte : 
eke 
WR Wa)! ‘ 
ayia i 
vhag t ae > 
i eb. yt xi a 
ee wes ne ATL ts 
% a a SOO lyre ee a : 
aN sh eee é 
| ie Wet 7 : 
4 Ca BN 
‘ it " i) 
ee is oN 
. 
A i oe Wit 
i yi Westos tise ity DN <0 
" pg +i faba i Vi bins 
i welt Where fe bole Baio bc) wt ’ ne 0 ‘ 
bh by, ' i 
ke ‘ey ere ld ¥ vert wr os 
nai i ectk \ ‘ 
; i, fa ' i 
RANA fh a ‘ i ‘ita Dd 10H it , f 
b ohh i ' hi + Ae 
cv akc mii ke ’ \ hee ie 
b NL) wee ay Ay tiny) iat cei he We he mre wee oy ¥ y ee 
0 eryshy iy? y? hy Wy ' ' » (ibhus ) 
aan NN ase hye an ” Wha Wine rb W rk aks oh hy als 
Ady Htc tit TASC HOCUS SR RA A 14 Sieh bh bh pb fer ‘ 
thpbng heb bot bin wb pee hi AN ene i pe L brea ht r 
an a Ny yk tik a ' DWE NT ye Yb wb we 
wee IH RV UG heh bo ed Heh arp in ‘ wh eo? 
ie we eth a? LUN Ahh DR he Pippi ‘ ' 
Oey Pepe vy Hie S PROPEL eh hb pat \ ‘ a. 
tan iit aie fb bk bebe 8") toh h A VOY bee ah heh E 
ta ate weie PAL RY POE Om) bem ee 1 ; 
Wye we eh wt " Pehl bib Gh tob be he COs oe rit 
Ha CN Pee hh heer h eh r bee bh PVA ES yin » we 
ite Cou OLS Wei b tl OA I a OF Pe hte he Py t \ 
ey TPA EE eh ea EE BRD MOAT 1h whe Ge eS Bone 
wane hy CO DR bh OD PEAY he he ee te he 
shit Pew yy CT a PEEVE SAVED OV ED CREE PE LUT A BD Bip we UAC eas a 
die eet {sh uray Wetenieih vy Aen 4 x wine ha bib th Vib ah deeb A 5 Dati 
y i b : (US bb Oe HF | 
SRS eh wed ti STN adt ay SOTO St aa » «yay 
oh bh ey ec $40: ALTER DEEN LEA Bh bet Rae eT 
ub Oe whe Re hae Ht Wid ge yi A args ; 
J I ¥ mY + ' ’ iy’ 
} ane te Reatastatt wens we IA bey ny a) ahh Ee Ne 
cy 3s ee ae te " ee , wt ty ¢ POL ERMiE DE ' ; 
ASS LAA et Out th 1 Ye Be He eee May vate Whbrh & 6 neh o